Be fe

a3t}

etgth

=s Bs

dc bebnd- baa te Gee

ee eee

S-86fe-

hd eek ee) ie onte

Tomes

o=e-8

= 8a

ontot

-«

oe Sa

wt eee © & 0-4

me 0-086

tee Ome

> -*

ooe-%

Nesarese-4>* 7 @ 2

Pe)

ek ea

-~_*>

a + ete enter

abode « zea* 335 ry

eigrtic ®

tigi @iel pr)

tits

* Benctut

526%

ee 2.

ore : oe eee eee

+ *-*-e +

rere ® @-a-ee te he

ee. J ea

Perenaceee teatencer ae

Ce ee re 3

tan Mk

de Br beGual:

‘

— moe HR

Tye kere Be Ow Ow Me

jae et. 050—4; rdw is'

etree

serstaeee

aroeee

Ors. Sian

== 0

ame os Bn on %. Oe

Oot O- + oewe-t.

7 bef %

o Beige

vite, Mote tats

. @o%s Be

+pragge Ue

a Gene’

Soce tess =

We Oe he enh wae araetet

Or bet Bete e be He Fon

en 8 OR Pea ee oe

606 Mery Hee chet Be Bete te

Pe erty eee Pr)

Sivitgiscasatit

Ove ee ee

*O-er Brees

Yi ih .

ibs

Lane

. —

7 bv 7

~~ oe

Bi j

Aesth

OF THE

eral SOCIETY.

Part IL—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &c.

CLLL_PPPLPPLPLLLLLLPLPPPPPGPPPLLLPPPVPLVPVPPLLLPLYLS ILLS PIES

No. I.—1868.

SI SLI III SS

Contributions to Persian Lexicography.—By H. Buocamann, Esa. M. A.,

Assistant Professor, Calcutta Madrasah.

[Received 11th April, 1868. ]

One of the greatest lexicographical undertakings which so eminently

distinguish our present time, is Lane’s Arabic Dictionary. The Arabic

student who hitherto had at nearly every step to supply or correct

his meagre vocabularies, finds in it all he can desire. The learned

natives of India who had looked upon Firtizabadf as insurpassable, are

astonished to hear of a Madd i Qamus. England may indeed be

proud of a work which marks an epoch in the history of Arabic

learning in Europe.

We trust that the standard which Lane’s Dictionary has created,

will soon be followed by a compiler of a Persian Dictionary. There

exists no reliable Persian Dictionary. Nothing worth the name has

been done for Persian lexicography since the days of Castelli and

Meninski. ‘This is a matter of surprise, as there are most excellent

sources from whicha good Persian dictionary could be compiled.

The deficiency of all existing dictionaries lies in this, that the compilers,

one and all, have used secondary or tertiary sources, instead of having

recourse, as Lane did, to original and carefully selected native works.

The sources for compiling a reliable Persian dictionary are the

lexicographical works written by Indians. In India, as in Turan,

2 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

Persian has been a subject of study and the medium of education.

The value of the Indian dictionaries is fully acknowledged by the

Persians themselves. Surdri’s Majma’ulfurs is indeed the only dic-

tionary written by a Persian, which acompiler will have to consult ;

and even this book is half Indian. The number of rani lexicographists

is small. The better dictionaries written before A. D. 1400 are

mostly of Turanian origin. The very first Persian dictionary was

written at Soghd. With 1400 the period of the Indian dictionaries

commences, Hach is an improvement upon the preceding ; in each

we find the number of words and quotations steadily increasing, till

we sce them culminating in the Farhangi J ahangiri, which brought

the old Tvrani and Irani dictionaries into oblivion, The practical voca-

bulary, entitled Burhan i Qati’, which has been acknowledged to be the

el whe ery ela

closes the first period, the period of gathering, A. D. 1400 to 1652.

With Rashidi commences the second epoch of the Indian dictionaries,

the period of criticism. The two dictionaries of this period, though

not yet used by Huropean compilers, must be the basis of a critical

dictionary of the Persian language. Rashidi’s Farhang—let compilers

like obedient murids follow this murshid !—is a critical work on all

Indian dictionaries up to the Farhang i Jahangiti, whilst the Sid)

ullughdt by Khan Arzi is the indispensable Vade Mecum for those

who use the Burhan. The Sir4j is at the same time the last dictionary

of note for the classical Persian. Towards the end of the past century

at last, when sufficient time had elapsed since the death of Kalim, the

last poet of the silver age of Persian literature, there appeared the

Muctalahét ushshu’ara and the stupendous Bahar i’Ajam, two works

written by Hindoos on the Isti’mal i Mutaakhkharin or usage of

the writers after Jami, the last, though not the least, of the classics.

The dictionaries of the present age, with the exception of the Ghias

ullughat, deserve no notice. The Shamsullughdt compiled under the

direction of a gentleman whose family is known in Calcutta for

their liberality, and the Haft Quizwm of Lucknow are too full of typo-

graphical errors, to render their use desirable.

We may notice that nearly every province of India can point toa

lexicographist. Bengal is represented by the quaint Farhang 1

Ibrahimi; Bahar by the Kashf; the Dekkhan by the Burhan; the

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 3

North-West by the Adat, “primum in Indis,” the Muayyid and the

Siraj ; Sirhind by the Madar; the Punjab by the Farhang i Jahangiri

and the Muctalahat ushshu’ara ; Sind by Rashidi. Again, four diction-

aries are dedicated to princes, and one bears Akbar’s stamp.

When we compare the lexicography of the Arabs with that of the

Persians, we find some remarkable differences. The Arabs have left

us not only more, but they have also shewn a greater interest than

the Persians for their ancient literature. Their dictionaries delight in

quotations from the ancients. Persian dictionaries on the other hand

abound in ancient words, for which there are no proofs, and for which

it is now-a-days impossible to find proofs. This absence of proofs has

caused varieties of spellings and meanings which are most perplexing.

Many words are hopelessly doubtful. To distinguish such words in

some way or other, is the first duty of a future compiler.

Another difference is this that in Persian dictionaries the language

of the prose is not represented. All quotations are verses. Con-

structions of verbs with different prepositions are rarely, if ever, to be

met with; phrases are never entered, unless they be poetical meta-

phors. Native lexicographists having thus neglected the Persian

prose, modern compilers have still a field left for independent

research,

II.

Mhe sources which are absolutely required for the compilation of a

reliable dictionary of the Persian language, are the following ten—

7, Ad. d2oJ} SoT, written A. D. 1419.

2. Sh. solis,%, written after A. D. 1428 and before

1445,

ra Sass} ot50, written A. D. 1519.

4. Ma. ss 3| j!o0, written A. D. 1593.

BRS. cotike Kia, written A. D. 1608.

6. Sur. cs nytt ee=*, second edition, written A. D. 1629.

| pooh Kiays, written A. D. 1653.

= Sit. ” lay zl, written A. D. 1735.

9. Bh. ee ole written between A.D. 1739 ©1768.

a. Gh. wRUjels, written A. D. 1826.

T subjoin here a list of abbreviations referring to other lexicogra-

phical works, We., mentioned below.

4 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

B. eb wl, written A. D. 1652.

F. (6)r% S2,3, written A. D. 1742.

SHL. wlRU pois, printed A. D. 1806.

HK. eps 2.0, printed A. D. 1822.

V. Vullers’ Lexicon Persico-Latinum, Bonn 1855.

A.A. CoS! wT, by the author in the Bibliotheca Indica.

The Burhan ought not to be used by future compilers except as a

guide for the arrangement of the words.

The sources used by the authors of the ten works which I consider

absolutely necessary for the compilation of a reliable dictionary of the

Persian language, are mostly forgotten. Many of them perhaps

no longer exist; others are only to be found in the libraries of Europe.

The abbreviations in the following alphabetical list of the sources of

the ten shew by whom they were used.

i. (ods ads] 531 Kia, FJ., Sur.

Q. Ma! Ed Che pyrehed| gt} Sio,s, Ad., FJ., Sur,

esp] Cg dmeY! yyaio Wy?

3. sets! Kia,8, FJ. This appears to be another

dictionary than No. 28.

4, Naas! Sof Sie,9, Sh. Mu., Ma. FJ., Sur. Vide

below.

5. oypgldad aU} one olhol Sas, FU.

6. (oy HK} Ki9,9, FJ. Vide 10,

a ebls wla,; G2,» Sir, Bh., Gh.

8 c= * she Si2,9, Gh. Vide below.

9 wartad Gla bax Kia,

costs! Bala, FJ., Sur.

10. BYge A sult Kix Lia,s

das? Gyo] sls eto oss”, Sur., and Ma. who mentions it

as wry lie 4S 5|. The Ma. calls

it (gy dike Bylemd| kas. hence

it may be the same as No. 6.

Al. iF" jie phiowld ecla tio, FJ.,Sur.who found in someMSS,

cole? instead of cojle™.

12. ueties Kays, Sur., R., B., Sir, Gh. Vide

Wales

Lo, 2 weg Joa Elst, Gh. Vide below.

1868.]

14,

15.

a7,

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

Contributions to Persian Lesxicography. 9)

isis ishtes Ka,s FJ., Sur.

wy} pbs a Sia, FJ.

os Bias, FJ.

Wel] yi. Kiss, Ad., Mu., FJ.

aa) dykes Kia,s, FJ.

(ook) Fix ys, Sir., Bh., Gh. Vide below.

retell Un whee Uyhid Ki

exo |yo2 ahai ted ,

psilelwe Kies,

lal eu

pte ort pAlb Bieler Kia ,s

Ahoy) SUS] pls Bald aly 65 6935]

ee hg 9 enty9 915 Ss wT»

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

ee ain, teed eg

c m I ae ies &S,

pow oe ustolee er

wat Lethe Ooo | Koolis .& Kia,s

io’ pled rebel,

parle a a Sia,

syle do J | oes Kiss,

Lake oes” ‘ ae

csasy| Gydene COsas aol 6

"pee Fis 59,

cauelle Shas,

cattle SKia,5,

ile fia,

Sh.,

tions it as Upwokhe HSS 5},

FJ.,Sur. My MSS. of the

Ma. have et trie

Gh. Vide below.

B., Gh.

Mu., Ma. who men-

FJ.

Sur.

Mu.,Ma.,

below.

BJ.

FJ. This is the Kashf-

ullughat ; vide below.

FJ.

FJ. Perhaps also Ma.,

who quotes a dictionary

called in my MSS.

urls Kia, 3,

KJ,

FJ., Sur. Vide

a Sx ule Kiss,

wll) dhe,

A) slhe Gaiad LU! Ca98,

sor 3 cslty! 5153 Sia ,9 }

op ge Tid y9,

owls KaiS Sia,

WLI] KF C259,

la] Bil Zia,s,

BS eS Sowogd oy aU Cob Kid ys

Kidd 9 sort wl see,

| praia land Gin ,9,

pls Wats wuled Ki2,8 ;

Kclials ele Kio 55,

Coa Cay GE,

S)ylyo uy Aentes! tee ~~

ure uy oa” Kays E

ety aS ugnvo SLayos2 w oo” Kio

ee Wakes one, enocbs,

go ti

ephne BLE Liyho ext padlyl Lyre Kid,

fee

ty aS} aulathewx Kia ,s,

Saat une,

(eg Odd ys ofa] LY 42 Kis y3,

“ fe Z- ‘

~: Wars Scary as

Sea

usm Kins,

sone Po is “4 *

Maas) og geo Krdys,

Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

Ma., FJ.

Vide below.

Gh.

Ad., FJ.

FJ.

Mu., Ma., FJ.

Ma., FJ.

Gh. Vide below.

Sur.

Ad., Sh., Mu., Ma., FJ.,

Sur.

FJ.

Vide below. R., B., Sir.,

Gh,

Vide below.

Gh.

FJ.

FJ., Sur.

FJ.

i) ., Sur. who calls it

Ih we kam, to distin-

guish it from No. 28.

Bh., Gh. Vide below.

ype Shed od "a psllee saxo Kis 99,

FJ., Sur.

FJ. This is the Madar ;

vide below.

FJ.

Ad., Sh., Ma., KJ.

Sir.

Ma., FJ., Sur. Vide

below.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 7

64. OtgU] detq0 Kia, Sh., Mu., Ma., FJ.

65. wha} oles 42,3, Ma., FJ., Gh.

The last work is written by Muhammed Badruddin, better known

as Abii Nacr i Farahi, of Farah, a town in Sijistan. The book

which has often been printed in India, is an ancient vocabulary in

rhyme, and is used in nearly every school in India. There exist

several commentaries to it, by esol dy ers wy? o#=” who lived at

the time of Akbar, @le uy) dws, and c59y% lbs,

The above list of Persian Dictionaries does not give the names of

the coy) Kio,5 and the |r) wlWdla Sia,s, two dictionaries

often quoted by the Madar; but I suspect they are mentioned above

under a different name.

Ill.

After having specified the sources of the ten most valuable diction-

aries, I add a few notes on several ofthem. The notes are necessarily

short, as the subject matter of a dictionary is almost entirely indepen-

dent of the character and mind of the compiler. I trust, however, that

the remarks will be of some value, as they are the result of six years’

lexicographical studies, With the exception of Surtri’s Majma’uliurs

the notes refer to Indian works.

1, Lad) Hof.

This Dictionary is compiled by +=” jos wle “4 of Delhi. The

author adds to his name the words Jly oy 9%}, The dictionary

was written in A. H. 822, or A. D. 1419, more than twenty years

after the sack of Delhi by Taimtér. The book is rather a vocabulary

than a dictionary; the first part contains Persian words, and the

second Persian phrases. The words are arranged according to the

first, second, and last letters. No examples are given. For ancient

Persian words, especially for such for which there are no proofs, the

Adat is of some importance. Otherwise the value of the book is

rather historical. MSS. are rare.

2. cetsdl yi Folkd a,

The name of the author is csdyl5 ely? prey! ; hence his dictionary

is sometimes called c.estly3] 2,5. He was a disciple of the famous

saint Sharafuddin Ahmad of Munair, a town in Bahar, to whose honor

the compiler called his work Sharafndmah, He says in the pretace

(metre Mutaqarib)—

8 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

awl co td® dot Kolis ae! ree se 5 gece 8S Ly} ye

“The Sharafnamah of Ahmadi Munyari is a dress of honor, filled

“ with the pearls of the Dari-Persian.” Hence the dictionary is best

known under the name of Sharafndmah « [brahimé. It must not be

confounded with the Farhang i Mirz4 Ibrahim, a later dictionary

used by the authors of the FJ. and Sur.

The birthplace of Ibréhim is unknown. It is however clear that

he was an Indian ; for like the Adat he gives many Hindee equivalents,

and mentions Indian pronunciations of Persian words. He lived some

time in Persia, and has thus been able to add words and meanings

which he heard from natives. He names several times a Shaikh Wahidi

of Shiraz, and an Amir Shihabuddin Hakim, of Kirmén, whose remarks

he enters. Thus

csiless piso eT CUS payed jh Cewel Bleed Cral y qual RULy (Slocis

The dictionary must have been written during the time of Barbak,

who reigned in Bengal from A. D. 1428 to 1445, as it ends with the

following verses (metre Ramal)—

AR ( =

inmd 9 ols e Ello Kirsed 9! yaSd yy ammidy oly elle gla SSssly Phat ys

rudd g sbeale xls a S24 QbaSt 9 yak 2 9 Crmid e Whe} yy Ledly

The work consists of a short treatise on Persian and Turkish

terminations, a large number of Persian words and phrases, interspersed

with afew Arabic nouns and infinitives, and a collection of Chagatai

words. ‘The latter are given separately at the end of each fagl of

Persian words, which arrangement has been followed in the next

dictionary and the Madar.

In using the dictionary we have to look to the first, last, and second

letters of the words. Examples of verses are frequent. The MS. of the

Asiatic Society of Bengal, No. 1832,—by no means a good one—has an

appendix containing the Turkish numerals, and a list of Persian metres.

Asa peculiarity of this dictionary, we have to mention that the com-

piler, though an Indian, follows in the arrangement of the words the

rule of Ufo and JIS. From the time of the introduction of the Arabic

characters up to the time of the poet Jami, the last of the classics, the

Yrani Persian writers used the letter Jis dzal for Jls dal, after a long

A, 1, i (0 ay>), as S53 for o94 bad ; and 2. after every consonant, (9,

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 9

», | excepted, provided that consonant has a vowel, 7. e., after the

S S yao ee Saye, as digte, 9153, bas5 ; but never after diphthongs, as

in 8640; nor after consonants with the jazm ( GySle era 35> ),

as in Ode, 9,5, &e. This interchange between Jis and Ujo was never

extended to Arabic words. Beside the Sharafnamah, Suriri’s Majma’-

ulfurs is the only dictionary in which the rule has been adhered to in

the arrangement of the words.

The dictionary itself deserves the attention of future compilers, as

it has not been sufficiently used. The author is very exact; in his

explanations he pays particular attention to legendary names, especially

those of the Shihn4mah, and to plants and their medical properties.

MSS. are rare.

3. baal) o24

__ This dictionary was compiled A. H. 925, or A. D. 1519, by Shaikh

Muhammad ibn i Shaikh Lad ( 3¥) of Delhi. His object was to

complete the Sharafnamah through the addition of words and phrases

from the Qunyat uttdlibin. Hence his dictionary is more voluminous.

Byery facl is tripartite ; first come the Arabic, then the Persian, and

lastly the Turkish words. The appendix to the dictionary contains

the Arabic, Persian and Turkish numerals, and a small Persian

grammar. Examples of verses occur but rarely.

The arrangement is the same as in the Sharafnimah. Nothing is

known of the author himself. From a remark in the preface we know

that he had two children. The reiguing king receives no praise ; nor

was Ibrahim Lédhi a fit subject for an encomium.

MSS. of this dictionary are numerous.

Ay, cola) Wass

This dictionary was compiled by ’Abdurrahim ibn i Ahmad Str of

Bahar. Itcontains the words of the Sharafnaémah and the Muayyid,

and many Arabic words from the Qurah. The MSS. are numerous.

There exists also a rare lithographed edition of 1264 pp. 4to., which

appeared at Calcutta several decads ago. The following extract is

taken from the preface—

“ Should any one doubt the correctness of a Persian word in my

“ Dictionary, let him look into the Sharainamah, the dictionary of my

10 Contributions to Persian Lewxicography. [No. 1,

‘‘ revered teacher Shaikh Muhammad Lad—May God have mercy on

“him !—the Dastir, the Dictionary by Qazi Nacir uddin Gunbudzi,

“the Qunyat uttélibin, the Dictionary by Fakhr-i-Qawwés, the Dic-

“tionary by ’Ali Bég Bé, the Dictionary by Amir Shihabuddin of

“ Kirman, the Qifiyah-i-Kish, the Lisén ushshu’ara, the Ictilah

‘Cushshu’aré, the Jami’ uccandyi’, and the Dictionary by Shaikh

“ Muhammad Khaghri ( cgy%> ).”

The date of the compilation is not known; the work must have,

however, been completed about the middle of the sixteenth century,

as the author knew Shaikh Muhammad Lad, the compiler of the

Muayyid (A. D. 1519). He also alludes to the Shaikh under “20 GI.

This dictionary gives no examples. The Kashf is of importance for

those who cannot procure copies of the Sharafnamah and the Muayyid.

5. Qabs)) jade

This valuable work which has been very little used, was compiled

by Maulana Shaikh Tlahdad i Faiszi, son of Asad ul’ulama ’Ali Shér of

Sirhind. The year of the compilation, A. H. 1001, or A. D. 1598, is

given in the words els (yes, the tarikh of the book. As the words

are only arranged according to the first and last letters, it is some-

what troublesome to use the book. The Arabic words stand in each

facl before the Persian. The Turkish words are given after the Persian

words. The Arabic words and the examples are more numerous than

in the preceding works. There are a great number of verses marked

32) sad by the compiler.

The author makes occasionally critical attempts, and mentions

Indian pronunciations of several Persian words.

The following extracts from this dictionary will shew that the com-

piler was a poet. His Masnawi entitled Ndz 6 Niydéz must not be

confounded with a Masnawi of the same title by Baqai (No. 1240

Asiatic Society Bengal). )

# oS USAT (gt Ange” pido Garry « ra Le 99) cd? law p93

Sys Rt ’ “5 « %

POD fy Gyldvc gS AS] # DOM wyelwe 59 72 Crwlyd ty dy wT Woe

rar sete z ” - . . 4

3 Bhidyd yale pbs Je 3h K23 5S os 2} gm wlasve Deen) Sle * ose

N 8dy9T 5hs 5 56 epdo GUS Sy 5a) wole cyt

The metre of the compiler’s Masnawi is the same as of the Shirin

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 11

Khusrau, Uacl2o ojiclao ulicleo, as will appear from the following

quotation*

oy soe Low y3 bdo gale &F 39,20 was ab wylaif Wx) Wee

0 82 54) « caus! Sie Li) 0" eyiho yo GM aad ag lig

IRIS pty Wott? pty 097 85 lade es Kid OS ola Jo

MSS. of this dictionary are as common as those of the Mu. There

exist, however, bad copies, where in the eU} eo HUY! Uos under

(L22); 51, the compiler is confounded with Faiszi, the great Indian

poet. In good MSS. we find—

; * dye” wlbles w5)6 obs Las gf OS ust Lars} 521

Bad MSS. read—

3 wale aS kale al) Keo) Lian dy yal pe 9 as sf OS ws

a Sly ode OH 4 oy slagl 51 239

and give also verses of the poet Faiszi marked sJy4t. The reference

to ’Allémi is quite impossible, as he outlived his brother Faiszi. The

confusion, I dare say, is to be ascribed to ignorant copyists who

were mislead by the takhallug Faiszé. The compiler clearly gives the

name of his father, Ali Shér, of Sirhind, whilst the father of the poet

is Shaikh Mubarik of Nagér. It is also evident from the preface that

the compiler was a pious Muhammadan, which the poet Faiszi was

certainly not.

It is noticeable that the book does not contain a single reference to

Akbar.

The four MSS. at hand have a Khitimah containing grammatical

rules. One has the following remark—

Bld Grable) wll ae 9 whed slo est! gs esl ye? Wl

pee WA) 4.0 yobs wel e* we ee ede en itl Oo” oy 5 cole oka

— Fane yo 9 SMIgy J alt

at which place the writing is so 8+ J, that it cannot be read.

* Vide also Vullers’ Persian Dictionary, II. p. 518b. In the article wlare

correct Wis) LAS Gala to wal) LAS Wale, the author of the pre-

ceding dictionary; and for the verse of Mulla Salik of Yazd, which in Vullers

has no metre, read (metre Ramal)

"OiSpilaive Spilgd dex! bug} Ge wlyo y ob Uj 4 Ant pidlas)

12 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

6. coy Ure es

The first edition of Suriri’s Majma’ulfurs appeared in A. H. 1008,

nine years before the next dictionary. As thirty years later, A. H.

1038, a second edition appeared, we shall first notice the Farhang i

Jahangiri.

7. us Glo eka 75

The title of the dictionary is a misnomer, and ought to be Farhang

2 Akbart. The compiler is Nawwab ’Aszad uddaulah Mir Jamaluddin

Husain i Anji. He is mentioned in the Ain i Akbari, p. 226,

as one of Akbar’s courtiers, holding the office of a sored, or

commander of nine hundred, a position not necessarily military,

for which he received a monthly salary of Rs. 7100. He appears

to have been a favourite of the emperor, as in 1604 he was sent to

Bijapur to bring the daughter of ’Adil Shah to Agra, where she was

married to Prince Danial.

From the preface of the dictionary it appears that the labours of the

compiler extended over thirty years. A. H. 1000, or thirteen years

after the commencement of the compilation, when Akbar was at

Srinagar, Mir Jamdluddin received the order to complete his dic-

tionary. Not only did Akbar grant sums for the purchase of manu-

Scripts, but he even called learned men from Peria to assist Mir Jamalud-

din in the compilation. The historian Badéoni indeed tells us that many

a word was investigated in Akbar’s majlis 1 khac, the emperor himself

evincing that taste for the study of words which Muhammadans so

eminently possess. Forty-four dictionaries of those specified above, nine

others of which neither the title nor the author’s name were known,

commentaries, works on science, Zand and Pazand books, the whole

Persian literature, yielded the words for this work. The most ancient

dictionaries, of which nothing but the title seems now-a-days to exist,

were in Mir Jamaluddin’s hands. Among them were—the dictionary of

Abi Hafe of Soghd, who according to some made the first Persian

verse ;* that of Asadi, Firdausi’s teacher; the vocabulary of Hakim

Qatran, the quaint poet; &. Akbar unfortunately died A. H. 1014,

or A. D. 1605, before the dictionary was completed; and when at

* Vide the author’s edition of the Persian Metres by Saifi, p. 4.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 13

last, three years later in A. H. 1017, it made its appearance, the

compiler thought fit to call it in honor of Akbar’s successor [arhdng

i Jahéngirt. The migra’ (Hazaj i musaddas)

EE WMI yy) Bay 2 5

is the tarikh of the completion of the work.

The preface of the dictionary is followed by an Introduction contain-

ing twelve chapters—

On the boundaries of the land (pls.

On the Persian language.

On the letters of the Alphabet, and the rule of Jty and Sts.

On the arrangement of the words in the Farhang i J ahangiri.

On the 043 gaid adopted by the compiler.*

On the interchange of letters.

On pronominal affixes.

On certain words, as yo, 4, ly3, 3, _»°-

On terminations, as ¢J, 0, us*®, els, &e.

10. On the use of the letters %, 5, vw, S, u, |, &c., as far as

they are used for inflections.

f ios oe EY

11. On the spelling of certain words, chiefly compounds.

12. Onthe Ucly ors.

The dictionary itself contains only single Persian words and such

Persian compounds as have no iszdfat. The Ahdtimahis divided into

five chapters or doors—

1. Figurative expressions.

2. Compounds with or without the Iszéfat, of which either one

or both words are Arabic.

3. Words which contain any of the Oise Gy a, viz, U, le, ole,

ols, Lb, LB, was, GL.

4. Zand and Pazand words.

5. Certain rare words, chiefly proper names of towns, persons, We.

Among the words, a few terms are found of the dialect of Shiraz,

to which town the compiler appears to have belonged. The Zand

* Hastern lexicographists describe the spelling of words, to avoid mistakes.

Thus the w is called Som 4, the w with oNE dot; and as it can now no

longer be mistaken, the letter is called OAR muqayyad fettered, Hence oss

means the system of descriptive spelling.

14 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

and Pazand words form a peculiar feature. They are interesting

both for the Zand scholar and the historian of Akbar’s reign. The

principles of toleration which no king before Akbar had dared openly

to confess, had even laid hold of the philologic mind of the king’s

subjects, and for the first time did the words of the worshippers

of “the fire which Muhammad extinguished,” find a place in a

dictionary, the compiler of which was moreover a Sayyid of the

purest blood. Merely to flatter Akbar who, though a Sufi in his heart,

was a Parsee by his rites, could not have been the compiler’s sole

object. Curiosity had caused some of Akbar’s courtiers to learn

Sanscrit, and the same curiosity taught a philologist to look upon the

words of another sect of infidels as things worth knowing and

registering. This is proved by the spontaneous remark made by

the compiler under )sf—

853 wa yo 85} wloly jt oo pb wil edly 6 pate 2)

BRD 9 LS) 10 ype ge Coley ney! wy GUS it cose & Posy yy!

ys? ama) isan ols (Awe g| os} 5! ce) 0.9 d9 ry? wulss hee eles

US Ket KR yy AF LW 1g o pidioye Cas? gh ol Gas

O35 Cy) 51,3 ge gly awl ce riaedy wT x2 3! Koo LR jl» os} 5!

Z| dit? dbyQiw yao Clo p22 oT Owe ho 5S ast Lydd Ogedio

‘‘T knew an old Persian, a Zoroastrian, who possessed some parts of

‘“‘the Zandavesté. As I have a passion for collecting Persian words,

“and asno book enjoys a greater authority for Persian than the

‘‘ Zandavesta, I often met him for the purpose of investigating some

‘words; and indeed most of the Zand words which the Khatimah of

‘‘ my dictionary contains, have been extracted by this Zoroastrian from

“the Zendavesté. Whenever he came across the word of in reading

‘‘to me from his holy book, he pronounced it ddur, not ddzar, &e.

In another place of his dictionary the compiler mentions a Zoro-

astrian of the name of Ardshér. Perhaps it is the same. Akbar had

expressly sent for him from Kirmén, as will be seen from the

following extract—

wales gh Eto yo 4S EsweS™ 5! 3d yt! oa # & # & ply!

jt Syhaoy Cpraly? 5! Lgxlaro ne wilt! GaRs? es! Was” 4aT ge

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 15

The editor of the Burhan gives likewise the Zand words ; but, as far

as I know, he is the only Muhammadan lexicographer who has thought

it worth while to copy them.

The order of the words in the dictionary is at first sight bewildering,

They are arranged according to the second letter. Thus the first Gb

contains all words whose second letter is alif; the second bab those

whose second letter is ~ bé,and soon. Within each bab, the words are

again alphabetically arranged. For example, 141, wo see ia, will

stand in the same bab, the ty SL; but 31041, will stand before, and

Woys after, the word Ais by, because c» sin and G& gdf stand in the

alphabet respectively before and after the o fé.

MSS. of the Farhang are numerous. A good MS. may be obtained

for 40 to 50 Rupees. Our Society possesses two very good ones;

No. 611, marked with the muhr of Tippti Sultan, is very correct.

The worth of the dictionary is so generally recognized, that not only

the general term ‘‘ Ze Farhang”’ is used instead of Farhang « Jahdn-

girt, but that the sources from which it was compiled have nearly all

sunk into oblivion. For the pre-classical and classical times of the Per-

sian literature, it is the completest dictionary and the richest mine of

quotations. The Burhan is the Farhang without examples. Hven the

Turkish- Persian dictionary which Vullers has used, is chiefly based

upon the Farhang, whilst the dictionaries of Rashidi and Khan Arzié

are intended to correct its mistakes.

Mistakes in a dictionary are, on the whole, of less consequence, than

mistakes in works on science; for supposing one of the words be

wrong, no one would find it used by authors. Mistakes in meanings are

more serious; and in this regard, it is well that the Farhang has been

examined, partly by Surtri, but thoroughly by Rashidi and Khan

Arai. On the other hand, it was unfortunate that the Burhan, which

through the printed editions of Capt. Roebuck and Vullers’ Lexicon

Persico-Latinum, has become best known in Europe, appeared before

the critical labours of Rashidi and Khan Arzi, so that every mistake

of the Farhang has been over and over again printed, or improved

upon. The chief fault. of the Farhang is this, that he too hastily

abstracts particular meanings from the verses which he quotes. Hence

the danger to which compilers are exposed that use the Farhang with-

out giving his examples, as Burhan and Vullers have done.

16 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

8. LS) py eos”

(2nd edition.)

The name of the author is Muhammad Qasim ibn 1 Haji Muhammad

of Kashén in Yran. Suréri is his takhallug. The author is also

known as a poet and a commentator ; his Arabic commentary on

Sa’di’s Gulistan deserves attention. The first edition of the dictionary

which appeared in A. H. 1008, or A. D. 1600, is based upon sixteen

dictionaries, including the Adat, the Sharafnamah, and the Muayyid,

but is considerably smaller than the second edition which appeared

thirty years later in 1038. Those who make use of Surtri must

carefully ascertain, whether they have before themselves the first or the

second edition, as MSS. of both exist. This seems to have been

overlooked by the Burhén. Though a very careful compiler and

professing to have used Suriri, Burhain does not give all words and

meanings that are in the second edition of the Majma’ulfurs.

The MSS. of the second edition contain two prefaces. The second

preface which commences with the verse (Hazaj i musaddas)

cord ty 33 AA opt cor Catll GE OBS

“May the Majma’ulfurs of Suriri be indispensable to critical

compilers,” is very short, and stands in the MSS. which I have seen,

before the original preface. Surdri’s second edition was caused by

the appearance of the Farhang 1 Jahdngiri, a copy of which, as late as

in 1038, was brought to Suriri from Hindustan. From it, as also

from two other dictionaries, Surtiri has largely extracted. From the

respectful manner in which he speaks of the Farhang, we might

conclude that he lay under certain obligations to its author. He

must have known him ; else he would not call him

gretalew Glad] crate 9 webs wb ast 9 Sg UI leo oly?

#9 ene er] lee slo obs stds 9 wollte let wryly

—titles fit for a king.

He passes 27 silence over the blunders of the Farhang ; and if on

two or three places he dares openly to differ in the meaning of a word,

he modestly says—

awd! ahs 5) bigh (is ight? cps! SF dae yo WAR Cyst ble 9

or words to this effect, although he would not so easily let off other

authors.

1868. } Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 17

Future compilers of Persian dictionaries will do well carefully to

compare each word given in the Farhang with the same in Suritri,

and remember that wheneyer Surtiri has left out a meaning or a

whole word given by the Farhang, there is, to use Rashidi’s language,

a Usliccls.

Suriri seems to have been acquainted with Turkish, as he mentions

among his sources two dictionaries written in that language. The

quotations are very numerous. ‘As Surtiri is an Iranian, his spellings

and pronunciations differ occasionally from the Ttirani Persian of

the preceding Indian lexicographists. His adherence to the is

and J{s rule has been mentioned. Instead of a final Wl kdf, he

often has a ¥ gf; thus he writes 4! ashg a tear, Kew sirishg a

drop, instead of £14! ashk, &c, Instead of ~~! asp he writes ~~»! ash.

His arrangement of the words is inconvenient, as it is the same as in

the Madar.

Surtiri appears to have died in Hindtstan during the reign of Shah-

jahén, as will be seen from the following extract from the khatimah

of the valuable work MWir-dt ul ’Alam; vide Morley’s Catalogue of

Historical MSS., p. 52 :—

dig joe) @ 8007 dig) SEAT myo, EI gle! Esa

C5yay Kids oh OF Ui eos e dL WU, at yo Soyo,5 AU) ery dayio

ove cuesly gl we rms} lA ost sity yh isi

BLBSS we Sl coled 9 pth: — OBL AS Gyo Kw 5) Odeo yl

“ Suriri of Icfahan came to Hindtistén during the reign of Shah-

*jahaén, Soon after he left for Mecca, but died on the road. The

** Majma’ulfurs, so famous under the name of Parhang-i-Surtv?, is

“written by him. The following verse is taken from his poems

(metre Hazaj) :*—

* Icfahin is a mistake for Kashin. The verse is a fine example of the

poetical figure called Caml ated! thém uttandsub; vide Garcin de Tassy’s

La Rhétorique des Nations Musulmanes, p. 101. Poets compare their tears to

orphans, because both are uncared for and alone, Orphans grow up to be

thieves and murderers (cst); hence Yat#m means also the same as

rahzan. But tears also are ists or 83s T Usd, and flow from the eyes

(9h oe 3! *, whilst robbers are daring and wamindful of their lives,

(OSS y0 o9d yww 51 ghey 3,103 a9 poo 31 Loyd.)

18 - Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

‘ Pear my tear ; for it is a wicked orphan, a tyrant, a reckless one.”

MSS. of Surtri’s dictionary are scarce ; the excellent MS. preserved

in the Fort William College Library was bought at the high price of

Rs. 100.

The title (wtiew=? means cxy? wi ewe @es*. The first

edition was dedicated to Sultan Abul Muzaffar Abbas Bahadur Khan,

king of Persia.

Se sits whl) eos”

This dictionary was compiled at Delhi in A. H. 1053, or A. D.

16438, by Ni’matullah al Husain{ of Shiraz. His takhallug is ses

wacli. In his preface he praises Nawwaéb Makramat Khan, a Vizier

of Shéhjah4n, to whom the word (t& refers. The author has not

specified his sources; but on examination it will be found that- the

dictionary is almost the same as the second edition of Surdri, some-

what shortened, with a few meanings from the Farhang i Jahangir.

Mhe introduction contais a small Persian grammar likewise copied from

the Farhang. The book is a fine example of wholesale plagiarism, and

ig therefore deservedly but little known. MSS. are very rare; the

MS. of our Society, No. 304, is very fair.

The arrangement of the words is the same as in Surtri. Vullers’.

F. occasionally quotes this dictionary, as under dle.

This Dictionary is well known. The first edition was printed in

1818 at Calcutta by Captain Roebuck, and the third and last, with a

few corrections, in 1834 by Hakim ’Abdul Majid. The name of the

compiler is Muhammad Husain of Tabriz ; Burhan is his takhallug.

He completed the dictionary in A. D. 1652, or A. Ho 1062, as

indicated by the tarikh ebb vl, eb JUS, and dedicated it to a

contemporary of Shahjahan, Sultan “Abdullah Qutbshah of the Dek-

khan, where for atime he must have lived. Hence he prefers Dekhan

synonyms; thus under pbb) he says :—

HP odkls gail 85 Oby9T 0p) Codhd ed wpa 3! Ly OF

where the FJ. has—ozTy MayS 9h 9 Cyl tp] 4 ig ddo es whe 31

Burhén’s object was to compile a practical vocabulary without giving

examples. In adopting the order of words as followed in our

dictionaries, he arranged them more conveniently than any preceding

1868.] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 19

lexicographer had done. Nearly all subsequent dictionaries follow

Burhan’s arrangement. His sources were the FJ., the first edition of

Sur., the Surmah i Sulaimani and the Cihéh uladwiyah. MSS.

of the last two are not obtainable here; but they cannot be

very valuable, as the Burh4n contains nothing which is not in the

Farhang or Surtivi. Burbdn is a careful compiler; only a few words

that are given in the Farhang, appear to have been omitted. Asan

example I may mention &=3 pakhtah cotton, which the Farhang gives

OSL daly crite Jstl. If Burhan had omitted the useless meanings

of the Farhang, his compilation would be more useful than it is.

The printed editions of Capt. Roebuck and Hakim ’Abdul Majid are

accompanied by appendices of words not given in’ the Burhan.

These appendices which are known under the name of way wh

Muthagat i Burhdn, ave not written by Burhan, nor are they found in

numerous MSS. of the dictionary; but were madeunder the direction

of Capt. Roebuck from the works of several lexicographers of the

18th and even of the beginning of the 19th century. They are

untrustworthy and full of the most glaring blunders. Vullers has

embodied them; but we trust that no lexicographer after him will use

them. Whatever good they contain, will be found in the original

dictionaries written after Burhan.

Burhian’s dictionary has produced in India a good deal of critical

discussion. During this decade, a book was printed in Delhi, written

by Asad ullah Khan, known also under the name of Mirza Naushah

and, as a poet, under the takhallue of qJls, The author is the best

Persian writer which India now-a-days possesses. We have from his

pen a collection of letters, called 7 a, a Diwan, a historical book

on Indian kings, entitled jyes! yt, and also a book written in pre-

classical Persian on the Indian mutiny of 1857, entitled ssiiwo.

The name of the book in which he attacks Burhan, has the title

wley eb. It has seriously damaged his reputation as a critical

scholar. Throughout the book he is abusive, and even obscene.

Burhién whom he styles shee 9 or CAT} 05% Wl, is throughout repre-

sented as an independent lexicographer, although Burhan in his preface

distinctly says edly B eww) Vt Gly! EU 4 whe ala ps. Hence

most of Ghalib’s attacks are easily refuted by turning up the Farhang

or Surdri. But his book is also full of wilful misstatements, whilst

20 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

some of hig etymologies are even from a native point of view unscholar-

like. He has been well taken to task by Agha Ahmad ’Alt, of Dacca;

one of the Persian teachers of the Calcutta Madrasah. His reply is en-

titled wa, ds 90 Muayyid 1 Burhdn, and was printed two years ago at

Calcutta. The writer shews a spirit of critical enquiry and scientific

truthfulness, which is but rarely met with in native writers. Some of his

articles, as (=2)Ly!, 997, (sit, &e., are well worth reading. An index

has lately been added by the author. Future lexicographers will do

well to obtain a copy of this book.

From a perusal of this reply, it appears that of the four hundred

words which Ghalib attacked, about thirty are Burhan’s own

blunders, and sixty others must be called doubtful words, because

they are given in the Farhang and Suriri without proof. Se-

veral other mistakes have been discovered by the author of the

Siraj (vide below); but on the whole, the number of mistakes

made by Burhan himself is so small, as not to endanger his re-

putation of a careful compiler. A few were also corrected by Capt.

Roebuck in the foot notes of his printed edition. halib’s rejounder

which appeared in 1867 under the title 588s, is a mistake. He

tries in vain to shift the ground by discussing extraneous matter, and

thinks to defeat his opponent by giving on the last page of his books

the seals and facsimiles of several influential men, even Nawabs, living

at present at Delhi, who, he says, agree with his statements. The

Agha’s second rejoinder, entitled Shamshér 1 téztar, is in the press.

MSS. of the Burhd4h are numerous, There exists also a Turkish

translation of it.

11. Kodsary Siz

This is the first critical dictionary. It stands unsurpassed. The

name of the author is Mulla ’Abdurrashid of Tattah ( &i¢3 ) in Sind.

Other lexicographers, especially the writer of the Bahar i ’Ajam, call

hitn &U} &ea) oa. He completed his dictionary in A. D. 1653, or

A H. 1064, as shewn by the tarikh (metre Ramal)

pile cgord Kidd ob Ue ey 3! os gv mins

The author is well known as the compiler of the Muntakhab, the

most popular Arabic dictionary in India, which in 1635 he had

dedicated to Shihjahin. When the Persian Dictionary appeared, the

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 21

king was the prisoner of his perfidious son Awrangzib, for whom

Rashidi has no words of praise ; for at that time Aurangzib had not

acquired that odour of sanctity which pious Muhammadans acknow-

ledge by a SU} Sa), a yS csleo never bestowed upon any of the

preceding Moguls.

There exists also a rare Risdlah written by ’Abdurrashid, entitled

wlyyr0 WJlssy, He was certainly one of the best scholars Hinddstan has

produced. His Persian dictionary, though less known, cannot be too

highly valued ; it is so full of original research, that no Persian scholar

ought to be without a Rashidi. As a compiler ’Abdurrashid is most

careful ; he rarely copies doubtful words from other dictionaries without

removing the doubt ; and when he is unable to do so, he plainly states

that he does not know the word, or adds a eo} Uo col uly or a

wl &Ui,. Nor does he hastily condemn. If he has reason to condemn,

his proofs are convincing. He does not abuse the preceding lexicogra-

phers ; and when he does call the authors of the Farhang and Surtri

Uslé ghdfil, we expect from the nature of the case a stronger epithet.

The arrangement of the words is the same as in the Burhan,

although it does not appear, as if he had known that book. He chose

that arrangement, because from experience he was satisfied that it

was the best. The figurative phrases are given at the end of each

facl. Rashidi has not specified his sources. Nor was this necessary,

as his sole object was to correct the Farhang and Surtri, which he

acknowledges to be the best dictionaries existing. Occasionally he

quotes a book written by, or entitled, .tel~, Its author is not

known to me, but his remarks are so shrewd, that lexicographers

would do well to secure a Samani. The book must have been written

after Suriri’s second edition. From some of his remarks it appears

that Rashidi was acquainted with Roman Catholic ceremonies. This

may be traced to the fact that his birthplace was for some time in

the hands of.the Portuguese.

The following passage taken from Rashidi’s preface defines the

object of the dictionary and gives at the same time an idea of its

usefulness—

Dyk GY! 9 Cry? 2) Krytvo j] Ghd 9 95 9 VS 3 Azo

wee &F oy 19850 o> us | cside| ites ly yy) OAS Gy) OBO > J | das

22 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

KT gl dvayd pi y oid ots! USE] 5 pal 65 ote cyl 5? dy!

bY y So wy las dtl ds] $5 S ak oe Ja Jo [-Sids3 99 wt wla%-o

a wl FI err» » Ba e= a) eae % Ai lb y § sSiv0 ylesty cla?

wy wilt whys iol wy led ans AST aque #518 9S oul sSba esilee

wy lat ar aSIT we» awmndd ey? aS SF 9 94M &ani3 9 MS yy5 @9

gor S10 OBS SF po La Oho SSO OM ¥sd2ivo lel, BOS | go elas

fa" 535 SK, yp cdary orig By coin? s 550 colt wll

Oifgs Lavo Shy 9 eset 2 mo co liy ly Pee 3 wir 9 wy ly cor

oe Colas # phe con ya JS 9 awl _yhtnas cosa" sca Jd ortls

22839 5ST pis? 9% O94 ayhe0 wylet ws Br) &S awe | bls , + aS

Why xl asa &S 59 5 wt dbo 4 ty 9 gts wl? 4 ells slg why wolet

aS a i208 5,6 wrisd dd (Sgr sa oy) Mio ORS 9? glasoo} ots a—>*)

bos” Col} 99 7% 9 sit lf pres BS Geheekyou BSF fla g ew} 550

Ctehoy OF flay dS 5 ya) FSS BS roms B95 eshte &5 85.25 ye 9 wt

cyl walo Ed®O 99 pt? wield anol dl4¢0 sly sy oj if aes 3S

59S 8395 & 5 Sed Copa Kia ys 9 9 ST piace” iQ (356 sayS ee 4 ytd

eshte &S ae EDS Bios hg als bly 00 Sly cols? » ry coi sls ing $997

pre? awe! re SRa IOs 5ST she OM) wow wlygdac &S rao| (shew >

wls 3533 85 ASRS As EN bias 303 dy Oo. ie) pls wy? sts 9 useyl usls

las ls $53) ASIF (flag rae! glo ister I9 9 59,20 Cold g Kape™” £15 pends

&S25 oad isis us 9S 3 W552 &_ =) 95 Bia Jo 9 rmmd? p& ls 3y>9°

Cawof Waar ils 9 S25 Joo! cghte! e223 as 3 Laas Js! ) ot

or sae Mv od OO gS 395 Ovo &S lane! baad lds ost»

o<= 39 9 ol? Colas SbyS (hee REL g OI} SOY gd UG y wot Game

cos? 9 elu Ee) er? eee) det ots wd ao ey ust ye

ees cs ly psy Qty g Sila y dls wel eshte! is ust g Ly con 3

ra aes g Ktawe} lon csi ety 38 PY | Jbvo 3 wr? os Red

ds? Bs hSe wens? 65 ad sibs Tite la yy by bol wlan end wd 9

og slab) Edo sy 5S) Cys Siagt Sage) olyst Sythe Siayd Gb 5)»

“? Abdurrashid of Tattah, the son of ’Abdulghafar, of the descendants

of Husain, originally of ‘Madinah, who is known for his shortcomings

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 23

and sins, and who has sipped a hand full from the intellectual fountain

of the poets of Persia, states as follows— |

T have examined the Farhang i Jahdngfri and Surdri, and consider

them the best dictionaries existing. But they also contain much

that is wrong in matter and principle.

1. Both authors have-enlarged their dictionaries by quoting as

proofs, useless verses, and repeating them on several places.

2. They are not sufficiently painstaking in ascertaining the correct

form of words, their vowels and meanings.

3. They enter occasionally Arabic words, and omit to state that

the words are not Persian.

4, Both often enter the same words on different places, but wrongly

spelt, or even mistake them for separate words. Thus words occut

spelt with ao bé andaw pé; withaw téandaw nin; with a SJ)

kdf and a$ gaf ; with a Qf shin and a cy sin ; with a 5 2é and a *; zhé

and ayré. Such mistakes are especially frequent in Surtri, though

less in the Farhang.

Besides there are actual blunders, as shall be shewn below. And

curiously enough, both compilers confound words commencing with a

J) hdf and a J ldm, with a » wdw and a ) ré, and other letters

which it is almost impossible to mistake. As an example I may

mention the word LS gurdz, which has in Suriri the following

meanings--1, a certain disease. This is a mistake for the Ar. 3155

kuzdz. 2, a kind of vessel, also called ES tang. This is a mistake

for the Ar. 31,5 kurdz. The Farhang again enters jly5 hawdz, with a

awdw instead ofa ré. 3, a stick to urge on cattle. This is a mistake

for jlxS guwaz. Or, the Farhang gives a word wl?,3} 2érfdn [or

according to some MSS. zirfan], the moon. This is a mistake for the

Arab. WG,3) zibirgin. Again, both the Farhang and Surari give

5) béf and 4355 kif; but the former is wrong; or aes and ge

squinting, the latter being wrong. Similar mistakes are— “a5

naujabah and S53 beta a torrent; cpsely pdghdsh and rgeb

nighdsh, a dive ; = nakhjad and = bakhjad, dross; _y* hasar

and ywe masa, ice ; con haidakh and eon baidakh, a swift horse ;

dlsgy pahndnah ad Ko mahndnah, a monkey; Wwe., as shall be

seen below. Such mistakes are more numerous in Surdri than in

the Farhang.

24 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

I have generally collected the various forms of spelling under that

word which, according to the proofs quoted, appeared to be the correct

form. Whenever a word appears to be doubtful, it is certainly of

no use to pass over it. Let people only look up carefully.”

Rashidi’s dictionary is accompanied by an excellent Introduction

which forms the basis of the Persian Grammar by ’Abdul-Wasi’ of

Hansah, a book which is read in most Indian schools, The first part

of the preface which contains the usual praises to God and Muhammad,

is written in ancient Persian, and is one of the finest prefaces known

to me. There appears to be no &l& to the dictionary, although

Rashidi says in the preface—

Ks3ld 9 GL oie » Bordo Ely 5? ere} edtive GUS cyl y

At least the four MSS. which I have seen, do not give it, but end

abruptly with the last word (sdlas yélag. The Khdtimah is several

times alluded to in the Dictionary ; thus under | aba sowp (or bd

according to Sh., Mu., Ma., FJ.) he says*—

* dylay GUS Keil yy Wht plus} eas

MSS. of this dictionary are rare; the MS. of our Society (No. 76.)

is in a bad condition, although with the exception of the preface, it is

pretty carefully copied.

* There are some curious blunders connected with this word on the first

and fourth pages of Vullers’ Dictionary. Vullers has on p. 1.—

LT jus, jusculum. This form with the madd is in no other Dictionary beside

F., and may therefore be struck out. 2) potio, potus. Not to be found in any

Persian Dictionary, 3) part. admirandi mirum. This is a blunder for Ly aya.

And on p. 4.—

SS coh (patres fauces constringentes) met, gaudium et voluptas; 2)

aerumna ( we ) mundi; 3) gaudium de inimico mortuo, B.

First, this word is not in B., but in the Appendix of B., and therefore doubtful.

Secondly, the Persian Dictionaries spell the word ohT without a madd, colt

{bai,and derive it from abé soup. Ad. and Ma, give also poh and

Bou ya ps col} ; hence jusculum fauces contringens, and met. the surfeiting

joys of this world.

Thirdly, the meaning aerumna ( we ) mundi is the blunder of some inatten-

tive copyist for la)» in n’am t dunyd, the joys of this world.

Fourthly, the preceding word in Vullers, ceghs cosh aba ti ’alaw?é, is a blun-

der for dbdi ’ulwé,

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 25

12, OlU elyw

13. Laan ebe

Both dictionaries are written by Sirdjuddin ’Ali Khan, poetically

styled 93) A’rzt, of Akbarébad. He is the best commentator whom

India has produced. His commentaries to Nizimi’s Sikandarnémah,

the Qacidahs of Khaqéni and ’Urfi, and his ¢y* to the Gulistan,

entitled wWUJS5LIA, are of great value. The Siraj is his largest

work and has gained him the titles of ein) girs and uysrsow Ido,

It contains the Persian words of the old poets (ure ), and many

quotations not given in the preceding dictionaries. The words which

belong to the nye Wve Jlyzin} form the wy}os élr>, or as it is often

called, the second part of the Siraj.

The chief importance of the Sir4j lies in this, that it isa commentary

on the Burhan and Rashidi. Rashidi is occasionally, though not

always convincingly, checked, when he doubts the correctness of a

quotation, whilst the critical remarks on the Burhan are so numerous,

that the Burhan should never have been printed without the notes

of the Siraj. There are also a‘few words which Rashidi, notwith-

standing his great carefulness, has overlooked and for the criticism of

which the Siraj is the more valuable. I take as an example the word

pliooy!. Burhan has—

pine} ustdm, clin | dstam and Wises! dstdn.

1. The harness of a horse.

2. A man whom you can trust,

3. The threshold of a house,

Vullers gives the same on p. 142a, of the first volute of his

Lexicon. The FJ. gives likewise the three meanings with examples,

but he has not the form Wi! dstdn. Nor is it in Surtiri and Rashidi ;

who besides have only the first two meanings. We see therefore

a vol gla i in the form Wli.»! and the third meaning. The example

which the FJ. quotes for the meaning a threshold is taken from Nacir

Khusrau cath Muszari’)

pling ys SF 99 39° OS ples Bild oma OI! Sd whe so

“Tf 2 man owes his very carpet and his threshold, his house is the

emptiest in the whole world.”

We see at once that this verse proves nothing ; for the first meaning

26 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. | No. 1,

the harness of a horse suits far better. Tam ata loss to see why

Rashid{ has omitted to make a remark on the third meaning.

Surirf, as I said above, passes 7 silence over meanings which he thinks

wrong or unsupported. The Sir4j has—

rt) ve aml hye pie g Bonds CHIL giF9 5 Soe? stye clear!

wlast so9 # Url Vinee east» # Upitl » Oe520 ogy 9 8 aS 5

e Ww Ss wi) 9 wale , de S20 roe ight? livery ws wytivesl

cobto uyids HI Lyi! Bythe0 IS yy 85 dygF 0 @ 5505 BE GytherT y

wleS 5u 6slS line] ITs el pe wy Seogl 1) o Kaos! 1alb y SOU) YOY

ll oto Pay oe) 6a eye! wale hes ob bls yy bls cee * Boy

Thus we see that Burhan’s form wiss{ dstdn is to be struck out as

unsupported, and that the meaning 4 threshold, as given in the FJ.,

is not proved.

The author of the Siraj says in his preface as follows :—

“Ag far as the correctness of meanings and the explanation of

difficult passages are concerned, no dictionary comes up to the Farhang

i Rashidi, whilst the Burhan has certainly the merit of being the

completest vocabulary existing. But, in both dictionaries there are

erroneous statements; especially so in the Burhan, which is full of

wrong meanings and spellings, as shall be seen below. To correct

them is the only object of this dictionary. Hence I have not repeated

the examples which are given in the FJ., Sur..and R.

“© Whilst I was writing this dictionary, I obtained a MS. copy of a

work written by a Persian savant whose name is Majduddim ’ All,

poetically styled Qust. His book, although it is not known, contains

many critical gems; and I have thought best to add them to my own

remarks. Beside this MS. copy, I have used the FJ., Sur., R., Mu.,

B., the Farhang 1 Miunisi, the Kashf, some commentaries on the

Gulistan, the Masnawi i Maulawi, &c. My friend Sayyid Muhammad

Masih Khan expressed the tdrékh of the compilation of this book by

calling it

wld ise eyo cle ssiols

which will be found to give A, H. 1147, for A. D. 1734-5]. I have

sollowed the order of the words as adopted by B. and R., because it

is by far the best system of arrangement.’’*

* T cannot give the Persian text, as the copy of the Siraj in my hands is too

faulty.

ati -

1868. | Contributions to Persian Lewicography. 27

MSS. of the Siraj are very rare. Ihave only seen one, which Major

Lees kindly placed into my hands. It belongs to the Fort William

College Library, but is a bad copy. The Sirdj is rather voluminous,

as it contains the words of the Burhan with lengthy remarks attached

to each.

The Chirdgh ¢ Hiddyat is a much smaller work. It has been

several times printed. A very handy edition of the Ghias, easily

obtainable in any part of India, contains the Chiragh in the margin.

Khan Arzi’s Diwan is much esteemed ; Bh. often quotes his verses.

Of his other works which compilers ought to read, I may mention the

Tanbth ul ghdfilin, a critical work on the poems of Gxy> Hazin of

Icfahén, who died at Benares during the last century. Hazin, though

a great poet and a man of learning, is not always exact in his

metaphors, and borrows from other poets more than native critics by

way of “ake allow. Khan Arai in his attack tries to shew that

Hazin is (,*°d, %yl=*2, and be. Many of his objections

(wlé3,25) are, however, not tenable, and Ték Chand, Mirza Qatil

and Warastah take frequently occasion to justify Hazin. One of

Khan Araii’s nephews also, Mir Muhsin ’Ali, wrote a critic on the

Tanbth. Again, a very fair rejoinder, entitled Ux? Jy5, appeared in

1862 at Cawnpore (169 pp.), written by Maulawi Imam Bakhsh,

poetically styled (ikge Cahbéi. As most remarks refer to Persian style

and idiom, compilers and grammarians will do well to procure copies,

Two rhetorical works written by Khan Arzti are entitled—

B38 dor Habe and Glee 99 yoke Cadyo

were lithographed at Allahabad in 1830 and 1841.

The following extract is taken from the Miftdéh ut Tawdrtkh,* p.

338— ,

qxOll_ yer gerd Fat ,Aly® ent GUS pads yoy ile jt ot Gnd

cs St i Owes v0 sybew Cols Sage a=”: res) yobeo rb No» dye=”

road des” cihle Ai tgt ys 399) Gs ald sly whlxrwor~ Slhas 3d 9 Os sat

obfulerla yy 3 30 soy y$ pyle Be Gt wwoledd& 3 Bons? 5

* Lucknow 1864, 406 pp. 4to, The author of this book is are ow p pol

[Mr. Thomas William Bell (?)], a clever Persian writer and poet. Some

of his tarikhs are excellent, The tarikh on p. 371 does not refer to the Ma-

drasah, but to the former Fort William College at Calcutta,

28 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

Gyteeg end l=Iyo 5 OT gigils dno) yal gt S55 wre 2 wad} y cvelaiul

pg sf os= ye oS 0 &) 9 rnd 9 Ono By 9 152 ihn tt eA) i

Koy? hbo Sy WIR Yrs Oe J! Solively? wbit Oxy OF So rpee EIS

#2 # Bb (ast ost che pis yar dle eps ="he

iy opt we? st Oo j set go wld ote w2e't gle

dy pti we wf of Gy gle af ae

According to this extract, Khan Arzi died in January 1756.

Sirajuddin’s commentaries are very rare. In his Sharh to the

Sikandarnémah, we find occasional references to the abovementioned

Majd ’Ali.

14. The works of Munshi Ték Chand.*

1, p= ke.

2. Gra! alse

3. ayy SLs}

4. joloadt yoly

There exist lithographed editions of these four lexicographical

works; the last three are somewhat rare.

1. The Bahéri ’Ajam is one of the grandest dictionaries ever

written by one man. There exist seven editions of it revised by

the author. The first appeared in A. D. 1752; the Delhi lithograph-

ed edition of 1853 is taken from the author’s last MS., which he

completed in 1782, or thirty years after the first edition. The MS.

preserved in the Fort William College Library, Calcutta, appears to

be one of the first issues. Though not so complete as the last, it is a

good MS. and preferable to the Delhi lithographed edition, which

unfortunately is so full of typographical errors, as to be almost useless.

Future compilers of Persian dictionaries ought to be very careful

in using the Delhi edition, especially if they extract examples.

The chief object of the Bahar i ’Ajam is to explain the Iste’mdl 2

mutaakhkharin. Most examples are therefore taken from the poets after

the time of Jémi, although quotations and phrases from the older

poets are by no means inconsiderable. The work is so well known

that it is unnecessary to say more about it.

The name of the author is dq £43 (to; some call him dhe S15

* Munsht is a title given in Upper India cS Hindoos acquainted with Persian

and Arabic.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 29

&>1) or Ode Ss) col. He was by caste a Khetri. His poetical

name is yi. He lived at Delhi. From a note at the end of the

second volume of the Delhi edition, it appears that he was nearly

deprived by one of his pupils of his well merited fame as the author

of the seventh revised edition. Ték Chand must have died shortly after

1782, because he was prevented by old age from commencing the

eighth revised edition.

In the preface the author states that for the first edition he only

used the Tanbihulghéfilin by Siréj ushshu’aré (Siréjuddin, the

author of the Sirdjullaghat), and a small treatise written by Mir

Muhammad Aizal, poetically styled Sabit eel. For the following

editions Ték Chand used the Muctalahaét ushshu’aré, the Risélah i

Mukhlici i Kashi, and another book whose title and author were

unknown. The first of these three works Ték Chand embodied almost

entirely ; hence it is so little known.

2. The Jawdhir ulhurif and the [btdl ¢ Szurtirat were written by

Ték Chand during the compilation of the Bahari ’Ajam.

The Jawahir ulhurdf contains two chapters :

1 d 0 95> why Jo

2. Bas g dle Sym ly yg

The former part is the completest treatise on the interchange of

letters. It forms an excellent basis for the etymological part of a

Persian grammar, and is an indispensable Vade mecum for the compiler,

as it is of the greatest assistance to him in the numerous spellings of

certain words. The second chapter treats of the syntax of the Persian

_ prepositions and particles. Numerous examples are given. The

lithographed edition which appeared A. H. 1267 at Cawnpore, is

taken from a wnique MS. in the handwriting of the author. It is on

the whole well printed.

8. The Ibtdl i Szurtrat is the best, if not the only, work on the

Lagarrufat ¢ Farst, or the modifications which both Arabic and Persian

words have undergone in Persia during the last ten centuries. In

_ plan the book coincides with our popular and interesting works on the

study of words, such as by Trench, Richardson, &e. The term ew 92

comes nearest to our “a poetical license,” and the object of Ték Chand’s

book is to shew that in good Persian poetry, there is no license, but

that every peculiar expression is either based upon sufficient authority,

30 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

or is wrong. Hence the title “ [btdl i Szurérat’” or the frustrating of

that which a bad Persian poet would call a _,*% )9,%, although in

reality it is rb 5=° or want of poetical genius.

A lithographed edition appeared at Delhi in A. H. 1268, 78 pp.,

small 8vo. It is rare.

4, The Nawddir ul magddir is a complete collection of the Macdars

of the Persian language. The quotations are numerous, especially

those from the older poets. The book is therefore most valuable for

the compiler. The lithographed edition which appeared in A. H.

1272 at Delhi, 120 pp, large 8vo., is taken from a MS. in Ték Chand’s

handwriting. The book is very fairly got up. ‘

The arrangement of the words in Ték Chand’s lexicographical works

is the same as in Rashidi and Burhan.

15. J itd } goles thera

The title of the work contains the tarfkh of its commencement by

the author, A. H. 1180, or A. D. 1767. Like Ték Chand he

is a Hindoo, and was born at Lahore. His poetical name is Shwyly

Warastah, independent ; his real name, according to other books, is

Uo -gi95 Jlyw. From his preface it appears as if Warastah had lived

for a long time in Iran, where he thoroughly studied the wlysl=°

cya Wo, His dictionary was completed in 1782 aiter fifteen years,

labour, although a MS. copy of at least a part of it came into the

hands of the author of the Bahar i’Ajam, who has largely extracted

from it. There are, however, several phrases which Ték Chand has

omitted. Though Warastah’s dictionary is much smaller than the ~

Bahar, because the quotations are not so numerous, it has the merit of

being entirely an original work.

There exists a very handy copy of the Muctalahat, lithographed in

A. H. 1280 at Lucknow, 404 pp., Royal 8vo. It contains in the

margin an extract of the Bahar i ’Ajam, whose words are given

without the quotations.

16. whl) wus

The name of the compiler is Maulawi Muhammad Ghiasuddin of

Rampur, east of Delhi. After fourteen years’ labour he finished the

work in A. H. 1242, or A. D, 1826. The dictionary contains “all

1868. | Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 31

necessary Arabic, Persian and Turkish words,’ especially those

which occurin such Persian authors as are read in schools. The

dictionary is therefore a very useful book; it is infact “‘ The Student’s

Dictionary.” Hence also its general use among the natives of India.

Embodied with the dictionary are several small treatises, as on

NiL25, (Rwy, Ués°, the various eras (vide esha), on geogra-

phy (vide eats 2), and also grammatical notes (vide & &) a

description of Hindustan, &e. The work is accompanied by several

astronomical and geometrical designs, and a few maps, which shew

that the compiler was not unacquainted with western science. A

large number of scientific terms are also explained.

No Persian dictionary ought to be in future compiled without the

words of the practical Ghids ; but compilers will do well to remember

that Ghiasuddin is not a native of Persia. Of all Indian dictionaries

it contains the largest amount of those peculiarities which belong to

the Isti’mdl « Hind. Hence for the pronunciation of words the

Ghids is not always the best authority. Even among the meanings

of the words, Ghids enters occasionally an Indian meaning, taking it

for Persian. In some cases, from a comparison of several dictionaries,

his attention is forcibly drawn to the Indian usage of words, as will

appear from the following extract :—

whys wl 65 out aye wl dee Gets woty Word

see anol babe KS! 52} wosead < woah pic 5) oO)! Soo) 3 od

y» usite! Urtee aS aw gdd aks’ Eph yd XR) wpa * wosis? uses

gn! WB. y=? piel 9 Sl WHY Yass ee Ed®O pth SX) zack) ‘aay

9 WOH CRogys 4 WO4%) rae cs ioe do Wied Le * eu SI

il cspkilke 9 O20 eo 6Gb— Xd Woda yd g Woes lang 5

“The word wots means to smell, and belongs to those Arabic

roots which the Persians have adopted and altered according to the

genius of their language, as Woiey?, Woah, Ge., because the word is

derived from the Arabic oe to smell. After Bs this, I found on

- examination that not wate has the sense of fo smell, but woxs

with the nn, and that the form with the mém iswrong. Thus in the

Siraj. But wow, as an original Persian word, means to be frightened,

to be perplexed, to be afraid, as mentioned in the Farhang i Jahangiri

and the Muayyid,”

32 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

There exist two lithographed editions of the Ghias, one together

with the Chiragh i Hidéyat, and another printed in 1847, by one Mir

Hasan, from a MS. corrected by the compiler.

97. wh) ath)

The name of the compiler is Abdullatif ibn 1 "Abdullah Kabir.

His object was to write a special dictionary for the Masnawi of

Maulavi Rim. Hence he says—

Essie Koo ls fas? Ela} 5 ax,© Kas 56 wld ys aise cumot 55955 Cyl

# (575% esx

He has also written a commentary to the Masnawi, entitled Latdf

ul Ma’nawi, of which our Society possesses a very good MS. (No. 846,

92.0 leaves, small 8vo.), bearing the muhr of ’Abdulwahhab Khan

Bahadur Nucratjang.

The compiler lived during the reign of Shahjahén ; but the FJ. is

the latest dictionary consulted by him.

The Catalogue of our Persian MSS. calls him Gujratt.

IV.

T subjoin a few notes on the Isti?mal « Hind. Those who wish to

study this important subject, ought to make themselves acquainted

with the writings of Mirz4 Qatil, entitled slo) by, dy sho and

&alasl 43; and a treatise by Anwar ’Ali ‘on the spelling of Persian

words, entitled Risdlah « Imla i Férst. These works have been litho-

graphed and are easily obtainable.

The change in spelling, form, meaning and construction, which an

Arabic word, apparently without any reason, undergoes in Persian,

or which an Arabic or a Persian word undergoes in Hindustani, is

called Gy25 tacarruf. The tacarrufat of Persian words are included

in the cy wy Jlaxiw! zsti’?mdl 7 furs, the usage peculiar to the Persians,

and the tacarrufaét of the Hindustani language, and of the Persian

written in India, in the Se JSlshw| dsti’mdl ¢ hind. A knowledge

of the latter is of great importance, not only for those who read

Persian books written or printed in India, but also for every

Hindustani scholar; for although the Isti’mél i Hind is looked upon

with suspicion by learned natives, we have to bear in mind that its

peculiarities are generally adopted and therefore correct. So at least

for the Hindustani, according to the proverb ee 3 es cls ble,

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 33

In its relation to Persian the Isti’mél i Hind will of course in most

“eases appear as something faulty ; for the peculiarities may no longer

be a natural form of development, or a p+ bis, but the result of

ignorance, a clos else blé. Nevertheless the Isti’mél i Hind is visible

in every Persian book written by Indians, from the works of their

excellent historians down to a common dinner invitation ( &clislys )

of the daily life. Even the works of a writer like Abulfaszl, ‘‘ the

great Munshi,” shew traces of it. Hence the truth of Mons. Garcin de

Tassy’s remark that every Persian scholar ought to be acquainted

with Hindustani. If this be true for the Persian scholar, it is much

more true for the compiler of a Persian dictionary ; for a good

dictionary ought to be based upon a thorough knowledge of the lan-

guage in all its forms of development, and must be a history of the

language as well as a vocabulary.

_ But if we only understand by Isti’mal i Hind the influence of the

Hindi and Hindustani upon the Persian, we would almost identify

the term with “the usage of the Persian writers since the establish-

ment of the Mogul dynasty.”” This would be wrong ; for the Isti’mal

i Hind includes peculiarities which once belonged to the Persian, as

spoken in Persia, but which the modern Yrani, in the course of its

progress, has entirely discarded. In early times Persian had become

the court language of Taran, and from Tiiran it was carried to India

by the waves of the Turanian immigrants and invaders. Hence on

the whole the Persian of India is Taranian. As Latin in the Middle

Ages, so was the Persian in Tiiran, and subsequently in India,

the language of the learned. The works of the pre-classical and

classical periods were studied and. imitated, and peculiarities have

thus been preserved which have long since disappeared in the Trani

Persian. The difference between the pre-classical and the modern

Persian is, of course, not so great, as between Latin and any of the

Romanic languages, because the pre-classical Persian had already

attained that logical simplicity to which our modern Huropean lan-

guages happily tend; and though representing the growth of the

Persian language during nine centuries, it is scarcely greater than the

difference between the English of Fletcher and Beaumont and the

English of our century. The Persian language has been compared to

a bare tree, stripped of all its leaves, This stripping process, however,

34 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

is going on in every spoken language, and shews that the copious and

beautiful forms of languages like Sanserit, Gothic, Greek, and many

modern savage languages, ave as many illogical incumbrances. The

sequences of events and the order of things which the imitative

genius of the modern languages expresses by the order of the

words, are expressed in the ancient languages by the annexation of

words and particles rather than by a logical order of the words, as if

the speaker was afraid that the hearer could only understand those

ideas for which there was an audible equivalent. Whilst many are

apt to look upon stripping off the leaves as a matter of regret, I would

consider it as a step towards delivering the human mind from the

fetters of form. Perhaps I tread upon contestable ground. But a fact

remains; it is this, that of all nations whose languages are preserved

to us, the Persians are the first Arians that pitched the tent of speech

on the elevated tableland of logical thought.

Simplified then as the Persian language is, further change in termi-

nations being impossible, the growth, as in modern English, is only

visible in the pronunciation, the spelling and the meanings of words.

For the study of this development a comparison of the works of the

older writers with those of the modern, is essential; and as the

Persian written and studied in India has hitherto been imitating the

pre-classical and classical Persian of the early invaders, the importance

of the Isti’mal i Hind is easily recognised.

The following peculiarities are said by native writers to be common

to the Persian of Taran and India. .

a. Many words end in the Térénian Persian in S (kaf), whilst the

Tranian has a S (gf); as 4S a kind of partridge, in Tir. GS;

4ix0 mishg musk, in Tir, be mushk ; &%| a tear, in Tir. Soy ;

KS we a drop, in Tur. Elis yw, Similarly, Kio a doctor, Ay jeal-

ousy, Sed, de., in Tar. with a final kaf.

}. Also in the beginning of certain words; as wolsS, in Tar.

WslS (as every Muhammadan in India pronounces) ; 34445 coriander

seed, in Tir. 34S,

This difference between the Turdnian -S and the Trauian S becomes

very apparent in Dictionaries arranged according to the first and last

letters, Thus in Surdéri 4 stands in the psy GE er tt) Las,

whilst in the Madar in the (634 GW eo | das

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 85

e. The Téranian has preserved a clear distinction between the 91»

and 4, when Joe” (6, 6) and Syy0 (ti, i). The modern Iranian has

only 33% forms (i, 4). The words which have a majhul letter must

be learned from the Dictionaries; Indian Persian grammars specily

the cases, when the ending cg is pronounced 43,24.

d. The Tirdnian has in all cases preserved the 4 wy. The

Tranian has given it up in some, especially after an alif. Thus

forms like gle, Xt), 8 wf, 4=°1,2, &c., are pronounced in Tran

mindam, riimdam, tingah, harinchi, but in India still mdndam, rdndan,

We.

e. The Turdnian never adopted the interchange of dd/ (9) and

dzal (8).

f. Certain words are peculiar to the Tirénians. Examples—csy

he for the Yranian 91; 93 son for_y>y; g side for yb 5 9% husband,

for yoy; s&s dawn for ; 88x) evening for el; cs)! for oh 5 5

brother-in-law for _yly> 529% ; 86 or SY sister-in-law lor ) Joly ;

yolo brother for oly + ule urs mother-in-law tor WI} yOb0 5 yc

father-in-law for 3925 S92 re> for Yb? ; wos and ES fo

search for vm; otUy 1) 8 to throw the arrow for wr [05!

ty yds crhemtd Co sit for epdmind ; upiwl& fo rise for wildy; jayttso (cf.

by &L4 ) yesterday for jay ; ST wor ytpw to swell (water) for

eT wre Sola} 5 39) UO lye do pass away (day) lor jy EbdS ; Yoerys

to die; woasly for W974 sly; WSS to sleep tor Wostlye> 5 EAS), the

same as Wo, ©. g., Ay) with,s I am thy sacrifice ; wos lh for

woof ogy; WOPLE for wos; wosle 1. the same as wok) to put ;

2. the same as edd 3S to leave behind, e. g., plasele Sb phase L

have left the thing on the shelf, where gle is a Tiranian form for

Baile ; or, ols WHIA Gel leave this house (oyI8% ); 3. the same as

wols Gb to divorce; 4. the same as WHF; woke to Leave be-

hind; &e.

- Although several of those words do occur in Tranian authors, yet

we generally find them used in peculiar places, as in rhyme, where

it was difficult to avoid them; or in order to prevent repetitions, We.

The following peculiarities appear to be limited to the Persian

spoken and written in India,

a. Words have peculiar meanings. Examples—%o5T, the same as

py satisfied ; 83)9 yy leavings ; are yos absence for casas ; Live misl @

36 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

set, the same as 3d) ; &cla a (made up) coat ; yyadds, the same as (» 4S

or wySl= a sweeper; Sys baraf, often pronounced barf, ice (for

snow) ; sbely vide Vull. Dict. ; &aahS a flattering title applied to

cooks, tailors, &c.; cept hemp for Kis; _yesdo afternoon ; jleb for

stad; Cepsle despairing ; yay2csl a closet, for cs) ye; ey Kabul

and Persia*® ; &aJl& the royal exchequer ; l& and 5,4 tark the catch -

word at the bottom of the page of a manuscript ; yp, vide Vull.

Dict: 5 pile, vide Vull., also board given to a poor student who is to

teach children in return; 49 1. a province, 2. the same as joy

an officer in charge of a province ; éJlwy, the same as yloley, an officer

commanding a troop; cs xf, vide Vull.; 81,57 41 3 without reason.

b. The word 4S is pronounced ké, not Xz. This seems to be the

old form £, still preserved in Self. The Iszafat is pronounced @,

not 7, and é in cases of words ending in 3; e. g-, w* éXA khanah é man.

The word 8lsoly is pronounced xls badshdh, as oly pdd in Hind.

means crepitus ventris. Similarly do the Persians use the form $I

(a prick to urge on an elephant), in order to ayoid the Hind. (y=

which sounds, as Rashidi observes, like Cy wt. Other Indian pronun-

ciations are—EU3 palk and palak for pilk an eyelid ; wes fighin the

same as WU , for fughdn ; 854 for ¥445, already observed by Abul-

Faszl in the Ain i Akbari. Words of the same class as 92°, &. 8, 94

a mistake, »=* a satire, («= a revelation, (4 exertion, have lost

the jazm and are pronounced afb, hajo with the Us¢=* sly, the

accent being on the penultima, but sa’t, waht with the accent on the

ultima.

c. Peculiar formsare (H2!543, ly5, YL (the first and last occur

in Abulfaszl), for us? [o43, sibs, csjz, the ending ish being properly

restricted to nouns derived from verbs ; (gil&, for up acidity ;

csitw (derived from eS), for eyooT humanity ; Cydle, Cyiw or

Cyan lee a groom, for yrilas 5 a plural kia! ajinnah ghosts ; Sag a

c Ate . ° vee A = ge

pack of cards, for asa$s Cle for Cle, vide Vull.; (Ado,

*% Vullers has at least half a dozen blunders in his dictionary, all

arising from his ignorance of the meaning of this word. Thus under

Je~I, in his Corrigenda II, p. 1558, No. 2, inregione Kashmir ly pheaeS,,

a blunder for Yo9 phate Kashmir and Persia ; also sub Wo 75 SQxm SA

I, p. 546; Ss. WO) pbdo Oe. I, p- 578, &e. Now-a-days in India, wag meals

Ewrope, esp. England. ;

1868.] Contributions ta Persian Lexicography. 37

Eee 3 00, ssis~ (Abulfaszl), for (chs, tr, is”, the ending

J not leading to an adject. form in 8; ales. and lay, a mongrel ;

Bylo we! for Soleo Gas! 5 Vt for V1; al) 6 for AU} olye, a proper noun ;

dais for 46; (9G for wis ; psloale a wardrobe, for wloxle ; Glyys

a fine, for bere ; (iJ) ery for SJ en; Soil! slee and ,S3| ole for

ddViccolee and dye Miccoler ; evils for ls; S979 for 4910;

Wlss for WIfs, a shop; Grilys for Eglo; Wy for 414 a certain dish ;

pred) for pmsl 5 ister pure, for pee; (5%)I for Jeg ole for

ples’ ; Keo for @°; paydo for EY ; re ae for co

d. In words beginning with 1, the Madd is often omitted ; as ylat

pickles, yi! lining,* Gate! sleeve, ©} canvass, Sole} ready, Kei}

a royal order, )%J a distiller, for jlo, pdwT, HT, xoleT, LAUT, lof,

e. After a long vowel we often find a vowel elided; as Gy2,9T

afr int for the Iranian &farin, cox maulwé for maulawt, ssole amddgt

for dmddagt, sSortys poshidgt ior poshidagt, HAIX khalg wh for khdlicah,

wot dzhdan* for dzhadan.

jf. ‘Two Sakins are avoided ; as Odes)! arjamand for arjmand,

y The Persian letters -S, G sp» are used instead of the Arabic

S, e+ ; as in ES, &S,kS, Vis}, for ops Sis, &3 So, WS] ; eI,

=) for —w«! and ws; b= ior ba. ; Salyo for daly 5 <4 for or.

h. The Tashdid of many Arabic words falls away, as Gl» nawdb

for nawwdb an (Indian) Nawab ; 3)9, pl. ety, an atom.}

i. The following pronunciations are very common, though gener-

ally prohibited in the Dictionaries—vl5% khizdn autumn, for ws

khazén ; jlo diréz§ for the Persian dardz long ; 64% shambah, and

even shumbah|| Saturday, for &ics shambih ; 34 puldw, and even 393,

a well known dish of rice, meat and spices, for 94 paldw. The modern

ae Entered by Vullersas Persian. It is Indian.

+ So in many Persian Dictionaries written by Indians.

+ There is a curious mistake in Vull. Dict. I, p. 378. Burhan, whom Vullers

copies, has wo so~] by e rary yo 3 Kb25 site? OY 5 but Vullers does

not observe that &42) and etyd (the Indian printer of the oe left out the

Tashdid) are synonymous, reads whys, for the A. VSS ,and translates canities

wm anteriore capitis !

§ Vull. also has dirdz, although Burhan gives clearly jes W953 namdaz.

| Vull. also has &iha042 panjshambah I, 375. b., and Krhoodoo silishambah

II, p. 354, whilst in other places he has correctly shambth.

38 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

Persian and Turkish have 9h pilaw. ‘(posse durwesh,* for darwish

a beggar ; Sk) nimak salt, for namak ; wake) nimkin, adj., for

namakin; &ls5 gawdh a witness, for 8195 guwah ; 8,5 girah a knot,

for girth ; ygo5° mazdur wages, for y9d3 muzdur ; dslf kaghidz paper,

for ds§ kaghadz.

k. A great number of Arabic words are universally wrong pro-

nounced in India; as 3 qil’ah a@ fort, for qal’ah; vols

qaiamat the resurrection, for qiyamat ; &zh3 gat’ah, for git’ah ; »2y*

‘aris a bride, for ards ; _»=* hijr separation, for hajr ; 5=* 7ijz weak-

mess, for ’ajz; Ley rija hope, for raja ; Las fiza space, for fazd ; be

raza contentment, for rizd ; “$> jeb 2 packet, for jawb ; els ghaids

for ghias help ; wl» shahdb tor shihdb, a meteor; “#2 ‘agmat chas-

tity, for wmat ; @5 mauqa’ for maug? ; prey? mausam @ season, for

mausim ; #4 khimah a tent, for khaimah ; wpl=* shuja’at bravery,

for shajd’at ; ales himagat for hamagat, folly, 99-22 gagur a fault, for

queur ; wesgne Vagtibat for -ugubat, punishment ; rpdince hashmat

pomp, for hishmat ; ake jinnat paradise, for jannat.

1. Peculiar spellings ; as eles! for pass! 5 Say for »Sag ; 39% for

bse), Proper nouns are often written together, as (ghtMie= for

she nm: Similarly, Josalo for Jovale ; ddls aly “slay f for

dolled AU) sld ot ; pedsiwvo for _pedive consisting of; wae] for

we yal SH yehs, sot’, k=O, soxtys, for Gi we, SS7 sd, We.

— Reversely, BUls, la gagldolw, for els, Lgrmgtsolw. Also, bo for

tees A> happy for ¢y= khurram, els) for E+).

m. Barbarous forms; as cone” L lo, whS,s, why books for Lali s

Six @2 5° for dls 59 pat ; wre” mucharrab greasy ; yor) IY nd,

as we say the strait of Bab el Mandeb ; dues? jfirtsad, for dhe 9

he sends ; 8 qulf for 25 gufl, alock; @b5 for &2b3 > Wodityd jl,

Hind. Wa53 545, for WIS jhe.

The following terms, abbreviations, &ec., are of frequent occurrence

in native Persian Dictionaries :—

1. sstiow! Asadulhukama, the poet Asadi of Tis, Firdausi’s

teacher.

* Adopted by some Indian: Dicts,, as the Ghias, on a mistaken etymology.

+ Thus also in Persian MSS.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 39

esol colya® Shéwd t Tust, Firdausi.

bien S aa Facth-i-Ganjawt, Nizami of Ganjah.

ple GIS Khalldg ul Ma dni, the “ shaper” of meanings, Kamal

a OF Iefahan.

CSIs es or By eesee $505, Sa’di.

Coil pe alyd, or eet] SUS, or Gad} wld, Hafiz.

BS 5Le0) ells kalam i asdtidzah (plural of ustddz), or & 4oRke ells f

or S553 Col yee ells, the pre-classical and classical poets.

In quoting a poet, the word «ly rast is often used, as Cww]) Bola

Hifiz says.

2. The Mogul emperors of Delhi are rarely mentioned by their

names, but by their laqabs.

* cgiS0_w9r~9 firdaus makdnt, Zahiruddin Babar, 1526 to 1530.

csiliwf wie jannat dstdnt, Naciruddin Humaytin, 1530. to

" 1556. Jannat dshydni is also used.

SaarTisys 'arsh dshydnt, Jalaluddin Muhammad Akbar, 1556

to 1605.

gSors= jannat makdnt, Niruddin Muhammad Jahingir,

~ 1605 to 1627.

She®Tioss,5 firdaus dshydni, Shihab udd'n Muhammad Shah-

“jahan. He is also called (36 wi3 Gale céhib qiran i sani,

the second lord of conjunction, Taimur, his ancestor, being

the first. 1627 to 1658.

ppSe oS khuld makdnt, Muhi uddin Muhammad Aurangz¢b,

"1658 to 1707. Native historians prefer the name ’Alamgtr.

Jyio SS khuld manzil, Qutbuddin Muhammad Mo’azzim

Shah ’Alam, also called Bahadur Shah, 1707 to 1712.

Regarding the form of these Zaqgabs I may mention, that there are

abstract nouns. Thus (64427 Uf,° means an occupying of the highest

heaven as a resting place. Like the abstract noun dle ’allémah,

it then becomes a title, ‘dwelling in heaven.” Similar terms are

psoas y0 miryam makant, dwelling with the Virgin Mary, the name

of one of Akbar’s wives; (go> 5° niirchashmé my dear son ; ..8falss

qiblahgdhi my revered teacher; ¢.436=* majdzubi, pr. my attracted

one, my pupil. Native grammarians call this c>¢ the piste isk yd t

mutakallim, as if (,2'§ 445 were the same as Gyo x%4L45 giblahgdh i man,

We may compare our Wy/ord and the A, sayyidi, When these words

40 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

are followed by a proper noun, they do not take the +l4|, as srl ahss

&syS oes” giblahgdhi Muhammad Ghaus ; but you may say oy 2eF E15

giblahgahi iman. Similarly the word sh oy bandag’ does not take

the Iszafat, when followed by the name of a Wali or a Shaikh, whilst

other titles, as wyes, “wos, wlojdlo, &e., take the Iszéfat.

38. ews lughat means, 1. a dictionary, the same as Kia 55; 2. the

words of a dictionary are its wl ; hence you may say wl aes or

wali amS 5 8. language, as coh ww, although in this sense the

word wl} is preferred; 4. a particular form of a word. You say

[Xwog] 3] rol dat Ko} usta is another form for avestd.

elle ’dlam, a class of words. You say, ss) is slogy alle 31, be-

longs to the same class as riidbar, 1.e., to the nouns ending in y¥

bir. r

Sd!19& dhw Gy3], this requires a proof.

Sd Shanthi add Cg ght w2!, this meaning is supported by the

following verse. .

jg E253 yd, O395 Ggos%y yd, the author of the Farhang says,

Rashidi says.

glee samé, and exle3 tasdmw, verbal information regarding the

correctness of a word, obtained from the Wh} U2| ahl-i-zabdn, the

Natives of Persia, or from an sw! ustdd. The same meaning

has the phrase S«ysJ Gee oh; Ja! 5.

Sant! lahjah provincial pronunciation. You say

enol ddd Ket (55150 gly wok? Ole

didkdn is the Indian pronunciation of dukan.

bye urf or Gyles ta druf, usage.

Liss) tachi, an error in spelling.

Cbs ys? tahrif, an error in the meaning of a word.

wolis fa-ta-anmul or reels fo-agham, reflect, be careful. pay

attention. Lexicographists often use this phrase after explaiting

a difficult verse.

es tatabbw’ or Kost tafahhue lexicographical criticism.

4. The following grammatical terms are noticeable—

PO. clk or psy? slo, the same as ae sh, S5=” slo.

$9}, the game as Wg39~%3 e. 8, 393 a= Oteay!, “ pronounce

Skea)! anjmand with a jazm above the ¢, and not arjamand.”’

1868.] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 41

The word jazm is never used in Persian Dictionaries, swkim being the

usual word.

Every alif in the beginning of a word is called 454%; hence in

spelling sliw|, you say %yo2 9d), baszamm-i-hamzah, not baszamm 1

alif. And in spelling GUST, you would say 8} Cold y AI » 350% ee.

The sign eaidiaitea 8542 USA shakl-i-hamzah. This explains

the phraseology of Bh. under £,¢> chihrai pink, where he says :—

WP BA paey yd 8 BAIS yy Bogey (pili? 4 Begs

“The word §,¢, when pronounced, has an alif anda ya-i-tahtani,

csl8¢e, but you must not write them.” The sign of the hamzah

above the 8 cannot be left out, as Vullers has done, p. 605a. Similar

words are Kings, &iX6 of the same colour as the fékhtah-pigeon, 5,3,

bro yas, The spellings cei ,%, cghiey, Gheyw are Indian, and not

considered good. This corrects several mistakes in Vullers’ Lexicon.

Regarding the shakl i hamzah in words as in pS, &e., vide the

author’s Prosody of the Persians, p. 14.

In Lucknow and Delhi prints we often find a shakl-i-hamzah above

the silent 3, as loa) 9 JoM1g for ylOad y S4N194. This pedantry is also

recommended by the grammarian ’Abdulwisi’ of Hansah. Another

absurdity of modern MSS. and prints is the spelling Sb for Sb,

though Ghias approves of the former.

The letters of the alphabet may be treated as masculines or

feminines ; you may say S20 Gad, or bydio wad. For &bydio ps0

ghair mangyitah, you may say 6622, or bX2 bénugat.

The word 445 kindych is followed by the prep. 3!, in imitation of

the Arab. ws. You say :—

WALES Sy 9 dydy3 Jo 51 OS O63

“ The sorrowful heart of a poet is compared to the plaintive naz.”

: VI.

Among the Dictionaries printed in Europe, I shall only mention

Johnson’s Dictionary and Vullers’ Lexicon Persico-Latinum HKtymo-

logicum. !

It is difficult to make a comparison between the two, as the objects

of the compilers are different. In point of wsefulness, Johnson’s work is

the better of the two ;* it is eminently “the translator’s dictionary.” It

* Vullers does not think much of Johnson. He classes him with Castelli,

Meninski, and Richardson, and says :—‘‘ Horum enim operum accurata compa-

42 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. © [No. 1,

does not pretend to be a critical dictionary, which Vullers does. Johnson

gives Arabic words, in which he is exceedingly exact, as he had good

sources; Vuliers has only a few. The Persian words of both Dic-

tionaries contain a great number of words and meanings that never _

existed, and many wrong spellings, because both used the B. and the

Haft qulzam—works which compilers ought not to use. But the

number of mistakes is greater in Vullers, because he has used other

bad sources, as shall be shewn hereafter. On the other side Johnson

has given many meanings derived from the study of Persian writers,

in which point Vullers 1s sadly deficient. Again, for the Isti’mal-i-

Mutaakhkharin, Vullers is better, as he has used, from the middle of

the letter ¢, the Bahar i ’Ajam.

For those who use Vullers’ Lexicon, the following remarks may be

of use :—

The words marked in Vullers

CO. (Castelli).

C. ex pers. vers. V. Test. (words taken by Castelli

from some version of the Old Testament).

C. ec G. Ido not know what this means.

F. (Farhang-i-Shu’tr).*

M. ex F. (words which Meninski took from the

Farhang-i-Shw ari). :

and B. in app. (the appendix by Captain Roebuck) are

pearly all doubtful.

As examples of words marked C,, C. ex pers. vers. V.

Test., and C. ex G., I shall mention—%o2|, a blunder for Boal ;

a 5 tal and coslal ; Sigl, a blunder for Myo ; oles, a blunder for

OLT; spl; bob, a blunder for Sksb; stb ; soy: sb, a

mistake for a compound ending in By; uphssysh ; Ls; Ga¥b ; ae

a blunder for er (which itself is doubtful) ; S21 ,% ; Bias? > YOY) l9=? 5

Kpods slop, GE, Ody? 5 sags; eles, a blunder for Showd s 91 825 OF,

ar Zo Sor

to take another letter of the alphabet, —Wsoe ; sgh 5 SRE 5 Ker;

ratione cum primariis fontibus ipsis [B. and HK. ? | facta edoctus sum, permultas ©

in iis significationes esse allatas, quae in faisa et perversa interpretatione

exempli primarii nituntur indeque utpote falsas prorsus esse delendas.” De te

fabula narratur.

* I mean those words marked with the letter F., which Vullers did not find —

in B., Bh., HK., SHL.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 43

The MS. of the Furhang-i-Shw wri which Vullers used, must have been

the worst possible in existence. But I do not think that the Dictionary

_ itself is trustworthy. AsI have seen no copy of this Turkish Dictionary,

I am merely guided by quotations in Vullers which mention the

sources from which F. extracted. As F. used the Sharafnamah, Far-

hang-i-Jahangiri, Surdri, the Majma’-i-Khani, his Dictionary ought to

be amodel. But F. has no¢ made a proper use of his sources, and gives

hundreds of words from them, which are nowhere to be found in the

numerous and most excellent MSS. of FJ., Sur., Sh., &., in my posses-

sion. ‘Thus the references of F. in Vullers to the Farhang i Jahangiri

under 48h, whiz, E352, ges are wrong; my MSS. of the FJ.

contain neither the last three words, nor the absurd meaning of the

first.. So likewise F.’s references to Surtri’s Majma’ulfurs under

SH, 499 53,* phd, Bhan Uys, JE 52, Sine! ty; Surtiri contains

nothing of the absurdities ascribed to him. F.’s references to the

Sharafndmah under wo4x2, J1y)3, olay; and to the Majma’-i-lughdt-

i-Khinéi under W498, »9294, lee, are entirely fictitious. Nor

did Burhan find the above words in his MSS. of the FJ. and Sur.

These are examples taken only from words beginning with } 6é and

ep pe.

At least one-half of the verses copied by Vullers from F. have

neither sense, nor metre; and it is a matter of surprise, how Vullers

could have entered them at all. Examples :—

$ylg%05], locus munitus. F.; ¢. g., in hoc versu (gsysJ slive|—

BLAOI gs eyo se I 81S LS wed wil A j

This is a blunder for %)!y~404|, F'. did not observe the curve of the

letter Cw» sé after the ¢.f Bh. quotes (.#4o (metre hazaj)

BlymS} ey Fe pl — HF OS wre wil BS 5

en Read in Daqiqi’s verse UBloX O God /, for 46) }& ; and for

the absurd verse of Shams-i-Fakhri read (metre hazaj)

cprely Sow sols Lee ¥ 9 KS} mh A», ny os on <a wee”

“Thy enemy has fallen into a mire like a lame ass, laden and left

~ without help.”

* Wor ASC) wl, jLwo, as given by Vullers, Sur. has correctly

MYL 9 jw,

+ Similarly Vullers on p. vii. of his preface, in the fifth note é1= hibbuhu

for Sima hasbuhu !

44 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

_yy. Vullers’ verse from the Shahnamah is given in Rashidi as

follows :—

Gist of 0) er ody Bily aye 5 oto cl és

ah ext set slo erp pe Sat pA oY OF

ey burtnish. Vullers quotes from F. the following verse of Nizami—

oiS pated 5 OG baby? 4S wid y 3 ty Sdyost aul Jo

and says :—‘‘in quo tamen falso et contra metrum legitur U#t!;!

[biirinish], quod e conjectura in Yup [burrinish] mutavi.” But by this

conjecture, Vullers makes the second foot epgedo maf uilun — — —;

instead of wy? fa’ilun ~ — —! My MSS. read correctly

je. In the verse of Amir Khusrau read U=>» jo instead of Vullers’

U= 9)9, and translate :— “ How may a weak man get rid of his frame of

clay; an elephant even is helpless when he sticks in the clay.” The

fourth meaning in Vullers is quite useless, as dacoly is an adjective,

and the same as the ys,S of the fifth meaning.

sass 3) perturbatio. For Vullers’ verse from the Shahnaémah

read :—

ays Blt y AE a et at vt gly wast, Boj! wT

Again, Vullers’ words 2) in hoc versu ejusdem poetae are wrong, as

the verse quoted belongs to jBR!95 oy, but not to cD F Liga, F.

having changed the order of the meanings given in the FJ. The fifth

yeaning is very likely wrong, as the MSS. read the second migra’

(metre muszarl )

M9 why ob Sa py

“G. - Vullers p. 408, a. For the verse of Shaikh Auhadi read (metre

khafif)

40 ais tal Syd ao SS Be) ts dm gt

where some of my MSS. of the Jam i Jam read jlyy> Ss SS.

“He (the king) writes out at once a money order, when he (the

paymaster) pays him (the poet) out of the two loads of money ordered

by the king, only half a load.”

The verse quoted for the fifth meaning, is given in good MSS. of

Hafiz as follows (metre Mutagarib)—

a Sica eer s we

wy db 3! Ee wy ly ist eg

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 45.

“Where art thou, singer, strike up a tune! By His unity, strike

up a tune!” Vide also Vullers’ Lex. I. p. 920 a., under Wso, But this

verse belongs to Vullers’ sizth meaning. Again, in the fifth meaning,

my MSS. give the second migra’ of Katibi’s Rubd’i as follows :—

cle (ll& tole (dS eye ¢

Hi. For the verses read-— .

Vrlersb 9 Eset 39 HIS 39 39) 9 Sd tS

whol pod lel_aiy G5 2 Ghyasd 5h,

but there are a few verses intervening between the two. The two

causatives WolS5 and yoxSU may saiely be entered in our

Dictionaries.

533 For the first micré’ of Hakim Sézani’s verse read (metre

hazaj) :— ]

LST se it 39S 5% pl y=”

“T do not want to eat the géznut, because, &., where |pT 433! is

old for wT y¢2 51.” Old Persian poets often use |) after the prepositions

xe SN, es isd, Oly.

The words extracted by Vullers from F.—I mean again those

which arenot at the same time marked with B.—are very extraor ore

Examples :— SALT and dma ; dlySsl, a blunder of MoS] ; alt ;

for 8521 ; j4T; PST; SOT; olyT; WogyT; 805T; o95T; nda ia

for CIT; BSS for Siig; ret for Ga]; 4,7, a blunder for

8 =| : BLAST elST and WehST ; JT dial. Kharizmiae, the same as

wols ; but it is Arabic ; sy F for YT; worry ; Sadi dméogh for Sal

dmurgh ; $3 énuk, a blunder for J abuk ; wlsT a blunder for 8)19T, the

vé and hé having been drawn together ; shai? the non plus ultra of a

Persian Infinitive ; 21; CUT and HLT; wleT; Infinitives as WoT

W359°T, Woy, and hundreds more, for WoT, widsf, &e. F.’s

Infinitives, though perhaps correctly formed, have been invented by

grammarians in usw tironum, but they ought not to be given in a

Dictionary ; just as +U ta vacca que semper mulgetur (Vull. p. 408),

sb s vivum facit omne (Vull. p. 495), &c., were invented mm usu

abc dariorum on the C for cow, D for dog principle ! 3

As the above examples are at random taken from the first sixty-five

pages, Persian scholars may estimate the number of useless words and

blunders in Vullers’ Lexicon. |

A6 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

Nor is Vullers happy in his etymologies. The reference to pisang

under Aims, p. 2438, may be learned; but a date-palm is not a

plantain-tree. (a4722, p. 249, does not come from patricius, but from

patriarch. Under yo badrah hastiness, p- 162, Vullers compares

8) rah with 38) rah, mistaking %yol for a Persian word; but the word

is Arabic, and should be pronounced bidirah." =? baksht, p. 197, is

quoted as belonging toa lingua exotica, but itis Persian, and the same as

SOUS (st, Under uy! clover, p. 221, he says, deest in ceteris lexicis ;

it is in every Arabic Dictionary ; just as SJ}33, p, 480, is in every

Turkish Vocabulary. The Sanscrit word under prions, p. 239, may

also be very learned, but it was useless, as the whole word is one of

the FJ.'s blunders.*

Another defect of Vullers’ Lexicon is this, that in case of words

having several forms, the meanings are often given under the wnusual

or doubtful form. Thus, in the case of UssT and Jas, where Vullers

has put the meaning to Js£f, instead of to Jas], for which alone the

Dictionaries give examples. Examples of such displaced meanings

are frequent.

The use which Vullers has made of the Bahari ’Ajam, cannot be

approved of. His extracts are most desultory. In hundreds of cases

he has given the least useful examples, whilst the number of words

which he has altogether omitted—on what principle, I do not know—

is very large. We have only to compare the articles Ue jul, ote jallad,

Sila, ake, gdle, gle, gla, pa, Ube, ov, Windles, sblaeee,

the janndb, julie, cube, Kays cde, let, He, Ube, 9%,

Sle, Glee, 222, 22, Odes, Sater, Ot wes, 44> as given

in Bh. and Vull. Bh.’s valuable notes to some of these words, his fine

articles headed Sly, Aims sore, de, Jue, &c., are entirely left out.

* Jt should be Ar. plow? bassém, smiling ; Khusrau (metre mujtass)—

ales a whit aja SHS ae A aml KePyidy shone oF) 85 Wer

‘¢ The world which in the eyes of wise men is a book of laughter, is not

worth half a smile from the ever-laughing lip of the sweetheart’ —where

the FJ. reads atin bistam, inventing atthe same time the meaning a coral.

Besides it would not be Persian to say lab-i-bistém, a coral lip; it should at

least be Biya laens J , as you say wig dye yo eee Similar mistakes of FJ.,

adopted by B. and Vullers, are J wlwa, a star, for A. |i] anwd, pl. of sy)

MU 5 pase jojam, for the Arabic ec. +> hojam, &e.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 47

In the verses and explanations quoted by Vullers from Bh. we find

the same want of understanding, as in the verses quoted by him

from F,. Examples :—

fe jum, p. 513. For 5) les bahd rdz read }! 4s bahdr az.

&e>, p. 517. Vullers has no idea of what Bh. means. He

reads WT (¥¢,3 yo dar taré i dn, and translates Fructibus recentibus ; but

Bh. has W1c¢93) dar’ tie dn, in the inside of which. Again by-~py2,~

sarpésh, Bh. means a lid, so that ($4 will be the cup or plate, and

f&ax— the lid of it. Hence the nice verse of Tasir, which in Vullers

has neither sense nor metre (Ramal)— i

BP Cost Sr) CHpa~ Athy) Lye 45 righ JS 1 5 Sra US Ke 5} odL

—where the two lips of the sweetheart are compared to a rose and a

rose bud, the latter resting like a lid upon the former, and the scent

of which is used by the zephyrs as provisions for their journey to

paradise. Vullers reads ylo ddr for }! 9 6 az.

aide pp. 519 and 520, c) paedicare. For ws,S ele yo read wo,S

pale}. In the verse read gy}! (AY dish azin, for Wilms. pish azin.

races p. 583. Read AS} for ..6}; else the verse has no metre.

pS p. 534. Read cys; rw unat silliness, for Vullers’ oss 5

zwaunat. This verse is quoted by Bh. as a proof for the word

LaSy vie jangali i yakpé, an animal of a man’s shape, having only

one leg ; it is proverbial for its stupidity. Hence Vullers has left out

the word, but given the verse.

3> p. 535, 8) coll. cose fluvius, et dicitur de aqua quam in

calamo narcissi servare solent, ut narcissus diutius in statu recenti

remanere possit. This isa sad blunder. Bh. has cpSy) 5> jaw-i-

nargis, a grain for the narcissus, not cey>a river. The metre of

Mukhlic i Kashi’s verse (hazaj) shews that we have to read jaw, and

not ju. The grain is put into the cup of the flower to keep it from

shrinking.

The reference in the fifth meaning to the Sharafnémah is also

wrong.

Thus throughout his whole Dictionary.

The mistakes in Vullers arising from his being unacquainted with

Hindustani, deserve a short notice. Hxamples :—

coy |, p- 116, ¢. ¢., cg2y*T. First, the madd of shyt is wrong ;

secondly, CsI is a gold or silver coin of the emperor Akbar.

48 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

yA, p. 184, English, an Englishman. The Persians and Arabs

say dS inglés, the Hindustanis 52 1,1 angréz. We may compare

the modern la JS girjd, a church, with the Portuguese igreja, and the

Greek ekklesia.

Sost p. 140, nom. urbis cujusdam B. It is Oudh, the famous

way or Bara.

gh, p. 155, a kind of wandering Muhammadan monk, KR.

Vullers might have left out this error of Richardson’s. Similar

mistakes are W137, Wimuljf, p. 29, for o> ’azab and Wise ’azabistdn ;

sie bakhtigdré, p. 194, for eS) So pukhtahkdrt Pe p. 197,

for 5> ei bakhshi-i-juz, a deputy paymaster- who serves under the

US egies? bakhshi-r-kul, or paymaster-general ; e*o2, Pp. 204, for

aiwedy badsanj, aS you say errs khushsanj, graceful; 9 94

badzrgart, p. 207, for 575} jy) baregart, or 5753} yy? barzahgart ; Lind,

p. 239, an Indian spelling for Stn! bastah ; yrSis bashgir, Pp. 246, for

Sok peshgir ; Gils béldg, p. 303, for pathy yéldg ; Sly and

2k, p. 328, for Kids and RppAy, &e. |

as, p. 269, nom. magnae urbis et olim metropolis in Hindustan.

This absurdity is supplied by F.

éles, p. 287; the extract from Richardson, with the exception of

the meaning, @ violin, is correct. The word is Hindee, but occurs very

_ often in Indian Historians. It is a purse of money kept at court for

paying alms, rewards, We.

<9 bilach, p. 279; this should be o 143 pulaj.

&Jy3 p. 384. This is the Hind. 353 péld, a word often applied to

fruits.

a3, p. 406. This +s the Hind. term for pulex communis.

Jysi3, p. 465. 3) nom. arcis in Hindustan, B., nomine jv)

zantambir celebris, F. This absurdity is, of course, supplied by F.

It should be yyeh¥y rantanbhir, as correctly given by FJ., or Rintam-

bore.

33 tob, p. 475; Vull. does not understand the Hind. wl43 thdn, a

piece of cloth of a fixed number of yards, Germ. eine Webe.

_yS> p. 521, the same as WHE, 4 squall.

slfulge, p. 543. Vullers in his extract from Bh. writes twice

wlyetls shdyjahan, tor wl =*ls Shdhjahdn, the famous emperor ‘of

India. Iam afraid Vullers has not understood Bh.’s phrase

y adygkve abTolks aed hs obit por* Lol

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 49

“Tt is from obstinacy that the Persians call this town Jahanabad,

and not Shah-jahénaébad.” The emperor Shahjahan was often ridiculed

by the Persians for assuming the title Shah of the world. Even the

then Sultan of Constantinople ( ¢9) y's ) made once in a letter a

satirical remark on the emperor’s magniloquence, when his clever

court poet Kalim got him out of the difficulty by composing an ode,

in which the following verse occurs (metre muszari’)—

awa] od, 40 sh=* Cs wlbs 1 koe Wray War9d7% oO£59)) wh > 3 AD

“The words o® (5-4 50+ 4 = 59) and ve (83 +54+1+4

“50 = 59) are in point of value the same; hence the emperor has a

clear right to the title Shdhjahén.” For this clever verse Kalim

received from the “1g his weight in gold, and his ode was sent to

Constantinople.

iz chappar, p. 560; this word is the Hind. ,¢—-chhappar.

Uixse chétal. p. 607, This isa mistake often to be met with in

Persian books printed in Europe. The correct form is Usas, with a

ge jim. The word is spelt by Abulfaszl in the A.A., p. 27, 1.4.

Nor is it a nwmus cuprinus, but an imaginary division of a ddém, one

silver Rupee (of Akbar) being equivalent to forty copper dams.

“ Accountants have divided the dém into 25 jetdls.” A.A., 1. c.

cs'i9, p. 918, a coin, the 8th of a gold muhur. Thus Vullers

from Johnson. It is the eighth part of a rupee, not ofa gold muhur,

oy To90, did dlid, p. 923, 8) n. s. nom. magni oppidi in Hindustan

F. sine exemplo. This absurdity islikewise supplied by the praeclarum

opus of F. » Whoever heard of a town Déddlid in India? It a blunder

for obfedss Daulatibdd.

JS, II. p. 797; a reference to J3,5 was required. So likewise,

p. 920, under Js5, to Wyes ; and under 3)93, p. 479 b., 1. 24., to 39-43.

- Vullers is also most unfortunate with his wlWle}, As the Iszéfat

of the Persians is very badly treated in the existing Persian grammars,

I trust I shall be excused for inserting here a few notes on the fakk

4 Iszdfat ( $l} Ss ), or the omission of the Iszdfat, reserving some of

Vullers’ mistakes for foot notes.

The Iszafat is omitted

a, Alter wale » we, als, yrs, salt, Ib. phe, pans (not i in

prose), sli ; as—Jorale, Stes ates = ~ an admiral, Sig} 00

7 |

50- Contributions to Persian Lesicography. [No. 1,

ve) 9

the keeper of the wardrobe ; Sa Gale a passionate hunter, =" gets,

Be te) 9

od Gls, sol ele ; aad wes a foe of science, laa wyeo a foe of

decency ; eS (JL the representative of God’s mercy on earth (@

flattering epithet for kings), wert gfy wali ni’mat, a benefactor ;

OE cstd a Viceroy ; similarly, ered Ls one who acts for another ; (.5)_»~3

2) .

aie x ‘ 25 RR Z

andugy2) > pws a beautiful boy, 3! _»~2, las ed FOGLE xL Shahjahaén,

josgsls a harbour-master (in poetry the 8 in sL& would have the nimfat-

hah); ol 9082 whe an Indian sweetheart.

b. After_», Cyd. wl yo, Sst, rtd; a—erey™, KRY pws, Sy,

Jiro, Bly, Xpina wo, ylodd_ry the space behind a wall, 4:95 2,

lscy~g the day of judgment, S2)9> Ur? leavings (Indian usage) ;

&Lwke; the same as yigh® and ar -aiter Us} in Js}, in the

beginning of the night, )») Jol, wordw,a Jy! the first of the worship-

pers. The last is poetical usage—

ee falfoibwys yl 8 whe etl Sy2 29 am ited Km

(Sa’di) “ What can be the secret of the figure of this rdol (ot Somnath,

which moved itshands), the fi st worshipper of which Iam ?—where

the metre (Mutaqarib) requires the omission of the Iszafat after Js}. Also

B95 eyolo ddman koh, the side of a mountain, for % iss, urels ddman i koh*

c. In compounds often used (Slyrino} as ) as, WS a pomegranate ;

ww0IT water for the ceremonial ablution ; ySs) sugarcane ; ws

a night attack ; sti bus sag-dbi a seal, &e.; for bd, ee eT, SO Ess

&c. Thus also 91 dbri (pr. the lustre of the face) honor, HL»

rizbdzdr, the flourishing state of the market, flourishing circum-

stances.t Many of these words are even written in one word.

* The pretty little linen draper, the pretty little butcher boy. As our poets

speak of Jane of the mull, the fair dairy maid, &., so do modern Persian poets

speak of pretty boys belonging to the Trade.

+ Both words are wrongly marked in Vullers’ Dict. with the Iszdfat. In

poetry, of course, they have the Nimfathah,

Similarly, II. p. 79b., ENS kér 4 giyd, which be translates rew ; but LS ig,

or better 4s ) {¥,with the Iszdfat, means regnum, the business Gs) of alas (not LS)

or prince ; but lS yg, without the Iszdfat,° (for Wess ) means ven, and the

derived abstr. n s Las jif regnwm. It is plain that this abstr. noun could never

have been formed from Vullers’ LS Ig kar i giya vew.

Reversely, KL, a sly, p. 163, must have the Iszdfat, bad i shwrtah, as correctly

given in Johnson. Vullers’ remark regarding the Iszdfat, on p. vii. of his

preface, has no sense,

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 52

The Kasrat-i-Isti’mdl explains also the omission of the Iszafat in

mames 5 aS, wyd> ede Ghulam Husain, for Ghulém-i- Husain.

d. After uy bin son; as, (Sa’di) (5) oe on Sy! SLU) Atabak

Abubakr bin Sa’d i Zangi.

This is not absolutely necessary in prose. The Persians use even

the form «|, with the alif, when followed by the name of the father.

Hence it would not be wrong to say, (50) om Gls 92! Abtibakr

ibn i Sa’d i Zangi. ;

~-e. Under the influence of an alif i wacl. This is poetical; a

- Ipwe, (0 Lye, Sloile sys UP> ly, Oya el ; ; for yousie~ beside you,

jlotle, _yoy5 wr cst the price of such a jewel, wld mleccly one who

reads (elegies on Husain) sitting at the foot of a banner (as used by

the Shi'ahs during the Muharram.)

f. After a hidden 8 ( ghia ole ). This is poetical usage, and not

found in modern poets ; as, Jos prod, jl SagS, Clpd Kole, yy) Sete,

for Joico fed, jb days,

g. Before o53| God ; as, oF! ay bandmizid ( uplaclas ), xxl plow

stpdsizid, the praise of God. This is poetical usage.

h. After 45, as brw4 tah basit, for tah i bastt, the dust below a

mat ; 4,24 tah jur’ah, the last of the cup.

i. Alter the preposition (¢} z/towards, as Ba 8S yy cs) 2 daggah v tu

(Mir Mu’izz), towards thy throne, for 33 yo s3- The word «53 does

not occur after Sa’di.

k. In rons 999 kafar ni’mat, ungrateful ; SILLIG sdlis saldsah, a

Christian (Niz).

1 After we J; as, soy rr us) ae cp we. This occurs

sometimes in poetry for 34) y~< man i bandah, I your slave. The word

cs) does not occur after the time of Jami.

_ m. After nouns ending in alif or wdw. Thus, grb 9SIe haldki

mal’un the accursed Haliku, .53,% Lixo! Amind Harawi,* tor wgx0 Co5S dle

| and Csr cso}, which would not be wrong.

VL.

Iconclude this paper with afew notes taken at random from

marginal remarks made by me to several Dictionaries at the time of

reading. Ifit be not presumptuous on my part, I would point out that

* The Alif at the end of proper nouns is modern Irani usage. Thus Lasls

3, Lala” Lilo, for ail, (2) &

52 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

notes such as the following in form of an index, ought to accompany

the Persian text of every book now-a-days printed ; for the compilation

ofa reliable Dictionary, based upon a knowledge of the Persian language,

must necessarily be the work of many. |

wlobT cultivated. You say oy WIshT 1 xe Ex! he buclt this town.

Also, O55 wlsbT Geiss eb lye wil he built this town and called it

after his name.

&i3L7 Abditah, made of canvass. In Indian books mostly without

the Madd. Indian Historians use the word as a noun, the same

as abdft, canvass. ‘The forms wT dbaft and 2:7 dbaftah appear to

be more in use than wal dbdft and ssbT dbdftah.

LegeeT Abjosh gravy. Also, dried raisins. (+S kishmash is a

smaller kind. 2° munagqgais the best kind of dried raisins. 535”

mowéz is a general term, dried raisins.

col pderue cot Adam i haft-hazért. People say that the number of

inhabitants on earth at the death of Adam, had reached the number

of seven thousand.

Woy). Vullers and several inferior Indian Dictionaries maintain that

4zurdan is wrong, and 4zardan correct, as the word is a contraction

for WyljT. But 8))7 dzurd occurs in rhyme with s,*y3, ores, and

is analogous to syed shumurdan, Wry” shumardan and Woxybes,

We yd and Wdybs9, Wow and Wy lw, Ge.

worl)? drdémidan, transitive and intransitive. You say

soils wlos wwe Jo, or, ath wl b ase Jo.

«wt ds, a millstone. You say Wsy5_»T Hale to grind corn.

sr] dséb, corporeal pain. ayo dard, both corporeal and mental

pain.

WoT and wo jleT to begin. The word is constructed with the

accusative, or with & r.

worl] dftdbédan, to become red like the sun. Infinitives in ¢dan are

formed from Arabic and Persian nouns. Examples -— wosrlb to require,

Woregd to understand, woya) to dance, woss,lé (Niz.) to plunder,

woasls to swallow down, Wo2%9lb to rise (sun), woasy? to die (Ttranian

usage), woase to go to Mecca, woaiyoo to go to Madinah, W>2,+* and

wos, 0b/* to visit the tombs of Omar and Abibakr, Wo4ssb the same as

* For Woy |. The form with the Alif occurs frequently in this

name Similarly Og yale bdyaxtd, for dssd9¢I abi yaztd, the famous saint of

Bistam.

1868. ] oCntributions to Persiani Lexcography. 58

Wr ySSipb, Woy,X the same as wWs,S Se, worsly> the same as

widy 31 eb>, wos) the same as wy, WErtd the same as ways Aya,

sett gens the same as epi SL) eam, Woew thesameas wo 5 aw,

ws¢” the same as wo® gle. Khusrau (metre Hazaj)

coal pes ee Oahae ol ge poder posleT Com 5

wox], You say WoTys Gly& 5] to get up, and WsysTo GlyS 5! to

rouse up. We might expect W»*T, bar-dmadan, but this is not

idiomatic. Nizami,—GhdA 41255 oxTjs ursob. So also AA,,

p. 251, 1.3.

est9f. The compound ¢%)j )o means fo fight and to make fight.

Vide A.A. p. 205,1.9. The nouns 85357 dwézah and G29] dwézish

mean a fight, a battle. Also, a fight between animals.

SLT dydz, or SLI dydz, or _»4| dyds, the name of a slave of Mahmid

of Ghazni. He is proverbial in the East for his faithfulness. The

form dydz is the usual form. There exists a Masnawi by Maulana

Zuléli of Khwansari, entitled Mahmid o Aydz. Huzni of Ictahan

(metre Ramal)

awd obyT 9 889 oly Biddy) SL ft pane rmaS ok hs ago? Salix ot) 3,8

“ Whether it be Ay4z or Mahmid, here (on the path of love) his

duty is slavish obedience; love ties with the same string the toot of

the slave and the freeman.”

ws] din, manner, method ; as, coy | ij the manner of governing

adopted by Akbar. Also, one’s duties, official work ; as, Ulys95 ssi

oS ody ot oT sly owl “Ti there be no kotwal, he (the

collector) will perform his duties. The plural 447 means orders,

laws, the same as ats as, Cprro csledat] dinhd <¢ mugaddas, the

orders of the king. Hence the dim (singular) i Akbari is divided

into several dins.

sles) ittiedf. This word is constr. with Gis and &, You

say Wdjy Gbas} tsps he possessed piety.

&S3} athkah, or 63) atgah, a foster father. The latter form of this

Chagatéi word is given in the Calcutta Chagatai Dictionary. As

8&5 kdkah and PUSS kokultdsh, a foster brother, it often occurs as

atitle. Thus wA&S) atgah khan, the name of Shamsuddin Muham-

mad, whose son, Khan i A’zam Mirza Kokah, was Akbar’s foster

brother.

ss ahkdmt, adj. In Indian writers the same as BOF nujimé,

54 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

referring to Astronomy. Thus wha) 24, the same as wbesiegyt

tdrtkh + munajjemdn, the era of the astrologers.

ody arshad, superlative of ox), often used by Indian writers as an

epithet for a son.

S31 artak. The form S391 cirtak also occurs in MSS. A quilted

horse-cloth. The word which is often used by Indian | writers, is

explained in the AA., p, 142, 1.19, asa spoTasiy Ciseo, a piece of

chintz stuffed with cotton.

ae S53), artak i kajim, or according to the Chagatai form,

eae h3)| artak-i-kejam, the quilt upon which the coat of mail of the

elephant is placed. AA., p. 124, 1. 3.

esl asp. The form —»| asb is the Iranian form. It occurs in

the Bostén in rhyme with GS kasb, whilst no Persian poet

would rhyme kasb with asp. The-Tranian Surari quotes also several

verses, where it is rhymed with qniS)3], which itself stands in the

35 sh wo HI des, not PO

The Indian Madar gives distinctly ce ¥ ch lb. Mirza Tbrahim in his

grammar has everywhere asb. : F

_yi| astar, a mule, Hind. wt: which word is also used by Indian

writers. Fir’awn was the first that bred mules. The belief in the

East is that the mule is not sterile, but dies in foaling. Hence a

mule is compared to a man who is liberal beyond his means. Khusrau

(metre Muszari’)

OLS lobe wipers sh arked teh Cosel ees rmdi| 8I See yD gly 39>

‘Tf the liberality of a liberal man is unnatural, it is his death, just

as the female mule dies when she brings forth a foal.””* Observe also

that the metre requires the omission of the Tashdid in the word kurah,

In accordance with this idea, farmers are said to place a ale over

the vulva of the mule, in order to prevent gestation, a practice to

which Khaqéni several times alludes. Thus in the Tuhfat ul ’Traqain,

in speaking of the sun, through whose agency all metals and precious

stones are called into existence, he says (metre Hazaj)

[oooh da Eyelet co? 33 51) GY

« Through thee (O sun), the vulva of the mule is closed with a lock

* This corrects the reading in Vullers’ Dictionary, II. p. 826.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 55

(or ring) of gold ; and through thee the neck of the ass has an orna-

ment of rubies.

wolis| wftddan. The spelling ws'43) is an ancient plena scriptio,

which in wolu. | has become the usual form, although woli.! is

pronounced. The older Indian Dictionaries, as the Sh., Mu., Ma.

mention the pronunciation aftadan as having then prevailed in India.

You say ois Bid 9) las Ste Cys! It costs a rupee ; ois) Fly) HI Updos oF

alo cely he takes care that the land does not fall off in cultivation ;

8slk3} G40} land no longer cultivated; Gy} E83 the state of

being waste land; o44; lo; 59 jl) the secret becomes public;

Os} 51,2 9 OLAS peer ists] 31, 51 from childhood he made

verses and lived in ’Iraq, A.A. p. 251.

js! aghydr, plural of xe. The word occurs used as singular, a

rival, Hayati of Gilan (metre Ramal)

rmsd last | woS et by obey GD aed Cpyt U2! pot 5!

““Tnconstant lovers are hostile to each other on account of the

Inconstancy.of their love; in true love no one has a rival.” Vide

ers bulhawas. Similarly, los} a’dd, pl. of ’aduww, occurs used as a

singular. *Umar i khayyam (Ruba’l)

eae LEN Ny Utd AF Bol 9B OLS Seely 9 HE J! WIWIS*y 6 ),52° .0

camelyy SF fy gOS yd ygS? AU) yg Semel Cra 90° gn AF phils Wee

“ T drink wine, and opponents from the right and left cry out to me,

‘Don’t drink wine ; it is the foe of faith.’ Since I have learned that

wine is the foe of faith, I must drink the red blood of the foe; for

this is lawful.”” In the third micra’ we have to pronounce ’aduww,

and in the fourth adi.

<»o3| agdas. In Indian writers the same as royal. So also aie

mugaddas and esos qudst. uses wt) dzdt-i-qudst, the royal person.

ely! ilzdm, ¢. WoyS, Wold, to make a thing ldzim or compulsory ; hence

to force, to overcome, todefeat inplay. Soalso, Wow pS ch mulzim-

i-kasé shudan = woe HJle, ’Urii (metre Ramal)

poe wy Cane| oy 29> FOR eas ~ by cite a a2} las ws>

« When by way of play I defeat the literary writers (who hold the doc-

trine of the jauhar-i-faurd, @.e., the atomic theory, which the hukama

do not), the jauhar i-fard (here = the mouth of the sweetheart) smiles,

and proves the divisibility, (because the lips in smiling divide).”

56 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

pled! dlmas, a diamond. ‘The idea is prevalent in the Hast that

diamond dust is a deadly poison. Faiszi, (metre Ramal)

wikxe Wie 52) 99 Crlell Sor ad A512! peppers” cea to te?

“Do not ask to know the ingredients of the antidote against love;

they mix diamond dust into a deadly poison.”’

wks al umm 7 ghilan, im Persian generally wilaexe mughilan, the babil

tree, a kind of acacia. The pronunciation mughailan, given by Burhan,

is unsupported ; the word occurs in rhyme with wilss filin elephants.

The ashes of mughilan wood are largely used in the Hast for refining

gold and silver, whilst the thorns of the tree have become proverbial ;

hence fig., the dangerous obstacles on the road of love. Cairafi of

Sawah (metre Hazaj-i-sdlim)

pndasc IS aston al wo palin Rae 4355 poze &i25 8) }

“ Tye road towards the ka’bah (of love) is forbidden ; else I would

gladly direct thither my feet, not caring for the wounds which the sole

of my foot would get from the acacia thorns of the road’’—in allusion to

the law which prohibits Muhammadans from sleeping with their feet

stretched in the direction of Mecca, which would be disrespectful.

Judai of Tabriz (metre Munsarih) |

3 wy dare ld ples Lb ri 3! why Gas cmt! KART putt cage

“The beauty of the sweethearts is a ka’bah; love the desert

(through which the wanderer has to pass); the obstinacy of the

wretches (the 33), the watcher), the acacia thorns of the road.”

sho imkdnt, adj., human, referring to man. God is ogee oly

necessary ; man 1s dees lle mumkin ulwujid, possible ; idols are

dpayl eter impossible. Hence csilSe ol antsy human efforts.

eyo! andarin, pr. in this, within this. This word is, however, often

used asa preposition, wthin = jy}. Observe that in this case it

cannot take the e3l~I, just as ply bindbar, or ety? _y® nazar barin, on

account of. Payami (metre Mujtass)

he Erol KS KI Gyo Luo gs sls" jp &S el gos cot eg

Tam living in a world where my Yusuf would be better in the

pit than in the bazar,” —where Yusuf = life, the pit = non-existence,

the bazar == existence.

ts col anfust o afagi, referring to the spiritual (anfusi )

and to the visible world (4faqi). Hence mard-i-afust o dfdgt, a man

who ‘looks upon life as something agreeable, but who at the —

1868.] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 57

same time strives to grasp the idea of Godhead. Such a man is

both (.24e3 ta’allugi, attached to this world, and (sd y5) tajarrudt

(or &ivy!y wdérastah) independent of it. A.A. p. 49, 1. 17.

cil eel angushtart bdzt. The players sit in a circle and pass on

a ring. The person standing in the middle has to find the ring.

If he says to one G2 poch, empty, whilst that person has the ring, he

is 8» bwrdah, defeated, and must continue searching for the ring.

Vide Vullers’ II., p. 802, s. bad kachah. Tashbihi of Kaéshan (metre

Hazaj)

Got ols Gee wit Smo hy Ty Ula eT y whe Ot emo 99

“ Both worlds are empty and have nothing concealed in their hands ;

I have the ring (of true love); every thing else is empty.”

Ju} él.. Indian writers use this word in the phrase woe Ub} WLAs vw

the rebels became again obedient. MSS. have often Ukly wdil, pres.

part. of Jfy wa-l.

wei! éman. The fathah of the mim is the same as the fathah in

kafar, Hétam, &e., for kéfir, Hdtvim, whilst the first syllable is a

common Imélah. Hence the word is a corruption of «°] din.

eislh bakhtan, 1, to play; 2, to lose a game, opp. Wey? burdan

to wina game. Shikébi of Icfahén (Rubé’i)

semi lee WF HRY WT Erol SmiddL Gap 8S Yael oy!

rw dS | Out csly? LPNS) 79 Sowgy Gytlaed 3 Use vy

“The world is a nard play, the winning of which is a loss; skilful

nard playing consists in being satisfied with a low throw. The

world resembles the two dice of the nard play—you take them into

your hands to throw them down again.” Paydmi (metre Ramal)

wFEL wt a5 low Ga yal yhso jp ollie 5 oil aaa

“ Fate cheats in play and takes back what it lost; one cannot play

with a companion that practises such tricks.”

Observe that in the first example, the word (4% nagsh means the

dots on the dice. The dice used in India are rarely cubical, but long,

because the four long sides only are used.

Py yb bérgir, the same as ye! asp, and os ys bdrgt, a horse.

2. A slave, Hind. 4h. chélah, Muc. Bh. 3. pS b Gyo

harf-r-bérgir, an expletive particle. Zésir (metre Muszari’)—

cans} yy? 913} AS So wye—“' Like an expletive particle, pleonastic

58 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

and merely repeated.” Compare ells 353, which has the same meaning.

ge rézdr. This word is often used in the sense of a noisy place.

Hayati of Gilan (metre Ramal)

scone Ia why UBM ob AY wnt) SL ye wr! camel GARE C59F

«This is love’s lane, but not a bazar; hush, you must not talk here.”

widlh;b bdzydft, stoppages, a fine. Synonyms are, U| 50 tdwdn, boys

jurménah, ES yoo sarshikan, 0] 56 ghardmat, ees wasza’,and raw] gL

bézkhwést. The last word is a general term and may also mean a de-

mand for rendering a satisfactory account ; wwe! gL 59) r6z-t-bdzkhwast,

the day of reckoning; Yl» Wyre camel gash bdzkhwast-i-sarkar 4

wéld that which is due to the state ; hence taxes. Sloe, el 5, wis

signify @ fine; you say oS 5H) eh, S Slope ; wsljb and @%) mean

stoppages, deductions from salaries, &c. You say Wlailve dalo day

de> sj three months’ wages of the grooms are deducted ;

do B29 pl I &-Lyalo hom pad the filth part of the monthly

allowance of the Amir is stopped ; oils walyh pol slob bole

the collector makes a deduction according to the difference in weight

(of coins brought by the peasants). The meaning _yl> waljl in

Vullers (from Richardson) is doubtful. Sharshikan is generally used

in the sense of military stoppages to which a whole squadron is

condemned. For example, A.A. p. 993, Jia

DiS plete Saye) WSS yw wldyed y! do GOL ES: ort

“Tfa trooper be found to be without his horse, he (the faujdar)

gives him a new one, charging the price to his squad in equal propor-

tions.” |

jt burdngar, the right wing, JUs3 golthe centre, yiygm chti-

rangédr the left wing of an army. ‘These are the usual spellings.

Other forms are yet barangar, ybsy burungar, as in the Chagatai

vocabulary published ‘at Calcutta, and #1, brangar (asin Zenker’s

vocabulary). For rIhee, we also find jy 9>, jurangar, with ajim.

Vullers’ form jlet>> juwdngar, with a wdw, is not in my dictionaries.

Another Turkish word often used by Indian writers, 1s Pi: ->acharkhcht

an avantguard; a foraging party. As the article in Vellers, p. 569,

has no sense, I transcribe part of the article in the Muct. and Bh.

zt sb® o 99 Kat sdiber csbiptle v0 SFP

“Phe word charkhché occurs in the book entitled ’Alam-ara, by

1868.] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 59

Sikandar Bég, in the sense of faw 7 hardwal, an avantguard. Asr

(metre Hazaj)

coils Lupo at gylive opinae RSL” 2375 Gs SA yeulore}y) owt sity] St

“Tf on the day of battle thy voice is the al the opponent

is easily defeated by the Muslims.” From some commentary I have

copied the following passage—

9 care GL! wy9] sb? B04 foe SH 3 So 49 Zine) Gee

N95 seh soi

Hence a foraging party. As Vullers did not understand Bh., he

might have left out his etymology. The word is connected with the

T. Se chirik and 23,> chirtk, vide Vullers, I. p. 572.

The T. S54 bulk, a troop, is likewise of frequent occurrence ; only

the pl. is not buldkdn, as in Vullers, but wl buldkdt.

cs¥soy burd o bai, or cs'a soy burd o pdi, or dytacsl bdi o burd.

This word, which is often used by Indian Historians, means betting

on fighting rams or other animals. The margins of MSS. generally

explain it by the Hind. s)ls, which has the same meaning. I do

not know the meaning of cs baz. At the courts of the Mogul emperors

betting on animals was carried on to a great extent. Akbar had to

‘pass several limiting laws.

wey barhaman. In the poetry of Hindustan and the later poets

of Persia, the Brahmin is enamoured of the eve canam, in the same

way as the nightingale of the rose ; the atom (3)5) and the chamelion

(4,=) of the sun; the 444s, or the 9)54, of the 4. sarw ; and the

moth of the candle. The following verse is sufistic (metre Ramal)—

Oi} AhAles ody y pbc Wp AR!Iy) Cract Ss Gythre yg Gale micsda sy

‘Tn reality there is no difference between the lover and the object

loved—idle thinkers speak of the idol as distinct from the Brahmin.”

The verse requires the pronunciation barhaman, not brahman or

barahman.

cso%) bughdi, a kind of camel of high cost. So Shaksp. It would

be more correct to say dromedary. The Bactrian camel with two humps

(4590 dokuhanf) is called in T._%, 23x, OF, ye bughur. The latter

word is used by Indian historians, but is often confounded in the MSS.

with the Arab. 3%) ba’ér. Zenker’s Turkish vocabulary gives the plena

scriptio »»*9, but he translates a dromedary, instead of a Bactrian

camel,

60 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

ive bulhawas. Tt is wrong to derive this word from the P.

prefix Jy bul much, as some Indian grammarians and lexicographers

have done, whose opinion Vullers adopts. It is another spelling for

crgvly. This is also confirmed by the fact that but bulhawas occurs,

and not bulhds, whilst hés is a Persian tacarruf of the Arab. hawas.

Again, the few real Persian compounds with bu/ are all ancient.

The personel of Persian love poetry consists of the pls, the & Span,

the oal3 gdgid, the p33) ragid (or weds or (£0 mudda’l) who watches

over the ma’shigq, and lastly, outsiders. Among the latter are those

who are o4|} zdhid abstemious, indifferent to love, and those who are

cexcly bulhawas, who possess no ars, but Cx»? hawas. "Ishq is

eity re batéiuezawdl constant ; hawas is transient, Sig er sart’

uzzawdl, though passionate.

uss dish more. This word is followed by 31; j4 oo jlu#s more

than a hundred times. But 5! may be left out, when (* stands after

the numeral; as jy xe more than a hundred times. A hundred

times more would be Xo gl ove cad bar i digar.

coy pai. In pre-classical Persian we never find os, (69), CS, and

Imperatives as (gles, cole, dvc., without the cs- During the classi-

cal period the os ig often thrown away. In modern Persian the

forms without the cs¢ are the usual forms. Hence the modern adjective

claly pa-hisab subject to rendering aw account, in the Indian phrase

Ws Sclwaly ly aS. Similarly, taxes are the wdble ily paranj 1

saltanat. In compounds, when osly is not followed by a genitive, the

shortened form (.2 pai is often preferred ; oy Es? VIO? uD y> not every

one cares for it; Woy! S pes? to go straight at a thing, to understand

the essence of a thing; Ws d9224) cst to strive to reach the

goal; but way%| Ae? U4, csly, the same. csly occurs also

adverbially, under, the same as Wk yo, or ws is dar taht; e. 9.

Swag) RO9O_y> ab sly jlolyest cb the collector writes the name of

every Tahgildar below the name of the village.

wriySyl4y pdo gosht. What Vullers has copied from Richardson is

wrong. ‘The word means 1 flesh, and is the name ofa regulation of

the emperor Akbar by which he wished to determine the fatness, or

otherwise, of an animal in proportion to the quantity of food given, vide

A.A. p. 163. slg is Hind.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 61

& 53 parchah, for &>)l4. This form I have only seen in Indian

writers. The author of the Mir-at ul Alam uses it frequently.

83,4 pardah means 1. a screen; 2. the place behind a screen;

hence Gs%o,3 a woman of good family; 3x3 yo behind the

screen; 3. the thin membranes in limes, pomegranates, &c., vide

A.A. p. 80,1 6. As yb so does also So, take the meaning of

the king’s court ; hence, in Indian writers, (¢5|)]8dy3 the adorning of the

court, doing something for the pomp of the court. © 08,9 pardah

dari a tearing of the screen, the exposure of a secret ; A.A. p. 198, 1. 20.

Ws parridan and paridan. To fly. Also, to evaporate (scents).

Similarly o9) dla 5! 29 9! Cex its smell remarns long in the clothes.

Scents, colours are 4 yo dérpd, lasting, fast.

yl euity pusht khdr, a hand made of ivory and fixed to a

stick. This instrument, which is very common in India, is used for

scratching (Wo4)|S) one’s back. A larger kind of this instrument

is used as a war club, in which case the whole, or only the

hand, is made of iron; vide A A. p. 122,1. 1. The shape of the

hand is either fist-like, or half extended with the fingers bent.

wring l& is, of course, a back with Ahdrs or scratchers, hence a

hedgehog. Observe that in the Indo-Germanic languages the last

component of a compound expresses its genus, and the first its

particular properties.

Other compounds of pusht are EUs pusht tang, 7. e., something

tight for the back; hence, a broad girth for fixing the saddle, A.A.

p. 148, 1. 8. The word is given in Vullers, on p. 364, but his spelling

Sib, pushtank is wrong. GeSeby pushtgarmé, support, assis-

tance. Sarmadf of Icfahan (metre Mujtass)

pists lem Sq Surry goeySeenthy 69 tay a8! leg wlear ZshdeS 5

“What have I done to myself in the heat of transgression (Whes,

as aye, Elo, csiles), ive, sl Jove) ; with the help of God’s

mercy, what crimes have I committed !

cts palds, the coarse stuff used for making moneybags. The adj.

swt palast means like palds ; but the adj. erly paldsin, made of

palds, as wiwdly &maS. The same distinction holds for ¢g92] and wy] ;

csool§ and Gd, we,

62 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

sy pinjarah lattice work, framework, used for hedging in

flower beds, or as supports for creepers ( 3ly bayérah*). Pieces of

wood or bamboo are stuck into the ground, at proper intervals,

and cross-pieces are tied to them. The shape of the interstices may

be varied by differently arranging the sticks. In the kind called

coiee jafari, each interstice is a rhombus, the sticks being placed

obliquely, but parallel, into the ground, and so also the cross-sticks,

which incline, however, to the other side. In ge yh shatranji, the

pieces stand at right-angles to each other. More costly are the kinds

ES gird, where the interstices present the appearance of a square with

a circle inscribed in it ;_ >» Ue shash-sar hexagonal, y33}jlo duwdzdah-

sar twelve-sided. The ja’faré and shatranjt may be cshegyte ghair

wacli, not tied, where the sticks are not tied to each other with

strings; the other kinds are usey wagli, as strings are required.

In Vullers’ article ¢¢ 5 PR, p. 517, the third meaning is the same

as the fifth ; Shakspeare’s etymology from B Ads is wrong.

wle® péchdn, 1. twisting; 2. twisted. The passive meaning seems

to be the usual meaning. Sanjar of Kashan (metre Rajaz)

iz 39 OIG Lng p05 52 IER LS

“(LT come from the monastery) with the cord tied round the waist,

and the gong under my arm.” Vide another example in Vull. I. p. 597,

1.1. Similarly bls shindsd knowing, and pass., known, as shales .

but the passive meaning is rare; vide A.A. p. 284, 1. 75 tytoy

pidzird, accepting, and accepted.

sig ty piri pambah a scarecrow. Vullers’ meaning is unsup-

ported.

ailers paimdnah. The paimdnah is larger than the coe.

ww tabin, Inf. I. of Gt vide Lane’s Ar. Dict. p. 9. ¢., a leading

on, the same a8 (s9yh} Purrawe. Indian Historians use this word as an

ism i fail, SOS ogy, a leader, pl. wht tdbindt leaders, officers ; vide

Ao GAGE, 117; p. 198, 1b 1. Gdb yO tdbin bashi a superior

commanding officer, p. 196, 1. 20. Thus also often in the Padishah-

namah.

* Vullers has s. % yas a reference to Kgs botah ; but botah is not a creeper .

it is a plant capable of standing without support.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 63

14 tiérikh. Native lexicographists derive this word from oo

muarrakh, which is supposed to be corruption of the Pers. }9)sle

milriz, or 33,98 mah o riz, an era, calendar; Germ. Zeitrechnung.

Others derive it from the Arab. eb! irdkh, the wild cow (gaw i wahshf),

an animal proverbial in the Hast for its stupidity. They then explain

tdrikh as meaning the removal of stupidity, hence rendering certain,

fixing anything.

The custom of fixing the tarikh of an event by a word, or sentence,

or a migra’, or a whole verse, is said to date from the sixth or seventh

century of the Hijrah. Before this, meaningless words were used

composed of the hwrtifi albjad. Thus in the case of Abti Sina, the

Nicab ugcibyan (vide above, P. 7, No. 65) has the following verses—

ares poe it Oey ee 9 aw lent Galt ee

ayo2 le onl oF 55 59 aS ela ple US lad yg

* Aba ’Ali Sina was born in ex, ” A. H. 373, finished his studies in

Las, or 391, and died in 58, or 427. Such tarikhs are no longer used.

The modern tarikhs are either GL° mutlag, or &4e25 ta’miyah. The

former kind extends over a whole micra’ or verse, as j| Sis

d75 yRao exe we. The latter kind may be ay& khariji, in excess,

when something is to be subtracted, or .hdto dékhili, when something

is to be added. For example—(metre Mujtass)

gla a5} wo? 5 Sydlo apas CAI,

in which the words sls S| w5s give A. H. 1015; but as the maldik

subtract one alif, we get A. H.1014. The phrase woxis di, or

WARS Khaw s | is explained by the authors of the Muet. and Bh, as

referring to a custom of lovers, dervishes, mourners, G&e., to cut the

skin of the chest, the wound having the shape of an alif.

es4 eb ndm ¢ térikhé, an additional name which parents give their

children, in order to remind them of the year in which they were

born—a very necessary thing in the Hast, where few people know

their correct age. Thus, if a Muhammadan be born A.*H. 1255, he

may assume the name of ,./+ ,¢b«o Mazhar Alt, in addition to his own

name, as the value of the letters when added will be found to

be 1255.

“yS tabar, an axe, a hatchet ; also a war axe. If the war axe has the

shape of a pointed wedge, like the bill of a bird, it is called Jy i}}

zdghnol, pr. a crow-beak, Ji the zaghnol has joined to it a common

64 Contributions to Persian Lesxicography. [No. I,

axe, the weapon is called Seicij 3 tabar zghnol. If the axe has an

anvil-like piece of iron attached, it is called Gus + tabar-takhmaq, from

the T. 34553 a hammer. Under J5i51} in Vullers, IL, p. 106, a.,

read ef securis bellicae, for et sagittwe bellicae, the Delhi edition of

Bh. having wrong jthp~ _»¥ tir 7 sartez, instead of tabar i sar-téz.

Juy=? tahwil, to hand over, to give in charge ; hence » joy sy? tahwildér

a cash keeper. Akbar had for his household a JS logge? tahwilddr 4

kull, who gave advances to the various >> jlolags? tahwilddr 1 juz.

The latter furnished workmen, the people of the Harem, &c., with

money for which they took receipts. The tahwilddr a kull stood under

the Js CE I> khizdnché i kull the Treasurer General. colig? tahwilt —

deposited, handed over (money); hence a deposit. sie Jas fil t

tahwili, a new elephant waiting to be handed over to the officer in

charge of a sale halgah, (elephants which have the same value). The

word y=? pl. dy sgl, or dhs, means also a deposit ; a “ transfer’’

of money.

VIL.

ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.

Page 5.

In the name of the fourteenth dictionary read pee husain, for

ushten> husaint,

In 33., several MSS. read “oye, instead of pro?

Page 6.

The author of the forty-first dictionary is often mentioned in Indian

historians. He was, according to Badaoni, Qazi of Delhi.

In the title of the fifty-third dictionary translate :—“ The Dictionary

of Muhammad ibn i Hindtshah Munshi who wrote to the praise ( eby )

of (the Amir) Ghids uddin Rashid.” It would be against the idiom

to translate .__“‘ Who wrote under the name of Gh.” This would be

expressed by (goxe) exo} che lhs?. Observe the final cs im

ceoa%). The word Glbs in Persian, is followed by an abstract noun ;

you say wsly le ols he got the title of Khan; slo Wlb=* cathy |

werdsS HL yS ye ‘he was honored by the title of Malik ushshu’ara. But

this is not the case with the participle wLble” mukhdtab, which is

followed by & and the title itself; you say ow ls! wbl=* he got

the title of Khan; o* [yrand| EUs ble”, de. The word al expresses

often our alias; you say WIS (,U gle pl wlojwld _Khanzaman, alias

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 65

"Ali Quli Khan. Native Persian scholars in reading these words, draw

the word fae to the preceding name, without the esl; as, Khan-

zaménném ’aliqulikhén. But if the title be a word which cannot take

the form of the macdar, khitd) is constructed as mukhdtab ; e. Js;

VPyJjrdc lbs? o8 j1,5p0, instead of Uyiade, which would

be impossible. Thus also with the word vals ; you say, Arzi

takhalluc, Siraéjuddin Khan, wl... 34 cle A= 431. We should

invert the order, according to our idiom, and say, Sirdjuddin Khan,

poetically styled Arzi ; or, in the above example, ’Aléi Quli Khdn,

alias Khin zamén. But when the Persians put the takhallug after the

real name, they use the Sle; as aos_yee Umar i Khayyam, ‘Umar,

poetically styled Khayydm.

The author of the ji/ly-eighth dictionary, Shamsuddin, poetically

styled Makhrt, belongs to Icfahan.

After the sixtieth dictionary add

csxbs| (gow! ypoio Sia,s Ad. FJ., Sur. This is Firdausi’s

ustdd. The author of the second dictionary is the nephew of this

Mangir. It is remarkable that FJ. quotes this ancient dictionary as

his authority for the forms KS)! and S ,witha&,

Page 9.

Line 5 from below, read printed, for lithographed. This edition of

the Kashif, when obtainable, sells from fifteen to twenty rupees.

Page 11.

Line 5; in the second migra’, read coy biidé, for x33 bid.

e Page 12.

The author of the Farhang i Jahangir, Mir Jaméluddin Husain,

played a more important part during the reign of Jahangir. Accord-

ing to the Akbarnémah of Abul Faszl, he entered Akbar’s service

during the twenty-fifth year of his reign, or about 1581. When Abul-

Faszl wrote the Ain, the Mir was a Hazéri, or commander of one

thousand, not a nuheadé, as the reading of the first note on p. 226 of

my Ain appears to be more correct than the reading of the text.

_ The excellent work, entitled t,o ple madsir ulumard,* contains

the following biographical notice—

* Vide Morley’s Catalogue, p. 104, The MS.‘No. 77 of our Society, to judge

from the corrections, looks like an autograph. Besides it is almost free from

mistakes. It contains 574 leaves, The other MS, of our library, No. 131, is

much inferior,

66 Contributions to Persian Lexicography. [No. 1,

yh bast Cred O51 Sad lols wll 5! pens =) enol Je _

ope sld jai gdm ae ght ihkht ee a ae wy?" wy [pools

ono ue > cerblw gs &—Rab Gye! crys Wo lst 3 wt? rs xLe re)

tas cls! ope quelegh sl yles ya wll yo Coyhdy® SLU] ono!

lea 40 « asl yelesa| | eghlead gral wre gn 9 es) gob

pele =] ola = Oo» oyly ws was Jas @ wad lang! cles ct 3) eos!

whit crs « dsgy5T wl_soye a cshted $391 Ld ud! yi Sy 53 9 el phot

wal jl} Code wwases els J lw SOA) SuAf Hye wow dls

Cs lp2bemt cori les 587 F disso o@T 1 cols Skt ples Slo Ds

BL Jole onayS code paw f Sald pat Jl AT os wet to9! Body quai

* Ss lates Solpoler OR $y) gym ydo Oo ooo) CA SlS coils?

Hehe Kine 59 phe aedlee sho wT Ailyy cgsStolg® jie Yb st sutt be

ayy bolpale by Cray? Salt cask use why Shay BS U5 Bo52— 9

joy Zovlas oS a jt Cote CHOY wos Gs! (b as gostnns # Ow) aySL vs)

e Ov dS stl Boly jb

Wie) Cwghe 3 Cyd Sty cb dnd gre patos wtahec sylp2ld b wee

5! gp cyladans ASaWlED ALS ydyt dsl rm) ¥yIRI rar yO 9 ores

pie oes? Lh ytes Eile aa] 85 Sly Cogiars col) pao Ouyyy 5% 355]

«odd ol Sets D 9 CoardpS jal e oe Grate wlbhes 93 Glebe

bale slow a .hS04 Fas yn Oguay yet 9) lb KEES aking Ws

Li Gyo a) 8S ERS aldlee Sho wh} iSesis ype! gg) 204% gt Whey

eodt flee 54 ja yto Oi! Br yd fee Di gylhengl SF Lye! o® ary? Gy)

BLAU 9) Ss 40 #633 5 Lo 5! Colne? wweio fy5 soot ws! lae &S rs

os &S Cy a we a5 os Ue? Bolg ly pec| wl « wentnd balsas

els? a? he (R4 OMA | 900 &S SOM gf # OylO p49 onl tye

oss eel jlytpe 85 urge yy ee yl ere le Sly 50d KSA Og

LAw gies? oll oye #5959 lad pee Kd 5S Kel ye G9 ps we)! glaogls * Ds) loe y

#wsly obo Nort} wos wlbs! ero} ly fl yo 9 % d9y5 ao shes Kiyo

cay) ergdly Abney Cols Saye) ColSy sys! yo a {oye Sy

cslda yey 9 der ,5 col igily » OsUd) ge Gedy Rea) plod! b Lao fled ya

gla‘? « dailoS bi 3} ox Sa9p3! Woahy; yy9 yb Saas diy 9 STs BS

OB yes wy] Cord Sats) 152

goof y—ader! lei) e OHSS oS Uo S'S” gibt! 5,2 9 Love

+ wed dS yy cguanh Sab

* The following words are verbally taken from the Iqbalnamah, ed.

Bibl, Ind., p. 87.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 67

Yd S copSilka Kia,s de yg edty Goh T oyrlb wIS 40

wes» ney Gus 0 4 a rang 5! ane} dine be ops p20 ylawa we

OSS EA yor Ly Lysot Eye! _y io EPI US yencs % 8d»? Ss 5 Lad o6olawo wl yet

le CHAS 9.9 Oy GIP ax! BLS Kopenivo pacer oas yble la Kaas oy

bal yo BELO sO 99 pare WIE pode Co] plum pee 9 EROS Jy

Sd yy dav

“Mir Jamaluddin Anji, of Anji, belongs to the Sayyids of Shiraz,

who trace their descent to Qdsim arrasi ibn i Hasan ibn i Ibrahim i

Tabatiba i Husaini. Mir Shah Mahmud and Mir Shah Abii Turab,

two later members of this renowned family, were appointed during the

reign of Shah Tahmisp i Gafawi, at the request of the Chief Justice of

Persia, Mir Shamsuddin i Asadullah of Shuster, the first as Shaikh-

ulislaém of Persia, and the second as Qazi-lquzdt. Mir Jamaluddin is

one of their cousins. He went to the Dekhan, the Kings of which

had frequently intermarried with the Anjis.* Afterwards he entered

Akbav’s service, and, in the thirtieth year, was appointed a commander

of six hundred. In the fortieth year of Akbar’s reign, he was promoted

to the rank of a Hazari. It is said that in the end of Akbar’s reign he

was a commander of three thousand. When in the forty-fifth year of

the emperov’s reign, the fort of Asir had been conquered, Adil Shah, king

of Bijaéptr, wished to enter into a matrimonial alliance with Akbar,

and offered his daughter to Prince Danyal. To settle matters, Akbar

despatched the Mir to the Dekhan, who, in A. H. 1013, after making,

near Pattan, the necessary preparations for the marriage feast, handed

over the bride to Prince Danydél. After this he repaired to Agra,} in

order to lay the tribute and the presents before the emperor, the best

of all which up to that time had come from the Dekhan.”

* As the Mir had always been a particular friend of Prince Salim

(Jahangir), he was promoted after the prince’s accession to the post

of a Chahér Hazari, and obtained the privilege of the naqqarah and

the flag. When Prince Khusrau (Salim’s son) rebelled, the Mir re-

ceived the order, to effect an understanding by offering Khusrau

* So also Firishtah,

+ If this is correct, it must have been after Abalfazl’s death,

~ Accompanied by the historian Firishtah.

§ To sound the naqqarah, and to have a flag carried before oneself, was a

distinction only given to great amirs. The aurang, chatr, saiban and kaukabah

are reserved to kings. Vide AA. p. 49.

68 Contributions to Persian Lewicography. [No. 1,

the kingdom, which Mirz4 Muhammad Hakim (Akbar’s brother who

had held Kabul) had governed. The Prince unfortunately did not

agree. When he was subsequently made prisoner, and brought before

the emperor, Hasan Bég of Badakhshdén, Khusrau’s principal agent,

impudently said to Jahangir, that it was not he alone who had favoured

Khusrau, but that all the amirs present were implicated ; Mir Jamal-

uddin, the emperor’s ambassador, had only the day before asked him

(Hasan Bég), to promise him an appointment as Panjhazéri. The

Mir got pale and confused, when the Khan i A’zam* fearlessly advised

the emperor, not to listen to such absurdities ; Hasan Beg knew very

well, that he would have to suffer death, and tried therefore to involve

others ; he himself (the Khan i A’zam) was the chief conspirator, and

ready as such to undergo any punishment.”

“This satisfied the emperor; he consoled the Mir, and appointed

him afterwards Governor of Bahar. In the eleventh year of Jahangir’s

reign (A. D. 1616), he received the title of ’Aszaduddaulah.t On

this occasion the Mir presented to the emperor a dagger, inlaid with

precious stones, the making of which he had himself superintended,

whilst at Bijaptr. At the top of the handle he- had a yellow yaqut

fixed, perfectly pure, of the shape of half an egg, and had it surrounded

by yaquits, as approved of by Europeans, and old and clear emeralds, so

as to make it more conspicuous. The value was estimated at fifty

thousand rupees.”

“ After this he lived for some time at Baraitch, where he held lands

granted to him by the emperor. He repaired once more to the capital,

where he died of a natural death.”

“ The Mir was a man distinguished for his talents. The Dictionary,

entitled Farhang i Jahdngéré, which is everywhere highly valued, and

referred to as the best authority, was compiled by him. The author

has indeed shewn a most admirable carefulness in his critical investiga

tions, and the correctness of the vowels.” :

“ Of his two sons, the elder, Mir Aminuddin had been with his father

in the Dekhan, and was married to a daughter of ’Abdurrahim, Akbar’s

Commander-in-Chief; he was promoted to a higher post, when, at an

early age, he died; the younger, Mir HusAmuddin Murtasza Khan,

has been mentioned before.”

* Vide AA. p. 223, No. 21.

+ Vide Toozuk i Jahangiri, ed. by Sayyid Ahmad, Allygurh, 1864, p. 179.

1868. ] Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 69

The Tuzuk i Jahdngirt gives the following additional particular :—*

9 pid y wl« lw Sx 5! Ppa Epes at band ws> yo} was pho

posey2 pha SES y Slew goss 9 Hdd LANG F119! WOT Oily) cod paSln

yd 5 SST 09 ook 8i9 5 0 yale ape jf oR) Ad 9) yh rie slo_,a af

dp) pw Jl="t 8350 9 ERY cdl go458 wxl3} XBL Kyo3 9! Eby la 52 9

% Ozled JLab} coy 9 poe obyit Coleos

“ Mir ’Aszaduddaulah having now (A. D. 1621) become very old, and

bent from old age, he is no longer fit for employment in the household,

the army, or the administration of a jagir. I excuse him therefore of

all further trouble, and give hereby the order, to pay him out of my

treasury the monthly sum of four thousand rupees cash, payable at

Agra, Lahore, or any other place, where he likes to reside, so that he

may be happy and comfortable, always praying for the welfare of my

kingdom.”

The highest rank which the Mir attained, was a brevet Panj-hazéri

(1d (5 915% <4), with an actual command (and salary) of a Sihhazar

0 pancadi.t

Towards the end of his life, he seems to have revised his dictionary.

As late as 1628, he presented a copy of it at the eighteenth

anniversary of Jahangir’s accession. The writer of the latter part of

the Tuzuk says :—

SI ly la! Qrem 4 Ml» Coy Cyd 9 sod4bS ly Cie? Gat)

eee cae) crt ho 2 US. 3 enya a Says], Ogdine loos cstele sles)

The word =| I have heard generally pronounced Anja. I think

Injii is the correct. pronunciation, as 5=| appears to be the same as

= and 5=% , a word thoroughly investigated by Quatremére,

‘Histoire des Mongols, p. 130. From a remark in the Waccal, it

appears that a part of Shiraz was called Poel wyt. This seems to be

the meaning of the word &3 5] enjuyah, in the first line of the extract

from the Maasir ulumara. |

* Sayyid Ahmad’s edition, p. 327, med. Major Price’s translation of the

Tuzuk i Jahangiri mentions Mir Jaméluddin on several places; but the

imperfect MS. used by him, renders his translation useless. Major Price’s

MS., to judge from the translation, resembles the bad MS. of our Society,

No, 1339 (cg Sila wlesly),

+ Sayyid Ahmad’s 7, i. J., p. 156, 1. 3,

+ Sayyid Ahmad’s T. i. J., p. 359, 1. 7.

70 Contributions to Persian Leaicography. [No. 1,

Asitis then settled that Mir Jaméluddin is a Shirazi,* we can

understand, why he has given so many words belonging to the dialect

of Shirdz, a few of which may be found in the B. and Vullers.

Page 22.

Line 21. For by read col; and lL. 2 from below, read "Abd ul

Ghafir, for ’ Abdul Ghafar.

Page 24.

Line 7 from below, read abai, for bai.

According to Tadzkirah by Sarkhush (last chapter), ’Abdurrashid

discovered that the following verse of the Qoran (Sur. iv. 62)—

pio ol coals Apreylt Laabt » SU! Laat

contains the tarikh of Aurangzéb’s accession.

To page 27.

Sirdjuddin in the preface to the usp Ssh gives a list of some of

the books written by him.—

f, kelS eyb wblad

Sxl diSwo ey)! 389 Sets

sty? wiles o*

[ya keSla? clay elem

> 92 BO

5, po Sho wba fet Kayo! pio girs

erty leo (ary ylaat 5!

6. be Ga! GE" yo cats Gal ley

1 Sig 3 Ka9 pro OF(y9 30 895 laze

Big sg “hilRor Leys Lee “ey”

ushs dle i108

9. 9 ogo" ptt 0 jl 9 35 Ese

cel 5 Sho SLI

10. cayytldle Klingle ola yo I pte

pratee ese oo” Slo

12. ob ets Saiutive JF wots

13, spetodulye Glee Jo Gr* ply os

14. & 9% wes Bs p25 0 Jae tyls

* Mirz4 Nausha calls him coos :

1868. | Contributions to Persian Lexicography. 71

cy Daeg 05.0

wb,

16. mba y whely y wiles

To this long list, we have to add the works mentioned on pp. 25 to

27; the ywilViews” majma’ wnnafdis, a tadzkirah of Persian poets,

alphabetically arranged according to the takhallug ;* and the LW} yotys

nawddir i alfdz, a dictionary of those Hindi words whose equivalents

are rarely met with in Arabic and Persian.

Page 30.

Line 21, read fifteen years’ labour, for fifteen years, labour.

Page 32.

Line 4. Read 17, for 27.

Page 39.

Line 15. Ido not know, whether Jannatdstdni, or Jannatdshydni,

or both, be correct. In some historical books both terms are used pro-

miscue, in many dshydné, in others dstdni. In the MS. of the Maasir-

ulumara, mentioned in the note of p. 65, dshyant has every where been

carefully corrected to dstdéné. Even in Akbar’s laqab, I have found

dstdné, for dshyant. There is no doubt that dshydéni conveys a better

meaning, than dstdénv. Line 5 from below, read of Akbar’s mother, for

of one of Akbar’s wives.

Line 3 from below, read teacher, for pupil. The pious are attracted

by God.

Page 387.

To the Indian pronunciations mentioned in 7., add—pRricgii

ghazi uddin, for ghdziddin; (&=t)l39 Diddrbakhsh, for (ASYId 9

Dédarbakhsh ; bat l, baghichah, for s°l bagchah. 'The Indian pro-

nunciation Gl, for Gl=*, is said to be Chagatai.

* The MS. of our Society, No. 129, goes only to the letter c hé; nor do I

know, whether Arzii completed the work. I may mention that this MS.,

to judge from a marginal remark which the binder has half cut away, is

written by Sayyid Ghulam ’Ali of Belgram, Arzt’s nephew. He was himself a

poet, and Arzi has mentioned him under his takhallug A’zéd.

From this book, it also appears that the Swmahi Sulaimdnt, the twenty -

fourth dictionary of p.5, was compiled by the poet (gdaz| cet, Taqi Auhadi

of Igfahdn, the well-known author of a Tadzkirah. He came to India during

the reign of Jahangir (1605 to 1627), and must not be confounded with the

poet Taqt, of Shustar, one of Akbar’s nobles; vide A, A. p. 230, No. 352, The

concluding chapter of the Mir-dt ul ’Alam gives a few of their verses.

72 Contributions. to Persian Leaicography. [No. 1,

Page 44.

Line 2, read follows, for ollows.

Line 11, read yy burinish, for 2 yurinish.

Page 45.

Line 20, read 37 dbrah, for ,.

Page 50.

Line 19, remove the asterisk after the word koh.

Page 53.

Line 5, read Gpijg sdzish, for Epyy sdrish,

In conclusion I may mention that this paper is an extract of

a larger work written by me, entitled “Contributions to Persian

Lexicography.” About six years ago, Major Lees asked me to compile

a Persian Dictionary. A part of it has been completed. But as the

costs of the undertaking appeared too great, in proportion to the assis-

tance which the Government of India then granted, the work was not

proceeded with, though a specimen sheet had been issued.

Since then I have been comparing the Persian Dictionaries written

by natives, and correcting various lexicographical MSS. in my posses-

sion. I trust inashort time to have sufficient leisure, to see the whole

of my “ Contributions” through the press, though I should prefer the

compilation of a Persian Dictionary itself, if the Government ora

learned Society were inclined to defray the printing charges.

Ft. Bl,

1868.] Description of a Hindu Temple converted into a Mosque. 73

Description of a Hindu Temple converted into a Mosque at Gaga-

nes'var, Zilé Medintpwr.—By W. Herscusr, Esq., B. CO. S.

[Received 21st December, 1867. ]

This is another fine specimen of the stone buildings to be found

in the South-western parts of Medinfpur. I visited it in 1866. The

plan of the building is an oblong enclosure. Outside, nothing is to be

seen but a flat wall, about 15 feet high, of clean cut massive laterite

stones, with no other ornament than a square beading of the same style

as that described for Chandrarekhé Garh at page 183 of the Journal.

(Vol. XXXYV. pt.i.) The long side is about 312 feet, and the other 252

feet, outside. There is no opening anywhere in the wall except at the

one narrow solid gate-way, so that the place looks-queer and forbid-

ding. Perhaps for this reason it is called a Garh by the people, and

possibly enough it was so used, when occasion required, as a defence

against Mahrattas. But the plan of the building is that of an ordinary

Mandir, in the centre of a large courtyard surrounded by a high solid

wall, on the inner side of which, the whole way round, is a row

of serais like cloisters, The wood cut below shews one such serai.

a ae

WSS SAO Mi pd we Racca

| a eum

MHI)

a ian

oat i)

hte) we

= 1

all

aS if

| From each of the squat square piers an arch (so to call it, though it

| 1s only laminated as in the sketch) springs across the cloister to the

"A Description of a Hindoo temple converted into a Mosque. [No. 1,

outer wall; so that each serai is formed of three such doorways

as in the sketch, and the flat wall for the fourth side. The perspec-

tive view down the cloister in the inside, shewing some twenty of

these arches is very impressive, owing to the massiveness of the

work. Hach opening is about 10 feet high. A very few of the

ornamental pillars are rounded, and the (apparent but not real) key-

stone in each serai has a lotus with a pendant pistil. These are the

only curved lines in the building. All the rest is severely straight.

The South-western corner of the enclosure is a good deal ruined,

shewing the huge stones to have been held together in some parts

with iron clamps. At the Western side a white stone is let into the

wall, bearing a Uriya inscription, which I could not decipher or get

deciphered at the time, though it is legible enough where not defaced.

The villagers declare it was purposely defaced by a certain officer of

Government, who has, however, denied the charge on enquiry. The

week and month are legible, but unfortunately the year has been

defaced. The villagers can give no conception as to the date, which

must be inferred from the stones. |

In the centre stood one of the ordinary tall many fluted Hindu

temples, consisting only of a spire over the Ling, and a small room in

sont of it. The sketch given of the temple at Chandrarekha (Ante

Vol, XXXV. pt. I. p. 185,) would have suited this one also. The temple, ©

except the foundations, has been entirely destroyed by the “¢ Moghals”’

as the villagers call the Muhammedans here.. It has gone to make the

platform of the Mosque which now stands at the Western end of the

oblong. Where the Ling used to stand, a well has been sunk by a

pious or treasure-secking Brahmin, who gave out that the Ling had

retired there. He failed to recover it, and carved instead two com-

mon idols on two slabs of stone, which lie in one of the cloisters,

receiving very precarious worship from the people.

The Mosque itself is built of new small stones. There is nothing

noteworthy about it except the unusual smallness of the entrances,

generally so handsome in Muhammadan buildings. Though in the

form of a pointed arch, they are only cut out of the wall, as it were. —

Inside, however, is a good specimen of a true arch, crowning an almost

complete laminated arch. The sketch of it, given below, 1s perhaps ;

worth inspection. The little entrance at the end (as well as another —

1868.] Description of a Hindu Temple converted into a Mosyue. 75

mi in

wae att

ami \

WAVE)

ARMS i

OFAN Ne

AN Ml

wm i HM

int Halil

f \4 AA ANY

'Y i|

, 1

Wy)

; i

= |

like it) has, instead of seven or eight stones in arch, only one cut

like a key-stone. But as the entrance is cut through solid masonry

and is small, there was no need of any key-stone, and it has sunk down

for want of pressure on its sides. I note this, because it is difficult

to guess why the key-stone was put there at all, unless it was to give

the appearance of anarch. The dome is only a weak rubble and mortar

thing, which is falling in. There was once a village of 800 houses of

Muhammadans near Gaganes‘var. Nothing is left of them but the

mounds of the village and this mosque, and some Persian words in

the Zemindaéri vocabulary. The Zemindér has no records of them in

his papers. I do not suppose the original building is more than three

or four hundred years old. In the inscription it is called a “ bera,”’

and its name among the villagers is “‘ the Karambera.”

Note by the Editor.—The inscription alluded to above is in the Uriya

language and character, but seven out of eight lines of it being defaced

by the strokes of a hatchet or some other blunt iron instrument, the:

76 Description of a Hindoo temple converted into a Mosque.

purport of it cannot be fully made out. The first line alone is legible ;

it begins by stating that, “in the invincible reign of the auspicious.

hero and Maharaja S’ri Pratapakapales’vara Deva, on Wednesday the

92nd of Vaisikha, in the year — (?) the building of the enclosure of

S/ri Gaganes’vara.”—(S'ré Vira S'rt Pratépa-kapdlesvara Deva Mahd-

rdjankaru vijaya rdje samasta anka S’ré. ha mesa 22n. budhavdre S'ré

Gaganes’ vara Devanku veda gathana).—The name of the king in its

integrity does not occur in Prinsep’s Tables ; the first part Pratapa is

common enough, and was assumed by two of the Stiryavansi kings,

but neither of them had Kapales’vara (lord of skulls) for the second

part. That word, however, is a name of Mahadeva, and one of the

most common names of that divinity is Rudra, and if this circum-

stance would warrant the assumption of the two words being used

synonymously, the name would be that of the unfortunate

Pratéparudra, who reigned from 15038 to 1524, and left thirty-two

sons, all to be murdered by his minister Govinda Deo. The date of the

enclosure, according to this conjecture, would be the first quarter of

the sixteenth century.

R. -M.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

—o—

Part IL—HISTORY, LITERATURE, Ge.

PEP PPIPAPAAPAARAAAAALAAIEAELAVRABAELRAFALABLIE EAL LILI

No. IT.—1868.

PPP P RL OLLI awn

On the History of the Burma Race.—By Colonel Sir Anruur Puayne,

K. C. S. I, C. B., Bengal Stag’ Corps.

[Received 25th July, 1868. ]

In the thirty-second volume of the Journal of the Asiatic Society,

for the year 1864, the present writer, following the Mahé-radza-

weng, traced the history of the Burma race from the earliest time,

down to the arrival of the two sons of the king of Tagting at the

site of the present town of Prome. The national chronicles from that

time proceed with the history of the monarchy established at Tha-

re-khet-ta-ré to the east of Prome. It is proposed in the present

‘paper to condense into a brief narrative the principal events of that

monarchy, and of the succeeding dynasties of Burman kings, which

reigned at Pugin on the Irrawaddy river, about one hundred and

eighty miles above Prome.

The elder of the sons of the king of Tagting, named Mahatham-

bawa, was married to his cousin Bhedari, daughter of the hermit,

who lived in a cave or cell, near a small stream which runs -into the

Trrawaddy river below the town of Prome. The king of the Pyé

tribe, named Tap-bu-l4, who with his people dwelt in the land around

Prome, had been exposed to attacks by tribes coming from Southern

Arakan. He had either been killed or taken prisoner. His queen

still ruled. But the Kan-ran tribe from Arakan attacked her also.

74 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

The Pyt repelled the attack. The Kén-ran fled and returned to, or

then established themselves at, Than-dwai, (Sandoway), and in the

seven hill districts lying along the eastern side of the Arakan

mountain range in that neighbourhood. The queen of the Pya then

established herself at the Thaggé lake. After a time she resigned

the sovereignty of her people to Mahathambawaé. She was of the

true Sakya race, descended from Mu-di-tseit-ta, son of Kan Radzagyi,

who, as before related, had been made by his father king over the

tribes Pyu, Kénrén, and Thek or Sak. Mahdthambawa made the

Pyti queen his second wife. This was in the year 60 of religion.

The Pyt queen gave birth to a daughter, and soon after died Maha-

thambawé died in the year of religion 66, aged twenty-six years.

At the time of his death Queen Bhedari was pregnant with the son to

whom she afterwards gave birth, and through whom the royal race

was continued. He was called Dwot-ta-bung.

Mahathdambaw4 was succeeded, by his brother Tsti-la-tham-bawa,

Bhedari became his queen also. He reigned thirty-five years and

died in the year 101 of religion.

Dwot-ta-biing now became king. The time had come when the

predictions of Gaudama were to be fulfilled. The city of Tha-re-

khet-ta-r4 was, with the help of the heavenly beings termed Nat,

built on an extensive plain, to the eastward of the present town of

Prome. This was in the year 101 of religion. This king had great

power and authority. He married two wives; first, his half sister

born to his father by the queen of the Py people, and named

Ts4nda-de-wi ; and second, Bhe-tsan-di, the daughter of the king of

the Na-gés or dragons. His reign is described as glorious, and he_

built many pagodas. A cave and a well of water, are still shown by

_ the people of Prome, as those of the great and good king Dwot-ta-

bing. He ruled over many countries adjoining his native kingdom,

But he was guilty of one act of injustice which diminished his power

and shorteried his days. A poor woman, who sold bread, bestowed

five pai of land on the Rahans of a monastery. The king, wishing

to possess the land, confiscated it. His good fortune at once

abandoned him. His celestial weapons no longer had any power and—

his glory declined. He then restored the land. But the evil result

of his sin could not beshaken off. His tributary kings withheld

1868. On the History of the Burma Race. 75

their tribute. He went himself to demand it, throughout all Dzam-

bu-di-pa or the continent of India. But misfortune followed him.

The sea dragons were offended, and carried his ship to their own

regions. In other words his ship foundered at sea. This happened

alter a reign of seventy years when he was one hundred and five

years old. “ Reflecting,” observes the writer of the Maha-radzé-

weng, “on the story of king Dwot-ta-biing, the lords of great

“ countries should remember, that it is not proper to take so much

“as a single fruit, ora single flower, of those things which pertain

“ to the three precious jewels.” ~

Dwot-ta-bang was succeeded by his son Dwot-ta-ran in the year

171 of religion. He reigned twenty-two years.

No particular event is related of the succeeding kings until Thi-ri-

rit came to the throne in the year of religion 424. He had a deep

regard for religion, and the people during his reign were happy.

But with him the race of Dwot-ta-bing came to an end, and an-

other dynasty succeeded.

The story is thus told. A certain man of that country placed his

young son with a Rahan at a monastery, where he became a Tha-ma-

ne or probationer for the higher degrees of the order. The Rahdan

liked him and taught him the Bi-da-gét and Be-deng. The Rahan

had a cock who, when he crowed, seemed to say, ‘“ Whoso eats my

head will be king hereafter.” The Rahan, hearing this, called the

youth and told him to prepare the cock for food. The probationer

did so, but in the preparation the head accidentally touched the hinder

parts ofthe bird. Thinking this renderedit unclean for the Rahan,

he ate it himself. The Rahdn asked him where the head was, and

the probationer told him. The Rahdn thought, ‘“‘ Now we shall see

if the animal’s crowing comes true.” He had the young man edu-

cated in every branch of knowledge, and then entrusted to the care

of anobleman. At length he was introduced into the palace, and

the king retained him there. The king, having no son of his own,

adopted the young man, and created him crown-prince. Eventually

he succeeded to the throne, and reigned fifty-one years. This king

was called Nga-ta-ba, because the cock in crowing seemed to utter

those words ; and also because he was of another lineage and not of

the existing royal race. No explanation is given in the history re-

76 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

garding the cause of this change of dynasty, nor is any hint given

as to the lineage of Nga-ta-ba.

He was succeeded by hisson. The descendants of this king are

represented as filling the throne until the year of religion 638. The

last king of this race was Thupigny4, who came to the throne in the

year of religion 627, or A.D. 84. He is described as a good king,

and devoted to religion. Having a quarrel with the Kan-ran king,

whose territory lay in the southern part of the country now called

Ayakan, he collected an army, and marched against him. The country

was subdued, and the king found there a golden image of Gaudama

eighty-eight cubits high. On account of this image he remained there

for three years. His nobles entreated him toreturn. He ordered a

creat raft to be made in order to bring the golden image by sea

round the high cape called Na-ga-rit* to his own country. But his

nobles, thinking this could not be accomplished, consulted together to

evade the king’s order. They determined to melt down the large

golden image, but to appease the king’s anger, they made twenty-

eight smaller images which they presented to him, and kept the rest

of the gold for themselves. The king then returned to Tha-re-khet-

ta-ra. When the people of the country brought the gold of the holy

image into daily use, the seven excellent Nats who had presided over

the building of the city were offended, and the whole country became

confused and distracted with robbery and violence. ‘There was at

that time a saying abroad that a man named Nga-tsa-kan, (which |

means in the Burmese language a corn-sieve) would destroy the

country. One day a sudden gust of wind carried away the corn-sieve of

a woman, who followed it crying aloud, “ My corn-sieve, my corn-

sieve.’ (Nga-tsa-kan, N ga-tsa-kan.) The people, much alarmed, sup-

posed that Nga-tsa-kan had really come. They separated into three

hostile divisions, and the king died at the same time after a reign of

eleven years.

The three divisions of the people were Pya or Byt, Kam-ran or —

Kén-ran, and Mrén-mé. The last is the present national name for

* Na-ga-rit or Na-g4-nhit is the name of a well-known high bluff of land on

the coast of Burma. The word implies, the place where the Naga or sea dragon

sinks ships. It is here that the ship of king Dwot-ta-biing was borne to the

depths of the sea by dragons. The adjoining coast is, even in these days, the

scene of frequent wrecks. The native name is preserved in Cape Negrais, a

term which appears to have been handed down by the old Portuguese voyagers.

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 77

the whole people, which is first mentioned in the Maha-radz4-weng at

this time. The Pyt and Kan-ran peoples fought. The chiefs agreed

to settle their quarrel in a way already known in the history of their

race, that is, by the building of a pagoda. In this peaceable contest,

the Pyui tribe was victorious, and the Kan-rén people retired. The

Pyé tribe then fought among themselves. One portion then joined

with the Kya-barg tribe, supposed to have been settled on the west

of the Irrawaddy, near to what is now the country of the Yau tribe,

and also with a portion of the Thek tribe. One division established

themselves in the hilly district to the south-east of Prome called

Taung-ngyo. After three years, they were there attacked by the

Talaings and crossed the Irrawaddy river to Padaung. Being attack-

ed there by the Kan-ran tribe, they went north to Men-don. After

this they moved to the east of the Irrawaddy, and settled under king

Tha-mitg-da-rit at Yun-hlwot-guen. A period of thirteen years had

been occupied in the migrations since the destruction of Tha-ré-khet-

ta-ra. King Tha-mitg-da-rit is called a nephew of king Thupignya.

The country where he settled was afterwards called Air-maéd-da-nd

also Tam-pa-di-pa ; and the city Pouk-kén or Pu-gén. King Tha-

mug-da-rit established nineteen villages, on the land of which the

city was to be built.

The historian of the Maha-radz4-weng then narrates at great length

the ancient legends concerning the country of Pugan, so as to connect

the kings of the ancient royal race of Tagting, on the upper Irra-

waddy, with the kings of the great city which was now to arrive.

The scene opens as follows :—

“ When the lord Gau-da-ma was still on the earth, he went about

“from country to country in Mits-tsi-ma-de-tha. Standing on the

“top of the Tan-kyi* hill, and looking he saw on the top of a pouk

“tree, which grew on a steep bank, a white heron and a black crow.

“Tn a fork of the tree, lay a great lizard having seven tongues.

“ At the foot of the tree a frog crouched on the ground. Seeing

“these the lord smiled. His younger brother the lord Ananda

“asked respectfully, why he smiled. The lord replied, ‘ Beloved

* This is the name of a peak on the range of hills on the bank of the Irra-

waddy river opposite to Pugén, The name Pugan or Pouk-v4n is said to be

derived from the Pouk tree, (Butea frondosa,)

78 On the History of the Burma Lace. [No. 2,

“ ¢ Xnanda, after I shall have attained Neib-bén 651 years, then in

‘ ¢this place a great country will arise. At thetop of a pouk tree,

‘¢ a white heron and a black crow perching, the meaning is, that in

“ ¢that country the performance of charitable and religious duties will

‘ Cabound ; and irreligious deeds will also abound. As to the lizard

“ (with seven tongues, the people of that country, without rice fields

“ ¢ oy plantations, but supporting themselves by commerce, will use false

“words, and truth will gradually decline. The meaning of the little

‘ “frog at the root of the tree is, that he who first establishes that

“ ¢eountry, (king Tha-mag-da-rit,) in his time great birds, great

« ‘boars, great tigers, and flying monsters will be kings or leaders.

“ ¢They will be destroyed by a powerful king.” Such was the

“‘ divine prediction. The chief who struck down those enemies was

“ he who became king, and is known as Pyw Tsauti.” |

The history of Pya Tsauti, who afterwards became king of Pugan,

is then related. The reader’s attention is called to the emigration of

one of the Tha-ki princes of Kup-pi-la-wot, named Da-za Rédz4, and

his arrival on the Irrawaddy as before narrated in the early part of

the Mah4-radzi-weng. This king built the city of upper Pugan, after

having married Na-ga-tshein of the ancient Tha-ki race. Though

their kingdom was overthrown by invaders, yet the line of kings

descended from them was not destroyed. In the seventeenth genera-

tion Tha-do Maha-radza of this race was king. His son was Maha-

thambawa from whom descended the kings of Tha-re-khet-ta-ra as

has already been described. But he had another son from whom

descended Thado A-deits-tsa, who lived about the time that the city

of Tha-re-khet-ta-ra was destroyed. The country of Taging was at

that time deeply disturbed, and A-deits-tsa, driven from his throne,

yvemained concealed near Ma-le, a place on the Irrawaddy about eighty .

miles above Ava. He supported himself by cultivation. In his

garden was a well, in which dwelt a Na-g& or dragon which was

worshipped by the country people. The queen of A-deits-tsa gave —

birth to a son. He was named Tsau-ti. The Naga loved him so,

that he and the Naga queen watched over the child. At seven years

of age he was placed under a hermit, who instructed him in litera- —

ture, science, and religion, As the hermit predicted that he would —

become a king, his name was changed to Meng-ti, and he was taught —

1868.] On the History of the Burma Race. 79

kingly knowledge. When sixteen years of age, as the divine predic-

tion had to be accomplished, he asked leave from his father and

mother to go to Pugan, then lately established, and they gave him

permission. He went there and lived in the house of an old Pyi

man and his wife. They having no children, loved him as their own

son. Hence he was called Pyt-tsau-ti. At that time the country

was infested with great tigers, birds, and flying creatures, which

devoured the people. A monster bird required a young maiden to

be supplied to him daily, and on the seventh day, seven maidens.

The king of the country could not withstand these monsters. The

young prince, confident in his own strength, destroyed them all. King

Tha-mitig-da-rit, who for twelve years had been oppressed by these

creatures, was exceedingly rejoiced, and went to see the young man.

The lineage of the prince was then learned. The king gave him his

daughter in marriage and appointed him crown-prince.

The historian here enters on a long dissertation as to the line of

princes descended from the son, as if feeling that doubt might exist

as to the true descent of T'sau-ti, and therefore of the present royal

family of Burma. He recounts the stories given in former histories

of the birth of Tsau-ti from a she-dragon and the Nat of the sun.

The she dragon, it was said in these fabulous tales, produced an egg,

from which came forth Tsau-ti. “ But,” observes the historian “ thig

“is impossible, for in such case the son would either have been a

" Nat like his father, or a dragon like his mother ; whereas all agree

“that he was a man. It is evident therefore that the story has

“arisen from his father’s name A-deits-tsa which means sun ; and

“from the dragon queen having watched over him when he was an

“infant. But truly all kings from Ma-ha Thama-da to Gau-da-ma,

“ were by descent of the race of the sun. And so it has continued

“to the present time.” Having settled this point of the prince’s

descent, the historian justifies his rejection of previous legends in the

following words: “ Wise men have said, an old tree if bad, although

“old, must be cast aside. That such has happened before, is evident

from the history of Puganitself. For, during thirty generations of

“kings in that city, the doctrines of the heretical A-ri sect were

believed in, until the time of that sagacious king A-nan-ra-hta to

*“ be hereafter described, who listening to the instruction of the great

80 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

“teacher Sheng A-ra-han, the erroneous doctrines of the A-ri sect

«¢ were renounced. Those A-ris, in order to propagate such doctrines

‘Cas they pleased among the people, used to make a book according

“to their desire, and put it in the hollow of a thakhwot tree, and

“ when the bark which grows rapidly, had closed over it, they would

““ pretend a dream, and persuade the king to go to search for a book

“ in the tree, which being found, both king and people believed what

“ wag false. othe story of a prince born from the egg of a dragon,

“ whether old or not old, appeared to readers as if ancient and true,

“ but nevertheless must be rejected. What has now ‘been advanced

“ig more credible, and more in accordance with the ancient records of

“ Pugan ; therefore it should be made permanent.”

This dissertation on the lineage of Py Tsauti, or Py Mengti, is

a fair specimen of explanations given in the history followed by the

present writer, for occasional deviations from previous stories in the

Burmese chronicles. The present version of the fable, is no doubt

more acceptable to the supposed descendants of Py Mengti, than the

legend of his birth from a dragon’s egg.

Pyt Mengti became crown-prince at sixteen years of age. King

Tha-mug-da-rit died after a reign of forty-five years. A hermit, for

some reason not explained, was raised to the throne. He reigned for

fifteen years, and is called Kathe Kytng. Pyi Mengti then became

king in the year 89 of the last era established at Prome. His power

and glory were great. His dominion extended to the upper course

of the Irrawaddy. The Chinese having invaded the province of

Kau-tham-bi, which lies to the eastward of Bhaman, the king with

a vast army repelled them. Near his capital, he built a pagoda where

he had killed the monster bird. He also built many other religious

buildings, and caused books of laws to be compiled for the benefit of

his people. He died after a reign of seventy-five years, aged one |

hundred and ten.

In the history of the Pugin kingdom after the death of Py

Mengti, it is related that the city was much enlarged by his descend- —

ant Theng-lay-gyung, and was called Thi-ri-pits-tsa-ya, probably —

from the site of the palace having been changed. In the reign of the

next king Kyaung-di-rit, who came to the throne in the year 931

of religion, (A. D. 388), it is related that the important event of the-

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race, 81

introduction of the complete Buddhist scriptures, Bi-da-gat, into

Burma, occurred. This event has probably been materially antedated,

as indeed appears from what is stated subsequently in the _ his-

tory of the reign of A-nan-ra-hté more than six hundred years

later. But in the history it is related how at this time, the

entire Bi-da-gét was brought to Tha-htun, then the chief city of

the Talaing kingdom, by the great teacher Bud-da-gau-tha. The

story of this great teacher appears to have been taken from the

Mahawanso of Ceylon, for older Burmese accounts generally represent-

ed Bud-da-gau-tha as an inhabitant of Tha-htun, The event is thus

narrated. ‘ About this time it is recorded in the great Radz4-weng,

that the celebrated teacher, the lord Bud-da-gau-tha, went from the

country of ha-htun to Ceylon to bring the books of. the Bi-da-gat.

In the new Radza-weng, it is said that he crossed from Mits-tsi-ma-

de-tha ; but the case is really thus: For more than nine hundred

years after the establishment of religion,* the disciples of Yau-né-ka-

maha-dham-ma-rak-khi-ta, and of Thau-na and Ut-ta-r4, repeated by

heart the three great divisions of the Bi-da-gat. There were as yet

no letters in Dzém-bu-di-pa. At that time a young Brahman was

living near the Baudi tree. He was learned in medicine and mathe-

matics. Wandering about in Dzam-bi-di-pa, disputing the doctrines

of others, he came to a monastery, and in the vicinity began to recite

in a soft voice. ‘The great teacher Sheng Re-wa-ta hearing, said:

‘ This man is wise, it will be proper to discuss with him.’ He there-

fore called out, ‘ Who is there braying like an ass?’ The young man

replied, ‘ You understand then the braying of asses ?’ and then to his

questions Sheng Rewaté gave suitable replies. But the young

Brahman knew nothing of the divine law. He therefore became a

Rahan to study the three great books of the Bi-da-gat. From that

time, he became as celebrated as a Phra, and was named Bud-da-gau-

tha. He wished to study commentaries on the Bi-da-gat. The

Sheng Ré-wa-ta, knowing this, said : ‘ In Dzam-bi-di-pa there is only

the Pali, there is not the commentary ; teachers with various gifts of

mind are scarce ; but in Ceylon the commentaries are pure. The

* The assertion in the text must mean that until after the year 900 of

religion, there were no Scriptures in Burma or Suvanabhumi, that is, Tha-htun,

The term Dz4m-bi-di-pa, which is generally applied to India only, is here

applied by a bold license to those two countries.

82 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

Pali divine revelations as repeated in the three great councils, were

carried to Ceylon by the lord Ma-hin-da. Going there where the

commentaries exist in the Singalese language, learn it and translate

them into Magada.’ Saying this, he sent him, as is written in the

book T'sti-la-weng.”

The history then gives in detail several versions of the story of the

gacred books being procured in Ceylon by Bud-da-gau-tha, and

brought to the Indo-Chinese nations. The great teacher is represent-

ed as the religious benefactor or missionary to the Burmese, Talaings,

Arakanese, Shans, Siamese and Cochin Chinese. But he was led to

Tha-htun by a miraculous direction at the last moment. The history

proceeds thus: “ Lo! the lord Bud-da-gau-tha, after having obtained

permission from king Mah4-né-ma, by presenting him with a white ele-

phant, brought away the book Wi-tht-di-mag, the three great divisions

of the Bidagat, and the commentaries. But when he was on his way

to Dzam-bu-di-pa, a Thagya came and warned him, saying, There is

no place in Mits-tsi-m4-de-tha where religion can be established ; the

places where it 1s to be firmly established are situated on the south-

east side of Mits-tsi-ma-de-tha ; they are nine hundred yizanas in cir-

cumference ; they lie on the outskirts, and are known as Tha-re-

khet-ta-r4, The-ri-pits-tsa-ra, Ra-ma-ngya and other countries. Jeli-

gion shall be established in them for full five thousand years. The

books should be conveyed thither. The great teacher accordingly

came to Tha-htun in the country of Ramangya, then called Thi-dam-

mé-wa-ti, and also Thu-wan-na-bhum-mi.”

The historian states that this event occurred in the year 946 of

religion, or A. D. 403. “ Thus,” he concludes, “ in order to set forth

distinctly the account of the arrival in the Burma country of the

scriptures, the root and foundation of religion, which had been omit-

ted, in the great and the middle Radz4-weng, I have extracted the

narrative thereof from the religious books.”’

King Kying-du-rit died after a reign of twenty-five years, No

particular event is recorded until the reign of Thaik-taing. He

changed the site of the city from Thi-ri-pits-tsa-y4 to Tha-ma-hti and

called it Tam-pa-wa-ti. The change of the position of the capital —

city to the distance only of a few miles, is still a common practice

with Burmese kings. It is prompted sometimes by superstitious

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 83

motives, and sometimes by mere caprice. In the instances mentioned

of change of the capital Pu-gan, it is probable that the king’s palace

was rebuilt, and only a portion of the population required to remove.

In modern times when the capital was changed from Ama-ra-ptt-ra

to Man-da-le, a distance of six miles, the whole population, numbering

one hundred thousand souls was forced to accompany the court to the

new capital.

From this time a considerable interval elapsed without any event

which can be mentioned as materially bearing on the national history.

Several usurpers are recorded as having gained the throne by artifice

or violence. The most remarkable of these was Thenga-ra-dza,

called also Pup-pi Tsau Rahain. He is said to have been the teacher

to the queen of Htwon-khyit. On the death of that king, he married

the queen and seized the throne. Being a learned man, he reformed

the calendar. He ascended the throne in the year 535 of the era

established by A-de-tyaé king of Tha-re-khet-ta-ra. He reigned

twenty-seven years, and in the last year of his reign, which would

have been 562 of that era, he established a new one. Having a deep

respect for the ancient royal race, he declared prince Shwe-tn-thi the

son of his predecessor, heir to the throne. That prince married

Thenga Radza’s daughter and succeeded his father-in-law.*

In the reign of Pyin-byé who ascended the throne in the year of

religion 1385, the site of the city, or rather probably of the palace,

was again changed to a position called more especially Pu-gén. This

* The existing Burmese era commences from this time. The Burmese year

begins when the sun is supposed to enter the first sign of the zodiac, now

about the 13th or 14th of April. The Burmese year 1230, commenced in

April 1868. It would therefore appear that the existing era commenced when

the sun entered the sign Aries, A. D. 639. The Burmese chronology has been

thus adjusted with the year of Gautama’s Neibban, called in the Mahd-radza-

weng the year of religion, The first king of the dynasty, of Tha-re-khet-ta-ra,

named Ma-ha-tham-ba-wa is stated to have become king in the year 60 of

religion = 483 B.C. The number of years of the reigns of all the kings of

Tha-re-khet-ta-ra and of Pugan, from that time to the end of the reign of

Thenga Radza, as given in the history, and including an interregnum of

thirteen years, amount to 1120. This would therefore place the close of Thenga-

radza’s reign in the year 1180 of religion or 637 A.D. The Burmese ordinary

year contains only 354 days, Every third year there is an intercalary month

of thirty days. Butthe calendar is occasionally interfered with arbitrarily

by order of the king, to adjust the reckoning of time with some supposed

necessity, which depends upon superstitious prejudices. There is an apparent

difference of two years between the time at which the present era is said to

have been established, and that which is shown from the number of years or

date which corresponds with 1868 A. D. namely 1230.

84 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2

probably is the locality now shown to travellers as the site of the

palace. The enclosure wall can still be traced by a line of earth

mixed with brick. The magnificent temples built some cevturies

later, still exist entire, but of the palace, which no doubt was built of

wood, not a vestige remains. This king also built the city of Tung-

eweng to the south and called it Ra-mé-wa-ti.

After this the history frequently refers to the heretical religion

which existed, of which the A-ri teachers were the priests, The false

worship which was practiced 1s strongly denounced, apparently to

enhance the merit of the revival of pure Buddhism under A-nan-ra-hta

about four hundred years later. But before that king appears, the his-

torian considers it necessary to make it clear, that he was of the true

royal race, an object carefully kept in view throughout the history

with reference to each king, from whom the present royal family

claim descent. It is recorded that the thirty-fourth king of Pugan,

named Tan-net was deposed by an obscure youth called Nga-khwé.

It is admitted that Ngd4-khwé was of obscure origin. He had been

sold as a slave ; but his descent is traced from a younger brother of

Thein-tsusan the twenty-sixth king of Pugdn. He entered the

service of king Tan-net as a groom. He soon rose in the king’s

favour and confidence. At length he acquired much influence, and

entered into a conspiracy against the king, whom he murdered. He

then seized the throne. He reigned nine years and was succeeded by

his son Thein-kho. A curious story is told of this king having been

accidentally killed while hunting in the forest. The king, having

been separated from his followers, and being hungry, entered the

plantation of a hill man and plucked a cucumber. The hill man, not

knowing the king, struck him with a spade, and killed him. The

story is thus continued: ‘“ The groom of king Thein-kho having

come up and seeing the body of his master, asked the hill man, ‘Why

have you struck him to death ?? ©The hill man replied, ‘ Your master

plucked and ate my cucumbers, and shall I not strike him ?’ The

groom said craitily, ‘ He who kills a king always becomes king him-

self,’ The hill man answered, ‘ T don’t wish to be aking. This year

T am a king of cucumbers, which hang on the stalks in my plantation

like sucking puppies.’ The groom said, ‘ You shall have your cucum-

bers and enjoy also the pleasure of reigning as a king. The hap-

1868. | On the History of the Burma Race. 85

piness of a king is excellent and exalted. He has good food and fine

clothes. He has gold, silver, elephants, horses, buffaloes, cows, goats,

pigs, and rice in abundance.’ The hill man, being thus persuaded,

followed the groom. The groom secretly led the hill man into the

palace, and told the whole story to the chief queen. She praised the

groom for his discretion. The queen also, lest the country should

become disturbed, gave out that the king was ill, and prevented all

coming in and going out of the palace. The hill man was instructed,

bathed, and perfumed. One of the queens of inferior rank being dis-

respectful to him, the stone image at the gate of the palace, rushed

in, and smote her to death. Seeing this all in the palace was fright-

ened, as if they were in danger of being eaten up. The chief queen

on the sixth day caused it to be proclaimed throughout the city, that

the next day the king would appear, and all ministers, nobles, and

officers were required to attend. Early next morning all went into

the palace. When the gate of the inner palace was opened, all joining

their hands bowed down their heads. But one of them insolently

said, ‘ Alas! this is not our master, our lady, the queen, has not con-

sulted us in this matter.’ Suddenly one of the stone images at the

gate of the palace, rushed in and smote him to death. Then all the

ministers, nobles, and officers, and the whole country feared as if they

were to be devoured. When the hill man became king he was very

powerful. He took the title of Tsau Rahén. He made a delight-

ful garden at his former cucumber plantation. The image of a great

dragon was placed there. This image was worshipped; for

dragons being more powerful, and more excellent than men, great

benefit may be derived from the worship of them. Moreover, as there

were hollow temples in the countries of Tha-htun and Tha-re-khet-

ta-ra, the king, after consulting the false Ari teachers, built five hollow

temples. In each temple was placed an image, resembling neither

Nat nor Phré. To these morning and evening, food and spirits were

offered, and so they were propitiated and worshipped. At the time

when the omniscient and excellent Phra was still existing, the religi-

ous doctrine which was first established by Pun-na-hté in the Mram-

ma country ; in Taging, in Thare-khet-ta-raé, in A-ri-mad-da-na and

in The-ri-pits-tsa-ra ; the true doctrines of religion were maintained

during the reigns of many successive kings. Afterwards when the city

86 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

of Tampawati was built, from the time of king Thaik-taing, the

strength of religion gradually declined ; for the books of the Bi-da-

gat being not yet, the king Tsau Rahan and the whole country

believed the false doctrines of the great Ari teachers. The king

Tsau Rahdn indeed should have come to great destruction for killing

a king, while he was yet a hill man cultivating a plantation ; but on

accouut of the great merit acquired by the good works he had done

in former existences, he obtained the rank of a king. Thus, in the

divine law of the Phra, it is written, ‘ They who have acquired the

destiny which adheres to merit, succeed though they strive not; they

who have not acquired merit, fail though they strive much.’ There

are numerous examples of the truth of this. As for the king Tsau

Rahan, when the predestined successor, king Kytng Phy arrived,

Tsau Rahan stood at the entrance of the palace and cried ‘Who will

be king while IT am here?’ But at that moment the merit of

his former good works was exhausted ; the stone image at the gate

of the palace pushed him so that he fell headlong and died.”

He was succeeded by Kwon-tshau-kying-phyt. As this king

was the father of A-nan-ra-hta, the great hero of the modern Burmese

people, his descent and early history are carefully narrated. It has

already been mentioned, that king Tannet was dethroned by a youth

named, Nga Khwé. Kwon-tshau-kyoung-phyui was said to be a son

of king Tannet, born after the death of his father. An usurper gener-

ally retained in his harem, the queens of his predecessor ; so to pre-

vent the suspicion of Kyoung-phyui being a son of Nga Khwé, it is _

stated that the chief queen of Tannet being pregnant, refused to

remain in the palace after her husband's death, but fled secretly and

hid herself at a place called Kyting-phyi. In the Maha-radza-weng .

the story is thus related: ‘“ When Nga Khwé killed king Tannet,

and took possession of the palace, the queen, who was pregnant, fear-

ing that she would be seized by Nga Khwé, escaped from the palace

and lived at a place called Kyting-phyi. This place was also called

the dragon’s road, or golden road which leads to the abode of dragons.

There king Kytmg-phyti was born. When he was a child, he one.

day went to play with the children of the place, and the children

reviled him by calling him a fatherless boy, on this he complained to

his mother. His mother replied, ‘ My dear son, your father was not”

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 87

an ordinary man, he was king of this country. The present king

killed him and deprived him of the kingdom. You were then in the

womb, and I, fearing that I would be taken possession of by him,

escaped and hid myself at this place, where you were born.’ Kyting-

phyt on hearing this, made a vow, saying, ‘ May I succeed to the place

of my royal father.’ He then went to the city, and waited upon the

reigning king. The king bestowed upon him the right to gather betel

leaves* in the village or township of Let-htup. There the future

king quietly supported and comforted his mother. Daily when he

went out early on his occupation, his mother packed up for him his

daily food. He used to open this bundle and eat his food beneath a

tsting-gyén tree. Before eating any of his food, a handful of it was

daily laid at the root of the tree in honour of the guardian Nat. The

Nat thus pondered, ‘ This young man daily presents to me the first

portion of his meal, what will happen to him hereafter ?? He saw

that the young man before long would become aking. He therefore

appeared to Kwon-tshau and said, ‘ You have presented to me daily

the first portion of your food ; if you wish to be a great man, adhere

tothe worship of the Phra, and observe the five religious duties,

always tell the truth, and repeat the ten a-nu-thd-ti two thousand

times every day. Henceforth he habitually observed these instruc-

tions. Considering this event it is proper to remember that religion

was not altogether extinguished at Pugén. From that time the

Thagya and all the Nats who support religion, assisted Kwon Tshau,

and it began to be noised abroad that a Meng-ling, (embryo-king)

would appear at Pugin. As he was expected to appear upon a cer-

tain day, all the people went in a body on that day to the hill called

Ta-ywen-diing, to meet him. The Kwon-tshau resolved also to

collect the betel leaves early in the morning, and go to see the Meng-

ling. He therefore begged his mother to pack up his food earlier

than usual. His mother did accordingly. He took the packet and

went to Let-htup village before daylight, and having collected the

betel leaves quickly, he made his way to Pugan to see the Meng-

ling. A Thagyé, in the disguise of an old man riding on horseback,

came and said to the Kwon-tshau, ‘ Young man, I have business here,

* Hence the term Kwon-tshau, and Ky ingphyu the place of hig birth, com.

bined in the name of this king.

88 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

will vou be pleased to take this horse to Pugan ?’? Kwon-tshau re-

plied, ‘ Grandfather, I am in a hurry to arrive there to see the Meng-

ling, therefore I shall not be able to take your horse with me.’ The

old man said ‘ Young man, would you not reach there sooner on horse-

back than by walking ? Take this jewelled crown and put it on your

head ; put these ruby rings on your fingers ; hold the sword and

spear in your hands ; if I should be long in coming, go on until you

come to the king’s plain.’ Then Kwon-tshau, after having put the

rings on his fingers, wearing the jewelled crown on his head, and

holding the Thi-la-wun-tha sword and the A-rein-da-ma spear in his

hands, all given by the Tha-gya, rode swiftly to see the Meng-ling

at Pugan. The nobles, the ministers and the people, on seeing the

Kwon-tshau come riding towards them, in the dress and jewels given

by the Tha-gy4, in which he shone brightly as the rising sun, fell down

and prostrated themselves before him. Then Kwon-tshau thought

within himself ‘I am the Meng-ling,’ and remembering what the

Nat of tstng-gydn tree had said, he yode at once to the palace. King

Tsau Rahdn stood at the entrance, and said, ‘ Who will dare to enter

while I am here 2? But the stone image at the gate pushed him

down, and he fell headlong and died. sau Rahan had married three

sisters. The eldest was raised to the rank of the southern queen.

The second was called the middle, and the third the northern queen.

At the time of king Tsau Rahan’s death, Kyi-tsé who was afterwards

king, had been for nine months in the womb of the southern queen,

Tsuk-ka-té, who also became king afterwards, had been then six

months inthe womb of the middle queen. When Kwon-tshan be-

came king, he took these queens as his own. Anan-ra-hta was

brought forth by the northern queen. When Kyi-tso and Tsuk-

ka-te were of age, they built a very fine monastery and invited

the king Kwon-tshau to join in consecrating it. Kwon-tshau,

without any suspicion of danger, went according to their invita-

tion, Then Kyi-tso and Tsuk-ka-teé seized the king, and forced him

to become a Rahan. They spread a report that the king, out of

regard to his future welfare had voluntarily taken the vows of a

Rabin. Thus king Kwon-tshau Kytng-phya after a reign of

twenty-two years was deposed in the eightieth year of his age.” It is

stated that he lived to the age of one hundred and fiiteen years,

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 89

The prince Kye-tso then succeeded to the throne. He was passion-

ately fond of hunting. Once he came to a spot where a hunter was

hid in the forest, watching the drinking-place of a deer. The hunter,

seeing the jangal move, shot an arrow, which pierced the king, so that

he died.

He was succeeded by his brother Tsuk-ka-te. At this time the

dethroned king Kwutshan Kyungphya was in his monastery, and

his queen with her son A-nau-ra-hté-tsau supported him. Tsuk-ka-

te deeply insulted A-nau-ra-hta, who then begged from his father the

horse, regalia, and arms, formerly given to him by the Thagya.

Having received these, A-nau-ra-hta, raised an army, and attacked his

elder brother (cousin). They fought together singly; Tsuk-ka-te,

being thrust through with a spear, fled on horseback towards the

river, where he died. The place is to this day called Myin-ka-pa,

or “horse-swerving place.” The mother of A-nau-ra-hté, weeping

for her sister’s son, built pagodas in memory of his death and her own

mourning.

A-nau-ra-hta, after the death of his brother, (cousin), went to his

father at the monastery, and besought him to take the throne once

more. But Kyungphyaé refused on account of his great age, and

A-nau-ra-hta then took possession of the palace, and was consecrated

king. This, according to the history, was in the year 379 of the exist-

ing Burmese era, answering to 1017 A. D. But 372 appears to be

the correct date, derived from the Maha-Radzé-Weng itself.

It is the glory of A-nau-ra-hta that he restored the ancient power

of the Burmese monarchy, and effected a thorough reformation of

religion and of morals among the priesthood. The events of his

reign are recorded with much minuteness. At first he was deeply

troubled in conscience from having killed his elder brother. But he

was comforted in a dream by the king of the Tha-gy4s, who advised him

“to build pagodas, monasteries, and travellers’ rest-houses, and to

devote a portion of the merit of such good works to his elder brother ;

besides that, wells, tanks, embankments, canals, and rice-field water

channels should be constructed for the good of the people, and the

merit be given to the elder brother.” The king obeyed these direc-

tions, and so expiated the sin of which he had been guilty.

A-nau-ra-hta, being desirous of renewing the connection of the

90 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2;

royal family of Burma with the kings of India, now sent a nobleman

to demand in marriage a daughter of the king of Wethali. This

kingdom is represented still flourishing as a Buddhist country. The

king of Wethali gave his daughter, who was brought through Arakan

across the mountains. But on the way the nobleman was faithless to

his charge; and on arrival at the capital city, he represented to the

king that the princess was only an adopted, and not a real, daughter of

the king of Wethali. A-nau-ra-hta, therefore, did not bring her into

the chief building of the palace, but placed her, first, in the western,

liouse, and afterwards in the village of Pa-reim-ma, where she lived.

Nevertheless, she was pregnant by A-nau-ra-hta; and when her time

was near, an earthquake shook the whole land. The astrologers were

consulted, and they replied that he who would hereafter succeed to the

throne, was then in the womb of a woman towards the north. The,

king, fearing evil consequences, had all the pregnant women towards.

the north sought out and put to death. But the Indian princess. was

concealed by the care and devotion of a young Naga, or dragon youth,

and her life was thus saved. The astrologers aiterwards said the child

had been born. The king then caused six thousand sucking children.

to be killed. But the Naga youth preserved the son of the Wethali

princess. After this the astrologers said the child had reached the

age of a.cowherd. The king, caused five thousand boys of that age to.

be killed, but the son of the princess remained undiscovered. His.

mother then put him into a monastery, and he became a Rahan. ‘The

astrologers informed the king that his destined successor had become

amonk. The king, anxious to discover him, by the advice of the.

astrologers, invited all the Rahans to a feast. The astrologers said —

that he might be discovered by a shining circle, the mark of a true,

prince, inside his mouth. ‘The king, therefore, himself gave water to.

drink to each Rahdn from a vessel with a long spout. By this device

he saw the shining circle in the mouth of the young man, son of the

Indian princess. Convinced by this mark that he was of pure royal —

race, the king caused him to leave the monastery he had entered, and —

acknowledged him as his own son. He then received the name of

Kyan-tsit-tha, or Kydn-yit-tha. Many fanciful etymologies for this.

name are given in the history. The first name, which is that most

generally given means “ the child with the true mark.” The second —

1868. | On the History of the Burma Race. 91

is interpreted “the child that remained” after the others had been

killed. This son afterwards ascended the throne, and the remaining

kings of Pu-gan were descended from him.

The Maha-Raédz4-Weng next proceeds with the subject of the re-

form of religion. The chapter which treats of this important event,

opens by describing the necessity which existed for reform, justifies

the movement, and gives a clear narrative of the means by which it

was effected. The chapter opens in the following words :—

“In the reign of king A-nau-ra-ht4, Tsau the city was called

Pi-ga-ré-ma. All his predecessors had received the doctrines of the

thirty great A-ris, and their sixty thousand disciples, who lived at a

place called Tha-ma-hti, and were firm in the profession of a wrong

faith. These A-ri Rahans set aside the doctrines~of Buddha, and

established their own. They made a scripture to suit their own

desire, and persuaded the people to follow it. The law they preached

was such as ‘-‘Whosoever shall commit murder, he is freed from his sin

by repeating a prayer or invocation ; whosoever shall kill his parents,

by repeating a prayer, he is freed from the punishment due to the five

greatest sins,’ and so on, teaching people falsehood and wrong, as if

they were truth and right. Moreover, when the sons and daughters

of the king, or of nobles, ministers, rich persons, or others, were about

to be married, the bride was always sent to those teachers on the nigt

before; this was called presentation of the virgin flower. In the

morning when she came out from them, she was married. If a bride

was married without the virgin flower having been presented to the

teachers, heavy punishment had to be borne, for breaking a long

established custom. When king A-nau-ra-hta saw and heard of these

shameful doings, being filled with excellent virtue, and knowing that

the precepts of these teachers were false; being uneasy in mind, and

feeling great alarm, he began to long for the true law. At that time

the lord A-ra-han, called also Dham-ma-da-thi, arrived at Pu-gan

from the country of Tha-htun, called likewise Dham-ma-wa-ti. The

history of the lord A-ra-hén is as follows:—The holy Ra-han-das,

seeing that religion had not yet enlightened the countries of Thi-na-

pa-ranta and Taém-pa-di-pa, went to Tha-gy4 Meng, and prevailed on

him to persuade one who would be able to establish religion there to

do so. Tha-gyé Meng, having entreated one of the Nats in the Ta-

92 On the History of the Burma Race. ~ [No. 2,

wa-dein-tha-man-sius, he consulted and was conceived in the womb

of a Bréh-mani. When he was born, he was taken care of by a Ra-

hén-da named Thi-la-bid-di. When he was of age he became a Ra-

hén, and was taught the Bi-da-gét. On attaining the state of a

Ra-han-da, he was famous throughout Dzam-bi-di-pa, by the name of

A-ra-hén. Because religion was not yet established, this Rahan

came to the city of Pu-ga-ré-ma. On arriving, he stopped in a grove,

not very far from the border of the city. Tha-gyé Meng caused one

of the hunters of the country, who was out ranging the forest for

game, to see the lord A-ra-hén, The hunter, seeing a man with a

grave and noble countenance, began to think ‘ this is an excellent and

no ordinary man. I will conduct him to the city, and present him to

the king.’ So the lord A-ra-hén gathered up the eight priestly

requisites, and followed him to the presence of the king.”

At the interview which follows, the great teacher discourses elo-

quently on the doctrines, the moral teaching, and the perfections of

Buddha. A-nau-ra-hté at once is converted, and so sincerely well dis-

posed that “his heart became as the cleanest and softest cotton

dipped in the purest oil.” His mind is filled and saturated by the all-

subduing grace of the doctrine. The lord A-ra-han also gives to the

king a succinct narrative of the life of Gautama. He relates how

he died and went to Neib-ban; how the relics of his body were

taken by different kings; and long after were obtained by Thi-ri-

dham-ma Thau-ka. He adds that one being a tooth is worshipped in

Gian-da-la-rit, a country of China. That the complete scripture, Bi-da-

gat, has been brought from Ceylon to Tha-htin.

The king then declared his conversion to the doctrines of the

lord A-ra-han, and the heretical doctrines of the A-ri teachers were

cast aside. The whole of the people threw away their evil teaching,

and embraced the good law. The A-ri teachers and their sixty

thousand disciples were forced to become laymen. Many Ra-hans

came from Tha-htin, and the lord A-ra-han ordained as Ra-hans and

Pin-zens, those of the country who sincerely embraced the true faith.

About this time it is related that two foreigners, brothers, natives

of India, arrived at Tha-htin, being floated ashore on a piece of wreck.

They are represented as magicians ; but having offended the king of

Tha-htiin, one of them was put to death by him. ‘The other fled to

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 93

Pu-gin. There he married, and had two sons, named Shwe-byin-gyi

and Shwe-byin-nge. They were taken into the king’s service, and

became very useful to him. It appears that at this time communica-

tion between southern India and the coast of Pegu had become frequent.

By the preaching of the lord Ara-han, king A-nau-ra-hta learnt that,

in order to enjoy the full benefit of religion, it was requisite that the

great scriptures, the Bi-da-gat, should be obtained; and also a true

relic of the Phra. The whole of the Bi-da-gat was to be had at Tha-

httin, and even relics, which the kings had worshipped for many

generations. A-nau-ra-hté therefore sent to Ma-ni-ha, the king of

that country, a man of high rank and ability, to ask politely for a

complete copy of the Bi-da-gat. The king of Tha-httin answered

haughtily that he would give nothing. A-nan-ra-htd then was very

wroth ; and collecting a large army, advanced by land and water against

Tha-httin. There were four generals, of whom the king’s son Kyan-

tsit-tha was one. Notwithstanding his large army and his great

generals, the king was foiled in his attempt to take Tha-htin. His

astrologers informed him that the obstacles arose from the enchant-

ments of powerful magicians.and evil spirits. The king, by means of

counter-enchantments and contrivances, devised by the Indian who

had fled to him from Tha-httin, overcame the enchantments, and the

city was then taken. King Ma-nt-ha, his whole family, and court,

were captured and brought before A-nau-ra-hta. There were found

the holy relics preserved in a jewelled casket, which had been

worshipped from ancient times by the kings. These and thirty com-

plete copies of the Bi-da-gat were brought to the king, laden upon

thirty-two white elephants. These all with painters, builders, and

artificers of every description, and the soldiers, were carried away to

Pu-gin. At the same time the Ra-hans, learned in the Bi-da-gat,

were respectfully invited to accompany the king. At Pu-ga-ra-ma

he allotted separate places to the soldiers and the various artificers to

live in. The holy relics were put into a shrine studded with rubies,

which was placed at the head of the royal couch. The books of the

Bi-da-gat were deposited in a building beneath a lofty spire, adorned

with jewels, where the Ra-hans studied them. King Ma-ni-ha was

placed with his followers at Myin-ka-ba.

Aiter this A-nau-ra-hta, being a man of great piety, desired to

94 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

possess the holy tooth relic which was in the province of Can-da-la-rit

in China. He therefore marched with a vast army, accompanied by

Kyan-tsit tha and Shwe-by-in-gyi and Shwe-by-in-nge. The em-

peror of China shut himself up in his city, and not being aware of

the greatness of A-nau-ra-hta, took no notice of him. At length by

means of an artifice accomplished by Shwe-by-in-gye and Shwe-by-in-

nge, and by the boldness of Kyan-tsit-tha the emperor became alarmed.

The two sovereigns had a friendly meeting. The king, however, fail-

ed to procure the holy tooth relic. He brought away, however, an

emerald studded image, which had been sanctified by contact with the

holy relic; and in a divine communication from Tha-gy4 Meng, was

informed that he might have a forehead bone relic which king Dwot-

ta-biing had formerly brought to Tha-ye-khet-ta-ra from the country

of the Kam-raém. A-nau-ra-hta then returned, taking with him the

emerald image. While passing through Shan, a Chinese province of

Mau, he married Tsau-mwun-hla, the daughter of the prince of the

province. This marriage and the subsequent adventures of the prin- ©

cess, have been made the subject of one of the most popular dramas

in Burma. ,

After this the king went to Tha-re-khet-ta-ra, and pulled down the

pagoda in which king Dwot-ta-bing had enshrined the forehead

pone relic. In the histories of Arakan, it is said, he brought this relic

from that country ;* but that is not true. It had indeed originally

been brought from thence by king Dwot-ta-bing. A-nau-ra-hta,

fearing that the city of Tha-ré-khet-ta-r4 might fall into the hands of

enemies, destroyed it. When he arrived at Pu-gan, he built the

Shwe-zi-gun pagoda for the holy relic to repose. But although

* In the history of Arakan which I have consulted, it is stated that A-nau-

ra-hté invaded that country to carry away a celebrated brazen image of Gau-

da-ma, which was in the temple of Maha-mt-ni. He did not succeed in doing

so, The Arakanese history represents this first invasion as occurring in the

year 994 A. D., but records that the same king invaded Arakan twenty-four

years later, when the Arakanese kiug was killed. As A-nau-ra-hta, according

+o Burmese history, did not succeed to the throne until the year 1017 A. D., or

1010 A. D., more correctly reckoned, the two statements cannot be reconciled.

But the date of A-nau-ra-hta’s succession varies in different copies of the Maha-

Radza-Weng. In the appendix to Crawfurd’s embassy to the Court of Ava,

that author gives a list of the kings of Burma from manuscripts procured by

him in the country. The accession to the throne of A-nau-ra-hta is stated to

be in 997 A. D. This agrees better with the dates in the Arakanese history.

Considering that the father of A-nauw-ra-hta was still alive when the son ascended

the throne, there may have been doubts as to the proper date.

1868. | On the History of the Burma Race: 95

heavenly voices proclaimed the king’s righteousness, yet the holy relic

ascended to the sky. By the advice of the lord Ara-han, the king

consoled himself by worshipping the jewelled basket in which the

holy relic had been carried. He then thought of the famous tooth

relic in Ceylon, and sent a ship with four discreet messengers to ask

the king of that country for it. A miraculous emanation from the

tooth was the reward of this pious zeal, and this was borne away with

great honour by the four messengers. The king proceeded to the

Seaport to receive it, and brought it with a grand procession to

Pu-gén, where it was deposited in a suitable building at the gate of

the palace.* After this king Ma-ni-hé and his whole family were

degraded to the lowest depth of infamy, by being presented as pagoda

slaves to the Shwe-zi-gin pagoda. About this time Kyan-tsit-tha

deeply offended the king, and fled. The king despatched after him

some of his Indian swilt-running footmen, but they could not take

him. Kyan-tsit-tha crossed the Irawadi river to the western bank

and took refuge at a monastery, where he remained concealed. The

king now made a progress through the western portion of his domi-

nions as far as Bengal. That his descendants might have a memorial

of his greatness, he set up stone images; and having. built pagodas,

returned to his own city. As the reign of A-nau-ra-hta draws to a

close, the historian recapitulates the many pagodas and monasteries

which he had built; the tanks, canals, and water-dams he had

constructed ; the rice-land he had redeemed from jangal; his great

armies and the extent of his kingdom. But the protecting influence

of his good works was at length exhausted. In going to China he

had offended the guardian Nat of a tree, who then became his enemy.

As long as the influence of the king’s good works remained, the Nat

could do nothing against him. But that being now exhausted, the

Nat sought to take revenge. Changed into a wild buffalo, he met the

king near one of the gates of the city, and gored him to death. A-

nau-ra-hta reigned for forty-two years.

He was succeeded by sau-li, his son born of his chief queen

The governor of Pegu, Nga-Ra-man-kan, rebelled. In the disturb-

* It is curious that a few years ago the present king of Burma deputed

messengers to Ceylon to procure it, where it was popularly stated the tooth

relic was deposited. They returned with a model of it, which has been placed

in a building within the palace yard,

96 On the History of the Burma Race. No. 2,

ances which followed, Tsau-li was killed. Kyan-tsit-tha then defeat-

ed the rebel, and took the throne in the year 426 of the existing

Burmese era. He is also called Hti-hlaing-sheng.

On the accession of Kyan-tsit-tha to the throne, a not very intelli-

gible story is told of an intention to marry his daughter to the son of

the king of Pa-teik-ka-14, a name here given to some part of Bengal.

The marriage was eventually disallowed, it is stated, by the advice of

the nobles, “lest the country should become kula or foreign.” Not-

withstanding this the princess is represented as with child by the

kula prince, though doubt is afterwards thrown upon this fact, and

she gave birth to a son, who afterwards succeeded to the throne, under

the name of A-ling-tsi-thd. But the kula prince committed suicide,

and the princess was married to Tsau-gwon, the son of king Tsau-li.

So highly did Kyan-tsit-tha regard his grandson that, while he

was yet a child, he underwent the ceremony of bi-the-ka, or consecra-

tion as a king, and received the name of Thi-ri-dze-ya-thi-ra. Kyan-

tsit-tha either enlarged or completed, the Shwe-zi-giin pagoda built by

his father.

Once there came to Pu-gan eight Ra-hén-das from the Gan-da-ma-

da-na mountain. They presented a model of the Nan-da-mu-la cave

which is in that mountain. And the king determined to build one

like it. This was done, and it was called the N an-da-Phra. The

king also built many pagodas at various places near the city. He

died after a reign of twenty-eight years.

His grandson now ascended the throne. Though he received a name

at the time of consecration from his grandfather, yet the title of

Aliing-tsi-thu, referring to the great drum of the palace having at his

birth sounded without the agency of man, has been retained for him

in history. Soon after the commencement of his reign, he built the

Shwe-ki temple now to be seen at Pu-gan. This king travelled

throughout the whole extent of his dominions. He went into Arakan

and the adjoining country of Bengal, where he visited the stone images

set up by his great grandfather A-nau-ra-hta. It is said also that he

visited Ceylon. He regulated the weights and measures throughout

the kingdom. During the reign of Kyan-tsit-tha, the heir to the king

of Arakan had been expelled from his kingdom by arebel. He came

and resided at Pu-gan and there a son was born to him named Let-ga-

1868. | On the History of the Burma Race. O7

meng-nan. Alving-tsi-thi yielded to his entreaties and gave him an

army, said to consist of one hundred thousand Pyts, and one hundred

thousand Talaings. After one repulse the army was successful. The

usurper who occupied the throne of Arakan, Meng Ba-di, was slain, and

Let-ya-meng-nan was restored to the throne of his ancestors.* This

* In the history of Arakan this event is stated to have occurred in the year

465. The present Maha Ra-dz4-Weng appears to consider the year 480 as the

correct time. A Burmese stone inscription which was discovered at Buddha

Gaya and of which a facsimile is given in the 20th volume of the Asiatic Re-

searches, confirms the fact related in the Arakanese and Burmese histories, of

the restoration of Let-yé-meng-nan (called Pyt-ta-thein-meng) to his coun-

try by the king of Pu-gan. But there is a strange uncertainty as to the dates

recorded in the inscription. General Cunningham has some remarks on this

question in his Archzological survey report, dated 3rd June, 1862. I have not

seen the facsimile taken by General Cunningham, my present remarks therefore

apply to that published in the 20th volume of the Researches. The two dates

in lines 11 and 12 of the inscription, have been read by Prinsep and Cunning-

ham as 667 and 668. Colonel Burney, who first translated the inscription,

agreed with the Burmese literati in reading them 467 and 468. The latter no

doubt were induced to do so, lest their national history should be impugned.

Regarding the second date, there can, I think, be no doubt. It must be read as

660, not as 668. It will be found that a 4, a 6, an 8, and also a cipher, fortu-

nately occur elsewhere in the inscription, In the second line is a 4 rudely

engraved, but the same in form as the modern figure. The Burmese literati,

who gave the copy of the inscription in the modern character, have omitted

the figure, and given the number four in writing. A 6 occurs in the eleventh

line of the original, meaning the sixth day of the week. In the translation

this has been rendered Friday. The figure 4 in the second line is utterly un-

like either of the figures in the second date, which I read as 660. The two

first figures are very like the undoubted 6 in the eleventh line. The last figure

is similar to the undoubted cipher in the eleventh line, being the record of the

10th day of the month. So much for the second date. In the first date there

has apparently been some error on the part of the engraver. The first figure

in that date is really a4 reversed. It has not the least resemblance to a 6.

The second figure is a rude 6, with an adjunct, large and clumsy, instead of the

small stroke added to the 6, which stands for Friday, so that it almost looks

like an additional figure between the6 and 7. The last figure is undoubtedly 7,

I therefore read this date as 467. The first figure as it stands is not a 4.

Turn the paper upside down and it is 4. The engraver only could account for

this vagary. The question now is, how can the dates 467 and 660, thus placed

together in the inscription, be reconciled with the object for which the inscrip-

tion was written? The Burmese language, especially as it was written five or

six hundred years ago, is very elliptical, and it is frequently necessary to

guess at the meaning attempted to be conveyed. In the translation of the

inscription in the Researches, the idea is conveyed that the temple of Buddha

Gaya was rebuilt in 467 or say 667, and that the religious ceremonies, ap-

parently of consecration, followed in the next year. Certainly at first sight the

inscription appears to mean this, But it isnot necessarily so. And if the second

date is 660 and not 668, it cannot be so. I take the inscription then to jump

over long periods cf time. It first recounts how the temple had been built by

Asoka. It was destroyed and repaired more than once at long intervals of

time. Then came the latest work of the kind, and it was rebuilt under the

immediate assistance of the king of Arakan, Pya-ta-thein-meng, called also

Let-ya-meng-nan. This rebuilding occurred in the year, Burmese era, 467.

This quite corresponds with the date of Let-y4-meng-nan being restored to his

98 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

king built the temples still to be seen at. Pu-gan called Shwe-ka,

and Tha-pinyo. He kept up intercourse with a king in the eastern

part of Bengal, called in the Burmese history, Pa-teik-ka-ra, He is

said to have married a daughter of this king. Alting-tsi-thi, when

he became old, was much troubled by the disobedience of his sons.

His oldest son Meng Sheng Tsau retired from the city, and settled

near where the city of A-ma-ra-pti-ra was afterwards built. There he

formed the lake called Aung-peng-lay. He wished, his second son

Na-ra-thti to succeed him. The king was now a hundred and one years

old, and had reigned seventy-five years. This son, desirous of hasten-

ing his death, had him carried from the palace to the Shwe-ki temple,

where he was smothered under a heap of cloth.

Na-ra-thii at once took, possession of the palace. But his elder

brother marched rapidly towards the city. Na-ra-tha cunningly con-

cealed his intentions, and induced the chief, or bishop, of the Buddhist

monks, to send a message of peace and welcome to Meng Sheng Tsau.

The prince, being unsuspicious, came down the river with one boat

and a few attendants. He was met by his brother at the landing-

throne. (See History of Arakan, in Journal, Asiatic Society, Vol. XIII. p. 39).

The inscription appears mainly concerned in recounting the religious ceremonies

and worship offered to the temple on a special occasion. And this event

occurred in the year 660. In the latter year, we must conclude that the in-

scription was written. This supposition appears to me to reconcile the incon-

sistency of the dates hitherto as read. The second date being undoubt-

edly 660, the first cannot be 667, as it (the first in the inscription) gives the

rebuilding of the temple for that year, and the consecration or other religious

ceremony would be subsequent to that. The difficulty is removed if we read

the first date as 467 for which it has been shown there are good reasons. If the

inseription means that the worship offered in 660 was a sort of consecration of

the building, there is certainly no reason apparent why one hundred and

nihety-three years were allowed to elapse before this was done. But it may

be that there being a special and solomn worship in 660, -a record was then

made regarding the offerings and the previous repeated building of the temple.

The inscription has been written by an Arakanese, and this might have been

done by the king of Arakan in 660 (A. D. 1298) more probably than by the

king of Pu-gan, as the latter kingdom had at that time fallen into great confu-

gion in consequence of the Chinese invasion. In the histories of Burma and

- Arakan, dates have no doubt, in some instances, been tampered with. But

there is no reason to suppose that this has been done to the extent of nearly

two hundred years. The first time that Burma igs mentioned by an Huropean

is, I believe, near the close of the 13th century by Marco Polo. The war made

by Kublai Khan on Burma is by him stated to have occurred in 1272. This

only differs by twelve years from the date given in the Burmese history. On

the whole as the first date in the inscription has only the last figures, 67,

clearly defined, and the second date is clearly 660, the above attempt at expla-

nation appears to be the most probable solution of the difficulty.

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 99

place, and escorted to the palace with honour. At once he was conse-

crated king, but that night was poisoned. Na-ra-thtii then became

king without opposition. He pursued a course of crime and cruelty,

He put to death many of his father’s favourites. The whole of the

people, in the palace, the city, and the country, were alarmed and

distressed. He commenced building a magnificent temple called

Dha-ma-yan-gyi; but it was with difficulty that workmen could be

procured, for all fled from fear,- and the work proceeded slowly.

This king, with his own hand, killed the daughter of the king of Pa-

teik-ka-ré (Bengal) who had remained after the death of his father.

This led to an extraordinary event. Her father, on hearing of the

murder of his daughter, disguised eight brave men as Brahmans, who

were sworn to execute their master’s revenge. They arrived at Pu-gan,

and were introduced into the palace under pretence of blessing the

king. There they killed him with a sword. After which they killed

each other or committed suicide, so that all eight died. This king is,

on account of the manner of his death, called “ Ku-la-kyé-meng,” that

It is stated that at

)

is ‘the king killed or dethroned by foreigners.’

the time of his death, the temple Dha-ma-yan-gyi was unfinished.

He was succeeded by his son Meng-ri-na-ra-thein-kha. He appoint-

ed his younger brother to the office of Hin-she-meng or “ lord of the

eastern house,” a title equivalent to that of crown-prince. ‘This is the

first time the title is mentioned in the history. After some time, the

‘king, under pretence of a war having broken out on the northern

frontier, despatched his brother to that quarter in command of an army.

He then took possession of his brother’s wife. The crown-prince

found that there was no war, and when he discovered the wrong that

had been done him, he returned to the city and put his brother to

death.. He then succeeded to the throne under the title of Na-ra-ba-

di-tsi-thi.

He is represented as a good king. He visited all parts of his king-

dom. He built, at Pu-gén, the temples called Gau-dau-pal-lene and

‘Tst-la-ma-ni; and one, a Tha-ma-hti not far from the city, called

Dham-ma-ra-dzi-ka. This king had constant communication with

Ceylon. Four Rahans from Ceylon settled at Pu-gan and introduced

some new philosophical doctrines. The king is highly praised for his

piety and attention to the affairs of his country. He died after a

100 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

reign of thirty-seven years, and was succeeded by his son Dze-ya-thein-

kha, in the year 1204, A. D.

Dze-ya-thein-kha had a quiet reign. He was chiefly oceupied with

religious buildings. He finished the Gau-dau-pal-leng temple com-

menced by his father, and built the Bau-di temple with some others,

which are now less known.

His son Kya-tswa called also Dham-ma-ra-dz4 was pre-eminent in

learning. He gave his whole time to the study of religion and

philosophy, and left the affairs of the kingdom to his son U-za-né.

As a work of merit, he formed a lake by damming up a mountain-

stream, where all kinds of water-fowl enjoyed themselves, and which

also watered rice-lands.. He was learned and pious, but the religious

zeal, and the art which, during two hundred years had existed, and.

through which the noble temples still to be seen at Pu-gan, had been

built, now had passed away. This king only commenced a pagoda,

not now to be traced, which he did not live to complete. He died

from an accidental wound after a reign of sixteen years.

His son U-za-na succeeded. This king had been accustomed as a

young prince to hunt wild elephants in the forests of Pegu. He went

there again to follow this sport, and was killed by a wild elephant,

having reigned five years.

This king left two sons, Thi-ha-tha and Meng-khwé-khyé. The

former had been appointed heir to the throne, but a powerful noble

formed a conspiracy, and he was set aside. ‘The younger son Meng-

khwe-khye then succeeded with the title of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-te. There

was a rebellion in the province of Mut-ta-ma (Martaban) head-

ed by the Governor Nga-Shwe-lay; but it was suppressed. This

king lived in greater luxury than any of his predecessors. He com-

menced building a pagoda called Men-ga-la dze-di. But there was a

prophecy which said “The pagoda is finished and the country ruined.”

The king therefore paused and for six years did nothing to the pagoda.

But he afterwards thought this fear of consequences inconsistent with

piety, and discreditable to his fame as a king, he therefore finished the

pagoda in the year 636 or A. D. 1274. In the relic chamber were

deposited golden images of the disciples of Gau-da-ma ; golden models

of the holy places; golden images of the fifty-one kings of Pu-gan,

and images of the king, his wives and children, and of the nobles of

the country. Holy relics were also deposited.

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 101

In the year 643, answering to A. D. 1281, the Talaings rebelled.

They killed the Governor of Martaban named A-leim-ma, and Wa-ri-

ra made himself king. The same year the Emperor of China sent am-

bassadors to demand gold and silver vessels as tribute, saying that

king A-nau-ra-hté had presented such tokens of homage. The

ambassadors were insolent in their conduct, and the king, against

the remonstrance of his ministers, had them put to death. The Km-

peror of China now assembled an army to punish this outrage. The

king appointed two brothers named A-nan-da-pits-tsin and Kan-

da-pits-tsin to command his army. They marched to the city of

Nga-tshaung-gyan, which appears to have been near the Ba-mau or

Ta-ping river. This city they fortified, and then for three months

resisted the invaders at the passage of the Ba-mau river. But they

were overpowered by numbers, and forced to retreat. The Ta-ruk

army then crossed the river, and Nga-tshaung-gyan was destroyed.

The two generals then retreated and built two stockades on the east

side of the Marle hill. There a fierce battle was fought. But A-nau-

da-pits-tsin was killed, and the Ta-rik army being superior in num-

bers, the Burmese were again defeated. In the meantime Na-ra-thi-

ha-pa-te had abandoned the city of Pu-g4n with his whole court, and

had gone down the river Irrawaddy to Bassein. The army arriving

at the city and finding no one, followed in the same direction. The

Ta-rik army pursued to the city, and then further south as far as

Ta-rik-mau, but the way being long and food scarce for a large army,

they returned. The flight of the king is stated to have occurred in

the year 1284, and he is called “‘ Ta-rik-pye-meng” or the king who

fled from the Ta-rik. After five months he sets out on his return up

the Irrawaddy. The historian records the excessive luxury in which

the king lived, even amidst the desolation of his country. He went

on until he reached Prome. There his son Thi-ha-tha was Governor.

This prince forced his father to swallow poison.

This king left several sons by different mothers. Three of them

U-za-né, Kyau-tswa, and Thi-ha-tht now disputed the throne. Finally

Kyau-tswa, who was Governor of Dalla in Pegu, succeeded, and became

king in the year 648 or A. D, 1286. The Burmese empire had now

almost fallen to pieces. The several nations who had formerly been

tributary are enumerated, and it is added they now became indepen-

102 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

dent. It is well to enter these here to show the extent of territory

claimed, as having at one time formed part of the Empire of Pu-gan.

First come Ra-khaing and other countries and tribes to the westward.

Of the three Talaing divisions, Pegu was taken by the Governor with

the title of Ta-ra-by4; Martaban was taken by Wa-ri-rd. The

countries of Yo-da-yé, Ta-neng-tha-ri, Thouk-ka-te, Pi-tha-louk,

La-gwon-thi-mé-akyau-maing-tsan, Leng-zeng, La-waik, Ywon or

Zim-mé; Gin, Guen or Kyaing-htin, Lu or Kaing-rin, also on

the east of the Than-lwing river Maing-mau, Tse-khweng, Ho-tha,

La-tha, Mo-na, Tsanda, Mo-wun, Kaing-mé, Maing-myin ; all became

independent. The Tsaulon Shans on the west of the Thanlwing

river and of the three Talaing divisions the city of Bassein, still

remained to the Burmese country. At this time there were, in the

kingdom, three brothers who were great favourites with the king.

They were the sons of a Shan Chief who had fled from his country

while it was disturbed, and had settled at Myin-tsaing during the

reign of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-te. Their names were A-then-kha-ra, Ra-

dza-then-gyan, and Thi-ho-thi. The eldest received the district of

Myin-tsaing, the second that of Nek-kha-rd, and the third that of

Peng-lay. They exercised great authority. The chief Queen, being

offended that she was never consulted by the king, entered into a

conspiracy with the three brothers to dethrone Kyau-tswa. They had

built a fine monastery at Myin-tsaing, and the Queen persuaded the

king to go to the consecration of it. When there the three brothers

seized him and forced him to become a monk. ‘This occurred in the

year 660, being A. D. 1298.

After this, the Queen returned to Pu-gén. The three brothers

guarded the late king at Myin-tsaing, and ruled like kings. At Pu-

gan, the eldest son of Kyau-tswa named Tsau-nhit was allowed to live

in the palace ; his younger brother Meng-sheng-tsau was made Governor

of the district of Tha-ret. In some histories it is said that Tsau-nhit

was merely permitted to live at Pu-gan, and that Thi-ha-tha the

youngest of the Shan brothers ruled there. These brothers were allied

to the royal family by the marriage of their sister to Prince Thi-ha-

thu, son of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-te who had forced his father to take poison.

Their sister’s daughter by that Prince was now married to Meng-

sheng-tsau and they lived at the city of Tha-ret.

1868.] On the History of the Burma Race. 108

~The Pu-gan dynasty ends with the deposition of Kyau-tswé. The

three Shan brothers exercised what power remained to the kingdom.

Their authority was gradually consolidated, and about sixty years

later, the city of Ava was founded. There or in the immediate neigh-

bourhood, the capital of the Burmese monarchy has been established

up to the present time.

Observations.

It has been shown in a former paper, that after the conversion of

the rude Turanian tribes, divelling in the country of the upper Ivra-

waddy to Buddhism, they assumed the national name of Mran-maé. In

later times other cognate tribes have been absorbed in that nationality.

Probably the most remarkable instance of this assimilation, is that of

the Talaing or Mwun people, which, in about a century, has become

nearly lost in name and language, amidst the Mran-ma in their own

country of Pegu. In the early time of the Mrén-ma people, a

monarchy was established, having the capital city at Tagting or old

Pu-gan. It was afterwards overthrown by an invasion of tribes who

came from the east or north-east. The conquered people or portions

of them, retired down the Irrawaddy, and established themselves in

the country near to the present town of Prome. There kindred tribes

already existed ; the Pyt or Byt being on the east bank of the river,

and the Kam-ran or Kan-ran being in the hilly country to the west, and

in the southern part of the country now called Ra-khaing or Arakan,

A city was now built to the east of the present town of Prome, and

received the name of Tha-re-khet-ta-ra._ The remains of this city still

exist, and the positions of the walls and gates are shown by the pea-

sants of the neighbourhood. Some ancient pagodas, built of stone, are

also to be seen. The city is now generally called Ra-the-myo, or

city of the hermit, from the legend of the hermit recorded in the

Maha-ra-dza-Weng. The name Tha-re-khét-ta-ra appears to be the

Burmese form of the Pali, Thi-ri-khet-ta-ra, the latter word being

the same as Kshatriya and referring to the supposed Indian descent

of the hermit and of Dwot-ta-bing the founder of the city. It

has already been shown in a former paper, that the Burmese royal

family, claim to be descended from the race to which Gau-da-ma

belonged, that is, the Sakya tribe included in the Kshatriya division

104 On the History of the Burma Race. [No. 2,

of the peoples in Gangetic India. The whole term then would

mean City of the noble Kshatriya. This city founded, according

to Burmese history, in the fifth century before Christ, continued

the seat of government of the Burmese monarchy for 537 years.

During this period we are not informed as to events in the upper

Irrawaddy, where it is probable the tribes coming from the eastward

continued to maintain themselves. The monarchy at Tha-re-khet-ta-

‘ra 1s represented as being transmitted in the same family with only

one break. This defect also is supposed to have been remedied in

after times by the appearance of a true descendant of the ancient royal

race. The dynasty established near Prome is represented, consistently

with Buddhist tenets, as being finally brought to an end, by the

mysterious but inevitable influence of an act of impiety. The sin

which produced this result, was the act of devoting a portion of the

gold of a holy image to secular objects ; and though the king was not

personally involved therein, yet he and his country were thereby

doomed to destruction. A legend relates how dark rumours of coming

wars and tumults, prevailed among the people; and from the general

dread and distrust which existed, a trifling occurrence was the imme-

diate occasion of a civil war. ‘The several tribes which still existed

separately, though subject to one king, fought with each other. A

portion of the Pyt tribe retired to the north, and finally settled at the

place called new Pu-gan, on the east bank of the Irrawaddy river.

This is about one hundred and seventy miles north of Prome. Here

a new dynasty was established, which is held to be the true royal race

of Burma; while Prome appears at this time to have been subdued

and occupied for some time, by the Talaing people coming from the

south. But on this point the Burmese narrative is not clear. It

does not appear what extent of territory belonged to the monarchy of

Tha-re-khet-ta-ra. It is, however, probable that it did not extend on

the south farther than a ridge of hills called A-kauk-taung, about forty

miles below Prome. On the north, it may have reached to Mye-de, fiity

miles distant ; while east and west it did not extend beyond the hills

which bound the valley of the Irrawaddy. During the time this kingdom

lasted, it is probable that the tribes coming from the northeast, who

had overthrown the Buddhist kingdom established in the upper Trra-

waddy, gradually mingled with the earlier inhabitants. After the

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 105

establishment of the monarchy at new Pu-gan, the upper country in

time became subject to that kingdom. The large influence which the

Py tribe had in the formation of that monarchy is evident from the

legend of the third king called Pyt-meng-ti, who, the historian is

anxious to show, was not a Pyti by race, but a descendant of the an-

cient kings of Tagting. An interval of more than two hundred years

occurs before any event of consequence is recorded. The arrival of

the celebrated teacher Bud-da-gau-tha, bearing the Buddhist scriptures

from Ceylon, is an event which is justly regarded of the highest

importance to the Indo-Chinese nations. It may be accepted as an

historical fact that he came to Tha-htun, which is situated a few miles

north of Martaban, and which was then the capital city of one of the

Talaing states. In most histories of Burma, it is stated that he was

a native of Tha-htun, but this claim now seems to be abandoned.

The year given for his arrival, A. D. 403, has no doubt been fixed,

alter consulting the Mahawanso of Ceylon, but still is scarcely consis-

tent with it, as he was in Ceylon during the reign of Mahé Nama,

who began to reign in A. D. 410. The Burmese Mahé-radza-weng

assumes that the whole of the Buddhist scriptures were at this time

brought to Pu-gian. This is not credible. The intercourse between

the Burmese and Talaings at this time appears to have been but small,

and as has been seen, the history subsequently relates the arrival of

the scriptures, and the reform of religion, as being brought about in

the reign of A-nau-ra-hta, or about six hundred years afterwards. At

the beginning of the fifth century of the Christian era, it is probable

that Buddhism in Burma was in a very corrupt state. Originally

established in the country of the upper Irrawaddy by missionaries from

Gangetic India, the religion had been overwhelmed by the irruption

of tribes from the eastward ; the Burmese people in the central Irra-

waddy country appear to have remained isolated for some centuries.

In the year 638, A. D., during the reign of Then-g4 Ra-dza there is

evidence of intercourse with India, as a new era was then adopted,

which is in use to the present time. In the Maha-ré-dz4-weng there

isa frequent confusion of dates. The writers have attempted to

reconcile dates on stone inscriptions recording the dedication of tem-

ples and monasteries with those derived from other sources. The

consequence is, that in many cases, it is evident that the dates for

106 On the History of the Burma Race. [No, 2,

some events have been made to fit into, what was supposed to be, an

absolute necessity. But on the whole, there appears to have been an

honesty of purpose, and a painstaking care in the writers of the Bur-

mese national history, which is highly creditable to them.

In Robinson’s history of Assam, we are informed, on the authority

of Pemberton, that the Shans, about the year 80 of the Christian era,

established the kingdom of Pong, of which Mo-gaung was the capital.

This city is on a feeder of the Irrawaddy, about eighty miles north

from Ba-mau. It was not until seven hundred years later, that they

extended their territory, eastward to the country around Ba-mau ;

and westward to Munniptir and Assam. In the latter country they

are called Ahom. It was the decline of this kingdom which enabled

A-nau-ra-ht4 to re-assert the rights of the Burmese people to the

territory of the upper Irrawaddy, in the eleventh century ; and it has

remained, with a few intervals, under the Burmese kings ever since.

In the early part of the eleventh century of the Christian era, the

great hero of the later Burmese history, A-nau-ra-hta ascended the

throne. That this king conquered Tha-htun and procured the Buddhist

scriptures from thence cannot be doubted. His reform of religion is

minutely and graphically described. He had intercourse with India

and China. He appears to have established and maintained the in-

fluence of his government in the upper Irrawaddy. In the reigns of

his immediate successors, and during a period of little more than one

hundred and fifty years, were built the magnificent temples which still

remain uninjured at Pu-gan. They show a grandeur of design seen

nowhere else from the Indus to the Cambodia river, and have rather

the appearance of gothic Cathedrals than of Buddhist temples. It is

remarkable that the most elaborate of these, in internal sculptured de-

coration, if not in general design, was the first erected. It is that

called A-nan-da, which was built by Kyan-tsit-tha supposed son of

A-nau-ra-hta, who ascended the throne in the year 1064, A. D.

Nearly the last of these great temples, called Dham-ma-yan-gyi, was

built by king Na-ra-thi amidst general discontent at his tyranny and

extortion, which were exercised apparently to provide funds for the

building. It was unfinished at his death, and from its present ap-

pearance was probably never completed. The intercourse which at

- this period existed between Pu-gan and the countries of India and

1868. | On the History of the Burma Race. 107

Ceylon will no doubt account for the beautiful work in the architec-

tural details of these buildings. But the designs for them appear

not to have been derived from Indian examples, and the fervent

revival of Buddhism may, fora short period, have called forth a talent

which derived its existence from enthusiasm for religion. The close

connection of Burma with India at this period is, in other respects,

worthy of notice. King A-nau-ra-hté is represented as having

married a daughter of the king of We-tha-li; the ancient kingdom

of We-tha-li situated to the north of Patna, could scarcely be in

existence at this time, and the statement may be taken to mean that

A-nati-ra-hté did marry the daughter of some Buddhist Raja. A

strange mystery is at first thrown over the paternity of. Kyan-tsit-tha,

who was the son of this Indian princess; and still stranger is

the doubt as to the paternity of Kyan-tsit-tha’s grandson and successor

A-ling-tsi-thi. His mother was the daughter of Kyan-tsit-tha,

and it.seems to be implied in the history that his father was an Indian

prince, son of the king of Pa-teik-ka-ré. This prince came to

Pu-gén and committed suicide there, after which Kyau-tsit-tha’s

daughter was married to a son of Kyan-tsit-tha’s half-brother Tsau-li.

It is by no means clear what name is represented by Pa-teik-ka-ra.

The Burmese make sad havoc of all Indian names, except those

which they have received through the ancient Pali. The only name

which I can discover, as likely to have been meant, is Vikrampur,

which was near Dacca, and was for some time the capital of Hastern

Bengal, before the Mahomedan conquest, which commenced in 1203.

Up to the close of the eleventh century of the Christian era,

or even later, it is not improbable that the kings of Bengal were

still Buddhist ; and unless this part of the Burmese history is pure

invention, that must have been the case. But perhaps the strangest

story, illustrating the connection at this time between the two

countries, is that told of the revenge taken by the king of Pa-teik-

ka-ra for the murder of his daughter by king Na-ra-thi. This

story can scarcely have been invented. It is not one tending to

exalt the glory of the royal race, an object very dear to Burmese

historians, The name given to this king also “ Kulé-ky4-meng,”

or the king killed by foreigners, is that by which he is now

commonly called. Another undoubted instance of the connection

[08 On the History of the Burma hace. [No. 2,

of the kings of Burma with Bengal, is the rebuilding of the

temple at Buddha Gaydé under the orders of A-ling-tsi-tha at

the beginning of the twelfth century.

In the reign of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-te occurred the invasion, by the

Mogul or the Tartar army under the orders of the Emperor Kablai

Khan, which is mentioned in the travels of Marco Polo. As

far as I know, this is the first mention of Burma, at least in modern

times, by any European author. It will be well therefore briefly to

compare his account of the invasion of the Moguls with what is

stated in the Burmese history. In the edition of the great traveller

by Hugh Murray, what relates to Burma is contained in chapters

49, 50, and 51. From the first of these, it appears that in the

year 1272, the great Khan sent an army of Tartars in the province

of Garaian or Karazan, which is understood to be northern Yunan.

The king of Mien or Burma, thinking he was going to be attacked,

assembled a large army, advanced to the city of Vociam, and took

post in a plain at the distance of three days’ journey. There a

great battle was fought, in which the Burmese were defeated.

Afterwards the ‘Tartar Khan conquered the country of Mien.

Chapter 50 describes the route from Caraian into Burma, which

may be either that leading down the Bamau river to the Irrawaddy,

or that leading nearly direct south to Thein-ni. Both are followed

by caravans at the present day, and no doubt were formerly. But

the route taken by the army of invasion was that leading down to

Ba-mau. Chapter 51 refers to the capture of the city of Mien

or Pu-gan by the Tartar army. This, as related by Marco, may

either result from an immediate march on the capital, after the

battle described in Chapter 50, or may possibly refer in Ee to

the proceedings of a subsequent expedition.

T think it must be admitted that the Burmese account, as regards

the localities of the campaign, is more likely to be correct than

Marco’s, who wrote his narrative long after the transactions referred

to, and perhaps without even notes to assist his memory; considering

that his general correctness is marvellous. The city of Vociam is

generally understood to refer to Yung-chang, called by the Burmese

Wun-shen, which lies about a day and a half’s journey east of the

Salwin river. Now the Burmese would scarcely be so imprudent,

1868. | On the History of the Burma Race. 109

when they stood on the defensive, as to advance so far as that city

away from their resources. And their own account in the national

history is quite inconsistent with such a theory. In short, what

they relate, is just what a prudent general would do in similar

‘circumstances. That is the pass into Burma likely to be taken by

_ the enemy was, that formed by the course of the Ta-ping or Bamau

river through the mountains. The Burmese army defended that

pass, and had a fortified post called Nga-tshaung-gyan a little in

their rear. For three months they resisted the Tartar army, but

being overpowered by numbers, were forced to retreat, and abandon

the fortified post. They then took post at the Male hill, nearly

two hundred miles further south where they built two stockades.

Here a decisive battle was fought, in which the Burmese acknow-

ledge they were entirely defeated, and the Ta-ruk army marched

on to the capital Pu-gan, about one hundred and fifty miles distant.

Now, from this narrative, it is evident that there was fighting in

the hilly country bordering on Vociam, but some six or seven

ordinary days’ journey from it ; and that the great battle took place

at least some ten or twelve days’ journey farther still. How is this

to be reconciled with Marco Polo’s battle near the city of Vociam?

In the first place, Marco speaks of the kingdom of Vociam, and it

appears from the Burmese history, that after the war, the Chinese

added to their territory several of the frontier districts which

remained under the direct government of the Tartar governor of

Yung-chang. So that Marco appears to attribute to the kingdom

of Vociam a greater extent of territory to the west, than it possessed

before the war. And as he states, the Khan “added the lands

of Mien to his dominions,” he perhaps used the term kingdom

of Vociam, as extending down to the Irrawaddy river. But

Marco’s is a somewhat disjointed narrative, and in the 51st Chapter,

appears to raise up a subsequent expedition with the capture of

Pu-gan in the reign of Na-ra-thi-ha-pa-te. His words are as

follows :—‘‘ When the great Khan conquered that city, he desired

“all the players and buffoons, of whom there were a great

“number in his court, to go and achieve the conquest, offering

“them a captain and some warlike aid. The jesters willingly

“undertook the affair, and setting out with the proffered assistance,

110 On the History of the Burma Race. [ No. 2,

“ subdued this province of Mien.” Now this story 1s quite incon-

sistent with what Marco tells usin the 49th Chapter of the hard

fought battle the Tartars had with the Burmese in the kingdom

of Vociam in the year 1272. That surely could not have led the

Khan to anticipate in future a feeble resistance from such a_ people.

Can this statement be explained from the Burmese history? I

think it may be. The Burmese virtually acknowledge that, after

the capture of their capital, the kingdom became dependant on the

Tartar Khan. The king called contemptuously “ Ta-ruk-pye-ming,” ~

having been murdered, his son Kyau-tswa was deposed, and three

Shan chiefs governed the country from Myin-tsaing, a city about

thirty miles south of Ava, where the Shan brothers had established

themselves. This is represented as being the state of affairs in the

year 1298, (1291 by the revised dates), or fourteen years after the

capital had been taken by the Tartars. ‘Then the deposed king

Kyau-tswa complained to the Khan, apparently acknowledging

himself to be a tributary king. A Tartar army came into Burma

to restore king Kyau-tswa. The Shan brothers made no resistance,

but conciliated the Tartar general with rich presents, and disposed

of Kyau-tswa’s claim by putting him to death. This plan was

adopted by the advice of “ players and buffoons,’’? who possibly

may have come with the Tartar army. The Burmese history

states that the Shan brothers were advised to consult tumblers and

rope-dancers. The Burmese are very fond of consulting the fates,

by listening to undesigned warnings by children or persons of low

estate. In accordance with this idea, the tumblers and rope-dancers—

who may be accepted as equivalent to the players and butffoons of

Marco-—-were summoned to exhibit a performance. They sang a

song in which occurred the words -—‘ There can be no dispute,

if there is no disputant.” This was accepted asa guide to action ;

Kyau-tswa was killed, and his head delivered to the Tartar

general,—together with arguments in the shape of presents,— to

show that no disputant to the existing government remained,

The Tartar general then agreed to withdraw his army after having

employed it in the unexplained work of digging a canal, which

is shewn near Myin-tsaing to this day. The occasion for this second

appearance of a Ta-ruk or Tartar army is certainly consistent with ;

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 111

the whole narrative as given in the Burmese history, and it may be,

that the quaint story of the tumblers’ advice being followed in

an affair of such importance, gave rise to the distorted gossip which

Marco has repeated at second or third hand. It is evident that

Marco was not aware or had forgotten that a revolution had been

accomplished in Burma since Pu-gén had been taken in the first

instance; that the king had been deposed, and that consistently with

the traditions of the race, a new dynasty now gradually rising, had

abandoned the ancient capital, the fortune of which had passed

away, and had settled in another city, where the interview with

the general of the second Tartar invasion, took place. Hence the

“city of Mien,” of the first invasion is represented by Marco

as the “city of Mien” of the second also. In short, in chapter

51, events at Pu-gén and events at Myin-tsaing, which occurred

fourteen years apart, are mixed up together.

Tn regard to dates, Marco Polo represents the first war as occurring’

in 1272. The Burmese represent the quarrel as arising in 1281 and

Pu-gan as being taken in 1284. The Burmese dates, as now given,

are not to be depended on within ten or twelve years, for there hag

no doubt, been a general readjustment of dates throughout the

Maha-ra-dzé-weng. And I have found a positive error of seven

years from dates contained in their own history. The taking of

Pu-gan will therefore be correctly 1277. But Iam satisfied that

for many years previous to 1281, there had been no quarrel with

the Ta-ruks or Chinese. There is no trace of such an event in

the Burmese history since the time of A-nau-ra- hta, about two

hundred and fifty years before. Had any dispute occurred with

China, especially during or about the year 1272, it would surely

have been mentioned in the Burmese annals. But about that time,

the king of Burma was occupied. with the affairs of the southern

portion of his country. His predecessors, for some generations, had

been occupied more with the countries to the westward than with

those to the east. And this leads to a question which has caused

difficulty in the title which Marco has given to the king of Burma

—namely king of Mien and Bangalé. It is the latter word that

requires explanation. We have already seen, that there was an

undoubted connection of Burma with Bengal and other parts of

112 On the History of the Burma Race. [ No. 2,

India, commencing in more modern times, with the great revival

of Buddhism under A-nau-ra-hta in the early part of the eleventh

century of the Christian era. Marriages were contracted between

the royal family of Burma, and the family of some Raja, apparently

a Buddhist, in Bengal. The strange tale of the assassination of

king Nara-tha by Indians sent from Bengal, has been related.

From all these circumstances, and from the conquests attributed

to A-nau-ra-hté, it 18 very probable that after the conquest of

Bengal by the Mahomedans in the thirteenth century, the kings

of Burma would assume the title of kings of Bengal. It is

nowhere expressly stated in the Burmese history, but the course

of events renders this very probable. We know that this claim

to Bengal was asserted by the king of Burma in long after years.

In the journal of the Marquis of Hastings, under the date of

September 6th, 1818, is the following passage :-—“ The king of

“Burma favoured us early this year with the obliging requisition

“that we should cede to him Moorshedabad and the provinces to the

‘ east of it which, he deigned to say, were all natural dependencies of

“his throne.” And at the time of the disputes on the frontier of

Arakan in 1823-24, which led to the war of the two following years,

the governor of Arakan made a similar demand. We may, therefore,

reasonably conclude that at the close of the thirteenth century

of the Christian era, the kings of Pu-gién called themselves kings

of Burma and Bengala.

In order that the reader may have a distinct view of the several

dynasties of the Burmese monarchy as recorded in the Maha-ra-

dza-weng, I have drawn out a table of them from the earliest time.

The list of kings who are said to have reigned at Ta-ginmg and

upper Pu-gan, before the establishment of the kingdom of Tha-re-

khet-tara, I have not considered it necessary to give in detail. But

the name of each king, and the length of his reign, commencing

with Ma-hé-tham-ba-wa, in the year 483 B. C., has been carefully

copied from the Burmese history. In regard to dates, there are

given in the Mahé-radzé-weng various local eras. To avoid con-

fusion, these have been omitted, untilthe existing era commencing

with 639 A. D. is reached. The era of Gaudama’s death, commenc-

ing with 543 B. C. which is in use in Burma and all the adjoining

1868. ] On the History of the Burma Race. 113

Buddhist countries, has been followed in arranging the chronology,

and the corresponding years B. C. and A. D. have occasionally been

inserted. I have found a difference of seven years between the reckon-

ing of the existing era in the Maha Rédzi Weng, and what is

deduced from adding up the number of years of each reign. Thus

A-nau-ra-hta is said to ascend the throne inthe Burmese year 379.

But I make out the year to be 372—to A. D. 1010, and have

therefore so entered it in the list. This correction would make

the capture of Pu-gén by the Tartar army, occur in the year 1277,

A. D., instead of 1284, A. D., as stated in the text.

ERRATUM.

In the paper on the history of the Burma race in note at page

27, Vol. XXII. it is stated that Buddhist missionaries probably first

went to Burma in the year 234 of religion, or twelve years before

Alexander crossed the Indus. There is an error in the last state-

ment. The year 234 of Gaudama’s death, corresponds with the

year 309, B. C. being seventeen years after Alexander had crossed

the Indus.

No. 1.—List of the kings of Burma as entered in the Mahé

Lddza Weng.

Names of kings. | Explanatory Remarks.

Abhi Radzé. This king who came from Kap-pi-ta-wot, and his

thirty-two successors reigned at Tagting or

Thenga-tha-rahta. “No date is given for the

commencement of the dynasty. The last king

named Bhein-na-ka was driven from his couutry

by an invasion of tribes from the east. His

queen Na-ga-tshein settled at Ma-le above Ava.

Da-za Radza. /This king is represented as coming from Kap-pi-

la-wot to settle in the country of the Upper

Irrawaddy. He married. the queen Na-ga-

tshein. They and their descendants reign at

Mauriza, Theng-dwe, Upper Pu gan, and Pin-

' tsa-ta-yung. Seventeen kings of this race reign-

ed. The last was Tha-do-Ma-ha Radza. It

was the two sons of this king who are repre-

sented as being set afloat on the Irrawaddy,

and floating down to Prome, near to which

place, Tha-re-khet-ta-ra’s dynasty commenced to

reign, in the year 60 of the Buddhist religion,

or B. C. 483,

[No. 2,

On the History of the Burma Race.

114

‘royjorg | ZL ve se Ege

u0g | GL vee vee 29G

‘og | ss : G06

wos | ST a: L'a'v| 099

‘wos | 99 ‘3 ae PRP

‘qII-LI-I] J, Jo wos poydope

ayy sem vq-ey-edN “Aysvudp yo oouByoO VW] **" 1g i OIL Ssh

Raa 6 ie as ;GP

‘U0S | 8G ou! as 968

‘uog| V& ate ZOE

‘u0og | && Sa mas EGS

‘u0g| 8 on : C6G

‘ug | 0g oe an CLE

mee is Ue oy 61

‘ug | BZ ie = ILI

: ‘O eee

i ae on TOL

‘loyjorg | G§ vee - 99

"BI-B4-JOYY-o1-VY J, Fe POYSt] ese Aysvudg = 9 vee COT 09

aon “Bl “UOLSI]O

Sutpoeo | ‘sivot a Tava | poe a

‘SMUVNGY Ata ‘uStod Jo peu A ect ele

eae eared ‘USTOI JO JUOULIOUSULULO/)

-UOT}L OY

‘busy PzpPY PYPW 9Y} UL pasaqua so DUNT fo shuy ey fo 87JT-—"SZ ‘ON

‘ep-ULI-og

‘ep-Ulo]-vs}-Nu-ueyY

‘ey y-uNyy-Uey

‘eyy-OU-ueYy

‘ues-od-eyd °

“eq -84-8.3

“4LI-11-TYT,

‘wey --MT,

‘SUIVYY-Yory

‘SUSU-.sUNOT-UPY yy

‘UBy-3oU

‘UByU UB

‘SuNg-ULy

‘UBI-V4-JOM

‘SUNG-B4-JOM

‘Ba\-Bq-UBT4-B]-DS ],

“eM-8q-ULBY}-eY-B [Kl

"SONI FO SHNV NT

“LT

115

On the History of the Burma Race.

1868. |

‘uog | ye ote

‘uvs-ng teddy pure evd-o1-neqy Jo

SSULY JUSTOUL OY} Jo yURpUadsep pesoddng] °** GL =

TL CT tote

‘T}-BAN

-ed-Wey, pure ‘ed-1p-ed-mey, ‘eu-ep-peu

“ay “vi-vsy-syd-11-myy, ‘eut-ei-n8-ng

‘uys-YUBq pel[vo os[e st yorym ‘ues

“nq ye Ayseudp v poystiqeyso ‘eXu-td

“NYT, OF Moydou v oq 07 pres Sury siyy} °° GP te:

pa, ‘urd-SU0Ul-1}F] +

sae | ‘Ty-1es}

nig 10 ‘-Suom-nkg ‘¢

Uk ‘ound y oyy-ey °Z

ses “q11-Bp)--onU-eY T, “T

‘Uvs-ng 3

USIOI 07 suIseq Aysvutp Mou oy} a10joq

sivok U99}AIY} JO [BAIOJUL UL ST oO,

"SpUe BI-84-JoYY-ol-vyy, JO Wopsury oy}

G6 ‘CV UL Sury siqy Jo yeep 04} yy a |

"MOG

‘peyeys you diysuorejey! = **°

“LOY JOIG

‘1oy}OIG

“TOYJOIg

"M0g

"loyyoIg

"u0g

LD OD OD OD ra OD SH P= OD

oe ‘eu-ULOYS}-B1

-¥3-8NT 10 ‘nAu-id-nyy, ‘1%

ie ‘ehy-op-V °9

Be ‘II-Bp-UNUI-NYT, “CZ

ie “es}-SUQ "HG

pas ‘yoq-Uey “8G

eos ‘nu-uey Ge

pies TYUA-PUL “1G

sisi ‘eqy-eUL, “0G

oo ‘eu-Und “61

se: Cl-BSINN “ST

[No. 2,

On the History of the Burma Race.

116

‘Tudy yo |

YIWoU oy Ut ‘Beg ‘q “VY seousTLUTOD BZp

-ey vsuoyg, Aq poysitqvyse woeq Avr

0} pres YSnoy} ‘vio osoulIng Surystxe oy), =" CL is Lg9 1 ee ‘IYJ-UN-OMTO ‘OZ

‘Iodins() rs 1Z Sais ECT | 77" ‘ueq-ey nesz-ed

-dng 10 pap-ey vsueqy, ‘6T

u0g CT vee cate geIT |r: ‘ar AQ NT-UNANY FT ‘OT

wos | OT es a GGL. We qrAq-UnMg AT “LT.

“0g eT wis sista GOrL ines ‘requ Fy ‘OT

‘soo | GL ze 8 LeOL |" _{PeUeESL “ST

TeMOR oe. a cis Bane

ome] ge fe fc | ao fo, tear snong “St

‘u0g | 6 ae ne LOY a fe ‘o8u-Sun48-Lv]-Suay y, ‘ZI

NOS A. 2 a any QGoL fv ‘Suem-surey-yrey, “TL

‘uvyy-Avyy, Jo uospuerg, = *** GG ay a scot [f° ‘“edq-unmur-er-eyy, “OT

ma GG pe “it emisiacs valeacs ‘stedinsp) [eleaeg

u0g ez vee eee 966 sree ‘uey-AeT, °6

10g Cz sree vee 1&6 aon ‘qi-np-SunAyy 2

Nog ey sae silk 888 156 ‘Sunf8-Aey-Suoyy, *),

‘u0g | 0 ae a S08) ur ‘Avp-suoyy-yleq “9

0g GZ se8 aia CrQ ee ‘yieq-Suaul-ux °G

‘SUL

Bain “svot fa pIELo

‘ esouLING GV | so w0X

‘SMUVNAY -ons Yowe|! Usted Jo |

jo digs | y}0uU0ry

‘SONIQ] dO SHNVN

‘USIOL JO JUSTMIOUUIMLO/)

-WO18 [OV

117

On the History of the Burma Race.

1868.]

‘suUSIOI SNOTAOId Jo YSU] yy

WoOIZ poonpop oyVp OY} YA ve1sv you

soop Sq} MQ “HT “A GLE UL UsSper sq} | “Bg “ON

JO JUoTMEOUOTAIUMOD OY} Seovtd A1OysTY oY ,| Jo wog

“LOY OI

“LE “ON

jo u0g

‘Jou J,

‘PS “ON

jo uog

‘rodimsp} ***

"u0g

‘pouoryyoq

“ULAS}-UI0Y J,

‘9G ‘ON JO doy}O1q JoSuNOA vB JO UOspury| = ***

"mu0g

RCLLTONCS |

U0g

M0g

“IOyIOIG

mu0g

U0g

"mO0g

"M0g

‘goer TeAOl

94} JO oq 0} pres ‘pozeys you diysuonepey| °°

‘aodamsy)} °*°

‘Tay IOI

"MOG

“JOYOI

suniyy

‘URyeyy

‘URS}-eIY-VI-NVUY “LP

‘eq-BY-YNST, “OP

‘osy- 14] “68

pat

neys}, uwoMYy ‘ge

nesy-n-sunoksn "ye

‘Oyy-ULleyT, “OE

‘OMI VON “GE

‘qou-Uey, “FE

‘whq-wkg ‘$8

DL LYS GE

qIyU-susyy-nesy, “LE

‘QNMyT-UnM “OS

‘yneyW-oMYyS °6%

‘SUIDMP-UNMIFT °8G

‘SUNT-OMYG “LG

‘UNMS}-UlOTT, “9S

‘eyy-SULy TL, “GG

‘oma yy UAT “FG

‘OMY VON “EG

‘SUNI-OT "GG

‘unY}-W9q “TZ

‘Ayorvuout uys-ng oy} jo pug

‘s1oqyo1q ueys

sary} Aq poy] sprvasoye pues ‘posodog

‘u0g

‘mu0g

m0g

"u0g

"0g

“LOYOI

"m0g

“LOY JOLT

“Aep ouo poustoyy ‘m0g

| TOspuvly

“nes}-qYy-vi-neuy jo uos pesoddns y} “1oy}o1g

"u0g

On the History of the Burma Race.

“SULy

SUIpaed

“‘SHUVINAY s

steels

-UOT}RTOY

118

‘givod

-ONS YOVd) ¢ WoLad JO

yy}oue'T

aie |

ee a hee

i een |

= erik

a pes

a fon

ae iota

ne qoute eet

ee fom \ =

an uaa es:

i spas be

— eaor 24

‘eIg |. | MOLSTOY

oso ULI a Vv jo IB A

‘USTOL JO JWOULSOUSTAULO/)

‘emsy-nety “eG

‘suowi-oAd yur

“ey, 10 ‘9-ed-vy-1q}-B1-VN “BG

eee “euU-€Z-() ‘IG

oes ‘omsy-eA yy ‘0G

ss “eyy-uregy-e4-0z “6F

"t HYAISI-Ip-Bq-Bl-VN "8p

‘eyy-unyy-ei-eu-ulAcuey, * LF

coe ‘OUe Tl BAY Ry

NY] pouvUIs ‘NY}-V1-VN “OF

“ss Hes}-SUOYG SUSI ‘GF

vee NY}-]8}-SUN]-Y “PF

aoe ‘eyp-pisy-uvAy "Sh

ii ‘ny-nes J,

‘CV

‘SONTY FO SHWV NU

1868. ] The Poems of Chand Barday. 119

The Poems of Chand Barday.—By F. 8. Growss, Esa., M. A.

Oxow, B.C. 8.

In the cold weather of 1867, I addressed a brief note to the Asiatic

Society, in course of which I suggested the desirability of taking

some steps towards the publication of the ancient Hindi poems

ascribed to Chand Barday. The matter was taken up by Mr. Long

and others, and an application made to Government for the loan of the

MS. preserved in the Agra College Library. The result was, that in last

June, I was formally requested by the Secretary to the Government

of the N. W. P. to examine the poem, and write a report upon its

value in an antiquarian or general point of view. The MS. was

duly forwarded to me through the Director of Public Instruction, and

Thad made some slight progress in it when a misunderstanding occurred

(which has since been fully explained) in consequence of which I

abandoned the task, and returned the MS. But before doing so, I had

put myself in communication with Babi Siva Prasdd, the well-known

Inspector of Schools, who was kind enough to borrow for me another

MS. from the Library of the Maharaja of Benares, I had imagined that

this would be useful for purposes of collation ; but on inspection found

it to be an entirely different poem, and bearing a different name, though

written professedly by the same author and treating of the same

events. The Agra poem, entitled Prithiraj ras, occupies 1598 folio

pages, and is divided into 68 cantos, corresponding apparently with

the MS. consulted by Col. Tod. It has all the dignity and propor-

tions of an Epic poem, commencing, with an elaborate introduction,

and proceeding through a succession of incidents to a grand catastro-

phe, viz. the capture of Delhi and the establishment of the Muham-

madan dynasty. The Benares poem, entitled the Prithiraj-rayasa,

occupies only 786 octavo pages, plunges at once in medias res,

terminates abruptly, and is altogether much less ornate in character.

Though it bears the same name as the MS. described in the

Proceedings of the Society for July last, it does not appear to

correspond with it in any other respect, judging at least from the

table of contents, and may be another part of the same work. As

copies of the poem are exceedingly scarce, and no two seem to agree,

120 The Poems of Chand Barday. [No 2,

I think it desirable to place on record a brief notice of each. Accor-

dingly I propose to do so for the copy that I have examined by, Ist,

giving a summary of the contents; 2dly, attempting a translation of

one canto; and 8rdly, making a transcript of some verses of the

original text. ;

This plan of procedure will indicate the general scope of the work,

the interest of the narrative, and the character of the language ; which

are the three points most to be considered. I should be glad to see

the same scheme pursued with all other copies that may be brought

to light.

The Benares MS. of the Prithiraj-rayas4 is dated Sambat 1900.. Itis

well written, but has received numerous marginal corrections, and stands

in need of many more, being full of clerical errors. It consists of two

books entitled I. Mahobe k4 samay, and II. Kanauj ka samay. I am

uncertain how the word samay is here to be translated ; the ordinary

meaning time does not seem very appropriate. Sir H. Klliot was

evidently in the same difficulty, as appears from a note of his which

I shall quote later. The second book has no subordinate sections ;

the first is divided into 38 cantos. I give the titles as they stand

in the original, thinking this the most satisfactory plan, since their

brevity makes them often obscure and capable of alternative interpre-

tations.

. Raja Chandra-brahma utpatti.

. Manurpur Bhanday jagya.

. Raja Parmél Alhan sambodha.

. Mallakhén mantrain.

. Mantra subhat pratijna.

. Mallakhan juddh.

. Kanaujpur Alhan svapna.

. Jaganayak Kanaujpur.

. Jaman juddh Kabiljer.

. Alhan Gangaju darsan.

. Alhan Jay-chand milap.

. Gajar juddh.

. Jaganak Alhan sambad.

oOoONTOor WD FE

m 0 be oO

. Alhan Jaychand sambad.

. Brahma barat Batesvi darsan.

pol

1868.] The Poems of Chand Barday. 121

16. Bela byah.

17. Alhan Kanaujte Mahobeko gaman.

18. Gandhau Alhan juddh tathé Mahilko Ghorinko dand karna.

19. Kalysur ptija Alhan sapna.

20. Alhé Mahobe nist Lakhan Talhan sahit.

21. Rip Brahma.

22. Prithiréj Parmal do kos antar apna mantrain.

23. Paninko bida Kélinjarko karan.

24, Raja Parmél Kalinjar gaman.

25. Talhan vadha.

26. Lakhan Talhan vadha.

27. Alhan Arahma sambad.

28. Udal Sanjam Ray juddh.

29. Udal-kanh sangrém.

80. Udal vadha.

31. Raja Parmél srap.

82. Alha bardan.

33. Chanhén Chandel sena.

34. Jaganak Devapur gaman.

35. Brahmajit Kumar vadha.

36. Gorakhnath darsan.

37. Alha jogarth Gorakhnath sang Kalinjar gaman.

38. Chand bhavishya varnana.

Sir H. Elliot, in his Bibliographical Index, has a note apropos to

Rashid-u-din’s mention of Kajraha, which may be here quoted as

bearing on Cantos I and II. “ Kajraha. Its real name is Kajrai, on

the banks of the Ken, between the Chatterpur and Panna, said to have

been founded by the great parent of the Chandel race. The ruined

temples of Kajrai are of great antiquity and interest. They are

described in the Mahoba Sama, and there said to have been built by

Hamoti, upon the occasion of her having held a Banda jag, or

penitential sacrifice. She had committed a little faux pas with the

moon in human shape, and, as a self-imposed punishment for her

indiscretion, held a Banda jag, a part of which ceremony consists in

sculpturing indecent representations on the walls of temples, and

holding up ones own foibles to the disgust and ridicule of the world.

Hamoti was the daughter of Hemrdaj, spiritual adviser to Indraji,

122 The Poems of Chand Barday. [No. 2,

Gaharwér Raja of Benares.” It is strange to find a scholar like Sir

H. Elliot guilty of so many inaccuracies in one short paragraph : for

Sama read Samay, for Hamoti, Hemavati, for Banda, Bhandavy, from

the root bhand, to divide, and for Indraji, Indrajit. The legend of

Hemavati’s amour with the moon is related at full length in the first

canto of the Prithir4j réyasa, which I now proceed to translate.

Here the river Ken, or Cane as it stands in our barbarous maps,

appears in its original form as Karnavati, and the city of Kajrai is

called Kharjinpur or Khajjurpur.

Translation of Canto I of the Prithirdj-rdyasa (Benares MS.)

I reverence the gracious feet of Ganesh, Ganga and Gauri by whose

slightest favour, highest wisdom is attained. Getting unutterable

lore, I sing the glory of Raghupati; after Ganesh and Girij4, not

unmindful of the great bard Valmiki. Valmiki composed the Ramayana,

Vyasa uttered the Mahabharat ; their works are renowned throughout

the world; the Mahabharat has spread through the universe. Men

reckon the Mahabharat at 100,000 verses ; the poet Chand, in as many,

celebrates the fame of the Chauhans. The king, a second Duryodhan,

with his hundred knights inaugurating an era; in a second Mahabharat

the poet Chand records his achievements. With the Tomar king were

four godlike sages, lights of the world, lights of the court, endued

with the sin-destroying splendours of Hari and Vyasa; four lights

born in the world, of pure and boundless wisdom, Vyasa the son of

Parasar incarnate in four portions.

With the foes of hares and deer (7. e. chités) with the kings of the

feathered tribe (7. e. hawks) and innumerable dogs, Anangapala set out

towards the north to hunt. On the bank of the mountain stream he

espied a dense forest, abode of the king of beasts; thither the

monarch turned. Spells, charms and prayers, even the chase itself,

are forgotten: such a marvel met the king’s gaze in the forest. A

ram of vast strength, that would dash through a thousand armies,

was fighting with eight tigers, and scattered them all, A hind,

conceiving strange fury in her breast, wildly butting the eight tigers

on the ground, rushed on to the attack and, leaving her young, tore up

the ground with her antlers. The king, astonished at the sight,

called for Vyasa: “ How cana ram fight a tiger? tell me, noblest of

Brahmans. A ram has but little might, yet now consider it well, he

1868.] The Poems of Chand Barday. 123

has fought for a whole watch and come off victorious.” ‘‘ Standing

on Seshandga’s head the ram was strong; what are eight tigers? he

could vanquish a thousand. (Part of the next couplet is obscure. I

give it therefore in the original.)

siraia ag fig et atest MSs Sa

ataver fray se wa BRT AAT

High or low, on whomsoever rests the favour of the king of the

serpents, his power stands firm.” Anangapéla, having heard and

considered the words of Vyasa, sent and summoned 2000 workmen,

in his delight distributed rich presents, and, in an auspicious hour,

commenced building a palace, mindful of Vydsa’s words. The king

demanded 100 sers of iron and had it hammered well, then the smiths

were speedily summoned, who made a shaft five hands long. The

king took the shaft, well hammered as it was and five hands long, and

drove it in; three fingers breadth of the point passed into Seshanaga’s

forehead. According to Vy4sa’s instructions, the king had had it well

worked with the hammers, and had ordered a sharp point wherewith

to pierce Seshanéga’s head like a deer ora fish. Said Vyasa: “O

king, the spike is in Seshanéga’s head, now rule at ease with unpre-

cedented sway.” Said Vydsa; “‘ There will be a plot, O Tomar

Raja, be prudent, and give an order that the shaft be not removed.”

The advice is good ;” so saying he too went away home with Vyasa,

for the fair Hemavati had come to meet him. The great sage

Vyasa sings of the sacrificial preparations made by Janamenjaya:

how can fate be annulled, says the poet Chand. Ramchandra, lord of

the three worlds, was deceived by the golden deer: look again at

Bali and the dwarf: Fate is a word of power. Seshanaga called to his

younger brother Tachhak : ‘‘ Exert yourself to get this spike out of

my head. Hear, brother Tachhak, and attend; an iron spike has

been driven into my head, put in practice all the four stratagems of

war, and rid me of this spike, my brother.’’ Tachhak was pleased

when he heard Seshanéga’s wise and courteous speech: “the spike

must come out to-day, think well of it and exert yourself.”

How Tachhak took leave of Seshandga and disquised himself as a

Brahman.

“Assume the dress of a Brdhman with soft and plausible words,

pretending that the events of yesterday are an absurdity, go before the

124 The Poems. of Chand Barday. [No. 2,

Tomar king.” Tachhak was glad when he heard the speech of the

serpent king, and taking a book in his hand, and binding his hair in

a knot, he assumed the guise of a Brahman. With a white dhoti, a

garland on his breast, and sandals on his feet, started the serpent,

repeating the four Vedas. With great composure repeating the Vedas,

fountain of all wisdom, putting the people on one side, he came to the

Tomar king. When Tachhak saw the Raja, raising his hands on high

and still repeating the Veda, he gave him his blessing ; and the Raja

being much gratified, saluted him lowly : “ Ask whatever gift thy soul

desires.” Then said the Brahman: “If I may ask what I will, I

have heard a wonderful story, concerning that, O king, will I ask.

Listen to me, wise monarch; what wonderful fancy has come into

your head ? come tell me plainly, and put an end to doubt.” ‘ Hear

then, O Brahman, in one word a marvellous story: a spike driven

into the ground has entered Seshandga’s head.’”’ Said the Brahman,

‘This cannot be true.” ‘ Hear, O Brahman, this is no doubt the

Kali Jug, but Vyasa cannot speak false, greatest of astrologers,

perfect in science.” ‘‘ The spike is no more in Seshanaga’s head than

it is in mine:” the Brahman pulled out his stake and threw it down.

‘“‘If the spike is in Seshanaga’s forehead, then cut off my head.’’

When the king heard this, he had the shaft pulled up: the king saw

blood flow, and at once drew his sword. Drawing the sword from its

sheath, the king became violently enraged, but looking round could

seeno one: Tachhak had vanished into theearth. The Tomar’s day

set with the shaking of the shaft ; blood welled up like a fountain, and

poured along the ground. Sun, moon and stars tottered; an awful

voice was heard. As Vyasa had predicted, Delhi met its fate. The

serpent king, and the hope of the Tomar dynasty, flew away : then

came Vyasa lamenting with loud voice: ‘‘O King, once favoured of

fortune, your word has been broken through eraft.”” The king stood.

astounded. Then spoke Vyasa again: ‘‘ Hear, O king. Tachhak has

craftily accomplished Seshanaga’s deliverance, and has escaped. Jana-

menjaya at the time of sacrifice directed his intention against his.

father’s enemies, and recited charms by which they came and threw

themselves into the fire. By the protection of the king of the gods,

there escaped to the heavenly city this crafty one, this Tachhak,

rescued by Indra and Brahma; being born of Kasyapa, as all the

1868. ] The Poems of Chand Barday. 125

world knows, what greater power this serpent has, he inherits from

Brahma.” Then the Tomar Raja spoke and said: “This I did not

know: now tell me what plan is best by which to remedy the evil

that has been done.” Then the Réjé, cursing his folly, deeply

grieving in heart, listened while Vy4sa expounded to him the future.

How Vydsa expounded the future to the Tomar Réjd.

“There shall be a tremendous war between the Chauhans and

Chandels; blood shall flow in torrents, flooding the whole earth.

Power will be exhausted in the conflict between the Chauhdng and

the,.Rahtors, then the sovereignty shall pass to the Muhammadans.”

The Tomar Raja, clasping his hands, said: “O excellent in wisdom,

seeing that my rule is over, tell me what shall befal in the

times to come after me.” “The Dwapar age has passed; the Kali

Jug, as all know, has come upon the earth, and inthe character of

Duryodhan, the Chauhan takes birth. The Chauhan shall war

with the Chandel, iron clashing against iron ; earth loses a fraction of

the weight upon her head. With Prithiraj are a hundred heroes,

men of valour, giants incarnate; on the other side the gallant Chandel

princes: then Valla and Salla take birth.” “In what family shall

Salla and Valla be born ?” asked the Raja. Answered Vyésa, the great

sage: “O glory of the Tomar line, great and righteous king, the

prayer of earth was heard of old, when in the form of a cow, fair of

hue, with gleaming hoofs and budding horns, she came before

Brahma and cried: ‘In the Satya Jug Hari, with his discus, had

battle with and slew the great serpent Kali; in the Treta J ug, Rama

scattered the hosts of Kumbhakarna and Ravan; in the Dwapar Jug

was the war between the sons of Kuru and Pandu, when the son of

Jadu took a whole mountain off my head : now in this era of Kali

Jug remove a portion of my burden? O Brahma. ‘The times are very

evil; the ocean of existence is illimitable; hear, O Chaturdnan, and

consider; remove the burden from my head.’ As you desire the

incarnation of Valla and Salla, in the Bandphar line Alha and Udal

appear. Prithiraj the Chauhan marches upon Mahoba, and, breathing

fury, rages against the enemy. Siva dances in exultation, with

a garland on his breast; while witches fill their urns from fathomless

rivers of blood. Deep flow the streams of gore; the Chandels fight

gallantly ; no one turns his back ; it is a conflict of heroes.’

126 The Poems of Chand Barday. [No. 2,

[The passage that here follows is rather obscure, and I do not quite

see how some parts of it are to be rendered. Accordingly, as it

enters into my plan to give a specimen of the original text, I take

this for the purpose. It will be found at the end of the paper: I

resume the translation from the point where the transcript breaks off. |

Then the Raja in astonishment enquired of the noble sage: “ How

can Chhatris spring from Brahmans? Tell me, O Brahman, the two

lines from the union of which these Chhatris were produced,’ said

the great king Anangapéila. Said Vyasa, when he heard the king’s

words, “ Conceive no amazement in your mind: as God ordaing, so

events befall. Attend, 0 Tomar king, while I declare the Gahar-

wir genealogy; afterwards I will relate the origin of the Chandels.

The Gaharwérs were seated at Kashi; their name and descent hear

first, O king ; then I will pass on to the Chandels. Karuchandra was

the Gaharwar king of Kashi; under his sway all the people dwelt in

peace and content. A just man and righteous was king Chandra.

His son was Ransifth, beautiful as Kamadeva; the son of Ransiih

was prince Jagannath; he took fort Ratn by craft from the Asuras.

His son Ransiih, with great powers, assaulted and took Sumarant.

His son was the beneficent Surasifih, a monarch like Murari. Of

him was born king Indrajit, to whom Vindhya Devi manifested

herself. In this R4ja’s court were many Brahmans, amongst them

the gracious Hemr4j, to whom a daughter was born : who can describe

her? Born in the holy city of Kashi, she received the name of

Hemavati, most lovely, in form a chitrani, of most amiable disposition.

This charming Hemavati grew up in the reign of the Gaharwar king.

In the summer season, when the sun’s rays were at their hottest, the

moon rose upon her view. The moon came and manifested himself —

to Hemavati; the maiden trembled with sudden cold and blushed

beneath his gaze. Bright shone the pendants in her ears and the

jewels in her hair; on her forehead a patch of sandal wood ; on her

bosom a garland of flowers. The ear-rings glisten; the flowers are

pure white, bright is the gleam between her parted hair; lovely her

whole attire. As she loitered with her fair companions, the moon-

beams toyed with her person. She knew not the dalliance. But

deep was the curse which the damsel uttered. The moon stayed and

cried, “Fair maid, be comforted ; curse me not, for thy son shall be a —

1868. ] The Poems of Chand Barday. 127

king ; his sway shall be universal ; no sickness shall touch his body,

Hundreds and thousands of kings shall acknowledge his power.

Pause, lady, and consider ; attend to my words.” So saying, the king

of the stars was departing, but the damsel cried, “ Stay, tell me by

what means to remove the stain I have incurred.” Answered the

moon, “O lady, be not distressed.” Quick asa lightning flash she

grasped her lover by the hand.

An episode. The Rajd asks Vydsa whether the damsel lived with,

her lover or was separated from him, and at what time this dalliance

with the moon took place ; and Vydsa tells the king.

The rishi relates how many years the damsel stayed in company

with her lord, and at what season the meeting with the moon occurred.

After sixteen years, through the curse of Indra, the lady became a

widow. It was in the fiery month of Jeth, when it is pleasant to be

bathing all day long, that the moon to gratify his passion, came down

and embraced her; the whole night was spent in sweet dalliance, yet

such is the divine power, the maiden knew it not. As the ocean-born

was leaving, she ran and seized him by the hand: “ Is it thus you leave

me? mine has been the disgrace, be your’s the curse.” The Brah-

man’s daughter ran and seized the Brahman’s king (¢. e., the moon)

crying “Who is this that has come, making me thus criminal ?

Wretched that I am without a lord; in one day wedded and widowed.

The wild sea spreads wide before me; there will I plunge: who will

drag me again to the shore? so the stain of sin shall be washed from

my body. Of what avail to avert the inevitable have been my ablutions

in Kartik and Mégh? Tell me quickly some remedy : Iam not such

a one as the wife of Gautama.’ Then spoke the starry lord, the

moon, lovely monarch of the night, and addressed the damsel: “O

lady, thy son, noble in mind and body, shall be born a hero on the

bank of the Karnavati. Then proceed to Kharjinpur ; there give

alms and offer sacrifices ; so a king shall reign at Mahoba, with many

horses, many cows, many warrior knights; with an army complete in

all four departments, crushing the hosts of his enemies, truly a great

king, whose sway shall be boundless. Then having acquired the

philosopher’s stone, transforming all things to pure gold, he shall

erect statues and temples and excavate a spacious lake. Then after

founding the fort of Kalinjar, he shall abandon the body, and attain

128 The Poems of Chand Barday. [No. 2,

heaven, leaving his body in Kalinjar, and by death acquiring nirvana.”

Said the damsel: “ But I have been ravished: my son shall be born

a king, but I shall be lost in hell. O cruel, treacherous lord of night,

T am sunk in an ocean of grief, speedily shall my curse fall upon thee :

speak, wretch that thou art.” Then said the ruler of night: “‘ What

was ordained has come to pass: fate cannot be annulled ; this even

the gods admit. Sixteen sons shall be born to thee, great and

munificent kings; the Bhandav sacrifice shall be celebrated with

liberal gifts.” Then the monarch of the stars instructed her: “ O lady,

obey my advice; quickly leave this city and go to Kalinjar. And in

Kalinjar tarry not many days, but remaining only a short time,

proceed to the Karnavaiti.” Then he bestowed on her a charm and

comforted her, saying ‘ Whenever thou shalt recite this, then I will

be near thee. Brahma has declared that Hemavati’s son shall be the

greatest of Chhatriya kings ; his sway shall extend to the bounds of

the ocean.” So saying, the king of the stars vanished, while Hemavati

pondered the spell.

Leaving Kashi she came to Kalinjar, and there rested four months,

bathing in the sacred stream, and invoking all the gods on behali of

her son. Then quitting Kalinjar, she came to a village, her fair body

glistening bright as the moon. Towards day-break, on Monday the

11th of the light fortnight of Baisakh, king Chandra-brahma was

born. Joyous strains of mystic purport sounded in the air, and the

happy gods from their chariots rained down flowers. The rivers

flowed milk; soft, cool and fragrant breathed the air, when Hemavati’s

son was born; the whole world heard of it. The best of omens

came to the daughter of Hemraj; her leit side throbbed: then

appeared the lord of night. Brihaspati too arrived, midst the songs of

the Kinnars: Hemavatt fell at his feet : her lord thus addressed her,

(The next four lines are obscure and I quote them in the original.)

art. is Sa Ga SS Bafa ate free

Gen BIS Us HTaCaT fea fSTATT

faqrarefa ATAARS AACA ATS

usufa 7 FaRl USA GS TAA

The teacher of the gods wrote the horoscope, while the goddesses

sang gladsome strains: then the son of Angira read it aloud. The

divine orchestra played as he read; flowers rained upon the earth ; the

1868. ] The Poems of Chand Barday. 129

apsaras danced for joy. ‘‘ A son has been born in the line of the moon,

who shall tread the path of the golden age; his sway shall extend to

the ocean, great poets shall sing his fame. Celebrating sacrifices,

lavishing gifts, earth shall find in him a sovereign lord: Chandra-

brahma has been born to the moon in the city of Khajinpur.”’

When the sage had thus spoken, the gods all departed to their several

seats.

Every day Chandra-brahma grew in beauty, Kaémadeva incarnate.

All the people of Khajinpur were astonished as they gazed upon his

face: “ This son of a widowed Brahman woman, has with ease slain

a tiger.’’ The boy was ten years old when he set.for Kedar: there

he spied an enormous tiger and slew it. As the strong tiger could

not be seized, the king victoriously encountered it: the glorious son

of the moon slew it with his sword twelve hands in length. The

resolute prince left the king of that district and arrived at Khajinpur,

where he related the encounter to Alhan. Queen Hemavati came

and took him to her bosom, and recited the spell: the lord of night

appeared. The moon kissed his son’s face, having called his chariot

near; then Chandra-brahma received from him the philosopher’s

stone. Mainaka danced for joy with her fair companions; glad

strains are heard. The happy Hemavati brings her due offerings of

flowers, fruit and water; all the gods unite to establish the throne of

Chandra-brahma. With one accord exclaiming, ‘ Long live the king’ ;

and repeating potent spells, they called the noble prince and instructed

him in kingly polity, ‘“ Who can have enjoyment that associates

with a man who is hump-backed, or lame, or who has _ black teeth, or

who is a leper, or crooked, or deaf, or foolish, or very dull, or a sensual-

ist, or a false friend, meanest of all men? hear my advice, O prince, let

not such persons come near thee, nor do thou go near them. This is

the purport of all the eighteen Puranas. Poets and sages and all the

_ world declare, the society of such men brings no good. (The two next

lines are obscure :)

ara sa feMASTAT Ta Ta

HMMA MARAT VST

Encourage ingenious poets, with them is excellent wisdom; with

them, O prince, converse ; keep also about thee knights and warriors.

Give not thy mind too much to the chase; shed dignity on thy royal

18 |

130 The Poems of Chand Barday. ; [No 2,

estate. Consider first virtue and the practices of religion; be not a

slave to the populace ; keep thine eyes ever wakeful and thoughtfully

observe many countries. Conceal thy emotions both of love and hate,

at the time acting a part. Whether affection or resentment have the

upper hand, remember that time tames not. Be strenuous to restrain self-

complacency, and speak reverently before the altar of battle.” Having

thus instructed him in kingly polity, the lord of wealth exclaimed :

Reign over thousands, and hundreds of thousands, discarding all doubt

and distrust. All lands exult, the heavenly choirs sing for joy at thy

glory, O Chandra-brahma, imperishable in the world.” Staying a

moment, the moon called to him his wife and son: “ Know ofa

surety, O lady, the words of Brahma cannot fail.” So spoke the

glorious lord of night. She rose and touching his feet, said, ‘‘ O my

lord, hear this my vow, the name of Brahma shall never cease from

the family.” The son of ocean departed and calling the bounteous god

of wealth sent him with the stone. “ The lady gave it to her son,

telling him its virtues in full: there was singing amongst the gods in

the heavenly city when the story was told to Chandra-brahma.

According to the instructions, he took the stone and applied it; and

with the masses of gold thus produced proceeded to Kalinjar.

When king Chandra-brahma had reached seventeen years of age,

he bathed at Kalinjar and adored Nilkanth. There innumerable

Bréhmans came crowding to visit the king: none understood the

mystery of his origin and body of purest gold. When he saw the

Brahmans, he sent for a hundred millions of gold pieces and bestowed

them himself a king upon the kings of earth; it is beyond me to tell

even the half of his munificence. With 30,000 heroes an invasion

was made; in little more than 12 hours he subdued both countries,

Sihura and Gahor, and with an immense train of horses, cows and

bulls returned to Kalinjar. The Gaharwar fled in terror, deserting

Kashi: the godlike Chandra-brahma annexed every dominion.

‘Tell me, noble sage, what virtue there is in K4linjar, that bathing

there gives access to the heavenly city?” He answered : In the Satya

Jug called Mahatgiri, in the Treta Pingalday, in the Dwapar Swargrae —

in the Kali Jug, it receives the name of Kalinjar. Religious pilgrim- |

age may be made to many sacred places; the virtues of a million ©

are inherent in Mrigadhara. By beholding, touching and bathing im —

1868.] The Poems of Chand Barday. 131

that sacred stream, man is purified permanently from sin and error.

It possesses in a pre-eminent degree the virtue of many tiraths: he

who worships there with pure intent, performs a most meritorious

act.

As the king reclined upon his couch of kusa grass, the gods came

and blessed him: “ Build a fort upon my holy mountain, then reign

for twenty generations.” When he heard the gracious words that

proceeded from the mouth of the gods, he set heart, tongue and body

to work at the foundation of the city. He had a fort built in four

courts, with a splendid gate to each, with frowning towers of vast

dimensions. Then he collected for the fort, stores of all eight metals,

with guns and men to look after them, and placed the stores in order,

hallowing the work with prayer. Then he cleared the ground from

blocks of stone and dressed it, and set up an enormous figure of a

lion: lastly gave alms in great profusion, for alms-giving brings with

it a blessing. | i

There still remain 14 stanzas to the end of the canto, but I think

it unnecessary to translate them, since they are nothing but an

enumeration of the grain, live-stock and other stores, including balls

and powder for the guns above mentioned, which were stowed away

in the fort. This mention of fire-arms is certainly curious: Sir H.

Elliot in his Bibliographical Index quotes from the Kanauj-khand

three passages of five or six lines each, in which the words atish,

zambur and top occur, and says “it appears to me evident that the

passages where these are mentioned are spurious and interpolated, to

accommodate the poem to the knowledge of subsequent ages.”” He

adds, however, that the verses in other respects have anything but a

modern ring, and the same may be said of the lines with which my

translation concludes.

Thad expected to find a large intermixture of Persian words in

these poems; since some scholars who condemn the pedantic use of

pure Hindi in modern composition, have defended their practice by

the example of Chand, the father of vernacular literature. However,

in the canto now translated, I have detected only eight foreign

words; viz. jahdn, the world; zdhir, manifest : both occurring in

one line; sher, a lion; sahm, fear, ina doubtful passage: and baz,

a hawk; jurra, a hawk, kadd, size and khiydl, thought, all of which

132 The Poems of Chand Barday. [No. 2,

come close together at the end of the canto. Later on in the poem,

Persian words may be rather more frequent.

As for my translation, I have done my best to keep close to the

original ; but a poem, like the Prithiraj-rayasa, intended expressly for

recitation, and composed in a ballad metre with many words thrown

in more for sound than sense, scarcely admits of literal rendering.

The narrative too ig occasionally very abrupt in its transitions,

briefly alluding to events which require to be known in detail before

the ambiguous allusions can be interpreted ; while the language is of

a most archaic type and the text exceedingly corrupt. The necessary

result of all these circumstances is, that my rendering of several

passages is little more than conjectural.

The few lines to which I have been unable to attach any definite

meaning, and which I have therefore reproduced in their original form,

are probably more or less corrupt. I hope some scholar will exercise

his ingenuity, and favour the Society with a translation both of them

and of the longer continuous passage with which I now conclude this

paper.

az RAMS HRT CSNAANT S|

qmafa we Sta cer cate S|

CHEF FI TF WI ACH T |

Wade Blase ACI STC

wa are fama We UC Ura =z

ata ahs Gea a Haha TT A a

frqUcy Us VK Sars SGT |

UfCaRa WARE GHA GT TH SI

TH AIT FFI WAIY ST STC =

fafaa wit fae aaa FA Vat SI

Smet ISAT FUCA BU Brees Bag |

YAS GT G7 WIAs TH WIC fay aE |

Hara Ua SHAT THATS

Squat Ga at FoaT We He Aa WT I

gaa trearaaatea afecare Fat VTE |

aT qua Sifsa War CAC FT VTE!

aca fyorht ayal sie dadee |

qa ue faa cre sa at og Stare

1868.] The Poems of Chand Barday. 133

List of some of the more unusual words, Sanscrit, Prakrit and

Provincial, occurring in the canto translated.

Chhand, Prakrit, for sévaka, the young of any animal.

Uttamdng, Sanscrit compound, the head.

Sandha, a palace, S.

Chhanhani, for akshauhint, an army.

Viya, or biya, a particle of asseveration: see Varamchi’s Prakrita

Prakasa, ix. 3.

Bddav, a Brahman, S.

Pdnwari, sandals.

Nakkat, putting on one side? from nakk, a 8. root, given in the

dictionaries without any authoritative reference for its meaning.

Aghdt, a crashing sound.

Tha for tum : thdko for tumhdrd.

Bha, for main, I:

Rauran, for tumhdra,

Vatt, Prakrit, for vartd, original of modern bdé, a word.

Puhumi, for prithivi, the earth.

Sat, for s’at, 100. Shodas, 16, S.

Pith-thal, for Prithi rdj.

Go, the earth, S.,

Kumudvant, epithet of the moon.

Gulak, an ear-ring.

Sukra-mds, the month Jeth, S.

Bama, a woman, 8.

Chhonip, a king.

Chhandna, for chhorna, to leave.

Madhav, the month Baisakh, S.

Paydn, for pavan, wind.

Bhindapal, a kind of spear, 8.

Pénwar, low, mean.

Ankdér, for ahamkdra, conceit.

Dwait, doubt, 8.

Nah, for nath, a lord,

Bard, a bull.

Gury, for bur7j ? a bastion.

Jindam, for jandra ? a pitch-fork or rake.

S’rag, for asrij, sangins,

134 The Poems of Chand Barday [No. 2,

Note on the Chandel Rdjas of Mahoba.

In the second canto of the poem the descent of Parmal the last

Chandel king of Mahoba is traced up to Hemavati through 20 genera-

tions, which was the number specified in the prophecy. The line

stands as follows: 1. Hemavati and the moon god; 2. Chandra-

brahma. He founds Kalinjar and Khajinpur with 85 temples and

101 lakes: marries Chandravali; settles at Mahoba; 3. Bar-brahma :

he builds Barigarh; 4. Par-brahma; 5. Rup-chandra-brahma, 6.

Braj-brahma; 7. Rup-bel-brahma 8. Man-brahma; 9. Jag-brahma ;

10. Gy4n-brahma; 11. Sujan-brahma ; 12. Jay-satyan-brahma; 13.

Jag-jat-brahma; 14. Kil-brahma; lo. Stiraj-brahma; 16. Janrip-

brahma; 17. Rahil-brahma. He invades Ceylon, founds Raisin,

marries Rajmati; 18. Madan-brahma,; 19. Kirat-brahma ; 20. Par-

mal. Being ashamed of his origin, he drops the affix Brahma and in

consequence loses his raj.

Mainpuri, October 17th, 1868.

Authors of Armenian Grammars, from the earliest stages of Arme-

nian literature wp to the present day.—By JOHANNES AVDALL,

Fisg I, ASS.

[Received 30th July, 1868. |

A brief sketch of the rise and progress of Armenian literature will,

it is hoped, not be deemed altogether uninteresting. Agathangelus

was the first who wrote a history of the life and exploits of the

Armenian king Tiridates, towards the close of the third century of

the Christian era. He was of Greek extraction, and well acquainted

with the Armenian language. Before that period, it cannot be said

that the Armenians had a literature of their own. Some popular and :

rural songs were extant, commemorative of heroes and heroic achieve- —

ments. At this period, there was no Armenian alphabet. Conse- —

quently the Armenians used the Greek, Pelhevic and Syriac characters. .

The Armenian alphabet was invented in the beginning of the fourth

century by the intelligence and efforts of St. Mesrop. Although .

some odd and uncouth letters were in existence, bearing the name of |

—

1868.] Authors of Armenian Grammars. 135

their inventor Daniel, they were altogether incomplete, and all the

vowels were wanting. The invention or perfection of the Arme-

nian alphabet was soon followed by the establishment of schools, the

formation of literary and scientific societies, the translation of the

holy scriptures into Armenian from the original Greek and Syriac,

and by the production of original works, such as_ history, biography,

grammar, theology, geography, &c. During these days the Armenians

generally used the grammar of Dionysius of Thrace, which was

originally written in Greek and translated into Armenian by David,

surnamed the invincible philosopher. The Armenian grammar has

only two numbers, singular and plural, but David attempted to

introduce into it the dual number, in imitation of the Greek. The

idiom of the Armenian’ language, however, did not admit of this

extraordinary innovation.

Subsequent to this, the grammar of Moses ‘Pep[Fa7 the gramma-

rian was prepared and introduced into all the Armenian schools,

which was, in the course of a short time, generally studied, and

became a popular class-book.. Moses Khorenensis Yodube furpbiunh

is supposed by contemporary historians to be the author of this

grammar.

Gregorius Magistratus, who flourished in the eleventh century,

compiled another grammar from those that were already extant.

This was also introduced into the schools of that period.

Johannes of Ezinka, of the thirteenth century, wrote a new

grammar by the help of a dictionary compiled by Dr. Aristakes. In

this new work, the author has compiled and mentioned all that was

worthy of note and useful from the preceding grammars. Gregor

Tathevensis Gu/thugh of the thirteenth century, produced a commen-

tary on the grammar of Aristakes and his coadjutor George.

Jacob of Ghrim Quwhep gphdegh isthe author of a grammar, in

which he has taken a great deal of pains in dilating upon punctuation

and accentuation. A grammar is also extant without date, supposed

to be a compilation by the YJup4uewg Deacon Johannes. In like

manner, another grammar is in existence, the authorship of which

is ascribed to Priest Cachatir. The foregoing are the authors of

Armenian grammars, who flourished n Armenia prior to the four-

186 Authors of Armenian Granmars. [No. 2,

teenth century. I shall now proceed to give a concise account of those

who followed them in the subsequent centuries.

Among Europeans, Franciscus Rivola of Milan, composed an

Armenian and Latin grammar, which was printed in 1624. Being

himself a foreigner, he seems to have taken a great deal of pains in

preparing his book, which is not, however, without errors.

Another grammar was compiled in Armenian and Latin by Clement

Galanus, which was printed in Rome in 1645. It is more compre-

hensive, and less abounds with inaccuracies than that of Rivola. A

treatise on Logic is also appended to this work,

Doctor Voscan (ofa qupqwayfn published an abridgment of Arme-

nian grammar in Amsterdam in 1666.

An epitome of Armenian grammar, under the name of S‘imon,

native of Julpha, was printed in Constantinople in 1725. Johannes

Jacob the Priest, surnamed £97 Declension, wrote an Armenian

grammar in Latin, for the use of European students, which was

published in Rome in 1675. Cachatur Vertabed of Erzerum, published

an Armenian grammar in Aligornia in 1696.

Johannes Vertabed of Julpha, compiled a short grammar, accom-

panied by a treatise on Logic, which was printed in Amsterdam in 1711.

Johannes Joachim Schroder, a native of Holland, studied the

Armenian lauguage with unceasing application, and the greatest

avidity by bishop Thomas of Gokhten and his nephew Lucas. He

published an Armenian grammar with Latin exposition at Amsterdam

in 1711, under the title of Upedbut Leget Qewid “ Tuesaurus

Linevaz Armenncar AnTrquaz ET Hopiernag,” with a copious voca-

bulary and entertaining Dialogues in modern Armenian. Being an

excellent oriental scholar, he was competent to criticise the gram-

matical works of his predecessors, and to note their inaccuracies and

defects.

Jacobus Villotte, from the Society of Jesus, published in 1714 at

Rome, a Latin and Armenian Dictionary with an elementary grammar.

He was, for several years, a Jesuit Missionary among the Armenians.

The great bulk of his book is a proof of the vast amount of labour he

has bestowed on its preparation and completion.

Subsequently a more enlarged and improved grammar was published

by Mechithar, the founder of the Mechitharistic Society in Venice in

the year 1730.

1868.] Authors of Armenian Grammars. 137

Deacon Balthasar published an Armenian grammar at Constanti-

nople in 1736.

During the close of the eighteenth century, when the cultivation of

Armenian literature was appreciated far and wide, not only among’

the Armenians themselves, but also by several learned Kuropean

orientalists, Father Michael Chamich’s grammar was published in the

year 1779, which was hailed with the greatest avidity and enthusiasm

by the Armenian literati as the most complete work ofits kind. It

was introduced into all the schools, superseding the use of all the

other grammars previously published.

In 1815 another grammar appeared, by Gabriel Avietick, member

of the Mechitharistic Society of Venice. Although its first part is

written in the modern or vernacular Armenian, the another has taken

a great deal of pains to throw more light on the ancient literature

of Armenia by a careful reference to rare manuscripts of antiquity,

which have been discovered, subsequent to the publication of Father

Chamich’s grammar,

Jacob Shahan Cirbied published his Armenian grammar in Paris

inthe year 1823, under the title, “ Grammaire de la lingue Arme-

nienne.” Its publication elicited a violent correspondence between

the author and his critics.

In 1826 Ter Arratoon Ter Mesrop published an Armenian gram-

mar in Constantinople nearly in imitation of Chamich, for the use of

Armenian schools of that city.

Father Paschal Aucher, of the Mechitharistic Society of Venice

published an Armenian and English grammar and vice versd, in Venice

in 1819 and 1832, by the assistance of Lord Byron and of John.

Brand, Esq., A. M. of the University.of Cambridge, with copious

Selections from the best Armenian authors in chronological order.

Doctor Michael Salanth, of the Armenian College of Moscow, published

in 1827, a comprehensive grammar in two volumes. The publication

of this work met with a most favorable reception from the Armenian

literati of Russia. The author, however, is severely critical on the

slight inaccuracies of Father Michael Chamich.

In 1847, appeared another grammar, short, simple, plain and easy,

from the pen of Mackertich Emin, Esq., formerly of Calcutta but

now Principal of the Imperial College of Oriental Languages in Moscow.

138 Authors of Armenian Grammars. [No. 2,

A brief Armenian and Latin grammar was published in Berlin

in 1841 by that eminent orientalist and accomplished Armenian

scholar, Jul. Henry. Petermann. It is accompanied with a copious

glossary, which does no small credit both to the head and heart of the

distinguished author. He is now in the Holy Land, as Prussian

Consul General. His efforts, in search of scriptural antiquities and

yave ancient Armenian manuscripts will, it is hoped, be crowned with

success.

In the year 1830, an Armenian grammar was published in Calcutta,

with notes and copious English glossary, by the author of the present

article, chiefly intended for youths educated in India.

In the year 1844, appeared the Polyglott grammar, in Arabic,

Persian, Turkish and Tartar languages, with copious critical and

philological notes, Par Le P. Minas Médici. It is highly prized by

orientalists and learned Societies of Hurope.

A full and comprehensive grammar was published in Venice in

1852, by Doctor Arsen Comitas Bagrattini, the oldest and most

eminent member of the Mechitharistic Society of Venice, abounding

in philosophical commentaries and philological observations. It is

more intended for the advanced student, than as a class-book for

schools. The author was deservedly distinguished for the profundity

of his erudition. He was one of the brightest luminaries that ever

shone in the horizon of Armenian literature. He died in the year 1866,

at the advanced age of 77 years, but his works will perpetuate his

name to prosperity among his countrymen.

Rev. A. Kurken, M. M., of the Mechitharistie Society of Venice

published in 1853, an English and Armenian grammar, with copious

examples from English authors. This work is considered very useful

for beginners. In conclusion, I also think it necessary to add, that

since the year 1840, up to the present day, a great variety of

elementary grammars have been published by the indefatigable

members of the Mechitharistic Societies of Venice and Vienna, in

Armenian and French, Armenian and German, Armenian and Latin,

Armenian and Italian, and Armenian and Russian languages, which

will greatly tend to facilitate the study of the Armenian language by

European scholars.

JOURNAL

OF THE

AYLALIC SOCLET Y.

ans

Part IL—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

“_

No. L.—1868.

Ormthological Observations in the Sutlej valley, N. W. Himalaya,

| by F. Stoliczka, Esq., Ph, D.

Palzontologist to the Geological Survey of India.

[Received 18th July 1867.]

When writing the preface to the third volume of the ‘Birps or Inp1a,’

Dr. Jerdon remarks that the publication of the two former volumes —

of the same work had already attracted great interest to Indian

Ornithology. The very large amount of the most accurate statements

as to specific distinctions, on the habits and on the geographical

distribution afford indeed facilities of no ordinary kind, and they

not only serve to direct other observations, but they are useful in

most cases also as a guide to the record of any additional facts, which

further inquiry may bring forward. Had it been possible to add

illustrations of at least the more important types of each family,

the student in India could scarcely have wished for a better Manuva

or Inpran OrniTHOLOGY. -

During my geological wanderings through the N. W. Himalaya,

T have made various observations on Indian Zoology and Botany,

specially with the object of collecting materials for a fauna and flora

of Western Tibet. Only for a comparatively short time have I been

enabled to pay any attention to the fauna of the Cis- Himalayan

2 Ornithological Observations in the Sutle7 valley, [No. ft,

regions. Thus, when staying last year for about six weeks in the

neighbourhood of Chini, in the province of Kunawar, I compiled a

few notes on some of the main features and relations, which present

themselves between the flora and fauna of the more interior

and higher ranges of the N. W. Himalaya and those of the

temperate, continental portions of Burope, (Verhandlungen der zool.

bot. Gesellschaft, Wien, 1866, p. 850). In my present communication

I intend to deal with a more special subject and propose to bring

before our readers a few observations on the Ornithology of the Sutley

valley.

My remarks and enumeration of species will be restricted,— so

to say—to the Himalayan facies of the avi-fauna, for the fauna of

the so-called sub-tropical forests of the lower Himalayan hills scarcely

differs from the Indian fauna in general. But it will be readily

understood that, even within this limited area, I cannot pretend

to give at present a complete list of all the ornithological treasures

which actually are to be met with. A good many birds are merely

occasional visitors to the valley, in their periodical wanderings to

Tibet and Central Asia. Others, properly belonging to the Indian

tropical fauna, appear almost accidentally without making any pro-

longed stay in the valley. It is difficult to procure all the informa-

tion required about such rare species, and I only can mention them,

so far as they came under my notice, from reliable authorities or from

personal observations. Of the general character of the avi-fauna,

however, I trust to give at least an approximately correct idea.

It was, as I have already stated, with a view to obtain some Tibetan

and Central-Asiatic birds, which do not come in winter as low down ~

as the Indian plains, that I undertook to employ shikarees during —

the winter-time in the interior of the hills. My expectations om ~

this point have not been quite frustrated. “I have not only received a —

tolerably correct account of the avi-fauna during the winter in this —

portion of the valley, but Ihave been at the same time placed in —

possession of valuable materials, which enable me to make a lew —

additions to this branch of the Indian fauna. 4

It has been already* mentioned, that the exclusion of the birds —

# Ibis 1866, IT. p. 228, and elsewhere.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. FH

of the more Northern regions of the N. W. Himalaya — as well ag

those of the eastern provinces of Bengal — from Dr. Jerdon’s work,

. is greatly to be regretted. It is not strictly correct that the birds of

Western Tibet* and Kashmir have been treated in this manner ;

for not only are most of these provinces situated to the South of

the river Indus, and within the limits of our Indian empire, but

the larger number of the birds, which inhabit these regions in

summer, are, during the winter, visitors of Northern India proper ;

or at least of the lower ranges of the Indian or Southern slopes

of the Himalaya mountains. It is true that the birds of these

provinces in some respects represent a distinct facies, as compared

with the tropical character of the Indian fauna generally, but this is

not sufficient ground for supposing that they are not birds of India.

For if the validity of this opinion be admitted, the entire fauna of

Northern Nepal and nearly of the whole of Sikkim must be excluded

from the Indian fauna.

On the contrary, the affinities and relations of the various facies in

a fauna are entitled to the special care of naturalists, because these

relations are of the highest importance for the study of the geographical

distribution, not only of single species, but more properly of the

character of the different zoological provinces of our globe. Besides

this, the comparison of two or more neighbouring facies of the

fauna very often facilitates the knowledge of the species themselves in

so far as they shew us, whether certain variations may be considered

sufficient to warrant those distinctions, upon which we generally base

our ‘ species,’

In many cases the comparison of Indian birds with so called represen-

tative species in Western Asia and Europe is still a great desideratum,

although these comparisons may prove to be in favour of several

identifications. I would, for instance, only call to mind our Turtur

‘moena or rupestris, and the common JZ’. awritus, Corvus tibetanus and

C. corax, Turdus Huttont and T. viscivorus, Pica botanensis and

P. caudata, Regulus Hymalayanus and R. cristatus, and others. For

my own part I believe many of these species to be respectively identical.

To return to our present subject,— the avi-fauna of the Sutlej valley

* Including Spiti and Lahul, which are British provinces.

4 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. ],

—it is perhaps necessary to remark, that the present records are prin-

cipally based upon my own observations, which I had occasion to

make during the summer-months—from May to October—in the

greater portion of the valley,— having also at the same time made

a large collection of birds. The references to the fauna in the winter-

months are, as already noticed, based upon materials which have been

procured by my shikarees, and also upon information from a few friends.

In cases where specimens of new or little known birds have been

procured, short descriptions may not be out of place, except where the

additional remarks have already been supplied, in which cases the

respective references,—so far they have come to my knowledge—will

be given. Being aware of the great difficulty, which exists in this

country, of obtaining sufficiently reliable reference to literature in this

branch of Zoology, and also materials for comparison, I have mostly

avoided naming any new species, but in several instances I have given

indications of such by giving short descriptions. These may pro-

visionally serve for identification, or at least for comparison. Should

further inquiries make some of my as yet deficient determinations

more successful, I hope to be able to communicate the results subse-

quently.* I may, however, draw the attention of Ornithologists

in India to a few interesting species: as, for instance, the Accipiter

nisoides, B 1 y t h, whether it be a distinct species from Ace. gularvs,

Schlegel; to Cypselus pacificus, Lath. and the very similar

Cyp. leucogenys, Bly th; to an apparently new species of Muna,

several new forms of Phylloscopine, one or two new species of

Accentor, a new Montifringilla, a Linota, a Fringillauda, a doubtfully

young Hydrobata, and others.

Before entering upon any details, it seems desirable to say a few words ~

on the physical construction, and on the climatological conditions of the Sutlej

valley; and as the fauna and flora of a country are in many respects

connected with, or even dependent upon each other, a short reference to

the main features of the vegetation of the valley may essentially aid in

attaining this object.

Through the valuable investigation of Moorcroft, Strac h ey and other

distinguished travellers it is pretty well known, that the Sutlej rises to the west

* Having since visited the principal museums of Europe and having had opportunities of —

eomparing a few of the doubtful species, I shall occasionally add a few notes, (Feb. 1868.)

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 5

of the Mansarowara lake, but its proper sources,—as likewise those of the

Indus—haye not as yet been traced with undoubted accuracy, The course of

the river through the Chinese province Nari (or Googhi) is only imperfectly

known, although some additional observations may be expected from the

brothers Schlagintweits’ expedition. The information, which has up to

this time been procured, shows that the climate of Nari does not materially differ

from that of W, Tibet in general, it being characterized by an excessive dryness

of the atmosphere at all times of the year, by great contrasts* during the

Summer in the diurnal and nocturnal temperatures, and by very severe cold}

in winter. The whole country is very rough in its configuration; the few

level places being restricted to old river terraces or lake-basins, the elevation

of which varies from 10 to 15,000 feet, while many of the neighbouring hills rise

above 20,000 feet; 19,000 being about the mean of their elevation. The

snow line lies at about 19,000 feet. A very limited quantity of moisture ig

supplied from the Indian side through the Sutlej valleyduring the months of

July and August, but its influence rapidly decreases in the more eastern parts

of the province. The total fall of snow during the winter can, I think, rarely

exceed two feet. The cultivation of cereals succeeds, only where water for

irrigation can be abundantly supplied. The arboreal vegetation is restricted

to a few apricot, poplar and willow trees, the first growing up to 11,000 feet,

while the two others are occasionally found up to 13,000; all of them,

however, generally only in the neighbourhood of villages. The same is the

case with the Juniperus ewcelsa, Its geographical range appears to have

formerly been much wider, and a very great care is at present bestowed

upon this sacred tree of the Buddhists, Grassy plains afford ample pasturage

for cattle, being a little more extensive towards the head of the valley,

where several former lakes have, in consequence of the accumulation of debris

from glacier streams and avalanches, and on account of the increaset of

evaporation caused by the dryness of the atmosphere, either decreased in

extent or altogether disappeared,

The fauna has an essentially Tibetan character. The Kyang, Equus hemi-

onus, is very plentifully met with in a wild state; the Yak, Poephagus grummiens,

thas become domesticated and ig at present very rarely found wild to the

south of the Indus; Ovis Ammon, Ovis nahwra (barhel), Moschus moschiferus,

and other Ruminants are, however, still tolerably common. Ursus tebetanus,

Lynchus ewropeus, Vulpes montanus and ferilatus, Mustella ernvinea and others

are also not rare. Of birds a large number of FRINGILLIDA, RUTICILLINA,

ALAUDID&, CoRv1Dz and others, mostly of a European type, are to be met with.

* Often amounting to 100 degrees within 24 hours, the maximum of solar heat being 130°

and the minimum before sunrise 30° or below it.

T Usually below zero at night, and at day time seldom much higher than the freezing point of

water, which is not always 32°.

f I believe this to be chiefly due to the devastation of arboreal vegetation, which is said to have

been formerly rather abundant,

6 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

As to Reptiles and Fishes, I have not been able to procure any information,

but I should think that they are not specifically very different from those of

W. Tibet.

The population as compared with the area, is very small,

The people belong to the Caucasian race, not

generally

pursuing a nomade life.

to the Malayan; they generally live during the winter in small villages

in the lower and less inhospitable portions of the valley, while in summer

they wander with their flocks of sheep and cattle towards the head of the

valley, to the higher places of pasture. Some of the tribes have no substantial

buildings at all, and live all the year round in black tents (made of the hair

of the yak).

Proceeding westwards from the Kunawar frontier, near Shipki, we find

that the Sutlej has forced its passage through the principal N. W. Himalayan

chain, cutting its bed to a depth of several thousand feet. Former terraces

and old gravel beds of the river [and also of its tributaries] are seen,

three and four thousand feet above the present level, which descends from

about 8,000 feet at Shipki—N. lat. 31°, 58’; EH. long. 78°, 40’—to 3,000

feet below Kotegurh—N. lat. 31° 24’; long. 77°, 38’.—Within this entire

length (amounting to about 160 miles) from Shipki to Suni (N. of Simla) the

Sutlej flows in a narrow channel between perpendicular cliffs of gneiss, the

width of which seldom exceeds a few hundred feet. The Wangur and

the Baspa rivers, both of which are situated within the branches of the

central Himalayan chain are the only large tributaries* on the Indian slopes.

They are well known to travellers in these parts of the hills as the

finest retreats, where a delightful climate combines a beauty of vegetation

and an Alpine grandeur of snow fields and glaciers, not easily to be found

in other parts of the hills. The highest peaks in the central chain rise on an-

average somewhat above 22,000 feet, and the limit of snow lies in general at

about 17,000 feet, increasing to about 18,500 on the Tibetan slopes.

In the Sutlej valley itself, only the higher terraces, situated between 6—

and 9,000 feet, are generally sufficiently large to afford room for cultivation

and settlement, the slopes of the mountains being mostly precipitous.

The width of the valley is even at those higher elevations merely a few |

miles. On the whole, its physical conditions are not particularly favorable to

agriculture, nor is there much room for a large population. The circumstance,

however, that the river has cut its course right across the principal range

of the N. W. Himalaya, (without making such a distant circuit, as is done by

the Indus on one side and the Brahmaputra on the other) entitles the Sutlej

valley to its fame as the principal highway to Central Asia.

Indeed, following the course of the river from the plains at Rupoor up as

* The largest tributary is the Spiti river : its valley has in general rather a Tibetan climate —

and acorresponding fauna and flora, : ;

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 7

far as Shalkhar, on the Spiti river, and then travelling a few marches through

the present Chinese province ‘ Sto-tsho’ along another tributary, the Para river,

we come upon the elevated plains of the Tibetan province Rupshu; cross the

Turghoo-la (or Jaborseesa-pass,—only about 17,000 fect high) to the hot springs

of Puga, and thus reach the upper Indus valley, without any such ‘difficulties, ag

snow beds, glaciers and avalanches &e., which usually are experienced in travers-

ing high passes. The ascent of the Turghoo-la is, on the whole, scarcely two

thousand feet, and the incline is go gradual, that even a cart-road, if required,

could be made with little expense and no difficulty. It is, however, not my

object here, to point out a new route to Central Asia, but it is necessary to

draw attention to the great facilities, which, at the same time, this route

affords to the migration of birds, because these and other favorable circums-

tances must be consulted, when an explanation of many of the peculiarities in

the character of the avi-fauna of the valley has to be given.

Viewing the general physical construction of the valley within the

central chain of the N. W. Himalaya, the greatest peculiarity consists in its

small width, while the neighbouring hills rise to a very considerable elevation,

and thus exhibit very different conditions of climate within a compar-

atively small geographical area. These apparently anomalous conditions

are best exemplified from the occurrence of a few characteristic Indian

plants. Thus, for instance, in some places, Euphorbia antiqua, Ficus religiosa,

Musa and other more or lesg tropical plants are found on the base of a

hill, while the higher portions of the same declivity are adorned with

the finest cedar and pine forests and, above the limit of these trees, with

numerous glacial or Alpine plants, the summits being crowned with eternal

snow and ice.

Tt no doubt greatly depends upon the extent both of the arboreal vegetation

and of the brush wood, whether the slopes of the mountains at different

elevations always shew equally marked distinctions in the fauna, as they

do in the flora, But, when the different climatal conditions are placed within

Such narrow geographical limits, it will easily be understood that their

approximation is particularly favorable for the migration of Species, which

in time become used to a somewhat different climate, if the respective

localities are suitable to allow an easy passage. I ghall subsequently

note several instances, which appear to be the result of such a gradual

acclimatization.

The province Kunawar, in which many of the ornithological observations

here recorded were made, extends from Shipki to Wangtu bridge (N. lat. 31°,

27',; H. long 78°, 3’), A large portion of this province ig Situated on the N.

eastern declivity of the central Himalayan range, and has much Tibetan admix-

ture in its fauna and flora. Travelling from the Chinese frontier to the west we

soon see the Tibetan Caragena and the Jwviperus squamosa replaced by the

larger Junip. excelsa, Pinus excelsa and a few others ; fine specimens of apricot

8 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1,

and poplar-trees become abundant, and the first vineyards are to be observed.

in the neighbourhood of small cottages. Myricaria elegans, so common in the

Spiti-and Para-valleys is hardly to be noticed anywhere, The first extensive

forests of the Hymalayan Cedar, Cedrus deodora, the eatable pine, Pinus

Gerardiana, Abies excelsa and others, are met with to the west of Chini, which

igone of the best known places in this portion of the hills, and lies almost in

the middle of Kunawar. The village of Chini itself is situated at an elevation

of about 9,000 feet on an old river terrace, several others of which exist here

between heights of 7 and 10,000 feet, affording the only suitable places for

cultivation. The population is, therefore, in this neighbourhood rather large.

The extensive cultivation attracts at the same time several birds, which are

not to be met with in any of the more eastern provinees,

The regular formation of the Dhaoladhar — and the Baralatse — ranges,

which is so prominently marked in their N. Western and S. Hastern extensions

ig here much disturbed and interrupted. Both the chains divide numerously,

being connected by different spurs or branches, which often exceed in

elevation the main range. The climate is in some respects intermediate:

between that of India and that of Tibet. The mean temperature varies in

summer (between May and September) from 45 to 80 degrees within 24 ©

hours; the solar heat amounting to about 100 and very seldom rising to

120 degrees. In winter the thermometer stands lowest (below Zero at night

time) in January and the first half of February ; the mean temperature of

the winter-months being about 32°, There in no particular regularity as to

the fall of moisture in the rainy season. Occasional showers occur in the

summer months, especially in June and July. The total fall of rain, especially

including the heavy snow falls in February, does not probably much exceed

six inches,

The limit of vegetation almost corresponds with that of the snow line,

lying between 17 and 18,000 feet ; the limit of the growth of trees being

very nearly 12,000 feet. We often find at this limit Betula Bajpaltra,

and in other places Pinus eacelsa, which ranges almost higher and ex~

tends farther into the interior than either Pinus Gerardiana or Cedrus

deodoraw. The eatable pine is, I think, peculiar to the Sutlej valley and the

seeds are a favorite food of the rare. Sitta leucopsis, Frinemurps, like

Metopomia pusilla, Lowa Himalayana, Propasser rhodochrous, or Fregilus-

Hymalayanus, are usually found atthe limit of trees, where they generally

also breed.

Other less common species of trees in the neighbourhood of Chini are

Picea Webbiana, Pinus Smithiana, Abies eacelsa, Tawus baccata, two species.

of Acer, Alwus elongata, Frawinus, Quercus or Ilex ¥c., all more or less recalling

a European character of vegetation. In forests, as well as on the more

open and grassy slopes of the hills, are also found a number of common Huropean

plants, for instance Ranunculus acris, Caltha palustris, Adonis estivalis,

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. | 7%

Taraxacum officinale, Convolvulus arvensis, Euphrasia officinalis, Epilobiwm

rosewm and angustifolium, Polemonium ceruleum, Thlaspi arvense and geveral

others, characterising the flora as one of a temperate climate. The peculiar

species of the avi-fauna of the province Kunawar are Cyornis ruficauda, Fregilus

Himalayanus, Emberiza Stewarti, Metopomia pusilla, Sitta leucopsis, Ruticilla

cmereocapilla, Sylviparus modestus, Alsocomus Hodgsonii, and many others

which are during the summer very rarely, or almost never, to be observed

to the west of the Wangtu bridge, or on elevations below 8,000 feet. On the

other hand occur, in almost immediate association with the former, species like

the purple-tailed Honeysucker, Aethopyga Gouldie, Dicrwrus longicaudatus,

Paleorwis schisticeps, and others which are usually met with only lower

down; they appear to have been so far acclimatized, that they are found

breeding even on these high elevations between 9 and 10,V00 feet, still

they are now comparatively rare birds. A large number are migratory, and in

winter make room for others which arrive from Tibet and Central Asia; these

latter species chiefly belong to the Frinainums, ALAUDIDm and Corvin,

PHASIANID, Picipm, and a few Rapyorgs are not migratory, but they are

numerically not so much represented as the others.

The next province on the western frontier of Kunawar is Bissahir, adjacent to

which are the hill states about Simla and the southern portions of Kulu.

When we proceed from the Wangtu bridge down the valley, we already find

ourselves on the southern declivities of the great barrier between the

Tibetan and the Indian climate. The rainy season sets in here with full

force towards the end of June, and lasts till the end of September. The

vegetation on suitable localities and on moderate elevations is luxuriant

especially at this time of the year; it has much admixture of the Indian

subtropical types and also a great number of plants identical with those of

India in general,

The fauna of these more western portions of the Sutlej valley can be viewed

under two somewhat different sections ; namely that of the greater elevations.

between 12,000 and about 6,000 feet, and that of the lesser elevation 4000 or

5,000 down to about 1,000 feet.

~The former section includes some of the largest forests of the Himalayan

Cedar, especially in the neighbourhood of N achar, stretching on one side into the

Wangur— and Baspa— valleys, and on the other, along the tops of the hills,

to almost the immediate vicinity of Simla. About Gaora and Serahan,—

between 7 and 9,000 feet— some of the finest specimens of the Ulius Hima-

layensis, Pavia mdica, Juglans regia, mulberry and other trees occur, and

besides a thick vegetation of low forests and brush-woods, There exists on

these moderate elevations a particularly mild climate; the supply of water is

abundant during the whole year, and some of the places best adapted for

cultivations of grain &c. are to be found here; the population is, therefore,

10 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, (No. 1,

larger than on either the higher or the lower elevations. - The fauna on the

whole much resembles that of Kunawar, though many of the southern species

of birds, insects, &c., are here more abundantly found than they are met with

in the eastern provinces. Specially common and characteristic for the climate

of the summer months are Sphenocercus sphenurus, Muscicapula supercitliaris,

Hemichelidon fuliginoses, Pomatorhinus erythrogenys, Trochalopteron variegatum,

Abrornis canthoschistos, Pyrrhula erythrocephala, Pericrocotus brevirostris, Gal-

lophasis albocristatus, and many others. In winter several species of the

PARINS, RUTICILLINEZ, ACCENTORIND and others are here more abundant than

on the lower ranges.

The Indian character of the flora and fauna becomes prevalent the more

we proceed southward, and the more we descend to lesser elevations. At

the Wangtu bridge, the base of the Sutlej valley is only about 5,000 feet

above the sea-level ; at Rampoor (the principal town of Bissahir, east long. 77°,

45’; north lat. 31°, 26') scarcely 4,000 feet ; below Kotegurh about 3,000 feet ;

and thus rapidly decreases until it is reduced ‘in the vicinity of Belaspoor

(long. 76°, 48’; lat. 31°, 23’) to almost 1,000 feet. The climate of these lower

portions of the valley is in some respects peculiar, but on the whole much

resembling that of Northern India, especially of the Punjab.

There are several indications, that the valley has formerly been better

populated, than it is at the present time. The reasons of the decrease of the

population seem principally to rest in the change of the climate, which most

probably was effected by the destruction of the arboreal vegetation. The

characteristic tree of the lower elevations is the Pinus longifolia, but there can

be little doubt that the Cedrus deodara was formerly much more common ; both

these trees, and especially the latter, appear to have been at an early period very

much reduced in number, and in consequence of this the influence of the periodi-

cal rains and of the rapid changes of the weather soon became sensibly felt, The

heavy showers have, after a lapse of a comparatively short time, washed away

all the unprotected soil and left behind them bare rocks. Again, on account of

the want of arboreal vegetation, the temperature in the shade during the summer

often rises in the narrow parts of the valley to 90, and sometimes even above

100 degrees, hot winds being in the months of May or June in the neighbour.

hood of Rampoor not uncommon. We may justly say that there is a kind of

interruption in the growth of the vegetation twice in a year, during the winter

and partially also in the hot season, This is no doubt a great impediment to

the cultivation of cereals as likewise of all other kind of plants and has,

therefore, indirectly a great influence upon the inhabitants of the country im

general. We thus gradually come to the conclusion, that the devastation of

the forests has, indeed, a great deal to do with the final depopulation of a hill-

country, because the irregularities of the weather, its rapid changes and ex-

tremes, when they once come into operation, are every year increasing, and

goon create almost insurmountable difficulties to agricultural cultivation.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 11

At no great distance to the West from Wangtu bridge we meet, at an

elevation of about 6,000 feet, with the first noteworthy, sub-tropical plant, the

Fuphorbia antiqua, and about one mile from Rampoor at a height of about

5,000 feet we come across the first specimens of Ficus religiosa, On the same

tree we meet with the first specimens of the familiar Mina, Acridotheres tristis,

Temeneuchus pagodarum and other common Indian species of birds. Several

flowering trees and bushes attract the Arachnechthra asiatica, Piprisoma agile,

Sibia capistrata and others. In low brushwoods are found Pratincola caprata

and ferrea, Otocompsa leucogenys, Munia Malabarica, Reguloides trochiloides

and other familiar birds of the plains. Corvus splendens and the noisy Milvus

govinda bring the traveller from the last groves of pine-trees under the shade

of a Ficus indica, or into a garden of Muse and orange trees. Such is the neigh-

bourhood of Belaspoor, which already possesses all the characteristics of a true

Indian flora and fauna and will, therefore, be considered as the limit to which

my observations on the Himalayan avi-fauna of the Sutlej valley will apply.

Thus the country, from which the materials for the subsequent remarks have

been obtained, extends almost from the Tibetan frontier at Shipki to Belaspoor,

a distance of about 180 miles measured along the course of the river Sutlej ;

the direct line across the mountains being, however, only about 110 miles.

The provinces situated in that portion of the N. W. Himalaya are Kunawar,

Bissahir, the Southern portion of Kulu, anda few of the small hill states in the

neighbourhood of Simla. This area lies between the 3lst and 32nd degree of

North latitude and very nearly between the 77th and 79th degree of east

longitude. The elevations vary on an average from one thousand to about

thirteen thousand feet, for scarcely any birds live in these parts of the valley

for a great length of time above the latter limit, though further to east in Tibet

the same are usually found at considerably higher elevation. With reference

to the arboreal vegetation to which we have so often drawn attention and which

forms such a prominent feature in the physical character of the countr y, we

may in general state that the avi-fauna referred to in the following pages,

characterizes the geographical range of the Himalayan Conifer trees, beginning

at low elevations,—about Belaspoor,—with the Pinus longifolia and terminating,

in the Hast of Kunawar,—with the Pinus Gerardiana and the Juniperus excelsa.

The arrangement followed in the enumeration of the families and species is

thatof Dr. JERDON’S BIRDS OF INDIA,’ to the volumes and

page of which reference is given in Roman and Arabic numbers, respectively.

I. Fam. VULTURIDEL.

The vultures, usually feeding on the carcasses of different animals,

which occasionally perish under the stress of the weather in crossing

- high passes on the N. W. Himalaya ranges, are the two following ;

12 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No.1],

1. Gyes Futvus, Gmel., (I. 8), which is the common Kuropean

species, and

2. Gyps invicus, Scop., (I. 9), which is very rare in the interior

of the hills. |

8 Neopuron Ginernianus, Lath., (ibis 1866. If. p, 235—

Neoph. percnopterus apud J erdon, J, 12) is often seen in summer on

the lower ranges about Belaspoor and Suket, but is almost never to be

observed further in the interior.

4. (Gyparrus BarBatus, Lin., (I. 18) 1s common all through the

Sutlej valley and through W. Tibet ; it generally retires in winter from

the Northern parts of W. Tibet to the more Southern hills, but

permanently resides about Chini. The Chukor, Caccabis chukor, and

other partridges are his favourite meal. It is, however, well known,

that this bearded eagle often accepts any other refuse of bones and

meat, being very often seen near the houses of hill stations.

When marching through Labul in 1865, the people assured me that

it. very often carries off lambs and kids and is very bold at the time of

breeding. The natives of Kulu, about Plash and the eastern districts,

prize the meat very highly, which is not only eaten by the low

class, the Kolies, but rather more by the higher class, the -Kauits.

They generally tie a chukor on a short string, and stick four or five

sharpened spears in the ground crossing each other, so as partially at

least to cover the bird and at the same time to radiate with their points —

+» different directions. The eagle is watched from some distance and,

as soon as it throws itself with its usual great force and velocity

upon the prey, it is overpowered with large clubs before it can

extricate the spears from its body. d

The Himalayan Gyp. barbatus is, as regards the deep yellow and

reddish hue of its plumage, identical with the African variety, while the

Alpine specimens,—which are becoming very rare,—generally have a

much paler plumage.

II. Fam. FALCONID.

5. Fauco paregrinus, G mel., (1. 21) is often seen in the spring —

about Kotegurh, but I have not observed it between May andthe —

middle of September anywhere else in the Sutlej valley.

A male specimen, shot near Kotegurh in March, has the lower

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 13

plumage remarkably yellowish rusty, only slightly albescent on the

throat, where the quills of the feathers are white, while those of the

rest of the plumage are pale brown.

6. Hyporriorcuts suszurno, L i n., (I. 88). I found a pair of old

birds near Chini in August 1866, but I could not ascertain whether

they breed here, although it seems very probable. Jerdon says that

they do not breed in this country, referring of course to India proper,

7. Hyporriorcurs srverus, Hor s J., (I. 84) is not common in the

forests about Kotegurh and in Kulu, and during the summer seems

to migrate further to North.

8. . Hyporriorcnis Cniquera, Dau d., (I. 36) occasionally breeds

near Belaspoor, where I found several young birds about the end

of May, but Inever met with a specimen in the interior of the hills.

9. Tinunovtus ALAUDARIUS, Briss, (I. 88) common all through

the N. W. Himalayas, on the southern side as well as in W. Tibet.

I found this common Kuropean hawk breeding near Chini in narrow

crevices of rocks. The eggs are dirty white, mottled and irregularly

spotted with reddish brown. The young birds vary extremely in colour

of their plumage, but the old ones are in every way identical with

those from Europe.

10. Eryrnropvus VESPERTINUS, Lin., (I. 40) rather rarely seen,

and only in the lower hills, 7

11. Asrur patumparius, Li n., (I. 45) occasionally appears near

Kotegurh in the spring, probably on its way to Central Asia, for I have

hot observed it during the summer months any where in the eastern

parts of the Sutlej valley, not even in Kulu.

12. Accrerrer nisus, Lin., (I. 51) comparatively rare in the

interior, but more common in the lower hills.

~ 13. Accrerrer vireatus, L’e m., (I. 52) is by far more common

than the last, especially about Kotegurh, Rampoor, the Kulu valley,

and also more westward towards Kashmir, but I have not seen it to

the east of the forests of Nachar.

D 14, AccIPITER? NIsorpEs, B Lyth, (an A. gularis, Sche gel!)

‘1845, J. A. S. B. Vol. XV. p. 727. The following isa description

of a full grown male,* an evidently freshly moulted Specimen ; it was

* Known by dissection,

14 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1,

shot in the middle of August 1866 in a pine-forest at Rogi, about 6

miles W. of Chini.

Above, dark brown, ashy on the rump and upper tailcoverts ; all

the feathers on the head, especially in front, and on the sides of

neck margined and tipped with pale rufous, the rest of the feathers

above and on the scapulars being only tipped with darker rufous and

terminating with very fine silvery hairs; a narrow supercilium, and

partially on the nape, white ; ear-coverts brown, rufescent at the lower

base; wings brown, the feathers with distant dusky bars on the inner

webs and pale rufous or ochrey about the middle ; the secondaries are

tipped pale, the tertiaries more distinctly rufous and both also terminate

with long silvery films; tail ashy, each feather with four dusky bands,

the outermost pair only on the inner web banded, all are tipped pale

rufous, and on the extreme edges with a silvery grey colour, though

these edges appear to be very soon worn off.

Below, chin and throat white, each feather with a very short dusky

mesial streak, the streaks being near the tips a little stronger than on

the sides, where the white passes into fulvous; the rest of the

plumage below is very closely banded with pale and rufous brown,

each of the feathers having three broad bands of a light brown colour,

being margined posteriorly and partially also anteriorly with a rufous

brown; the remainder of each feather is pure white. On the abdomen

and thighcoverts the bands become very narrow, and the latter are

internally much rufous ; the lower tail coverts are pure white, partially

tipped with pale brown; tail below albescent, with cross bands

distinctly conspicuous. The sides of the body are much rusty brown ; |

the inner wingcoverts whitish, barred with numerous, narrow cross-

bars of blackish brown and pale ochry.

Length of wing 8 inch. ; tail 5} inch. ; tarsus 25 inch.; middle toe

15; outer toe 14., with a small claw ; inner toe 14 inch, inner claw alone

neatly + inch, and almost more than double the strength of the outer ;

hind-toe nearly 1 inch, of which the claw is about the half in length.

It is evident that these measurements are intermediate between

those of Mr. Blyth’s A. nisoides and the common A. nisus of

Linné. :

On comparing Mr. Bly t h’soriginals in the Indian Museum T found,

that one of the three originals is lost, the other two very much reseil-

1868. ] N. W. Himalaya. 15

ble in the upper dark brown colouring our specimen, and one of them

has some of the tips of. the scapulars and_tertiaries distinctly tipped

with rufous brown. The cross bars below are, however, ochreous yellow,

only with a slight ferruginous tint on the sides of the breast, but

not nearly to the extent as described in our specimen. This cannot

be, however, of very great importance, for the same colour is very

variable in A. nisus. The throat is white, and so far as the feathers

are preserved, they present a few dark streaks about the middle,

though on this point neither of the specimens is quite perfect and it

is only to be regretted that such valuable originals were not better

eared for. The measurements given by Mr. Bly thare, wing 71 inch;

tail 85 inch. The two respective specimens in the Indian Museum

have the wings 73 and 73, and the tail oy and 52 inches. Mr. Bly th

Supposed the specimens to be females, but they could with as

much reason be regarded as males. Still it cannot be questioned

that the typical specimens referred to, are remarkably small as

compared with usual specimens of A. nisus. I found this difference

especially apparent after having a short time previously procured in

the lower hills several specimens of the last species. The claws appear

remarkably strong compared with the size of the bird, and the general

deep brown colour is always very conspicuous, when compared with the

ashy hue of 4. nisus ; still I think it wants further proof, until the

species is firmly established.

Mr. Blyth in his Commentary (Ibis 1866, p. 239,) says, ‘* Dr,

Jerdon writes word, that 4. nisoddes is not rare in the interior of the

Himalaya,” and it is not unlikely that Dr. Jer don observed it in

the same portion of the hills, where my specimen was procured, for

he visited the Sutlej valley in 1864. The species cannot be easily

mistaken for A. virgatus, which is comparatively very common and

much larger,.*

15. Agurta curysantos, DL i n., (I. 55) is often seen about Kote-

gurh, and further towards east.

A few other eagles and buzzards are not very rare in different parts of

the Sutlej valley; but I have not succeeded in procuring specimens of

either of them. The only species, which I have obtained in the beginning

* Mr. Blyth tells me, that his A, nisoides is really identical with A, gularis

of Schlegel (Feb, 1868).

16 Ornitholegical Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

of August 1866, in a forest near Chini, was a young specimen of what I

believe to be Aquila pennata, Gmel., (I. 63). The specimen is only

about three-fourths grown ; in colouring it exactly agrees with the old

bird, except that the inner webs of the tail feathers are not barred; a

white shoulder tuft is distinctly traceable. Dr. Jer don says, that the

young bird of A. pennata is white beneath. This makes the question

of the identity of our bird doubtiul, although, as I have said, there

is no difference in its colouring from that of an old A. pennata. The

specimen is not a young Neopus, which always has the beak in propor-

tion somewhat more slender.*

16. Nuorvs Manarensis, Rein w,, (I. 65) is common about

Simla.

17. Burro canuscens, Hodgs., (I. 88), is occasionally found

at Kotegurh, but not beyond in the eastern districts.

18. Crrous crxeracevs, Mo nt, C. 97) occurs in the low hills, ;

where it may be seen to haunt in fields and low bushes, specially in :

the months of September and October. a

19. Haxrastur Inpus, Bodd., (I. 101) is only an occasional —

visitant of the lower hills; I have observed it between Suket and. |

Mandi on marshy ground, but not further in the interior. It is some-

times seen in the Kashmir valley about Srinaggur.

20. MuivusGovinna, Sy kes, (I. 104), common about Kotegurh —

but very rarely seen further to the East than Rampoor, except during j

the time of breeding. It doesnot approach the Tibetan climate.

Ill. Fam. STRIGID A.

Species belonging to this family are comparatively rare, although |

several of them may still be found in the wooded districts between

Kotegurh and the Baspa valley. a

o1. Syventum Nuwarenss, Hodgs., (1. 122). An unusually large

specimen of 21 inches in length, with the wing of a little over 18 inches,

and the tail of 104 inches was shot at Kotegurh in February 1866. 4

99, Syruium niviconum, Hodgs., (I. 124). I procured one

specimen of this species above Chini, at an elevation of 14,000 feet and

* See Ibis, 1867, p. 140. I cannot help thinking that Lieut. Beavan, who was

very eager to give notice of some of my specimens of birds, is mistaken in pro- 4

=) .

nouncing the species to be a young of Neop, Malatensis, Kt einw. (Keb, 1868.) |

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. i lg

another specimen was shot by my shikarees at Kotegurh in winter

1866. It is in this portion of the hills rather a rare bird.

The greater coverts of the primaries have a white terminal spot on

the outer webs, The spots on the outer webs of the quills are fulvous

brown, paler on the inner ; the cross bands on the two central tail fea-

thers are indistinct, and the plumage is generally finely mottled

with light brown all over; the tips of all tail-feathers are white.

Below, on the sides of the breast, and on the abdomen most of the

feathers are centrally streaked brown, each being marked with three

cross bars.

23. Orvus vuiears, F'/em., (I. 125) not common in the forests near

Nachar,

24. ArTuENE cucuLorpEs, Vig., (1. 145), common enough about

Kotegurh, but very rare further in the interior,

25. Guavorpium Bropiat, Bur t., (1. 146) must breed very early

in the spring, for I met fully grown young birds about the end of May.

The species is not rare on the Hatu mountain near Kotegurh, on ele-

vations of 7 to 8,000 feet, and is occasionally seen all through the

wooded districts of the Sutlej valley, but not beyond the more extensive

forests. It chiefly feeds on small lizards, frogs and insects,

IV. Fam. HIRUNDINIDZ..

26. Hrrunpo rusrica, Z., (I. 157) is common about Kotegurh,

and further to East.

27. Hrirunpo rimirura, Steph., (I. 159). I met with this

species near Belaspoor, in October 1866; the birds were few and

probably migrating to the plains, for I found them during the previous

year rather numerous in the eastern portions of Kashmir.

28. Hrrunpo uryruropyar, S yk es, (Ibis, 1866, vol. IL. p. 387),

‘The smaller type, which Blyth considers ag distinct from

H. dawrica, Lin., is common all through the Sutlej valley, especially

in the portion between Kotegurh and the frontier of Tibet.

29. Corie RupEsrris, Sco p., (I. 166). This is acommon species

all through the valley, and also occurs on the Indus in W. Tibet ; it

may have been occasionally mistaken for C, riparia which is, however,

much rarer; I have only once procured a specimen in Spiti.

30. Cuetion CasuMiniznsis, Go u id, (1. 1167) breeds occasion-

ally near Kotegurh, but it is more common in the Kulu valley,

Y do not remember to have observed Ch. urbica, except late in autumn

18 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No.1],

in the low hiils.

31. Cyeserus Matza, L., (1. 175), common during the winter

about Belaspoor, and in the valley below Kotegurh; in summer it

migrates into Tibet and Central Asia, a few birds only being occa-

sionally seen in the vicinity of Chini.

39. Cypseius apus, Lin., (1.177). I have procured near Chini

specimens which are perfectly identical with the European bird, and

the species is also common on the Indus in W. Tibet, especially about

Lei. I never got a specimen of the newly so called C. acuticauda,

Blyth, if this ought to be really regarded as a distinct species, which

does not seem to be very probable.

33. Cypsenus arrinis, Gray, (I. 177) is only occasionally seen

in the valley; one specimen was procured below Kotegurh in

March 1867.

84. Cypsenus paciricus, Lath., (this, 1866, Vol. IL. p. 840).

It appears that this species, to which (according to Blyth,)

Gouldrefers C. vittatus, J. and S., @. australis, Gould and

Hirundo apus, var, B. of Pallas as synonyms, only differs from Cyp.

leuconye, Blyth, by the blackish-brown claws. I shot last year

near Chini several specimens of a Cypselus which, on comparing

them in the Indian Museum with the original specimen of Cyp.

leuconyx, do not exhibit the slightest difference im size, though they —

distinctly have blackish claws, with no trace of white. The length

of the wings differs from 6} to 63. The birds are to all appearance —

sdentical with the specimens from the N. W. Himalaya, determined

by Blyth as C. vittatus, of which Jerdon says (I. 180) that —

they belong to Cyp. leuconya. As far as these specimens of the so- —

called C. vittatus in the Museum are preserved, their claws appear —

to have been brown and not white. I cannot trace satisfac-

torily, how far the distinctions pointed out to exist between Cm

leuconyx and CO. pacificus are correct; the species do not seem to ’

differ in colouring. Dr. Jerdon says (loc. cit. p. 180), that the

blackish brown is ‘ darkest on the head,’ while in my and in B lyth’s

specimens of CG. vittatus, only the back is glossy blackish brown —

and the head, nape and neck pale brown, exactly like in Cyp. affinas ;

there is also in all our specimens a slight, pale supercillium traceable,

being more distinct in front.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 19

V. Fam. CAPRIMULGIDZ.

The species of this family are comparatively rare, and only to be

found in the lower hills. I have often observed on the road from

_ Simla towards Suket the following,—

_ 85, Carrimoxeus novices, Dat h., (1. 192), which is also occasion-

ally seen about Kotegurh, in company with the smaller

86. Carrimunavs astaticus Lath. (I. 197).

VI. Fam. MEROPIDZ.

37. Muorops virivis, Li n., (I 205), is only confined to the lower

ranges and is from March till the end of October not uncommon in

Southern Kulu and about Belaspoor. Neither the European Merops

apraster which is said to be found in winter, nor any of the other

species belonging to this family have been observed.

VIL. Fam. CORACIID.

38. Coractas mnpica, Lin., (1. 214) is very common in the lower

hills about Belaspoor, but has not been seen further towards East

than Kotegurh.

8&9. Coractas aaruna, Lin., (I. 218). I only shot one specimen

near Nadaon at the end of October 1865, but I have repeatedly seen

this species in the northern Kashmir valley; it is also found in

Western Tibet.

VIII. Fam. HALCYONIDZ.

40. Hatcyon ruscus, Bodd., (I. 224), common about Belaspoor

and not leaving during the winter the lower ranges of hills.

41. Atcrpo srne@aLensis, G me /., (I. 230), is the only species

which is occasionally seen as far east as Chini, though it is always

rare.

42. Crryie rupis, Lin., (I. 232), only in the lower hills to be

met with.

43. Oryze @urrata, Vig, (1. 239), occurs on the small streams

beyond Rampoor, between Gaora and Serahan, up to an elevation of

7,000 feet ; in Kashmir it is very common.

IX. Fam. PSITTACIDZ.

Several species of parrots are during the summer-months found on

the lower ranges of the Himalayas, but they do not go in the interior.

Among the more common species are—

44, Patmornis Atexanpri, Lin. (1. 286),

20 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1,

45. Patmornis torquatus, Bod d., (I. 257) and

46. Pansornts rosa, Bodd., (I. 259). Only the first and last

species may occasionally be seen above Suni, in the southern portions

of the Kulu-valley, and about Kotegurh; none of them occur more

eastward.

47. Paumornis suisticers, Hodgs., (I. 261), is rather common

in the neighbourhood of Chini; I found it breeding near Urni (about

10 miles W. of Chini) at an elevation of about 8,000 feet. Towards

the end of August,—at which time the young birds are nearly full

grown,—its shrilling voice may be heard between Serahan and

Nachar almost in every ravine, wherever the elder and the elm are

abundant, on the seeds of which it principally feeds.

The young bird.has no vinaceous spot on the shoulders of the wings,

the head is dull grey with a greenish tinge, and nearly two-thirds

of the basal portions of all the feathers and the quills in their entire

length are slaty. :

X. Fam. PICIDA.

48. Prous nimatayanus, J. and Selby, C. 269) may be consi-

dered as the true representative of the European P. major, though

it ig a somewhat smaller bird. The third pair of the outer tail

feathers is usually towards the tip whitish, tinged rufous, and

interrupted on both webs by a blackish bar, the tip itself being

whitish. The female is above uniformly black.

Common in the cedar and pine forests all through the valley as far —

East as Chini, and ascending here to elevations of about 11,000 feet.

49. Prous prunnerrrons, Vig., (1. 278). The third outer pair

of tail feathers is usually also provided with 2-4 spots of white ;

sometimes there are even one or two spots on the inner webs, the tips

being rarely white; the streak below the eye is very seldom black,

but generally light brown, as also is the front of the head.

This species is common in the lower ranges of the hills; I have

not seen it to the Hast of Nachar, but about Gaora (H. of Rampoor)

it occurs at elevations of 8 and 9,000 feet.

50. Guxcrnus squammatus, V2g., (I. 286). Common all through

the forests of the valley up to Chini, and ascending to elevations of

nearly 11,000 feet. .

I procured in August 1866 near Pangi, a few miles beyond

1868. ] N. W. Himalaya. 21

Chini, a pair of what I suppose to be young birds of this species,

exhibiting, however, some noteworthy differences. Both the specimens

are a little smaller than those usually known as G. sgwammatus ; the

green is duller above than below, throat dirty greenish grey;

the feathers on the fore breast and on the vent are margined with

black, while in specimens of G. sywammatus, shot at Kotegurh and

in the western parts of the valley, the black margined feathers be gin

on the lower half of the breast, its frontal half being green, the colour

becoming duller on the neck and thethroat. The middle tail feathers

are margined with green, not being wholly black, as in typical G.

squammatus, The streaks above and below the eye are almost white,

while in sqwammatus they are distinctly tinged with green. The beak

is also shorter, and apparently somewhat broader near the base.

It is, as already stated, much more likely that we have to deal hero

_ with a young bird in a certain stage of plumage—perhaps the winter

plumage of the first year,—than with a distinct species. The red on

the front of the head of the male is tolerably well developed, although

not so pure as in old specimens of sqwamuimatus, it is, however, much

purer than is usual in young specimens of this species.

51. Gucinvs strionatus, Blyth, (I. 287) is very rarely met

with in the forests west of Kotegurh.

There are several other species of Pictp# to be found in the lower hills,

but none of them is common even as far north or east as Kotegurh. The

only other species which deserve special notice are the following ;

02. Vivra rrnominata, Burt. (1. 300).

The male has above the nostrils a pale yellow frontal zone, inter-

rupted on the culmen of the beack ; next to it is an ashy green Stripe ;

the feathers on the forehead are greenish, or ashy white with a slight

green tinge on their basal half, then black or blackish brown, and

tipped with golden yellow, having the lateral margins whitish,

Supercilliar stripe white, widening towards the nape and mingled with

dusky near its termination; ear-coverts ashy brown; a white stripe

extends from the upper mandible in the direction of the scapulars,

having below a blackish stripe, which originates at the base of the

lower mandible. Front edges of the wings whitish ; wing coverts and

all the wing feathers dusky brown ; the latter (except the first two or

three quills) on the outer edges greenish, the green colour increasing

22, Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, (No. it,

towards the tertiaries; the edges of the white inner webs of the two

central tail feathers are generally also black. The white below has

usually a green tinge, but is purer on the throat ; each of the feathers

“has about the middle of its length a round black spot, gradually

passing into crossbars on the vent.

The female has the head above uniformly greenish, occasionally

somewhat dull brown. Dr. Jerdon’s description—loc. cit.—seems

to have been taken from an imperfect female specimen only.

The Vivia minuta of Temminck has the head of the male scarlet.

above, posteriorly black with small white spots; otherwise it is like

the Himalayan species, which though not very rare about’ Kotegurh

is very seldom met with beyond the Nachar forests. Near Kotegurh

it occurs between 6 and 8,000 feet, and about Serahan up to 9000

feet; it is a permanent resident of the valley.

53. Yunx: vorquinta Lin., (I. 803). I only procured, at the end

October 1866 one specimen near Belaspoor; it was probably migrat-

ing from Kashmir, or from Chamba, where this species is common

during the summer months. : ,

IX. Fam. MEGALAAMIDL.

The species belonging to this family are mostly confined to the

lower elevations: they are very rarely met with above 9,000 feet.

54. Muganmea virens, Bod d., (1. 308), is common in the forests

about Gaora (7,000—8,000 feet).

55. Mucanama Hopasont, Bonap., (Ibis 1866, p. 358—M.. ©

pingata, Vieill. apud Jerdon I. 309), generally only occurs at

elevations not exceeding 3000 feet, while the next,

56. Mrcarama canrcers, Frankl. (1. 310), has not been seen, .

even beyond Belaspoor, though common in the Dhoon, south of Kangra

and about Nadoan.

57, Xanrnonmma inpica, Lath., (1. 315) is also common in

the low hills, but it does not go even as far east as Kotegurh,

where the bottom of the valley is only about 3,000 feet above the ©

level of the sea.

XII. Ham. CUCULIDA.

58. Qucunus canorus, Lin., (1. 322) is, between April and —

November, common all through the valley, probably migrating into

- Central Asia. I have also seen it south of Lei in W. Tibet. Its

ba |

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 23

call and the great variability of the plumage perfectly agree with

the European bird.

59. Cucunus pcriocernatus, L a ¢ h., (I. 329), is very rare in the

interior of the N. W. Himalayas. A specimen, obtained near Pangi in

August 1866, has the upper plumage uniformly rufous-bay, with dusky

cross bars, being somewhat less numerous on the neck ; below whitish

with a rufous tinge on the throat and on the front of the breast, purer

‘towards the vent, all the feathers having narrow cross, black bars.

60. Hrprococcyx sparvurtores, Vi ¢., (I. 331), only occurs in

the lower hills and scarcely above elevations of 3,000 feet.

61. .Coccystzs Mrtanotevoeus, G mel. (I. 339), is in the summer

months tolerably common about Kotegurh, and ascends elevations

up to 8,000 feet; but Ihave not seen it beyond Nachar, although it

usually prefers brushwoods to pine forests. |

XII. Fam. NECTARINIDZ.

62. AracunoTuERa magna, Hod g s., (I. 360), only occurs in

the lower hills about Belaspoor with the next species,

63. Alynoryea minus, Ho dqs., (I. 362).

64. Mrnorrea Goutvrm, Vi g., (I. 364). The male has the

black on the head, above andin front, tinged with purple, gradually

changing to steel-blue on the nape; a purplish spot somewhat

below the ear coverts; shoulder-tuft steel-blue ; throat violet, with a

somewhat dull black median stripe, extending longitudinally towards

the breast. Supercilliar stripe, cheeks, hind-neck, sides of neck,

back, scapulars and lesser wing coverts deep crimson; lores and some

- feathers on the cheeks glossless black ; rump yellow, upper tail coverts

steel-blue, central tail feathers in the middle purplish, like some of

the next edged bluish: the rest are blackish with greenish white tips,

the white being especially conspicuous below and increasing towards

the outer tail feathers. Wings and their longer coverts dusky brown,

with the exception of the first and second, edged with olivaceous

green, paling towards the tips; all the wing feathers are internally

at the base white, a little less so on the extreme edges. Breast and

belly bright yellow, paling towards the under tail coverts, and on

the breast with more or less crimson. All the feathers with metallic

lustre have their basal half black, the yellow feathers white.

The female is olive green above, brighter on the back and occasionally

24 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1,

with some crimson feathers on the sides. All the feathers on the head

and nape are centred dusky ; rump yellow; wings dusky, as in male,

but somewhat more broadly edged with olivaceous green; tail edged

with greenish, only the three or four outer pairs being tipped whitish.

Below pale green, somewhat ashy on the throat, generally becoming

yellowish towards the vent.

Bill brown, much paler below.

Very common about Kotegurh and through the whole valley as far

east as Chini, living here at an elevation of between 9000 and 10,000

feet. This is probably the only honey-sucker, which frequents such

great heights in the Himalayas. I never noticed here 4, Wipa-

lensis H 0 dg's., which is decidedly a larger species.

65. Aracunecutura astatca, Lat h., (1. 370).

Male; the body has usually the same uniform glossy green colour,

as the back and the head; the pale tips of the tail feathers are not

always traceable and, when they are, it is generally only the case on

the outer-most feathers ; the sides of neck and the breast are purplish

green, a longitudinal stripe on the throat and the rest of the lower

plumage purplish black.

Female; above dark greenish grey; the feathers on the head nar- —

rowly centred dusky ; wings dusky, externally edged paler, front edges

white; tail blackish, the feathers with a purplish lustre on the outer-

webs, tipped white, which increases towards the outer pairs; below

greenish yellow, more distinctly so on the front of breast, paler on the

throat and towards the vent, greenish ashy on the sides; thigh ©

coverts yellowish.

The species occurs as far east as Wangtu bridge, and is especially —

common in the lower and warmer portions of the valley, as for

instance near Rampoor; it does not, however, ascend to greater

elevations, than 7,000 or 8,000 feet. ia

66. Prerisoma aertz, 7c k., (1. 376,) not common, and generally

to be met with in the low hills, where I observed it in May ; it does

not go to any considerable height, or to any distance in the interior,

being very rare to the north or east of Kotegurh. )

67. Myzanruz ianipncrus, Hodgs., (1. 377). The old male

is above uniform dark bluish, metallic green; the young one is —

distinctly green and all the feathers are tipped fulvous; below the

1868.} : N. W. Himalaya. 25

throat is more white in the young bird, than it isin the old one.

Female above glossless olive brown, greenish on the scapulars and .

upper tail coverts, and possessing a green metallic shoulder-tuit ;

below greenish yellow, more white on the throat, and greenish or buff

on the sides.

Tolerably common in the lower hills, but rather rare in the eastern

parts of the valley. I found a pair near the Gaora bungalow at an

elevation of about 7,000 feet: it was most probably breeding here,

The species is also pretty common in Kulu and in the neighbour-

hood of Kishtwar; it most likely ranges over the whole of the

southern declivities of the N. W. Himalayas,

XIV. Fam. CERTHIADZ.

68. Cxrrrura Himanayana, Vig. (I. 380). The last primaries

and the secondaries of the old bird are somewhat fulvous towards the

termination of the outer webs; the tips of the secondaries are always

pale.

The young birds have the fulvous spots on the upper plumage not

so well developed, and all the feathers below are tipped very narrowly

with dusky; the white is also not so pure as in the old birds, but

there is no other perceptible difference between them except in the

length of the bill. Very young specimens have the bill sometimes

scarcely half an inch long, and from this all gradations are met with

up to a length of very nearly one inch. Such considerable changes

in the length of the bill are likewise common in the Picide, Upupide

and allied families. Specific distinctions which are occasionally pro-

posed upon the difference in the length of the bill are, therefore, not

always sufficiently reliable.

This is the only species of Certhia, which is common in all the

forests of the Sutlej valley, from above Belaspoor to near Sungnum,

ranging almost from the plains up to elevations of nearly 12,000 feet.

It is the true representative of C. familiaris* of Kurope.

69. TicHopRoma murarta, LZ 7 n., (I. 383), is found all through the

N. W. Himalayas, and during the summer months in W. Tibet and

Central Asia.

70. Srrra Himanayensts, J. and S,, (1. 385), is not rare in the

__* Tam informed by Mr. Blyth, that this species has been lately procured in

the Himalayas, (February, 1868.)

26 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1;

lower hills and about Simla, but it is very seldom met with beyond

the Wangtu bridge, and at elevations exceeding 9,000 feet.

71. Srrra Levcorsts, Go wld, (I. 385), is tolerably common in

the neighbourhood of Chini, where it chiefly feeds on the seeds of

Pinus Gerardiana, but it is very rarely to be seen near Simla

or at Kotegurh, except in winter. In 1866, I observed it between

Budrawar and Kishtwar at an elevation of 6,000 and 7,000 feet,

feeding here on seeds of Pinus excelsa. Its voice is a loud, uniform

melancholy call, while busily engaged in securing a pine-seed in the

bark of a large tree.

I have never met with any other species of Sc¢¢a in the interior,

wooded ranges of the N. W. Himalayas.

XV. Fam. UPUPID.

72. Upupa epors, Li n., (I. 390), common during the summer all

through the N. W. Himalayas and in W. Tibet. The plumage of the

Tibetan bird does not differ in the least from that of the Huropean.

XVL. Fam. LANIIDE..

73. Lanrus eryturonotus, Vig., (1. 402), very common all ]

through the N. W. Himalayas and W. Tibet,

The female has the grey on the head and back paler, the tertiaries

more broadly edged with rufous or fulvous, and the tail feathers tipped —

pale; on the whole the grey and rufous colours are very variable in

this species. The young bird is like the female, but all the colours —

_are usually still paler.

74, Lanrus HarpwicKer, V2g., (I. 405). The head above is often

ashy-white, and the nape and back pure ashy. ‘The tertiaries are, on

the outer webs towards their tips, pale ferruginous, the two outermost

tail feathers on each side being white, except on the terminal half which

is black like the inner web, the tips however remaining white; the

next two pairs have only the bases and the tips white, and on the four

central feathers there are below occasionally traces of white tips”

perceptible.

The species is rather rarely met with about Kotegurh and only '

occurs as far east as Nachar. In 1865, I observed it between Budrawar

and Kishtwar, but I do not remember it from Kashmir, Adams_

(Proc. Zool. Soc. 1858, p. 488) states that he never saw it on the

Western Himalayas.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya, 27

75. Lantus arenarius, B 1 yth, (1. 407), was only once met with

east of Chini, but it is during the summer more common in W. Tibet.

76. Pxrricrocorus spxcrosus, Lath., (I. 419). I have only once

procured a pair north of Belaspoor; it does not seem to be found in

the interior of the hills.

77. Prricrocotus BREVIROSTRIS, V7 g., (I. 421), is on the contrary

found everywhere in the low hills, even in winter. During the summer

months it migrates into the interior, ascending to the limit of

forests. It is common about Chini, breeding on elevations between

9,000 and 10,000 feet. Some of my specimens are fully 9 inches long.

The red and yellow patch on the wings of the male and female, respec-

tively, extend only up to the first four quills, the 2-4th of which are,

towards their termination, on the outer webs insinuated and edged

with pale.

The young bird resembles in yellow colouring the female, but all

the feathers above are tipped whitish, forming short cross bars ;

below, the yellow is paler, throat and breast barred with dusky and

whitish, the white being more prominent on the vent and the lower

tail coverts.

78. Drcrurus ronetcaupatus, H a y, (I. 430), is the only species of

Drongs which is common all through the valley. It breeds about

Chini at an elevation of between 9 and 10,000 feet and probably goes

beyond the Kunawar frontier into Tibet.

XVII. Family, MUSCICAPIDZ.

79. Tourrrea paraptst, L i n., (I. 445), common in the summer

months in Kulu and eastern Kashmir, but it is rather rare in the

eastern portions of the Sutlej valley; I have never seen it much

beyond the Nachar forests and above elevations of 9000 feet.

The colour of the plumage is known to be very variable. I met with

old males, which had half of the tail feathers on one side white and

on the other half ferruginous; and again some which had only the

terminations of the long central feathers ferruginous. It is probable

that even old birds often vary in the annual colouring of the plumage,

Mr. Cassin (Journ. Am. Acad. Nat. Se. Philadelphia, 1860, vol. IV.

p. 323, pl. 50, figs. 1-2) describes from the west coast of Africa, under

the name of uscypeta Duchalwi, two specimens, apparently belonging

E this species.

28 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

80. Levcocerca Fuscoventrts, Frankl., (1. 451). I found this

species in summer between Kotegurh and Nachar, on elevations of

5—9000 feet; itis a rare bird; one speciman was procured below

Kotegurh in March 1867.

81. Levcocerca aLporrontata, Frankl, (1. 452). Dr. Adams

remarks that this species is only to be met with on the lower ranges

of the western Himalayas. I obtained, in October 1865, several

specimens above Belaspoor, but have never seen it much further in

the interior.

89. QOryproLopma crnerwocaPitta, Vietl., (1.455). The bill is in

young specimens much shorter and comparatively broader at the

base than it is in old ones. The species does not go eastwards beyond the

more wooded parts of the valley. near the Wangtu-bridge, and hardly

ever ascends to greater heights than 8000 feet ; it is, however, most

common at Kotegurh between 5000 and 6000 feet, and at similar

elevations all over the lower, outer ranges of the N. W. Himalaya.

83. Hemicuenipon ruiiernosum, Hod gq s., (I. 438). The old male

is above olivaceous ashy, the feathers on the head being broadly centred

dusky ; the wings and tail are darker, the middle portions of the

inner webs of all the wing-feathers forming a large fulvous brown spot

which is specially conspicuous when the bird is on the wing. Some

feathers on the front of the head, above the nostrils, the lores, and

partly the eyelids are white; the front edges of the wings, chin and

throat are also albescent, passing on the breast into ashy grey, and on

the vent, especially on the under-tail coverts, again into white.

The old female is almost exactly like the male; the white above

the nostrils, on the chin and on the interior edges of the wings being,

however, somewhat rufescent ; the tertiaries and the longer wing coverts

are usually also externally margined and tipped with fulvous or rufescent.

The female generally appears to be somewhat larger than the male.

The young bird has the plumage above much darker, sometimes

rather black or deep brown; all the feathers above and on the

scapulars are centrally streaked whitish or pale fulvous, the streaks

varying in breadth in different specimens, being however always

conspicuous towards the tips. The wing coverts, tertiaries and, towards

their terminations, partly also the secondaries are more or less broadly

margined with ferruginous, the entire tips of the tail feathers being

1868. ] N. W. Himalaya. 29

usually of the same colour. Below, the plumage is albescent, more or

less gray, the feathers on the breast being edged with dusky. The

change of plumage is very remarkable; there are scarcely two speci-

mens to be met with which exactly agree in colouring.

It is very probable, that the young birds of this species assume

their full plumage only after the second year. In the first, the pale

streaks on the upper plumage seem to be large and of a more fulvous

colour, the breast more dusky; in the second year the streaks are

narrow, pale white, and the plumage below more albescent. Although

I have no direct observations on this point, I think it probable from

the fact that I obtained, far in the interior, birds of this last colouring

in May, and those of the first description not before the end of June

and then only on the lower elevations of the outer ranges; in the

interior not before July.

The species is very common between 4,000 and 11,000 feet, at

which elevations I often found it in the neighbourhood of Chini. It

is not only seen on low branches, but very often on a dry perch near

or on the top of a tree (especially of the oak), constantly dashing

aiter insects and returning again to the same point. In 18651

procured a specimen in Lahul, on the southern side of the Baralatse

pass at an elevation of more than 13,000 feet, but I do not remember

having seen it anywhere in W. Tibet, though it may occur.

It is also rare in all the more western parts of the Himalayas, in

Chamba, Kishtwar and Kashmir, while it appears to be frequently

met with on the eastern ranges, towards Nepal.

84. Evumyisas MELANops, Vi g., (I. 463), is only a summer visitant

to the hills; it breeds about Kotegurh, but does not go eastwards

of the Nachar forests, Compared with other allied species it is con-

sidered to be rather a rare bird.

85. Cyornis RuFIcAUDA, Swains., (1.468). The lores and eye-

lids are whitish ; wing feathers ashy brown, pale rufous on the edges

of the inner webs and olivaceous on the outer edges. The rump is

only slightly, the upper tail coverts bright ferruginous, and the tail

somewhat darker.

Male and female do not seem to differ in colouring, except that the

breast is somewhat more albescent in the latter.

Tn the young bird all the feathers above are more or less whitish, or

30 Ornithological Observations in the Suiley valley, [No. 1,

fulvous on the central tips; the same pale colour also have all the

outer edgings of the wing feathers, the tips of the tertiaries and the

wing coverts, the latter being somewhat rufous. Below, the white

is dashed all over with dusky, the feathers being edged dark ; tail

rufous, as in the old bird. This kind of spotted colouring of the young

birds is characteristic for nearly all Muscicaprp.

I found this species abundant among the apricot trees near Chini

and Pangi, in Kunawar, between 9,000 and 10,000 feet. The young

birds were full grown at the beginning of August. In habits it

resembles other fly-catchers, generally sitting on a low branch of a tree

and occasionally darting after the passing insects. I have never seen

it ascending very high in the air, as for instance Hem. fuliginosum

usually does. It is very probable that the species is also found further

to the east, in Tibet, returning during the winter to the low hills or to

the plains. The only other place, where I procured on the 15th June,

1865, a specimen of it, was at Kangsar in North Lahul, at an elevation

of 11,000 feet.

The species, which Dr. Jer don (Loe. cit. p. 468) mentions under

the name of Muse. rubecula, S wains., as being probably identical

with C. ruficauda must be altogether a different bird; for among a

number of more than 20 specimens of C. ruficauda, of both sexes and

of young birds, there 1s not one which has a trace of orange on the

throat and breast, or any blue colouring above. On account of the

want of the last colour, this species may be considered as rather an

abnormal form of the genus, identicating moreover a peculiar type of

MoscrcaPIp&.

86. MusctcapunA supERcILIARIS, J erd., (I. 470).

Old male ; above the sides of the head and of the breast are Prussian

blue, brighter on the head; the feathers on the rump are on the basal

half grey, then white and tipped blue: the shafts of the same are white,

- while those of the back and head are grey. Wings and tail are black-

ish, the feathers externally edged blue ; tail-feathers white on their

basal half, except the two central ones which are in their entire length

black. A white superciliar strip extends towards the nape ; lores deep

bluish black ; moustaches black ; front edges of the wings and the

inner margins of their feathers more or less albescent. Below, onthe

chin, throat, middle of breast, belly and lower tail-coverts pure white ;

ew ee ee

— 2

és63.\3

| ee

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 31

the feathers being dark slaty on their basal half, except those on the

chin and throat, which are entirely white.

Tn the old female all the blue of the male is ashy grey, with an oliva-

ceous tinge, with a little blue on the head, back and especially on the

upper tail-coverts, and occasionally also on the edges of the outer webs

of the wing and tail feathers ; both the latter are dusky brown, the tail

having no white at the base 3 a very indistinct pale superciliar

stripe is present; lores whitish; the front-head above the nostrils

and partially the cheeks have a distinct rufous tinge. The white

below is less pure, than in the male, and somewhat fulvous, especially

on the chin and on the throat; the sides of the breast are pale grey,

Bill and legs black in both male and female.

The young male is above blackish brown, with more or less numerous,

pale fulvous, triangular spots, with which all the feathers are centred

towards the black tips. The external margins of the wing-coverts and

the tertiaries are also pale ; the tail is white on the basal half as in the

old male. Below, the plumage on the chin and throat js pale fulvous,

the front of the breast down towards the vent spotted, all the feathers

being margined and tipped with dusky ; purer white only on the under

tailcoverts. The change of the plumage begins about the end of J uly

orin August. The fulvous spots disappear and the young male is

coloured, like the old female, but with much more blue above,

especially on the back, on the scapulars, on the rump and on the head ;

the nape and the lateral spots on the breast remaining grey

or somewhat olivaceous. In this state I found the young males

retiring from the interior hills to the plains, or at least to the lower

hills, but I have not been able to ascertain whether they do or not

obtain their full colouring before the next spring.

The young female in every respect resembles the young male, except

that the general colour above is more grey and less dark, the lateral

Spots on the breast being very indistinct ; the tail has no white at the

base, as likewise in the old female.

This species is one of the most common birds in the Sutlej

valley and is seen all the way from Belaspoor to Pangi; I found it

in general, in the N. W. Himalaya, ascending elevations up to

12,000 feet. About Kishtwar, it is still not uncommon, but it

is rarer in the Sind-valley of Kashmir, being also occasionally met

32 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1,

with in the neighbouring districts of little Tibet. I observed it

between Dras and the Zoiji pass.

Blyth (this 1866, p. 372) mentions, besides M. estigma, two

other allied species, JZ. ciliaras and leucoshista, as having been figured

by Hodgson. None of these have been seen by me in the interior

of the N. W. Himalayas.

97. Sipura stropHiaTA, Hodgs., (I. 479). The basal white on the

outer tail feathers is decreasing (not increasing, as stated by J er don)

in extent towards the outermost feathers. This species must in

summer inhabit the more eastern regions of Tibet, near the sources

of the Sutlej, for it only comes in winter to Kotegurh, and even then

is rather rare. I noticed it also repeatedly in Rupshu and on the Indus.

It appears to be more common in the eastern Himalayas.

88, Senta (HRITHROSTERNA) LEUCOMELANURA, Hodgs. (Ci. 479).

T have met this species only twice,having procured a male near Kotegurh

in September 1866, and in the next month a female specimen near

Mahasu, N. East of Simla. It appears to be a very rare bird. The male

has the breast light grey, but scarcely with any purplish tinge. The

female resembles that of Muse. superciliaris, being olivaceous brown

above and dusky on the inner webs of the wing-feathers ; tail ferrugi-

nous, especially at the base ; chin, throat and vent white, breast and

part of abdomen pale olivaceous brown, especially on the sides ; under

tail-coverts slightly ferruginous.

The bill is much more feeble at the tip, than in typical Stphia and,

if the distinctions of Witedula and Erythrosterna from Muscicapula are

admitted, it would be more correct to place this species in the genus

Erythrosterna.

89, HRyTHROSTERNA LEUCURA, G@mel., (I. 481); very rare about

Kotegurh, but apparently more common to the west, for I have pro-

cured several specimens near Srinagur, in Kashmir.

XVIII. Family, MERULID.

90. Pnoxpyaa sqammata, Gow ld, (I. 488), very rare in the

forests about Nachar and near Chini; it is found about Kotegurh in

winter. Another species, somewhat alied to P. longicaudata, Moore,

occurs in W. Tibet ; it is of the same size as the former, but has the

plumage below yellowish white or cinerous, (not ferruginous).

91, TRoGLODYTES NIPALENSIS, Hodgs., (1. 491), very rare about

Serahan and Nachar, more common in winter about Kotegurh.

1868. ] N. W. Himalaya. 33

92. Myropnoxvs Temmincsn, Vi‘ ¢., (I. 500), is usually known

under the name of black-bird; very common all through the N. W.

Himalayas and most probably also to be found in Central Asia. It

breeds at Chini and Sungnum on an elevation of between 9 and 11,000

feet.

93. Hyprosara asrarica, Swain s., (I. 506)), occurs all through

- the valley, but is not usually found beyond the limit of the forests.

94. Hyprozara casumrrensis, @o wld, (I. 507). I have only

seen One specimen of this species on a small mountain stream between

Chini and Sungnum, it is however more common in W. Tibet and in

northern Kashmir,

95. Hypropara? sp. I have obtained through my shikarees a

specimen of an apparently new species of Hydrobata, which was shot

on the Sutlej river below Kotegurh at the beginning of March 1867.

The following is a short description. Entire plumage light ashy grey,

spotted with dull white, more white below, the white spots very large

on the belly and breast ; chin and throat yellowish white, each fea-

ther tipped dusky ; wing and tail blackish, all the feathers narrowly

margined with white ; bill and legs pale or whitish brown. Length of

wing 3} inch., tail very nearly two inches ; Dill only 3 of an inch long,

The spotted plumage makes it probable that this species only is a

young bird of some other known form, but this I am for the present

unable to trace out. The young of H. asvatica, Which is the only species

common in the lower hills, has the throat and the front of the breast

perfectly white, thus differing from our bird. The Species might

belong to H. Cashmirensis, but for this it is rather too small. Further

materials only can settle this point.

The bill of Hydrobata much’ more resembles that of the Mora-

CILLIDm than to that of the Meruups; Bonaparte’s classification of

Hydrobata, in the neighbourhood of Enicurus, Motacilla a. oth., seems

to be, therefore, a more natural. one; the habits of these birds are

also in favour of this classification.

96. Zoormera montrcona, Vig. (L. 509).

A single specimen of this species was procured near Kotegurh in

February 1867. The general colouring of the bird certainly recalls

that of many other Meruline, but the bill is somewhat similarly formed

to that of Pomatorhinus, Head and nape are dark olivaceous brown, the

34 Ornithological Observations mm the Sutlej valley, [No. 1

feathers on the top of the head being centrally streaked pale brown ;

back, rump and scapulars blackish ashy, the feathers somewhat more ashy

near the tips which are black; wings dusky brown, with a rufous tinge

on the outerwebs ; most of the longer wing coverts are centrally tipped

pale brown ; tail dusky brown, obsoletely barred on the outer webs, the .

outermost pair is paler than the rest ; sides of neck olive brown, the

feathers with pale brown spots and blackish tips; a short black streak

extends down from the base of the lower mandible; chin and throat

yellowish white, each feather tipped dusky ; the feathers on the breast

ave olivaceous brown with black tips, some of them on the sides with

pale spots; centre of the abdomen and vent white, the feathers tipped

black; sides of vent rather uniform dusky, lower tailcoverts ashy,

tipped with white.

97. Purrocossypuus cyannus, L717, (I. 511), very common, ex-

tending all through the N. W. Himalayas, from the plains into Ww:

Tibet; it also proceeds further to Central Asia and Siberia. The

specimens from the lower hills occasionally have in summer some

ferruginous colouring on the sides and the lower tail coverts, but those

of W. Tibet have not a trace of it. They appear to be a little smaller

than the European birds, but there is no real specific distinction

between them. A specimen, shot in winter at Kotegurh, is entirely

blue, with dusky wings and tail ; it also has nowhere a trace of white ©

or ferruginous. The plumage of the young bird, which in general

resembles the female, exhibits variations quite similar to those known

in the European species.

Of the second species of this genus Pteroe. castaneocollis,* Less.

(I. 519), I obtained in the beginning of September 1865 a fine

specimen north of Dras, in W. Tibet. It ought to occur in the.

Punjab during the winter. The colouring quite agrees with the

description quoted by Dr. Jerdon. |

98. Onocestes pRyTHROGASTRA, V7g., CZ. 514) is only found in th

lower hills about Simla and Kotegurh ; but the next smaller species,

99, OnrocusTES cINaLoRHYNcHUS, V7g., (I. 515) goes further to_

* J have since, in the Vienna Museum compared this with

the European /1. savatilis, with which it perfectly agrees.

therefore very probably are identical, (Feb. 1868).

a young male of

The two species ©

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 30

East ; it is common about Serahan and Nachar, but rare at Chini,

and is not likely to be found to the east of the last cedar-forests,

100. Gxoctcuta uniconor, Tick., (1. 519) is rather rare in this

part of the valley, but more common in Chamba, Kishtwar, Kashmir

and even in little Tibet ; it prefers wooded districts to rocky and bare

places.

101. Turputus Warvu, Jerd., (1. 520), is not common in the

lower hills. Ihave not seen it beyond Serahan, where once only,

in August 1866, I met with three specimens ; it is rarer in the N. W.

Himalayas, than any of the other thrushes.

102. Mervuna Bounpour, Lath. (I. 525). The geographical

range of this species is restricted to the lower hills about Simla and

Kotegurh, it does not oecur beyond N achar, being far from a common

bird, though found about Kotegurh the greater part of the winter.

103. Meroxra axpocivora, Royle, (I. 526), common in winter

about Simla and Kotegurh; its range in summer is between 8 and

12,000 feet.

104. Meruta casranna, Gould, (I, 526), only arrives in winter

at Kotegurh, and probably lives during the summer months in Central

Asia and eastern Tibet, for I have not seen it about Chini or Sungnum,

though it may occur in the highest forests, near the limit of trees.

105. Puanzsticus arrogunaris, J’ e mm., (I, 529), is also, only a

winter visitant to the neighbourhood of Kotegurh, but it is common

at that time of the year.

Male; above earthy cinereous brown, most of the feathers on the front

and top of the head, and sides of the neck centred dusky ; wings and tail

dusky, all feathers pale olivaceous on the edges of the outer webs; lores,

sides of the head and of the lower neck, chin, throat and front of breast

black, all feathers slightly tipped whitish ; the rest of the plumage below

white, ashy on the sides; inner wing coverts pale ferruginous ; lower tail

coverts mostly white, some of the longer ones broadly margined, but

not tipped, with dark rufous brown. Bill light brown, yellowish at

the base.

female ; above like the male, less dusky on the top of the head ; lores

blackish ; sides of head ashy; chin and throat white with longitudinal

brown streaks, especially on the sides; breast cinereous olive, each

feather with a large triangular brown spot near the tip, which is white,

36 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

sides ashy with dusky quills, vent and lower tail coverts mostly white,

the latter somewhat rufous or dusky brown, as in the male.

106. Turpus Hovesont, Lafr., CL. 531), 1s common all through the

hills adjoining the Sutlej valley ; +t breeds about Chini and in Lahul.

The young bird, and probably also the female, has the feathers above

centrally streaked pale fulvous, and on the back tipped dark brown.

The plumage below is very rarely ferruginous, but often fulvous;

sometimes almost pure white. The size and number of the cordate,

brown spots is very variable and scarcely in two specimens exactly the

same, Sometimes they are very large and less numerous, not extend-

ing to the throat; in other specimens they are much smaller and

conspicuous on all the feathers of the lower plumage. The size of the

bird itself varies from 10 to 11} inches. Its voice is exactly the same

as that of the European 7. viscivorus,* from which after all it may

not be specifically distinct. It often feeds on the ground upon insects

and berries, but is almost as often seen on trees.

107. OREOCINCLA MOLLISSIMA, Blyth, (1. 533), is chiefly confined to

the lower hills, not usually exceeding elevations of 6,000 feet ; it is not

so common in the eastern parts of the Sutlej valley beyond Kotegurh,

as it ig more to west, in Chamba and in the eastern parts of Kashmir.

108. Grammarortina srrrata, V7 q., (II. 11), is only a winter

visitant to Kotegurh, but then rather numerous. It must during

the summer inhabit the higher forests along the central snowy range

of the Himalayas, in North Kulu or in Kunawar, though I never met

with it myself during the summer months in this portion of the hills.

109. Pycroruts sinensis, G me l., (IL. 18), is confined to the lower

hills only, being common about Belaspoor, but it is seldom seen even

as far east as Kotegurh.

110. Svacuyris pyrrnops, Hodgs., (II. 21). All the feathers

on the head have a pale rufous tinge, those next of the black throat

have the quills also black ; the quills of the rest of the lower plumage

are pale rufescent, and of the upper olivaceous, similar to the general

colouring of the bird; the back and abdomen have a prominent

greenish tinge; the middle tail feathers are obscurely barred across,

and much paler brown below, than above.

* The European species is in general smaller than the Himalayan one, which

has the throat hardly streaked and of yellowish colour.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 37

This is comparatively a rare bird, though occurring all through the

N. W. Himalayas, chiefly on elevations between 4 and 7,000 feet ; it

resembles in its habits to a tit, principally frequenting brushwood and

low forests, where it eagerly searches after insects. In the Sutlej valley

it is not found beyond the Wangtu bridge, breeding near Kotegurh,

Jaora and Serahan, on heights of 5 to 7,000 feet.

111. Pomarorainus eryturogenys, Gowld, (II. 31). Old birds

usually have a short blackish stripe extending backwards from the

lower mandible; in young birds this stripe is rusty, as likewise the

sides of the neck and of the breast. The inner webs of the wings are ashy

brown, the outer olivaceous, of the same colour as the body and the

tail; wings and tail are obsoletely barred with dark, cross lines.

Not common in the forests and thick brushwoods between Kotegurh

and Nachar; it remains during the winter in the neighbourhood of

Simla and Kotegurh.

112. Garrurax atsoguraris, Gowl d, (II. 88). The lateral tail

feathers are barred with dusky cross lines, the tips are white; this

species in summer retires to the denser forests beyond Kotegurh, but it

is more common in winter about this station. |

113. TrRocsaLopreron eryrurocepuatum, Vig, (II. 43). The

outer webs of all the wing feathers are bright greenish yellow, with a

ferruginous tinge ; the inner webs are blackish, paling on the margins ;

the tertiaries are broadly tipped ashy ; all the tail feathers have a yel-

lowish green tinge, being on the outer edges brighter towards the base ;

upper and lower tail coverts are ashy and somewhat olivaceous. The

black spots are occasionally almost wanting on the middle of the

breast. The male has the black on the throat purer, the chesnut of

the head somewhat darker and the greenish yellow edgings of the

wings tinged with more rufous; in other respects of colouring both

sexes are identical. The young bird is above and below on the

neck, back, breast, vent, upper and lower tail and the thigh-coverts

uniformly light rufous brown, without any black spots; otherwise it is

coloured like the old bird.

114. TrocnaLoprmron varincatum, Vi g., (II. 45), is common at

all seasons in the higher regions of the N. W. Himalayas, and

seldom descends lower than 5,000 feet. Females which I procured,

in June 1865, in Lahul, have the outer webs of the wing coverts

38 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No.-1,

ashy grey, with a very slight tinge of yellow, but having distinct traces

of this colour on the outer tail feathers. The male has a little more

yellowish rufous colouring on the wings, and the black central spot

somewhat smaller.

Other male specimens, shot near Kotegurh early in the spring,

have the outer edgings of the wing feathers (except towards their

terminations) bright rufous, as likewise the basal portions of the

outer webs of the outer tail feathers. In the females from the same

locality, the edgings of the wings and of the tail are more yellowish,

and the central, black wing spot much smaller. All the specimens

from Kotegurh have the upper plumage distinctly olivaceous, especially

on the back, while the Lahul specimens are more ashy. The longer

wing coverts are always more or less chestnut and all the tail feathers

are broadly tipped white, or sometimes in the male a little rufous.

The voice of this species is a prolonged, monotonous whistle, being

constantly repeated; during the winter it lives, I am told, partly

on insects, searching carefully after them in the hollows of willow-

trees, &c. partly on buds of different shrubs. This and the next

species belong to the few* birds which remain in Lahul during the

winter.

115. Trocuanopreron tinEaTuM, Vig., (II. 50), is one of the

most common species of birds all through the N. W. Himalayas. It

is found from the low hills, near the plains, through the entire extent

of the Sutlej valley up to Sungnum, and very probably farther east-

wards. It is not usually a migratory bird, for it remains at Kotegurh, in

Kulu, and even in Lahul, all the year round, feeding on insects or

buds, like the previous species. The specimens, which I procured

in Lahul, were somewhat more ashy on the head and breast, and the

central edgings of the outer webs of the wing feathers were less

yellowish rufous, while they are generally conspicuously so in speci-

mens shot in the lower hills. There is scarcely any difference in the

brightness of the colours between male and female.

116. Sxera capistrata, Vig., (Il. 54). The shorter wing-coverts

of the quills are black ; of the longer coverts the first are black, the

next white for the basal half, the rest grey on the outer, and black on

the inner webs; the last coverts are also white, with ashy and rufous tips.

* Only about a dozen species,

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 39

The quills are distinctly insinuated towards the tips, which are mostly

grey, the rest of the quills being black, but paling towards the margins

of the inner webs; the secondaries are dull black, some of the last

ones ashy on the outer webs, especially towards the tips, only the

central margins of the outer webs being shining black ; the tertiaries

are rufous with pale quills, ashy on the outer, and blackish on the

inner margins. The black feathers of the head are somewhat paler

in front, and have the shafts white for the basal half.

Rare about Kotegurh between 5 and 7,000 feet, chiefly frequenting

brushwood and low forests; generally feeding on insects.

117, Caararruma cavpata, D wu m., (II. 67), is often seen in the

low hills to the north of Belaspoor, but does not go any considerable

distance in the interior,

XIX. Fam. BRACHIPODIDZ.

118. Hypsipnres psarores, Vi ¢., (II. 77). Only the greater

portion of the outer webs of the wing-feathers are ashy, the inner

webs are brownish black, like the tail, the outermost feathers of which

are externally and near the base also tinged with ashy. Common in

the forests between Kotegurh and N achar, ascending elevations ud to

9,000 feet, though generally to be seen between 6,000 and 7,000 feet.

Sibia is very closely allied to this genus, and the species very much

resemble each other in their habits; it ought to be placed in this

family.

119. Orocompsa tevooannys, Gr ay, (II. 90) is found all through

the lower forests of the Sutlej valley, and is occasionally seen as far east

as Chini; but in the low hills it seems to be replaced by the next

species, the common Bengal bulbul,

120. Pycnonorus pyemts, Hodgs., (IL. 93), which does not

penetrate to the interior of the hills, and is rare even in the neighbour-

hood of Kotegurh.

Several other species of this family are also found near the plains,

but very few extend to the interior of the hills. I may mention

121. Ortonus xunpdoo,* S y kes, (II. 107) and

122. OrroLus meLanocernatus, L i n., (II. 110); both are occa-

sionally seen between Kotegurh and Rampoor andin the Kulu valley,

* Ibis, 1867, p. 10, Blyth says it only differs from O. galbula by its larger and

differently shaped bill, and in having some black feathers posterior to the eye,

(Feb. 1868).

40 Ornithological Observations in the Sutle valley, [No.1],

but generally only between 4 and 5,000 feet ; the former has been seen

solitary at Gaora up to 9,000 feet, and is common in Kashmir. [ also

received a specimen of

123. Orronus Tram, Vig., (il. 112), from near Kotegurh, but

_ have not myself observed this species.

XX. Fam. SYLVIIDA.

124. Copsyouus saunaris, Lin n., (IL. 114), is common in the

lower hills about Belaspoor, also in Chamba and in Kulu, but is very

rarely met in the Sutle] valley, even about Kotegurh, or farther to

east of this station.

125. Tuamnosta Camparensis, Lat h., (II. 122).

The male has the lower plumage shining bluish black, the tail

ig darker than the wings, being more brown, and the feathers of the

former are obsoletely barred with dull cross lines the edges of the

outer webs of most of the tail and also of the wing-feathers have a

metallic lustre.

Female ; wings and tail are darker brown than the upper plumage,

the lower being light brown, much paler on the throat and on the sides

ofthe neck, the ear coverts being generally somewhat rufous.

This robin is also much more common in the more western portion

of the hills and in Kulu than it is in the Sutlej valley, except in the

autumn, when it descends to the lower hills near Belaspoor; it

chiefly frequents bushes and low woods, feeding on insects, for which

it generally searches on the ground in the neighbourhood of streams.

126. ParrincoLa CAPRATA, Linn. (II. 123). The female is in

summer plumage uniformly brown, paler or sooty brown below,

albescent on the throat and on the lores#rufescent towards the vent ;

the lower tail coverts being almost white, the upper rufous ; there are

algo usually some traces of white on the uppermost wing oie &e.

Common all through the Sutlej valley up to Nachar, but seldom

farther to east above elevations of 8,000 feet.

127. Parrincona inpica, Blyth, (IL. 124); the winter plumage

ig much softer and is assumed about October, before the birds retire

to the plains. The species occurs with the former, and generally

agrees with it in habits. Young birds are extremely variable in

colouring.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 41

128. Parrincota rerrea, Hodgs. (II. 127).

Old male ; the ashy above is sometimes quite uniform, without

any black streaks; below the white is either pure or somewhat

ashy on the breast, very rarely is there any rufescent tinge traceable.

In the old female all the brown plumage above is edged paler;

there is scarcely a trace of a white wing spot; the tail feathers are

on their outer webs mostly ferruginous; the lower plumage is albescent,

with a slight rufous tint, pure white on the chin and the throat.

The young male has all the feathers above dark blackish brown, with

pale brown or fulvous central streaks, the wing coverts and tertiaries

broadly edged and tipped with the same colour, more ferruginous on

the back and upper tail coverts ; below whitish, dashed all over with

dusky, purer white on the throat and towards the lower tail-coverts ;

tail black as in the old male, but the white on the outer webs passes

towards the tips into pale rufescent.

The young female is like the young male, the general plumage is

only somewhat more brown, and all the pale and white streaks or

edgings are much more rufous and almost purely ferruginous on the

upper tail coverts and on the tail ; below whitish on the throat, the rest

of the plumage with a distinct ferruginous tint.

The young birds appear to assume the plumage of the old ones

before they retire to the plains, for I found them changing the

same already towards the end of August.

Common with the previous species, and usually seen about Chini,

where it also breeds.

The form of the beak of Patrincola is more like that of Siphia or

Lirythrosterna than that of any species of the Synvip#, and in their

habits they much more resemble the previous birds. The place

assigned to Patrincola in this family does not, therefore, appear to

be quite a natural one.

129. Saxrcona tevcurorpEs, Guerin, (II. 130), and

130. Saxicona prcata, Gow 1d, (Blyth, II. 181), have been ob-

served towards the end of October in the lower hills about Belaspoor,

Simla and Kotegurh. |

131. Saxicona onnantas, Linn, (II. 132), generally retires also

during the winter to the plains. The only species which occasionally,

during the cold weather, remains in the Kulu valley and near Kotegurh

is the next one, 6

42 Ornithological Observations im the Sutle valley, [No. 1,

132. Saxrcona peseRti, Rip p., (IL. 132). The middle portions

of all the wing feathers, except the one or two last tertiaries, are white,

becoming purer towards the secondaries ; back and scapulars are more

or less pale white, often with a rufous tinge; the longer feathers of

the upper tail coverts are also somewhat rufous. All the black on the

throat, sides, neck, the wings and the tail, is pure in summer,

but rather brownish in winter.

In the female the head and the neck above are more uniform light

brown, witha slight ashy tint; back less rufous, wings and tail of the

same brown colour as has the male in winter; below uniform pale

brown, albescent on the throat and vent, with no black whatever.

This species is one of the most common birds all through western |

Tibet; it migrates to the plains of Northern India in winter.

A large number of species of Ruricinuina inhabits W. Tibet

and Central Asia during the summer. I may mention £&. phencure,

Linn., R. rufiventris, Vieil., R. erythrogastra, Giildenst, and others. All

these species migrate in winter to the plains, but their stay in the

Sutlej valley must be a very short one. I defer any remarks on these

species, as 1 hope to make farther additions to my materials on the

Tibetan fauna, and publish the results separately. The only species

which is found common in the eastern parts of the Sutlej valley, though

generally only on the Tibetan side of the Central Himalayan range, is

133. Ruvicrnua cHgutzocernata, V7 g. (II, 141).

In old males the white edgings of the secondaries are soon worn off

and disappear ; a white wing patch is chiefly formed by a portion of

the scapulars and the posterior wing coverts. The margins of the inner

webs of all the wing feathers are pale, purer towards the tertiaries.

Dr. Jerdon supposes, that the female* is coloured similarly to the

male, which is not exactly the case, so far at least as the summer

plumage is concerned. Old females, shot about the end of July

1866, are above uniformly light brown with a slight olivaceous

tinge, the feathers on the head are centrally streaked dusky; the

posterior part of the rump and. especially the upper tail-coverts are

ferruginous, wings and tail dusky brown, the feathers of the former

externally edged pale, the outer tail-feathers margined rufous on their

basal half; the wing coverts are edged and tipped whitish. Below

* See also Blyth in Ibis, 1867, p. 16.

1868. MWe Bimadapa. 43

much paler brown, albescent towards the vent and lower tail coverts

which are white with brownish quills; thigh coverts brown. Bill

and legs black, the latter irid dark brown.

The young bird has the general brownish colour of the female, but is

above and below spotted with whitish, each of the feathers being

centrally on the terminal half white, the tip itself, however, blackish ;

upper tail coverts ferruginous, less in the male, a little more dis-

tinct in the young female. The young male has the wings and tail

blackish brown, the wing coverts broadly tipped and the tertiaries,

margined with pale white ; towards the tips a little rufescent. In the

young female, the wings and tail are rather sooty brown, and all the

edgings have a distinct ferruginous tint. Bill and legs blackish brown

in young males, and light brown in young females.

This species occurs plentifully, beyond Pangi and about Chini,

generally on small streams, it also breeds here; it is also common

in Spiti, Lahul and southern Karnag, wherever any brushwood

exists.

134. Cummorrornis (Ruticriya) rutiernosa, Vi g. (1. 142). This

species ought to be placed in Chemorrornis and not in Ruticilla, the

beak being towards the tip much stouter and more evenly curved in

the previous genus, while in Rwticilla it is more straight and slender.

In habits the present species also perfectly resembles the next one,

both being generally found near the rapids or waterfalls of mountain

streams. Old males are occasionally seen with a few feathers of pure

white on the top of the head, and thus likewise recalling the charac-

teristic colouring on the head of Chem. leucocephala, Vig. In the old

jJemale only the tips of most of the wing coverts are usually white; the

primaries are externally edged pale, round the bill the white has a

distinct rufous tint ; the outer tail feathers are white nearly up to the

tip, it being grey, this colour gradually increasing until the central

feathers become nearly wholly grey, except at the base which always

remains white.

The young bird resembles the female in the general ashy colouring,

the plumage is spotted, the white spots below being however

larger, and the feathers centrally, towards the tips, streaked white ;

the tertiaries and most of the longer wing coverts are tipped

with rufous, which is specially distinct on the external margins. In

A4 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

the young male all the edges on the outer webs of the wing feathers

are bluish, the general colour is dark ashy brown; the tail often

has the white on the base ferruginous, which is in the young female

rather mixed with dusky, the general colouring of the plumage above

being greyish brown, and the external edges of the wings slightly

ferruginous, not bluish. Young males, shot in November, very closely

resembled the old ones, except that the general dark cyaneous colour-

ing and the ferruginous on the tail were not equally pure.

Very common all through the Sutlej] valley from about 3,000 feet

up to 13,000 feet ; it is plentiful about Chini and can be seen almost in

every ravine. I found it, as also fut. rufiventris, breeding near Losar

in the Spiti valley on an elevation of 13,000 feet. It lives here

during the summer, but migrates to the lower hills about October,

when the young birds are full grown.

135. Cnmmorrornis tevcoceenana, Vig. (IL. 148). The female

is duller black, than the male, especially on the rump and belly, the

black feathers only being tipped pale rufous; the posterior vent and

the tail-coverts are pale ferruginous ; tail itself chesnut ; in all other

respects of colouring, male and female are similar.

Common all through the N. W. Himalayas, extending from the

lower wooded ranges far into Tibet and probably into Central Asia.

When I crossed the Lanier pass (somewhat above 20,000 feet) in

Rupshu, the only bird, besides Otocornis penicillata, which I have seen

the next morning upon an elevation of about 17,500 feet, was this

species. I have observed several specimens, but it is not likely, that they

were breeding, for the temperature certainly must fall here to, or

below the freezing point of water, every night all through the year.

During the cold weather, the species migrates partially to the low

Himalayan ranges, partially to the plains of Northern India.

136. Larvivora cyana, Hodgs. (IL. 145), is a rare bird in the

Sutlej valley and does not go eastwards beyond Nachar. It chiefly

frequents low woods between 4 and 7,000 feet. The general colouring

very much recalls that of Sitta Armalayana.

137. Janvnra cyanura, Pallas (IL. 146). The female has (in

winter plumage) a narrow superciliar stripe; the external edges of all

the wing feathers are of a similar pale greenish, or olive brown colour

as is likewise the upper plumage of the head, the scapulars and the

ae? er

1868.] N. W. Himataya, 45

back. This species does not occur in summer to the west of Nachar

and not below 8,000 feet. It breeds near Chini and even here almost

only near the limit of trees at about 12,000 feet. It is often seen

about Korzog in Rupshu, on an elevation of between 15 and 16,000

feet. During the cold weather, itis tolerably common about Kotegurh

and occasionally also about Simla.

138. Tarsicer curysmus, Ho dgs. (II. 149). Only one specimen

was procured in winter at Kotegurh, it isa female and somewhat

smaller, than the measurement given by Dr. Jerdon, the wing being

only 23 inches and the tail hardly 2 inches; I have never met the

species on my summer visits to the Sutlej valley, or in W. Tibet.

139. Caxiiopr prcroratis, Gowld (IL. 150).~ The young bird

is above dark drown, the feathers being centrally streaked pale yellow ;

wings brown, wing coverts tipped and edged externally with shght

rufescent, upper tail coverts with a ferruginous tint ; tail brown, except

on the four central feathers, being white at the base and tipped whitish or

pale rufescent ; superciliar stripe pale, scarcely traceable; below dull

white, all the feathers on the chin, throat and the breast margined

dusky.

Rare in the eastern parts of the valley, generally frequenting brush-

woods ; migrates to Tibet and Central Asia during the summer.

140. Cyanzcuna suncica, Zinn. (II. 152), is not very rare about

the end of October in the lower and western parts of the valley. I found

it breeding in little Tibet, where it appears to be common during

the hot season. The young birds are almost identical in colouring

with those of Calliope pectoralis, except that the ferruginous on the

base of the tail and the whitish tips of the last species are wanting.

As there are in the interior of the hills no extensive grassy places

or swamps along the Sutlej, representatives of the sub-families cALA-

| MOHERPINA: and DRYMOICINH are consequently very rare, and only of

the latter sub-family the next species,

141. Suva crinicer, Hod gs, (II. 183), is rather a common bird,

being found on grassy slopes all through the lower ranges of the hills,

but it does not go very far into the interior.

_ The wide separation of Lurycercus (Laticilla, Blyth) from these

birds appears almost a too forcible one. PHYLLOSCOPINH are com-

paratively very numerous, but their determinations are in many

46 Ornithological Observations in the Sutley valley, [No. 1,

respects still deficient and very difficult. In West Tibet I have

procured several peculiar and apparently new species which no doubt

visit northern India during the cold weather, but as they have not

been yet obtained here, I intend to give of them a more detailed

account at some future occasion. At the present I shall only

mention a few of the better known species.

142. Nuwornis ruavonivacea, Hodgs. (II. 188); rare about

Nachar and Chini between 6 and 10,000 feet; at the latter locality

I generally found it between apricot trees. Jerdon (IIL. $72) quotes

Blyth’ s supposition as to the identity of this species with Horornis

fuliginiventer,* Hodgs. <5tal

143. Puyteoscopus trocninus, Linn. CI. 192), is common all

through the Sutlej valley, between elevations of 5 and 11,000 feet; it

breeds near Chini.

144. Puyrroscopus viripanvs, Blyth, (II. 193) and

145. Puyxuoscorus arrmis, Tick. (I. 194), are comparatively

rare, but both of them are during the summer more common in We

and central Tibet. The latter species is exceedingly like the Kuropean

Ph. sibilatrix and perhaps identical with it.

146. Puyxtoscopus? sp. I procured one specimen of an apparently

new species near Nachar ; it is not in very good preservation, but

the attention of any future traveller may be directed to it by the

following short description.

Above uniform olivaceous brown with a slight rufous tint, especially

on the back and on the outer webs of the wing feathers; wings and —

tail dusky ; below albescent, purer on the chin and throat, towards

the lower tail coverts with a gradually increasing rufous tinge ; lores

dusky, supercilium pale-whitish, front edges of wings and lower wing

coverts white, with aslight yellow tint ; wings 21 inch ; tail 1g inch.

In general colouring, this species resembles Phyllopneuste rama,y

Sykes, but it is decidedly smaller.

147. Recutorss occrrrrauis, Jerd., (II. 196), rare about Chini. ©

148. Ruaun. rRocutorpEs, S wn d., (II. 196) is common all through —

the valley from Kotegurh to Chini, where it: breeds between 9,000 ©

and 10,000 feet. ;

* Vide Ibis, 1867, pp. 21-22.

+ See Ibis, 1867, p. 24.

1868. ] N. W. Himalaya, 47

149. Reavt. proruaunus, Pall, (II. 197); Regul. chloronotus

Hodgs. (III. 873) is not very rare about Chini, where it breeds,

I met with young birds in the beginning of August.

150. Cunicrrera Burxu, B wrt., (II. 199), not common in the

lower hills between Simla and N achar, but I have not seen it further to

east nor on elevations exceeding 8,000 feet.

151. Asrornis xAaNrHOscHIsTos, Hodgs., (II. 202), is the only

common species of this genus found on elevations between 3,000

and 9,000 feet; it also occurs in eastern Kashmir, especially near

Kishtwar,

152. Reavuvs Hiatayensis,* Blyth, (II. 206).

The black streak on either side of the crest is very distinct in

winter. The lores, and a streak passing above the upper mandible

and connecting both eyes is almost purely white; the tertiaries are

tipped pale.

I procured this species only through my shikaries at Kotegurh, the

Specimens were shot early in the spring and in winter; I met with it,

however, during the summer in the Indus valley of W. Tibet; it

breeds no doubt here as well as in other parts of Central Asia.

The female has the top of the head uniform pale yellow without

any flame colour.

153. Henicurvus MAcULATUS, Vig., (II. 212). The young bird

has the head, neck, back, Scapulars, throat and breast sooty brown,

the feathers on the throat and breast centrally streaked paler;

abdomen, wings, belly and tail as in the old bird; the former

does not assume its full plumage till the next Spring or very late in

the season; in some of the birds the white Spots begin to shew

themselves in October, but the feathers on the back want the pure

black colour of the old bird. Common all through the valley on

elevations from 5,000 to 12,000 feet, but does not go eastwards of

the large forests, into the Tibetan climate proper. j

154. Heyrcurvs Scoutmrrt Vi g., CL 214), is more confined to

the hills of the outer ranges, but not uncommonly geen up to 8,000

feet.

* Mr. v, Poelzeln of Vienna informs me, that he compared the Himalayan

specimens with several Kuropean ones, and is unable to detect any sufficiently

characteristic distinctions, Both may therefore be proved to be identical.

_ + Hen. nigrifrons is stated by Blyth to be a young specimen of this species

Ibis, 1867, p. 29.

48 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

I have already remarked, that Hydrobata would seem to be more

correctly classed here, instead of in the family Turp1pz.

None of the true MOTACILLINZ are, during the summer, very

common in the Sutlej valley, for most of the species generally proceed

further north and eastwards, into Tibet and Central Asia. I procured

a few of them through my shikarees at Kotegurh in April and May,

and others myself when travelling through the valley proceeding to

or returning from Tibet. The most common species are :—

155. Moracrnna Mapmraspatana, Drvss., (IL. 217) being occa-

sionally seen also in summer near Chini.

156. Moracrzua personata, G owl d, AIL. 873, M. DUKHUNENSIS,

Sykes, I1. 218), is very rare in summer as likewise the two following ;—

157. Coxapares sutpourea, Bechst., (Al. 220) and

158. Bupyres virwis, G mel, (11. 222).

159. Buvyrns crrreonorss, Ho dgs., (III. 873), is especially com-

mon beyond Chini, towards the Tibetan frontier, as also in Lahul and

north of Kishtwar. Budytes Ray: of Europe occurs in Kashmir, but I

have not met with it further eastwards.

160. Nemortcoua mnprca, G@mel., (IL 226), has been shot near

Kotegurh in April, and I also obtained a specimen in August 1865

near Suroo in the Dras district, N. H. of Kashmir.*

The following species, including the so-called Pipits, do not seem

to be naturally classed with the MOTACILLINS. The great differences |

which exists in the form of the bill, in the plumage, in their

habits &c., would seem to justify the formation of a separate

subfamily, being rather more allied to the aLaupIna#, than to the

MOTACILLINE. 7

161. Preastes macutatus, Hodqs., (III. 873,) I have only met

with this species in the lower hills, but it breeds in W. Tibet.

It was observed by me on one or two occasions in the Indus valley,

W. of Lei, in company with the next one.

162. Preasres arnornus, Be ch., (IL. 229), not common in W.

Tibet and Kashmir; about October it may be seen in the low hills

near Kangra and Belaspoor. The following species,

163. Corypatna Ricmarvt, Viet 11, (IL. 231),

164. Corypatra rurura, Viedll., AI. 232),

* Blyth (Ibis 1867, p. 31) says that ib is also found near Pekin.

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 49

165. Agropoma sorvipa, & ti p., (II. 236),

166. Anrnus cervinus, Pall., (IL. 237),

167. Herrervra synvana, Hodgs., (239) also occur during ‘the

summer months in the Sutle] valley, but they are generally confined to

the lower western portions of it, and do not usually migrate further east-

wards than Nachar. The elevations upon which they are found lie

between 2,000 and 6,000 feet. In cases of the absence of grassy and

shrubby slopes they are very seldom met with in the denser pine for-

ests. The Agrod. sordida breeds at Kotegurh, and the Het. sylvana is

occasionally seen near Chini, where it also breeds. It is the only

species which is more common in the valley, and sometimes even

remains during the winter in the neighbourhood_of Kotegurh. and

Simla. All the other species migrate at the beginning of the cold

weather to the plains of Northern India, or to the Dhoons of the Sub-

Himalayan hills.

XXI. Fam. AMPELEIDA.

168. Prerururus eryvruroprEres, Vi g., (11.245).

It almost appears to be a very unnatural separation to remove from

each other the genera Ptheruthius and Lanius, under the last of which

P. erythropterus has originally been described. The species seems

to combine the characters-of Laniws and Tephrodornis, possessing the

shape of the bill of the former and the short. tail. of the latter.

Male ; some of the ashy feathers on the back are often tipped black ;

the primaries and secondaries and their coverts are shining black

on the outer, dull black on the inner-webs; the quills, beginning

at the third primary, are tipped white on the inner webs, the white

increasing up to the sixth primary, then again decreasing, until

it disappears. on the last secondary; a white wing patch is formed

by the basal half of the inner webs of all the secondaries and of the

primaries, with the exception of the first primary. Below white, all the

feathers dark slaty at their bases, abdomen of a light fleshy colour,

under tail coverts pure white. The tips of the tail feathers are

distinctly mucronate, and have sometimes traces of golden yellow.

The female has the tertiaries somewhat duller chesnut ; only the

two central tail feathers are wholly dingy green, the others mostly

black, greenish on the outer webs and tipped yellow, which increases

towards the outermost pair.

50 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, (No. 1,

This species is occasionally in the spring seen about Kotegurh, and

as far east as Nachar, the highest elevations, at which I observed

it near Serahan, lying between 9,000 and 10,000 feet; it is, however,

always a rare bird in this portion of the hills.

169. Axnorrrus* sp., the following is a short description. Head

slaty, rest of upper plumage greenish, wings dusky on the inner webs,

coverts of the primaries black ; lateral tail feathers pale on the outer

webs, darker on the inner, tipped greenish white; chin, throat and

breast. greyish white, abdomen and vent light green, especially on

the sides; length of wing 23 inches; tail 2 inches. ¥

The female seems only to differ by having the head above greenish

grey, instead of pure slaty, and in having the coverts of the secondaries

tipped pale yellow; the tail is greyish green, the outer feathers tipped

dull whitish. Only three specimens were shot, in February 1867, in

the southern part of Kulu.

170. Srva srriguua, Hodqs. (II. 252). The yellow on the crest

and below is paler in the female, than in the male; the back is some-

what ashy in the former, the black spot on the throat smaller and

the central tail feathers more tipped yellow, while in the male the

tail feathers are often nearly all black, being chesnut on the inner,

basal half, not outer as stated by Jer don, ;

The young bird scarcely differs from the old one, except that its

plumage above, on the back, wings and on the tail is a little more

ashy, the dusky spots on the throat being at the same time very small.

This species in summer frequents thick forests, between 6,000 to 9,000

feet, all along the elevated range from Simla to Nachar; it is in

general rare and only in winter more common about Kotegurh.

171. Proparus (Srva?) vinipnctus, Hodgs. (II. 257). The

ear-coverts are darker brown than the head and nape; the white

stripe, extending from the eye to the nape, is above bordered with

some blackish feathers ; lores black, back pale brown, rump and upper

tail coverts lighter and rusty, longer wing coverts bright rusty. The

upper mandible has a very small and shallow, but a traceable notch,

the bill is, however, in every other respect exactly like in Siva, the 3

* This is Allotrius wanthochlorus, Ho dg s. which Jer don identifies with i

melanotis, the present species being, however, certainly a distinct bird. Gould’s

figure in “ Birds of Asia’ pt. VIII. is correct. Allotriws can only be considered _

as a subgeneric division of Ptheruthius.

1868.]} N. W. Himalaya. 51

only difference from this genus probably consisting in the greater

length of the hind claw, which is in reality almost a trifling distine-

tion, when compared with other generic characters. The differences

of Proparus from Parus are on the contrary much greater, because

the bill is in the latter genus more distinctly conical and the nostrils

covered, while in Stva or Proparus the bill is laterally rather

compressed, lengthened, and the nostrils uncovered. With regard to

this point as well as to the coloration of the wings, the habits, &c. there

appears to be a marked relation of the Species of Siva and Proparus

to those of Garrulaw and Trochalopteron. I only procured at the end

of August 1866 two specimens of Pro. vinipectus at aheight of 8,000

feet on the Matiana hill, beyond Simla ; it appears to be very rare, and

would seem chiefly to frequent in summer thick pine-forests, in

company of Siva strigula.

172. Zosrerors PALPEBROsus, Z'emm., (II. 265) is very common

all through the valley, as far as any rich arboreal vegetation exists; it

ranges up to elevations of 12,000 feet, breeds about Chini,

to the plains in winter.

173. Synvrearvs mopustus, B u rt. (II. 267). Male in summer

above olive green, brighter on the abdomen, on the upper tail-coverts

and on the forehead ; the feathers on the head have bl

indistinct supercilium, round the eye and the e

but retires

ack quills; an

ar-coverts are pale

greenish yellow; on the lores and beneath the plumage is whitish, slight-

ly tinged with greenish yellow, especially on the breast ; Wings and tail

blackish, externally edged with yellowish green, which ig brighter

towards the tips of the secondaries, as also on all the coverts and on the

front edges of the wings. Some of the last primaries and the secon-

daries are usually tipped white; the tail is emarginated in the

middle and all the feathers are slightly mucronate.

The female has the forehead and the plumage below pale white.

The species is in summer common on the apricot trees about Pangi

and. Chint, but I have not noticed it any where else in the valley. It

is said occasionally to remain at- Kotegurh during the winter,

The bill of Sylwparus resembles in many respects that of Oarduelis,

and the feet are as stout as in Munia, the general coloration is that

| of Zosterops ; thus the genus represents a remarkable transitional

f type.

52 Ornithological Observations in the Sutle; valley, [No. 1,

174. Cerwanopyrus FLamMicers, Bur t., (II. 267), is still rarer

than the last species, and is to be found only between elevations of

3,000 and 7,000 feet ; it does not go eastwards beyond Wangtu bridge.

. Sub-family, PARIN AS. )

175. ARerruauiscus eryturocernatus, Vig., (IT. 270).

176. Lornorpnanes meLanonopnus, Vig., (IL. 278).

177. Loupornanes ruronvenauis, Blyth, (IL. 274).

178. Parvus monticunus, Vig., (277).

179. Paxrvs cinereus, Viedl., (11. 278). .

All these species, except the last one, are very common in the valley

on elevations between 4,000.and 12,000 feet. The 4. erythrocephalus

is occasionally met with migrating from one elevated portion of the

valley to a lower locality, and vice versa. I found the birds in large

numbers moving about in the morning hours, generally associated

with 4brornis gntho: chistos, Muscicapula superciliaris, Sitta iM-

mala,ana, and other species. The same observation I have made

previously in ( hamba and in other parts of the hills.

The species of Lophop’anes prefer in summer higher situated pine

and cedar-forests. while those of Parws are more commonly seen on |

the open places and on apricot trees in the gardens, &c. P. cinereus —

is by far not so common on this side of the snowy ranges, as it is Im

Kashmir and in little Tibet. It is the only species which goes farthest —

to north and extends into Tibet, although most of the others remain ;

during the winter in the less frigid portions of the interior valleys, —

and only seldom migrate to the plains. |

180. Macunonopnus xantuogenys, Viig., (II. 279), was only pro-

cured in winter at. Kotegurh and appears to be even at this -time of —

the year very rare. The yellow patches on the nape and the sides of —

the head are very pale in winter and there are occasionally even some |

whitish feathers on the top of the head. The coloration of this and the —

allied species is extremely like that of P. monticulus, and thus Machlo- q

lophus may properly be considered as a transitional form between —

Lophophanes and Parus. re.

Sub-famr'y, ACCENTORINA. /

181. Accuntor aurarcus, Brandt, (Il. 287). The feathers on

the head, nape and neck are centrally streaked dusky, those of the a

back and of the scapulars are centrally broadly tipped blackish brown, ©

1868.] N. W. Himatayx. 53

and of the same colour are the tertiaries, being margined with hight

rufous brown. A rather dark streak extends from the lores below the

eye; the ear-coverts have a slight rufous tinge; the lower tail-coverts

are dark brown, margined with pure white.

This species inhabits during the summer Tibet and Central Asia and

comes in winter to the Sub-Himalayan ranges. The largest specimen,

which was procured at Kotegurh last year in winter, measures 87

inches on the wings, tail 22 and the total length could ie have been

much under 7 inches, the specimen having thus fully the size of A.

nipalensis, Hodgs.

182. Accrnror srroputatys, Hodgs., CII. 287). The general

colour above is rather olivaccous brown, with a slight rufous tint on

the back, wings and tail are dusky brown; the white tips on the

Wing coverts are sometimes scarcely abandabie:

This species is likewise an inhabitant of Central Asia; I do not

remember it even from W. Tibet, although it is probably be found

there, for it occasionally comes in winter to Kotegurh and to other

Cis-Himalayan parts of the Sutlej valley.

183. Accenror Hurront, Moore, (II. 288). The pale line

extending downwards from the base of the lower mandible is sometimes

very indistinct ; the black on the throat is below occasionally margined

path a whitish, pale line.

_ Only a winter visitant to the lower ranges of the N. W. Himalayas,

and common at that season about Simla and Kotegurh.

184. Accrnror RuBECULOIDES, fio dgs. ( II. 288). The general

brown hue above is much paler in summer than in winter, but the

ferruginous on the breast is brighter in summer.

This species is common in W. Tibet, of which it generally is

@ permanent inhabitant. It seems very rarely to visit the plains of

Northern India, and even the lesser ranges of the N..W. Himalayas ;

only one specimen was shot near Rampoor during the winter of 1865.

1866.

T have also procured in W, Tibet one apparently new species of

Accentor and another probably belonging to the type of Acc. modularis

which has been called Tharrhaleus, but I have not yet succeeded in

obtaining them on this side of the Himalayas; they may, therefore,

better be treated subsequently with the Tibetan fauna.

54. Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

XXII. Family CORVIDA.

185. Corvus tiseranus, Hodgs., (II. 294). This, so called,

species is common in summer all through W. Tibet and only very

few birds come down in winter to Kulu and the Sutlej valley, near

Kotegurh, but it is said to be abundant at that season in the neigh-

bourhood of Chini. Although generally supposed to be a good

species* Dr. J erdon includes it, and I believe very properly, in the

list of the doubtful ones. The only difference, from the European Cor,

corax, is its occasional somewhat larger size, but this 1s far from

constant. I obtained in Spiti several specimens which evidently

appear to belong to the same species, and they are by no means larger

than true C. coraz. Some donot even appear to equal the largest

measurements of CO. corax, but as these had been taken only from

dried specimens, I will not absolutely rely upon them, especially as

I hope to settle that point more carefully on my next visit to Tibet.

186. Corvus cunminatus, Sy kes, (II. 295), is only to be found

in the lower hills and generally retires to the plains for the winter.

187. Corvus inTERMEDIUS, Addams, (IL. 29), is most common

all through the N. W. Himalayas; in W. Tibet it was found by me

only W. of Lei, about Kargil, Dras and towards Skardo. During

the summer it is the only species met with about Chini and in the

eastern portions of the Sutlej valley.

The usual measurements are; total length 18—20 inches, length of —

wing 12-13 inches, tail 8-83 inches, length of pill 22-23 inches, height

of the same about { inches.

188. Corvus sprenpens, Viel, (II. 298), is very seldom seen

to the east of Kotegurh, and only near the villages.

189. Nucrwraca uemrspra,t V2g. (IL. 304), is very common all

through the forests of the valley, from low elevations to the limit of -

trees, and from Simla to Chini.

190. Nucrrraga muurmacunata, Gould, (IL. 304). I procured

* Ibis 1867, p. 34. Mr. Blyth still considers the species as distinct from

C. coraw. When lately in London he shewed mea large specimen of this

species, sent from the Himalayas, but I confess that I have seen in the

Museums at Minich, Berlin and Vienna quite as large specimens of the

Buropean QC. corae. I do not think that they are distinct species, (Ieb. 1868.)

+ The plumage of this species is very variable. I obtained specimens which

have very few and almost not traceable white spots. The N. immaculata,

which Blyth (ibis, 1867, p. 36) calls an unspotted species from Nepal appears

to me rather doubtful (Feb. 1868.)

1868. ] N. W. Himalaya. 56

a specimen of this species in October 1865 on an elevated point beyond

Belaspoor, and found it tolerably common in the pine and cedar

forests near Kistwar and Budrawar. The species very much resembles

the Kuropean N. cariocatacthes, only that the white blotches are

somewhat larger and perhaps more numerous, the quills and the two

central tail feathers are usually tipped white; the plumage above also

appears to be darker, than it is in European specimens.

191. Garuuus pispecunaris, Vig. (II. 307), and

192. Garrvuius Lancuonatus, Vig. (11.308), are both common,

but the latter is more confined to the lower ranges about Simla while

the former occurs much further to North, and in the interior of the

hills, it is occasionally seen about Chini; both species are also common

at, Kotegurh in winter.

193. Unoctssa ocoyrrranis, Blyth, (II. 309, U. stnensis, and IIT,

873). This is the only common species of Urocissa occurring in the

Sutlej valley, I never have observed the U. cucullata, Gould, noticed

by Dr. Jer don (IIL. 873) as distinct from U. flavirostris of Sikkim.

194. Deyprocrrra rua, Sco p. (IL. 314), and

195. Denv. Himatayana, Blyth, (ILI. 316, No. 676, and IIL.

874), are both only found in the lower hills between 2 and 5,000 feet,

the last one ocasionally occurs up to 7,000 feet; but very seldom in

the interior of the hills ; both are also met with in Southern Kashmir.

196. Freaitus Himanayanus,* Gould, (II. 819), is rare during

the summer in the neighbourhood of Chini and only on elevations of

and above 11,000 feet; it is, however, more common in these parts

during the cold weather ; most of the birds live in summer in the

Spiti valley, Tibet, and probably all through Central Asia, extending

into Siberia, but I have nowhere in western Tibet seen them in large

numbers; in Spiti, I have generally observed them at elevations from

13,000 to 15,000 feet. They live in pairs or three or four together,

and at some distance from villages, being apparently very shy.

| * T do not think that this is distinct from Freg. graculus. L. Gould says that

the Himalayan species has a larger beak, but when lately in Vienna I have compar-

ed my specimens with the Huropean ones and found, a specimen from Savoy had

a longer and stronger bill, than either of my Himalayan ones ; size and colour do

not offer any distinctions. I strongly believe that the Himalayan bird is

| not specijically distinct from the European (Feb. 1868.)

‘

——

56 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. I,

197. Pyrriocorax aurrnus,* Vie oll. (IL. 319), is insummer spread

all over western Tibet, including the Spiti valley, the eastern districts of

Kunawar, &c., but migrates in winter to the lower ranges and valleys

of the Himalaya, being in the cold weather specially common in Kulu.

In its habits it is altogether the reverse from the last species, being

very social and generally the first, and often the only, visitor to

the camp of the traveller in Spiti or Ladak; it is here quite as —

familiar and quite as noisy in the neighbourhood of villages and

camping grounds as the Corvus splendens throughout India.

Both this and the former species breed in holes of rocks.

XXIII. Fam. STURNID.

198-199, Srurnus vutesris, Linn, (II. 321), and Sr. unrtcoLor =

(II. 822), have been both procured on the Sutlej to the north of

Belaspoor, they were most probably migrating from Kashmir, where

they are very abundant, especially near the Wollar lake. :

900. Acrivorueres tTristis, Linn, AI. 825) is common in the

lower hills and valleys, but never approaches the northern regions ;

pordering on the Tibetan frontiers. In the Sutlej valley, it is not seen —

much farther beyond Rampoor, or above elevations of 5,500-feet, the last —

and highest limit of growth of the Fiéus religtosa; it is also very common :

in Kulu and all through the western hills extending into Kashmir.

901. TrwEenucHus PAGODARUM, G mel. (IL. 829); common in the

lower hills in the autumn; I found it also abundant in May about

Suket and other places, where it breeds in holes of trees: It was ag?

sociated on the pasture-grounds with the previous and the next species. 3 |

902. Pastor nosevs, Linn., (II. 333). It is very probable that —

this species breeds in the lower hills of the Himalayas.

XXIV. Fam. FRINGILLIDA.

203. Munra Manaparica, Linn. (I. 357); common in thal

lower hills and not ascending elevations above 5,000 feet, very seldom —

extending into the interior. é

904, MuUNIA SIMILARIS, N. SP.

There is another plain coloured species to be found on the lower —

* Lient. Beav an (Ibis 1867, pp. 187 and 142) has much doubt as to the legs” 4

of Pyr. alpinus being red. I believe, that I have distinctly told him the bill —

is yellow, and the legs are red, there cannot exist any doubt on this point. Gok

Gott is certainly mistaken in taking the colour of the legs for yellow. | 7m

1868.]} NV. W. Himalaya. 57

ranges of the N. W. Himalaya. It is almost of the same size as the

Monta Matapartica, or perhaps a trifle larger, of a uniform rufescent

brown colour, paler below and dusky on the inner webs of the quills.

The feet are plumbeous and the claws proportionally somewhat

longer than in the last species. It has a distinctly more rufescent

tinge in all its plumage, than the true M. Malabarica, The only

specimen which I possess is in a good state of preservation and

belongs, I believe, to a new species,

205. Passer inpicus, Jard. and Selb. CII. 362,) is common

all through the N. W. Himalayas, but only near villages or cultivated

Spots. It is during the summer most abundant in the Indus valley

about Lei, though not a single bird remains here during the winter,

all migrating either down the valley to the Punjab, or to the lower

ranges of the Himalayas, |

206. Passer cinnamomnus, Gow d, (II. 365), is plentiful all

through the valley, but usually found above elevations of 6,000 feet,

it is mostly confined to the jungly districts,* though generally not far

from villages ; it breeds in holes of trees.

207. Passur montanus, Linn. (II. 366), is only rarely seen in the

eastern parts of the valley, near Chini and towards the Qhinese

frontier.

208. Huperiza cra, Linn. (II. 371, Emb. Stracheyi, Moore,

372). The general rufescent colour above increases from the back

towards the tail; the longer upper tail coverts are centrally streaked

black, the two central tail feathers broadly margined with rufescent,

this colour being much- paler in the female ; the two outer tail

feathers are for nearly the total terminal half white, more go on the

inner, than on the outer webs; the breast is uniform ashy in old males,

with dusky spots in the females and young birds; the three black

streaks on the sides of the head are very distinct, the central one

becoming much narrower towards the nape, while the grey streak is at

| the same time much wider.

This European species is very common in summer all through the

N. W. Himalayas on both the Indian and the Tibetan side; in winter

| it mostly remains on the lower southern ranges.

* Ibis, 1867, p. 42, Bly th is correct in supposing that it is a tree- and not a

house-sparrow.

: , , iG

58 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. t

009, Empertza prruvornts, Pa ll., ( II. 370) is occasionally shot

<n winter at Kotegurh, but I have not observed it during the

summer anywhere in the Sutlej valley.

210. Empuriza Stewart, Blyth (I. 874). In the old male

all the under parts extending from the chest nearly to the lower tail

coverts are chesnut, mingled with white on the vent, on which some

of the feathers often have besides a central brown streak; the

outer web of the first pair of the outer tail feathers is mostly white.

In the old female each feather above is centrally and below only

terminally brown, the rest 1s light ashy or sometimes fulvous brown,

internally the feathers are slaty ; chin and throat are whiti,h, vent

and edgings of the wing coverts somewhat deeper fulvous; the edgings

of the tertiaries are broad with a yufous tinge, upper tail-coverts

almost purely chesnut. There are generally also some traces of

brown or chesnut on the sides of the breast and on the scapulars. The

two central tail feathers are broadly margined with rufous, the others

only slightly so on the outer webs, and besides somewhat paler;

the two outer tail feathers on each side are near the base black, the

rest being white except on the black shafts; of these two outermost

tail feathers the first one is less black at the base, than the one next 44

to it.

Young females differ from the old ones in having all the fulvous 7

brown colour much paler, and whitish. The young males are also very —

like the old ones, only that the brown central streaks on the breast — |

and on the head are much narrower, the central tail feathers less —

margined with rufous and more black; the chesnut on the scapulars j

and on the sides of the breast is also somewhat less developed. This 7

species occurs in summer in the interior portions of the N. W. Hima- —

laya; in the Sutlej valley it is scarcely seen west of the Wangtu bridge,

but it is very common about Chini and farther to east, making a nest —

of coarse grass near the ground in low bushes. I found young birds

about the middle of June. It is only partially a migratory bird and —

yemains in the wooded parts of the valley generally all the year, but

apparently not in Tibet.

011. Empurima rucata, Pall. (IL. 875). The grey on the head il

is rather variable, sometimes it is very conspicuous, in other cases —

scarcely traceable ; occasionally some of the feathers on the head are —

. 1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 59

rufous. When I passed through the Sutlej valley at Kotegurh, Rampoor

and Nachar in June 1866, I have not observed a single specimen of

this species, but on my return through the same parts in August I

found the males most abundant, but not a single female. I cannot

at the present account for the solitary appearance of the former.

212. Emperiza pustiia, P a 11. (IL. 376), is very rare at Kotegurh,

and only to be seen in winter; I have not noticed it during the

summer in W. Tibet, it must travel further northwards.

213. Eusprza menanoceruata, G mel. (II 378), is common in

the low hills about Belaspoor and Kangra,

214. Mutopnus mexaniotervs, G me l. (II. 881), is generally found,

on bare slopes of hills or open places, all along the southern ranges of

the N. W. Himalayas, but it never approaches the Tibetan climate ; it

does not go even as far east as Chini, and it is very mprobable that it

inhabits the western parts of Central Asia, although it may be identical

with the species occurring in China. At Kotegurh it breeds in summer

during the months of May and June, but it does not remain here in

winter.

FRINGILLIN® are especially numerous on the lower ranges during the

cold weather, while in summer they are mostly to be found at greater

elevations, in western Tibet and in Central Asia. Some of the species

appear to be, however, permanent inhabitants of the outer ranges.

215. Hesperipyona 1oTEr 1o1pEs, Vi g. (II. 884). The yellow on the

. back is in the old bird often mingled with some black feathers. The

young female is like the old one, but the young male has in the first

winter the whole head with the sides, nape, chin and throat ashy ; the

rest of the plumage is yellowish green, brighter below ; the primaries,

secondaries and the tail feathers are black, the tertiaries green on the

outer webs, black on the inner, all the coverts being greenish. Common

about Kotegurh and N. of Simla, in summer and winter, at elevations

of 5,000 to 9,000 feet ; the species does not go far in the interior, at

least not beyond the limit of the large forests.

216. Pyrruvna eryrurocernans, Vig. (II. 389); the shining

blue black feathers on the wings and on the tail are narrowly barred

across with dull black lines ; the species breeds about Kotegurh between

6,000 and 8,000 feet, but it is found all through the valley up to the

limit of the pine and cedar forests; it is also common in Lahul and

60 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

probably migrates much farther to north into Central Asia and Siberia,

for very large numbers come down each winter to Kulu and the lower

ranges.

917. Loxza Hmanavana, Hodqs. (II. 398), is only to be found in 2

the forests about Chini and towards the east; it is rare at Kotegurh

even in winter, but common in Lahul during the summer.

918. Carpopacus ERYTHRINUS, Pallas, (II. 398) ; very common,

on elevations from 7,000 to 14,000 feet, all through the N. W. Hima-

layas and in Tibet during the summer ; it remains at Kotegurh in ~

winter, The different variations of the plumage quite agree with

Jerdon’s description. |

219. Propasser ruopocutamys, Brandt, (II. 401) is not very —

rarely met with near Kotegurh, though more common about Chini;

it breeds in Tibet.

220. Propasser RHopocHROUs, Vig. (II. 402). |

The rose colour of the male is in winter on the forehead and on the

superciliar stripe paler, than on the rump; the feathers covering the

nostrils are vinaceous ; the shorter upper tail coverts are bright rosy,

the longer more dull; the edges of the outer webs of the wing and

tail feathers are generally rufous, while in the female they are much

paler.

The young male very much resembles the old female, except that

there are always some rosy feathers on the throat, sides of the neck

and the front of the head. The species is very rare in summer on

the lesser ranges and is scarcely seen below 7,000 feet, it is, however,

more common to the east of Chini, in Spiti and in Lahul, as likewise

‘during the winter near Kotegurh and Simla.

A large apparently new species of Propassr occurs in W. Tibet;

the length of the wing of the female is 41 inches; it is similarly coloured

as the female of P. rhodochlamys, but the brown longitudinal streaks

below are comparatively much smaller; I have not been able to

procure as yet a male specimen of this species, but it is possible that it

is not different from the last named one.

921. Pyrrnosprza punicea, Hod gs. (II. 406), comes only occa- —

sionally in winter to Kotegurh and Simla, but 1s more common eastwards;

in summer it is found in Spiti and Ladak on elevations of 13,000 to

17,000 feet, searching aiter food at the camping grounds. I found the i

1868. | N. W. Himalaya. 61

nest, made of coarse grass, in Rupshu near the Thsomoriri (lake), on

the ground, in a little bush of the Tibetan furze ; eggs dirty white or

greenish with some dark brown spots.

222. Camacantuis Burront, Gould, (II. 407). The entire

lower plumage is in winter reddish brown, and only the tips of the

feathers are crimson ; wings and tail are black, the tips of all the wing-

coverts, all wing-and tail-feathers are white, those on the tertiaries

slightly tinted with crimson; the three pairs of outer tail feathers

are terminally white on the inner webs, the white decreasing from the

outermost, until it becomes reduced on the fourth pair and all the fol-

lowing feathers to whitetip. This rare species is found occasionally in

winter on the lesser ranges, about Kotegurh and Simla between

4,000 and 7,000 feet ; in summer it lives in the highest cedar forests

on the central range of the N. W. Himalayas. I do not remember it

from Tibet, but it very likely migrates farther to the north of the -

Indus valley in W. Tibet.

223. Carpugnis cantcers, Vi g. (II. 408), common in summer all

through W. Tibet, wherever any thistles are to be found ;in its habits,

flight, song and nidification it does not differ at all from the Kuropean

Card. elegans. During the cold weather, it is very plentifully met

with at Kotegurh, near Simla, and all along the bill stations of the

lesser ranges.

224. Cunrysomirris sprnorpes, Vig. (II. 409,) prefers the more

wooded districts and is in the lower hills not uncommon even during

the summer months between 5 and 9,000 feet; it is, however, found

with the former species also in Spiti and in Lahul.

225. Meroponia pustina, Pall, (II. 410). The female has the

head and ear coverts brown; there are usually some traces of golden

yellow on the forehead, specially in very old females ; the throat is

pale, breast black, but the nape is rather ashy; in other respects it

resembles the male.

This finch comes only in winter to the lesser ranges of the N. W.

Himalayas ; it breeds east of Chini on elevations of 10,000 feet and

above, as likewise in Spiti, Lahul and Ladak. I found old nests made

of thin twigs, laid out with grass and wool, on shrubs or low trees of

Juniperus excelsa,

62 Ornithological Observations in the Sutle valley, [No. 1,

996. Lrnova pyamma, n. sp. There is another small finch found in

Ladak and in Bissahir. It is considerably smaller than Metop. pusilla,

the wings being only 24; the head and nape are blackish brown, ear-

coverts rufous brown, general plumage above dark brown, the feathers _

being centrally streaked with that colour and broadly margined pale | |

fulvous brown; wings and tail blackish brown ; edges of outer webs |

of the primaries and partly also of the secondaries yellow, the entire | |

margins of the tertiaries and the tips of the former, as well as the

tips and outer edges of all the wing coverts are pale rufous brown ; tail

deeply emarginated in the middle, the external edges for two-thirds

length from the base yellow, the rest pale rufous; throat slightly

tinged with yellow, rest of lower plumage light fulvous brown,

centrally streaked dusky on the breast and upper vent. The bill 1s

very small, dusky above, culmen distinctly angular, ridged. ;

I procured two specimens of this species, one at about 13,000

feet near the snows above Chini (August, 1866), and one near Padam —

in S. W. Tibet at about 12,000 feet, (September, 1865). I cannot —

identify this species at present with any described by Pallas from

North Asia, for which reason I think it advisable to introduce a

new specific name. | 4

99". Lrvota srevirostris, Gowld, (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. A

1855, p. 216), is exactly of the same size as the European Lin.

montium, apparently only differing from it by its paler plumage ; %

rare in Ladak and visiting Kulu and the Sutlej valley in winter;

it is also in winter caught near Chini and sometimes caged. . 4

298. Monrirrincinta HaMATOPYeIA, Gould, CL. 413, Birds of —

Asia, pt. III. pl. 15). |

929. Montirrinetina Apamst, Moore, (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. —

1858, p. 482, pl. 156). The longer upper tail-coverts are grey ; the

secondaries are black on their basal half. am

Both these species are inhabitants of Ladak during the summer, but ©

they have been procured in winter through my shikaries in the Sutlej —

valley as well as in Kulu. They also visit N orthern India in the cold —

weather. There is a third, apparently new species of Montifringilla to —

* Dr. Jerdo n informs me that he algo procured in the Punjab a very small e.

finch which he supposes to be a second species of Metoponia ; my specimens by.

though very small appear to be more allied to Linota (April 1868). 4

1868. ] N. W. Himala ya. 63

be found in the Himalayas, but as far as at present known, only oceur-

ring in Ladak, I shall give the description of it at some future occasion,

as I am at present in possession of a single specimen.

230. Frinamiavpa nemortcoLa, Hodgs. (II. 414), is likewise

only a winter visitant to the lesser ranges ; I observed it often during

the summer in the south-western parts of Tibet and to the north of

Kashmir.

231. Frrvemaupa sorpa, 2. sp. Another species apparently be-

longing to the genus Fringillauda has been procured by me near the

Baralatse-pass in north Lahul and near Padam in 1868 ; last winter

I got several specimens of the same species from Kotegurh. The

following description is taken from these specimens.

Male in winter ; forehead dusky brown, all the feathers mar-

gined pale; top of head and ear-coverts uniform rufous brown,

nape and neck ashy brown, back dark brown, the feathers margined

pale rufous; rump pure ashy; upper tail-coverts blackish, tipped and

margined white ; wings and tail dusky, the secondaries being narrowly,

the tertiaries more broadly edged pale brown and tipped whitish; wing

coverts brownish, dusky in the centre, tipped whitish and forming

two conspicuous bands ; all the tail feathers are margined pale; below

uniform dull ashy, albescent on the vent; lower tail coverts dusky,

broadly margined and tipped with pure white. The female has the

entire top of the head light brown, the feathers being dusky centrally,

the ear coverts are pale ; otherwise it is coloured like the male.

The specimens which I procured in summer, are more uniform

dusky brown above, having all the pale edgings of the feathers much

less distinct and the whitish bands on the wing coverts scarcely

conspicuous.

Length of wing 3% inches; tail 2% inches; bill dusky brown above,

pale on the base and below; legs greyish brown, irides fleshy brown.

The form of the bill is scarcely different from that of a typical

Montifringilia, but the hind claw is remarkably longer and like all

the other claws very slender, and more similar to those of Hringillauda

than to those of the former genus.

T have not succeeded in identifying this species nor have I seen

specimens of it in any of the Huropean Museums, though it is compara-

tively a common bird. .

64 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

932. Murrarra cantiuans, Je 7rd. (II. 420), is the only species of

this genus which has been observed on the lesser ranges along the |

Sutlej valley ; it usually frequents grassy slopes of hills. |

933. (CALANDRELLA BRACHYDACTYLA, Te mm., (II. 426) is common |

in the eastern portions of the valley, beyond Chini, and in winter also

in the low hills.

934. Apauputa RAyTaL, Buch Ham., (II. 428); the typical

smaller species was by me occasionally observed during the summer in

Ladak, but it probably migrates farther to north; in winter it arrives

sn Kulu and the north’of India in larger numbers and is often caged.

235, ALAUDULA PISPOLETTA, Pallas, (II. 429), will stand as a

distinct species ; it was procured by me near Korzog in Rupshu, but —

appears to be much rarer than the last species ; it most probably also —

migrates in winter to the lower hills and to the plains of North India. =

In general colouring, it is very like Al. raytal, except that the ear-

coverts are more whitish, and the feathers on the head and nape very

narrowly streaked dusky brown, while they are more distinctly streak- —

ed in the former species; in size it is decidedly larger, the bill being —

in proportion rather long and slender, horny above, pale yellow

pelow at the base, the upper mandible at the tip a little less curved ;

legs fleshy brown ; length of wing 3 inches ; tail 23 inches. |

936. Orocorts LonerRostRis, Gould, (II. 431), is common all

through W. Tibet, where it usually remains all the year round, only —

few birds migrating to the lower hills or to the North of India. I found Y

this species near the highest passes on the N. W. Himalayas, following —

the tracks of merchants on the snow and searching alter grain. Jt

has not been obtained by my shikarees at Kotegurh, but Iam told that —

+t is common in winter in eastern Bissahir, and Gould described it from

a specimen, which is said to have been procured at Agra. Its song is

remarkably like that of a true lark, for which it may very easily be F

mistaken from its voice only.

937. ALaupA LEvcopTeRA, Pallas, occurs in eastern Bissahir —

near the extreme frontier of the Chinese territory. I have no-

where observed Alauda triborhyncha, Hodgs., which ought to be

considerably larger than the next species.

938. Aravpa autauta, Frankl. AIL. 484), is common all over —

W. Tibet and during the summer also in eastern Bissahir, migrating

to the plains in winter. 4

1868. ] NV. W. Hi imalaya. 65

239. GaAneripa cristata, Linn. (II. 436), is often seen with the

last ; it is not rare in the Indus valley about Lei. Both this and the

former species often remain at Kotegurh during the winter,

XXV. Fam. TRERONIDE.

240. Spuenocercus SPHENURUS, Vig. (III. 453), is the only

Species which represents the family in the eastern portions of the

Sutlej valley. It is found about Serahan in small flocks, and some-

times proceeds even as far as Chini, being particularly fond of

mulberry fruits, groves of those trees not being rare in any of the

branch valleys ; elder and elm-trees equally are their places of retreat,

Jerdon says that the third primary is not insinuated in Sphenocercus,

although it is unmistakeably so in the present species.

XXVI. Fam. COLUMBIDZ,

241. Axsocomus Hovesonm, Vi g. (IIL. 463). The first and fourth

quills are very nearly equal, the latter being a trifle longer, but both

are shorter than the second and third, of which again the last one is

somewhat longer than the previous ; the second, third and fourth quills

are insinuated on the outer webs, the last one somewhat less than the

two others.

The plumage is rather variable in different specimens and at different

Seasons. ‘The male has in winter the head and throat more whitish,

the vinaceous colour above more brown, the posterior part of the

back, the wings and the tail greyish brown, and the white specks on

the abdomen and the breast are large. In summer the head and throat

are greyish, the vinaceous colour above purer and reddish, the white

Specks are at the same time less numerous; the abdomen, upper tail-

coverts and tail are dark brown.

The females have the head and body much paler than the males,

especially in winter, and the vinaceous colour is a good deal tinged with

dull brown.

This species is tolerably common near Chini and somewhat farther

: to east ; it feeds on berries and on different seeds on or near the ground.

During a whole fortnight I observed a small flock returning every

| €vening to the same tree (a Pavia indica), but the birds are very shy

and difficult to approach, as also stated by Jerdon. Many of them

| remain at Kotegurh even in winter, at which time they probably

partially live on seeds, partially on knops of trees, &e.

66 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley, [No. 1,

249. Parumsus castotrs,* Bonap. (III. 464), is very rare about

Simla and Kotegurh ; it has been procured at the last place only in

winter, and probably lives during the summer in the more eastern

provinces of the valley and in Central Asia.

%43. CoLumpa rnteRMEDIA, Str7ckl. (III. 469). Thisis of all

pigeons the most common species and occurs all through the Sutlej

valley, in Bissahir, Spiti and all through W. Tibet. In Tibet it

remains even during the winter, unless very large quantities of snow

force it to search after food in the lower and western parts of the

valley. It is generally found near camping grounds and villages,

oecasionally ascending elevations up to 17,000 feet, but this only in

cases, where it follows the grain-merchants towards the passes.

I have not observed in the Sutlej valley Col. rupestris, but have

seen it repeatedly on the Indus ; it is, however, by no means so

common as the former species.

944. Conumpa Levconota, Vig. (IIL. 471), only occurs near the

snows, on both sides of the principal range of the north-west

Himalayas, (the Baralatse-range) , it is often seen feeding with Col.

intermedia, Pyrhocorax alpinus and Fregilus (Himalayanus) some

distance from villages, being always very shy and not usually migrating

in winter, except within small limits of elevation. Wherever this

and the previous species are seen together, the proportion of Col.

leuconata to C. intermedia is about one to ten.

945. Turrur rupicota, Pall. (III. 476). This is in general

colouring extremely like the Huropean Tur. aurita, and I rather

doubt their being specifically distinct ; it is very common all through

the N. W. Himalayas, in summer preferring elevations between 6,000

and 9,000 feet. In W. Tibet, it is only found, where any shrubby

vegetation exists, and not usually above 12,000 feet.

946. Turtur mexna, Sy kes, (III. 477), is only found in summer

on the lesser ranges and does not go far in the interior; I have not

seen it beyond Kotegurh.

247, Turrur camBayEnsis, G mel. (III. 478). I shot a specimen

* See Ibis, 1867, p. 149. Blyth says the figure of Bo

a much darker coloured bird (Feb. 1868). i Lan Ot

# Ibis, 1867, p. 150. I do not remember of having seen any other dove in

Tibet, than the 7’. rwpicola (or awrita) and it is probable that Dr. Ad ams' T.

orientalis, L wt h., only refers to this species, (Feb. 1868). :

1868.] N. W. Himalaya. 67

on the 26th August 1866, near Kotegurh, and I was informed that

this species breeds here, though it is very rare.

248. Turror surarensts, G me 1. (IIL.479), was met with in June,

breeding near Gaora (beyond Rampoor) at an elevation of 7,000 feet ;

I have not observed it, however, beyond Wangtu bridge and it

certainly does not go eastwards beyond the limit of the arboreal

vegetation.

249. Torrur risorta, Linn., (III. 481), is only found in the

low hills, although occasionally ascending elevations ‘of 6,000 feet, as

for instance near Kotegurh, being, however, rather rare.

250. Tourrur uumiuss, Zemm. (IIL. 482), was shot near

Belaspoor on an elevation of about 2,000 feet, but I have never

observed it in the interior of the hills.

I also have not been successful in observing personally any species of

the Sand-grouse, though Pterocles fasciatus is said to occur in the

low hills along the Sutlej. I only obtained a few birds which were

stated to have been shot in the Dhoon, south of Kangra.

XXVII. Fam. PHASIANIDZ.

251. Pavo crisratus, Linn. (IIL. 506), is commonly seen on eleva-

tions of 1,000 and 2,000 feet, occasionally ascending up to 5,000 feet,

but only in the Sub-Himalayan hills about Belaspoor.

252. Lopnopnorus Imenyanus, Lath., (III. 510). The Monal is

now rather scarce during the summer under elevations of 8,000 feet, ge-

nerally it is only to be found near the snows, or near the limit of the

arboreal vegetation ; it occurs at those higher elevations throughout the

valley extending from Simla as far east as Sungnum, where the last

cedar forests are found, but it does not enter Tibet proper. In winter

it descends lower in the valley down to 7,000, and in southern Kulu

probably to 3,000 feet, for it is said to be common near the villages

about Bijaura and Plash.

253. CERIORNIS MELANOCEPHALA, Gra y, (III. 517). The numbers

of this beautiful pheasant are fast declining, and although it is said

to have been formerly common near Simla at elevations of 5,000 and

6,000 feet, it is now only found in the less visited and well wooded

districts above 8,000 feet, and even here it is comparatively rare.

Most of the birds sold in Simla are procured in winter, either on the

Chur-mountain or in Kulu, where it is still tolerably common. Further

68 Ornithological Observations in the Sutle; valley, [No. 1,

to east its geographical range is about the same as that of the Monal.

954. Puorasta Macrouopna, Less. (III. 524), isnot very common

about Simla and Kotegurh, but oftener seen a little more eastwards,

generally occurring on elevations between 5,000 and 10,000 feet. I

could not receive any information, whether the species is found in the

neighbourhood of Chini. It certainly does not occur in W. Tibet or even

beyond the large forest.

055. Puasranus Watiicun, Hard vw. (III. 527), is by no means

a common bird and generally only met with at the same elevations or

even lower down than the last species; it does not usually go beyond

the Nachar forests towards east and is said to be very rare near Chini.

956. Gattopuasis auBocristatus, Vig. (IIL 532) ; common at

elevations between 5,000 and 6,000 feet and often descending to 3,000

and 2,000 feet ; it occurs at Chini (9,000 to 10,000 feet), though I have

not been able to procure a specimen, and old skins which I saw had

the black part of the plumage rather deep brown.

257. Turraceattus Hmarayensis, Gra y (IIL 549), occurs all

along the southern side of the Baralatse range; it is rare at the

head of the Wangur valley and above Chini, but more common east-

wards, above Sungum and towards the Manirang pass, as also in North

Kulu. In Spiti and Tibet it is usually met with during the summer at

elevations of 14,000 to 15,000 feet, and is here much more frequently

seen, than on the Indian side of that range.

058. Twrraogatnus tiperanus, Gould (III. 554), is readily

distinguished from the former by its smaller size and longer tail; it

occurs at the head of the Spiti valley and its smaller tributaries. The

species must therefore be added to the Indian fauna proper.

259. Lurwantvicota, Hod qs. (IIL. 555), is not uncommon along

the Baralatse range of the N. W. Himalayas; it occurs in Spiti, but

I have not observed it farther north, in Rupshu. It is numerous in

the north-western parts of _Kulu during the winter, when it descends

from the snowy range somewhat lower down, though it very rarely

migrates as far south as Kotegurh.

960. Francotinus vunearts, Steph. (III. 558), is common from

the plains all along the lower ranges, ascending elevations up to

about 9,000 feet; it is not rare about Serahan, but I have not

observed it beyond the Wangtu bridge.

1868.] N. W. imalaya. 69

261. Caccasis cnuxor, Gr a y, (LIL 564) ; common all over the

N. W. Himalayas and W. Tibet, where it ascends elevations up to

14,000 feet, but in Tibet it generally prefers cultivated districts to the

elevated and bare plateaus.

The Tibetan specimens are usually much paler in colouring, than

those generally seen an the Indian side, and thus very closely resemble

the European type Cac, greca, of which in reality it can hardly be

called more than a local variety. |

262. Arportcona TorqunoLa, Val. (III. 577), is very solitary in

its habits and during the summer generally met with only near the

limit of trees or near the snows ; it comes down to Kotegurh, Simla

and other places merely in Winter; as soon as the snow begins to

melt on the higher ranges, it immediately retires to the interior.

263. Corurntx communts, Bo nat. (IIT. 586) ; not rare on culti-

vated grounds all along the lesser ranges, it ascends elevations up to

about 5,000 feet, but very rarely extends into the interior of the hills.

I observed it below Kotegurh, and it is occasionally also obtained in the

Kulu valley between 4,000 to 5,000 feet.

One or two other species of quails occur in the low hills and in the

Dhoons, but they do not enter the interior to any considerable distance,

264—270. GRALLATORES and NATATORES.

Of these two orders scarcely any species permanently inhabit the

Sutlej valley, their absence being due to the scarcity of marshy grounds,

with the exception of a few small places in the lower hills, where rice is

cultivated. I may mention a few of the more common species, though

there cannot be a doubt that a large number of others which migrate

from the plains to Kashmir, Tibet or to northern Asia make at various

times a short stay in different portions of the valley. The following

Species have been observed by myself, either in the Spring or in the

autumn; Aegialitis pyrrhothorax, Numenius arquata, Linosa ego-

ecephala, Chettusia gregaria, Totanus calidris, Actitis glareola, and

| A. hypoleucos, Fulica atra, Gallinula chloropus (an G. Burnesi !),*

Hydrophasianus chirwrgus, Podiceps crostatus, Sterna hirundo, Sterna

javanica, (all common in Kashmir and Tibet), Xemma brun-

| nicephala (common on the Thsomoriri in Rupshu), Querquedula

glocitans and Q. crecca, Mareca Penelope, Anas leucopthalma (common -

}in Kashmir),

* Not likely a different species.

70 Ornithological Observations in the Sutlej valley. [No. E

oa Ble Vaneitus ortstatus, Meyer (III. 643), has been observed

in the neighbourhood of Suket, it breeds at the beginning of May ; it

ig also not uncommon in the Indus valley about Lei, in W. Tibet.

972. oBIvANELLUS GOENSIS, Gmel. (IIL. 648), is common on

marshy rice fields all through the lower hills, especially about Belas-

poor, extending in the Sutlej valley as far east as Rampoor, or up to

elevations of about 4,000 feet. It does not go into Tibet.

273. ScoLOPsAX RUSTICOLA, Linn. (111.670), is rather common in the

sorests of the lesser ranges between 4,000 and 10,000 feet ; it breeds

about and beyond Chini, and is occasionally seen also in W. Tibet,

stig common in winter in Kulu and along rivers in other valleys

of the southern Himalayas.

974, GALLINAGO SOLITARIA, Ho dgs. (Xl. 678), and

975. GALLINAGo SCOLOPACINUS, Bon ap. (III. 674), have both been |

procured in the southern part of Kulu and near Kotegurh during the

winter, though I never met the species here in summer.

076. Ruynowma BENGALENSIS, L inn. (III. 677,) is rarely seen in

the hills; I procured a specimen on a marsh above Belaspoor (in Octo-

ber) and another one on the Wollar lake in Kashmir (Gin September).

077, Acrrris ocnropus, L117. (III. 698). Solitary specimens are

always met with along the Sutlej river; the species is very common |

all through W. Tibet.

978. Toranus sTAGNaLis, Bec hst. (III. 701), is still more com- —

mon than the last species, and at certain times of the year to be met

with wherever there is a pool of water along the banks of rivers. |

979, Awser inpicus, G mel. (III. 782), and

980, Casarca rutiLLA, Pal i(k Tos solitary specimens of -

both these species are occasionally seen in the neighbourhood of Chini

on the Sutlej river; they breed in very large numbers on the lakes of |

W. Tibet and Central Asia.

Many specimens of Casarca, Anas and Anser remain even in winter

in Tibet, on places where the water of the lakes does not freeze On ~

2) Siete hall

account of subterranean hot springs.

pe es

1868.] On the intimate Structure of Muscular Fibre. 71

On the intimate Structure of Muscular Fibre.

By Dr. C. Macnamara.

[Received 29th March, 1867. ]

I have this evening the honor to lay before the Society the results

of some investigations I have recently been making regarding the

minute anatomy of muscle.

The muscular system, as is known, has commonly been divided

into two classes, the striped or voluntary and the unstriped or

involuntary muscle, but I can hardly consent to this division of the

subject, because it appears to me that there is really no such thing in

nature as a striped muscle, the mascular tissue as it js called, whether

voluntary or involuntary, being composed of an homogeneous substance,

the characteristic features of which are, that it contracts in obedience

to the nervous force, its elements under every conceivable circumstance

being arranged in such a manner as best to fulfil the mechanical

purposes for which it is intended. Whether we examine it in the lens,

in the walls of the blood vessels, intestines, or the heart we find in

each instance such modifications in the dispositions of the contractile

tissue as are best suited to the work it has to perform.

Tt is, however, to the circumstances of voluntary muscle that I am

now desirous of drawing your attention. This system forms the bulk

of the limbs, and is the medium through which the movements of the

skeleton and of the organs of sense are effected.

Hvery muscle, whatever its dimensions, is composed of the external

case of fibrous tissue from the inner surface of which numerous

| Mnterlacing fibrous bands are given off, and in this fibrous matrix,

| the larger branches of the vessels and nerves ramify. These structures,

| however, are to be found in every part of the body, and are by no

means characteristic of muscle, the fibrous tissue allowing of motion

among parts of the body which it also binds together ; the vascular

being the channels through which nutrint fluid is supplied and effete

substances are removed from the organism, and the nerves in the case

of the voluntary muscle are the medium through which the mandates

_of the will are conveyed to the contractile tissue. It is therefore, to the

| substance contained within the sheath and filling the spaces between

12 On the intimate Structure of Muscular Fibre. [No. 1,

the fibrous matrix of muscle that I would direct your special attention.

The prevalent ideas which histologists hold on this subject appear to

be mainly derived from the investigations of Bowman and are well

defined in the following remark of Busk and Huxley, in their

translation of Kélliker’s Histology. They observe ‘fin a homogeneous

transparent matrix definite particles are imbedded, the sarcous ele-

ments, which are arranged, side by side, in transverse rows. Tn some

cases, the sarcous elements are all of one size, in others they are

alternately larger and smaller. The reason of this does not at present

appear, but it 1s possibly connected with the nutrition of the muscle.

The matrix usually tends to break up in longitudinal bands,—the

Gbrils—which have the diameter either of a single sarcous element or

of some multiple thereof. It likewise tends to break up in the transverse

direction giving way between the pairs of rows of sarcous elements ;

but these cleaving lines are no ‘ndications of the existence of discs or

fibrils as such in the unaltered muscle.” The more one endeavours to

comprehend the meaning of this passage the more perplexed one

becomes, and in fact I have long since arrived at the conclusion that

the authors themselves did not comprehend the nature of the appear- —

ances which they attempted to describe; at any rate when they come

to apply their anatomical description to the facts observed in the

contraction of a muscle, they are absolutely in fault, and plainly gtate

they are ignorant of the process which takes place in the fibrils during

contraction. biti

Tt was the consideration of these difficulties which led me to

investigate the subject for myself, with a fiftieth of an inch lens. The

magnifying power of this glass can be best comprehended when I state

that a particle having a definite outline the ~>,'sa0 of an inch in size

could be distinctly defined, and that an object three feet long would —

appear as high as Mount Blanc if it were possible to examine it under

this lens.

T have already noticed the relation of the fibrous sheaths and matrix |

to the contractile tissue ; if we carefully examine the latter, we shall

find it to consist of bundles of contractile fibres, each fibre being

composed of two longitudinal bands running continuously from one —

end of the muscle to the other end, and connected throughout their

length by spiral transverse bands, the whole being encased in a sheath

1868.] On the intimate Structure of Muscular Fibre. 73

of homogeneous tissue. I believe therefore that a voluntary muscle

consists of a matrix of fibrous tissue the interstices of which are filled

up with contractile fibres such as I have just described, the larger

vessels and nerves ramifying in the fibrous matrix, but giving off

numerous branches which spread themselves over the case of homo-

geneous tissue which encloses each individual contracting fibre, so that

the capillaries and ultimate branches of the nerves are brought into

immediate contact with the contractile tissue.

Ti this be the solution of the vexed question.as to the minute anatomy

of muscle, it certainly appears like many other things to be remarkably

simple, when once we understand them, and to be another instan ce of

the wonderful adaptation of means to an end, which is displayed in every

part of the body. Evidently bands of simply elastic tissue could not per-

form the functions required of a muscle, the increase in breadth of the

muscles of a limb in contracting would, under these circumstances,

exercise an injurious amount of pressure on the nerves and vessels of

surrounding parts, and as the elastic bands became elongated, spaces

would necessarily be left between them, which had previously been occu-

pied by the bulk of the contracting muscle. All such anomalies are

obviated by the beautiful arrangement I have now demonstrated, for in

contraction the longitudinal bands must shorten on themselves drawing

the transverse bands into close approximation, and these at the same

time uncoil, each fibre therefore would increase in breadth exactly to

the same amount which it lost in length. That such is the case with

tegard to the muscles of a limb as a whole, has been proved by repeated

Measurements. Mr. Bowman remarks “a muscle in the act of contract-

ing becomes shorter and thicker, the changes being accurately

_ proportioned to one another, the whole organ neither gaining nor

| losing in bulk.” But the means by which these changes are effected

have never been explained satisfactorily before, so far as I am aware.

‘One can hardly be certain as to the active part taken by the transverse

bands during muscular contraction. It is evident as the longitudi-

nal bands are attached to fixed points at either extremity, that the

tension or relaxation of the transverse bands would be sufficient of

themselves by acting on the longitudinal bands to cause contraction

or relaxation of the muscle; and I am disposed to favour this idea,

because we can thus easily conceive the means by which the remarkably

TA On the tntimate Structure of Muscular Fibre. [No. 1,

rapid actions which muscle is capable of effecting are accomplished,

it being kept in a state of perpetual tension depending on the action

of its spiral transverse bands. The most casual observer moreover

will at once perceive that through the mechanism I have endeavoured :

to describe, no puckering or pinching of any of these delicate structures

can possibly occur, the parts being all admirably poised and adapted —

to one another.

Time will not permit me to extend this principle to the case of the

crystalline lens, but I am convinced that the lens is simply a mass of

contractile bands arranged in such a manner that in contracting and

dilating, the curve of its surfaces are capable of alteration, and its

refractive powers thus modified, so as to enable it to bring both parallel

and divergent rays of light to a focus on the retina. I cannot, however,

close this paper without alluding to the fact that the minute anatomy

of muscle I have delineated, evidently displays a source from whence

animal heat may be derived. I need hardly say that much of Liebig’s

theory of the combustion of the hydrocarbons as being the chief if not

only source of animal heat is fast falling to the ground under the

assaults of modern chemistry. But in the action of a muscle, we have

evidence of the existence of forces as capable of engendering heat as

combustion, viz friction, compression, tension, and expansion,—they all

necessarily giving rise to molecular motion and an equivalent amount

of heat,—quite capable of keeping up the temperature of the blood to a

healthy standard, and this, by constantly circulating throughout the

body, would tend to equalize the temperature in all parts of the system,

Many distinguished physiologists have supposed that the nervous force

is analogous, if not identical, with electricity, and have pointed with

triumph to the evidence of the excitation of electricity during muscular

contraction ; it appears to me, however, that we may easily explain the

presence of electricity by the play of the forces above enumerated

during muscular contraction: they must, in fact, induce electrical

phenomena, and that independently of the nervous system which is —

simply the medium through which the mind acts. If therefore the ;

consideration of the minute anatomy of muscle is attended with no 2

other practical result, it serves to explain much that was before a

mystery in the animal economy. Tt has not advanced our knowledge —

as to the influence which volition has over muscle, nor do I think —

1868. ] On the intimate Structure of Muscular Fibre. 75

we can expect this. We have not the remotest conception of the

nature of the active principle which maintains gravity or any other

force in operation, though we may with advantage study the laws which

govern these forces. All beyond this must at present be theory and

speculation. And so with the voluntary muscles ; we have advanced a

step in knowledge if we have gained a notion of their mechanical con-

struction, but I have no more expectation of determining the nature of

the subtle agency which sets the system at work through the nerves

than I have of seeing the changes which occur in the molecules of an

iron wire during the transit of an electric current through it.

Paty : | dak Te eat: 4s

ae . ae \ é

Sib to Cea” Pere )

ey i ~ ke pitdee ah ees ng

Wray east SF Waite A cers (kd 1) | r

iid WRENS on 0

fans calls tad a, aici ees

Piety, Wee Se aa ts

heehee.

: war ft

, ¥

Se i

“$i

‘

’

‘

obi = ee

an - ny

ae : 3

”

a ¥ ua" -

Pia r: J +}

7 4

ij ~ -_

} ‘ - i

. ~<a od

a 4 ‘ ‘be ~~” -

- Se 7 jp ”

} ‘ ae ‘ * , “Ss

iis ae

ont Sa

2 Si Ret

| “=

= ky \\- Obata aes

Pen 3 So @

a way 5

‘ : ates,

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

—@—-

Parr IL—PHYSICAL SCIENOE.

No. IL —1868,

ON NONE NANA NENA NPP PPP PAL AP ALL NL PAL LOD PLL AD

Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. IX,.— Descriptions of new

Dietommatina from Darsiuine and the Kuast Hinis.—By Wiiiram

T. Buayrorv, & G.S., C. UZ. 8. Se. ; to accompany Captain

Godwin-Austen’s figures ; see p. 83.

[Received 12th January, 1868.]

Amongst a very large and interesting collection of land shells made

by Captain Godwin Austen in the Khasi and Garo Hills are several

undescribed forms, and of these no less than 6 belong to the genus

Diplommatina, two forms of which, from the same neighbourhood,

were described by Mr. Benson some years ago, from the collections

made by Mr. Theobald in 1856. I hope to describe some of the

_ other novelties shortly, but as Captain Godwin-Austen has figured

_ the species of Diplommatina, not only of the Khasi Hills but also of

_ the Himalayas, both Eastern and Western, and of Burma, from

typical specimens in his own and my collections, I describe the new

Species thus figured at once,

Most unfortunately, one of the most remarkable of Captain Godwin-

Austen’s discoveries, the very interesting sinistrorse species figured in

Pl. Til. fig. 3. has been lost, the only specimen obtained having been

_ @ushed during transmission by post. I therefore refrain from giving

the species a name, for, although there can be no reasonable question

78 Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. LX. [No. 2,

ofits distinctness, and although, from the excellence of the drawings

made of it, it is improbable that there would be any difficulty in

recognising it again, still the practice of describing shells from draw-

ings 1s SO objectionable, and has led to so much confusion, that I do

not think it should be permitted, except where the draughtsman

himself is the describer.*

This unnamed form and the remaining sinistrorse kind which I

have called D. gibbosa, are the first reversed species yet found in the

Eastern portion of the British possessions in India. From the West-

ern Himalayas, D. Hutton has been known for many years, and it is

curious and interesting to find that both dextrorse and sinistrorse

Diplommatine occur ‘nthe Khasi Hills, as well as at the North-

Western extremity of the known range of the genus. Captain God-

win-Austen’s extensive researches have raised the number of forms

from the Khasi Hills to 8, viz., 6 dextrorse and 2 sinistrorse, or one

more than all the species hitherto collected in both the Hastern and

Western Himalayas, even when the new form from Darjiling is in-

cluded. |

This new form, now first described, was found by myself in 1856,

but the few individuals procured, remained unnoticed amongst my

numerous specimens of D. pachycheilus, Bens., until lately. I now

give a description of it, in order to complete, so far as possible, the

list of Indian and Burmese Diplommatine.

1. DreLoMMATINA SEMISCULPTA, 0. Sp. PLE fewis

Testa dextrorsa non rimata, ovato-conica, solidiuscula, albida vel.

suecinea. Spira conica, subattenuata, apice acutiusculo, sutura

superne mediocriter impressa, subtus profunda. Anfr. 7 convexl,

% One instance of the confusion to which this practice is likely to lead

may suffice ; it is one to which I have before adverted. The first species of |

Pterocyclos ever described from Ceylon was Pt. Troschelit, Benson, the descrip-

tion of which was taken from a drawing. Amongst the numerous specimens —

of the genus hitherto brought from that island, this species has never again |

been recognised, though there can be but little doubt that the specimen from —

which the original drawing was taken, belonged to one of the species since

instituted. Yet the drawing was carefully made, and the describer a natura-

list as careful and conscientious as Mr. Benson. What errors may be com- —

mitted by less careful naturalists may be understood by studying the history —

of Artamus cucullatus in Jerdon’s Birds of India, Vol. II. pp. 56, 872.

Of course there are parts and important parts of animals, such as the soft

portions of minute mollugca, which are either unpreservable, or so difficult, —

of examination when preserved, that drawings must often be had recourse to,

and in such cases every thing depends upon the accuracy of the draughtsman. —

1868.] Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. IX. 79

primi costulati, postremi levigati, antepenultimus major, ventricosus,

penultimus juxta aperturam leviter constrictus, ultimus antice ascen-

dens, subtus rotundatus. Apertura verticalis late auricularis, peris-

toma incrassato-expansum, subduplex vel duplex, margine dextro

subrecto, columellari sinuato, angulo saliente subtus desinente basali

juxta angulum fere concavo, dente columellari valida, callo parietali

mediocriter expanso, tenui, appresso.

Long. 4, diam. 2 mill. ; Ap. cum peristomate 1} mill. longa, intus

J lata.

This shell is easily distinguished from its congener D. pachycheilus,

Bens., by the greater tenuity of the antepenultimate whorl,* the

absence of sculpture on the lower whorls and the more prominent

angle at the left lower corner of the peristome. This last character

in D. semisculpta is rather stronger than appears in the figure. The

present species is much more closely allied to D. diplocheilus, Bens.,

which it resembles greatly in sculpture and form. The principal dis-

tinction is in the peristome which is much less developed in D. semi-

sculpta, the parietal callus being quite thin and appressed instead of

standing out from the last whorl as in that species. The mouth also

is larger in proportion, the angle at the base of the columellar margin

more salient, and the spire more acuminate. It would not, however,

be surprising if intermediate varieties should be found to connect these

two forms.

2. JD. scauaria, n. sp. Pl. II. fig. 2.

Testa dextrorsa, non rimata, ovato-acuminata, su bfusiformis, costulis

validis verticalibus distantibus ornata, pallide succinea. Spira conica,

sub-turrita, apice subacuto, sutura valde impressa. Anfr. 7 rotundati,

duo primi levigati, tertius confertim-, ceteri distanter-costulati,

antepenultimus major, tumidus, ultimus versus aperturam ascendens,

basi rotundatus. Apertura subverticalis, leviter sursum spectans,

late auricularis, plica columellari mediocri intus munita : perist.

duplex, internum continuum, expansum, externum expansum, fere

retro-relictum, margine dextro juxta anfractum penultimum sinuato,

tunc angulatim antice porrecto, subtus und cum basali recto, columel-

lari verticali, subtus angulo obtuso desinenti, callo parietali expanso,

Superne suturam fere attingente.

_ * In Pfeiffer the length of D, pachycheilus is given as 4 mill., diam, 2},

The length should be 5 mill,

80 Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. LX. [No. 2,

Long. 34., diam. 2 mill. Apertura ¢. peristomate vix 14° mill.

Jonga, diam. intus circa 3.

Hab. rarissime ad Habiang in montibus Garo dictis, ad latus oc-

cidentale montium Khasi. (H. Godwin-Austen.)

In shape this form approaches the Darjiling D. Blanfordiana,

Bens., but may easily be distinguished by the distant and prominent

sculpture. But two specimens were found,

3 DD. xrasrosa, n. sp. Pl. IL, fig. 3.

Testa dextrorsa, non rimata, ovato-acuminata, pallide succinea, soli-

dula. Spira attenuato-conica, subturrita, apice acutiusculo, sutura

impressa. Anfr. 71-8 convexi, primi confertim costulati, 8 ultimi

levigati, nitiduli, antepenultimus major, ultimus versus aperturam

interdum subdistanter costulatus, antice ascendens. Apertura verticalis,

late auricularis, subcircularis, plica columellari validé munita ; peri-

stoma rectum, incrassatum, subtriplex, externum valde expansum,

internum expansum, sulcatun, subduplex, margine columellari brevi,

subsinuato, subtus angulo vix saliente desinente; callo parietali,

tenui, mediocriter expanso.

Long. 32., diam. vix 2 mill, Ap. ¢. peristomate 1} mill. longa,

diam. intus circa #.

Hab. Mayong et Habiang in montibus Khasi et Garo dictis.

(H. Godwin- Austen.)

This shell is, in some respects, intermediate between .D. pachy-

cheilus, Bens., and D. diplocheilus, Bens. It has the general form of

the first, but resembles the last in its smooth lower whorls. The

peristome is largely developed and peculiar, the inner portion being

flatly expanded and almost divided into two portions by a groove,

so that the whole lip is almost triple.

4. D. ersposa, n. sp. Pl. II. fig. 4,

Mesta sinistrorsa, VIX subrimata, gibboso-ovata, tumida, succinea, &

levigata, parum nitida, tenuiuscula. Spira supra conoidea, sutura —

valde impressa, apice obtusiusculo. Anfr 5. antepenultimus major, cK .

ventricosus, ultimus subtus rotundatus, alte ascendens. Aper- 3

tura obliqua subelliptica, plica columellari valid& obliqué munita, t

infra plicam excavata ; peristoma leviter sinuatum, expansum, duplex,

externum retro relictum, internum continuum, patens, callo pari etalia”

lato, suturam fere attingente. Long. 3, diam. 1imill, Ap. c. perist. *

“a

‘

14 mill. longa, intus vix 1 lata.

1868.] Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. LX. 81

Hab. Habiang in montibus Garo (H. Godwin-Austen),

This very interesting species differs widely in form from the only

previously described sinistrorse Diplommatina inhabiting India,

D. Huttoni, Pir., more widely than it does from some of the reversed

forms met with in the Oceanic region. It shews a considerable

resemblance in form to D, Martensi, H. Ad., of unknown locality,

figured in the Proc. Zool. Soc. for 1866, but which is said by its

describer to belong to the section Diancta* of Martens, charac-

terised by a constriction at the back of the penultimate whorl. In

D. gibbosa as in most Indian Diplommatine, there is a slight tendency

to constriction in front of the penultimate whorl, to which an internal

rib appears to correspond, but which is covered and concealed to a

great extent, by the parietal callus of the peristome.

5. D. Austent, n. sp. Pl. III. fig. 2.

Testa dextrorsa non rimata, conico-ovata albida vel succinea. Spira

Superne conica, non attenuata, sutura impressa, apice obtusiusculo.

Anfr, 6, primi 3 gradatim crescentes, confertim minute costulati,

ultimi levigati vel costulis subobsoletis signati, antepenultiraus major,

ultimus aliquando lineis subdistantibus versus aperturam signatus,

antice ascendens, subtus rotundatus. Apertura verticalis oblique

subovalis ; perist. incrassatum, mediocriter expansum, duplex, margine

columellari verticali, angulo aperto subtus desinente, basali rotundato,

plicé columellari mediocri, callo parietali expanso.

Long, 23, diam. 1%, mill. Apertura c. perist. 1 mill. longa, intus

2 lata.

Hab. Cherra Poonji et Maotherichan in montibus Khasi (W.

Theobald et H. Godwin-Austen).

I, some years ago, received a specimen of this species from Mr,

Theobald as D. polypleuris, Bens. On comparing the series of

Diplommatine collected by Captain Godwin-Austen with Mr. Benson’s

description, it is evident that the type of that species belonged to a

different form, found abundantly by Captain Godwin-Austen with

the present species on the Maotherichan ridge, part of the Northern

scarp of the Khasi hills, and distinguished from the present form by

_* From the description however of D. constricta, Martens, the type of

Diancta, that species would appear to possess peculiarities not shared by

Mr, Adams’ species,

82 Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. LX. [No. 2,

its much stronger sculpture, less conical spire, deeper suture and

rounder mouth. Itisalsoasmaller form. Mr. Theobald’s type specimens

of D. polyplewris were from N anclai, also on the northern portion of the

Khasi plateau. D. Austent varies considerably in the sculpture of

the lower whorls, which are in most specimens, quite smooth. One

individual sent is considerably more tumid than the type, but

presents no other difference of importance. ~

6. D. oxtgopieuris, n. sp. Pl. IIL fig. 4.

Testa dextrorsa, non rimata, conico-ovata, costis distantibus

obliquis ornata, fulvescenti-albida. Spira conica, apice obtuso, sutura

impressa. Anfr. 6, rotundati, antepenultimus major, tumidiusculus,

ultimus antice ascendens, subtus rotundatus. Apertura verticalis, late

auricularis, plicé columellari valida munita; perist. rectum, duplex,

internum antice porrectum, expansulum, externum late expansum,

margine columellari verticali, callo parietali mediocri. Long. 2, diam.

vix 1} mill. Ap. c. perist. ¢ mill. longa.

Hab. Teria Ghat ad latus meridionale montium Khasi. (H. Godwin-

Austen).

This is evidently a peculiar type. In some specimens the

sculpture on the lower whorls appears to be more or less obsolete,

The form is not unlike that of polyplewris and Austent but it is easily

recognised by its strong distinct costulation. In this character it

resembles D. scalaria.

The smooth or spirally lirate Diplommatine of Southern India I

have proposed to distinguish as a subgenus under the name Nicida.

This will include,

Diplommatina (Nicida) Nilgirica, W. and H. Blanf. Nilghiris.

(Type.)

D. (Nicida) Kingiana, W. and H. Blanf., Kolamullay; and the

following additional species.

D. (Nicida) Pulneyana, n. sp. a less tumid form than D. Kingiana

with more convex whorls, deeper sutures, oblique aperture and a

non-ascending last whorl. It has no basal keel. Common on the

Pulney hills where Mr. Fairbank obtained it.

D, (Nicida) nitidula, n. sp., a tumid species, more so than any other

met with, and with flattened whorls. Found in the Wynaad by

Capt. Beddome.

1868.] Figures of Indian Diplommatine. 83

D. (Nicida,) Fairbanki, the largest form yet found in Southern India

37 millimetres in length. It has 74 whorls and resembles a lengthen-

ed specimen of D. Wilgirica. The last whorl rises to an unusual

extent and there isa basal keel. From the Pulney hills (Rev. 8S.

Fairbank),

D. (Nicida) liricincta, a conoidly ovate shell with marked spiral

ribbing, being the only species so far as I am aware yet found be-

longing to the Diplommatinide which possesses spiral sculpture,

Found abundantly at Khandalla with Cyathopoma Deccanense.

The new species are described in a paper recently sent to the

Journal de Conchyliologie.

Nee Oe

Figures of the species of Dietommattna, Benson, hitherto described

as tmhabiting the Himanayas, Knast Huts and Burma, with

some additional forms from Darjiling and the Khasi Hills.—

By Captain H. H. Gopwiy-Austen, F. G. 8. &e.

Pl. I. Himalayan species,

Fig. 1, Diplommatina folliculus, Pfr. typical form, Masti.

npit 2a" Do. Do, var.—Kalunga, Deyra Doon.

3, D. Huttoni, Pir—Masiri.

4, D. costulata, Hutton,—ditto.

» 9, D. pachycheilus, Bens.—Darjiling.

6, D. semisculpta, W. Blanford, n. sp.—ditto.

7, D. pullula, Bens.—ditto.

,, 8, 8a, D. Blanfordiana, Bens.—ditto.

Pl. Khasi Hill species.

Fig. 1, la, D. diplocheilus, Bens.—Teria Ghat,

» 2, 2a, D. scalaria, W. Blanford, n. sp.—Habiang.

» 3, 3a, D. labiosa, W. Blanford, n. sp.—Northern por-

tion of plateau.

1 4, 4a, 4b, D. gibbosa, W. Blanf. n. sp. Habiang.

Pl. III. Khasi Hill species, continued.

Fig. 1, D. polypleuris, Bens.—Northern portion of isda,

» 2, 2a, D. Austeni, W. Blanf. n. sp. Cherra Poonjee, &c.

84 Notes on Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

Fig. 3, 8a, 36, D. nN. sp.—Nongsingriang.

4, 4a, 4b, D. oligopleuris, W. Blanf. n. sp.—Teria Ghat.

5, 5a, animal of D. folliculus, Pir. Deyra Doon variety.

“PLIV. Burmese species.

Fig. 1, la, D. sperata, W. Blanford, Arakan Hills, west of

Prome.

2, 2a, D. Puppensis, W. Blanford, Puppa Hill, Upper

Burma.

3, 8a, D. exilis, W. Blanford, Mya Leit Doung, near

Ava.

» 4, 4a, D. nana, W. Blanford, Akoutoung, Pegu.

(For descriptions of new species, see last paper.)

Notes on the Pancone LaKe district of Lapaxu, from journal made in

1863.—By Oaptain H. H. Gopwin-Austen, F. R. G. S., Lopogra-

phical Surveyor.

[Received 16th June, 1866. ]

To the north of the Indus, from its junction with the Dras river,

lies a high range of mountains which separate the Indus drainage from

that of the Shayok or Nibra river. The axis and great mass of this

range is granitic; on the west this extends to within a very short

distance of the river, while at Pituk below Leh, the granite hill on

which that large and well-known monastery stands abuts on the

Indus itself, and thence towards the east for a considerable distance

it holds the same position. The great mass of goarse sandstones,

red clays, grits, and conglomerates seen on the right bank of the

Indus, west of Pitikk, are now seen on the left or south bank, thence

to the east in the direction of Stock and Himis. On the above

granite range are several passes leading into the Shayok valley, all

of great elevation, and on the direct road from Leh to the Pangong

lake are two, viz. the “Chang La,” andthe “ Kay La,” both

high, being respectively 17,470 and 18,250 feet above the level of

the sea.

The ascent to the first is gradual from the village of Tagar in

the Chimray valley, which there divides into two large ravines,

HIMALAYAN SPECIES.

Fig. 1 Diplommatina folliculus Pir, % “dD 18%

-- a) do. do. do. var. my 6 Ds

Bs 3 D. Huttoni, Pfr. e rf DF

we. D. costulata. Hutton. a 8 D,

Photozinco. Surv. Genl’s Office, Calcutta,

pachycheilus. Benson.

sermisculpta. n. sp.

pullula. Bens.

Blanfordiana. Bens.

imal As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXVIL.Pt. II.

| KHASI HILL SPECIES,

Pie. 1, La, D. diplocheilus. Bens,

apy en Be. D. scalana. n. sp.

i as Oa, D. labiosa. n. sp.

» 4 4a. 4b. D. gibbosa. n. sp.

Photozinco. Surv. Geni’s Office, Calcutta,

Journal As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXVIL.Pt. Ir. PL Ill.

= ae 5 =

‘5

KHASI HILL SPECIES,

| Fig. 1 D. polypleuris. Beng, » 4. 4a. 4b. 4c. D. oligopleuris.-n. Sp.

om 2, 9a. Das Pg. 625 .-ba, D. folliculus. Pfr. (animal)

% 9. 3a. 3b, D. 2. sp.

Photozinco. Surv. Genl’s Office, Calcutta;,

Journal As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XXXVIL.Pt. II.

BURMESE SPECIES.

PLAY.

Fig. 1. la. D. sperata. W. Blanf. 3. 3a. D. exlis W. Blanf,

» 2 2a, D. Puppensis. W. Blanf.

Photozinco. Surv. Geni's Office, Caicutta,

» * 4a D. nana W. Blanf,

1868.] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 85

the western branch leading to the Wuri La, while the eastern runs

up to the two passes above-mentioned. On the 15th J uly, when our

party crossed the Chang La, the snow that had fallen in the early

part of the month still lay covering about three miles of the road,

and being fresh, it was glaringly white in the sun and much affected

the eyes of our servants and the coolies, while all suffered more or

less from the-effects of the rarified air; curious to say, on the return

journey wid the Kay La, 800 feet higher, scarcely a man suffered from

this cause ; we had then been living for some time at a high altitude,

which very probably had not a little to say to our immunity from the

fatigue and headache engendered at high elevations. The mountains

on the northern side are perfectly bare, a little grass growing only

along the bottom of the valley which had a steady easy slope the

whole way to Durgo; a small tarn lies near the encamping ground

below the pass, and another somewhat larger is passed about a mile

further down the valley, and the Scenery is not remarkable save for

its huge scale and bleakness. Before reaching the village of Durgo,

one emerges out of the narrow valley upon the level surface of one

of those large accumulations of alluvial sands and shingles that are

seen along the large valleys of these mountains ; the powerful force

that accumulated the materials that form them is now extinct, and

the circumstances attending their formation, and more wonderful

subsequent denudation, are as yet but little understood. At this

spot the vast scouring process was well exemplified, the level of the

plateau on which I stood could be traced across the valley in and out

of its numerous ravines in a perfectly horizontal line of a different

colour, where very small portions of the alluvium still adhered to the

slopes and precipices; and I do not think I am exaggerating when

I state that its thickness at the junction of the streams below Dirgo

was over 1,500 to 2,000 feet. Traversing the level surface of this

plateau for about a mile its edge is reached, and Dirgo with

| the valley up to Tanksé is then clearly seen, a narrow green belt near

| the river with barren easy slopes thence to the foot of the hills,

| The whole valley is very open,—low cliffs of alluvial sands and clays

| can be traced the whole distance on both sides,—and it is self-evident

| that at no very distant period this presented a long reach of water. An

| alter sojourn on the Pangong fully confirmed this; it was in fact

86 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

a drained portion of that line of lake ; perhaps caused by some local

alteration in the levels of the country.

From Dirgo to Tanksé isa distance of eight miles and thé road

quite level. The stream is considerable and contains a small kind of

fish of which I saw numbers at the Dirgo bridge. The road follows

the right bank for nearly the whole distance, mountains rise to a great

height on either side, and at the southern end of the valley, towering

above Tanksé, is the fine snowy peak called im the survey Tankse

No. 1. The village of this name is large and a very fair area is

under cultivation—lucerne grass gTows luxuriously. Many of the

houses are built close under a large mass of conglomerate, the stones

firmly cemented in it, and to this cause it must owe its present exis-

tence at the mouth of the narrow gorge towards the Pangong, out of

which the soft beds have been washed away. ‘The remains of an old

fortified post still cover the upper portion of this conglomerate bed.

The main stream comes from the southward, and drains the Ling

Yaghma valley and the mountains on the north of the Indus river.

Tt is joined at Tanks by the small stream that drains the valley up

which the road to the Pangong runs ; this is at first rather shut in and

confined by the mountains that rise in cliffs on either hand, but where

st takes the more direct easterly direction it opens out considerably ;

high cliffs of the alluvial shingly deposits again occur, forming a belt at

foot of the mountains of the northern side about 300 feet high and

some 400 yards distant from the stream. Muglib, where I halted,

about 11 miles from Tanks, is a very small place. At this point a

broad belt of green pasture land extends along the valley, and through

it the little clear stream finds its way in a very tortuous course, but

above Miuglib this green pelt becomes very swampy and on it several

Brahmini duck were seen. The stream above flowed over a stony

dabris from the hills, with occasional patches of grassy and watery

ground, and at about three miles the road passes two litle tarns,

these had been evidently larger at that season of the year when the

snows are melting, or after an extra amount of rain has fallen. The

physical appearance of the whole length of this valley showed un-

mistakable signs of its having at one period been the bed of a lake,

and I am induced to think for a portion of that time continuous with

the portion below Tanksé and that the mass of alluvial above Durgo

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 87

was contemporary with that above Miglib. Above the two lakes,

Tragimé Bur Tso, there is no longer any water in the bed of the

stream save at intervals here and there, where it breaks out in a small

rill to lose itself in the loose gravel a few yards lower down. Over

distances of more than a mile it is deep white sand, the collection of

which is a good deal due to the wind. Down to this sand the talus

from the mountains extends tending every year to increase the height

of level. At the low pass of Surtokh, whence one obtains the first

view of the Pangong lake, this action is nowhere so well seen; this

ridge of Surtokh forms the watershed across the natural exit for the

waters of the great lake and is entirely formed by the loose shingle

brought down a somewhat large lateral ravine from the snowy peaks

to the south: this bed of talus actually divides, part to the eastward,

part to the west, as exemplified in the sketch annexed (Fig. 1), so

that the waters may in some years flow one way, in others another.

If the supply of water to the Pangong lake were equal to what it

must formerly have been when the glaciers were double their present

size, the continual flow of water would soon carry off these talus

accumulations from the mountains above Surtokh ; there being now

no force in action for this purpose, the snows of winter and the waters

of the side ravines tend to raise the main valley level every year,

The Pangong Tso (lake) is about two and a half miles distant from

the low ridge of the Surtokh La, or more properly speaking, its

natural bar or bund, but the level of the old lake bed extends up to

within a very short distance of the pass. A rise of 150 feet in the

waters of the present lake would find them again an exit down the

valley to Tanksé. A Trigonometrical station lies close to the water’s

edge, it bears east-south-east from a rock, a quarter mile distant out

in the lake, and is marked with a stone having the usual dot and

circle cut on it; its height has been determined trigonometrically to

be 13,931 feet above the sea. From this mark-stone, a fine view of

the first long reach of this elevated and interesting piece of water is

obtained. Its colour is of an intense blue, the water as clear as crystal,

but far too saline to be drinkable ; there was quite a true salt water

feel in the air as the wind blew off it. This was a good site from

which to form a commencement of my survey work, as knobs and

peaks were seen for many a mile along the spurs that descended from

Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh [No. 2

i‘ (| Ii

NY nw" ee

=);

SSS

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. &9

the ranges bounding the northern shores. From the height at which

one stood these all appeared comparatively low ; only on the highest

_ lay a few small patches of snow, thence to their bases was one succession

of shades of yellows, purples, reds and browns, the invariable colouring

of Tibet—not a scrap of green. My intention was to proceed along

the northern shore as far as it was possible, and eventually to turn |

north, and work round into Chang Chingmo. But it being necessary

first to see something of the south side also, I left the supplies and

Sepoys at the spot where we had first struck the lake; and taking

one small tent, I marched on, skirting the southern shore towards

a low point that runs down to and overlooks the whole of the western

end, and forms the termination of the longest spur from the lofty

snow-bound range, which forms the southern watershed of this basin,

Late in the afternoon we reached a very small patch of cultivation,

with some two or three wretched huts called Spang Mik, and the

next morning, by 9 a. m., reached the foot of the low point, named

by the Survey Pankong (b) Hill Station. For so high an elevation,

a considerable amount of green grass, Tibetan furze, and cultivation

occurs on the west side of the hill, having a few houses scattered

about it, forming the village of “ Mun,” the largest in the Pangong

district. I ascended from it to the station by a short easy pull of

some 1,000 feet above the lake, obtaining a most commanding view,

up and down it, across to the spurs of north bank and high up among

the snowy peaks to the south, where small glaciers just show their

noses above the masses of the old moraines, which extend down to

the ancient level of the lake, Little streams flow down these steep

inclines like silver threads from the ends of these glaciers, to finally

lose themselves in the silt and sands that skirt the edge of the lake,

for only the most considerable of these streams find an exit in its

waters. Such is the one that flows through the little oasis of Mun;

it owes its size to the streams from three glaciers uniting some dis-

tance above the village. The silt brought down by these, has formed

@ miniature delta, or arm of shallow water, running out into the lake.

In the course of a conversation with the coolies and men of Mun,

| Ilearnt that some three or four marches further on, the lake narrowed

| toa mere stream which was fordable, and that it was not necessary

to follow the northern shore, where ran besides the worst road, J

90 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [ No. 2,

changed my route, sent back for the supplies and camp at Spang Mik,

and late in the evening, they had all arrived. Other advantages

accrued by following the south shore, viz., that I saw more of my

ground without having to ascend to very high peaks, there was

plenty of water and wood as far as the Chushal river, and the villages

extended further. On the other hand, the northern shore is very

bare, and water is only obtainable by digging holes close to the edge

of the lake, into these water percolates, but only slightly less saline.

On the 22nd July, my march lay over the sandy, stony plain, skirt-

ing the shore of the Pangong, crossing two or three ravines, where

sections are well displayed of former and higher levels of its waters

in sands, interstratified with an angular rubble like that distributed

over the present surface. At about eight miles from Mun, the strag-

gling village of Méruk is passed on the right hand, and the last on the

lake Karkpet is three miles further. The level ground between the

shores and the foot of the mountains increases much in breadth

as one proceeds east, and the stream from Chushal gives, from a dis-

tance, no signs of its proximity, and I was rather surprised on coming

suddenly upon a fine body of water, flowing with a quiet current through

a narrow belt of green grass some 10 feet below the surface of the

plain. Finding plenty of wood and a nice green sheltered spot

under the bank, I pitched camp by the side of it.

The extent of level ground here is considerable, quite ten square

miles, dotted over in the vicinity of the stream with a few low bushes,

and over the rest grows a scanty coarse grass in tufts. Towards the

shore of the lake rise two very conspicuous isolated low rocky knobs a

mile apart, and between these +s the confluence of the Chushal stream

and the Pangong Tso. The next morning I walked across and ascend-

ed the most eastern eminence, having the strange sounding name of

Tuget Nuggi. This had formerly been a fortified post, the level

space at the top was enclosed by a low stone wall, while a detached

out-work had been built on the low spur that ran out on the east

side; none of my coolies, who were all from this district of Pangong, —

could give any account of it, as to when or by whom it had been

built; it must be comparatively an ancient work, still considering how

soon events are forgotten by such men, its age may be only 150 to —

200 years. It was a lowering morning ; and before I had finished

—_

Reis, |

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 91

my survey work from this position, it came on to rain hard, which

we sat out on the top; the shower passed off up the lake, and it had

a fine effect on the view in that direction, with the lines of falling

rain over the expanse of water, and the misty mountains bounding

its sides. The state of the plain which, when dry, is covered with

a hard incrustation of lime and a salt, that crackles under the feet,

had now by the wet been turned into a sticky loam that adhered to

the boots in huge lumps, and remained like a cement upon every

thing it came in contact with. One and a half miles beyond Tuget

Nuggi low spurs abut upon the lake in cliffs of 150 to 200 feet

high, and the way leads along the narrow shore at their foot, with

very deep water washing the bank. Passing one large bay we round-

ed a low narrow point of beach only to find the existence of another

bay, called Phirsook : this forms the boundary between the Kashmir

Rajah’s territory and the Chinese district of Rudokh. Pharsook

formed a circular sheltered little lake in itself, a narrow strait only

connects it with the water outside. It was evidently of great depth

in places where the hills came down in cliffs upon it, a narrow beach

ran along the foot of these formed of talus cemented by lime. The

bay formed a perfect harbour, in which a line of battle-ship might

have floated, and sailed in and out of. . Were this lake in a less ele-

vated region, or on a line of trade, how useful would the water com-

munication prove up and down the extent of its two long portious.

The first or lower lake is 40 miles in length ; the second 83, giving

a total of 73 miles, exclusive of the upper long portion beyond Tso

Nyak, whieh is quite 18 miles,

I shall not detail each day’s march, winding in and out of the bays

of this long length of water, but will attempt to give a general de-

scription of it, connected with which are several points, both curious

and interesting.

The first that must strike any one of observation is the evidence

of this lake having been formerly fresh for its entire length. Myriads

of dead fresh-water shells now strew the shore: these, thrown up by

the waves in a long white ridge, lie so thick in some of the bays they

can be taken up in handsfull. They are principally of Lymnea and

Planorbis ; but though I searched diligently, I never found a large

| bivalve, only one very tiny Pisidiwm that I found inside one of the

92 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

specimens of Lymnea ; nor did I ever find a living specimen, which

I had hoped to do in the upper lakes, where the water was very

slightly brackish. When these shells existed, the former lake must

have had quite a different aspect from its present one, and in it must

have grown for the sustenance of these molluscs beds of water plants,

while its banks would have been fringed probably with grass and

rushes. In the lower lake there ig not a vestige of any sort or kind

of plant, the beautifully blue clear water washes a bank of sand and

pebbles, the latter perfectly free even of algw. This is not the case

beyond Ote, where the water is much less salt, there the stones under

water are extremely slippery and covered with vegetable growth. At

this part also, patches of a coarse water weed are also seen here and

there along the shore, but not growing luxuriantly, and evidently

making a struggle for existence. The waters of the western end are

far more salt than those of that near Ote, noticeable even to the taste,

but it is not until the stream that connects the two portions is fairly

entered that it is by any means drinkable ; thence for the whole dis-

tance eastward, we used the lake waters save when we had the luck

to find a spring of really fresh. By looking out carefully, we discover-

ed springs in three places flowing out from under the bank; and in

one spot, these springs were bubbling up for some distance out into

the lake, rendering the water quite fresh around. It was quite a ~

pleasure to see the poor yiks who carried our baggage take their fill

of it, when for three days they had drank nothing but salt water.

A curious feature of the Pangong is the almost entire absence of

streams, whose waters find an exit in it, considering the great area .

that some of them drain; for, with the exception of the few glacial

rills and the Chushal stream on its south shore, and the stream at the

extreme west end, from the Marse Mik La, there are none. The northern»

shore is particularly dry, not a single rill joins it for its entire distance, —

until arriving at “ Pal,” on the upper lake; and the same may be

said of the southern shore, from the Chushal river to Ote, and for

many miles beyond. Many of the ravines have their sources at a

considerable distance, but near the lake have broad dry beds from

2 to 8, and up to 500 yards in breadth of rubble and sands. I may

instance the very large lateral ravine at Ote, the longest branch of

which runs back into the snowy mountains of Chang Chingmo, for

1868.] | Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh, 93

a distance of 40 miles, draining altogether an area of nearly 400 square

miles. The silt which in former times has been carried down from

the above area has formed the plain of Ote, the broad barrier to what

would otherwise be a continuous long reach of water. This was no

doubt the old configuration of the lake, for a rise of some 12 feet

would cover the greater part of the Ote plain even now. In nearly

all the higher ravines, water is plentiful, and glaciers of the second

order are seen, but the streams are all sopped up in the broad bed

of the main valley which acts like a perfect sponge ; the stream breaks

out occasionally here and there only to hide itself a few hundred yards

down, the last water seen being above the fort of “ Lanakh-khur,”

but it nowhere is seen to flow into the lake, being lost in the sands

of the plain.

Another point in the history of this lake, on which may be based

a good deal of theory as to its older aspect, is the former size and

extent of its waters. On every side unmistakeable traces that the

level was much above the present one, are seen in the lines of old

beaches and in the beds of sand, containing the fossil remains of fresh-

water shells,* interstratified with beds of angular débris, which I

mentioned before, are to be seen in the little dry ravines that cut

through the plain, over which the road from Mun to the Chushal

stream runs. Tig. 2. is a rough section of these beds, in which No. 1

represents the present plain of surface débris, the scattered talus of

rocks brought down from the mountains of the south bank, when the

small glaciers, at present only two to four miles long, extended nearly

down to the lake, as proved by their old moraines still to be seen.

Winter snow and the water action of time have spread their materials

far out, nearly down to the water’s edge. No. 2 are fine sands and

arenaceous clay, such as would be now in the process of formation

near the debouchement of the Chushal stream, perhaps a little coarser,

which a-moister climate would entail. It contains shells and stems

| of plants. No. 3 is a bed of angular débris, the same in every respect

| as the upper bed, No 1, but much thicker. No. 4 again are sands,

| like No. 2, containing the same shells. No. 5, débris as beds 1 and 3:

~* These fresh-water shells are the same as those now found on the edge

of the lake, while the stems of plants are plainly discerned; where these last

| are seen, the sandy clay is generally tinged with an iron colour.

94 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

Fig. 2.

This section proves great changes, and also, I think, that the lake

existed prior to, certainly during the latter part of, the great glacial

period in the Himalayas. Whether the scooping out of the depression

in which its waters lie, is due to glacial action in the first instance, —

when this high region was (as is most probable) deeply overlaid by

ice and snow, is a hazardous question, and one rather problematical.

From the alternation of the beds of débris and finer deposits, we can

infer that there have been changes from milder and moister seasons

than at present exist, back to colder and drier; during the first, beds

like No. 3 would have been deposited by the increased transporting

power that would have carried the materials further out into the lake; —

while, at the same time, the level of the waters would naturally have

been much higher. Its waters must then have generally held much |

silt and mud in suspension to form the shell beds of above section.

At the present day, no deposit of any kind is taking place, save per-—

haps near the debouchements of the Chushal, and the extreme western

tributaries. A closer inspection with some levelling would, I think,

somewhat clear up the mystery attached to the huge masses of

alluvial deposits seen in the valleys of all the great rivers of the

western Himalayas, from the Chang Chungmo and Leh, to Skardo”

in the valley of Kurgyl and valley of Dras, and on both the Jhelum _

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 95

and Chandra-bagha (Chenab) rivers. Give a greater rain-fall to the

Pangong district, and a lower snow line (now above 20,000 feet),

the ravines would be seen with fine running streams in them, and,

allowing time, would cut through the barrier at the Surtokh La 5%

and eventually down through the whole length of the alluvial deposits

in this lake basin, the large valley and its tributaries then drained

would resemble most closely on either side the sand, shingle, and

conglomerate deposits now seen at Tanksd and on the above-named

rivers. These deposits at Ote would be somewhat higher, and would

cover a greater area from the junction of the great tributary there.

The height of the waters of the Pangong have much diminished,

and are diminishing at the present day: the first travellers who

visited it, now some years ago, would I think find a- marked difference

on its shores. The coolies of the district assured me that formerly,

say 30 years ago, it was not practicable to proceed along the southern

shore, following close to the edge of the lake from Phirsook to Ote,

which at present is quite easy--even yaks can be taken. Only in

one or two spots was there any difficulty, where the cliffs approached

close down to the water’s edge. A rise of 15 feet would bring the

water close to them, and even 10 feet would render such placees quite

impracticable for animals and nearly so for man. From other inform-

ation I could collect, the fall must now be from 1 to 14 feet per

annum. The difficult spots mentioned above have only been practi-

cable for yaks for the last four years (1863); before that time the

track lay over a rough ridge a short distance back from the shore.

The men of the district also said that it is only for the last 20 years

or so, that the waters have fallen at this rapid rate. The rock that

lies out in the lake at its western end, distant 11 mile from the shore,

is about 5 feet high. It has only been noticed for the past four

years, so this would again give a fall of about one foot:a year. Again

the numerous lines of the beach marks,—and at some points as many

as five and six can be counted,—denote falls of leyel of about a foot.

* The rock bounding the north side of this pass is a hard crystalline lime-

‘Stone, nearly on edge, up to the plane surface of which the ridge of detritus

extends. The depth to which the rocks in situ have been eroded prior to the

talus that has since been precipitated against them, is in all probability suffi-

cient to drain the whole extent of the Pangong and valley towards Tanksé,

if these present accumulations were removed,

96 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

These all lying close to the water’s edge are very recent, as evidenced

by being so well defined. But as a proof that the waters of the

Pangong lake in former times have fallen below its present level, I

may state that on a long point of land in the little bay of Phirsook

in deep very clear water, I looked down upon a terrace 10 feet below .

the surface which terminated in a cliff, where the stratification of

the sand and clays could be well seen, the bottom was not visible

beyond this, and it was too far out to sound the depth. This would

be the section,

Fig. 3.

—

WITTLALLIL LILA Lf bth h kde

Hi utttys (lies

The only deduction to make from such comparatively recent changes

is, that the level of its waters has been alternating with moist

and dry periods of time, the slow process of which may be even now

going on almost imperceptible to man: the water of the Pangong

depending as it does mainly on the winter snow, (query, may not

the snow-fall in this part of the Himalayas be much less now than

formerly ?) and the country passing through a period of diminishing |

falls. Slow as such changes may be, they are by no means impro-

bable or impossible. The western end of the Pangong Tso lies as nearly

as possible in latitude 34° and longitude 78° 30’, thence its direction

+. due south-east to latitude 34° 40’, it then takes a bend easterly

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 97

and follows that latitude as far as Noh, in longitude 79° 50’. The

mountains to the north-west of the first long reach are of no great

apparent elevation; in July there was very little snow to be seen,

and only on the very highest portion, or the main range, which

nevertheless is from 18,000 to 19,500 feet high; the highest peaks

being 20,000; but the level of the lake being 13,931 feet above the

sea, detracts considerably from their great altitude. The terminal

knobs of the spurs from the above range lie close on the edge of the

lake, rising to the height of 600 to 1,500 fect, generally terminat-

ing precipitously, and the lake I should imagine is excessive-

ly deep at such places. It would be a most interesting scientific

enquiry to sound with some portable kind of boat the depth of this

lake. To the south-west a high range runs parallel to the lake,

some of the peaks on which attain an altitude of 21,500 fect; this range

terminates in a peak above and to the east-south-east of Tankse,

which is 20,003. The above fine line of mountains, covered as they

are with perpetual snow, and their ravines terminating above in small

glaciers, form a fine boundary to this valley on the south. The

southern watershed follows the lake very closely as far as Ote. It

there extends further south, and between that: place and Pal, several

yery large lateral ravines descend into it, all with the usual broad,

diy, gravelly beds, the largest of these are the Algrong, Tengun,

Kiam-Surpo Loombas, or valleys. On the northern shore, beyond the

very large valley of Chang Burmah, which finds its exit at the Ote

plain, there is another, the Dal-Loomba, that drains the considerable

tract of 150 square miles; the silt carried down from this has narrowed

the lake very much, forming a low point jutting out into it, and has

contracted the waters to a quarter of a mile in breadth. Altogether

the mean breadth of the second lake, “ Tso Nyak,” or ‘middle

lake” is much less than the first or true “ Pangong.”

Wherever a tributary ravine joins the shore, there is grass, scanty

as a rule, and of a very coarse kind. At Ote it is much: richer,

especially in the vicinity of the stream that unites the two lakes. On

both banks of the second lake, wood is found in plenty, growing

luxuriantly in places; at Algrong and Numkum it formed a scrubby

jungle, but on the northern shore, at Siling, it was met with no

more, and the snly fuel was a stunted plant which throws out a good

98 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

deal of woody root, and is sound all over this country ; and I never

found a scarcity of it even up to 18,000 feet in the Chang Chingmo,

save where the ravines were very rocky. Descending from the small

ridge between Paljung and Pal, the extensive plain near the latter

comes in view, bounded by low spurs on every side save the east,

where a conspicuous peak rears its head. A small stream winds its

way through the eastern side of the “‘maidan,” and joins the lake

being the only one on the northern shore that does so. Three and

a half miles beyond Pal, the second lake ends, and a small stream

+s found flowing into it through half a mile of sandy flat ground,

beyond which is another lake, called Tso Rum, having a length of

about four miles. Aiter crossing again some flat ground, Lake Tso

Nyak, (the second,) ig reached connected as before described with

Tso Rum below. Near the northern shore of this last is situated

the small village of Noh, a short distance up a tributary from the

north. This place I much wished to visit, but as will be shown

further on, I could not manage to accomplish it. On the northern

shore of Tso Nyak, the effects of a very peculiar natural force may

be seen; at intervals a ridge of sand and earth runs parallel to

the line of beach, at first I attributed this to the action of waves,

but observing the large proportions of these banks in some situations,

and at last seeing the ridge quite 6 feet high; and, moreover, that

the bank had been fairly turned up, as if with a gigantic plough,

I was fairly puzzled to account for such an appearance, and on ques-

tioning the guides then learnt, that during winter, when the lake

ig frozen over hard, the water naturally accumulates under the ice

and flowing westward can find no exit. When the pressure becomes

_ too great it tears up the frozen earth on the shore and being liberated

flows over the surface of the ice. I give a slight sketch (Fig. 4.)

of a section through one of these banks, showing the old surface grass

still growing on the perpendicular face of the upheaved ground, which

of course is on the inland side. On measuring this, I found it an inch

or two over 6 feet. .

1868. | Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh, 99

Fig. 4.

pe a evel a Lock Ly

—-— ers

pee wa

===>

I noticed also that the banks were higher and better developed

on the western curves of the bays. One reason for this may be seen

by a glance at the accompanying diagram, (Fig. 5.) where GQ, a, G,

| Big, 5.

feptesent the shore of the lake, the waters of which have a tendeticy

to flow. west, in direction of the arrows. These waters (?) suddenly

increased by springs in bed of lake, and subjected to the upper

pressure of a frozen surface meet with another resisting force in

the curve of the bay at B. That line where the ice, united to

the frozen gtound, meets the dry soil into which water does not

percolate, and is consequently eomparatively dry, would be the

100 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh [No. 2,

line of least resistance; and upon that line the disruption would

take place and the pent up waters find an exit. Where the bank

is sandy or clayey and covered with grass, it would be turned up

1 the manner as shown in Fig. 4. In spots where the shore is

gravelly, the water seems to drive in the sand and stones before it

from the bottom of the lake out upon the shore, and this being a

continuous annual action it has in some’ bays formed a bank quite

3 feet high. Whether this phenomenon has been observed. before on

other lakes I do not know; it could not take place even here, did

not this lake Pangong receive a large amount of water from the

east, with a determination to flow towards its old natural exit near

Likoong. During summer, evaporation no doubt carries off a great

amount of the surplus. water that drains into it, but in the winter

this must cease, and with its upper casing of ice the water to free itself

thus tears and roots up the bank in the curious manner above detailed.

During the whole time I spent on the shores of the Pan-

gong, the only animal I saw was the Kyang, or wild ass of Tibet,

a few couple of these were grazing “on the grassy maidans of the

northern shore. Of the birds, geese were plentiful in the stream

between the first and second lakes, and I saw many young broods.

The Brahmini goose, teal, a ved-headed diver with white body, and ~

a very black plumaged duck, made up the water birds. There was —

a great scarcity of the smaller birds, a sandpiper and wagtail were

occasionally seen on the shore. The large fish-eagle was plentiful

at Ote, attracted there by the fish which are seen for the first time —

in the slightly brackish water flowing out of the upper lake ; this

lake is full of them, they much resemble the tench in shape and

colour, only somewhat longer in the body, and are covered with slime

like those fish. I had fortunately brought a rod, and all its et-—

ceteras, and had near Numkum, in deep water under the rocks, a very

good afternoon’s sport, catching some five and twenty ; they ran about

a pound in weight, the largest I caught being about 4 tbs. They

would rise at a fly when the surface was much rippled, and secing

them rising at gnats, I managed to catch two with a small midge

fly, the first artificial I fancy ever thrown on these waters ; but their :

extreme clearness is much against fly-fishing. The most paying bait |

after all was dough; this they took readily enough, and I might have -

1868.] Notes on the Pangony lake district of Ladakh. 101

caught double the number in another hour, but had to move on to

camp. These fish formed a welcome addition to our food as long

as we remained on the lake, I supplied my old Bhut Moonshie and

some of the guard with hooks and lines, they became fierce fisher-

men, and brought in good bags. It is a fine sight to see the lake during

a storm, when a good strong wind is blowing down a long extent

of its surface, and dashing the waves, which rise to a considerable

height, against the hard rocky shore: I had the fortune to see its

surface in this state one morning, and sitting down watched the

waves rolling in; it was a minature sea, and Pangong waves brought

up thoughts of beaches in old England. Though the country is so barren,

the lake has its beauties in the varied tints of surrounding hills and

mountains, and the rich deep blue of its waters, becoming quite of

an emerald green colour as they shallow near the shore. During

the summer months the lake is quite deserted, and we did not fall

in with a soul the whole distance up to Pal, or we might not have

got so far. At that time of the year, the flocks of shawl-wool goats,

sheep and yaks, are grazed in the higher valleys on the young rich

grass that springs up in some places after the snow has left the

ground. During winter they are brought down to the level “ maidans’s

near the lake, and Ote, I was told, becomes dotted with black « Cham-

pa’* encampments. Snow, they said, never lies long at Ote, though

the lake freezes all over very thick, and the degree of cold must

‘be very considerable ;—what a glorious expanse for skating the lake

must then present! The Champas or Changpas, who spend the

winter on the lake at Ote, come from both Noh and Rudok. The said

plain is a disputed piece of ground ; the men of the Pangong district

claim it, though judging by the site of an old fort standing on a

low rock on the north-western side of the plain, I should say it

undoubtedly belongs to the Lhassan authorities, by whom it was

built years ago: proximity of Leh and greater power of the Thana-

dar there, places it in the Kashmir Rajah’s territory. Walls of stone

and earth are built up as a portection for the tents against the wind;

and to render them still snugger, I observed that the ifterior floor

had been dug down to a depth of 3 feet, which must make them

warmer abodes. I found the summer winds of this country cold

* “Champa,” the nomadic trides of this country.

102 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

enough, what the winter are like I can well imagine : the amount

of comfort, in a tent on the edge of a frozen sheet of water stretching

for miles, must be a very minus quantity. During the whole period |

of my sojourn there in August 1863, the weather, with a few solitary

fine days, was miserably cold, nothing but cloud, sleet, and rain. LI

may have seen ++ under disadvantageous circumstances, and I trust

at times it does enjoy a little warmth and brightness.

On the Ist of August we reached Paljung, and in the afternoon

of that day came in sight of the first natives we had seen, viz., three

men driving some yaks in our direction, they saw us at the same

time, and turned and bolted ; we followed, but failed to overtake them,

it being about two miles to the point they had rounded,—they had

disappeared up some lateral ravine out of sight : our approach was, there-

fore, known to the Rudok men. It rained in torrents during the night,

camp was pitched at Paljung, where a long broad nulla bed came

down to the lake, and a low long promontory ran from the hills on

the north out into it. Our road next day on towards Pal lay over

this, it being a very long round to follow the shore under the cliffs.

From the low pass the broad dull green plain of Pal was seen, and

on its eastern side we discovered the black tents of a small Tartar

camp. As our approach was now certainly known to these people,

we bent our steps towards them. Three mencame out to meet us, and

turned out very mild individuals, one being a Lhama or priest. Their —

dogs, of the large Tibetan breed, were much more noisy and furious

at the intrusion of strangers, and were not to be reconciled until

long after the tents were Up. These Champahs informed me that

one of their number was about to ride into Noh at once to give the —

news of our arrival, and have it thence sent on to Rudok, I at once ~

sat my Bhut Moonshi down to write a letter to the Governor of

the place, requesting that he would raise no difficulty to my paying

the place a visit, and see its monasteries, We. ‘

The nexttwodays I remained at Pal, for the hills were buried in —

dense cloud and a good deal of rain fell, so that I was unable to proceed —

with any sutvey work in an eastern direction; on the third day, the

Yimskang of Rudok rode in with some twenty followers, and pitched

his tents on the other bank of the little stream, and came over at

once to seeme. He was a native of Lhassa, a short, stout, jovial

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 103

fellow, and brought a letter from the Governor of Rudok, and a

white scarf, together with a present of two damuns (bricks) of tea,

and some sheep and goats for my men. The letter was then read

by the Moonshie, and was to the effect thit it was not in his power

to give me leave to visit Rudok, as he had strict orders from his

Superiors in Lhassa to prevent foreigners crossing the frontier, and

that it would eventually be known if he permitted it. He added that

he could not use force to prevent my further progress, but he trusted

I would not lose him his appointment by so doing, and that I would

accept the presents as a sign of friendship. Having received orders

not to bring on any collision with the Chinese officials, I had to

give up the idea of seeing Rudok, but I held out for one more march

towards the place and gained my point, but not before showing

some anger at their absurd wishes. The Zimskang again came over

alter my dinner about 9 o'clock at night, to beg I would not proceed,

any further; but I said they must abide by their first agreement.

The afternoon of that day I was enabled to ascend the limestone

mountain east of camp and fix my true position, the range around

Rudok and the eastern end of lake were also again visible, and

was enabled to get intersections with other rays. The 5th broke

fortunately clear and bright, so I started early along the shore of

the lake in direction of Noh, my friend the Zimskang, stuck to me

like a leech the whole day with a few of his men, and a curiously

dressed rabble they were, with their enormous flat mushroom-shaped

hats, and all mounted on little scraggy but sturdy ponies, they were

all very jolly and amiable, I made no secret of my work, and showed

and explained the map of the lake to him, which he thoroughly

understood. Ihave found the people of Tibet far in advance of

Hindustan as regards drawings, and what they are intended to

fepresent. At a small hill called Tobo Nokpo, whence I had

promised to return the previous day, I fulfilled my agreement evident-

ly to the great pleasure of the Zimskang, who was now more plea-

Sant than ever and thanked me with many salaams. On the 6th

August my tents were struck to leave Pal, and the Rudok men did

the same, I was invited over to their tents, previous to starting, to

partake of a parting cup of salted tea churned with butter, which

1s always kept simmering on the fire ; it is by no means.a bad beverage

104 Notes on the Pangong lake distrect of Ladakh. [No. 2,

when made with good fresh butter. I gave him a few presents

and we parted.

At the eastern end of the Pangong the hills somewhat decrease

in altitude, the highest lying to the north of Noh. Looking in a

direction due east from the higher points | ascended, the country

appeared flat but undulating, and I observed in the far distance two

or three pieces of water, these may turn out to be connected with

Pangong Tso, probably pounded by steep sides which were not discern-

able at twenty miles, they may extend for some distance; the breadth

of this high region was considerable, and extended up toa snowy

range that rose suddenly on the south. The more level surface was

not bounded by any mountains, and was seen stretching to the horizon.

The morning we left Pal was raw, cold, and cloudy ; the road lay

north-westerly for some distance over the dead level plain, that showed

distinctly it had once been covered by water, for dead fresh-water

shells are seen for some way, We then rose from it over a long very

gradual slope of some three miles which at last contracted into a ra-

vine, bounded with very low and easy scarped hills. A portion of this

ravine was well wooded with the same kind of shrub as grew along the

shores of the Pangong. The little camp of Champas continued their

march with us; and had we been one day later coming into Pal, we

should have missed them altogether and gone straight into Noh

without meeting a soul. Nearly all their worldly goods were carried

on sheep, only a few articles on the ponies which they rode. The

women drove the former, and, in fact, did more in the packing, unpack-

ing, and pitching of the tents, than their lords and masters ; aiter

which they were sent out on the hill side to collect the roots of a low |

shrub having a scent like lavender. One of the girls was very nice

Jooking, and wore a peculiar head-dress which is not seen on the

Ladakh side. The usually narrow fillet of cloth worn by the Ladaki —

women was treble the usual width, and covered with torquoise and

silver ornaments; near the attachment at the forehead was a bar of —

silver set with small torquoise, pendant from which so as to lay on the

forehead were a number of silver coins attached by short strings of

coral beads, the effect was very good, Ihad the young lady brought

over to my tent, where she sat for her portrait, and was delighted at

the drawing made of her. The encamping ground was called Tobo

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 105

Rubern, and was a level piece of green grass, with several good

streams of water flowing across it, for curious enough the higher

ravines of the country have plenty of water, but they are all absorbed

a few miles down in the sand and gravel of the broad water ways.

The valley was here high, broad, and nearly level, the mountains were

of no great elevation above it, not more than 3,000 feet; the lower

slopes falling gradually from them into the valley, which was patched

with furze of stunted growth, and plenty of good grass. The morning

of the 7th broke clear, sunny, and bright, with a fresh breeze, we

started early and gradually ascended the valley to the pass in our

front, called the Dingo La (16,270 feet). On the top the ground was

nearly level, expanding into wide open ground to the north; on the

left rose a hill about 1,000 feet, which I determined to ascend to

obtain a view over the hills and country around. Walking a short

distance up this, a small tarn was seen in the centre of the level

ground north of the pass, which had once evidently extended over

the greater part of its area. Scattered plants of rhubarb are here seen

but very tough and acid. The rocks were all of limestone formation,

with a strike nearly east and west. I found no fossils, but it resem-

bled in appearance the paleozoic rocks of Dras, &c. 1 obtained from

the peak a fine view, but could see no more of the eastern end of the

Pangong near Noh, on account of a dense haze in that direction. I

was much disappointed and could only fix a peak or two looming up

through the mist. My own camp and the Tartars had gone on, and

I quickly followed them down the valley. This was very characteristic

of these regions, spreading out into a broad gravelly plain, on the left

side of which was a sharply defined scarp showing its general level had

been uniform ; this plain forms the head of one of the branches of the Dal

Loomba. We parted with our Champa friends at a place called

Chuchan, where they encamped to graze their goats and sheep for a

few days, while we proceeded on along the side of the hills of the

right bank rising gradually to a low pass called Sa Lam, and descending

on the other side to another broad tributary of the Dal Loomba, which

at this spot branched into three broad arms that penetrated into the

mountains on the north for some eight miles. The longest of these

valleys had a direction north-west, and up this our road to the Chang

Chingmo ran; no water was here to be found, and it was not until we

106 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [ No. 2, .

had proceeded another two miles that water was found in the bed

of the ravine. Where we halted fuel grew in plenty—the yellow

flowered Tibetan furze, differing slightly from the Huropean in not

being quite so thorny. The valley was still broad, but the hill sides

descended into it with steeper slope, it was here called Drukker.

When on the Sa Lam a horseman was seen riding down the valley

from the north, who joined us. He had come from an encampment up

the valley, and said he was sent to escort us on to the pass ahead.

Our movements were, therefore, well known, though we should not have

supposed a human being to have been within miles, but the Champas

were evidently on the watch, and espied us the moment we topped the

pass of Sa Lam. Between camp and the Demjor La, the valley bore

the same character, save that the broad gravelly bed was covered with

a luxuriant growth of furze, this swarmed with hares, which got up

in all directions, and I had some good shooting. The Demjor La was

reached about 10 o’clock, I found it by boiling point thermometer to

be 17,465. The rise was gentle the whole way, and it fell in like

manner into the valley on the north. As I came up to the usual pile

of stones on thé crest, two fine Ovis ammon came round a spur to the

right, at about 200 yards distance. I managed to get a little nearer,

but missed them. A fine mass of hill rose to the south appearing

easy and near, I sent the camp on to the stream below and commenced

its ascent. This was a good deal steeper and further than I had antici-

pated, proving to be 20,240 feet high, but the labour was rewarded, for

from the summit I obtained a splendid view, and did a large amount

of work; massive snow beds still covered the top, and the wind was

bitterly cold. The mountains to the south of the Pangong were well

seen, with the great snowy range near the Indus beyond Rudok; and

I still longed to go on in that direction. Of the mountains to the

south and west, there was a fine view of a country bleak, naked,

stony, and inhospitable; only in a tributary of the great Chang Burma

Loomba, whence was a way to Ote, was anything green, a little grass

and furze there skirted the stream. Work being finished, we were

soon down again upon the level ground of the valley ; and on a piece

of very wet ground, I was surprised to flush a snipe. It was a bitter

cold evening, but the camp was in as sheltered a spot as we could find,

and there was some good grass here for the yaks. Our Champa guide

1868. ] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 107

took leave of us on the Dimjor La, so that we proceeded on the next

day alone. The valley below camp took the usual configuration and

ran towards the north-west, with a bed about one fourth of a mile broad.

At about three miles we reached the confluence of a large valley from

the north, and up this [ determined to proceed, and thence ascend to

Kiepsang, trigonometrical station. Several Kiangs were here seen,

and up the valley numerous Tibetan antelope. After marching up the

gravelly wide bed for five miles, whose main tributary turned to the

east, and ended in an extensive elevated plain on the surface of which

lay some large snow beds, we were rather at a loss to find water. I

took the eastern branch, while the yaks and servants proceeded up the

western (the Nertsé Loomba), towards a patch of green grass where I

thought water would be found, and this proved to be the case. From

this the staff on the top of Kiepsang was visible, and a very delightful

little pull-up it looked. I followed the eastern branch to a low pass,

which overlooked a narrow gorge that terminated a short way down

on another high level plain. ‘There was no track of any kind to be

seen here, and my guides told me that the country on beyond was

grazed over by a nomad tribe, called Kirghis, who did not own

allegiance to the Rudok authorities ; that they were great thieves and

robbers, and occasionally came into Tanksé to exchange their wool for

grain, of which they had none. These are the people who wander

over the plains, thence to Ichi and into a terra amcognita on the east.

It was not until late that I got back to camp, going to bed with the

prospect of a stiff ascent next day. I wasup and off very early, taking

some breakfast with me; at this hour it was very cold, and the water

of the little stream was frozen hard, and the backs of the yaks were

quite white with frost. I took the line of a ravine which led up to

the ridge east of the Kiepsang staff, the ascent was most fatiguing,

over the loose angular débris that filled the steep bed of this ravine,

whose waters were frozen into water-falls of ice: In this ravine we put

up from under a rock a hare so benumbed with cold, it could not run,

and it was knocked over with a stick by one of my coolies, to his

great delight. On reaching the ridge, there was still a long pull up

to the pole, but the view recompensed all the labor to legs and lungs;

the ascent was 3,200 feet, the peak being 20,085, while the camp

below was about 16,800. Bleak wastes of hill and wide dry drainage

108 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

courses met the eye to the north-east, backed by some high mountains,

whose loftier peaks were covered with snow, and threw down some

small glaciers. To the south the great tributary of the Pangong, the

Mipal valley could be followed for many miles, high rugged angular

mountains bounding it on every side. It was very, very cold, and I

could scarcely do my work, or hold the pencil, the clouds were gather-

ing up fast ; and before I left the peak it had begun to sleet, I got

under the lea of the ridge for breakfast and made a brew of tea in the

boiling point thermometer pot, of which I gave a tot all round to the

Bhuts, and then descended on the western side into the valley below ;

by skirting the hill sides down into the ravines and over spurs, we

reached by evening the Kiang Gang La, 17,259 feet, on the boundary

of the Kashmir and Rudok territory. At this pass are stationed

throughout the summer months a guard of afew Rudok men,—these

we now met,—and who got a dose of chaff from my Tanksé coolies, for

thus being taken in rear, but they were very good humoured, and said

that they were now off for their homes, and left that day with their

ponies, black tent, tea churn, We. We saw a good many antelope during

the day. Near the pass was a great thickness of the conglomerates,

sandstones, and coarse shales, seen in the Indus valley, which formation

it is most curious to find having so wide an extension in this direction.

This opens out a wide field for geological speculation. The south-west

wind was bitterly cold all the afternoon, and in the tents, though they

were in a somewhat sheltered ravine, it was very cold all night. The

next morning we proceeded down the ravine to the north, which was

grassy for some way. The cooliés who had gone on with the break-

fast things came upon seven wild yaks, who went off down the valley

and were not seen again ; they are, I believe, very wary ; great numbers

are to be seen here later in the season, when they are driven out of

their higher haunts by snow into these lower grazing grounds, which

were covered with their traces. They occupy this part of the country

from about the end of October until March, the larger number roaming

away into the high plains on the north, though some remain through-

out the year in the neighbourhood of the Pangong, but I do not think

are met with south of it. About half way down, the ravine narrows

very considerably, and a mass of rock quite detached rises in the

centre of the valley, a narrow gorge to the west being the direct road

1868.] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 109

to Kyam; by this the coolies proceeded, while I took the east side,

crossing a low connecting ridge. Numbers of hares were seen, and I

bagged a couple for the pot. I fell in near this, with a Mr. Turnor,

a traveller from England ; and when I told him the beat I was going,

he said he would accompany me. He had been searching for the pass

by which M. Schlagintweit had gone towards Ichi; but by the natives

with him (for he could not speak Hindustani) had been taken off in

this direction, quite a contrary point of the compass. We marched on

_ together, reaching at last the main stream of the Chang Chingmo,

called Kyamgo Traggar; this was broad, and a great thickness

of alluvial deposits were exposed on its sides. It was an alluvial plain

in its transition state before the river had cut its way down to the

solid rocks, Its former levels were beautifully shewn in a series of steps

and terraces, of which as many as five could be counted,

At the point where we descended from the alluvial terrace into the

bed of the Kyamgo Traggar, there was a small rill of water, but this

disappeared about half a mile on, where the valley narrowed consi-

derably, and the hills rose on either hand in high cliffs of limestone,

forming a regular gorge, through this the wind blew with great violence

from the eastward, and dark angry clouds hid the mountain tops: it

was evidently setting in for a stormy afternoon. We pushed on,

struggling against the strong gusts of wind, and the gorge widening

as we proceeded at last brought us to a broad valley spread over with

detrital matter. The mountains still towered in cliffs to the south, but

rose very gradually from about 1} miles to the north, towards the

high ridge of Samkang and Chamkang. It now began to snow hard,

and we got under the lea of a low cliff, and sat there until our coolies

came up, when we pitched the tents with great difficulty for the tent

pegs would not hold in the gravelly bed of the stream; but by means

of large boulder stones, this was accomplished. It was a miserable

evening, snow falling until sunset, and lying on the top of the tents

and in dry high spots. When the clouds broke at that hour, beauti-

ful appeared the surrounding mountains with their white covering, the

- fleecy clouds, drifting up against the sides, added greatly to their height:

the whole suffused with a lovely rose hue, and the sun shining upon

the wet surface of the many tinted rocks, brought out their colours

brighter than ever. Fires were soon blazing away, and we got ou

110 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

dinners as if nothing uncomfortable had happened. One must give

the Indian ‘cooks immense credit for the manner in which they work

under the discomfort and difficulties that must from time to time

happen on the march.

The valley ahead of us appeared to end at about six miles distance,

and thus it had been sketched in on the rough reconnoissance I had,

so the next morning it was determined to leave the camp where it stood,

and go on ourselves to the main ridge of the valley, and return by.

evening. After breakfasting we walked up the soft gravelly bed of

the river for about four miles, it then narrowed considerably, and took

a bend to the east-south-east and at three miles further on divided into

two large branches: we followed that having a nearly due east course.

From the mountain spars having approached so close to the broad bed

of the Kyamgo Traggar, the absence of water, and it having also

taken a bend, we had been led to imagine its course here ended, but

this we were both of us much surprised to find was not the case, for

we now beheld ahead of us an enormous broad gravel covered valley,

stretching away to the foot of mountains at least 18 miles further to

the eastward. It was quite impossible to reach the main ridge that

day, so I sent a coolie back to. bring on the tents, This open valley

had the most peculiar aspect of any I had yet seen, but partook in its.

dry gravelly bed a good deal of the nature of those valleys I have seen

between Pal and the Kiting Gang La; its elevation was about 16,400

feet, and its breadth in widest part about two miles; the ridge of hills,

bounding it to the north, lay about four to five miles off, but were only

3,000 feet above it, and the spurs came with a very gradual fall towards

the valley. On the south a very low ridge of about 500 feet, in places

not more than 800, separated this valley plain from another broad one.

of a like character, the ravines of which ran up into the hills in wide.

beds, from 2 to 300 yards in breadth. Several broad lateral drainage ;

plains also formed a junction with the one we were in from the northern —

line of hills that ran parallel with it. Directly ahead alow broad pass

was visible, the mountains rising to the south of it in snowy peaks —

91,000 feet high ; but from the great altitude we stood at, and their

distance 15 miles off, they gave no idea of so great an altitude. Plenty —

of the woody rooted wild lavender, or rather a stunted plant with the

like scent, grew around, but grass was very scanty, only in two or

| i

1868.] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh, ‘aig

three spots was there found barely sufficient for the yaks; a few large

patches of snow still lay on the plain, these (for the hill sides were

now quite bare of it) were the remains of deep drifts formed by the

_ winter winds. Water was also very scarce, and we could obtain none

that day until we reached the spot chosen for camp in the evening.

The distances on this plain seemed interminable, the ends of low pro-

jecting spurs appeared in the clear atmosphere quite close at hand ; and

had not the position of the pass ahead been fixed tolerably correctly on

my plane table, we should, in all probability, have made our plans to

reach it that evening; and my fellow traveller would not believe that

it lay so far to the east as it did. The “mirage” on the flat eravelly

plain had at times the appearance of beautiful blue still lakes ; antelopes

were very numerous; and running across the plain in vicinity of this

appearance, looked double their natural size. We found the sun very

hot in the middle of the day; but while waiting for our tents inthe

alternoon, found a blazing fire very comfortable; and the night, with

the usual great alternation of temperature, was very cold. We were on

our way up the valley early on the 13th August, but did not reach the

foot of the low hill until the afternoon. Antelope still very plentiful,

and the males magnificent creatures, with beautiful long thin horns.

_ The summit of the pass (17,960 feet) was quite 1,500 feet above the

level of the valley at camp, but the ascent very gradual. The snowy

Mountains on the south could now be well seen, their valleys filled with

‘ice, and from the pass in easterly direction lay another valley which

also widened out into another of the same type as that we had marched

up; the hills seemed to fall on both sides, and the country generally

to take a more open plateau like character. I could not spare time to

"proceed any further, [ had much work to finish in the rear, and some

high points to ascend, which the early snow-falls would shut up for

the season. I much longed to explore, but could not do so. Mr.

Turnor went on beyond for two days, and gave me afterwards a sketch

oithe ground. It appeared that some ten miles further, the open

valley turned sharp south, and disclosed a long piece of water like the

I angong, but the mountains shut out the end of it, nor did he even

get so far as the edge to tell me whether it was fresh or salt ; so that

this may be, for all we know, unother rival to the great Pangong Tso.

Turnor saw six or seven miles of its waters, which he described as

112 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

having a breadth nearly equal to that of the above lake. I retraced

my steps therefore down the valley finishing the sketch of it. Some

fine agates and cornelian are to be found in a small ravine at the

spot, where the long southern spur from Chamkang H. 8. abuts on

the Kyamgo Traggar. I made a short ascent here, in order to look

over into the country to the south-east. This presented the appearance

of large broad level valleys that might almost come under the designa-

tion of plains, the undulating ridges that divided them being of so

little elevation. On the 15th August I had returned to the junction

of the road from Pal, with that running down the valley towards the

direction of Leh, and encamped close to the hot springs of Kyam.

These rise at foot of the hills on the left bank ; the alluvial plateau,

on the edge of which they are situated, extends for about half a mile

to the river, and ends ina low cliff. The water rises in several spots,

covering a distance of about 150 yards long. The spring on the

extreme west side is the largest, and temperature the highest: this

I give below. The ground about is wet and swampy, and consequent-

ly beautifully green with grass and weeds; an incrustation of lime

had formed about the springs, but very sparingly.

W esterm springy ee. sac ates oresiens siti, Com pete 103.5 degrees.

Geniinais:, uence me tiet «uae wes ue yas ean aie ch cues 102.0 %

Washer tai. sdelnaen wo nite said ts dell Sitta lee, Nee ‘

From the north-west a large tributary here joined the Chang

Chingmo river, adding so much to the-depth of its waters, that it

was a matter of difficulty crossing at the two fords below Kyam.

The valley now lessened much in breadth, but the alluvial deposits

were still well developed, and were cut into a series of steps by the

gradual falling of the lake, or the diminished waters of the river on a

drier climate commencing. At Pamzal the valley was still narrower,

but these accumulations had disappeared. Here the Chang Chungmo

is left, and the road leads up the Rimdi Loomba to the Marsé Mik La,

(18,452) and thence descends towards the Pangong basin, with a gra-

dual fall down a broad valley passing Phobrang, Yurgo, Tublang to

Liking. At Chuggra, about three miles short of Phobrang, I turned

to the north-west to the Kepting Kiptung la, 17,642. In the

Gedmure Loomba was a green expanse of grass, with a rather severe

ascent to a grazing spot called Boomzi, from this a high broad plateau

1868.] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. irs

extended to the pass ; the line of watershed being so broad, that it was

difficult to assign its exact position. This high wide valley parted

north and south, in the first direction to the Ororotze La, 18,050 feet,

only used by shepherds when taking flocks to graze in the lower

courses of the Chang Chingmo river.

The scenery here was grand and very striking from its novel nature.

On the broad high plateau are three small lakes, from which flows

away a stream bordered with bright green grass, running parallel to

slopes. of talus backed by mountains over 20,000, culminating in peak

Shayok (No. 2) 21,000 feet. These mountains rise very abruptly and

send down a row of glaciers that end in moraines upon the plain of

the Koh Loomba. The sides of this mountain mass are rugged in the

extreme, and topped with perpetual snow. Shayok (No. 2) throws

down amass of ice covered with moraine débris, which abuts upon

the river itself. From the foot of this glacier, I hardly ever saw a

grander sight than the steep falls of rock and ice of 3,500 feet ina

horizontal distance of only three miles to the highest point. This

portion of the Pangong mountains is well worth the visit of a traveller.

At the time of my visit the increasing cold had driven the shepherds

with their flocks and herds from the higher grounds, and we found

some families at Montol, from which place there is a path over the

mountains to Miglib. I followed the Koh Loomba valley down towards

the lake, where it ends in a narrow gorge opening out into a consider-

able broad expanse of open ground, on which are scattered some small

hamlets containing only three or four families each, viz., Phobrang,

Virgo, Tublang, and last of all, where the stream débouches into the

plain of the Pangong itself, is Lookoong. Coming down the defile

upon Yirgo, is a very peculiar and striking peak overhanging the road.

Its high rounded point is called by the natives ‘ Chomo Kong Go,”

or the “ Woman’s Head,” it having some resemblance to the shock

head of a Tibetan belle.

Lookoong is situated about two miles from the spot where the

waters of the Koh Loomba join the lake ; this distance is covered

with sand, white and glaring to the eyes, and the sides of the ravine

are cut down about 12 feet, forming a cliff of that height on either

side. I did not see any fish here, the body of water in the stream,

though much reduced from the quantity that rises at its sources,

114 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. [No. 2,

is still very considerable, though not equal to that of the Chushal ||

stream. had now finished the whole of my work, and went on

that day as far as Miglib, thence to Tangsd, where I paid up my

coolies and for yaks, &c. The men had behaved very well, never

had I any occasion to be put out with them. From Tanksé I re-

turned to the Indus valley over the mountains by way of the Kay

La, 18,256 feet. The Kay Loomba river is fringed with grass —

and bushes for a considerable distance up, and at a height of 16,300 —

feet flows out of a lake about 400 to 500 yards long, of very deep |

clear water. It owes its origin to a large landslip from the leit

side of the ravine, by which cause a very considerable portion of —

the hill side has moved forward and been disrupted. The rock 1s

granitoid, the same as the Chang La, and forms the main axis of

this mountain chain between the Indus and Shayok. From the lake

to the pass, the scenery was wild as wild could be; near its source —

the ravine turned south and was nearly level for some distance,

finally ending amid a mass of scattered rocks, débris, and snow; 7

large beds of which still filled the ravines and lay in patches on the ©

summit of the ridge. The wind blew with great violence from the

west-south-west on reaching the pass, with that cutting, piercing,

unsparing manner it does at these elevations; behind the shelter

of some rocks I boiled the thermometers, and then descended into”

the valley below. All my followers now on the return journey

walked their best; and by the evening we were well into the culti-

vation of the valley above Chimray. The next day I reached Leh, |

and was glad to meet some brother Surveyors, also on their return —

from their respective surveys.

In the foregoing pages, reference has often been made to the great

accumulations of boulders, gravels more or less angular, clays and

sands, near Tanksé and in the Chang Chingmo ; it is necessary to

add a few words in conclusion regarding the cause I assign for their |

formation. This is, I think, clearly glacial. Proofs are not wanting

that, in ages past, the valleys of the Himalaya contained glaciers of

enormous length and thickness, the only prototypes of which are t 7

be seen in those now filling the valleys of the Karakoram, far north

in Baltistan. About half way between the villages of Kungun and

1868.] Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladakh. 115

Gond lying on the Sind river a tributary of the Jhelum, Kashmir,

and at the village of Gond itself, marks of glacial action are un-

mistakeable in the deep grooves or strix-marks cut in the hard

metamorphic slates, at a height of about 150 or 200 feet above the

present level of the river. This point is 20 miles in a direct line

from the head of the valley, where at present some very small glaciers

exist, How much further this glacier extended towards the plain

of the Kashmir valley, it is impossible to say ; but at the débouche-

ment 10 miles below, thick beds of débris are to be seen ; the Sind

river is still of very considerable size, and glacial accumulations are

very Soon swept away, as may be seen in now existing large glaciers

below their terminal cliffs.

Taking 5,500 feet as the lowest limit of its extension, every valley

in the vicinity of a range equal in mean altitude to the mountains

north of Kashmir, must have once been the bed of these moving

‘Tivers of ice. The indications of glacier extension are also seen on

the north of the Zogi La, between the present glacier of Muchoi

and Pundras, at 10 miles from the pass. It is my belief that the

Dras plain was once buried in ice, and that this region presented

much the same appearance that the neighbourhood of the Mustakh

does now. The imagination can hardly conceive the enormous

Magnitude that glaciers, like those in the Karakoram, must have

“once attained ;* and that they extended into the Skardo valley on

the Indus, 70 to 80 miles, is by no means improbable. Smaller

ones from the ridge to the south we know did, for near Kepchin,

afine mass of moraine protrudes into the plain nearly a quarter of

a mile, having very large angular blocks on its surface. Moreover,

this moraine must have been formed after the valley around Skardo

had assumed somewhat its present configuration, for this basin has

at some period been filled up with beds of lacustrine deposit, gravels,

and conglomerates, to a height that overtops the present isolated

tock rising above the town, the coarser beds being the highest in

the series ; but it is quite natural to suppose that, on a milder climate

Succeeding, these larger alluvial deposits would be the first to be

removed by the extinction of glaciers further down the valley,

* The existing glacier of Baltoro is 86 miles long in direct horizontal

distance.

116 Notes on the Pangong lake district of Ladalch. [No. 2,

while the cold was yet intense enough to preserve those around

and above Skardo. Though the vast accumulations of detritus in

the Skardo basin were, I conceive, due to the glaciers from the high

ranges, both to the north and south of the Indus near Basho,—which

glaciers must. have extended close down to and dammed up the river,

it does not follow as some might be led to suppose that the whole

mass of such a mighty barrier should be formed of ice. It »was

the débris of moraines that would have composed this, from its

continued accumulation in so narrow a gorge as the Indus there

presents. . These exuviz there piled up, would have raised the bed of

the gorge, and the bed of the lateral valley as well, also elevating

the active cause, viz., the glacier itself; and in course of time the

whole valley level would have been brought up to the height of

the great deposits around Skardo. ‘The section below (Fig. 6.) will,

I hope, explain my meaning, in which a, a’, a” represent the successive

levels of the gorge and corresponding lateral glaciers.

Fig. 6.

Innumerable other instances can be seen of ice action throughout

the Kashmir territory ; I will instance near the Fotu La, on the road ~

to Leh, a spot now far removed from such causes in action. Hven in”

the valley of the Jhelum, below Bara Mila, the effects of a glacial —

period can be seen. That glaciers filling lateral ravines have extend-_

° ; e . oie )

ed across the main valleys at some periods of their existence is most —

Jour: As Soc: Beng: XXXVI1. Pt. 2.

P1:V.

Ly WEN ae

<3, © ge 7

ay Re py .,) y

FBO EE) oe onal

: De EV, Or

Cas) oe) : NE res

; AWeg? n\:

z= veg, Mie

y a WG “ES Ty

tao

Me Ge 1167. Ra iy

< ;

Tig gop

_ xKaluklata ‘ *Chichacota

S Th. 2 2" "haps

\ ‘ ih F atyram hob ma

3 } — \

| oT es fVhubilkooree aaa Sig

, ~

PART or THE REFERENCES.

B HOOTA N DO OA RS. Clay and Conglomerates. ..|lflll|

Teritary Sandstones........ ——

Limestone * Numniutitic [65535

Te WL

. Gueiss re

Lis EE ee he de CSG See oe

SCALE 32 MILES Yo AN INCH

32 Le 8 + ‘

’ oe MILES

— = 2 Se 4°" ‘ i

Litho. at the Sur. Genl's Office Calcutta 18é8.

f - ,

’ + “i !

- .

1868.] Geological features of Bhootun Doours. rt?

probable; and in nearly every case where gravel deposits are seen,

some side ravine below, having its sources high up, can be pointed

out, whose glacier has formed a temporary stoppage to the main river

into which it ran: and such effects are still in progress in the

highest ranges of the mighty Himalayas. When glaciers extended

down to 5,000 fect, what must have been the appearance of the upper

Shayok, Indus and Chang Chingmo, where 12 to 13,000 is the

lowest level of the country ; contemplation of such a scene in the

‘mind’s eye renders the formation of lakes and the accumulations

of detrital matter a natural sequence very easy to imagine. Further,

when such powerful forces of ice and water were in action, their

results would have extended far down the main drainage lines, and

are to be sought for at the ddbouchements of such rivers as the

Indus, the Sutlej, Ganges, &c.; and I believe that the more recent

accumulations of immense boulder beds composed of rocks from the

inner ranges, such as may be seen in the Noon Nuddee, Deyrah

Dhoon, and other places along the base of the Himalayas, may owe

their existence to a glacial period in those mountains,

LENIN DIP tte

Notes on Geological features of the country near foot of hills in the

Western Bhootan Dooars.—By Oaptain H. Hi. Gopwin- AustEn,

ff. BR. G, S., Topographical Survey.

[Received, 26th March, 1867.]

_ In the report ‘On the coal of Assam, with Geological notes on the

adjoining districts to the south,’ &c. by H. B. Medlicott, Esq., Deputy

Superintendent of the Geological Survey, published in the Memoirs of

that Survey,* allusion has been made to certain geological features

of the hills bounding the Western Bhootan Dooars.t

_ A few more explanatory notes on the formations to be seen there

may prove of interest in connection with the above paper, and lead

others who may have the opportunity to observe them more closely.

The base of the Himalayas is there so densely wooded that much

_ * Mem, Geol. Survey of India, Vol. IV. p. 387. See pages 392 and 435, 436,

+ See the map of “ Bhootan and country adjacent” on the scale of 4 miles

_ to the inch for all places mentioned in this paper.

| 17

118 Geological features of Bhootan Dooars. [No. 2,

is necessarily often hidden, and interesting and important beds are

easily overlooked on a hurried scramble through the country. The

point where I first noticed the absence of the usual sandstone forma-

tion, corresponding to the lowest Siwalik formations, so similar in

every way to that ina like position in the Deyrah Dhoon, was near

Dalingkote, where the Tsel river leaves the hills; here I only

observed a low terrace of clay and boulders, quite a fuviatile deposit

on the river bank, the pounding spurs from the main hills being of

stratified gneiss. A short distance towards the Teesta on the west,

these sandstones make their appearance and continue up to that river

rising to a considerable height and thickness. The remains of a much

larger accumulation of clays and conglomerates ig seen some three

miles up the Tsel towards the fort of Dalingkote forming a narrow

flat terrace overhanging the river. The lowest terrace of clays and

ervavels extends away towards the plains, covered with a dense forest for

eight miles, blending gradually with them into a clay country clothed

with high grass. Proceeding from the sel river to the Tsakamchu,

and thence towards Sipchu, the beds of two large streams are crossed,

viz. the Nurchu and Mochu. Between these drainage lines, the road —

passes over a sub-angular debris from the adjacent hills of the gneiss

rocks and clays, the terminal cliff being of considerable height and

becoming much higher as one proceeds east. The lowest levels of the

courses of streams which are below those south of Dalingkote, |

gradually increase as the longitudinal depression of the Jholdaka is

approached, so that on and about the Mochu, the conglomerate cliffs

rise in fine proportions, the upper level surface of the terrraces being

constant. But I must remark here that this is far below the highest

level of like beds on the west of the Jholdaka or Déchu, shewing that

these last have suffered the effects of denudation to a less extent,

unless, in the instance of conglomerates on the Nurchu and

Mochu, we are to suppose them to be later fluviatile deposits of those

rivers. A very characteristic feature of the country in this part of th ¢

Dooars is the very sudden termination of these gravels and clays at

about six miles from the base of the hills in a more or less abrupt

scarp running east and west; this outer boundary rises higher than

most of the intervening ground between it and the hills (which is

ungle and forest)

deeply cut into by ravines and covered with dense J

“

1868.] Geological features of Bhootan Dooars. 119

forming at Tsulcha Pahar and Rungamutti isolated high points of

ground. The watershed between the Dholla and Jholdaka js thrown

off from Tsulcha and running due south towards Ramsahai Hath,

terminates there in a marked low scarp of sand and gravel about 20

feet high, beyond this a more clayey level begins and blends

into the dead level of the plains. Looking due east from Tsul-

cha over the Jholdaka, the conglomerate deposits are seen abut-

ting on the river, and terminate at Tondoo in a high cliff about

120 feet high irregularly but horizontally stratified, some of the

boulders being of large dimensions, one remarkably large, about

10 feet high, lay at the foot of the cliff. About half a mile below

this in the bed of the Jholdaka the masses of gneissose rock were oj;

very large dimensions, their size and position so far from the

hills requiring the existence of more than the ordinary transporting

power of moving water. This cliff follows the left bank of the

Jholdaka and the road to Sipchu runs at the base of it as far as

the trijunction of the Jiti and Sipchu with the Jholdaka, Looking

up the first named river, the masses of conglomerate beds with clays,

are seen to rise into very considerable proportions, and towards the

east form low hills running up to the main mass of the mountains.

I was unable to proceed far up the Jiti nulla, but it is far from

—anlikely that the sandstone formation may be found there, the look

“of the gorge gave somewhat the appearance of being cut through

“these rocks. The greater elevation of the newer deposits on this side

of the Jholdaka also favours this idea, as they may have been raised by

‘the upthrow of the sandstone on which they are seen to rest when

both are present, and I may say generally unconformably. At the

Jiti nuddee the road to Sipchu rises to the top of the high terrace

that overlooks the left bank of the Jholdaka for the rest of the

distance. No one, as they proceed, can fail to remark the succeeding

P adden rises on to higher levels sharply and straightly defined. This

with a slight slope to the main surface causes the mass of this

formation at Sipchu to be of very great thickness; it is there seen

abutting against the gneiss rocks quite 500 feet above the bed of the

Dechu, and no trace of the tertiary sandstones are here to be scen.

Close beyond this the conglomerates have been removed, and the

gneiss extends low down to the bed of the river Déchu, but between

120 Geological features of Bhootan Dooars. [No. 2,

Sipchu and Jangtsa a remnant comes in asa valley deposit ina

narrow high ledge overhanging the Déchu, and at Jangtsa the highest

level must be quite 800 to 1,000 feet above it. This level ledge can be

traced in a greater or less degree up the valley, being most conspicu-

ously marked at the junctions of the main lateral valleys. Looking

over the face of the country just described, at the abrupt termination

of the conglomerate and clay beds at Tsulcha, &c. and the successive

and regular high cut terraces on the east of the Jholdaka, no part of |

the outer hills that I have seen, gave more the appearance of

denudation due to the action of the sea than this: all seemed in

accordance with a slow but intermittent last elevation of the land.

The large mass of conglomerates, north of Tondoo, disappear before

reaching Chamoorchi: there in the gorge of the Pyim Chu, only a low

terrace of transported water-worn materials brought down evidently

by that river is seen sloping gradually out into the plain towards —

Ambari. The hill on which the fort of Chamoorchi stands is of the

metamorphic rocks, some of the beds being of a more shaly nature,

but all micaceous. Neither here, nor on the right bank of the

Pyim Chu was any trace of the tertiary sandstone formation, nor did

I see it any where the whole distance to Buxa, not even in the re-

entering angle of the large river, the Boro Torsa. In the Chamoorchi

Dooar, between the rivers Dahina and Raiti, is a dry flat plain, more

or less stony on the surface, open and only covered with grass. It

extends as far south as Garkunta and Huldabari Hath: the*

termination of higher level is very regularly marked also by the

sudden rise of numerous small streams that flow due south, through

a country where the surface beds are clay and free of pebbles. The

distance that the gravel beds extend from the base of the hills, and

these streams take their rise, is very regular, and conforms very closely

with their contour at 8 to 10 miles. L also noticed that the bouldery |

character of the beds of the larger streams ceased at the same distance,

the Jholdaka, the largest of them becoming at once sluggish, broad,

and with a sandy bed at Ramsahai Hath, and the stony bed of the

Raiti and Demdema are dry for a long distance ; these outer gravels”

are evidently the most superficial recent deposits that have spread

away from the several hill streams. East of the Raiti a long slope of

evavel and poulders extends from the foot of the hills some 8 to 10)

1868.] Geological features of Bhootan Dooars. 121

miles, these end at Rangali Bujna in abrupt but low scarps much

intersected with ravines. This scarp is seen on the left hand on the

road following the right bank of the Boro Torsa that leads to Balla ;

its materials appear to have been carried out this distance by the

above river, and are of very recent origin. About four miles from

Tazigong, the site of the Bhutea stockade, the spurs from the

mountains abut on the river, and a new and isolated feature in the

geology of this part occurs. The rock is a hard compact limestone

very similar to beds in the limestone of Masuri. The mass is of no

great extent and dips at a very high angle to N. W; the lower beds

being shaly and thin bedded. I found no fossils, so that its age can

only be conjectured; certainly older than the middle tertiary, it may

be nummulitic. The Balla hill in the immediate continuation of this

limestone on the opposite side of the Torsa is a micaceous schistose

rock, and in the bed of a small ravine near the foot of the ascent to

Tazigong, I found several pieces of very pure soft steatite, which

I was told the Bhuteas cut into small cups. I was unable to examine

the foot of the hills to the east of Balla, having much ground to

survey to the south, but looking in that direction the termination of the

mountain spurs appeared somewhat detached from the mass, as if due

to newer beds lying at the base of them; they may either be a

continuation of the sandstone at Buxa, or the higher conglomerate

beds.

To the east of the Boro Torsa, no marked feature denotes where

the gravels end, the level of the country is very equable, the beds of

the streams being very sandy, bouldery and dry for a distance of 10

miles. The Basera river, one of the largest, is dry nearly as far down

as Nathabari in the month of February ; but, although no scarp marks

the commencement of a lower level in the country, this line coincides

with what I have before said respecting the Balla and Qhamoorchi

‘Dooars. The larger streams have generally a narrow strip of kader

Jand bounded with a low scarp marking their former, higher and

lateral extension.

At Buxa the sandstones suddenly come in with the accompanying

higher and unconformable conglomerate beds, the former with the

prevailing high dip towards the main hills. I have already noticed

the occurrence of this formation in a short paper in this Journal

122 Geological features of Bhootan Dooars. . [No. 2,

(1865), Ihave now an addition of some interest, fiz. that in the

bed of Deemah nuddee a short “distance west of Buxa, which flows

through the sandstones and conglomerates, Assistant Surgeon J. Rich-

ardson has since informed me he found the fossil molar of an elephant,

probably washed out of the upper beds.

The absence of the tertiary sandstones at the base of the Himalayas

for a distance of over 50 miles is, as remarked by Mr. Medlicott, an

anomalous case, and if any remnant be found hereafter, it must be

small. In the deeper gorges of the main rivers such as the Jholdaka,

Dahina, and Boro Torsa, they would be the more likely to shew, as

they do on the Teesta, if nowhere else, but we only find stratified

vocks of the most recent formations with the single exception of a

small mass of limestone thrust up at a high angle at Balla. The

question arises where are these usual formations, they suddenly

disappear east of the Teesta, and as suddenly reappear east of the

Torsa in equal force. Are they still below the surface over this

area, or have they never existed, one of the suppositions brought

forward by Mr. Medlicott. If they have ever found a place

here, to what forces are we to attribute this single instance of total

widespread denudation in so long a line of formations. Taking great.

physical features into consideration, it may be worthy of remark

that the country and its rocks under consideration is to the south

and east on the edge of a great natural basin of depression that must

have been receiving for ages the drainage of the whole of the Hastern

Himalayas, and considering its distance from the sea, the neighbour-

hood of Kooch Behar is yet one of the lowest in Bengal on the north

and east. From Balla there runs in a north-westerly direction a high

ridge, 8 to 10,000 feet, given off from the great Himalayan mass of

Gyepmochi, and this narrow but high feature runs parallel to the deep

transverse valley of the Am Mochu, following in all probability a

great fault, and the existence of which is, in a measure, proved by the

sudden termination of the limestone im the direction of its strike at

Balla, for in the Dootia nulla on the left bank of the Torsa, I was

unable to find any, but metamorphic rocks in its bed; and if the

limestone be continuous, this ravine would cut through the whole of

it. Lam, therefore, more of opinion that the elevatory force that has

raised the tertiary sandstones into the position they are found along

1868. | Geological features of Bhootan Dooars. 123

_ the whole base of the Himalayas, often to a height of nearly 3,000

feet above the sea, has here been exerted in a less degree, and that

they are to be sought for yet below the upper conglomerates more or

less deeply seated at a short distance from the base of the hills, as I

have shewn by the dotted line in map (Plate V). Should further

exploration shew more clearly how these sandstones near the Teesta

disappear eastwards, how they commence again near and to the west

of Buxa, and that they lie deeply seated in the intervening space,

it will not a little form a connecting link geologically, though not

orographically, with the hill mass south of the Brahmaputra; it is

curious to find the last low eminences of gneiss in the Assam valley,

viz. at Dhoobrie and Mateabug as noticed by Mr. Medlicott, to be

upon a line in the direction of this great gneiss mass of the Himalayahs

at Gyepmochi, the area so devoid of the tertiary deposits lying

between them,

Oct. 1866.

J0°U RN AL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

aeMlane

Part IL—PHYSICAL SCIENCE,

No. III.—1868.

On Dwewiines, Works or Art, Laws, Wc. or toe Karens ; embracing

Query 50 to Query 76 ;—~by Ruy. F. Mason, D. D. Missionary ta

the Karen people.*

[Received 7th January, 1865].

The following pages contain the answers to “ Queries respecting

the human race, addressed to travellers, by a Committee of the

British Association for the advancement of science,” from query 50 to

query 76 inclusive, furnished at the request of Col. Phayre, and with

the previous sheets, complete the replies.

No answer is given to query 73, for obvious reasons. It asks the

results of missionary labours on the people, and for a scientifie associa-

tion, the answer should be furnished by one who is not a Missionary.

Dwellings.

50. The character of the houses the Karens inhabit, varies with

the character of the cultivation pursued. Among the Red Karens and

Toungthus, where the cultivation is permanent, the same ground

being cultivated for a succession of years, the houses are comparatively

permanent. But most of the Karen tribes change their fields annually,

and move every two or three years to be near their cultivation; and

there build temporary houses of bamboos, leaves and ratan. They

clear a few acres of land, burn them over near the close of the dry

* This paper is a continuation of the answers to queries 1—50, on the same

Subject, published in Journal As, Society, Bengal, 1866, vol. xxxv. pt.ii. p.1 é&e,

126 Dwellings, works of art, laws, de. of the Karens. — [No. 3,

season, the ashes serving as manute, and when the first showers

fall, they plant their paddy. They do not scatter it over the ground,

as in the cultivation of lowland paddy, but one walks over the field in

front with a pointed bamboo, with which he makes holes in the ground,

afoot or more apart, and another follows dropping a few grains into the

holes; and there they leave them for the showers to fill in the earth.

After the harvest has been gathered, the field lies fallow for several

years ; while crops are raised in like manner in other localities.

Bach village has its own lands; and if they are large, in comparison

with the inhabitants, they are able to cultivate new fields for six or

seven years; but if their lands are small, they are compelled to come

back to their former cultivation in three or four years; but after so

short a period, the jungle on it is too small to produce any good

amount of ashes, and the crops are poor. In this way the Karens

move around their scant domains, like the moon in her orbit, so as to

present the same phases, alter intervals of very few years.

While each village has its own lands and boundaries, as one, and

which they call a country, the lands of each village are divided among

many owners, as in other countries. Land is often bought and sold,

and in the instances that have fallen under my own observation, the

price paid has been from two to three rupees per acre. Like other

communities, there are some too poor to own land, and these are

allowed, by the landowners, to cultivate at a fixed rate of one rupee

for every hundred baskets harvested.

In the north, where wars have been prevalent, the people have

been necessitated to live close together for mutual protection. The

Bghais, Mopghas and some other tribes, have usually but one building

sor a whole village. It is built like a bazar, with a square in th

middle. There isa walk all around the building, with rooms opening

snto it on each side. Every married couple has a room and a fire-plac

of their own for domestic purposes, while the hall is common property,

to which women often take their weaving, and men their mats and

basket-making. :

All around the hall is a raised platform, on which the young men

of the village sleep, and where strangers are lodged. The building ig

of bamboo, usually raised some eight or ten feet above the ground,

with rows of pig-sties ranged under the rows of rooms, while the

1868. ] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 127

fowls often roost on the beams over the rooms, but sometimes below

in connection with the pigs.

Among the southern tribes, each family has commonly a separate

house, though sometimes several families of relatives occupy the same

building. These houses are built on one plan. The front is at one

end, where the ladder, by which they are entered, leads into the hall;

which is a verandah, where visitors are received, and where both men

and women work. The main body of the building consists of one

room, with a fire-place in the middle that serves to divide it into two

apartments ; in which different members of the family, when large,

sleep.

The Pwos of the Tenasserim Provinces have the singular custom

of always building their houses so as to face to the east, but they

can give no account of its origin; and it is not observed by the other

tribes.

The size of Karen villages varies from ten to one hundred houses or

families ; and in some of the Red Karen villages there are two or

three hundred families.

Monuments.

51—52. No monuments of any kind are raised by the Karens, or

have ever been known to be raised. They prefer that their localities

should be unknown, and wish to ignore their existence to: all the

outside world.

Works of Art.

_ The Karens are singularly deficient in works of art. In the Tenas-

Serim Provinces, the only works they can exhibit are baskets and mats,

which are very neat. The mats have various forms woven in them,

to which they attribute a divine origin. When god was about to die,

as the legend runs, he called all nations to him to receive his dying

legacies ; but the Karens being tardy in coming, they arrived only in

time to see his mats burning, and to note the figures on the ashes which

had been woven into them; and they have made their mats, they say,

alter these patterns ever since.

_ Among the Bghais, we find a few that can work in iron, so as to

forge their own axes and bills, hoes and spears, On proceeding to

the Red Karens, silversmiths are met with who make all the common

female ornaments, as rings, bangles, ear-knobs, and the like. The

128 Dwellings, works of art, laws, de. of the Karens. _—_[No. 3,

Tarus, further north, make matchlocks, some of which that I have seen,

ave very well done, and sell for thirty rupees each. They display no

ingenuity, however, in these works. They are mere imitations of Shan

articles. While the Karens originate nothing, they show as great a

capability to imitate, as the Chinese. They can learn anything.

Boys who never saw a chisel or plane or saw, will readily learn to use

them, as well as a Chinaman. Men who were called Loo-yaing, “ wild

men,” by the Burmese a few years ago, can now do all the work of a

printing office, as well and as readily as Huropeans with the same

amount of training. Others can use the chain and the prismatic

compass in the field, and the plotting scale and protractor, and- paint-

box inthe house, and produce unaided a very creditable plan of a piece

of land, while still others can use the sextant, measure heights and

distances, take the sun’s meridional altitude, and calculate the latitude.

Karen women can generally weave, and embroider very prettily ;

but there is a tribe or clan in the valley of the Salween, the We-was,

in which there was not a single woman of the whole tribe, when the

missionaries went first among them, that knew how to weave. They

buy all their clothes from the neighbouring tribes, and have no

peculiar dress of their own.

The Karens have a few musical instruments of their own manufac-

ture, but they are quite rude. They make pipes or whistles out of

bamboos; and bugles out of buffaloes’ horns, or the horns of the antelope.

They have also harps, guitars, jews’-harps, and a kind of dulcimer.

They are remarkably fond of the sounds of gongs, and kyee-zees,

a taste they have in common with the Shansand Chinese. The Kyee-

zee is little known, but it may be described as a large gong, with a

cylinder a little less than its own circumference attached to one side;

or it may be viewed as a pell-metal drum, with one end open. It is

struck like a gong, and gives forth a sound like a gong, but not so

shrill. They are manufactured by the Shans, and have ornamental

circles and bands with representations of birds and fish; and on the

outer circle are four raised frogs, as the figure of the cat sometimes

surmounted the ancient sistrum. Whether the sound of the instru-

ment is intended to emulate the voice of the frog or not, must be

left to conjecture, for no one can give any reason for the frog being —

there.

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &e. of the Karens. 129

The Karens attach a fabulous value to these instruments, and often

pay absurd prices for those that have good tones. They have dis-

tinctive names for ten different kinds, which they pretend to distinguish

by the sound, the poorest of which sells for one hundred rupees, and

the best fora thousand. Besides these, there are several inferior kinds

with prices varying from thirty to one hundred rupees. When a good

kyee-zee is struck, the Karens say the music softens the heart, and the

women weep for the friends they have lost, or from whom they are

separated.

The possession of kyee-zees is what constitutes a rich Karen, No

one is considered rich without them, whatever may be his other pos-

sessions. very one who has money, endeavours to turn it into kyee-

zees, and a village that has many of them is the envy of other villages,

and is often the cause of wars to obtain possession of them.

Domestic Animals.

54. The only quadrupeds, entitled to be considered domestic animals

among the Karens, are hogs and dogs. The hog is the small Chinese

variety, and is very extensively raised, both for food and for sale. It

is used in all their offerings as most acceptable to the unseen spirits ;

and no idea of uncleanness is attached to it, any more than to the Ox,

the buffalo, or the goat. They are exclusively in charge of the women,

and each hog distinguishes the voice of his mistress, though a dozen

be calling at the same time, with unerring accuracy, and runs to her

with greatest alacrity for the food he expects at her hands.

A few solitary oxen and buffaloes are occasionally seen, purchased

from the Shans or Burmese, but they cannot be regarded as Karen

domestic animals, any more than the elephant which is met with here

and there. The Pakus and Mannepghas raise a few goats, and the

Red Karens ponies, as well as oxen quite extensively ; but these are

local and exceptinal.

- Dogs are found everywhere, and are eaten by the Bghais as readily

as by the Chinese, but not by the southern Karen tribes. The pariah

isthe most common variety, but the Karens raise also a small dog

allied to the smooth-haired terrier, which they use for hunting. It is

not abundant, but is highly valued, the price of a good one being

equal to that of an ordinary pony or buffalo. Deer, it is said, are so

alraid of them, that they lose strength when they find one of these

130 Dwellings, works of art, laws, dc. of the Karens. [No. 3,

dogs after them, and become an easy prey to the hunter. When they

start anything, they go yelping after it all day, so that a Karen has

only to follow on, and he is sure of his game in the end. They will

follow a large snake that the Karens eat, as readily as a deer, but they

will not attack it. Tiger cats, palm cats, and civet cats they attack

and kill. They fear nothing, excepting tigers and leopards. If they

come on a tiger’s track, they run back.

Cats are not domesticated by the Karens, for they say, “‘ We cannot

eat them, while they devour the rats we wish to eat ourselves.””

Fowls are raised almost universally. Most of them appear to be

the common domestic fowl, but a few are the Burmese domestic race

of the wild jungle fowl; anda few are met, in the southern districts,

with the membrane that covers the bones black, or nearly so, Gallus

Morio, Temm. It is not found among the northern Karens.

Government.

55—56. The government of the Karens may be compared to that of

the American Indians at present, or to that of the Scottish clans in the

days of Rob Roy. Asa whole, they are ungoverned and ungovernable.

The Pakus are the hereditary enemies of the Pwos, the Bghais of the —

Pakus, the Gaikhos of the Behais, and the Red Karens of all. Then

there is not a village, perhaps, without an unsettled feud with some

other village. Their districts are ill-defined, and they quarrel and

fight, like civilized people, over a few roods of land.

If a man is devoured by a tiger, while on a journey, the price of

his life is demanded by his relatives of his companion who invited him

to take the journey, and they constitute themselves both judge,

jury, and executive. Should any one innocently introduce small-pox,

or cholera, or be supposed to introduce it, or any other disease into a

village, all the deaths are charged to him; and if he has not property

to pay, the debt remains for his children or grandchildren to liquidate.

Each village, with its scant domain, is an independent state, and

every chief a prince ; but now and then, a little Napoleon arises, who -

subdues a kingdom to himself, and builds up an empire. The dynas-

ties, however, last only with the controlling mind. 4

Before the country was occupied by the English, Lai-quai, a Bghai_

chief, ruled all the Bghais, and Gaikhos north of Toungoo. He waged

war at will with bis subjects on the neighbouring tribes ; and by

1868. ] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 131

furnishing the zenanas of the Burmese governors with comely Karen

girls, whom he kidnapped, the chieftainship of the Burmese district on

the plains was given him, and he reigned aking. He died, and his

empire died with him.

Twenty-five years ago, I found some ten thousand Karens in the

valley of the Yuneselon, under the rule of a great chief, called La-kee,

At his death none of his sons or sons-in-law could keep the kingdom

from falling to pieces, or prevent its crystallizing into the same ele-

ments in which La-kee found it.

In many districts the chieftainship is considered hereditary, but in

more it is elective; as much as the chief of the executive is in

America. The people select the man that pleases them best for chief,

no matter what his antecedents may have been; and if after a trial,

he does not please them, they elect another. In this way divisions

sometimes occur, one part of a village adhering to one chief, and

another part to another chief, and they perhaps settle the question by

a fight.

In many villages that do not pay taxes or tribute, there are no

regularly constituted chiefs. The man with the most property, and

the largest family possessing the power without the name.

57—59. There are no divisions of caste among the Karens, and

though found in many tribes and clans, the division seems to have

arisen from the original separation of families, and communities,

Laws,

- 60. Although there are no written forms of law among the Karens,

yet there is in fact a code of laws preserved in the traditionary

commands of the elders that meets all the relations of man to man.

‘The elders are the depositories of the laws, both moral and political,

both civil and criminal, and they give them as they receive them,

and as they have been brought down from past generations. Every

village has its elders, who are expected to teach the young people

to do good and to avoid evil. A village without an elder well stored

With traditionary instruction would be regarded like a parish in

England without a clergyman. To indicate their usefulness, the

Karens use this saying: ‘Where there is no smith, the axes are

soit; where there isno cock, the rooms are still,” That is, the

132 Dwellings, works of art, laws, dsc. of the Karens. __[No. 3,

elder gives efficiency to the people, as the smith does to their axes ;

and excites them to action, as the cock by crowing arouses the sleepers

to their work.

The following lectures are from the lips of Bghai elders. Others

might not use precisely the same language, but all would convey the

same ideas.

Famines.—Children and grandchildren, you are children. You

do not know, and have never yet seen difficulties and trouble,

But I am old, difficulties I have seen, troubles I have found.

I have been in scarcity and famine. Great waters I have met,

and mastered; great fires, I have contended with, and overcome,

Momentous feuds I have known ; with mighty wars I have been —

acquainted, 1 am familiar with heat, and I am familiar with rain. I

have seen irruptions of rats destroy the crops; 1 have seen the Talaings

and Burmans overrun the country. I have known famines, when the

people had to dig deep to obtain poisonous wild yams ; and I have

seen them die with exhaustion at the diggings. I have known the

famine so severe that a man has deceived his associate, and given him —

a meal of rice and curry, but no sooner had he done eating it, than he

seized him as a thief, declaring that he had stolen the food, and then

sold him into slavery for the theft. I have known a kyee-zee sold for

a sheaf of paddy, and a basket of paddy for a basket of money.

Industry.—Children and grandchildren, do not be lazy, work hard.

If you work hard, you will obtain paddy, you will obtain rice ; and

you can sell it, and obtain money, and what you have to spare, you

can take care of; and when times of scarcity and famine come, you

can bring out your stores of paddy, and eat and be satisfied, and have

enough for your children. and grandchildren.

If you are lazy, you will have no paddy, you will have no agreeable

— food, and you will have nothing with which to buy. When the famine

ig unendurable, you will steal to eat; and you will then be sold into

slavery ; or if you do not steal, you will die.

Observe what I say to you, work and labour with cheerfulness and

gladness. Grasp the helve of the cleaver firmly, hold it with a strong

grip. Hxpose yourselves to the heat of the sun, and to the pouring

yains, and the fierce winds. Bend down your backs, hold firmly the —

hoe, and live among the weeds. What you do, do thoroughly, -

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 3e

completely. We love happiness; and our greatest happiness is to clear

our fields and to build our houses.

Itell you truly, every thing is in the earth, Therefore I say to

you, bend down your backs, grasp the hoe, hoe deep, weed clean ;

and you will obtain eatables. Then, in times of scarcity and famine

you will be able to purchase kyee-zees, Grasp the axe firmly, and clear

awide field; and you will obtain abundance of paddy. Then when

times of scarcity and famine come, you will beable to buy buffaloes,

and they will be the gains of your labour, the work of your hands,

If you want to obtain gongs, weed and make it all clean around

your paddy. Then when times of scarcity and famine come, you will

be able to purchase gongs ; and they will be the gains of your labour,

the work of your hands.

If you want to obtain silver, plant your fields industriously, and

when the rains come, your paddy will spring up abundantly, and you

will have good crops. Then you will be able to procure silver, and

it will be the gains of your labour, the work of your hands,

Ti you want to obtain hogs and fowls, take cotton and make clothes,

Then you will be able to procure hogs and fowls,* and they will

be the gains of your labour, the work of your hands,

If you want handsome clothes, spin thread diligently, put in the

woot and the warp, and weave. Then you will obtain clothes, and

they will be the gains of your labour, the work of your hands,

_ All things are in the earth, and every one who will work hard,

will obtain them ; ‘and he will have eatables and drinkables, and’ will

become rich, and will have in abundance. When he dies, he will

‘leave his property to his children and grandchildren, and they

will enjoy it. It will not be like those who obtain property by

‘Yeprisals and forays. That is ill-gotten wealth, and is accompanied

by hatred aad malice ; and their children never enjoy it. It goes to

to their enemies.

_ Children and grandchildren, work hard, put forth every exertion,

and you will obtain everything by the labour of your own hands,

_ Andolence.—Therefore I say to you concerning the indolent. Lazy

people do not like to expose their bodies to the sun, or rain, so_ their

Skin and flesh are comfortable, and do not suffer like the skin and

* That is by selling the clothes,

134 Dwellings, works of art, laws, ec. of the Karens. | No. 3,

flesh of the industrious ; but though their skin and flesh are comfort-

able, their stomachs and mouths are often very uncomfortable. Some-

times the mouth of the lazy man eats, and his stomach is satisfied ,

but often his mouth finds nothing to eat, and his stomach is in great

distress ; and this is because he does not work with his hands. Children

and grandchildren, do not become imitators of people like these.

Help the poor.—Children and grandchildren, work, every one of

you, and be prepared for a time of famine. ‘Then, when a time of

scarcity or famine comes, let not the rich, and those who have all

the rice and paddy, reject the poor who have nothing ; that you may

not lose your honour, and be abused ; but that you may be honoured

and respected. When hard times come and there is famine in your

midst, let the wealthy help those who have nothing with which to

buy, and cannot borrow.

Widows and Orphans.— Children and grandchildren, do not forsake

the widows and orphans. You must take care of the widows and

orphans, you must look after those who have nothing, all that can

neither buy nor borrow ; that the poor, the widows and the orphans |

may not die of hunger nor become slaves. Then it will be noised

abroad in other lands, that on your streams, in your land there are

many wealthy men, and many elders ; and that they take care of the

poor, and the widows and the orphans, and that there none die of

hunger, or become slaves among them. When you are thus praised, —

none will dare to speak evil of you ; and you will become powerful,

and be honoured.

But if you do not work, you will have nothing and come to shame

because you have nothing. And if you have property, but do not

look after each other ; if you are covetous, and do not give compas-

sionately, you will come to shame on that account.

When famine comes among you, if you do not look after the poor,

and the widows and the orphans ; if you do not take care of those

who have nothing, they will die of hunger or become slaves. Then

the inhabitants of other countries will hear and say: “ We hear that.

in that country the poor, and the widows and the orphans become

slaves, or die of starvation”? Then the inhabitants of other countries

will abuse you, and speak evil of you and say, “ The people of that

land are all the children of poverty. There are no rich men among —

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 135

them ; or if there be one, he is a covetous fellow, and does not take

care of his people ; and he leaves them to die, or become slaves.”

After you get such a bad character as this, should you become exceed-

ingly wealthy, and exalt yourselves, and set yourselves up for this and

that, the people of other lands will not believe you, will not fear you,

will not regard you at all.

Love.—Children and grandchildren, love one another. Do not

quarrel, do not find fault with each other. When we are in the

village we are separate people, but when we go together to clear the

fields, we are brethren ; and if one is taken sick on the road, or in

the jungle, we must take care of him; we must look after each other.

When we cut fields together, we are brethren, and if one is sick, all

are sick ; if one dies, all die, and we must carry his body back to his

house, and lay it in the hall, that his brethren may gee, and his

children may see, and his wife may see that he is dead.

Love peace.—Children and grandchildren, love peace, and you will

live in peace, and live to be old. He who loves peace, his house will

be established, and it will be permanent. He will sleep in peace and

have agreeable food to eat. He who walks in peace, will enjoy

peace. He will have associates, he will have friends. His daughters

will demean themselves with propriety, and his sons will live happily.

He will have no adversaries, he will have no enemies. The lovers of

peace will live long and be prosperous. |

Lvil doers.—The evildoer has no friends; he has no houses, no

fields ; but he has adversaries and enemies. His daughters will be-

come slaves, his sons servants. His wife will become the wife of

another, and his kyee-zees and gongs will be all expended. His

kyee-zees will become the kyee-zees of others ; his money the money

of others. His land will be destroyed, and his country will come to

destruction.

Childven and grandchildren, take no pleasure in them. Evildoers do

not live to be old. Their ways go up quickly to old age and death.

Duty to Parents.—Children and grandchildren, he who does not

love his father and mother, will suffer for his sin. When he was

small, his mother gave him the milk of her breast to drink, and she

bore him about, and carried him pick-a-pack, and cleaned him when

136 Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. [No. 3,

he was dirty ; and when he cried, his mother sympathised with him,

and did not laugh at him. Great are the sufferings that his mother

endured for him while he was an infant.

Therefore, when a man is grown Up, he must take care of his

mother ; if he does not take care of his mother, if he does not fur-

nish her food and drink, he will suffer for his sin. He will be

afflicted, and become poor.

Your father left your mother in the house to watch you, and he

went out and worked hard for you and your mother, that you might

have food and grow, and that your mother wight have leisure to

watch you. H your mother had not had food provided for her, she

would have had to leave you in the house, and you might have fallen

out of it and been killed. In order therefore that your mother might

take care of you, your father went out to work, and endured burning

heat, and bore the drenching rain. |

Therefore, children and grandchildren, when you grow up, you

must take care of your father, and provide him with food and drink.

He that does not take care of his father, will suffer for his sin. When-

the God of heaven and earth looks down upon him, he will punish

him for his sin, and he will become poor and wretched. If he works,

he will not succeed in obtaining anything, and he will become sickly |

weak, and helpless.

Humility —Children and grandchildren, he who does not humble

himself, but exalts himself, and regards his relatives as nobody, and 4

makes forays and extorts from his brethren without cause, and does as ;

he likes, and is proud, and beats others for nothing, he will not live

to old age, he will die young.

Because he acts proudly, and extorts from his brethren without cause,

the God of heaven and earth will look down upon him, and will say,

“¢ Yhig man has done thee no evil, thou oughtest not to have done

evil to him.’ Then the man that exalted himself, and did the evil,

will suffer punishment for his sin, and he will become poor and

wretched. If he has kyee-zees, he will lose them, if he has money,

he will not enjoy it ; and though he should have sons and daughters,

they will not live to help him. They will die without apparent

cause, and he will be left wretched and childless alone, unhappy, Un- |

able to work, and without means to purchase anything. 1

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &e. of the Karens. 137

Swearing.—Children and grandchildren, by no means curse each

other. If there be cause for it, swear, but unless your brethren make

trouble in your hearts, do not curse and swear causelessly. For I say

to you, if your brethren make trouble in your hearts, and you curse

them, and imprecate evil on them, the curse will really come upon

them. Because they did evil, the evil curse will come upon them.

But if people do not make trouble in our hearts, do not curse them

causelessly. For when you curse each other without cause, your

curses go from one place to another to see to whom they belong, and

when they find no owner, the Lordof the lands and the waters,

the God of heaven and earth, is displeased ; and he says to the curse,

“ There is no reason why thou shouldest hit this mans he has done

no evil, go back to the man that sent thee.’* Then the curse returns

to the man who sent it, and enters into his boiled rice, and into his

water, and under his finger nails, and he eats it; and it hits the

man who sent it, and he dies. 7

Children and grandchildren, this is assuredly true. Anciently .

there was a man who had ten children, and he cursed one of his

brethren, who had done him no injury ; but the curse did the man no

harm, and he did not die. Then the curse returned to the man who

sent it, and all his ten children died. Not a single one survived.

Then the man repented, because his children died, and he said ;

“ Hereafter, may I never curse more. That man did me no wrong.

Tcursed him without reason. There was no cause for it, so the curse

returned and came upon my children ; and all my ten children have

died. The God of heaven and earth, the Lord of the lands and the

waters, has killed them, that we may not curse people causelessly.”

Covetousness.—Children and grandchildren, do not covet the money,

do not covet the kyee-zees of others. Covet not the oxen and

buffaloes of your brethren, These things are at your own hands, if

you will be careful and work hard.

_ Partiality.—Children and grandchildren, do not act partially ; do

not have regard for one more than another.

_ Backbiting —Children and grandchildren, do not backbite, do not

abuse people who are not present.

* “ The curse causeless shall not come,’’—Proy. xxvi, 2.

138 Dwellings, works of art, laws, de. of the Karens. (No. 3,

Hatred.—Children and grandchildren, do not hate each other, do

not give way to hatred.

Exacting Fines —Children and grandchildren, do not require fines

for trespass, for breaking your arbitrary rules or regulations. Though

others make you pay fines for trespass, do not you make them pay

you for trespasses in return.

Falsehood.—Children and grandchildren, do not testify to words

which are false. In buying and selling do not use deception. Do

not defraud, do not be dishonest in your transactions.

Quarrelling—Children and grandchildren, do not do evil to each

other, do not strike and beat each other, do not rage against each

other. Do not extort from each other. Do not push each other

down. Be careful. Do not pull each other's hair, do not slap each

other’s cheeks. These things are wrong in the sight of. the God of

heaven and earth. Cultivate adjoining fields, build neighbouring

houses. When you eat rice together, do not boast against each ©

other ; when you drink whisky together, do not strike each other.

The former elders said, “ Sleeping together is warmth, eating

together is sweet, travelling together is pleasant.”

Oppression.—Children and grandchildren, why is it that one and

another suffer so exceedingly as they do? It is because he exalted

himself at first, and said: “ I am a man, and my hands are strong.”

And he sold into slavery the widow and the orphan, and regarded his”

relation as nobody. And he extorted money from others, and treated ©

others outrageously ; so when he became old, and his strength failed

him, his enemies rose up that he had wronged, and retorted on him,

and he suffers for his sins. He did evil, and his evil returns upom :

him ; and he grieves, and weeps, and suffers anguish ; and when he q

dies he has no one to bury him, and his body remains in the field, —

and the birds devour it. .

Theft.—Children and grandchildren, do not steal. Those who

steal or destroy, defraud or act dishonestly, their deeds are by no

means secret. Though the doers say nothing, though their mouths _

do not speak ; their deeds will become manifest in the ordeal by |

water, and the ordeal of ascending trees. You will be beaten in.

yemaining under water, you will be beaten in ascending trees. You

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 139

will dive into the water, and come up to the surface quickly ; you will

ascend trees and fall down. It happens so, because you have stolen,

and destroyed, and dealt fraudulently, and have displeased the God

of heaven and earth. The God of heaven and earth sees, the Lord of

mountains and hills sees, Thie-kho Shukha sees.

Children and grandchildren, if you are hungry, bend down your

backs, and weed hard. If you want fish, take your hand-net and go

fishing. Jf you want rats, set traps for them ; and if you want to

eat beef, deer and stags are abundant in the jungles, and they are to

be had without price. They have no owners, no one claims to have

nurtured and fed them. Dig deep pits in their paths, that they may

fall into them ; and set nooses, by which they may be noosed and

sprung up in the air. Feed yourselves and families in this way.

Borrow not, go not into debt. By no means leave debts for your

children to pay after your death.

Every one that does not work hard with his hands, when he steals

or borrows laughs ; but when he is required to pay, and has nothing ;

then he weeps. And every one when he steals, and his deeds are hidden,

puts himself forward as an honest man, and is bold and laughs ; but

when his true character becomes manifest, and he is required to pay,

all abuse him and speak evil of him, and call him a robber; and his

_ honor is destroyed, and he becomes exceedingly ashamed. No one

will believe his professions of honesty afterwards. They will say to

: him; “ Once honest, ten times honest ; once a thief, ten times a thief.”

Forays.—Children and grandchildren, do not make yourselves

wretched by making forays, and taking the property of your brethren

for nothing. It is wrong for you to take forcibly the possessions of

your brethren. It will be lost in like manner, and your children will

not enjoy it. Do not engage in forays ; do not make reprisals for in-

juries received. Those who make forays make enemies who will

never forget them, and the ground around their houses will never be

Smooth, but will be filled with caltrops* and arrow heads, They

* Not precisely caltrops, but pointed bamboos, a few inches high set firmly

in the ground, at an angle of about 45°, to pierce the foot of an enemy while

running to or from the house. They are rather formidable weapons in their

Way. I have seen a man’s foot with a hole quite through, made by one that

caught him on the top of his foot while running away, :

140 Dwellings, works of art, laws, &e. of the Karens. [ No. 3,

will not be able to sleep, and they will be unhappy while awake. If

they obtain kyee-zees or money, they will not use them themselves.

If they raise hogs or catch wild fowls, they will not eat them them-

selves. Their enemies will possess them, and eat them without labour,

and they themselves will come to abject wretchedness.

Killing.—Children and grandchildren, do not kill each other cause-

lessly. Man is not like a beast. Man has a Lord and Master ; he

+g not like the wild animals. We are the children of Thie-kho, the

children of Shu-kha ; we are the children of Shie-oo, the children of

Yu-wa, and our God created us. Therefore do not kill each other.

The man who kills his brother without reason, who is not angry

with him nor hates him ; that man will be killed without cause in

like manner. |

When a man kills his brother, Thie-kho Shukha sees it, the God of

heaven and earth sees it ; and Thie-kho Shukha, and the God of

heaven and earth look with compassion, and the tears flow from his

eyes, and he says to the murderer : ‘ Thou hast killed this man and

he did thee no harm. Thou oughtest not to have killed him, and thou

wilt be killed in return.” |

Therefore, he who kills will be given up by the Lord of the lands

and the waters into the hands of his enemies, and they will kill him.

He will not escape death. Be warned, those who kill, death takes

note of them. They will come to want and distress, and be helpless. °

When night comes, they will long for the day ; and when day comes

they will long for the night. They will grieve, and take their full

of grief; they will weep, and take their full of weeping ; and their

end will be death. When they die, they will have no children, and

there will be none to bury them. Their bodies will be left naked in

the fields, and the vultures will devour them. These things I have ~

seen with my own eyes, I know them from my own heart ; and they

have often happened among us.

Adultery and Fornication.—Children and grandchildren, do not com-

mit adultery or fornication. If you wish for a wife or husband, take

one in an upright way with a marriage feast. Do not act covertly.

Tf you commit fornication, your daughters will die, and your sons will

not live; and the country will be defiled and destroyed on your

account,

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 141

When you commit adultery or fornication, or have illegitimate

children, it is displeasing to Thie-kho Shu-kha, it is displeasing to the

God of heaven and earth. Then the rains do not come at the proper

time, and the dry season is irregular. The crops are bad, and the

hunter is unsuccessful ; and your vegetables do not come up; because

you commit fornication and adultery.

You are poor and become slaves because you do that which dis-

; pleases the God of heaven and earth. This he makes known to you

_ by bringing on you troubles and difficulties, in order that you may

not do evil. Children and grandchildren, be careful.

Suicide.—There is no command against suicide. It is very common

where Christianity has not been introduced, and the Karens seem to

see little or no guilt init. It is regarded as an act of cowardice, and

_ the suicide is not awarded an honorable burial ; but we are nowhere

_ told that it is displeasing to the God of heaven and earth.

’

It is singular that hanging is almost the exclusive way by which

_ Karens commit suicide, while poisoning is the most. favourite mode

; with the Burmese.

Ifa man has some incurable or painful disease, he says in a matter-

_ of-fact way, that he will hang himself; and does as he says. If a

_gitl’s parents compel her to marry the man she does not love, she

hangs herself. Wives sometimes hang themselves through jealousy,

sometimes because they quarrel with their husbands, and sometimes

out of mere chagrin, because they are subjected to depreciating com-

parisons. It is a favourite threat with a wife or daughter, when not

allowed to have her own way, that she will hang herself.

_ One of Mrs. Mason’s Paku pupils went and taught school in a

Bghai village, where she was very popular. The village preacher

“observing his wife at her toilet one day, remarked jocosely ; “You

need not rub your face so much, for you cannot make yourself look as

handsome as the Paku gitl.” She said nothing, but immediately

-- rose up, and went and hanged herself.

_ A young man in my employ recollects twenty-five persons who have

hung themselves within the last fifteen years, in the circle of villages

with which he is acquainted, eleven within ten years. Of the whole

umber, ten were men and fifteen women,

142 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. [No. 8,

Criminal Law.—The general principle of criminal law, which the

Karens recognise as just, is exactly the same as the Mosaic. An eye

for an eye, and a tooth for a tooth. The elders said, ‘‘ If made blind,

take out an eye inreturn ; if the ear is cut off, cut off an ear in

return ; if an arm is broken, break an arm in return.”

The elders do not, however, recommend the exaction of these terms.

They say again: ‘“ In order that we may not subject ourselves to

fines and punishment, we must allow others to treat us as they choose.

We must humble ourselves; we must not retaliate. If we are struck, —

we ought not to strike again. If one grasps the head, grasp the

floor ; if one slaps the face, slap the floor. If we are made blind, we

must not make blind in return ; if our ears are cut off, we must not —

cut off the ear in return. The long is before, the short is behind.*

Loving peace, gives a wide place ; loving evil, gives a narrow space. :

It is difficult to obtain happiness, easy to get evil. If we want evil,

it is at hand before all the water has run out of a vessel that has been —

upset.”

Law of Inheritance.—The father wills his property to his children ;

and it is the custom to share it nearly equally among them ; but

always giving the eldest son the largest share, and sometimes giving

alittle more to the youngest than to those between. Nothing is

given to the widow, but she is entitled to the use of the property till

her death,

When a Karen of property made his will, before letters were intro-

duced, he killed an ox, or a buffalo, and made a feast at which every

inhabitant of the village was invited to attend. At the feast, he

declared his wishes, as to the disposal of his property ; and prayed |

that the disposition he had made, might be carried out after his death

The mother has no property of her own. If she brought propert ym -

at her marriage, it became her husband’s ; but at her husband’s death,

she takes his place, the Karens say, and the property is hers to use

till her death ; after which, it goes to the children, according to the

will of the father. She has no power to make any other disposition”

of it. i

In the event of a second marriage, the children of a mature age

take possession of the property their father left them. The second

* That is, the future is long, the past is short.

i a

— ij

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. 143

husband is not allowed to appropriate to himself any part of the

property of the first husband ; nor can the children of the second

marriage share in it, though in the case of minors it may remain in

the mother’s hands.

61. Lawgiver.—No tradition of any legislator, or lawgiver has

been found. The Karens ascribe all their law rs, and instructions, to the

elders of preceding generations, and have no idea of any period when

they did not exist.

62. Change of Laws.—The Karens never make any alterations in

their laws, or regulations, for the government of their country. They

seem to think that everything of the kind has come down to them

from the ancients in a state of perfection, requiring neither addition

nor alteration.

63. Observance of their laws.—In respect to the observance of

their laws, or the instructions of their elders, very little can be said

in favour of those who have not come under the influence of Christiani-

ty; and many that worship with Christians are Christians in name

only.

The truth can be obtained from a Karen much readier than from a

Burman, because he is much less artful; not that he has any more

regard for the commands of the elders than the Burman has for the

commands of Gaudamaa. I have never yet met with a Karen, in the

church or out of it, that when he had committed a wrong, would not

“tell a falsehood to cover it. They have no regard to their engagements

or promises. What a Karen says he will not do to-day ; under a change

of circumstances, he will do to- -morrow, and seem to think it all right.

He has changed his mind, he says, and that is sufficient.

They have no idea of suffering for trath and righteousness. If their

leaders or associates do what is confessedly wrong ; they think it quite

excusable to go with the multitude. They join themselves to forays,

in which they are not concerned, and think they do no wrong,

however unjust the attack, because they were hired by others, with

whom, they deem, the guilt of their robbery or murder rests.

_ Theft among themselves is usually discovered and severely punished,

80 the people are ordinarily honest; but they have no conscience

about abstracting small articles when they are not likely to be

discovered.

144 Dwellings, works of art, laws, dc. of the Karens. [No. 3,

They are exceedingly vindictive, and demand heavy damages from

those who have injured them; and are most implacable enemies. The

dying charge of a father to his sons, is often for them to avenge his

wrongs, real or imaginary, and should they be unable to do so, to

transmit the charge to their posterity. A Gaikho chief was put in ~

jail, and I visited him. He was very humble, and promised every

thing to get out. Tinterceded for him and he was released. He was

treated by our Karens with all possible kindness, the few days he

staid with them. He soon after died in the jungles, and his last

words to his family were, that they should avenge his death on the

party that had caused his apprehension.

Natural affection too is weak among them. It is no uncommon ©

thing for a man to curse and strike his mother; and children, not-

withstanding the instructions of the elders, take very little care of

their parents. I have stood over an old woman dying alone in a

miserable shed, and tried in vain to induce her children and grand-

children, close by to come to her help.

The Gho-kho, a Bghai clan, it is said by those who know them,

often sell their relations into slavery. Ifa child is sickly, and the

parents think it will not live to advantage, they sell it off, when

occasions offer, to strangers. They say among themselves; “ This

child will never grow up and become our posterity. It is continually

sick, and will never be able to do any thing for us. We had bette r

sell it, and then we shall get its price to eat.” In seasons of scarcity,

they frequently sell their orphan nephews, and nieces to obtain paddy.

Occasionally, when a mother gives annoyance to her children by

reproving them ; one will say : ‘ My mother talks excessively. I shall

not be happy till she dies. I will sell her, though Ido not get

more than a gong or five rupees for her,” And he sells her. Ii an

uncle dies, they often sell the widow; and if a brother dies, they

demand ten rupees, of the widow as the price of her husband, their

brother; and if she has not the means to pay, she is sold into slavery.

So also, if a married woman dies, her relatives demand a large price |

of her husband, which he must either pay or become a slave or fight;

and if he has no money, he usually chooses the last alternative. 3 ;

64—67. Administration of the Laws.—It is instructive to see how

different the same act looks when viewed from different stand-points.

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. . 145

The forays of the wild Karens appear to civilized people little better

than unqualified robbery and murder ; but a Karen looks upon them

much as Europeans do suits at law, and the execution of judgments

by the sheriif.

Tf a Karen is defrauded of his money by dishonest debtors, there

are no courts of law to which he can appeal for justice; so he calls

on his friends, to go and seize the debtor, and make him pay the

debt with interest, or sell him into slavery. Forays of this kind for

debts are called small cause actions, and correspond to what we

denominate civil suits.

Tf a man is killed, there is no authority to which a Karen can go,

to have the homicide brought to justice. Every family is expected to

avenge its own wrongs. Perhaps a man has been mortally wounded in

an attack, or quarrel, and he calls his son and says to him; “I have

been speared and shot without cause. Iam very sick. Should I die,

get my value, obtain my price. If you can get the living, take the

_ living ; if you can get the dead take the dead.” After this charge,

4 son deems it his sacred duty to avenge the death of his father,

whenever a favourable opportunity occurs. These are called great

cause actions, and correspond to criminal suits.

_ Inall cases, it is not the custom for the man who occupies the

position of plaintiff to go to the foray himself. He employs others,

and stays at home to compensate those that go ; because in the event

r of his death, there would be no one to pay an their wages, or avenge

“thei deaths, should they fall in the attack. Thus a Karen always

_ thinks himself right in taking the law into his own hands ; for it is

— the custom of the country, which has the effect of law. He is never

interfered with, unless he is guilty of some act contrary to Karen ideas

of propriety, when the elders and the villagers interfere and exercise

Ng check upon him.

~~ Cwil Suit.—When a Karen has been repeatedly to one that owes

im money, without obtaining it, and has perhaps been treated un-

Bexilly, he calls out the posse comitatus, so far as his friends constitute

“the comitatus, and when a favourable opportunity occurs, they go and

“seize the debtor in his house or field and bring him off; sometimes

taking along one or two of his family or friends.

When the debtor is set down bound before his creditor, the creditor

146 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. [No. 3,

_ will say to him; “I have no feud with thee. On the contrary I

compassionate thee. But thou borrowedst money of me, thou bor-

rowedst kyee-zees of me. The money was in my wallet, and I took

it out and gave it to thee; my kyee-zee was in my room, and I tied

a string to it, and slung it on thy head, and caused thee to back it

away. Therefore I went and asked thee for the return of my money ;

I went and requested thee the price of the kyee-zee. But thou

wouldst not pay me; thou wert abusive to me; thou stirredst up

strife. Thy language was contentious ; thy words were not peaceable.

Thou didst not give me food to eat; thou didst not give me water to

drink. Thou wast angry with me, thou didst hate me. I went after

thee, and returned hungry and thirsty. I ascended mountains, and

descended into valleys ; I suffered from heat, and I suffered from cold.

Thou didst not repay me my money, thou didst not pay me for my

kyee-zee. Many years have now elapsed, many months have past

over. So now I have commenced an action against thee ; now I have

made an attack on thee. Thou didst borrow one kyee-zee of me :

now thou must pay me two. Thou didst borrow one share of me,

now thou must pay metwo. Thou didst borrow one hundred rupees

of me, now thou must repay me two hundred. If thou dost not

pay me, I willsell thee to repay me for my money, to pay me for |

my kyee-zee. And when I sell thee, I shall do that which is right

and proper.”

Criminal suit.—Men are not unfrequently killed in drunken broils ;

but such cases are not allowed by Karen custom to be a cause of action.

No price can be demanded for persons who lose their lives in such

circumstances. It is argued there was no malice, no intention to

kill; and the person who died was perhaps as much to blame as the

man who killed him; and people are not well responsible for what

they do in a state of intoxication.

But when a man has had a near relative killed in a foray, it is”

deemed right that he should have blood for plood, and his friends and

others whom he loves, stand ready to avenge him when called upon,

and they go and make reprisals. |

Theft.—When a thief is discovered, if it be his first act, and he-

promises to be honest for the future, he is allowed to go free om

restoration of the stolen property. But if he be an habitual thief,

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 147

he is sold off into slavery among strangers, so that the village

may have no more trouble with him.

When a man is suspected of theft, and there is no positive evidence

to sustain the charge; if he denies it, recourse is usually had to the

water ordeal.

The accused says to the man who brings the charge. “ We will

decide this matter ourselves by diving under water. If thou beatest

me, by remaining under water longer than Ido; if I have kyee-zees,

I will give them unto thee; if I have slaves, I will give them to thee.

Ti I do not give thee the kyee-zees or slaves, take my body and rip it

Open, take my head and cut it off. Split me in two from head to

foot, and cut me in two across.”

Then the man who makes the charge rises up, and replies: “ Thou

sayest thou art honest, thou art upright. If I have charged thee

falsely, and if I do not beat thee, in remaining longest under water,

_ take my wife and live with her, take my kyee-zee and carry it away,

split me in two and cut off my head.”

Then in the presence of the friends of each party they go down

into the water ; and a person puts a board over the heads of the two

men as they stand together, and puts down the heads of both into

the water at the same instant. The man that comes up first to the

surface, is regarded as the guilty party; and he pays a kyee-zee, if he

has one. If he has none, his friends pay it for him ; but if he has

neither kyee-zee nor friends, he is put to death, as he adjudged him-

‘Self before taking the ordeal.

_ Another ordeal is to ascend a Steraulia tree after it has been strip-

ed of its bark, and is very slippery. But I have never known it to

be used.

_ Adultery and Fornication.—When adultery or fornication has been

committed, the elders decide that the transgressors must buy a hog,

and kill it. Then the woman takes one foot of the hog, and the man

takes another, and they scrape out furrows in the ground with each

foot, which they fill with the blood of the hog. They next scratch

the ground with their hands and pray: “ God of heaven and earth,

God of the mountains and hills, I have destroyed the productiveness

of the country. Do not be angry with me, do not hate me; but have

mercy on me, and compassionate me. Now I repair the mountains

148 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. [ No. 5,

now I heal the hills, and the streams and the lands. May there be

no failure of crops, may there be no unsuccessful labours, or unfortunate

efforts in my country. Let them be dissipated to the foot of the

horizon. Make thy paddy fruitful, thy rice abundant. Make the

vegetables to flourish. Ii we cultivate but little, still grant that we

may obtain a little.”

After each has prayed thus, they return to the house and say they

have repaired the earth.

If one is a widow and the other a widower, no fine is required of

them, but if one is the wife of another man, the adulterer is required

to pay a fine, and he is not allowed to live with the woman till the

fine is paid; but after the fine is paid, they are allowed to live ©

together ; and the husband takes the money, and with it, they say,

procures another wife. He is regarded as having obtained a divorce

from the adulteress, and is at liberty to marry again. If a woman has

committed adultery with: the husband of another woman, then she

must pay a fine; and after the fine is paid the injured party 1s

considered as divorced and can take another husband, if she chooses.

Adultery, or fornication, is supposed to have a powerful influence

to injure the crops. Hence if there have been bad crops in a village

for a year or two, and the rains fail; the cause is attributed to secret

sins of this character, and they say the God of heaven and earth is

angry with them on this account ; and all the villagers unite in

making an offering to appease him.

Persons possessed of poisons.—Poisoning is not uncommon. The

Karens purchase their poisons-of the Shan traders that travel among

them. One of the most common is described as a yellow powder, which.

resembling tiirmeric is easily mixed with the food of the victim

without danger of detection. This is probably yellow orpiment, the

yellow sulphuret of arsenic. )

Another poison is a root, perhaps the root of Gloriosa superba ; but

the most virulent, the one that produces death the quickest is said

to be in little black grains, and is supposed by the Karens to be the

gum of a tree; which must be a mistake. . 4

It is said that the hairs of the whiskers of a tiger, if eaten with the

food produce death. They are represented as producing coughing and

vomiting of blood.

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. 149

Some persons are said to keep poison fangs in their possession for

the purpose of killing people. These they thrust into the foot marks

of the person they wish to kill, who soon finds himself with a sore

foot, and the marks on it, as if bitten by adog. The sore becomes

rapidly worse and worse till death ensues.

Others are represented as having a poison stone, in the shape of a

man’s hand, which is called the hand of a demon. his is applied to

the image of the person to be killed. An image is made of clay, and

placed on the variegated leaf of a plant of the ginger family ; and the

stone hand is then thrown at the small clay image which it breaks to

pieces. ‘This is supposed to represent the destruction of the person

represented ; who immediately sickens and dies. It is essential to

success, however, that the operator sit on watch over his image three

days and three nights, If he goes to sleep in that time, his labour

is allin vain; and he will wake up with a bit of flesh between his

teeth, and become possessed of a demon; go it is about as dangerous

an experiment to the operator, as to the one operated upon.

Now it is considered unlawful for a man to have such poisons, real

or imaginary, in his possession. If found on a man, he is sometimes,

by the voice of the people bound and spread out in the sun three days,

and after destroying his poisons, he is made to swear the most solemn

oaths that he has no more; and will never procure more; or he is

sold off into slavery. If he has been guilty of poisoning, or supposed

to have poisoned any one, it is considered a meritorious deed to put

him to death.

7 Cursing.—Cursing is, with the Karens, an organised mode of punish-

‘ment for crimes that cannot be reached in any other way.

When a man will curse another deliberately, he goes on to the

verandah of his house, and curses him three evenings in succession.

On the third evening, he takes an expiring faggot, an addled egg,

and the last droppings of the dishes, which are usually given to the

pigs, and he says: “ May his life expire, like this dying faggot ;

may he be destitute of posterity like this addled ess; and may ie

end be like this refuse of the dishes.”

68. Geography and Statistics—The most southern limit of the

Karens is in the province of Mergui, north of Latitude 12° ; and they

are found, in an uninterrupted line to beyond lake Nyoung Yue in

150 Dwellings, works of art, laws, &e. of the Karens. [No. 3,

about Latitude 21°. I have ‘followed up the line myself into

Karenee ; and have met with Taru Karens from the region near

Nyoung Yue. Report says they are found much farther north,

but they have not yet been verified. On the west they extend

to the Aracan hills in Longitude 92°, and on the east to the

declivities of the mountains on the right side of the Menam in about

Longitude 100°. Thus they are known to be scattered over nine

degrees of Latitude, and eight degrees of Longitude. In Siam Pro-

per, at least, the wild tribes on the east side of the Menam are not

Karens; for the late Dr. Jones of Bangkok furnished me with a

small vocabulary of the language they spoke, and I found it wholly —

diverse from the Karen. The name of the people which he gave 7

me was Kha, and Yule has Ka-kwas on his map, near the Cambodia

river, who are probably the same people.

69. Population—The Karen population of British Burmah, ac-

cording to Col. Phayre’s last report is 863,756. The Red Karens are”

estimated at 210,000, which makes upwards of half a million. For

Burmah Proper, Siam, and the Shan States we have no data what-

ever on which to estimate their numbers, but we may hazard a

conjecture that they amount to nearly half a million more ; and thus

we have a million of Karens south of China. It is not probable

that there are more; for Dr. Williams ascertained, while in Bamo,

that the Ka-khyens in that neighbourhood are identical with the

Singhpos ; and I have seen Paloungs, from the east of Tagoung

who assure me there are no Karens in their neighbourhood. The

tribes in the Irrawaddy valley, north of Tagoung, appear to be

allied to the Tibetan nations; while the Karen relationship is

more with the Chinese. Their languages prove this.

70. The Karen population is certainly not on the increase. In

1831, when I went to Tavoy, the Government census made the Karen

population of the province about. five thousand ; and in 1862, the

Deputy Commissioner, Captain Stevenson, reported it at a little less

than five thousand. In the interval of thirty-one years, several,

villagers have immigrated into the district from Siam, and one oF

two from Yeh, but 1 am not aware that one has left the provinee

in that time. The most then that can be said for the Karen

population of Tayoy is, that it is about stationary. a "

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. 151

In Toungoo the births and deaths, for the last four years among

the Christian population, show a slight increase of deaths over the

births, which brings us to a similar result.* These examples, it

must be observed, are from localities where there have been neither

wars nor famines in the period under review, and where the people

have had all the advantages of living under the protection of the

English Government, and have had the help of Missionaries to

furnish them with considerable medicine, and medical advice and

instruction.

71. In the Yuneselon valley, where there have been wars and

consequent scarcity of provisions, the population has been very

greatly reduced within a quarter of a century; and in Toungoo,

while I know of many villages that are reported as having been much

larger than they now are, I know not one that was- said to have in-

creased, or that has apparently done so under my own observation.

72, The people appear to be living as they have always lived. Still,

the southern Karens have traditions of some of their observances,

_ having been introduced by a man called Mautan ; and they have not

been universally adopted. There too they burn their dead, which

they regard as a modern custom. ‘Tradition says they formerly buried

_ as the Toungoo Karens do now.

74, There is no tendency to union of races. They have an aversion

tomarrying out of their own tribe even among themselves. Still, those

_ who live near the Burmese, do occasionally form connections with

them.

_ 75. Social Relations—The relations of the Karens to the civilized

“nations around them, are either antagonistic, or that of tributaries.

The Burmese and Talaings brought all under tribute in their terri-

a excepting a few tribes, and parts of tribes in Toungoo, and

e neighbourhood, that have succeeded in maintaining an uncertain

“independence subject to occasional raids upon them by the Burmese,

. burnt and destroyed everything before them. In return, if a few

Seattered Burmans fell among them, they seldom escaped with their

lives. It may be remarked in passing that bad as the Burmese

government is, the Karens, that have been subjected to it, are more

thrifty, more civilised in every respect, and live more comfortably, than

* See Toungoo News Sheet, October, 1864,

152 Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. [No. 3,

those who have ever maintained their independence ; which goes to

prove that a bad government is better for a people than no government.

Among themselves, every tribe is antagonistic to each other. In

the south, where there are Pwos and Sgaus, one fought against the

other. In the Mergui district, the Pwos are not now more than half

as numerous as the Sgaus, but the numbers of the two tribes are said

to have been formerly about equal ; the present difference being the

result of their wars; and before the English took possession of the

country, the Sgaus were preparing for another onslaught on the

Pwos. :

In Toungoo, the Bghais and Pakus have maintained, from time

immemorial, a relation to each other, much like that of the French

and English of past centuries ; regarding each other as natural

enemies ; and the Bghais being the most addicted to war, were

usually the attacking party ; while the Red Karens in the distance,

more powerful than either, looked impartially on both contending

parties, and plundered each as convenient opportunities offered.

While these wars were going on in the east, the Bghais had another

enemy to contend with in the Gaikhos, on the north, with whom a

petty warfare has been ever maintained. Besides the wars of nations _

and tribes, each village, being an independent community, had always

an old feud to settle with nearly every other village among their own

people. But the common danger from more powerful enemies, or

having common injuries to requite, often led to several villages uniting —

together for defence or attack.

Karen Free Masonry.—There are established forms of making

covenants of friendship, by which each party pledges himself to the

other to be his friend; and to aid and support him in all circumstances

throughout life. There are three grades. Mghe, Tho, and Do. The

strongest, and most sacred is the Do. The obligations of the Z’ho are

less than those of the Do ; and of the Myhe less than the Tho.

When two persons wish to become related to each other, so as to

become Dos ; the one who ig at home takes a hog, ora fowl, and

cuts off the hog’s snout, or the fowl’s bill, and rubs the flowing

blood on the front of the legs of the other, and sticks on them some . a

of the feathers or down of the fowl. Then they consult the fowl’s |

bones, and if they give a favourable response , they say; “ We will .

‘a

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. 153

grow old together ; we will visit each other’s houses, we will ascend

each other’s steps.”

The visitor next kills a hog or fowl, and performs the same rites on

the other. On consulting the fowl’s bones he says; “ If the fowl’s

bones are unfavourable, we will die separate, we will go separate, we

will work separate ; we will not visit each other’s houses, we will

not go up each other’s steps, we will never see each other but for a

short time.”

If the response is favourable, the two have entered into the rela-

tion of Do, and consider themselves pledged friends, bound to help

each other as long as they live, in any way that they may require

assistance ; and they no longer call each other by their proper names,

but by that of Do. In seasons of famine or scarcity, a Do helps his

colleague to the extent of his ability ; and if a man is abused, and

evil spoken of, his Do defends him, saying ; “That man is my

Do, and to speak evil of him, is to speak evil of me. I do not wish

_ to hear it.”

_ Many multiply their Dos in different villages, so that wherever they

go, they may be sure of hospitable treatment ; and if their enemies

i plan a foray upon them, and the project becomes known to a Do, they

are immediately informed of it.

It is said the Dos very rarely quarrel, but remain faithful to each

_ other, and the institution seems to exert a very favourable influence

‘in wild Karen society, It may be compared to Masonry without its

~ secrets.

Intercourse by Sea.—Though the Karens have had no intercourse

2 by sea with other nations, yet those near the sea-board have some

“stories that seem to indicate a knowledge of the existence of Ceylon

under the name of Salie, the name by which Ptolomy designated the

Bh ts of Ceylon. One story says :

_ “ The elders relate that anciently there wasa white foreigner who

Went and traded in a city called Phu-Si-lie; and the inhabitants

of Phu-Sa-lie are upright. When the white foreigner arrived at

a -lie, they had heard of the Karens, whom they called elder

brother Paku, and the Karens in return, called them younger brother.

_ They took the pods of the black and red cotton plants, and scalding

to death the insects in them, they prayed thus ; ‘Ii these reach our

154 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. [No. 3,

elder brother, may they not die, may every seed vegetate; but if

planted on the ways before reaching him, may they die, and none

spring up.’ They then took the cotton pods, and gave them to the

Captain of the ship, saying to him. ‘Take and deliver these to our

elder brother Paku.’

“ When the Captain of the ship, the white foreigner, got back to |

his own country, he thought to himself; ‘We will multiply this

cotton, and afterwards carry it to its place of destination.’ So

he planted it, and it all died.

‘“‘ Subsequently he went trading again to Phu-Sa-lie, and he was

asked if he had carried the cotton seed to elder brother Paku. He

told them honestly that he had not, that wishing to multiply them,

he had planted the seeds, and all died.

“ Phu-Sa-lie said ; ‘ We will try you again. Deliver what we give

you now, or never come to this place again.’ Then they gave him a

golden book for the Karens, and a silver book for the white

foreigners, but charged them not to open either on the way. The

Captain of the ship took the books and departed, but when half way

on his return, the ship’s crew insisted on opening the book designated

for the white foreigners, and after refusing three times, he complied

with their wishes. The book taught them how to obtain food and-

drink. Ifthey did thus, the consequences would be this; if they

did so, the consequences would be that.

“hen the ship’s crew said ; ‘ If our book is so good, how much

better the Karens’ must be’ ! and they insisted on opening it. To

this the Captain of the ship resolutely refused to consent; so they

killed him, cutting off his head, and throwing him into the sea.

Then they opened the book, and found it taught that people should

never dic.’ Then they determined to retain the book, but the ship

and all the crew were lost in the midst of the sea, and they never

reached their own country again.

“The body of the murdered Captain, however, floated back to the

place whence he departed, and the king of Phu-Sa-lie, being on @

tower by the sea shore, saw something in the water in the distance,

and he ordered his servants to go and see what it was, They returned

and reported it to be the body of the ship Captain that had taken —

away the books, and that it had floated up to the landing-place. The

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. 155

king commanded ; ‘ Go call him to my presence.’ The messengers

went, and in ee with the king’s command, they said to the

corpse. ‘ Arise quickly! The king calls thee.’ He immediately

arose to life and went before the king, who said: ‘Did I not send

thee with the Karens’ book. Why hast thou returned ?’ The Captain

replied : ‘My Lord, the sailors asked to see the book, and when I

refused, they plotted together and unanimously determined to cut off .

my head and kill me. If your majesty doubts it, please look at my

neck,’ He showed his neck, and all were convinced of the truth of

his statement. The king said: ‘Remain here at present. Thou

shalt return hereafter.’ ”’

76. Treaty, Offensive and Defensive-—When two or more villages

‘wish to enter into a condition to support each other against any enemy

that may arise against either ; they assemble together, and kill an ox

ora buffalo, and make a feast. At the close of the feast, the elders

take counsel together and say: “ Now we speak to each words of

peace. Now our children shall marry together. You shall take wives

of us, and we will take wives of you. We are not other peoples, we are

brethren. If our enemies come, we will not separate ourselves; but

we will pursue them together till we kill them ; and if we cannot

‘atch them, we will make war upon them, and make reprisals. May

we ever support each other, and always be of one heart.”

e Mode of Warfare-—The Karens never declare war. The great

principle of Karen warfare, is to take their enemy by surprise. Nor

war waged ostensibly between one village and another. There is

:.. an individual at the head of every war, on whose account the

is made, and who acts as the general, but never goes to the fight

Timself. When he deems it a favourable time for his purpose, he

kills a hog, or a fowl, and he takes a bit of the heart, and a bit of the

liver, and a bit of the entrails ; and after mincing them up with salt

he rolls the mixture up ina leat This he calls tying the heads of his

‘enemies, and after finishing his preparations, he prays: ‘Lord of the

heavens, Lord of the earth ; Lord of the mountains ; tron of the hills,

mayest thou put down ie inhabitants of that ved Make them

forgetful, make them to forget themselves, help us, we beseech thee.”

_ He then gives the roll to two men who have been engaged for the

Service, and says to them: “I send you to spy out the road, go

156 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. [No. 3,

look. Is the village easy or difficult to attack? Has it caltrops

planted around it or not? Look accurately. Go up into the village

and sleep with the people; and if any one invites you to sit with

him, take out this roll and mix up its contents privately with their

rice and curry. It will tie their heads. I will tie their heads with

it; when they eat, they will forget themselves; and then we will

go and attack them. And because they have eaten that which ties

their heads, they will forget to seize their swords and spears, and

before they can recover themselves, we will grasp theix arms, and

overcome them, and kill them.”

When the spies return, they probably say : ‘These people have

not planted a single caltrop. There is no difficulty about the village

whatever. If we go and attack it, we shall take it, and kill all the

people.”

Then the head of the war sends out his people to collect volun-

teers for his foray. The matter having been arranged before hand,

forty or fifty come from one village, and forty or fifty from another,

and when all the fighting men assemble together, if they amount

to a couple of hundred, it is quite satisfactory, and they are feasted

at the village to which they have been called. d

Before handing round the whiskey, the head of the war pours out

some slowly on the ground and prays: ‘Lord of the seven heavens,

and the seven earths, Lord of the rivers and streams, the mountains

and hills, we give thee whiskey to drink, and rice to eat. Help us,

we entreat thee. We will now go and attack that village. We have

tied the heads of the inhabitants. Help us. Make their minds forget-

ful; make them to forget themselves. That they may sleep heavily,

that their sleep may be unbroken, let not a.dog bark at us, let not a

hog grunt at us. Let them not seize a bow, a sword, or a speaty

And may the Lord help my children and grandchildren, that are

going to attack this village, and deliver them from all harm. May

they overcome their enemies and not be lost. May they be delivered

from the bow, the sword, and the spear.” Alter the prayer, the ©

elders drink part of the whiskey, and it is then circulated freely among

the company. ; '

The head of the war next takes a fowl and after killing it,

consults its bones as to the success of the war, if commenced then.

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, §°. of the Karens. Lon

Before the examination, he says; “ Fowl, possessor of superhuman

powers, fore-endued with divine intelligence, thou scratchest with

thy feet, thou peckest with thy bill, thou goest unto Khu-hte

(king of death), thou. goest unto Tha-ma (monarch of death,) thou

goest to She-oo, (the brother of God), thou goest into the presence

of God; thou seest unto the verge of heaven, thou seest unto the

edge of the horison. I now purpose to go and attack that village.

Shall we be hit, shall we be obstructed? If we go, shall we suffer,

shall we die by the bow, shall we be pierced by the spear, shall we

weary ourselves, shall we exhaust ourselves? If so, reveal thyself

unfavourable.”

If the omens are unfavourable, he dismisses the troops and each one

returns to his home, to wait for a more auspicious opportunity. When

he calls them again, he proceeds as before; and on consulting the

fowl’s bones, prays; “‘ We will go and attack that house. Shall we

overcome, shall we utterly destroy? Shall we escape being hit by

the bow, and speared by the spear? Shall we not stumble on any-

thing? If they will not resist us, but their lives be destroyed, their

village come to utter destruction, then, fowl, reveal thyself favourable.”

If the bones give the desired response, the elder that reads it, says:

“The bones are good. If we go, we shall meet with no disaster.

We shall seize and kill the whole; and if any should remain, they

will not be able to resist us.”

_ Then the head of the war leaps up and calls out exultingly to hig

troops, that they will certainly be victorious. He says; “ Soldiers,

fear not, nor be anxious. Go fight and be strong. If two or three

of you are killed, [am your Lord. If in the battle a spear is broken,

bring me the handle ; if the barrel of your musket drops out, bring me

the stock. I will replace everything. If one or two are killed,

bring their bodies to me, I will clothe them, I will give them

‘shrouds and pay their value.”

z He calls for two to volunteer to be first to go up the ladder into

the house first, and these he addresses; ‘ You are a hunting dog, you

“are a wild boar. It you succeed, you are worthy of a gong, and you

‘shall have it; you are worthy of a buffalo, and you shall have it.

Tf you Emnot succeed, if you are killed; let not those you leave be-

hind ask a buffalo of me, let them a: afowl. let them not ask of

158 Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. [No. 3,

me a silk garment on account of your death. You say you are bold,

you say you are fearless. You go the first, you return the last.

Therefore, if our enemies follow, and you run away and become

terrified, and anything happens to the people, you are responsible.” He

closes with the declaration that he will prosecute the war till he

overcomes, whatever may be the resistance they meet.

The troops then go off singing war songs, of which the following 1s

a specimen,

War Sone.

I go to war, [ am sent ;

I go to fight, I am sent.

Clothe me with the iron breastplate,

Give me the iron shield.

I am not strong, may I make myself strong,

T am weak, may I make myself powerful.

I go with a multitude, many persons :

We will go to the house, the foot of the steps :

We will fire muskets and holloa,

The people come with wives and children :

Unsheath the spear, draw the sword ;

Smite the neck, spear the side ;

The blood flows purple.

I go to war, Iam employed ;

I go to fight, I am employed.

Employer gave me whiskey to drink ;

I drank till I am dizzy.

We march in order, like white ants ;

We cross a stream, and trample it dry:

We arrive at the foot of the house,

We reach the foot of the ladder :

We go up into the bedrooms ;

Blood flows like a stream of water :

The blood flows down under the house.

The mother cries herself to death.

The great hawk flies over the house,

Pounces down on the chiet’s red cock, :

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. 159

The great hawk sweeps around the house,

Carries off its prey at the foot of the steps ;

Seizes the chief’s white cock.

The great hawk flies away,

Leaving the chief behind weeping.

When the expedition reaches the house to be attacked, a party rushes

into the house killing all the men they meet, while the rest surround

the house from below. These intercept all that endeavour to escape,

and receive in charge women and children that they wish to bring

away alive, and bind them. Ii the inmates resist, the house is fired,

and the people who leap out to escape the flames are killed or taken

prisoners. They kill without regard to age or sex. Infants are

always killed ; as they say they would die if carried away. Children

are often massacred with the utmost barbarity. Their hands and fevt

_ are cut off, and their bodies hacked into small pieces. Adults are

often emboweled, split in two, their ears cut off and put in their

“mouths; and it is not uncommon to bring away the jaws of their

Victims as trophies, as the North American Indians bring away scalps.

Sometimes, after the house has been burnt up, they sow the seeds of

vegetables on the ashes, to indicate the utter destruction they have

wrought.

On the return of the expedition with their captives, when they

come within hearing of the village from which they were sent, they

blow loud their war trumpets, and the villagers know by the peculiar

call, that they are returning victors. On their arrival, they place all

the captives in the hands of the head of the war, who feasts his troops

and then dismisses them to their several homes.

The head of the war keeps the captives a considerable time, when,

if none of their friends come to redeem them, he sells them off to

Other districts for oxen or buffaloes if practicable, that he may have an

0x or a buifalo to give to each village that came to his aid.

TREATMENT OF Prisoners.

Captives are often ill-treated, beaten, wounded, and occasionally

killed. When they are brought in bound and fettered to the head of

the war, he sometimes addresses one thus: “I did not begin this war.

You killed my father, you killed my mother ; you have cut off my head,

made my tongue to protrude. You have made the blood to flow to the

160 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. [No. 3,

handle of the cleaver, to the sheath of the spear; you have snapped

the bow string, you have broken the spear. You have made my father

come to corruption, my mother to rottenness. You have exasperated

me, you have made my anger to rise. I have not attacked you without

reason; there was a righteous cause. You have dried up the waters,

you have made the land barren, the grain unproductive, the barns

empty. You have angered the God of heaven, you have provoked

the Lord of the earth. You have stopped the rains, and made the

dry season irregular. You must now redeem yourselves, you must

pay money, you must give kyee-zees. If you do not furnish your price

you must become slaves and die slaves.”

When captives are sold, it is always difficult to obtain buyers for

elderly people at any price; but men and women from thirty to forty -

years of age will sell for one hundred rupees each ; and young men —

and young women for three hundred. Girls and boys between twelve :

and fifteen years of age are considered the most valuable, and are

purchased at rates as high as four hundred rupees each. Children of

three or four years of age fetch thirty or forty rupees a piece. Prices,

however, are variable. When I was in Karenee, two Shan women

were brought in by some Shans, and sold for fourteen rupees each.

Redeeming Captives.—W hen part of a village attacked escapes, they

usually endeavour to redeem the prisoners that have been taken, before |

they are sold away to strangers. For this purpose, an elder belonging

to a neutral village is hired to go and buy off the captives.

When the messenger comes to the head of the war, and explains

his object; if acceptable, he takes a hog, and cuts off its snout, |

and with the blood that flows from it, he besmears the legs of the

messenger, which is the sign that he makes him his friend, and he

says he will receive him as an ambassador of peace, and he shall make

peace between the belligerent parties, and they will become brethren

again.

After being well entertained that day, he is dismissed the next

morning with the legs and head of the hog that had been killed ; and

the sight of these, when he returns, is regarded as legal proof that his

mission has been accepted in good faith ; and that definite arrange

ments may be made for the redemption of each captive, if they do

not quarrel about the price, which they sometimes do. When every i

1868.) Dwellings, works of art, laws, Ge. of the Karens. 161

thing has been arranged satisfactorily, filings are made from a sword,

a spear,a musket barrel and a stone, and a dog is killed, these

filings are then mixed with a part of its blood, and with the blood ofa

hog and a fowl; and the whole is put into a cup of water. This is

called the “ peace-making water.” Then the skull of the dog is

chopped in two, and one takes the lower jaw, and suspends it with

a string around his neck; the other party takes the part of the

skull containing the upper jaw, and hangs it around his neck in like

manner. They next take in hand the cup of ‘ peace-making water,”

and say; ‘‘ We will now make an end of the feud. Hereafter, we

will not attack each other; we will not devour each other’s property

any more, we will become brethren, we will marry into each other's

families. We will entertain no hatred, no malice; we will not

backbite each other, but we will be happy in each other down to the

generations of our children and grandchildren; and our children

shall not quarrel, but live in harmony.” “If you agree to this,”

says each party addressing the other, “and will agree to live in

accordance with this agreement for ever, unto the generations of our

children and grandchildren, then drink of the peace-making water.”

After drinking they say : “‘ Now that we have made peace, if any one

breaks the engagement, if he does not act truly, but goes to war again

and stirs up the feud again, may the spear eat his breast, the musket

his bowels, the sword his head; may the dog devour him, may the

hog devour him, may the stone devour him! When he drinks

_ whiskey, may it become in him the water that oozes froma dead body,

_ when he eats the flesh of a hog may that hog become the hog of his

funeral rites.”

After these imprecations, they drink again, and the captives are

dismissed.

_ As they go away a salute of muskets is fired, and a shower of

_ arrows is sent after them, typical of the power of the dismissing

party.

_- Treaty of Peace.—Sometimes when there have been feuds between

different villages, and the inhabitants have settled their difficulties,

both villages assemble together, and enter into a treaty of peace.

_ Having selected a large and durable tree for a witness, they assemble

around it, and each party cuts a deep notch in the tree. When the

162 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. [No. 3,

‘‘ peace-making water” is prepared and drank, and the imprecation

spoken, two elders rise up, spear in hand, and address the people

saying, “ The cause of action is finished this day. Hereafter act in

harmony, associate with each other as brethren. Hereafter if any

one brings up a cause of contention, this tree is witness against him.

If the elders die, the notches in this tree will remain as evidence

against him; and let this spear spear him, He shall be fined a

chatty of silver and a cup of gold.”

Beyond this notch in a tree, no monuments of peace or war are

known to exist.

Weapons of War.—Karen weapons of war are the bow and arrow,

spears and javelins, small spears that they throw at an enemy ; swords,

matchlocks, and old muskets. For defence they use breastplates

and shields, they plant pointed bamboos rising a few inches above the

ground around their houses, which, for the lack of a more appropriate

name, I called caltrops.

History.—The first historical notice we have of the Karens is from

the pen of Marco Polo in the 13th century. Malte Brun, on the basis

of Marco Polo’s travels, says: ‘‘ Thus the country of Caride is the south-

east point of Thibet, and perhaps the country of the nation of the

Cariaines ; which is spread over Ava.’’

This statement is confirmed by old Bghai poetry, in which we find

incidentally mentioned, the town of Bamo, as a place to which they were

formerly in the habit of going to purchase axes and bills, or cleavers

as they now do at Toungoo. When this poetry was composed, they

must have lived five hundred miles north of their present locality.

The Beghais have also traditions of a people corresponding to the

Seres of antiquity, who lived below them, towards the mouths of the

rivers*, which goes to show that they formerly occupied a more

northern region than they do at present.

The Sgaus have traditions that they came from a country north of

the Shans, and had to cross what they call ‘the river of running

sand,” which I have suggested may be the great desert between

China and Tibet, which Ha Han also designates the river of running

sand.

* See Toungoo News Sheet, August, 1864,

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Jc. of the Karens. 163

It is not known, however, that the Karens are mentioned by any

European writer from the days of Marco Polo to the mission of Col.

Symmes to the court of Ava, at the close of the last century, who

devotes a page to them in his book ; and though his account of them

is not applicable to the younger Karens, yet it is substantially correct

of those in the neighbourhood of Rangoon, of whom he spoke. _

Gaikho Tradition.—The Gaikhos trace their genealogy to Adam,

and make thirty generations from Adam, to the building of the tower

of Babel, at which time they say they separated from the Red Karens.

The Sgaus call Adam and Eve Tha-nai and K-u, but both the Gaikhos

and the Red Karens denominate them Ai-ra-bai, or E-rai-bai, and

Mo-ra-mu or Mo-ren-meu. The antiquity of this Gaikho genealogy

seems to me very doubtful; but I give it, as I have received it.

Kai-kie, the son of Adam, bears some resemblance to Cain, but the

other names have nothing like them in the Bible.

The first man and woman created were Ai-ra-bai and Mo-ra-mu ;

and Ai-ra-bai begot Kai-kie,

» Kai-Kie » Plu-dau,

» Plu-dau », Plau-yu,

» Plau-yu », Po-pau,

», Po-pau », Kan-phleu,

», Kan-phleu > | aban,

» Ka-bau » Ka-die,

», Ka-die » Ka-dau,

» Ka-dau », Htan-mai,

», Htan-mai », Pheu-shai-du-khu

», Pheu-Shai-du-khu », Yu-mu-du-htwe,

», Lu-mu-du-htwe », A-pha-sau-preu,

», A-pha-sau-preu », A-pha-htu-hta,

», A-pha-htu-hta

», A-pha-htu-ke », A-pha-pe-do,

», A-pha-pe-do », Mhie-plau-a-phau-hta

», Thie-plan-a-phau-hta

», <A-pha-htu-ke,

)

», -Lau-wa-a-pha-htu-ke,

», Lau-wa-a-pha-htu-ke », Dwie-tha,

Dwie-tha Pro-ka-phau-ka

”? ) ?

»» Pro-ka-phau-ka » Ka-so,

,, Ka-so ;) iPra-s0;

164 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. [No. 3,

begot Yan-pen-lie,

and Pra-so

,, Lan-pen-lie , Jhe-phau,

,, The-phau , Kan-pyu,

», Kan-pyt, ,, Pra-den-lie,

,, Pra-den-lie ,, Kle-pha-man,

,, Kle-pha-man . ,, Kle-pha-vie,

,, _Kle-pha-vie », Kle-pha-oo,

,, Kle-pha-oo ,, Pan-dan-man.

In the days of Pan-dan-man, the people determined to build a

pagoda that should reach up to heaven. The place they suppose to

be somewhere in the country of the Red Karens, with whom they

represent themselves as associated until this event. When the pagoda

was half way up to heaven, God came down and confounded the

language of the people, so that they could not understand each other.

Then the people scattered, and Than-mau-rai, the father of the

Gaikho tribe, came west, with eight chiefs, and settled in the valley of

the Sitang.

Red Karen Tradition—The Red Karens say they were driven

from a place called Ho-htay-lay in the neighbourhood of Ava, sixteen

or seventeen generations ago, and preserved an imperfect genealogical

tree of the succession of their chiefs from that period. Sixteen o

ake us back to about A. D. 1400,

seventeen generations ago would t

was founded, which synchronises

and that was the period when Ava

with the tradition.

Seventeen generations ago, they relate, they were governed by a

Queen. This lady once discovered a beautiful silver flower that

had sprung up out of the earth in the forest. The people recognised

the hand of God in giving it to them, and danced around it, and

worshipped. |

When this became known, the Burmese came down on the Karens

to obtain possession of ‘the silver flower. In the war that ensued, the »

Queen was killed, and the Karens fled south to the country of

Toungoo, where they say they built a city. But the Burmese followed

them up, and after a residence of one year in Toungoo they fled

each to the region which they now occupy. %

“Dr. Richardson who visited Eastern Karenee obtained from the

people another tradition, in which they represented themselves as

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. 165

coming originally from China with a large invading force, and when

the Chinese were driven back, the Red Karens were left behind. Tt

was about the period referred to above that Burmese history states

Ava was beseiged by a large Chinese force ; which is another coincidence

adapted to make the truth of the sixteen generations plausible.

When the Red Karens came to their present locality, they found

the country inhabited by Shans, whom they drove out. The first

chief that came to the country was Than-krie, or Than-htsgen.

The descendants of Than-krie reigned, for eight generations, but

there is no record of their names. In the eighth generation, the

people were joined by the descendants of a brother of Than-krie, under

Kha-ma Kha-thya, and they usurped the government,

The genealogy of Kha-ma is traced thus :

“ Kha-ma Kha-thya begot Rie-men Sa-su, and

Rie-men Sa-su begot Phan-bya.”

This Phan-bya neither eat rice nor drank spirits. He lived on

yams and fruit; and assumed the character of one possessed of

miraculous powers. He said he could see into the invisible world, was

skilled in dreams, understood deep things, and could prophecy things

to come. ‘The people conferred upon him the title of San-bwa.

“Phan-bya begot Tho-ray,” and Thoray eat rice, so the title

of San-bwa was not conferred upon him.

“ Tho-ray begot Bu-phan, and Phan-bya.”’

Like their grandfather, Phan-bya, neither of these brethren eat rice +

and both were made San-bwas, ruling apparently in conjunction,

Bu-phan died without issue; but

_ “Phan-bya begot Bu-ray.”

In the days of Bu-ray there was no San-bwa again, for he eat and

drank like ordinary people.

“ Bu-ray begot Ya-yan.”

Ya-yan did not eat rice, so he was made San-bwa,

“ Ya-yan begot Rie-ray.”

There was no San-bwa again in the days of Rie-ray.

“ Rie-ray begot Phan-bya.”

~ Phan-bya eat no rice, so became a San-bwa ; but he did not live long.

The record says he died young, and that he was contemporary with

166 Dwellings, works of art, laws, Se. of the Karens. [No. 3

Kepho, the present San-bwa of western Karenee who succeeded him.

How he came to the government does not appear, but there is strong

presumptive evidence that he was a usurper, and probably killed the

San-bwa. Kepho has no genealogy to show, but leaps back sixteen

generations and says he is the descendant of the first chief Than-krie,

but produces no evidence to sustain his pretensions

Ke-pho eat rice and drank spirits till he was thirty years of age,

when he abandoned them and has lived a vegetarian ever since.

Kepho’s people close the genealogy saying: “ So at last the descen-

dants of Than-krie became San-bwa in the person of Kepho; and

Phan-bya who was the first San-bwa prophesied and said : ‘ Hereafter

the descendants of Than-krie will rise to be San-bwas. Then there

will be great happiness; and when they become San-bwas do not

oppose them.’ These words have been fulfilled, for the Ta-lya, the

descendants of Phan-bya do not .oppose the present San-bwa, Kepho ;

put they observe the prophetic words of their ancient San-bwa, and

receive him.”

The division of the Red Karens into two tribes, eastern and western,

has been usually regarded as a modern event, and began with the

father of the present ruler of Karenee, but this tradition throws it

back several generations. ve }

Six generations ago Man-pheu appeared among the Red Karens.

“ Fle was a Burman who quarrelled with the King of Burmah, and

was driven awayfrom Ava, and came and dwelt among the Red

Karens; where he succeeded in making himself a ruler.

‘© Man-pheu begot Man-kay, and

Man-kay begot Bu-phan.”

Bu-phan took upon him the prophetic character, neither eat rice

nor drank spirits, and became a San-bwa. According to some accounts ;

° Z ix

this Bu-phan was the first ruler of Hastern Karenee, and was a son of ~

the King of Ava who fled from his father in disgrace.

‘“ Bu-phan begot Hto-ray, and

Hto-ray begot Tan-ya, and

Tan-ya begot Ya-hta.”

Ya-hta is the present ruler of Eastern Karenee, and the man that

protects Shan-loung. | .

‘

;

1868.] Dwellings, works of art, laws, Sc. of the Karens. 167

. This genealogy, as given above, is probably inaccurate, being the

first ever obtained, but it may serve as a basis for future correction.

Loungoo Tradition—Thirty years ago I met with a tradition in

Tavoy, that the Karens had formerly a city at the north, called

Toungoo. On coming here, I found the Karens in the confident

belief that the first city in Toungoo was built by a Karen, This

tradition isin a measure confirmed by a Burmese history found in

the Kyoungs. It is therein stated that about the year A. D. 1298,

a teacher atthe town of Htieling said to one of his pupils called

Karen-ba: “If you go south, you will becomea great man.” He

went south, and took up his abode in the south-east of Kaylen,

naming the place, ‘‘ Karen City.”

His name signifies “‘ Karen father,’ and the Karens claim him for

one of their nation, which some Burmans admit, while others say it

was a name bestowed upon him, because he treated the Karens like

a father. He subsequently united with two Burmans, the history

states, the sons of a former ruler in Toungoo, that the king of

Martaban had defeated and carried away captive. The three jointly

founded the red city of Toungoo, A. D. 1281. The elder brother of

the Burmans was killed by the younger, A. D. 1317. The youn-

ger survived seven years, dying, A. D. 1324. Karen-ba then

_Yeigned alone, but the son and widow of the younger Burman

_ Were discovered in a plot to assassinate Karen-ba, and they were both

put to death. He reigned quietly eighteen years longer, and died

OA. D. 1342. This is the last record of Karen-ba in the Burmese

books; and though there is nothing incredible in his being a Karen,

yet there is no evidence to show that the Karens had any part in the

- ¢ity.

' The Karen traditions are pure myths, without a particle of historic

truth. They say that the present city of Toungoo, which they

regarded as the largest city in the world excepting Ava, was built by

a Karen called “‘ Tan-oo Shan,” which signifies, ‘‘ Ruler of Toungoo,”

and he had a wife called Khai-pa, but known in tradition under the

name of Sa-mu-wa, signifying “‘ White Lady.”

- Soon after Toungoo was built, the King of Ava came down and

fought against it, and killed Tan-oo Shan. His death is attributed

to his not listening to his wife, While a personal contest was going

168 Dwellings, works of art, laws, &c. of the Karens. [No. 3,

on between the Toungoo ruler and the king of Ava, the White Lady

called out to her husband: ‘“ Smite him on the neck with your sword

and then hit hig head with the hilt, and his head will fall off.”

Tan-oo Shan was paying no attention to his wife, and did not hear ;

but the King of Ava was more attentive and caught the words, and

tried the experiment on Tan-oo Shan, when his head fell to the

ground, but it still retained life enough after it was cut off to ex-

claim ; “‘ Toungoo is mine, and when the appointed time arrives, L

will return again, and take possession of it with white and black foreig-

ners.”

“What became of the “ White Lady” is not clear from the above

legend ; but from a single verse that I have met with, it would seem —

she was neglected and went away, for it is said :

‘¢ Sa-mu-wa, we did not believe her,

Sa-mu-wa, we did not obey her:

She returned to her former home.

And long have we looked for her return.”

Another prose tradition says : “ Anciently Tan-oo Shan, and Ava —

Shan contended with each other and fought. Tan-oo Shan was a good ~

man, but Ava Shan was fierce and killed him. Before he died, he

promised and gave commands and said: ‘I do not die for ever.”’ He

promised that in seven generations, he would return again to Toungoo

and look after the city he had built. And the elders charged their

children, generation after generation: ‘When our Tan-oo Shan died,

he said he did not die; he only removed towards the mouth of the

river below; and that when seven generations, seven ages were

completed, he would come up again.” Hence the elders commanded

and said: ‘If people say the Tan-oo Shan has appeared, and he comes |

from the east, or the north, or the west, wherever he may be, do not

believe him, do not follow him. He is not our Tan-oo Shan. But

when people say the man has come from below, from the mouth of the

river; that is indeed our Lord, the Tan-oo Shan risen again and

yeturned. When you hear that he comes up with his wife and children

and followers of white and black foreigners, that is our Tan-oo Shan.

Go look at him. Go to him quickly. And look at his wife, Sa-mu~

wa, Is she white? I she dresses in red or black, or yellow, om

1868.] Additions to the knowledge of Sith. 169

variegated, it is not Sa-mu-wa, it is not the wife of our Lord Tan-oo

Shan. Look at her accurately. If she be white and dresses in white,

she is the veritable Sa-mu-wa ; and he is the true Tan-oo Shan.”

AppITIoNs To THE KNOWLEDGE or SILK ;—by Captain J. Mrrcuett,

Superintendent of the Government Museum, Madras.

[Received 9th October, 1865.]

In the year 1859, I had occasion to examine with the microscope

several kinds of raw silk, and I then discovered that the silk of Antherea

puplva, commonly known as Tussah silk, had a very peculiar structure,

differing entirely from that of the several species of Bombyx.

My duties, up toa very recent date, left me no time for original

research and the Tussah silk was consequently put aside. It was not,

however, forgotten, and I have taken advantage of the leisure afforded

by a holiday to endeavour to elucidate the structure of the filament,

The silk of Bombya is cylindrical or nearly so. It is translucent

and, apparently, homogeneous. The larva spins a double filament ;

the two filaments, being laid side by side like two fine glass rods, are

held together by a gummy cement which is soluble in water. The

silk of Antherea paphia is flat, and appears to be composed of a number

of opaque rods placed side by side, the intervals between the rods

being filled in by a translucent cement, very difficult to dissolve.x—

The filament is evidently compound, Under certain conditions of

‘illumination, it bears considerable resemblance to one of the coarser

bands of Hobert’s Test Plate.

_ This very peculiar appearance of the Tussah filament, is readily

seen with a quarter or half inch Achromatic; but the demonstration

of its compound structure, in that exact way that will alone satisfy

the demands of science, is a more difficult matter, on account of the

insolubility of the cement which binds the elementary, or primary

filaments together. Macerating the silk in water for upwards of a

month did not separate them, alcohol did not do so. Acetic acid

mixed with alcohol appears to promise well; but the only way in

170 Additions to the knowledge of Silk. [No. 3,

which Ihave yet been able to effect a separation is by tearing the

silk gently with fine bent needles. In this way, small portions have

been opened out, and the compound nature of the filament placed be-

yond a doubt. I have been able to measure the diameter of the

filaments, not very accurately, however, on account of their trans-

parency, but the finest do not exceed s545,5th of an inch.

It is scarcely prudent to speculate upon the kind of organ by which

this silk is produced, there is, however, reason to believe, that the silk

issues in the form of a hollow, or ribbed cylinder, of which the

opaque ribs are the primary filaments, and the interspaces the cement.

Such a cylinder, while in a soft state, would collapse, as soon as the

central support was withdrawn, and its application to a leaf, or a

part of the cocoon already spun, would cause it to be flat. This of

course is only surmise, and is only given asa hint to any one who

may have the means and inclination to pursue the enquiry. It can

only be demonstrated by a careful preparation of the spinning organs

of the caterpillar which, if I have euessed rightly, will be found in

the form of a ring of minute apertures set round a central papilla.

The silk of the Actias selene is flat like Tussah silk, and from its

fibrous appearance, there can be little doubt that it also is compound,

That of Attacus atlas appears to be cylindrical, it is, however, finely

grooved on the surface, and is in all probability a compound structure

like the other two. 4

_ [ have examined several kinds of silk, and have invariably found it

to consist of two filaments, simple or compound, as the case may be,

placed side by side. I mention this because in all the works save one,

to which I have been able to refer the silkworm is said to spina

single thread. The exception is “ Adam’s Essays on the Microscope.”

Edition of 1798. It is there correctly stated that the filament is

double. 7

1868. ] A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah éc. 171

A sHoRT sketcH or THE Trips or Buurreanan ann Hovrrranan sk

—by Puter A. Minas, G. M,C. B., Honorary Assistant Surgeon ;

in Civil Medical charge of the Hissar District.

[Received 10th April, 1866.]

In connection with the recommendation of Dr. J. Fayrer, regarding

ethnological exhibition, I have compiled the accompanying laconic

sketch of the tribes of Bhutteanah and Hurrianah. In it is embodied

all the information that I could collect during my leisure hours, It is

amere attempt and naturally very short, but it may guide others

who will have an opportunity of visiting the same districts, and who

are desirous to work out their ethnology.

Baniahs.

Lis.—afaar.

Origin.—The origin of this tribe is blended into obscurity, but the

following is the traditional account: that one, Oogur Sein, a Powar

Rajpoot of the Chunderbansce division, took for a wife an Abhirit

woman ; she bore him 17 sons, and each son became the head of a tribe,

Division into Olasses.—The Baniahs are divided into 6 goths viz.

Aghorwall, Mahasurree, Uswall, Khuttree, Mahar, and Rorah.

_ The Aborigines of Agroha,—a village 12 miles north of Hisgar—

the descendants of Oogur Sein are spread far and wide, each as

a distinct tribe, and one cannot intermarry with the other.

The Aghorwall is considered the highest in order, and the Rorah the

lowest, for the latter eat meat and drink spirits. |

Hach caste has its purthit.§ The Aghorwall can become Surrowgee,

a sect very austere in the ceremonies of religion; they do not eat or

* The MSS. of this paper was accompanied by a series of photograms,

representing members of the various tribes. It would be too costly to reproduce

them, but the original copies are deposited in the Archives of the Society, and

can be inspected by any one interested in the subject.— Ep.

+ yh —Beit, a caste whose business is to attend to cows ; acowherd caste.

Wilson, in his glossary, gives a full account of this tribe.

TL G,S—iirg, pedigree, species, caste, or tribe. |

" ne Sy $—aditea, a family priest, who presides at the performance of reli-

Slous Ceremonies,

172 A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, de. [ No. 3,

drink after sunset; avoid injuring or destroying insects or animals,

as far as possible,

Habit.—Settled.

Habitat.—The Baniahs are scattered over every village in the

North-Western Provinces, and in the largest commercial towns of

Bengal and the Punjab. The cities of Sirsa and Hissar are chiefly

inhabited by them.

Occupation —The chief pursuit is commerce.

Religion.—Hindus, and followers of Vishnu.

Character.—Sly, submissive and very parsimonious. Peaceful,

timid, and particularly usurious. Intelligent, can read and wiite, and

enterprising in trade.

Diet.—Vegetables, milk, and clarified butter, and confectionaries.

Narcotic.—Only tobacco is smoken in hukas,

Longevity.—About 60 years.

Physical Conformation.—Some have dark, others light yellow or

coppery complexion. Many shave their heads, and wear a chonti ;*

others allow their hair to grow. They also shave their beard and allow

their moustache to grow. Some are spare built, but the richer class

are generally embonpoint, Their average height is 5 feet 4 inches.

Dress. Dhotee,t turban of red colour, but of yellow spotted with

on public occasions,

red, is worn in the spring season, and chudder ;

silk, plain or brocaded, velvet shawls, &c. are used. Young lads are

seen covered with ear-rings, neck chains, armlets, &e. Asa mark

of distinction, both social and religious, a circular, and several trans-.

verse marks are made on the forehead with sandal wood paste, and

vermillion.

Bagrees.

Y }

isp aTe aT. j

Origin.—The origin is obscure. The Bagrees are allied to Jauts.

Division into Classes.—There is no division of this tribe known.

Habit.—Migyratory.

% hee —ate}, a tuft of hair left at the top of the head, and all the rest

is shaved off,

1 (hp — BTA,

and fastened behind,

cloth worn round the waist, passing between the legs

= aa

1868. ] A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, &c. 173

Halitat.—They are chiefly seen towards the desert tract of

Bicaneer territory, but are also found in the Bhutteanah district from

Jamaul to Bicaneer, and also in the Hissar district.

Occupation.—Agriculturists, and they also let cattle on hire.

Religion.—Hindus.

Character.—Peaceful, timid, and industrious in their field avoca-

tions.

Diet.—Vegetarian. Although animal food is not prohibited, yet

they refrain from its indulgence for penurious purposes. Amongst

this class, except millet seeds—lentil—no other kind of food is relished :

_ this is either eaten separately or mixed, the latter mode is preferred

during the hot season only, and is called rabri,* which is prepared by

mixing with water a sufficient quantity of salt, and boiled. It is

eaten by the rich either with ghee, or, by the poor, with lussee.t

Longevity.— About 80 years.

Use of Narcotics.—The Bagrees smoke tobacco by fixing a tawat

or ghutteeah in a chillum, then cover with lighted dried dung of camel

orcow. They also use the country spirit, and take it medicinally in

Catarrhus, Pleuritis, Pneumonia, and after confinement.

_ Physical Conformation.—They are of a dark complexion, slender

in form, hair black, and wear moustache and beard.

Dress——The males wear dhotee, white turban, merzai, and a

ehudder. The females wear ghugrah§ and chudder of wool, either

black or red coloured, with a narrow border of some other dye, but

generally dotted red, and ungeeah|| after marriage.

Bhuttees.

see St.

Origin.—A portion of the inhabitants of Jesselmeer emigrated

during the reign of Allahoodeen Garee, King of Delhi, and settled in

a place, where a bhat§] only resided,—and in compliment to the bard,

the place was denominated Bhatneer, - and called themselves Bhattees,

Here they formed a powerful colony, and continued to be governed

ig (9331) CTS, pap, or porridge. ig — BET, milk, whey.

of I93, a tile. § tyeXeS, petticoat or skirt,

|| 4S}, boddice or stays. q wlo—are, 2 family bard,

174 A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, &e. [No. 3,

under the authority of the kings of Delhi. They extended their

power, and at last secured the tract of land, which derived its name,

and retains to this day after them, Bhutteana.

The Bhuttees are also called Pachaddas, which word is a mere

corruption of Pacheemabad, meaning, inhabitants or people of the

West, so designated by the inhabitants of Delhi.

Division into Classes —The Bhuttee caste is divided into 2 thoks,*

viz. Kulloka and Bhanaku ; these are sub-divided into Joiah, Men-

dival, Luckwarrah, Bherayka, and Wuttoo.

They first settled on the banks of the Sutledge, and finally located

at Sookchain, a village 11 miles north of Sirsa. One of their chief

Jodh, settled in a village which was named after him Jodhka; Begoo

established another village after his name.

Originally, a Chowhan Rajpoot was the first of the Bhanaka party,

who settled in Bhutteanah district during the time of Nabob Nussoor

Khan, the 11th in descent, and established 3 villages viz. Khyrika,

Boodhabhana, and Bunseedhurree.

There are altogether 7 villages now existing in the Sirsa pergunnah —

of this clan, a few in the Roree pergunnah, but the majority live in”

the Putteealah states. Besides the above mentioned, there are other :

subdivisions viz. Jhorurs, originally Rajpoots, who came from Bhut- |

tenda, the Khurrul, Jugrah, and Goodharah.

The previous habit of Bhuttees.—It is said that the Bhuttee popula- H

tion hag much diminished since the establishment of British rule, as |

the pursuits of husbandry are not in accordance with their taste. — |

Those that remain have now quietly settled down as cultivators, but~

are far from being industrious.

The old people speak of the ancient times with great exultation, |

alloyed with regret, when they could muster two or three hundred,

make raid into the neighbouring foreign states, return with a hundred |

head of cattle, which were immediately divided, and then disperse

with the ill-gotten booty with extreme delight. 2

Habitat. —The Bhuttees are now found residing near the banks of the

Ghuggur, and Choyea in the Sirsa district, also in the Hissar district.

Present occupation.—Agriculturists ; but formerly known for their

marauding propensities. "

# S5-43— BTR, divisions, parties.

1868] A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, éc. 175

Religion.—Mahomedan.

Character.—Indolent formerly, but are now inclined to earn their

livelihood by a reluctant field labour.

Diet.— Animals and vegetables.

Use of Narcotics —They smoke tobacco in a leathern hooka. Those

who live on the borders of Bicaneer, indulge in the use of opium.

Longevity.— About 80 years.

Physical Conformation.—Dark brown complexion, wear the jet

black hair down to the shoulder, do not shave the whiskers nor

moustache ; low in the mental scale, and of inferior capacity ; and the

_average height 5 feet, 9 inches.

Dress—The males wear large turbans of white cloth, a thymwnd*

or tybund of coarse cloth or coloured loongee, an wngerkha sometimes,

and a chudder thrown over all. The females wear until married a

koorteet and after marriage ungeeah, ghugrah, with large red _ prints,

and a chudder thrown over the body, covering the head also.

Jauts,

p\>-—STT.

Origin.—Traditionally, the Jauts are the offspring of a Rajpoot

father, and of an inferior caste of mother—a Sooder.

Division into Classes—Jauts are divided into several goths, viz. :

Bynewall, Goodharas, Sohos, &e. They are of two descriptions, the

Dehsee or settled, and Bagrees or wandering. The former has no real

caste, but is only a modified Rajpoot.

- Habitat,—Bhutteanah and Hissar districts. This tribe is also seen

in Kurnaul, but there many have become Mahomedans,

rf Habit.—Peaceful and settled.

ij Occupation.— This class confines itself to agricultural pursuits, and

may enlist themselves in the Infantry or Cavalry regiments.

_ Religion.—Hindus. They pray to Ram, their chief object of devo-

tion. Their widows are not allowed to return to their own family,

but are married to their next brother-in-law, or the nephew.

Character —Hard working, truthful, and very thrifty. They make

good soldiers, being brave, and not much troubled with caste prejudices.

| ae pos), a broad flowing sheet extending to the ankles and tied at the waist,

ae waistcoat or jacket for females,

os ?

176 A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, dc. [No. 3,

Diet-—They principally live on cereals and vegetables ; sometimes

eat goat meat. The Sikh Jauts eat better and live well.

Use of Narcotics —Some Jauts serving as peons in the Jehsul Police —

&c. add churrus to the tobacco they use for smoking. The higher

class use in the proportion of 1 seer of tobacco leaf, to 4 chittacks of

goor, and well pounded together. Opium is also used by this class,

particularly those residing towards the boundary of Bicaneer territory.

They also, without hesitation, drink country spirits.

Longevity.—60 years.

Physical Conformation.—Coppery complexion ; iris dark ; conjunc-

tive yellowish; they are tall, erect, manly, and robust ; their limbs

are well shaped; features regular, countenance placid and dignified.

Dress. —The men wear lengota* or kutch, koortapt and khesh or

chudder, white or coloured turban. The females use chudder, koortee,

trowsers and ghugrah. ‘The last is generally dyed red or yellow and

is either striped or dotted.

Rajpoots.

wool) — 1ST.

Origin.—Having been driven out of the Jyepoor territory by

Sahabooddeen of the Ghoree dynasty about Sumbut 1234 (A. D. 1177)

the Rajpoots took possession of all the district now comprising Hissar,

Tansee and Bhewannee pergunnahs.

Feroze Shah in 1371 first began to convert them by force, with more

or less success, till the time of Aurungzeb, but this effort was relin-

quished on the decline of the Mahomedan power.

The independence of the Rajpoots of course was always in inverse

ratio to the power of the Dehli potentates. All the Jatu tribes o

Bhewannee revolted in 1809, and the town was stormed, and take

by the British troops.

The Rajpoots—Hindus and Mussulman converts—still remain i

the proportion of 75 villages or about one quarter of what they

‘formerly consisted of.

Division into Classes.—It is needless here detailing that the Raj-

* US , 2 small narrow slip of cloth passed between the thighs and tucke

into a waistbelt before and behind.

{ 44,5, a jacket or waistcoat.

ors

1868. ] A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, éc. 177

poots or Raj-pootras, form one of the highest castes of Hindu reli gion,

belonging to the prince or military order.

Habitat.—They are spread over the Hissar district, their principal

residence being Bhewannee, Rysoo, and Dhymull. They reside also

in the Bhutteana district, chiefly on the borders of the Bicaneer

territory.

Habit.~—Mostly cultivators. As a class they are brave and proud,

Occupation.—Although particularly fond of land, yet they are in-

different agriculturists. They furnish few men to the Irregular

Cavalry.

Religion.—Hindu ; Ramchundra is their chief object of worship.

Character.—Domineering, and careful of what they call dzzut.

They are generally addicted to highway robberies, and cattle-thieving ;

careless of money ; decidedly brave.

Diet.—They eat vegetables and all sorts of animals, and pork with

delight, but not beef.

Use of Narcotics.—They smoke tobacco, and use opium freely,

particularly those living near the Bicaneer territory. They do not

hesitate to imbibe fermented liquors,

Longevity.— About 60 years.

Physical Conformation.—Dark, or fairish ; iris dark, and the con-

junctive pretty clean ; tall, well formed ; having regular features, and

well limbed.

Dress.—Usually a red turban is used, white ungerkha, and dhotee

of various colours, but they are partially red.

Rahees.

us*l—aty.

Origin.—Rahee or Raheen, a denomination said'to have been de-

rived from a Punjabee word signifying a gardener, or tiller of the

soil, and it is said to be so styled from the following circumstance :

The town and citadel of Dach, having fallen into the hands of certain

parties who had besieged it, they issued orders for a general massacre, but

the labourers, cultivators, and artizans were to be exempted ; hereupon

the Rahees who bore arms resorted to a device, by which their lives

were spared, each threw away his weapon, and in its stead carried on

his back a plough, or some implement of husbandry, and hence the

appellation which up to this day they bear.

178 A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, éc. [No. 3,

It appears that the territory comprised between Bhutneer in the

Bicaneer territory, and Futteeabad in the Hissar district, was inhabit-

ed from the earliest time by a set of people known under the general

name of Rahees, one portion of whom is said to have emigrated from

Sindh, and another from Jesselmeer. In its prosperous state this

tract contained 1860 villages, with a corresponding population, addicted

to agricultural and pastoral pursuits, but in consequence of constant

depredations, at a later period by the Bhuttees, and the anarchy and

confusion that resulted, the greater part of the population were led

gradually to leave the country, some emigrated into Bareilly and

others settled in Pasya.

Division into Classes.—None.

Habitat.—This tribe is to be found near the banks of the Sutledge

and Ghugger streams; in different parts of the Punjab, and also in

the Rohilcund district.

Habit.—Strictly cultivators.

Occupation.—Their principal occupation is husbandry, but they are —

prone to follow any form of agricultural pursuits.

Religion —Mahomedan and Hindu converts.

Character.—Docile, religious, but were migratory before to evade

persecution, hence the reason of their being so scattered. |

Diet.—The Mahomedan portion enjoy animal and vegetable food,

but the Hindus avoid the former.

- Use of Narcotics.—They smoke tobacco only.

Longevity.—About 50 years.

Physical Conformation.—The same as the Bhuttees.

Dress.—Ditto ditto.

Ranghurs.

Origin.—They are Rajpoot Mussulmans. ;

Division into Classes.—They are divided into 8 tribes, Jaut, Sutrolah

and Ragoo.

Habitat.—Hissar district; and their chief villages are Bullealee,

Bas, and Loharroo.

Habit —Cultivators.

Occupation.—Fond of agriculture, but they are poor, many prefe

taking service in the Irregular Cavalry.

Religion.—Mahomedans.

1868.] A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, ée. 179

Character.—Brave but violent, and proud of their honour, to which

they cling tenaciously.

Diet.—They live on animal and vegetable food.

Use of Narcotics.—They smoke the huka only, and abstain from the

use of spirituous liquor.

Longevity.—About 55 years.

Physical Conformation.—Complexion varies much from dark to

coppery ; iris chiefly dark, and the conjunctive frequently yellowish ;

active and full of fire. They are erect, tall, manly and robust; their

limbs well shaped ; their features regular, and countenance dignified,

stern, with an air of heroism and bravery. Their hair raven, and

flows down to the shoulders. Average height 5 feet 11 inches. They

are on the whole a very superior set of people to look at.

Dress.—Their usual dress is white or red turban ; red dopattas,

trowsers, merzai, and chudder.

Vishnus,

Oars A

poy — qa.

Origin.—Sprung into existence about A. D. 1485, or about 50 years

before the foundation of the Sikh religion. Its founder was J ambajee

of Peepassur in Bicaneer. They are the followers of Vishnu.

Mode of Worship.—Their mode of worship is to present offering at me

the shrine, and uttering prayers whilst bathing. Its tenets are to

abstain entirely from animal food, to bathe before meals, and to marry

none but those of their own persuasion. It is contained in a book

called Jambajee ka banee, meaning Jambajee’s discourse. They salute

each other by expressing neom-salam, ¢. e., I salute you most respect-

fully, the rejoinder is Jambajee ko, signifying, May your salutation be

acceptable to Jambajee. They convert others by shaving off the chonté.

They bury their dead bodies in a cow- yard, or close to their place of

residence. Their great temple is at Sameerah Dhul in Bicaneer, from

which place it is said their first leader took his flight to heaven.

Habitat.—They inhabit Hissar, the neighbouring district of Sirsa ;

the adjoining foreign territories, and also portions of the North-Western

Provinces.

fabit.—Principally cultivators.

Occupation.— Besides using agriculture, they are also good carpen-

ters, and carriers or trainers of camels,

180 A short sketch of the Tribes of Bhutteanah, ce. [No. 3,

Religion.—Hindus, worshippers of Vishnu.

Character. —Civil and industrious.

Dict.—Chiefly vegetables. They do not touch meat, and as far as

possible they never allow any animal or bird to be slaughtered or shot

in their neighbourhood.

Use of Narcotics—The Vishnus use no narcotics. They neither

smoke, nor drink any fermented liquor. Such is their aversion, that

they consider it a sacrilege to allow fire from their hearth for the

- purpose of smoking.

Longevity.—About 60 years.

Physical Conformation.— Rather dark, but yellow predominating.

The iris dark or grey, sometimes greenish. The conjunctive generally

yellowish. Average height 6 feet.

Dress.—The males wear coloured chudder of wool or loe,* a pugree,

ungerkha and dhotee. The females use coloured woollen dhablah

generally of purple colour, and red border, and they always wear

shoes.

Wuttoos.

Origin. —Allied to the Bhuttees.

Habitat.—Banks of the river Sutledge in the Bhutteana district,

also in the Ferozepore, and Montgomery districts, and in the Bhawul-

pore territory. :

Habit.—Settled and fond of agriculture.

Occupation.— Indolent previously, but now they are inclined to be

laborious.

Religion.—Mahomedan.

Character.— Submissive and industrious.

Diet-—Animal and vegetable food.

Use of Narcotics.—They smoke the huka only.

Longevity.—About 80 years.

Physical Conformation,—-Complexion light brown, black flowing

hair, iris black, wear thick beard and moustache ; some are well built

tall, strong and able-bodied. Average height 5 feet, 10 inches.

Dress.—Turban, dhotee or tymund, and chudder, generally checked,

or striped white and blue. } 7 |

* sx be as, blanket or kambal Ses —AA.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Parr IL—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

—

No. IV.—1868.

PR AARAARAABRAAAN PLLAAP LEE OL

Toe Apdsustment or Tur Hinvv Carenpar ;—by BAsu Praripa-

CHANDRA Guosna, B. A.

[Received 27th May, 1867. |

Owing to certain causes, presently to be explained, calculations of

the Hindus regarding the year are in error. Their calendar in cer-

tain points presents a state of things that existed some centuries ago,

It is necessary that such corrections be introduced in the elements of

their calendar as will make its indications consistent with reality,

The Hindu year is determined by two consecutive conjunctions in

longitude of the sun with the star B Arietis. Almost all nations

of antiquity have commenced their year from this moment,

By the existing Bengal Calendar, the initial moment of the year is

placed on the 13th of April, about seven days earlier than the real

conjunction, making the subsequent eleven transits of the sun, the

eleven Sankrdntis, seven days too early.

The initial point of the year has retained in its name the idea of its

coincidence with the equinoctial point, a point now removed twenty-

one days from the star. The following simple solutions of spherical

triangles will show that the ecliptic conjunction of the sun with 6

Avietis the Acvini Yogatava of the Hindus happens between the 20th

and 21st of April in 1867.

From the Nautical Almanac we have for B Arietis R = 1h. 47m.

17s. which expressed in degrees of are == 26° 49! 44",

182 The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. [No. 4,

In the same Ephemeris the North declination on the 18th of April

is 20° 9’ 17,” the obliquity of the ecliptic being 23° 27’ 15’.

Then DN. + o = 48° 36’ 82" and o # DN. = 8° 17’ 58’.

Hence N. P. D. = 69° 50’ 48”.

@ = 116° 4974" oa. ee ce ce cee cee neeeeees

2 (a + 6) = 21° 48" 16".

4 (a— B)= LV 38’ aoc:

2 (aE B)...ceeeeeeees Clo. Log. Cos., ..e-eceeeres 0:03225

2 (a— B)..e.esereeeeees Log. Cos., ..ssceeesees 9-99982

NG) aaeaatteln paeenenene™ Log. Cot., .cc.sserecee 9°78888

Log. tan., sss 9-82093

2 (AB) «0. eseeeee 33° 30’ 30”

2 (a — 8)... isdeguiyss Log. Sit, ...seseeeees 845930

2 (a+ B)....200eeeeee Co. Log. sin., ....eee .. 0°48082

BO) crcevcntee nee caeneens Log. Cot., .....c0ee a 9:78888

1(A—B)=2 AS’ Log, tan., ..cepeeeeeerer eevee 868900

Bi oe wtaatese? 4a 80"

Ce WG | eee 3h. 57m. 6s.

Hence by the Nautical Almanac the conjunction is between the

20th and 21st April. The Hindu calculations, however, referring the

conjunction to the 13th of April, make the year begin at the wrong

moment. :

In the above rough calculations Acvini is assumed as identical with

B Arietis. The Suryasiddhanta gives the polar longitudes of stars in

a very curious and arbitrary way. The author mentions certain

numbers as bia or root for each star, which numbers multiplied by

the constant 10 will give in minutes the polar longitudes of the

asterisms. The following are the bijas or roots for Acvini and

Bharani, 48, 40. Multiplying the bya for Acvini by the constant

10, we get 480’ or 8° the bhdga or position of the asterism in its por-

tion of its polar longitude.

Now let 7 = Polar Longitude.

w = Obliquity of the ecliptic.

« — Inclination of the declination circle of the star to the

ecliptic. A

1868.]. Lhe Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. 183

= Polar Longitude.

A = True Longitude.

Cae Cot w = tan a.

sin a sin d — sin X.

tan X. Cot a=sin p, the quantity to be added or subtracted from d

to give A,

Position in its portion or bhdgd, ....ecseccecccccosceececees 8°

IG CI a a a S°

Polar Latitude, ..... CHEE ie BiB oor ea i i a 10°

From the above we deduce the following by formula for Acvini.

ae bis Gas Caden coated ipsa ks eco UO” FEN

1 SEE Gel A i a Ra 11? 59’

This is the position of Acvini according to the Hindu Tables and

astronomical works. This position of the junction star refers us back to

the fifth century A. C. In each case, to reduce the distance given in

Flamsted’s Catalogue for the Vernal Equinox of A. ©. 560, we have

subtracted 15° 40’ from the longitude there given.

The following, however, are the real position of a and Arietis by

Kuropean calculations. °

Longitude of 8 Arietis at about 560 A. C., ...... 13° 56’

Taatitade, ........ Bark Yop awedns Cove aleeet ttc ee eae aoe ANN

maongitude of a Arictis,......:......ccseccscees Mec r AN Ay ee

MatHude, ........... Seerupied titer Arie eee ccaee re ea oe

Comparing these we find that the position of Acvini coincided

more with that of @ Arietis than with that of a Arietis. The Hindus

used very rude instruments of observation, and an error of even a

degree is allowable in their calculations.

The retrograde motion of the equinoxes together with an error in

determining the exact length of the year has brought on this difference

in their calendar.

The Hindu year, like all solar sidereal years, begins at the moment

of the sun’s entrance into Acvini, the first asterism of the constella-

tion Aries, and ends with the moment the luminary leaves Piscium

to re-enter Acvini. Such a method of determining the length of the

year accompanied by the following easy but ingenious distribution of

the fractional parts of a day has saved the Hindu year from the error

which was an element in the Kuropean years before the Julian correc-

184 The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. [No. 4,

tion. The Hindu civil year differs from the astronomical as regards

the fractions of a day. An error, however, in exactly determining the

value of this fraction will, following the Hindu method, soon be so

accumulated as to necessitate the introduction of a correction that the

calculations may agree with actual phenomena. Considering the

backwardness of the Hindu Philosophers to profit by recent investiga-

tions accompanied by want of that habit of verifying calculations by

observations, which Bacon’s philosophy alone can teach, it is natural

that the Hindu year will represent a state of things that does not

really exist. : |

The motion of the equinoxes in space, though observed in the

western world by Hipparchus so early as B. (. 136, was not known to

the Hindus in A. C. 400, the earliest date assignable to the Surya —

Siddhdnta from the longitudes of stars there noted. A theory of

libration of the equinoxes 27° either side of the first point of Aries is

stated in certain Siddhdntas, and others again calculate a complete

revolution of the points, but in no astronomical work of the Hindus

is any use made of such oscillation or motion. No work corrects its —

calculations according to the precession of the equinoxes, though the

Surya Siddhanta gives a rule for determining the numerical value of the —

same, and instructs the students to introduce the baja necessary for the :

motion of the equinoxes. ,

As stated before in reckoning civil time, fractions of a day are re-

jected. When the fraction is less than 30 Ghadis (half a Hindu day)

the civil year or the month is reckoned as beginning one day later than

the astronomical. The year consisting of 865.2448623 1177907 days,

365 whole days are deducted from it, the fraction, 24486231177907

being carried to the next year forms 365:4897246235814 days.

From this again the whole number of 365 days being deducted for

the second year leaves a fraction to which the value for another year

being added gives 965°7345869353371 days. This sum exceeds

865°5 days and therefore the year is made to commence one day later.

Deducting the fractional residue °73... from 366 days and the remain-

der -26541406466279 being again deducted from two tropical years”

(of 730°4897246235514 days) leaves 730°22431055889535. Deduct-

ing from the above for the 4th and 5th years (730) we carry the

remainder '2243105889535 of a day to the 6th year. :

1868. ] The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. (185

Thus the Hindus bring forward the year one whole day every fourth

year nearly or 289 days in 1192 years. The system involves the

error of the Julian year, which outruns the Hindu solar year (as well

as the European solar year with the Gregorian correction) by nearly

10’ 44” or two days 23’ 33” in 400 years ;

The annual variation of the equinoxes is according to the Surya

Siddhanta about 54’. The position of the initial point of the year

with reference to the equinox on the 13th of April, 1867, is found

from the following proportion given in the Siddhénta.

(1577917828 days) the number of days in a great Yuga is to (600)

the number of revolutions in it, as (1814605) the sum of the days

elapsed since the last epoch of conjunction, is to the number or frac-

tion of revolutions elapsed. This is 0 Rev. 248° 23’ 59’.7. The

bhuja or sine of this, is its supplement 68° 23’ 59”.7 for reducing the

supplement to an are of 27°, which is done by multiplying it by 3 and

dividing by 10, we get the ayandnga, the actual distance of the initial

point of the sphere from the equinox 20° 31’ 119.

One of the apparent reasons for the Surya Siddhanta’s not introduc-

ing this correction in the calculations is, because the author of the work

Supports the theory of libration. The colures therefore falling back

with respect to the fixed stars in round numbers 50” annually, the

Hindu system slowly advances beyond the true vernal equinox.

The initial point of the year is called the Mahdvishuva mesha

Sunkrdénti, the vernal equinoctial transit of the sun to Aries, Ag

shown before, this moment is no longer the equinoctial point, but is

Yemoved from it by a period of about 22 days. To this period adding

the distance of the present initial point from B Arietis as calculated

before, seven days, we get the actual distance of the @ Arietis from the

equinox, the difference between the sign and the constellation Aries.

‘The numerical value of this is about 30 and, assuming 50” in round

“numbers being the numerical value of the precession of the equinoxes,

we find that about 2260 years before the present time, the Hindu year

began with the vernal equinox, and the ecliptic conjunction of the

sun with Acvini happened at about the same time, or 300 B. C. is

the latest period to which the Hindu observations can be referred.

Tt is well to add that such determination of the dates of the Surya

Siddhanta, and the Hindu observation depends decidedly on partial rea-

186 | The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. [No. 4,

soning. All attempts towards accuracy even of centuries must be futile

and imperfect. Arguments stated above establish nothing besides what

is evident. If the Hindu calculations were as accurate as those of

western science, we could then have safely assigned the above given

dates to Hindu observations. The above proves that 393 B. C. the

initial point of the Hindu year coincided with the first point of Aries

and the vernal equinox. Beyond this, we have no reasonable ground

to advance. The Hindu observations may have commenced centuries

earlier, and the then existing rough methods of observation may have

led the credulous Hindu astronomer to believe that the equinox and

the first point of Aries were one and the same; when in reality the

equinox may have happened on the 4th or 8th day of Vaigdkha.

That the Hindu year formerly began about the vernal equinox, and

that the moment of such beginning of the year coincided with the mo-

ment of the ecliptic conjunction of the sun with Acvini, or that the

sign and the constellation Aries coincided at a former period with the

‘nitial moment of the Hindu year, is unquestionably proved by the

Hindu name for that moment, the sun is said to be then in the

asterism Acvinl.

Had no errors entered into the calculations of the Hiudus, their year —

would then have commenced at the present century on the 21st of ©

April, instead of the 13th. The Mahavishuva Sankranti then would H

have differed from the vernal equinox exactly by that amount by

which the sign Aries differs from the constellation Aries. But as it ©

is, it involves a double error, and leads one to suppose that about 500—

years before the present time, the first day of the Hindu year was”

brought to coincide with the first point of the constellation Aries —

(8 Arictis) and that since then, owing to the motion of the equinoxes,

the initial moment of the year has retrograded 7 degrees. Such a

supposition is the only explanation that can at present be offered

regarding this anomalous position of the initial point of the year;

now that the first of Vaicakh 1s placed between the points with which

+t coincided when the constellations were formed, and in which it should

be, if the calendars had received proper corrections. The values of the

bujas Or corrections subsequently added to the Hindu tables as calculated

by Mr. Burgess +n his notes to the Surya Siddhanta, refers us to the |

16th century after Christ. Making due allowance for errors of Hindu

1868.] The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. 187

calculations, this may well be transferred to a century, when Jaya

Siftha, it is said, translated the Logarithmic Tables into Sanserit, and

introduced many corrections into the Hindu Science of Astronomy,

But the exact date of the correction of the Hindu ye

ascertained before the Sanscrit works of J aya Siih

light.

The table shows the Hindu months

months at two different epochs.

Precession of the equinoxes 0° 0” 0’,

Vaicgakha, v March and D7) ee

ar cannot be

a are brought to

with the corresponding English

Precession 3° 10’,

vereceeee April and May.

Jyaishtha, x epee and Mays esc 052035... May and June.

Ashadha, RE Day and Janes. .ei ice. ccsls,.. June and July.

Cravana, me kone dnd! Daly, s,s cejesevevcce: July and August.

Bhadra, Realy atid Angust, .iicc.dessecesses August and Sept.

Acvina, m August and Sept., ............. Sept. and Oct.

Kartika, Bement, and Oct: 3 rises. csesece, Oct. and Noy.

Agrahéyana, m Oct. and ae ae Noy. and Dee,

Paisha, pareviand Dag, Sic. Dee. and Jan.

Magha, wf Dec. and Jan., ...... ead bw kce eat « Jan. and Feb,

Phalgiina, Dec. and Wale eutilinnies sfc Feb. and March.

Chaitra, 2 Feb. and March, .,................ March and April.

ar commenced with Vaicakha in

and that of the moon 2° 19’,

That the year should begin in one of the equinoxes or solstices ig

Very natural, they are the four principal points in the heavens, The

commencement of the year from the vern

antiquity. The era of sdlivéhana begins with the vernal equinox or

full moon upon or next it. The Hindu year, however, in e

began with the winter solstice. The derivation of the name Acvina

Speaks a history. Acvini being the first of the 27 asterisms and the

one supposed by the Hindus to be coincident with the sign Aries,

tetermines the beginning of the year. The month having a full

jmoon in this asterism is called Acvina. The conjunction in longi-

tude of the three, the moon, the sun and the asterism may naturally

be looked upon as the Starting point of heavenly motion. The ex-

planation given by Amara Sidha, the lexicographer, that the month

{n which the full moon happens in Agvini is Acvina clears all doubt,

al equinox dates from great

arlier times

188 The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. [No. 4,

It is rather improbable that the Hindus would wait for a conjunction

of the three to begin their observations. Amara Sitha’s explanation

quite negatives all such suppositions, as it is impossible that the moon

should have the same longitude with the sun and be still a full moon.

To correct then the Hindu Almanac, so as not to violate the Hindu

idea of Mahdvishuva mesha Sankranti is utterly impossible. The year

must be made to begin at one or the other of two points. It is

proposed therefore to begin the civil year from the vernal equinox or

the sign Aries. Though this method enforces the change of the order

of the asterisms making Revati (¢ Piscium) the first and Acvini

the second, we have yet the advantage conferred by European calcula-

tion to support our view. On the other hand, the change of the beginning

of the year from the vernal equinox to the 13th of April, is a strong

recommendation for bringing the initial point of the year to the moment

of ecliptic conjunction ¢. e. on the 21st of April. A change of the

order of the asterisms is not new to the cdstras. Kritika (y Tauri,

Pleiades) now third, formerly occupied the position of Acvini.

The Hindu calendar is now in one view 22 days in advance, and in

another about 7 days behind the real state of things. It is proposed

to eject 21 days from the month Chaztra and thus to bring the

vishuva or mesha Sankranti back to the equinoxes. Such an innova-

tion or correction of the calendar, involves serious difficulties ; the

conservative habit of the Hindu mind and the confusion in a political

point of view of the dates of payment of rents, dc., are serious, but —

may be overcome.

The Hindu calculations, owing to the errors of tables made up

some centuries past are all defective and need correction. But these ©

are secondary to the correction of the year.

To sound the Hindu opinion on the subject, a circular in Sanscrit

was issued by me in October last. There I have quoted most authoric

tative passages showing that such change of the beginning of the year

on account of the precession of the equinoxes is not contrary to the 4

castras. With a Hindu, authority of the cdstra is the only argument. ;

i append a partial translation of the principal points of the Sanserit 4

circular.

The Dharma Gastras say—

aurar waar sar atifeqer WAC |

1868.] The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. 189

“that at the beginning of Aries (Vaicdékha) presents of flour and of

jugs filled with water are to be made to Braéhmanas.”’

This ceremony is now performed on the 12th of April. Some doubts

as to the propriety of performing the ceremony Ghatotsarga on this

date having arisen, Professor Bapii Deva of Benares was addressed on

the subject. The errors of the Hindu calendar were pointed out in the

letter, and he was requested to give his opinion on the proposition of

changing the beginning of the Hindu year from the 13th of April to

the real mesha Sankranti, or the vernal equinox.*

The proposed change of the beginning of the year from the 13th of

April is not contrary to the Castras. Surya Siddhdnta, the highest

authority in questions of Hindu astronomy, acknowledges in the fol-

lowing, that time effects great changes in calculations.

ES ce . .

RUARAA YS Toh A TATG |

Va yi aeitat @zaa faqeat | =

WSAUAIS GT VS ITS HAT: |

ama wtang aradana Faw | ¢

“(O Maya,) hear attentively the excellent knowledge (of the

Science of Astronomy) which (the) Sun Himself formerly taught to

the saints in each of the Yugas.”’

“T teach you the same ancient science which was formerly told by

(the) Sun Himself. (But) the difference (between the present and

the ancient works) is caused only by time, on account of the revolu-

tion of the Yugas.”’

Vacishtha says—

Te WweWIaISy we wafed

faaeiciaaata viata aa aa

An examination of the Pirdnas will show at once that the Castras

and the ceremonies are changed in time, the gods, and the ceremonies

(Haxiatf=) of the Vedas are now forgotten.

The Rig Veda mentions the 27 stars as being married to the moon

and the astronomical phenomena recorded there, show that the vernal

equinox happened in Krittiké and the autumnal, in Radha or Vicékha

(y Libre),

* Tis favourable reply with the original letter of query was noticed in the

original circular,

190 The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. [No. 4,

Amar Singha states that the equinox and the Vishuva are syno-

nyms. So does the lexicographer Hemachandra.

aaa % afawcvefaaraey FET |

aatifated ate fared faqae aa!

TaAG ll

Ba UQTATATATT aad PaaTaa:

quad fea are faysafarte aa!

: cfa aay |

The above authors in naming the twelve months of the year, begin

from Agrahayana (near the winter solstice).

LN ~o s

Aas Veal Barataay a |

Faas Tara AT! WaT BAT II

Tyas I

exon ive

TAT ATA SACHA TTT: |

SmMeafaeary was sea qa!

sfa VaarRs |

Laughékshi on the authority of Somakara Kalpa Sutra begins the =

year four days before the full moon of Magha.

ATA: GWA: WATS! Tele HIST ayaa Tl

In the Catapatha and Sankhayana Brahmanas we see the year”

begin on the full moon of Phalgan.

The astronomy of the Rig Veda begins the year on the light fort-—

night of Magha, and ends on the dark half of the month of Pausha.

araar Wea GreaTH SaaTY TAAT Tes I

MAWHITST wsawwaira: | kK

Bae Ggquy alee IAW |

aS lasia TAT I

Authorities were quoted from the Goladhyaya of Bhashkaracharya,

the Stirya Siddhdnta, the Soma Siddhanta, the Cakalya Sanhita, the

Laghivacishta Siddhanta, Aryabhatta, Varéha Muihira and Brahma

1868. ] The Adjustment of the Hindu Calendar. 191

Sphiita Siddh4nta to show that these authors admit of and give rules

for determining the value of the precession of the equinoxes.

The position of Agastya (Canopus) given in the Vishnéi Parana’

and in the Parésara and Garga Sanhitds show that the asterisms have

moved from their original position in the heavens.

TYAS GMA Yt HS TST Wael |

faureraguin aa frowdas |

afar faarqera i

~ ~ ~ « ~ >

Eua 3 fae varaa UfeMlaaaswagter It

afa qerecdfeat |

. ~ Ay

Wet waTY aay: wate ssl afefet ayer |

velgaretgad URRIS TY TIGR |

aaa wa wes Waa Tei TTT |

WMAISFa salaatry Vey Ta GVAT II

Sfa waz

The retrograde motion of the equinoxes has brought a change of

the seasons—Vaigdikha and Chaitra constituted the spring of former

times,

ae”

aug aay asta | way Ufee sane Il

fa afaciadfear i

Lastly the practical proof of the effects of the errors in calculations

is given by directing the Pandit to observe the heavens just after

“sunset in the month of Vaigdkha.

192 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

Tue Hrei-rripes or THE NorrHern FRonTIER OF Assam ;—by Rev.

C. H, HusseLMEeYeEr.

[Received 26th August, 1867. |

The Himalaya mountains, so far as they form the northern boun-

dary of Assam, are inhabited by two distinct races of men. Originally,

probably one and the same race, they seem to have undergone a

change sufficiently marked to authorize their being considered at the

present moment, as two distinct races.

The mountaineers who occupy the eastern half of those frontier-

hills seem to be original occupants, or first arrivals, and to have

retained their original habits and customs. Those who live to

the west, appear to belong to a later period of immigration, subse-

quent to their descent from Central Asia. When they drove out

from before them the first occupants, say the Dimasa and Boro, or

Lalong, now living in the plains of Assam, they seem to have come

in contact with a certain degree of civilization which effected that

change both of feature and habits and customs which is so striking

to the beholder. ;

The last mentioned of these two races are the people commonly

called Butias or Butanese—this name applying to all the various

and numerous tribes who belong to the same race. These, however,

having served our purpose thus far, we may leave for the present,

while we turn our attention more in particular to their less civilized

brethren to the east.

Unlike the Butias, these possess no common name. The region

they occupy, is fully as large as Butan, and equally as interesting. —

Indeed, little as we know of the people, the country they occupy, is —

still less known: as much a terra incognita, in fact, as the interior of

Africa. The few Europeans who have crossed the frontier, have barely z

done more than skirted this unknown region: none have ever pene-—

trated to the snowy range; none ever crossed its entire width from

Assam to Tibet proper. All we know about the country and

its inhabitants, we have learnt from the latter, who are, however, not —

in all cases reliable informants. Until, therefore, a Livingstone or

a Wilcox will undertake to traverse its cane-bridged mountain

”

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. 193

torrents, its snow-capped heights, and brave leeches, dum-dam and

cannibal Abors,—in order to confirm or otherwise, the statements of

native informants,—we shall have to rest satisfied with our present

stock of information.

From all, then, we have hitherto been able to collect, it would appear,

_ that that portion of the Eastern Himalayas which lies between the 92°

40’ and 95° 30’ Hast Long., or between the eastern boundary line of

the country of the Tauwang and Kampa Butias, and the Dibong

river,—having Assam on its south, and Tibet proper on its north

side, —constitutes the home of four peoples, known to the inhabitants

of Assam by the names of Aka, Miji, Dafla, and Abor.

Three of these tribes, the Aka, Miji and Dafla, occupy the hills on

the southern side of the backbone of the Himalayas, the snowy range.

The water of their rivers flows down into Assam direct. I make

use of the expression direct, because I thereby wish to explain the

more immediate proximity of their mountain-homes to Assam ; for,

properly speaking, the rivers that run down the northern slopes of

_the snowy range pour their waters likewise into the same big river

which passes through Assam, viz. the Sampo of Tibet. The Abors

alone, in some of their northern clans, are said to dwell on both sides

of the snowy mountains, and they are thus in intercourse both with

Tibet and Assam.

The seats of these four principal tribes may be defined as follows :

commencing from the west or the frontier of Butan we come first

upon the Akas. Their country is situated so as to have Assam on

the south, Butan oii the west, the Miji territory on the north,

and the Dafla east. The Buruli river forms the boundary of the

Aka and Dafla country, or rather hills. The Mijis again have

Butan to the west, and probably north, but the Buruli river

funning round the northern side of their country until it enters

Butan, the Daflas to the east, and their friends and neighbours, the

Akas to the south.

The Daflas like the Akas have the valley of Assam for their

Southern limit, the Akas and Mijis, with the Buruli river interven-

ing, on their west, and the Abors both north and east,—the Subon-

Siri river running up between the hills of the Abors and Dallas,

| Then the Abors themselves occupy the whole of the remaining ex-

194 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

tremity of the eastern Himalayas. They inhabit all the country

lying between the territories of the Daflas on the southern face of the

snowy range, and the Kampo-Butias on the northern face of the

same snowy ridge; Tibet on the north, Assam on the south, and the

Mishmi-tribes on the east, the Dibong river forming the line of

demarkation between the villages of the Abors and Mishmis.

Of all the four tribes above enumerated, the Abors are by far the

numerical strength and their war-like

he extent of their territory.

all restrict my remarks to one of

most important, both as to their

propensities, as well as through t

In the present communication I sh

the tribes only, namely—

The Akas.

e on hills of moderate height, the highest

probably not exceeding 6,000 feet, in the angle formed, as before ©

mentioned, by Assam and Butan. ‘Three to four days climbing over ;

thickly wooded hills, nearly pathless, stumbling up the dry bed of

the Buruli and other less important watercourses, thickly strown with

large boulders, clambering up the steep faces of rocks, holding on by

a cane-rope, bring the traveller to the small settlement of the Akas.—

The Miri elephant-hunters follow up the bed of the Buruli river,

taking a small light boat along with them, which they lift over the

water-falls, and so reach the Aka country. There is, however, a better

yoad but somewhat circuitous. This road takes the traveller first to

Butan to the settlement of the Sat-rajas due north, after a march of

about four days, and then goes on to the Aka country due east

which you reach in another two days. This is a road which the Aka.

women and children, and their ponies travel. i

The name Aka, or Angka,—even Angka—is given to them by their

speak of themselves as

neighbours; they themselves do not use it, but

The Hrusso do not pretend to be aborigines of the country they

now inhabit. They are unable to tell where the real home of theit

tribe is. ‘They pretend to have been inhabitants of the plains. Our

ancestors, they say, lived in Partabgor on the banks of the Giladhant

river, north of Bishnath, but were driven out from thence by Krishna

and Boloram.

€

The Akas or Angkas liv

Hrusso.

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. 195

The language of the Aka, however, tells a tale, and so does their na-

tional character. Their language contains more words which can be

traced to the valleys south of the Patkoi range, joining the Shan and

Munipuri countries, than words indicating a closer affinity with the

Dafla and Abor tribes. They differ mentally and physically from

their mountain neighbours to the same degree.

The truth seems to be, that the Hrusso entered Assam about the

same period when the far more numerous and daring Ahoms burst

from their hills into the valley. Probably the Akas preceded them,

and having been driven from place to place, they finally settled on the

hills where they now still live. As to numerical importance, the

Angkas would barely deserve any notice at all. They do not number

more than one thousand gouls.

This handful of hill people live in two detached villages. The

greater one is inhabited by Akas who have earned for themselves

the sobriquet of cotton thieves, or Kap4s-chor. The smaller is

peopled by a less offensive clan called the Hazarikhuka, or breakfast-

eaters.

There is a third class of Angkas spoken of by the people of the

plains who go by the name of Angka Miris. Old maps have them

located beyond the snowy range on the Tibet side. But by all ac-

“counts, these Angka Miris live to the east of the Kapas-chor Angkas,

“The Miris of the plains who are in the habit of hunting for elephants,

‘deny having ever heard of Angka Miris. Further enquiry, however,

“may enable me to throw more light upon this tribe,

_ The importance which attaches to the Akas is first the bad name

“which they bear among the people of the valley, who inhabit the tracts

- of country bordering on the Aka hills. For the Akas, few as they are in

‘Dumber, make up for this deficiency by being bold and daring robbers

4ndcut-throats. Nextin importance is their situation between the people

of the valley of Assam and the powerful and very numerous clans of the

Miji tribe. The Mijis, it would seem, are not in the habit of visiting

Assam, except only one small chief ; but they highly prize the silk

and cotton cloth the Akas are able to procure from the plains, and for

Which these demand from the Mijis exorbitant prices. As a third

_ muse of their importance may be adduced the fact that, although

powerless themselves, they know how to make themselves formidable,

196 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

through the influence they manage to exercise over the Mijis, whose

countless hosts they would be able without much difficulty to lead

any day against any foe. a

There are about ten clans for which the term households, or

families, would be the more appropriate one to use ; yet each of these

petty clans has a chief whom they style Raja, like their neighbours,

the Butias,—not Gam, like their other neighbours, the Daflas.

These clans are so small, that they find room each in a house by

themselves. Some clans number only thirty souls, others sixty to

one hundred, and according to the number of inmates is the size of

each house. ‘The most numerous clan boasts of a chief, who is but —

too well known among the Assamese, and the neighbouring hillmen,

and no doubt the Bengal Government too has learnt to know ©

his name. This is Tagi Raja. This man has succeeded in obtaining

the hegemony over all the Kopas-chor Akas, and as he exercises

great influence over the Mijis also, he 1s able to intimidate the

rest of the Aka people, and thus may be said to be the head of all the

Hrusso.

The Hazarikhuka Akas live in three clans on a separate hill from _

the Tagi’s people.

Internal feuds are numerous. It is a matter of no rare occurrence

to sce clan against clan, 7. @. family against family enlist the aid of

the Mijis and carry on a miniature warfare.

The Hrusso use the cross-bow and poisoned arrows; 4 light

spear for the purposes of throwing, and a narrow sword, about

four feet long. They manufacture their own arms; the iron and.

steel, however, they buy in Assam. They use neither shield nor

helmet. Their tactics are simple; like all the hill-tribes, they

rely upon sudden surprise, they lie in ambush and fall upon their foes

unawares. 7

The Assamese Buruas of the days of the native rulers used the Akas

for purposes of revenge and intrigue. And it was through the party-

spirit of one of the Buruas, or governors of Chardoar in the days of

Gaurinath, the last real king of Assam, that the Akas obtained the

privilege of levying pieces of Hria silk (Bambyz), and cotton cloth —

from every household in the Balipara mehal, which they continue tomy

do unto this day. The only occasion on which the Akas have come |

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. 197

into hostile collision with the present government of Assam, occurred

some twenty-five years ago when their daring raids led to the capture

of the young Tagi Raja and, after his liberation, to the massacre of

the garrison of a stockade close to the pass which leads into their hills,

All attempts to punish this bold and blackguardly act remained

unsuccessful, at last the little war seems not to have been carried on

with much spirit, and matters between the Hrusso and the British

Government were left in statu quo.

Since that revengeful and treacherous act, however, the Akas have

been content to levy their silk and cotton pieces, and to accept Rs,

— 860 of black mail per annum, without any further deeds of robbery

and murder.

They now pay their annual visit to Assam in the months of Feb-

ruary and March ; take their due; make their purchases in iron, steel

and brass vessels, in beads and other articles of luxury, and, after the

_ above mentioned levying of cloth, return the way they came.

The Aka, though uncivilized, is not devoid of religious ideas.

_ He has no written gastras or religious books of any kind, it is true;

he has no system of religion and knows nothing of caste. But the

_ Aka fears the high mountains which tower aloft over his dwelling,

_ and from the snow-clad sides of which leaps the thundering avalanche :

he fears the roaring torrents of the deep glen which interposes be-

_ tween him and his friends beyond; and he fears the dark and dense

_ jungles in which his cattle lose their way.

These dark and threatening powers of nature, he invests with

supernatural attributes, They are his gods. Thus there is Fuxu,

_ the god of jungle and water; Firan and Siman, the gods of wat, and

Satu, the god of house and field.

| 4 Over all these gods the modern Aka places Hort Deo, a Hindu deity.

| This is an innovation, introduced by Tagi Raja after his imprisonment.

| For whilst a captive, he became a disciple, as it were, of a Hindu

| guru, who in his turn obliged Tagi, by giving security for his new

‘convert’s future good behaviour.

3 All these gods have their little temples or rather puja-huts, which

contain representations of them, some are said to be of silver and gold.

These latter most probably would turn out to be Buddist images,

obtained from the Butias,

198 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

Near the puja-houses lives the Deori or sacrificing priest. He 1s

always chosen from among the other Akas by divine tokens, it does

not matter whether he is a bachelor or married. This Deori has to

perform the daily worship for all the people, and on all special occasions

he has to sacrifice the requisite number of mithuns, cows, goats,

fowls and pigeons. Geese and ducks there are none to be found in all

the settlements of either Aka or Miji. The Akas entertain some

erude notions of a state of punishment and reward after death.

To follow an Aka through his domestic and public life, I shall have

to begin with the erection of the dwelling-house. The Hrusso cannot

build a house where he pleases, for the spot on which he intends to

erect his future dwelling must first be ascertained to be a lucky spot.

The Deori therefore has to be consulted, animals slain as sacrifices,

and the place pronounced to be propitious. Then the felling of timber,

and the collecting of the other pbuilding materials may be proceeded

with, All having been collected, Fucu veceives his offerings, part of

which consist in a portion of the building materials.

The house itself is generally very substantially constructed. It is

built on piles from 5 to 7 feet above the ground; boarded and com-

fortably walled in, with carefully planed planks, in this respect resem- —

bling the houses of the Kassias. ‘The roof 1s thatched with a kind of

broad leaf, and on account of the strong winds, mats are firmly, but—

neatly, fastened all over +t. The houses of the Daflas and Abors,

including other hill-tribes besides, are less substantially constructed. —

All the members of one family or clan, including the slaves, live

under the same roof. The size of an Aka dwelling varies therefore

with the size of the family. The house of Tagi Raja is 200 feet long”

and 40 feet broad, a long row of separate compartments running the

whole length of the building. ;

No earthen vessels are used by the Aka for household purposes.

They possess huge copper jars to hold the water supplies of the family,

and for cooking and eating, they use the brass pots and plates which | |

they obtain in the Tezpore bazar. ; |

_ The copper jars are not procured by them in Assam, but most likely

bartered from the Mijis, who again must have brought them from

Butan. The granaries and stables are always built at some distance

from the dwelling house for fear of fire. | i

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. 199

The Akas are polygamists: they can marry as many wives as their

means allow. A marriage among them is contracted in this wise:

The parents or relatives select the future wife from among the female

friends of the family, those friends may be either Aka or Miji, for

Mijis and Hrusso intermarry. On the day appointed for the wed-

ding, the services of the Deori are again called into requisition ; partly

with a view to obtain the favour of the gods, but chiefly, I guess,

in order to provide an abundance of meat for the hundreds of

guests who are to partake of the marriage-feast, and for whom great

numbers of mithuns, cows, goats and fowls have to be killed. The

festivity, 7. e. the eating and drinking— for the Akas, like all hill-

people indulge in ardent spirits— are to last at least five days and

nights uninterruptedly.

The nuptials having thus been duly initiated, the bride and bride-

groom are placed by the Deori beneath the canopy, formed of a piece

of cloth spread out over them, he then winds another piece of cloth

round both, thereby indicating their union, and this ceremony over,

they are declared to be man and wife.

At the birth of a child, again sacrifices are brought, but no distine-

tion is made between the sexes: a girl is considered as much a bless-

ing as a boy; the murder of female infants, therefore, is fortunately

not known amongst them, although they welcome the birth of a

son with the same degree of joy, with which such an event is hailed

among far more civilized nations,

' In like manner are the gods to be propitiated when the ground

is hoed and the seed sown, and also at harvest-time.

- Seasons of sickness too require the services’ of the Deori, for the

Aka is not in the habit of resorting to medicines of any kind to effect

acure. If a Hrusso falls ill, fowls &. are offered to fucu, and the

patient is mesmerised ; but should this prove unavailing, matters are

left to the good pleasure of Fuau alone.

_ The dead among the Akas are not burnt, but buried. A grave is

| dug four to five feet deep and the body reverently deposited therein.

Then a share of all his valuables is placed by the side of the dead,

including his spear, bow and arrows. Next a platform is raised over

the body to keep the earth from falling upon it, and finally the grave

Is filled in and over it a small stockade of bamboos and sticks erected,

200 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

and— Hindu fashion—a piece of cloth is spread out over the whole.

- The Aka, although given to loot and robbery, is yet no idler: he 1s

a great agriculturist. Unlike the Butias, the Akas import no grain

from Assam, but subsist on the fruits of their own labour. They

cultivate the fine plateaux on the backs of their broad hills, and some

of those smiling valleys that stretch themselves out between their hills,

miles in length and width.

They hoe the ground and beat the surface fine; then pierce holes

with a pointed stick, and drop into each hole 3to4 grains of rice

(dhan). Their rice-crops they declare to be as good as, if not superior

to those of the best parts of Assam. Beside the common kinds of

rice, they cultivate a kind of grain, called Dafla-dhan, of a small size

but growing in numerous clusters ; it isa grain, in fact, resembling

millet. Also vegetables of the same description as those which are —

found in Assam, and pulses of various kinds are cultivated by the —

Akas.

There are, however, neither cotton, nor hemp and flax-plantations, ~

to be met with; the only fibre used by them and the Mijis, as well as

all the other hill-tribes, is that derived from the rind of a tree known

in Assam by the name of Odal, and used for nets and ropes. The

consequence is, that the women of the Akas neither spin nor weave,

but rely for their cotton cloth on the plains, as already mentioned.

Nor do they breed the silkworms known to the Assamese. Though

they covet the Hria Bor-Kapors of Assam, and the finer silk dhuties,

yet they have never taken the trouble of introducing the silkworm

into their hills.

The Akas keep large flocks of mithuns or mithans, and cows—

their flesh is eaten, but the milk of mithuns, cows and goats they

never touch. They breed pigs and rear fowls and pigeons in great

numbers, but geese and ducks are forbidden to them by the gods.

The Hrusso pride themselves on being better feeders than any OF

the other hill-men. They eat the food of civilized people ; never

touch the flesh of dogs, or elephants, or other objectionable animals.

They indulge in the use of opium and tobacco—in fact, the pipe

seldom leaves the mouth of an Angka man or woman. Such a pipe —

is generally a bit of bamboo with a reed inserted into it at a right —

angle. Now and then, however, Tibetan pipes of composition metal —

a i}

—

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam, 201

may be seen in use amongst them. They likewise chew betel which

they obtain in the plains, but tea asa beverage is not in use among

them, although they keep up a constant intercourse with their Butan

neighbours. The well-known ardent drink however—a species of

beer, called Mod— prepared by all the aborigines of Assam and its

frontier hills, the Akas too drink to excess,

The dress of the Angka has nothing national, or nothing that could

distinguish them from other hill-men that border on Assam, except

the profusion of Hria cloth wound round their bodies in all manner of

ways, and a kind of half-trousers which consist in a piece of Hria cloth

tied in such a fashion beneath the knee, as to allow the fringes to hang

down over the ankles. When they move, the ample folds of this

kind of legging, keep swinging and flying about their feet, and thus

this piece of garment seems to answer admirably the purpose for which

it is intended, namely to keep off the leeches and stinging insects,

such as the musquitoes and the dum-dam.

As a head-dress the Aka often wears a kind of ring-cap or crown

made of cane, three inches high with one or two tall feathers in front.

However the felt-caps of the Butias are as commonly met with, while

those who claim the rank of a raja sport rings or crowns such ag those

alluded to, only made of thin wood instead of cane, and covered with

embossed silver. agi himself, however, never appears in the plains

without his Tibetian hat of japanned wood of a bright yellow with a

glass-knob on top, and a blue silk damask robe of state, of Chinese

‘Manufacture, but rather faded. All are fond of beads, and they wear

them in profusion. Thus dressed up, they appear on state occasions

only, the long sword at their side, and one or two minor Weapons for

cutting besides. When at home, the Aka looks more the savage, and

dispenses with most of his garments. But winter is severe, and then

he appreciates the neighbourhood of Assam, and the cloth of the

Tayats of Balipara.

In appearance, the Angka bears the same family-likeness with the

other Turanian hill-tribes; he is a well-made and strongly built man,

with more of daring and defiance in his look than the Dafla or even

| the Naga.

He is ignorant of the art of reading and writing, and though

he covets the productions of art which Assam and Butan supply,

202 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

including Tibetian oil-paintings of Buddhist deities, yet does

he look down upon books. The offers of opening a school in their

villages, have repeatedly been made to Tagi, but as often politely

refused. Tagi dreads the approach of the schoolmaster to his hills,

for he knows, that with the schoolmaster there would come a different

code of morals and ethics; and he fears, that the English will succeed

the schoolmaster, and thus put an end to Tagi, and the selfish aims

of the Angka people, as regards the Mijis and the inhabitants of the

Balipara Mehal. |

ALPHABET. |

Showing the Orthoepy of the Dialects spoken by the Hill-tribes of

Assam.

a. — Father.

all.

i, = ever.

Sma.

i, c=ybe:

0, me:

6. = deux, Fr. ; or bise, Ger.

u. = too.

ii. = tu, Fr., or tiber, Ger.

f. or ph. = Father, or Philosophy.

g. == go and give.

h. = house.

ie, == ah:

S507

¥,. = zeal.

th. = thaler in German.

ch. = church.

j. — Joy.

x. = Loch, Scotch, or gleich, German.

Vv. = very.

English. . Hrusso or Angka.

one, ee na wits pues

TOL Fl sot ae it Fee lRilsees

three, Bis nae ten! te:

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. 203

English, Hrusso or Angka,

font... or pss cases. PAGEL,

five, as me so0.. PiUMML,

Six, aN a

seven, “TP hic sues WUE,

Gight, ... at acess ate) ROE CS .

nine, oe weg ovis) SEBO.

ten, ce sk (evibiop) GRE TE:

twenty, xe ss «30s SOOM,

Mity, ... is jin Fading | BEER

hundred, ¥e ... purrua.

I, ae des ... ‘nyo or no.

of me, we oh -»» nathi or nadci.

we, eee eer eee eee ni.

of us, soo + mithi,

thou, si beet ites DBs

of thee, Bare ie --. bath.

wom, ... gat var cae -JOVOT JO

of you, sve Datla,

he, = ae oss | awe) DHOLOE pls,

of him, bas fey saa) OLE

BUY, sae ies sees sae s60) COURA.

of them, van wo b’gdunathi.

Mand, ... it deat takiies €itla

foot, eee eee eee ssl.

M20, is soe vee. NUS.

eye, Ki i éxe, THe

mouth, ... ant og eee ae

tooth, ia hie eis

ear, iss wah “++ oe» <. phu or pfu,

hair, se ine eee kechii.

ead, .... soe vee. khie,

tongue, oy fag ven | Jevbla.

| an se sss oe, EQUAL.

back, ete Pos --. subtie.

mol, - .., wis tie isla es SGA

gold, is Fels SSC ONT.

The Hill-tribes of the Northern

English.

silver fees

Father, ets

Mother,

Brother, ...

Sister,

man,

woman,

wife,

child,

son,

daughter,

slave,

cultivator,

shepherd,

god,

sun,

moon,

star,

fire,

water,

house,

horse,

cow,

dog,

cat,

cock,

duck,

ass,

bird,

£9,

eat,

sit,

come,

beat,

stand,

die,

ate

eee

= 0),

Frontier of Assam.

Hrusso or Angku.

liimma.

au.

ani.

"nyu.

nimi.

nuna.

pfiimi.

saml.

khla.

viddéu.

- fiidsusten.

shemuzu.

dsu.

xubie.

litsie.

mi,

Xt:

nie.

fugra.

fuluxu.

sulo.

ashasa.

damrou,

ossa.

fub-abu.

dio.

khabue.

chaue or tsanue.

riue or roue.

agekhaue.

guga.

gidziilue.

piidzibi or bujibi.

1868.] The Mill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. 205

English. Hrusso or Angka.

give, bi — »«. dziba or jiba,

ron... ee se see godzoe or godzue.

up, sit rc sae, Pann,

down, ... site oe eee age.

near, sa sae 20. enisa.

far, oar ny ess eee = Nera,

before, is ae $0), a ie

behind, ... “is ra2,; wea LOG.

who, on 20s +». aninashe,

what, ... sae ase

why, of j hando.

and, or as

but, vie bee i Rams.

if, ae ode iets tee) > BOR

yes, vais dad ent a

no, hi re Bey ei

alas ! ve vr --. ah! ah! kinia! dunia!

father, ... ad tae ieee: Boe

ofafather, ... ay sae! ath:

to a father, te Wee), ath Sante

from a father,... Ee «+. audin.

fathers, oa e+ eee §=aaulangiie.

of fathers, ... os -+. auangithi.

to fathers, Pe see eee ©aulangie.

from fathers, ... te .-. auangidin.

a daughter, dee geuiinew SalI.

of a daughter, ba --. samithi.

toadaughter, .., «es sami,

from a daughter, ba -». samidin,

daughters, ats vos ees Samiangie.

of daughters, ... te --. samiangithi.

to daughters, in voo eee © SAMIangie.

from daughters, oC --. Samiangidin.,

a good man, Ne Spcncee oly SERURTATUL,

a good woman, Eh -..(: fuminh.

a bad boy, as see ee. angasa mikzi.

206 The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam. [No. 4,

English. Hrusso or Angka.

abad girl, ... on ... nimie mikzi.

good, vs. ah bal (wag us

better, 5a ae ... angie uh.

hich?" ... at entice elena

higher, sa ists ... angie linjue.

horse, ... a wor rset). HRUIREA.

mare, Bra one coe > MCRKINIE.

horses, ... aa Alea egies

mares, itt =F ... emini angie.

DE se she iiteeee Ombe, .

bulls, bi as: ... ombu angie.

COW, =» Bo Se ee ae ee

cows, oe oa ... fullu angie.

dog" re Soa s+ hee, OO

bitch, tea 460 ... sulé angie.

he-goat,... son ree

she-goat, ... ee ... kissiemie.

deer, ..- see Los eee ene

IT am, uns ine sos na eidu.

thou art, wee he Meek paren:

he is, = ee .-. bor {6 dua.

we are, ... Ree ats eee eneae

you are, A oo wee JO OF ze -du.

they are, ust So dee “OM

I was, ae Bes .-. na duso.

thou wast, arcane ses ee. ba duso.

he was, ie Ae ... ior {6 duso.

we were, sits Ses an ate dager

you were, ss. i. ... jo or ze duso.

they were, siete soo pees) MandUge.

be, ... see see .-. adaue.

I may

T shall, bie qak Eo a andane?

I should,

beat, Hoc oss ee ous

I beat, ... non sos, ae me Gum DE

English,

thou beatest,... ote iw

he beats,

we beat, “ag ae

you beat,

they beat,

I may,

I shall, beat,

I should,

I am,

I was, i beaten,

I shall be,

I go,

thou goest,

he goes,

we go, hs

you go, ...

they go,

I went, ... ‘ae ei

thou do,

he do, ... his

we do, na a:

you do, a Res

they do,

What is your name? 1)

How old is this horse ? :

How many sons are there in your

father’s house? . pad We

The son of my uncle is married to

her sister, ...

How far is it from vee to eae ?

I have walked a long way to-day,

In the house is the saddle of the

white horse,

Put the saddle upon his Saas

1868.] The Hill-tribes of the Northern Frontier of Assam.

Hrusso or Angka.

ba giimbi.

i or {6 giimbi.

ni giimbi.

JO or ze gii.

na gii.

na giinie,

na giida,

na khanie.

ba khanie:

i or {6 khanie.

ni khanie.

JO or ze khanie.

na khanie,.

na khabse.

ba khabse.

i or {6 khabse.

ni khabse.

j6 or ze khabse.

na khabse.

Banini hathi aue ?

Fugra-oddia khiniavo ?

Bo iniase isa kinia duvo ?

Avoessau eniu eniimi ksidani.

Aio bege Kashmir

radavo ?

"Yo angiera dim doui.

Fugra gro dsimie duma nie.

Dsimie niva.

khimia

208 On the Birds of the Goona District. [No. 4,

English. Hrusso or Angka.

He is grazing cattle on the top of

the hill, A. _.. aes Semifu khakus, doue fu.

He is sitting on a horse under that Shoni elo fugra idsuze nuna

tree, ve roda.

His brother is taller than his sister, Eniimise eama pshiifada.

The price of that is two rupees and

a half, ie ... «se Tokar pikse adulia. —

OO ts to ttt nines

Ox tue Brrvs or tHE Goons District; by Gzoren Kine, MM. BS

Assistant-Surgeon, Marwar Political Agency.

(Received 10th March, 1868. ]

Goona is a small station in Central India on the Agra and Bombay

mail road, 200 miles south of Agra. It is situated in the territory of

H. H. the Maharajah of Gwalior, and in a very thinly populated and

comparatively little known part of the country. Having been attach-—

ed from the months of March to December of the past year, to one of

the regiments of Central India Horse stationed there, I took the op-

portunity of noting the birds of the surrounding district, thinking

that a list of them might have some interest with respect to the

geographical distribution of species. Not having remained a full yea

in Goona, the list subjoined is necessarily incomplete in respect of

some of the migratory species, especially of water-fowl and waders,

and I feel sure that an observer resident there for several years, would

be able to add the names of many occasional visitants and very local

species. . 7

Every care has been taken in the identification of the species given,

and the names of none have been inserted on hearsay. I have the

authority of the sportsmen of the station for believing that the names

of Red Spur-fowl, the Indian Bustard, the Golden Plover, the Kulan,

the-European Bittern, and the Barred-headed Goose, might have been

added, as occasionally occurring in the district, but not having my

self shot or seen specimens, I have excluded them. The book chiefly

used in identifying the species has been Dr. Jerdon’s admira le

1868.] On the Birds of the Goona District. 209

“ Birds of India,” a book which puts within the easy reach of every

resident of India, the means of pursuing the study of a most delightful

branch of Natural History.

Goona is too unimportant a place politically or commercially to

give its name to a district, but I have used the term “ Goona District”

as a convenient designation for the tract of country lying between the

rivers Scinde on the east, and Parbutty on the west, and bounded on

the north and south by lines connecting these two streams, 10 miles

‘distant from the station in either direction. Although I believe the

fauna of this district to be typical of that of a much wider area, I

profess in the present paper only to give a list of the birds found

within the limits just indicated.

Tn respect of climate and physical features, the Goona district may

_ be taken’ as a type of the north-western part of Central India. Pass-

ing south from Gwalior, which is very little higher above the sea

_ than Agra, the land gradually ascends, until at Goona a height of

~ about 1400 feet is attained, and the elevation increases towards the

east and south in the directions of Saugor, Bhopal and Indore,

while towards the west, the country slopes gently until the sandy

4 plains of Hastern Rajpootana are reached. The surface of this part

i of Central India is undulating and hilly. Few of the hills, however,

ise more than 400 or 500 feet above the plain, and the majority are

thickly strewed with loose stones. In the rains they are green to

_ their summits, and the lower slopes of most are clothed with a dense

growth of bushes and low trees. The geologic structure of these

Hills is chiefly laterite, a term rather vaguely applied to a reddish-

ten cellular rock* of a jaspery appearance, to beds of loose angular

rubble.

The valleys and plains are covered with deep black soil, interspersed

here and there with mounds and slopes of reddish gravel and sandy

“earth, the debris of laterite. Scattered over the country there are a

- considerable number of small natural lakes and streams, many of

which, though much reduced in size, retain some water during the

hot weather,

Die brown deposit, which varies in character from masses of hard though

- of

* Probably trap.

210 On the Birds of the Goona District. [No. 4,

The climate gradually increases in moisture south of Gwalior, and

at Goona the rainfall is from 40 to 50 inches. Though the

hot weather may be said to be comparatively mild, the draught is

sufficiently great to burn up all herbaceous plants, except those grow-

ing near water. The rains extend from the middle of June to Sep-

tember, and towards the end of that month the cold weather birds

begin to appear.

Cultivation is the exception in these regions. Here and there all

through the jungle are scattered small hamlets, each with its little

patch of cultivation, but on all sides of these oases there stretch

thousands of acres of grassy plain and bushy downs, over the remoter

parts of which even the village buffaloes and goats never stray.

Grain-feeding birds are therefore not numerous, and the country is a

bad one for small game.

The prevailing trees and bushes are Butea frondosa, Acacia Catechu,

Buchanania latifolia, gle Marmelos, a Diospyrus and several species

of Zizyphus, with Carissa Carandas in the moister valleys ; and the

prevailing grass is that known as “ spear-grass,” a term including

several species of Apluda and Andropogon. I always found that

spear-grass gives cover to extremely few birds of any kind, and indeed —

I was often struck by the scarcity of animal life in the jungle gener-

ally. Near villages there are Tamarind, Peepul, Banyan, and Mowa* .

trees, but there are very few gardens. .

The subjoined list includes the names of 21 Raptorial species. Of

the two larger carrion-feeders given the Black Vulture ( Otogyps calvus )

and the Common Brown Vulture (Gyps Bengalensis )—the former is

by far the more common, and the latter does not occur at all during the

hot weather. Of the predatory species that arrive in the cold weather,

the first to come are the various species of Circus, and Halvastur

Indus. Circus cyaneus, Linn., a bird which in India does not usually

extend to the plains, is inserted on the strength of a single female bird

which I shot near the Parbutty river early in December. Towards

the end of October, Poliornis teesa arrives in large numbers, and is by

far the commonest bird of prey during the cold season, Previously to

October, I did not observe the tawny eagle (Aquila fulvescens) but

* Bassia latifolia, from the flowers of which a spirit is distilled.

1868. ] On the Birds of the Goona District. 211

during that and the succeeding months I noted a good many, and in

November I found two pairs breeding in tall trees near a village,

The common kite (IM¢lvus Govinda) is a permanent resident. I have

not seen it recorded anywhere that this bird bathes* in water, but

_ this I once saw one do. I was unfortunate in procuring owls, and

I feel sure that there must be others in the district besides the

two that appear in my list.

The Jnsessores are of course the most numerous group. These in-

clude 85 species. Of swallows, H. jilifera and daurica are about

equally common, and both reside in the district during the hot weather

and the rains, as well as in the cold season. JZ. filifera breeds in the

district, for although I never found the nest, very young birds were not

uncommon in April and May. Cotyle concolor and Oypselus affinis are

also permanent residents and breeders. I found nests of the former

containing young, in the walls of an old fort early in September.

The only Hornbill inhabiting the district is the Meniceros bicornis,

and that is very common, but it occurs only in the cold weather, Of

Lockus gingalensis, I saw but one individual, which I shot. It occur-

red early in April, and was a sickly bird in very bad plumage and

evidently a straggler,

The rose-ringed Paroquet (Palgornis torquatus) is extremely numer-

ous at all seasons. During the hot weather, a colony of many

“hundreds established themselves in a clump of Tamarind trees near

the village of Goona. These quarters, however, were occupied only

during the night, for regularly every morning, after much preliminary

‘chattering, the whole flock betook itself, in parties of from twenty to

thirty, to the jungles, returning again about sunset in like manner

but flying at a greater height.

Laccocwa affinis, the only species of the genus in the list, is not

uncommon in the district. It frequents low bushy jungle when

feeding, but perches on trees. I have frequently met with it asso-

| Glating with flocks of the common blue Pigeon near wells.

_ With the cold weather, large numbers of two species of Pratincola

(P. caprata and P. Indica) appear. Sawicola enanthe also comes,

* The bathing may be almost daily witnessed on the Calcutta maidan, during

the cold and hot weather. (Ep.)

Sid

212 On the Birds of the Goona District. [No. 4,

though not in. abundance. In marching westward from Goona to

Rajpootana, I was much struck by the change in the common species

of Sawicoline birds. The two Pratincolas just mentioned continue

numerous as far west as Kotah and Boondee, but there they begin

to be replaced by Saxicola leucoroides, a bird I never saw near Goona.

Towards Deolee S. deserti begins to appear, and in Marwar, both this

species and P. lewcorovdes are as common as the two Pratincolas, com-

mon at Goona, are scarce; and a still more western species, namely

P. leucomela, is found in small numbers.

The occurrence of the common Starling so far south as Goona,

has not often been noted. It is by no means common there, unless

indeed flocks arrive subsequently to December. In January last,

I saw near Ajmere large numbers both of this species and of Pastor

roseus, and both are numerous in Marwar. I observed only a single

flock of P. roseus near Goona. It contained a number of young —

birds, and arrived early in September, but remained only a few days.

Rain crops (which ripen in the early part of the cold weather) are by

no means largely cultivated in the district, and I fancy this bird

chiefly frequents districts where, as in Marwar, a great extent of land

is laid down in these cereals,

The rasorial group is represented by only 10 species, and of these

the only one very common is the Peafowl, which being sacred, is pro-—

tected and even fed, and consequently lives much about villages.

The scarcity of other species is no doubt owing to the small amount.

of cultivation, and the number of carnivorous mammals abounding in

these wild regions.

Of Grallatores there are 36 species. The two lapwings, the red

and yellow-wattled, are very, and about equally, common. To the

westward, the latter gradually disappears, and in Rajpootana it is re-

placed by Chettusia gregaria.

Twenty-two species of Natatores occur in the district. As ¢

rule, ducks and geese are but winter visitants in India. Two, how-

ever, remain in the tanks near Goona all the year round. These

are that pretty little goose Nettapus Coromandelianus (the cotton

teal of sportsmen), and the whistling teal, Dendrocygna QWSUTEC.

Ihave no doubt these two species breed, but I never succeeded

in finding their nests. The rainy season was introduced last

1868. | On the Birds of the Goona District, 213

year at Goona by a storm of wind and rain, which filled in a day

many tanks and nullahs that had been dry for months. The storm

was succeeded by a week of cloudy but dry weather, during which

the newly filled tanks were frequented by large flocks of the two

Species just mentioned, and also by smaller parties of Anas pecilo-

rhyncha and Sarcidiornis melanotus ; at the same time perfect crowds

of Buphus coromandus and Threskiornis melanocephalus were collected

by the grassy banks of a nullah, which had not been dried by the

hot weather sun. In a few days all had gone, [except a few of the

cotton and whistling teal which, as just mentioned, remained during

the rains] and I did not observe a single individual of any of them

until the cold weather had begun. These sudden movements were,

I dare Say, an episode in some general migration.

List of Birds of the Goona District.

Rapvores.

Otogyps calvus, Scop.

Gyps Bengalensis, Gmel.

Neophron Ginginianus, Lath,

Lithofalco subbuteo, Linn.

Chicquera, Daud.

Tinnunculus alaudarius, Briss,

Micronisus badius, G'mel.

Aquila fulvescens, Gray.

Kutolmaetus Bonelli, Zemm.

Poliornis teesa, Frankl.

Circus cyaneus, Linn.

Swainsonii, A. Smith.

cineraceus, Montague.

—— melanoleucos, Ginel.

eruginosus, Linn.

Haliastur Indus, Bodd.

Milvus Govinda, Sykes.

Pernis cristata, Cuvier.

Hlanus melanopterus, Daud.

Bulaca ocellata, Lath.

Athene Brama, Zemm.

214 On the Birds of the Goona District.

INSESSORES.

Hirundo rustica, Linn.

— filifera, Stephens.

erythropygia, Sykes.

Ptinoprogne concolor, Sykes.

Cypselus affinis, Gray.

Caprimulgus Asiaticus Lath.

Merops viridis, Lenn.

Coracias Indica, Linn.

Halcyon Smyrnensis, Bodd.

Alcedo Bengalensis, Gmel.

Ceryle rudis, Linn.

Meniceros bicornis, Scop.

Tockus gingalensis, Shaw.

Paleornis torquatus, Bodd.

rosa, Bodd.

Picus Mahrattensis, Lath.

Xantholema Indica, Lath.

Cuculus micropterus, Gould.

Coccystes melanoleucos, Gmel.

Centropus rufipennis, Llliger.

Taccocua affinis, Blyth.

Arachnechthra Asiatica, Lath.

Upupa epops Linn.

Lanius lahtora, Sykes.

erythronotus, Vagors.

Hardwickii, Vegors.

Tephrodornis pondiceriana, Gmel.

Graculus Macei, Less.

Pericrocotus erythropygius, Jerdon.

Dicrurus macrocerus, Veerll.

Tchitrea paradisi, Linn.

Leucocera pectoralis, Jerdon.

Cryptolopha cinereocapilla, Vierll.

Cyornis banyumas, Horsf.

Petrocossyphus cyaneus, Linn.

Pyctorhis sinensis, Gmel.

1868. ] On the Birds of the Goona District. 215

Dumetia albogularis, Blyth.

Malacocircus terricolor, Hodgs.

Malcolmi, Sykes.

Chatarrheea caudata, Dum.

Pycnonotus pusillus, Blyth.

Oriolus Kundoo, Sykes.

Copsychus saularis, Linn,

Thamnobia fulicata, Linn.

Cambaiensis, Lath.

Pratincola caprata, Linn.

Indica, Blyth.

Saxicola cenanthe, Linn.

Ruticilla rufiventris, Viel.

Orthotomus longicaudata, Gmei.

Prinia socialis, Sykes.

gracilis, Frankl.

Cisticola schaenicola, Bonap.

Drymoipus inornatus, Sykes.

longicaudatus, Tickell.

neglectus, Jerdon.

Phylloscopus Indicus, Jerdon.

Motacilla Maderaspatana, Briss.

Dukhunensis, Sykes,

Budytes viridis, Gel.

Zosterops palpebrosus, Temm.

Machlolophus xanthogenys, Vigers.

Corvus culminatus, Sykes.

splendens, Vievll.

Dendrocitta rufa, Scop.

Sturnus vulgaris, Linn.

Sturnopastor contra, Linn,

Acridotheres tristis, Linn.

Temenuchus pagodarum, Gel.

Pastor roseus, Linn.

Ploceus baya, Blyth.

Munia Malabarica, Linn.

Hstrelda amandaya, Line, °

216 On the Birds of the Goona District. [No. 4,

Estrelda formosa, Lath.

Passer Indicus, Jard. and Selby.

——- flavicollis, Frankl.

Euspiza luteola, Sparr.

Melophus melanicterus, Gmelin.

Mirafra Assamica, McL.

erythroptera, Jerd.

Ammomanes phenicura, Frankl.

Pyrrhulauda grisea, Scop.

Calandrella bracydactyla, Temm.

Spizalauda deva, Sykes.

Alauda gulgula, Frankl.

CGEMITORES. |

Crocopus phcenicopterus, Lath.

Columba intermedia, Strickl.

Turtur Cambayensis, Gmel.

—— Suratensis, Gimel,

risoria, Linn.

Rasores.

Pterocles fasciatus, Scop.

exustus, Zemm.

Pavo cristatus, Linn.

Francolinus pictus, Jard, and Selby.

Ortygornis Ponticeriana, Gmel.

Perdicula Cambayensis, Lath.

Asiatica, Lath.

Coturnix communis, Bonat.

Coromandelica, Gimel.

Turnix Sykesii, A. Smith.

_ GRALLATORES.

Sypheotides auritus, Lath.

Cursorius Coromandelicus, Gmel.

Aegialitis Philippensis, Scop.

Lobivanellus Goensis, Gmel.

Sarciophorus bilobus, Gel.

(Hdicnemus crepitans, Zemm.

Esacus recurvirostris, Cuvier.

1868. ] On the Birds of the Goona District, 217

Grus Antigone, Linn.

Gallinago scolopacinus, Bonap,

gallinula, Linn.

Rhynchea Bengalensis, Linn.

Philomachus pugnax, Linn.

Actitis glareola, Gmelin.

ochropus, Linn,

~— hypoleucus, Linn,

Totanus glottis, Linn.

stagnatilis, Bechst.

fuscus, Linn,

Himantopus candidus, Bonnat,

Metopidius Indicus, Lath,

Leptoptilos argala, Linn.

Mycteria Australis, Shaw.

Ciconia leucocephala, Gmelin,

Ardea cinerea, Linn.

purpurea, Zinn,

Herodias alba, Linn,

garzetta, Linn,

Buphus Coromandus, Bodd.

Ardeola leucoptera, Bodd.

Butorides Javanica, Horsf.

Nycticorax griseus, Linn.

Tantalus leucocephalus, Gmel.

Platalea leucorodia, Linn.

Anastomus oscitans, Bodd.

‘ Threskiornis melanocephalus, Linn,

Geronticus papillosus, Zemm.

Natarorgs,

Sarcidiornis melanonotus, Penn.

Nettapus Coromandelianus, Gel,

Dendrocygna awsuree, Sykes,

Casarca rutila, Pallas.

Spatula clypeata, Linn.

Anas pecilorhyncha, Penn.

Chaulelasmus streperus, Linn,

218 On the Birds of the Goona District. [No. 4,

Dafila acuta, Linn.

Querquedula crecca, Lenn.

circia, Linn.

Aythya ferina, Linn.

nyroca, Giildenst.

Fuligula cristata, Ray.

Gallinula chloropus, Linn.

Podiceps Phillipensis, Gmelin.

Sylochelidon caspius, Lath.

Hydrochelidon Indica, Stephens.

Seena aurantia, Gray.

Graculus Sinensis, Shaw.

—— Javanicus, Hors/.

Plotus melanogaster, Gel.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

VOL. XXXVII.

PART II.

(Nos. I ro IV.—1863.)

EDITED BY

THE NATURAL HISTORY SECRETARY.

PNININININSNINININSIN NIN DRPR RPP rn

ern

“Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men

of science in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing,

‘and send them to the Asiatic Society at Caleutta. It will languish, if such

communications shall be long intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall

entirely cease.”

Sir Wm. Jongs.

NNN nnn nnn nnnn nn nnn OOO nee

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED BY GC, B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.

1868,

i a ie ae

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

OOO.

Buanrorp, W. T., Esq., F. G. 8. ;—Contributions to Indian

Malacology, No. IX ;—Descriptions of new Drrroy-

MATIN# from Darjeeling and the Khasi RS Cong

Gasrrett, J. E. Col. ;—Table of mean monthly readings and

hourly variations of Barometer, Calcutta, 1856—1865.

GastretL, J. E. Col. ;—Diagram of monthly mean curves of

Barometer and Thermometer, wet and dry bulb, and of

rainfall, Calcutta, 1856—1865.

Gopwin-Austen, H. H. Capt. ;—Figures of the Species of

Dietommarina, Benson, hitherto described as inhabiting

the Himalayas, Khasi Hills, and Burmah, &c.; (with

plates I-IV),

Gopwin-Avsren, H. H. Capt. ;—Notes on geological structure

of the country near foot of hills in the Western Bhootan

eee (me DIA, Ve el eels ca oct ooeees ca coaece.s.

Mason, F., Rev. D. D.;—On dwellings, works of Art, Laws, &.

of the Karens,

| Minas, P. A., Hon. Assistant Surgeon ;—A short sketch of the

tribes of Bhutteanah and Hurrianah,

Page

1 oy

181

192

208

125

171

Page

-Mrrcnett, J., Capt. ;—Additions to the knowledge of Silk,;., 169

SrourozKa, F., Ph. D.;—Ornithological Observations in the

Sutlej valley, N. W. Himalaya, ..........

Surveyor-General ; Abstract of hourly meteorological observa-

tions taken at his office, Calcutta, from September, 1866 to

July, 1868.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

Plates 1—4. Figures of species of Diplommatina (see pp. 7784),

Plate 5. Map of a part of Bhootan, (see p. 117).

ERRATA.

Page 8, line 5, from bottom for moena read meena.

5 Oe es AS for CryLE read CERYLE.

» 40 & 41 for Parrincona read passim PRATINCOLA.

5, 69, line 2, from bottom for leucopthalma read leucophthalna.

a, OE eee owas, Pr for STAGNALIS read STAGNATILIS.

oy OIL is a iss 55 for whieh read which.

yr | Ee oe ads 5 for arrows read arrow.

30 LOL gs SSO as os for exceptinal read exceptional.

55, WRT OBES » for (.) after the word grades read (;).

sy BZD 75) oy”) top: fort P before the word leucoroides read 8.

Vn wayee aa Ok we 5 for P. 4. 5 95 lewcomela read S.

» 214, ,, 5, 4, bottom for Leucocera read Leucocerca.

pee Paid tas FO teh os 5 for Graculus read Graucalus.

ee Wen Ae ie ss 62 im es & for Arachnechthra read Arachnothera.

In the “Table of the mean monthly readings and mean hourly variation of

the Barometer, in the Surveyor-General’s Office, Calcutta, for the ten years,

1856—1865,”

9P.M. — '004> + :004

Hours <10P.m.> for 4—:‘008 > read 2+ :008

ll P.M. — ‘005 + -005

CLASSIFIED INDEX

of species and genera described or mentioned in this volume.

NV. B. The names of new species and genera are marked with an asterisk.

Plante. Mollusca.

Abies excelsa, 8. Cyathopoma Deceanense, 83.

Acacia Catechu, 210. Diancta, 81. ;

Acer, 8. *Diplommatina Austeni, 81, 83.

Adonis estivalis, 8. be Blanfordiana, 80, 83.

Aegle Marmelos, 210. i constricta, 81.

Alnus elongata, 8. MS costulata, 83.

Andropogon, 210. Pe diplocheilus, 79, 80

Apluda, 210. 83. 2

Betula Bajpaltra, 8. * exilis, 84.

Buchanania latifolia, 210, * Spe Fairbanki (Nicida),

Butea frondosa, 210. 83.

Caltha palustris, 8. Ms folliculus, 83, 84,

Carageena, 7. * t. gibbosa, 78, 80, 83.

Cedrus Deodora, 8, 10. mn Huttoni, 78, 83.

Convolvulus arvensis, 9, _ Kingiana(Nicida),82.

Diospyrus, 210. * my labiosa, 80, 83.

Epilobium angustifolium, 9. a liricincta (Nicida), 83.

. roseum, 9. Os Martensi, 81,

Euphorbia antiqua, 7. rs nana, 84,

Euphrasia officinalis, 9. Nilgirica(Nicida), 82.

Ficus indica, 11. * Py nitidula( ,, ), 82.

» Teligiosa, 7, 11. * “ oligopleuris, 82, 84,

Fraxinus, 8. Bs pachycheilus, 78, 80,

Gloriosa superba, 148. 83.

-Tlex, 8. _ polipleuris, 81, 83.

-Juglans regia, 9. a pullula, 83.

Juniperus excelsus, 5. * ef Pulneyana (N icida),

- ., squammosus, 7. 82.

Musa, 7 Hs) Puppensis, 84.

“Myricaria elegans, 8. * e scalaria, 79, 83.

Pavia indica, 9: * S semisculpta, 78, 83.

Picea Webbiana, 8. 2 sperata, 84,

Pinus excelsa, 7. Lymnea, 91.

» Gerardiana, 8, 11. *Nicida, 83.

» longifolia, 11. Pisidium, 91.

_»; Smithiana, 8. Planorbis, 91.

Polemonium ceruleum, 9. Pterocyclos Troscheli, 78.

Quercus, 8. .

Kanunculus acris, 8. Insecta.

Taraxacum officinale, 9.

Taxus baccata, 8. Actia selene, 170.

Thlaspi arvense, 9. Antherea paphia, 169,

Ulmus Himalayensis, 9. Attacus atlas, 170.

| Zizyphus, 210. Bombyx, 169.

Nal Index.

Aves. —

Abrornis xanthoshistos, 47.

Accentor altaicus, 52.

S Huttoni, 53.

3 modularis, 53.

Pe rubeculoides, 53.

* strophiatus, 53.

Accipiter gularis, 13.

e nisoides, 13.

35 nisus, 13.

ae virgatus, 13.

Acridotheres tristis, 56, 215.

Actitis glareola, 69, 217.

», hypoleucos, 69, P17.

5, ochropus, 70, 217.

Aegialitis Philippensis, 216.

i pyrhothorax, 69.

Acgithaliscus erythrocephalus, 52.

Aethopyga Gouldiz, 23.

As miles, 23.

Agrodoma sordida, 49.

Alauda gulgula, 64, 216.

,, leucoptera, 64.

,, triborhyncha, 64.

Alaudula Raytal, 64.

J pispoleta, 64.

Alcedo Bengalensis, 19, 214.

Allotrius melanotis, 50.

xanthochlorus, 50.

Alsocomus Hodgson, 65.

Ammomanes pheenicura, 216.

Anas leucophthalma, 69.

,, peecilorhyncha, 217.

Anastomus oscitans, 217.

Anser indicus, 70.

Anthus cervinus, 49.

Aquila chrysaétos, 15.

,, fulvescens, 213.

», pennata, 16.

Ayachnothera asiatica, 24, 214.

es magna, 23.

Arboricola torqueola, 69.

Ardea cinerea, 217.

y purpurea, 217.

Ardeola leucoptera, 217.

Artamus cucullatus, 78.

Astur palumbarius, 13.

Athene Brama, 213.

,, cuculoides, 17.

Aythia ferina, 218.

» nyroca, 213.

Budytes citreoloides, 48.

” Rayi, 43.

» viridis, 48, 215.

Bulaca ocellata, 213.

Buphus coromandus, 217.

Buteo canescens, 16.

Butorides javanica, 213.

Cacabis chukor, 69.

» greca, 69.

Calandrella brachydactyla, 64, 216.

Callacanthis Burtoni, 61.

Calliope pectoralis, 49.

Caprimulgus asiaticus, 19, 214.

3; indicus, 19.

Carduelis caniceps, 61.

55 elegans, 61.

Carpodacus erythrinus, 60.

Casarca rutila, 70, 217.

Centropus rufipennis, 214.

Cephalopyrus flammiceps, 52.

Ceriornis melanocephala, 67.

Certhia familiaris, 25.

» Himalayana, 20.

Ceryle guttata, 19.

5, rudis, 19, 214.

Chemorornis fuliginosa, 43.

¥ leucocephala, 44.

Chatarrhea caudata, 39, 215.

Chaulelasma streperus, 217.

Chelidon Cashmiriensis, 17.

eY urbica, 17.

Chetusia gregaria, 69, 212.

Chrysomitris spinoides, 61.

Ciconia leucocephala, 217.

Circus ceruginosus, 213.

,, cineracens, 16, 213.

» cyaneus, 213.

», melanoleucos, 213.

5. Swainsonu, 213.

Cisticola schcenicola, 215.

Coccystes melanoleucos, 23, 215.

Colabates sulphurea, 48.

Columba intermedia, 66, 216.

Bs leuconota, 66.

» rupestris, 66.

Copsychus saularis, 40, 215.

Coracias garula, 19.

be indica, 19, 214.

Corvus corax, 54.

, culminatus, 215.

,, intermedius, 54.

» splendens, 54, 216.

» tibetanus, 54.

Corydala Richardi, 48.

* rufula, 48.

Coturnix communis, 69, 216.

coromandelica, 216.

Cotyle riparia, 17.

», rupestris, 17.

Crocopus pheenicopterus, 216.

Cryptolopha cinereocapilla, 28, 214.

Cuculus canorus, 22.

micropterus, 214,

» __ poliocephalus, 23.

Culicipeta Burkii, 47.

Cursorius Coromandelicus, 216.

Cyanecula suecica, 45.

Cyornis ruficauda, 29.

Cypselus acuticauda, 18.

affinis, 18, 214,

apus, 18.

australis, 18.

leuconyx, 18,

melba, 18.

pacificus, 18.

ie vittatus, 18.

Dafila acuta, 218.

Dendrocitta Himalayana, 55.

zs rufa, 55, 215.

_ Dendrocygna awsuree, 212, 217.

Dicrurus longicaudatus, 27,

fr macrocercus, 214,

Drymoipus inornatus, 215.

longicaudatus, 215.

. vi neglectus, 215.

Elanus melanopterus, 213.

Emberiza cia, 57.

fucata, 58.

pithyornis, 58.

» pusilla, 59.

bi ua Stewarti, 58.

ms Stracheyi, 57.

_ Erythropus vespertinus, 13.

_ Erythrosterna leucura, 32.

‘Hsacus recurvirostris, 216,

‘Estrelda amandava, 215.

=, formosa, 216.

Eumyas melanops, 29.

Hurycercus, 45.

Huspiza luteola, 216.

Hutolmaétus Bonelli, 213.

falco peregrinus, 12.

‘rancolinus pictus, 216.

> vulgaris, 68.

‘Fregilus graculus, 55.

+ Himalayanus, 55.

| Fringillauda memoricola, 63.

PFringillanda sordida, 63.

| Fulica atra, 69.

| Fuligula cristata, 218,

| Galerida crystata, 65.

| Gallinago gallinula, 217.

scolopacinus, 70, 217,

solitaria, 70,

”)

Index.

Gallinula Burnesi, 69.

» chloropus, 69, 218.

Gallophasis albocristatus, 68.

Gallus moris, 130.

Garulax albogularis, 37.

Garulus bispecularis, 55.

_ lanceolatus, 55.

Gecinus squammatus, 21,

» Striolatus, 21.

Geocichla unicolor, 35.

Geronticus papilosus, 217.

Glaucidium Brodiei, 17.

Graculus javanicus, 218.

- sinensis, 218,

Grammatoptila striata, 36.

Graucalus Macei, 214,

Grus antigone, 217.

Gypaétus barbatus, 12.

Gyps Bengalensis, 210, 213.

fulvus, 12.

», indicus, 12.

Halcyon fuscus, 19.

Be Smyrnensis, 214.

Haliastur Indus, 16, 213.

Hemichelidon fuliginosum, 28.

Henicurus maculatus, 47.

nigrifrons, 47.

2 Scouleri, 47.

Herodias alba, 217.

Ae garzetta, 217.

Hesperiphona icteroides, 59,

Heterura sylvana, 49.

Hierococeyx sparveroides, 23.

Himantopus candidus, 217,

Hirundo daurica, 17, 211.

erythropygia, 17, 214,

filifera, 17, 214,

rustica, 17, 214,

Horornis fuliginiventer, 46.

Hydrobata asiatica, 33.

Cashmiriensis, 33.

$9 sp. P 33.

Hydrochelidon indica, 218,

Hydrophasianus chirurgus, 69.

Hypotriorchis chiquera, 13.

severus, 13.

te subbuteo, 13.

Hypsipetes psaroides, 39.

Janthia cyanura, 44,

Lanius arenarius, 27.

erythronotus, 26, 214,

Hardwickii, 26, 214.

» lahtora, 214.

Larvivora cyana, 44.

Laticilla, 45.

vill

Lerva nivicola, 68.

Limosa cegocephala, 69.

Leptoptilos argala, 217.

Leucocerca albofrontata, 28.

3 fuscoventris, 28.

“s pectoralis, 214.

Linota brevirostris, 62.

» montium, 62.

*Linota pygmea, 62.

Lithofalco Chiquera, 213.

F subbuteo, 213.

Lobivanellus Goensis, 70, 216.

Lophophanes melanolophus, 52.

4 rufonuchalis, 52.

Lophophanus Impeyanus, 67.

Loxia Himalayana, 60.

Machlolophus xanthogenys, 52, 215.

Malacocireus Malcolmi, 215.

Bee terricolor, 215.

Mareca penelope, 69. ‘

Megalzema caniceps, 22.

5 Hodgsoni, 22.

sh lineata, 22.

* virens, 22. -

Melophus melanicterus, 216.

Meniceros bicornis, 211, 214.

Merops apiater, 19.

» viridis, 19.

Merula albocincta, 35.

», boulbul, 35.

5» castanea, 3d.

Metopidius indicus, 217.

Metoponia pusilla, 61.

Micronisus badius, 213.

Milvus govinda, 16, 213.

Mirafra Assamica, 216.

, cantilans, 64.

,, erythroptera, 216.

Montifringilla Adamsi, 62.

hematopygia, 62.

Motacilla Dukhunensis, 215.

“f Maderaspatana, 215.

a personata, 48.

Munia malabarica, 56, 215.

*Munia similaris, 56.

Muscicapula estigma, 32.

x ciliaris, 32.

a leucoshistos, 32.

rubecula, 32.

superciliaris, 32.

Muscipeta Duchalui, 27.

Mycheria australis, 217.

Myophonus Temmincku, 33.

Myzanthe ignipectus, 24.

Nemoricola indica, 48.

Index.

Neophron Ginginianus, 12, 213.

» _ perenopterus, 12.

Neopus Malayensis, 16.

Neornis flavolivacea, 46.

Nettapus Coromandelianus, 217,

Nucifraga cariocathactes, 59.

» hemispila, 54.

. immaculata, 54.

ms maculata, 54.

Numenius arquata, 69.

Nycticorax griseus, 217.

Oedicnemus crepitans, 216.

Oreocincla mollissima, 36.

Oriolus galbula, 39.

» Kundoo, 39, 215.

,, melanocephalus, 39.

» TLraillu, 40.

Orocestes cinglorhynchus, 34.

5 erythrogastra, 34.

Orthotomus longicaudata, 215.

Ortygornis Pondiceriana, 216.

Otocompsa leucogenys, 39.

Otocornis longirostris, 64,

Otogyps calvus, 210, 213.

Otus vulgaris, 17.

Palzornis Alexandri, 19.

- rosa, 20, 214.

6 shisticeps, 20.

oH torquatus, 20, 214.

Palumbus casiotis, 66.

Parus cinereus, 52.

,, monticulus, 52.

Passer cinamomeus, 57.

,, flavicollis, 216.

5 indicus, 57, 216.

, montanus, 57.

Pastor roseus, 56, 215.

Pavo cristatus, 67, 216.

~ Perdicula asiatica, 216.~

ip Cambayensis, 216.

Pericrocotus erythropygius, 214.

a speciosus,

Pernis cristata, 213.

Petrocossyphus castaneocollis, 54.

5 cyaneus, 34.

ns saxatilis, 34.

Phasianus Wallichii, 68.

Philomachus pugnax, 217.

Phylloscopus affinis, 46.

= indicus, 215.

. n. sp.? 46.

Fe trochilus, 46.

a viridanus, 46,

Pica bottanensis, 3.

,, caudata, 3.

Index.

Picus brunneifrons, 20, Sarcidiornis melanotus, 217,

»» Himalayanus, 20, Sarciophorus bilobus, 216.

» Mahrattensis, 214, Scolopax rusticola, 70,

»» major, 20. Seena aurantia, 218,

Pipastes arboreus, 48, Sibia capistrata, 38.

» maculatus, 48, Siphia leucomelanura, 32,

Piprisoma agile, 24, »» _ Strophiata, 32.

Planesticus atrogularis, 35. Sitta Himalayensis, 25.

Platalea leucorodia, 217, »» leucopsis, 26.

Ploceus baya, 215. Siva strigula, 50.

Plotus melanogaster, 218. Spatula clypeata, 217.

Pnoépyga longicaudata, 32, Sphenocercus sphenurus, 65.

a squammata, 32. Spyzalauda deva, 216.

Podiceps cristatus, 69. Stachyris pyrrhops, 36.

7 Phillipensis, 218, Sterna hirundo, 69.

Poliornis teesa, 213. »» javanica, 69.

Pomatorhinus erythrogenys, 37. Sturnopastor contra, 215.

Pratincola atrata, 40, 211, 213. Sturnus unicolor, 56.

a indica, 40, 211, 213, » Vulgaris, 56, 215.

= ferrea, 41. Suya criniger, 45.

Prinia gracilis, 215. Sylviparus modestus, 51.

» socialis, 215. Sypheodites auritus, 216.

Proparus vinipectus, 50. Syrnium nevarense, 16.

Propasser rhodochlamys, 60. De nivicolum, 16.

2 rhodochrous, 60. Taccocua affinis, 214, .

Pterocles exutus, 216. Tantalus leucocephalus, 217,

= fasciatus, 67. Tarsiger chryseus, 45,

Pteruthius erythropterus, 79, Tchitrea paradisi, 27, 214.

Ptinoprogue concolor, 214, Temenuchus pagodarum, 56, 213.

Pucrasia melanocephala, 68. Tephrodornis, 49.

Pycnonotus pusillus, 215. Tephrodornis Pondiceriana, 214.

= pygeus, 39. Tetraogallus Himalayensis, 68.

Pyctorhis sinensis, 36, 214, a tibetanus, 68.

Pyrrhocorax alpinus, 56. Thamnobia Cambayensis, 40, 215.

Pyrrhospiza punicea, 60. - fulicata, 315.

Pyrrhula erythrocephala, 59, Tharrhaleus, 53.

Pyrrhulauda grisea, 216, Threskiornis melanocephalus, 217,

Querquedula circia, 218. Tichodroma muraria, 25.

E crecca, 69, 218, Tinunculus alaudarius, 13, 213.

4 glocitans, 69. Tockus gingalensis, 214.

Reguloides chloronotus, 47. Totanus calidris, 69.

. occipitalis, 46. »» fuscus, 217.

ne proreculus, 47. » ~ glottis, 217.

Be) «5, trochiloides, 46. » _ Stagnatilis, 70, 217,

Regulus cristatus, 47. Trochalopteron erythrocephalum, 37,

Ms Himalayanus, 47, < lineatum, 38.

Rhyncheea Bengalensis, 70, 217. as variegatum, 37,

Ruticilla cceruleocephala, 42, Troglodytes Nipalensis, 32,

» erythragastra, 42. Turdulus Wardii, 35.

» pheenicura, 42. Turdus Hodgsoni, 36.

» Yrufiventris, 42, 215, » Viscivorus, 36.

Saxicola deserti, 42,212. Turnix Sykesii, 216.

» leucuroides, 41, 219, Turtur aurita, 66.

» cenanthe, 41, 215,

» Cambayensis, 66, 216.

» picata, 41.

= umoalis: 67,

Turtur meena, 66.

,, orientalis, 66.

» risoria, 67, 216.

,, rupicola, 66.

,» Suratensis, 67, 216.

Upupa epops, 26.

Urocissa cucullata, 55.

Se flavirostris, 55.

5, occipitalis, 55.

“ sinensis, 59.

Vanellus cristatus, 70.

Vivia innominata, 21,

5 minuta, 22.

Xantholeema indica, 22, 214.

Xemma brunicephala, 69.

; cv

Index.

Yunx torquilla, 22.

Zoothera monticola, 33.

Zosterops palpebrosus, 51, 215.

Mammalia.

Equus hemionus, 5.

Lynchus europeus, 5

Moschus moschiferus, 5.

Mustella erminea, 5.

Ovis ammon, 5, 106.

nahura, 5

Ursus tibetanus, 5.

Vulpes ferilatus, 5.

montanus, 5.

Additional Errata in Mr. Theobald’s Catalogue of Reptiles, pub-

lished as an Extra Number of the Journal, (No. CXL VI. 7 he

Page 50, from top omit lines 33, 34.

Page 51, line 9, from top for DOSYPELTIDA read DASYPELTID.

» line 13, ,, ,, omit and read Psammopuis, Boie.

» » linel4, ,, ,, omit the first five words.

» » line 18, ,, ,, omit and read P. Condanarus, Merr.

» » line 13 to 27 from top transpose to page 59, after line 4.

Page 59, line 5, from top omit.

Page 67, line 6, ,, ,, for parsicips read parviceps.

Page 72, line 22, ,, ,, for ousted read obtained.

» » line 36, ,, . ,, for kote read kingdom.

Page 73, line 29, ,, ,, for MAC LELLANDII read MAC CLEL-

Page 74, line 5, ,, ,, for Reiey read Reilley. (LANDII.

Page 76, line 6, ,, ,, for neligrensis read Neelgherriensis.

Page 78, line 16, ,, ,, for verus read berus.

Page 80, line 5 from bottom, for HOPLOBACTRACHUS read HOP-

LOBATRACHUS.

Page 81, line 2 from top, for Tomnopterna read Tomopterna.

Page 82, last line for five read fine ; Engystoma et seq. in another line.

Page 88, line 1, from top,for skeleton read skeletons.

» » line 5, ,, ,, for Mavsuria, Emys read MANOURIA EMyYs.

» » linell, ,, ,, for CRaNna read Conana.

» » line25, ,, ,, for Secoxorts read LEIOLEPIS.

Appendix page ii, line 16 from top, for hoisting read twisting.

* These corrections are printed on a separate sheet, which is intended as an

addition to the Extra-Number of the Journal, not forming an essential part of

is volume,

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

EXTRA NUMBER,

CATALOGUE OF REPTILES

IN THE

MUSEUM OF THE ASTATIC SOCIETY

BEN GA L.

BY 3

W. THEOBALD, Juy., ESQ.

| [Published by order of the Council of the Asiatic Society, Bengal. |

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.

1868.

sioner

veer 4

F f :

» :

F ;

. ° > ~ » Os

4 ;

‘ .

rh a ; i

‘ \ 4 o

“iw sf Saat

{

al «

EXPLANATORY NOTICE.

Tue printing of this Catalogue was commenced in 1865, shortly

alter the receipt of Mr. W. Theobald’s MSS. ; but in consequence of

the difficulties experienced in correcting proofs, and also in conse-

quence of insufficient instructions regarding the execution of the

plates having been at first issued, a delay of nearly three years has

occurred in its publication. This delay is greatly to be regretted,

because many new species and genera of reptiles are described in this

paper. The dates of publication have accordingly to be rectified.

The Catalogue has been printed by order of the Council, and is now

issued as an extra number of the Journal.

7 The Nat, Hist. Secretary,

Asvatec Society, Bengal.

Calcutta, June, 1868.

ae er OS FPS

a ~~ &

ERRATA

(In the Press.)

For “ Gunther” read passim “ Giinther.”

Page 9, line 18, from above for “ causticly” read “ caustically.”

5 Ds a BS 5 , for“ Dam.et Bib.” read “ Dum. et Bib.”

iyo dsle nes CO) 45 below omit ‘* (Vide Plate.)’””

uate gy above for “26 P. tentori” read “26 P. TENTORIA.”

Ay ic Gr elo ae » for “P,. SMIrH, Gunther? read “P. Smrrait, Giin-

ther.”

BS gh ag’ LO ogy » omit “ A” after Bis i

<li SRP See b (eiiante 195 inches” read “ 194 inches.”

ee (A ek ee SSE ses Weigmann” read “ Wiegmann.” .

Bo Cs, yO lay », transfer “ ,” from before after the word “ longi- |

tudinally.”

BROAD vem as » Gecko Harriette, Tytler, MSS.” see Journal

Asiatic Society, Bengal, 1865, Vol. XXXL jg

p. 548.

i) Beaytsodkas a a. for. Grays read “ Grey.”

sx BO stow} periPaty oP oie Ors. Merrem” read “ Merrem.”

FsOlle ep Oli ae , for “ Thaiel tmio” read “ Thaiet-mio.”

aes Tey ee transfer “,” fromafter before the word “scales.”

as Paar: Ma Se hon: «gee. read “ Trig.” a:

5 Ortega ean a » omit “,” after “ Tropidolemus.” — -

55 B05 yy OSS , for “ Weigm.” read “ Wiegin.”

py pGdio chs, We Se below ; the name “ P. Frithii2? ought to be printed in-

Roman capital letters, as it designates a —

newly named species, not, I presume,

identical with the previous one.

33. 805) se ee frome above for ‘“ PANGOHURA pecTURA” read “ PANGSHURA

TENTORIA.”

Ss tap AO iG: » for “candal” read “ caudal,”

ERRATA

(In the Plates.)

On the fourth plate omit ‘No. 27” after the name of the species “ %* Pang ;

shura Smithit.”

INES SPIES SLL DLL AL ADA AOS

PREFATORY REMARKS,

—

The present Catalogue originated in this wise—

Having, at the commencement of the rains, to return to Cal-

cutta on duty from Rangoon, where I had been paying some

attention to the Reptiles of the country, I determined to seize the

opportunity offered to me, of examining the types of those

species described by Blyth from Birma and Tenasserim, and

any other specimens in the Museum of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal, which might enlarge my knowledge of the Reptiles of

the Province.

Finding that Dr. Anderson, Curator of the Indian Museum,

was engaged in a searching enquiry into the state of the

collections, I offered to compile a Catalogue of the Reptiles

in the Museum, and thereby, to some extent, lighten his labours.

My offer being cordially acceded to by Dr. Anderson and the

Council, the present work is the result, and I trust that it will

not only clear up some erroneous identifications, but be the

means of directing attention to the comparatively poor collection

which the Museum possesses of Indian reptiles, when it should

have a much finer one.

The list of desiderata is so very extensive, that I trust many

large accessions may be looked for, when members of the Society

and others, scattered throughout the length and breadth of this

glorious land, only know what is required of them. With this view!

I urged that this Catalogue should be published as an extra num-

ber of the Journal, that by its circulation to members, the wants

of the Museum might become more generally known.

In the preparation of this Catalogue, I have had the inesti-

mable advantage of following ‘ Dr. Gunther’s Reptiles of British

India, which I may be said to have taken as the basis of my

own, though I have not slavishly followed it, when I thought an

iv Preface.

alteration in arrangement or nomenclature desirable ; as, for in-

stance, in the case of the genus Eumeces, to which Gunther refers

no less than sixteen species, but respecting which assemblage I

have preferred adhering to the arrangement in Gray’s Catalogue

of lizards in the British museum, as at once an easier and more

natural classification. |

Then again, I have removed the important family of _Homa-

lopsidee from their place next the Colubride, to their more

natural location alongside of the Hydrophide. The Homalop-

side may be thought to have relations with the Aquatic Colu-

bridee, but these can only be said to be aquatic in the sense of

more particularly affecting the vicinity of water than other snakes,

whether for food or delectation ; but a fondness for water is not

peculiar or restricted to them, as numberless other snakes, the

true Colubri, the Cobras and Bungari, &c. equally delight in

water and its vicinity. |

Between the Hydrophide and Homalopsidee on the other

hand, the connexion 1s much stronger and, so to speak, more

organic. The Homalopside are true water snakes, rarely seen on —

land ; and being viviparous, are, like the Hydrophidee, not com- —

pelled to resort to the land for the deposition of eggs. Some of .

the species too, if not most of them, affect tidal waters, and are ~

equally at home in galt and fresh water. The coloration too of |

some, such as Hipistes, 1s essentially that of the Hydrophide ; and |

Hipistes, being moreover a marine as well asa river species,

seems to form a natural link between the two families. ;

The curious genus Xenopeltis I have placed next to Python,

for no better reason, perhaps, than that it is as much in place

there as any where. The brilliant metallic lustre which both dis-

play during life, far surpasses what I have remarked in any

other snakes. (x

Several new genera will be found described in the fol-

lowing pages, and some new species. Two species I have re-

moved from Ablabes which Gunther includes, but my reasons i”

ave I think, sound. If such and such a character is of importance, —

and constantly used as a generic character, as the presence 0 -

Preface, V

absence of keels, the number of rows of scales, the suppres-

sion of some of the normal plates of the head, &c. &., how

can we consistently ignore these characters in the case of

Some genus which we want to make the receptacle for forlorn

unappropriated species ? Some of the genera of Colubride

are established on very shadowy characters, Herpetoreas for in-

stance; yet in Ablabes, Gunther includes species, affording ex-

cellent characters for separation, and which in fact demand sepa-

ration. Species are included in it with two, three or four

frontals, smooth scales or keeled scales, and from 13 to 17 rows

of scales. I by no means think, that it would not bea gain, where

practicable, to enlarge the generic definition, so as judiciously

to include closely allied forms merely excluded by some trivial

_ character ; such a process is, I think, wanted, but it requires

caution to carry it out: but, taking the genera of serpents as

__ they stand, and bearing in view the admitted weight of certain

‘ characters, why, I ask, and on what grounds, are we entitled to

relax our principles of classification, and make a particular

genus a receptacle wherein to impound aberrant species, like

‘ Ablabes, as it stands in Gunther's catalogue, or the still more mis-

_cellaneous throng constituting Eumeces ?

This is, however, a mere difference of opinion, and I fully

acknowledge, whilst adopting a slight modification of his ar-

7 rangement, the temerity of dissenting from the verdict of so pro-

found a savant as Dr. Gunther, on a matter of classification.

Ihave also separated the terrestrial herbivorous lizards as.a dis-

tinct Family, (Uromasticide,) from the Agamide. Their habits,

food, and aspect warrant this arrangement, and I cannot help

| thinking that Dr. Gunther has been misled ag regards the

| arboreal habits of Leiolepis, which is, I. believe, eminently and

| solely a terrestrial and burrowing lizard. Cantor appears to be

| the authority on which their reputed arboreal habits rest, but his

words do not seem to convey necessarily that he was an eye-wit-

‘ess of their powers of flight, beyond evolutions performed under

unnatural conditions and under confinement ina cage. Doubtless

| the mechansim of the expansile ribs suggested the idea of their

vi Preface.

using them as Draco is known to do: at the same time, he ap-

pears to have been ignorant of their burrowing habits, and to

have only noted them in captivity. His words are, ‘‘ Twelve were

at one time obtained from a spice plantation in province Wel-

lesley ;” and again, ‘“ the Malay who brought the lizards asserted

they were frugivorous, and might be fed with soft fruit and boiled

rice, which was perfectly true.” These are not the words of an

observer of the animal in a state of nature, and no allusion is

made to their gregarious cuniculine mode of life.

It would be very interesting to determine, if, as I suspect may

be the case, Moloch horridus from Australia belongs to the same

family and exhibits the same traits; but I did not like to injure the

Society’s specimen by opening it, when a query will probably

elicit fuller information from those able to obtain it from fresh

specimens.

The family Geoemydide, I have established for those Emydinee

whose males have a concave sternum; a sexual adaptation to

their terrestrial habits.

The following have been the most important contributors

to the reptile collection, though its neglected state is an

ungrateful return for the liberality of the donors. Contra spem

meliora speramus! Dr. Kelaart. Ceylon; Major Berdmore,

Pegu; Major W. 6. Sherwill, Darjeeling ; Rev. F. Fitzgerald,

North Carolina; Dr. Jerdon, South India; W. Theobald, Esq., —

Jnr., Punjab and Pegu ; E. Robinson, Esq., Assam ; Lieut.-Cols.

Phayre and Tytler, and others noted in the proper place.

I must not omit to record my obligation to H. H. Locke, Esq.,

for the great care he has bestowed on the Plates, which, it must

be allowed, reflect considerable credit on his pupils to whom their |

execution was entrusted.

W. THEOBALD, Junior.

Calcutta, Sept. 1865.

AUNT

SO AAA AAAS IPO NALI DALE IAPR ISS DARPA ARANDA ANT

CATALOGUE OF REPTILES

it uscum of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

1866.

CLASS REPTILIA.

SECTION A.—CATAPHRACTA, SHIELDED

REPTILES.

ORDER CHELONIA.

FAMILY TESTUDINID At.

TESTUDO, Opret.

1. 1. Inpica, Gmel.

a, stuffed female. Galapagos Islands.

9, 'T. raprata, Shaw. Madagascar.

a, stuffed male.

}. stuffed female. (Some plates gone.)

c. stuffed female. (Non adult.)

9 'T, svetnata, Schw.

T. elegans, Schoepff.

T. megalopus, Blyth.

a. large stuffed female.

4. shell of smaller female. Vizagapatam. Capt. Rolo.

c. similar stuffed. Ditto. Ditto.

d. small female stuffed.

Nuchal plate invariably absent.

4, 'T. guometrica, L.

a. stuffed female. (Some South Africa. Major Sherwill.

plates gone.) ;

b, ditto ditto Ditto. Ditto.

c. shell of very young male. Ditto. Ditto. |

Very like the Indian T. stellata. |

Specimens a and 6 have no nuchal plate. c has it large.and :

distinct. i

Catalogue of Reptiles, 9

5. TT. puatyyotus, Blyth. J. A. S.,

XXXII. p. 83.

a. b. c. upper shells of adults, Burma E. Blyth, Esq.

purchased in the Rangoon above the

Bazar, where they are used _ frontier.

to bale oil.

6. 1. eLonaara, Blyth. J. A. S.,

XXII. p. 639.

a. stuffed male. Arakan. Major Phayre.

6. stuffed female. Tenasserim.

c. half grown female, shell only.

d. half grown male, ditto. Tenasserim.

(a few plates gone.)

e. upper shell only.

J. g. very young in spirit.

h. very young, (shell dried.)

This is the common species of land tortoise in British Burma.

___ Blyth very causticly remarks J. A. S. XXXIT, page 84. “Of course

this is the species referred to as elongata, Gray (!) from Camboja, in

| Proc. Zool. Soc. 1861, page 139. As well, however, may Dr. J. E. Gray,

refer to Homo sapiens, Gray, or Hqguus Caballus, Gray! I claim the

honour, such as itis, of having named the three fine Indo-Chinese species

of Testudo, as yet discovered. Palmam qui merwit ferat. Dr. Gray, is,

however, a well known offender in this respect; more’s the pity.”

: ‘HOMOPUS, Domerim er Brzron.

7. H. Horsrretpr, Gray.

A. Burnesii, Blyth,

a. stuffed female. Afghanistan. Sir A. Burnes,

6. young, in spirits (in poor condition.) Ditto.

; CHERSINA, Gray.

8 OC, aneutara, Dum et Bib.

a. b. adult males, South Africa. Major Sherwill.

shells only.

c. half grown, ditto ditto. Ditto.

d. e. young females, ditto. Ditto.

MANOURIA, Gray.

M. Emys, Gray.

a, adult, (much injured). Moulmein. Major Phayre.

. Formerly there was a stuffed specimen ; but now only a few fragments

remain of this rare species.

10 Catalogue of Reptiles.

GEOEMYDA, Gray. ,

9, G. aranvis, Gray.

Cyclemys platynota, Gray apud Blyth.

a, upper shell of adult. Tenasserim. W. Theobald,

Junr., Esq.

10. G. rrrcarmata, Blyth.

Emys tricarvnata, Blyth.

a. stuffed male. Chaibassa. Major Tickell.

CUORA, Gray.

11. C. Amsornensis, Daud.

a. stuffed male. Malacca. Rev. J. Lindstedt. —

b. ditto female. Ditto. Ditto.

c. ditto ditto half grown. Tenasserim. Dr. Helfer.

CYCLEMYS, Bett.

12. (. orsrcunata, Bell.

Emys dentata, Gray.

GC. Oldhami, Gunther.

a. adult shell, (female?) Arakan hills, W. T. Blanford,

Ksq.

b. ditto ditto. Tenasserim. W. Theobald,

Junr., Esq.

c. stuffed young. Sitang river. Major Phayre.

d. dry, young, stuffed. Sitang river. Major Berdmore.

The specimen figured by Gunther as 0. Oldhami was obtained alive by

myself near Mergui, and is merely the adult of C. orbiculata, Bell. The or-

bicular form of the shell, as well as the strongly toothed margins, charac-

terise young and half grown shells, disappearing as the animal becomes

possession the motion is pretty free, though the suture is covered by

the ends of the abdominal plates. In very young shells this transverse

joint is imperceptible ; in half grown individuals it is well distinguish-

able, and in adults itis not unfrequently conspicuously marked external-

ly by a sort of carious fossa across the abdominal plates, resulting, 00

doubt, from the mobility of the bony suture beneath.

FAMILY EMYDID A.

| EMYS, Bronenrart.

13. 3B. nucwatts, Blyth. :

q. stuffed adult. Face Bataceal a

b. c, smaller, stuffed. =

Catalogue of Reptiles. 11

14. EH. Hammront, Gray.

a. stuffed adult. Calcutta. K. Blyth, Esq.

b. ce. younger ditto. Ditto. Ditto.

d. upper shell only. Ditto. Ditto.

15, E. rrivea, Schweigg.

LE. Seba, Gray.

a. adult shell only. Arakan hills. W. T. Blanford,

Esq.

b. ditto stuffed. Madras. Capt. Mitchell,

Madras Musuem.

This individual has no .

nuchal plate.

ce. d. shells of young. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

I quite agree with Dr. Gunther in referring E. Seba, Gray, to this

species, which attains a greater size than is supposed. Mr. Blanford’s

Specimen is evidently avery aged individual with the keels nearly

obliterated, but with the anterior margins strongly revolute. Colour

uniform blackish throughout, and pale yellowish brown where abraded.

16. E.niera, Blyth. J.A.S.,

XXIV., p. 713.

E. crassicollis, Bell apud Blyth.

a. shell of adult. Tenasserim river. W. Theobald,

Junr., Esq.

b, ditto young. Ditto. Ditto.

__ This species was, I think, correctly separated as a distinct species

in the first instance, by Blyth, though subsequently referred by him

to H. crassicollis. ‘The vertebral plates are very differently shaped

from those of crassicollis, being mushroom-shaped, and so attenuated

behind as almost to admit the approximation of the costals. This

peculiarity of form is less seen in the young than in the adult, and from

i not being particularly dwelt on by so minute a describer as Dr. Gunther,

Lam the more inclined to regard FL. nigra as distinct from E, crassicollis.

_It may, however, be the nearly allied species alluded to as inhabiting

~Camboja. In the adult shell, the last vertebral is hardly broader than

the caudals. (Vide Plate.)

17 = &. eurrara, Schweigg. North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.

TETRAONYX, Lesson.

18. T. Lessonrr, Dum. et Bib.

a. stuffed adult, 23 inches. Calcutta. E. Blyth, Esq.

b. shell ditto. Salween R. W. Theobald,

Junr., Esq.

e. d. half grown, stuffed. Calcutta. H. Blyth, Esq.

e. f. g. young ditto. so Ditto. Ditto.

h. . very young ditto. Ditto. - _ - Ditto.

12 Catalogue of Reptiles.

This species is very common at Calcutta, and also about Rangoon.

Tt is herbivorous in a great measure, and is much used in Calcutta in

the manufacture of soup, which purpose no doubt it answers admira-

bly; and I hope the admirers of Calcutta turtle soup will lose none of

their relish for the article, by knowing how largely river turtle are

substituted for the true Chelonia virgata, which, however, is occasionally

brought to Calcutta from the Straits.

BATAGUR, Gray.

19. B. winuatvs, Gray.

a. stuffed adult, 24 inches.

No locality or donor is given for the sole specimen in the museum,

‘but Gunther records the species from Mou!mein, Nepal, and Saharun-

pur, whence it had been procured by Dr. Falconer.*

20. B. Tuurer, Gray.

Emys Thurgu, Gray.

a. stuffed adult, 21 inches. Calcutta. KE. Blyth, Esq.

b. c. smaller, stuffed. Ditto.

d. e. half grown, ditto. Ditto.

fig. h. 7.7. young ditto. Ditto.

A very common species at Calcutta, though adults are not easily

got. It appears to me more nearly affined to Batagur than to Emys.

21. B. puoncoxa, Gray.

E. Duvaucellii, Dum. et Bub.

a, stuffed young. Narbudda R.

b. ditto smaller. Sagur, Central Lieutenant Ro-

India. berts.

This species grows to a large size, but there are no adult specimens ~

in the museum. It is common at Monghyr.

22. B. Burpmoren, Blyth, J. A. 8., XXXIL., p. 84.

E. ocellata, D. et B. apud Gunther. |

E. ocellata, D. et B. apud Blyth, J. A.S., XXII., p. 645.

a. b. stuffed adults. Pegu. Major Berdmore. |

c. d. e. f. young, stuffed. Ditto. Ditto.

This species is very abundant in Pegu and Tenasserim. Its habits

are strictly aquatic, not terrestrial as Gunther surmises, but it is often

left dry by the drying up in the hot weather of the inundated plains, in

which situations incredible numbers are captured by the Burmese,

who fire the grass forthe purpose. Itis never found in the dry forests.

Dr. Gunther remarks that Dumeril and Bibron’s figure, Plate 16, Fig.

1, is “ not good,” but it refers to an entirely different species, which may

account for its but indifferently representing the present ! 3

* No maps which Dr. Gunther had consulted giving him any light on the

subject, he amusingly enquires touching Saharunpur, “Is it another name for

Serampur on the Hooghly >” .

Catalogue of Reptiles, 13

23. B. ocertata, Dum. et Bib.

not B. ocellata apud Gunther.

B. Berdmoreti, Blyth apud Gunther.

a. stuffed adult. Calcutta. E. Blyth, Esq.

b. c. smaller, stuffed. Ditto. Ditto.

This species occurs in Calcutta, but not in Pegu, where B. Berdmoreti,

Blyth, replaces it. Itis a much smaller and more elon gate species than

B. Berdmoreii, Blyth, which is very convex.

24.* B. rrivirrara, Dum. et Bib.

A specimen of this remarkably handsome species presented by my-

self from Moulmein, is no longer in the museum. It abounds in Pegu,

and is remarkable for the disparity of coloration and size in the sexes.

“ Male 18.50 x 13.10.

Shell pale olive green, with three conspicuous black streaks down

the back, as though of black paint. Beneath, pale orange yellow.

Soft parts of body and limbs pale yellow, dusky above. Neck and

_ head smooth, during life of a bright carnation red, instantly fading on

_ death toa waxy white. An intensely black lozenge-shaped plate be-

_ hind the nostrils, on the forehead.

Female, 23.50 12.50.

___ Colour of the shell is dark brown above and below. Head, neck and

limbs are uniform pale greenish olive, with the black lozenge behind the

nostrils on the forehead, as in the male. Abundant in the Delta of

Pegu. Oviposits about Zalon in-December and J anuary. Eggs 25 in

-number 2.6 long.” Weight 965 grains. (MSS. Cat. Reptiles Pegu.)

PANGSHURA, Gray.

(Fourth Vertebral decanter-shaped.)

25. P. rxcrum, Bell.

# LE, tecta, Gray.

a. stuffed adult, 7 inches. Calcutta. K. Blyth, Esq.

b. c. d. young, stuffed. Ditto. Ditto.

€.—m. young in spirits. Ditto. Ditto.

bY Tt is not a little singular that Dr. Gunther, in his last admirable work

| On the Reptiles of India, should have so superciliously, one might

almost say perversely, ignored the labours of his predecessors. An

excellent figure is given by Bell, and the species is also figured by

Hardwicke. Ido not agree with Prof. Bell that Hardwicke’s figure

| is too brightly coloured, as the animal is often of a bright red below

mottled with black, and with a bright red vertebral stripe. The more

modest coloration, however, of Bell’s figure should have prevented

| Dr. Gunther from describing the colour as yellow, in opposition to

* Species with an asterisk are wanting in the Museum.

14 Catalogue of Reptiles.

those who had observed from life. A more trivial error is that of

adopting Gray’s name tecta for Bell’s tectum. Dr. Gray’s mistake in

this matter of names would almost seem to be his method, to judge

from this and other instances (vide ante under Testudo elongata, B.)

26. P. reNnToRI, Gray.

a. stuffed adult. Indus R. Sir A. Burnes.

b, adult shell only, 8.25 Ditto. Ditto.

inches.

(sternum injured.)

it seems the vertebrals are rectangular in the

adly pentangular with an obtuse

recorded as having been procured

From these specimens,

adult, the first being, however, bro

angle in front. The young specimen,

by Mr. Blyth from the vicinity of Calcutta, is no longer in the

museum. Respecting the occurrence of this species near Calcutta,

Dr. Gunther remarks, “ This we doubt, as the species may easily be con-

founded with young specimens of the Batagwr and of the species allied

to it? Dr. Gunther is probably right as to the non-occurrence at

Calcutta of this species, but he may probably be mistaken, when

saying it can be confounded with the Batagur.

Tt remains to determine what was the species alluded to by Mr.

Blyth. As the specimen is lost (in common with so many others !),

it is not easy to say with certainty what the species was, the only thing

quite certain being that it was not the Batagur, as suggested by Gun-

ther. 1am inclined to think it may have been a young P. flavwenter,

Gunther, which I believe occurs near Calcutta, though no example is

in the museum.

* P. puaviventer, Gunther. Lower Bengal.

* P. Smirg, Gunther, esses

PLATYSTERNUM, Gray.

27. P. MEGACEPHALUM, Gray.

a. stuffed young Martaban. Major Berdmore.

(bad state.)

CHELYDRA, ScHweIceEr.

28, C. Serpentina, L.

a. shell only. North Carolina. Rev. J. Fitzgerald.

KINOSTERNUM Serrx.

99, K. oporatum, Daud.

a, b. c. young, in spirits North Carolina. Rev. J. Fitzgerald.

(bad state. )

Catalogue of Reptiles, | 15

FAMILY TRIONYCID&.

EMYDA, Gray.

30. E. aranosa, Schoepff.

a. b, stuffed adults, Calcutta. K. Blyth, Esq.

ce. young stuffed. Ditto. Ditto.

d. young in spirits. «oo (Ditto. Ditto.

31. E. Crytonensis, Gray.

a. head in spirits, Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

TRIONYX, Georrroy,

32. T. Ganaerticus, Cuv.

a. shell of adult. Bhagulpur. W. Theobald.

Junior, Esq.

Finely granular, length 17 inches.

b. stuffed adult. Calcutta. EK. Blyth, Esq.

c. ditto, semi adult.

d. e. young stuffed. .

J. g. very young ditto.

h. five young, in spirit.

32a. T. Guntherii, Gray. Arakan.

CHITRA, Gray.

33. ©. Inpica, Gray.

a. young stuffed. Hooghly.

1 bony shield 7 inches.

_ FAMILY CHELONID&.

SPHARGIS, Merrem.

» 34. S. corracna, L.

a. stuffed female, 75 inches. Tenasserim coast. Lt. Col. Tickell

For account of capture vide J. A. S., XXXT., page 367.

CARETTA, Merrem.

mess. C. mBRIcaTA, Schweigg. Bay of Bengal.

4 Affords the tortoise shell of commerce,

‘

a. b. c. d. stuffed.

e. young ditto.

CAOUANA, Garay.

-- (Costal plates ten.)

| 386. ©. oxrvacna, Eschs. — Bay of Bengal.

Bi “ The logger head.”

C a. stuffed, 26.5 inches.

This specimen has three additional costals, or thirteen in all,

16 Catalogue of Reptiles.

}. shell of adult. Has one additional costal.

c. young stuffed, strongly keeled.

This is the common turtle along the east coast of the Bay. Few

Huropeans have any idea but that it is the true edible turtle, and in

their innocence glory in soup made from it. It is carnivorous, and its

flesh so indifferent that even the Burmese do not greatly care for it.

The flesh of Sphargis, according to Tickell, is equally coarse.

CHELONIA, Fiemrine,

(Costal plates erght.)

37. OC. virgata, Schweigg. Bay of Bengal.

a. stuffed, 50.5 inches.

b. semi-adult ditto.

c. young ditto.

d. upper shell only.

This is the true edible turtle. It is herbivorous, and may be dis-

tinguished from the logger-head by having only thirteen plates on the

back, whilst the logger-head has fifteen, or one pair more of costals.

Calcutta specimens are mostly brought from the straits.

ORDER, EMYDOSAURL .

FAMILY CROCODILID A.

CROCODILUS, Cuvier.

(a, Nuchal shields, small.)

1. ©. porosus, Schneid.

CO. biporcatus, Cuv.

a, stuffed adult. Head, 16.5. Body, 43.8

Tail, 63.0 = 123.3 inches. Forehead, 4.4 broad.

Cervical scutes, 5.7 across. Two small nuchal shields.

b. smaller stuffed.

b. b. smaller ditto. Four small nuchal shields.

Head, 7.5. Body, 16.6. Tail, Ob 2. == 40S:

young stuffed. Malacca. Mr. Foster.

_ young in spirit. Penang.

ditto ditto.

- skull of adult, 23 inches.

_ ditto young, 14 inches, (injured.)

Dorsal scutes in eight rows.

ce SO AS

Catalogue of Reptiles. 17

This apr which abounds in Burmah, appears to be less common

in Bengal than C. palustris.

(6, Nuchal shields, large.)

2. C. TRIGonops, Gray.

C. palustris, Less. apud Gunther.

C. bombifrons, Gray apud Blyth.

a. half grown animal, stuffed.

Head, 10.0. Body, 28.4. Tail 38.4 = 76.8.

Central nuchal shields smaller than the others, and a little

advanced.

Forehead, 3 inches. Cervical scutes 5 inches atross.

Dorsal scutes in six rows.

d. skull of half grown Western India. _.......

animal, 12.5 inches.

¢e. skull smaller, 9.5 inches. ...,., totes

3. A. C. vutearis, Cuv.

7 stuffed. Nile. D. 0. Money, Esq.

‘ : Head, 17.40. Body, 45.00. Tail, 55.60 = 118.00

* Inches.

Forehead, 3.50. Across cervical scutes, 7.25.

_ Outer cervical scutes smaller than the others, and placed a little

forward. This species differs from the closely allied C. palustris in the

“narrower shape of the head, and in having eight rows of dorsal scutes

towards the lumbar region; at least this specimen has. I infer that

a trace of any note of its history, locality or donor, which information

‘ Ppiying from the depths of their own moral consciousness! In fact,

| disorder, dilapidation and neglect have for years struggled for mastery

e 3. (C. patustris, Less.

| C. bombifrons, Gray.

Not C. bombifrons, Gray apud Blyth, see ante No. 2.

C. bombifrons, Gray apud Hualey, Proc. Lin. Soc., 1859.

C. bombifrons, Gray apud Gunther.

C. trigonops, Gray apud Gunther, vide No. 2.

a, stuffed adult.

Dorsal scutes, in six rows strongly keeled. Head, 16.50,

Body, 45.50. Tail, 61.20 = 123.20. Forehead, 4.4,

cervical scutes, 8 inches across.

18 Catalogue of Reptites.

e. young stuffed.

e. ditto ditto. Java. Batavian Society.

f. g. ditto, in spirit.

h. skeleton of adult female.

Flead, 26; Body, 72; Mutlah. A. Sturmer and

Tail 95 = 195 inches H. B. Farr, Esq.

j. skull of very young

animal. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

4 inches, premaxillary

suture very direct, may

belong to trigonops (?).

1. very large skull, 29 inches. .-.... (teers ‘

m.n. 0. 00. skulls of adults. — .-.-+ ao!

on. no. skulls of half grown —.-eeee

animals, (imperfect.)

The synonymy of our Indian crocodiles is very confused, but the

specimens: in the Museum of the Asiatic Soceity clearly illustrate the

three species found in the country.

Firstly, of Crocodilus porosus, there are 4 stuffed specimens, 2 in

spirit and two skulls. From this poverty of specimens, I should argue

that this species is not common in Lower Bengal. It, however,

abounds in Pegu and is “the crocodile” of that Province. It is a well

marked species, which cannot be well confounded with ,either of the

others.

Secondly, of Orocodilus trigonops, the Society possesses one stuffed

specimen (as I believe it to be) and two skulls, one skull from Western

Tndia, the other spolia without record. Of this species I also possess

a skull of an animal shot by myself in the Nerbudda, of which most

contrasting by its smoothness with the pitted surface of the face. Them

style of pitting differs moreover from skull of C. palustris in being

more regular, the pits more circular than elongata, and not given to”

anastomosing so much as in C. palustris. It is an extremely. well

marked species, but is not alluded to by Prof. Huxley in his instruc .

tive paper on these saurians in Proc. Lin. Soc., February, 1859, from

the fact, as 1 presume, of the British Museum containing only two

young stuffed specimens, which would not afford proper data for

~emark. It would seem to be a small species: my specimen, which

seemed nearly adult, was not more than eight feet, if I recollect

rightly. It was shot too under peculiar circumstances. Dropping”

down the Nerbudda in a canoe, I saw what I took for a stone lying im |

a hole in the steep bank of the river. The hole not being more than 2—

‘

Catalogue of Reptiles. 91

feet across, I never believed it contained a crocodile, as my boatmen

assured me was the case. However I fired anda lashing of water was

heard in the hole. What I aimed at was still visible, so I fired again,

seemingly without effect, but on going up, I hauled out a dead crocodile

with two balls through the brain. This was C. trigonops, and I am

not aware that animals of the larger species excavate holes for them-

selves, as this one does. It may very likely be the “ small crocodile”

said to inhabit streams on the table land of Rhotas Ghur.

Thirdly, of Crocodilus palustris, Lesson, the Museum possesses a splen-

did suite of specimens; 3 stuffed specimens, 4 in spirit, a fine skeleton

_and8 skulls. It is emphatically “ the crocodile” of Lower Bengal. I have

procured one specimen at Thaiect-mio, but it is rare in Lower Pegu. I

-See no reason for doubting the conclusion of Prof. Huxley that ‘C.

bombifrons, Gray, is a synonym of this species, one of the types having

been received from the Asiatic Society's Museum, which is rich in (.

palustris, and the trivial name bombifrons is very applicable, especially

to the attult animal. Some few heads are rather narrower than others,

probably females, but cannot well be confounded with C. porosus, even

_ were no other parts than the skulls preserved. If I am correct in

referring the above specimens to C. trigonops, it is utterly past my

comprehension how Gunther has referred (. trigonops as a Synonym

of C. palustris. C. porosus is nearer C. palustris than C. trigonops to

either. JI am not quite clear, however, if the stuffed specimen 2a belongs

to the species. The premaxillary suture appears to be straight, but

still I am not certain of my reference.

| I subjoin some measurement of a series of skulls.

_ F. Ditto, largest skull, (37.) Bengal.

A. C. porosus (1 fof Catalogue,) of same breadth nearly across the

«+ condyles as B.

_ B. C. trigonops from Nerbudda, RB. Central India.

C. C. palustris of the same’breadth, across condyles as B

OD. C. palustris, Trawadi. Thaiet-mio, 12 feet, (in my possession),

E. Ditto ditto, (3h.) Bengal,

”

C. palustris.

C. porosus. C. trigoneps, ——————___~_________

; Aa B. ae Sa B. OF.

Nape to opposite 2nd notch, 11.50 11.00 11.75 12.40 14.10 14.75

ape to fore margin of nasal

Meer, 0... 2... 20.75 16:80. 20:00 21.60 29.50 25 75

~ Nape to alveolusof Isttooth, 23.25 19.10 2250 24.60 2620 96.00

_ Breadth across condyles, ...12.75 12.25 12.25 13.25 16.30 18.00

_ From Ist notch to Ist notch

_ along’ the alveoli, ...... 11.75 9.95 11.50 11.75 13.50 16.00

“Breadth at 3rd tooth, round |

Mepene curvature, ............895 7.10 (8.50 9.10 11.25 1230

meritto 9 tooth, ...\....... .. 10.50 10.30: .10.75 11.60 14.30 16 25

Ditto 36 tooth, ............12.50 13.25 13.75 14.25 16.25 17.60

“7

20 Catalogue of Reptiles.

FAMILY GHARIALID &.

GHARIALIS, Gzorrroy.

4. G. GANGETICA, Geoffr.

a. adult stuffed. Gea ees

b. c. young ditto. «eadéeiueas! cit en

d. skin of adult in a bad state. ...... eS

e. f, very young, in spirit. eet a Rr

g. hk: young stuffed, || 0), 14) /vedene: 1 0S Rees :

7. skull of adult, 29.75 inches. ...... Les avs

4. skull of adult, 79-50 ditto... i. <2, ' Pear

k. l. skulls of young animals, in

bad State. ok Pine alien einents

I concur with Col. Cautley’s remarks in As. Res. XIX, page 32, on

the folly of perpetuating a misnomer. “The present mode of writing

this word “Gavial” appears to have originated in a mis-reading of the

manuscript of some naturalist, the r and v being very similar in form.

As “ Gharidl’” is the correct native name, there seems no reason for

perpetuating the misnomer.”

SECT. B. SQUAMATA. SCALED REPTILES.

ORDER SAURIA.

FAMILY VARANID 2.

PSAMMOSAURUS, Firziness.

5. P. scryeus, Merr.

a. adult stuffed, Nubia. Dr. Ruppel.

body 14 tail 18 = 32 in.

b. young, in spirit. Salt Range. W. Theobald, Junr.

VARANUS, Merrem.

6. V. FLAVESCENS, Gray. ~4

a, b. adults stuffed. Lower Bengal.

Body 16.00, tail 19 = 35.

c. half grown ditto. outs

d. ditto ditto. ene A. C. Carlyle, Esq.

e. ditto yellow spotted. » 3

f. ditto, in spirit.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 21

7. V. pracana, L.

a. adult stuffed.

Lower Bengal.

Body 10, tail 13 = 23 in.

b. ditto.

‘ ¢, d. young stuffed.

f. adult in spirit.

g. half grown ditto.

h, many half grown and

young.

Mirzapur. “Major Wroughton.

Allahabad and Agra. Dr. Stewart.

Aitete Major Wroughton.

CO eee, Se ys |

8. V. nesuLosus, Dum. et Bib.

a, adult stuffed.

Body 23, tail 3154 in. ...... UD,

b. c. two-thirds grown,

d, adult, in spirit.

eereee

HYDROSAURUS, Waater,

9. H. satvator, Laur.

HT. giganteus, Gray ?

a. adult stuffed.

Body 32.5, tail 48.5 = 81 inches.

Very large specimen from probably Lower Bengal.

b. adult. Andamans. Lieut.-Col. Tytler,

Body 24, tail 35 = 59 inches.

Worwarded’ as anew species. ...... = gu .ane

c. d, half grown stuffed.

e. young stuffed, Malacca. Rey. W. E. Linstedt.

J. young in spirit. BON dole rat be. hue hs acwac

g- half grown in spirit. ager WR il) APR enctis

TEL. Arby nl Sieihenigy oma 6 is) Oh Ieeeee

10 H. varius, Shaw.

a, adult stuffed. Australia. Melbourne Institute.

Body 23, tail 35 = 58 in,

11. H. ocetzarrvs, Blyth.

a. stuffed specimen.

Australia. Dr. J, MacClelland.

Body 14.5, tail 19.5 = 34 inches.

Tn bad state,

22 Catalogue of Reptiles.

FAMILY LACERTID A.

TACHYDROMUS, Davpin.

12. TT. sexuinzatus, Daud.

a. b. two specimens in

spirit. Pegu. A. Grote, Esq.

Martaban. Major Berdmore.

The specimen, formerly presented by myself from Mergui, is no

longer in the Museum, (J. A. 5. KXEV 3:71)

TROPIDOSAURA, Bor.

13. TT. Jerpont, Blyth.

Ophiops Jerdoni, Blyth, (J. A. 8., XXIL., p. 653.)

a. type specimen in spirit. Mhow. Dr, Jerdon.

Mr. Blyth’s description is so meagre and inaccurate that I here give

my own. It will be seen that this interesting lizard is not an Ophiops,

but belongs rather to Tropidosaura of which one species is known from

Java. Nostrils in the ridge of the face, lateral or subsuperior, perfora-

ted in a moderate nasal, followed by two small postnasals, one above

the other, both together hardly equalling the nasal. Loreals two, the

second very large, and separated by some small scales from the eye.

Seven upper labials, four first large; fifth largest, under the orbit,

sixth and seventh small. Lower labials seven, small band-like. Lower

rostral large, and four pairs of very large chin shields. Scales of

back lanceolate, acutely keeled; in twenty-four rows; (keeled in 22.)

Scales of belly smooth, broadly hexagonal, in six rows. The supra

abdominal row of scales smooth, larger than those above them. Toes ~

5—5 long, slender, curved, unequal, serrated above and below. Sides

roughened with keeled scales. Scales in front of limbs large, behind

smailer, all sharply keeled. Tympanum distinct, eyelids none. Hye-

brows keeled. Superciliaries large, divided in two. Vertical and

occipitals normal. Post occipitals squarely truncate behind. Nasals —

contiguous. Supernasal and frontals about equal to each other. All ©

the head shields longitudinally plicated. Ear surrounded with granular —

scales. Femoral pores twenty, interrupted on the pubes, 10 in each

thigh in a gently curved line. Pores pierced in the posterior angle of —

the scales.. One very large. quadrangular preanal. Tail surrounded

by equal verticiliate keeled scales.

The present colour of the specimen is brownish (bronze, Blyth) with —

four ill-defined rows of dark spots down the back. A well defined pale —

streak separating the outer rows. A pale median streak also indicated. —

FAMILY ZONURID A.

PSEUDOPUS, Merrem. .

14. P. aractuis, Gray. | ce

Ophiseps tessalatus, Blyth,

J. A.S., XXIL, p. 655. Rangoon, Purchased.

a, b. Type specimens, in spirit, , :

Catalogue of Reptiles. 23

FAMILY GYMNOPHTHALMID J.

: ABLEPHARUS, Cocrzav.

15. <A. Pannonicus, Licht.

a. in spirit. Eastern Europe. Hungarian

Museum.

FAMILY SCINCID A.

a. scales keeled.

TROPIDOPHORUS, Dume’rit er Bisron.

16. T. Berpmorett, Blyth.

Aspris Berdmoreii, Blyth,

J. A.8., XXIT., p. 650.

a. b. c. specimens in spirit. Mergni. Major Berdmore.

CYCLODUS, Wacater.

17. C. Giaas, Bodd.

a. b. c. stuffed adults. Van Dieman’s Purchased.

land.

d. half grown ditto. Ditto. Ditto,

TRACHYDOSAURUS, Gray.

his.. T ruaosa, Gray.

a. b. stuffed adults. Western Australia. Purchased.

Labelled, Hgenia.

TILIQUA, Gray.

19. TT. rurescens, Shaw.

: Scincus muliifasciatus, Kuhl apud Gunther.

T. trivittata, apud Gunther.

a. very large specimen Andamans. Lieut.-Colonel

in spirit, 18 inches. eels very faint. Tytler,

Scincus Tyilerii, Tytler MSS.

ESMany SPCCIMENSIN BPLTIG,yapapceep- pte we ee

ce. nearly adult ditto. India. Dr. Jerdon.

The coloration of this very common lizard is somewhat variable. During

life, the colour of the back is some shade of rich olive brown or bronze with

the sides darker, and a pale stripe running from over the eye’ down each side

of the back, which is more or less black dotted. Beneath greyish or yellow-

ish. Sides seasonally deeply suffused with red. Unfortunately the specimens

‘in the Museum, which should possess an unrivalled series of this species, are

nearly all jumbled into one bottle with no record of either donors or localities,

so that it is impossible to discriminate local varieties.

The red spotted variety, which Gunther records as found on the east side of

the Bay of Bengal is, 1 imagine, a merely seasonal garb. Cantor describes:

24 Catalogue of Reptiles.

this species as laying 6 to 12 eggs- This I believe to be a mistake, as I

have taken perfectly formed embryos from it, and believe it to be, therefore,

viviparous. Cantor, however, unites as a synonym of this species T. multi-

carinata, Kuhl, which species is oviparous. It is a smaller species and

evidently “the young with 6 to 7 keels” of Cantot’s description in J. A. 8.,

XVI. p. 652.

20. T.monricoza, Gunth.

a. three specimens in spirit. ..+.+. adeeee

The scales are four keeled, but, though Gunther only describes two keels,

I think it must be this species. No label is attached, and the specimens ex-

hibit no markings, being a uniform plumbous brown above, pale below.

T monticola is from Sikkim, and probably replaces T. rufescens of the

plains.

21. TT. rervirtata, Gray. |

T. rufescens, Shaw apud Gunther.

a. mutilated specimen. Jalnat. Dr. Jerdon.

A handsome species, with three broad white bands down the back; scales

five keeled.

92. T. quinqueraniatoes, Licht.

a. in bad state. Kgypt. C. J. Evans, Esq.

23, 'T. munricartnata, Kuhl.

Euprepes macularvus, Blyth.

T. rufescens, Shaw apud Gunther.

a. four specimens. Rungpore (2) wees

These specimens have no label, but are, I think, the same as a species I

have always considered as 7. multicarinata, Kuhl, from Birma. My Bir-

mese specimens are a littlelarger than the Museum ones, and in a better

state also. A female contained 3 eggs and measured, body 3.2, tail 4.2 = 7.4.

Colour (olive) pale bronze above, black spotted, spots long and streaky. A

broad black lateral band, white margined above. Underneath white. Scales

distinctly 7 carinate. Jerdon (J. A. S., XXII., 479) mentions a small speci-

men in the museum, of Z', multicarinata, Kuhl, but whether or no he refers

to one of the above specimens I know not. Like so many other specimens

it has probably evaporated long ago. T. multicarinata differs from T. rafes-

cens most essentially in being oviparous, (vide T. rufescens).

*T, oLIvacEus, Gray. Malayan Peninsula.

EUPREPIS, Wacter.

*E. TRILINEATA, Gray. Carnatic.

MABOUIA, Firzinerr.

24. M. quapriuineata, Blyth, J. A. S., XXIL., 652.

+ (Labelled, Plestvodon quinquelineatum, L.

North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.)

a. fine specimen. Hong Kong. J.C. Bowring, Esq. —

+ The labels of specimens are all in Mr. Blyth’s handwriting.

Catalogue of Reptiles, 25

The two dorsal white lines pass through the second row of scales and are

nearly half a scale broad, and very conspicuous. The lateral pale lines are

almost obsolete. The scales are smooth, but five or more fine hair-like lines

are visible on them, ending in dark punctate dots on the hinder margin.

The sub-caudals:are broad, one-rowed, and have twelve white fine lines,

These lines are not probably visible in the living animal.

25. M. Curyensis, Gray. |

Plestiodon quinquelineatum, L. apud Blyth’s MSS. label.

a, two young specimens, China. J. C. Bowring, Esq.

b. scales smooth.

HINULIA, Gray.

26. H. macunara, Blyth.

Lnssonota maculata, Blyth, J. A. §., XXII, 653.

Lnssonota Harriette, Tytler MSS.

Lissonota Tytlerii, Tytler MSS.

The type specimen of Mr. Blyth’s description is no longer in the museum.

Eheu fugaces !

a. many specimens. Martaban. Major Berdmore.

b. two specimens. Andamans. Lieut.-Col. Tytler.

Limbs rather small.. Thumb short; fourth finger very long. Nostrils

lateral, in the centre of a somewhat oblique rhomboidal nasal shield. Su-

_ pranasals none. Frontinasal large, broader than long, forming a suture in

front with the rostral, which is truncated behind, but reaches well back on

_ the surface of the head. Behind, it forms a suture with the vertical and

_the two frontiparietals. Superciliaries four, sub-equal, very convex, tumid,

_ Nearly approximating on the crown.

_ The Martaban specimens do not quite correspond with the type as to

_ coloration. Above, rich pale bronze brown, irregularly dark spotted. Sides

blackish, white dotted. The dark colour commencing as a narrow band

~ across the upper rostral, gradually widening on the sides and continued to

_ the extremity of the tail. On the tail, however, though distinct, it is rather

_ pale, and bounded above and below with a waved or scalloped margin, very

“Characteristic, Beneath, uniform white or greenish white. It abounds

_ thro

ughout Pegu and is an extremely active species inhabiting the forests.

*H. Tapropanensis, Kelaart. Ceylon.

; *H. Dussumieri, Gray. Malabar.

PLESTIODON, Domz’rm zr Brsron.

27. P. scutarus, n. s.

_ Body elongate, stout, subcylindrical. Tail elongate, cylindrical. Limbs

small, stout. ‘Toes moderate, regular, scarcely subequal, with long nails.

Head conical and rather shelving. Nostrils large, central, in a single nasal

plate. Supernasals one pair, forming a suture. Prefrontal separated from

Vertical by the broad suture of a largish pair of frontals. Vertical large, 5

sided, truncated before, pointed behind. Loreals 3, third largest. Super:

ciliaries 7, Rostral large. Upper labials, regular 8; 6th under orbit : 6th, 7th,

26 Oatalogue of Reptiles.

8th largish. Lower eyelid scaled, with a transverse row of large plates. Ears

largish, patulous, rhombic, with two projecting scales in front. Tympanum

sunken. Lower rostral followed by two transverse gular scales, and 3 pairs

of chin shields. Scales of body moderate, subequal, smooth. Back covered

with a single row of transverse scales, from a little behind the shoulder to

the loins. At base of tail two rows, soon followed by asingle row of sub-

caudal scales. Preanal scales two, large. Two central rows of ventral

scales, appreciably larger. Scales in 23 rows round the body. |

Colour pale brown (in_ spirits). A dark band from snout to loins, down

the centre of the back and along either side. Lateral stripes white dotted;

the central one narrower than the row of vertebral scales. ‘Tail mottled,

dark markings somewhat annularly disposed.

Body 4.0, tail 5.75 = 9.75.

Elbow to toe 0.50. Knee to toe 0.70.

a. two adults in spirits.

No record of habitat or donor.

98, P. zavicups, D. et B.

a. adult in spirit. North Carolina. Rev.J. Fitzgerald. —

MOCOA, Gray.

29. M. rormosa, Blyth, J. A. S., XXII, 651.

M. pulcher, Blyth, musewm label.

a, one large specimen,type Mirzapore. Major Wrough- |

of Blyth’s description. ton. |

6. c. smaller. Wuzeerabad. L.C.Stewart,Esq. —

Dr. Gunther is quite correct in surmising that this species has a trans- {

parent lower eyelid and no supranasal, and itis, therefore, correctly referred

to Mocoa. ‘

30. M. SrsrMEnsis, Blyth.

Eumeces Indicus, Gray, apud Gunther in part. |

a. five specimens. Sikim. Major Sherwill,

W. Theobald,

Junior, Esq.

Dr. Gunther appears to have confounded two species under this name, as”

of many authentic Himalayan specimens none exceed four and a half inches,

though Dr. Gunther gives the length as 8 to 10 inches, probably from his

hina speeimens erroneously identified. The limbs of the species are much

smaller than EZ. Indicus, Gray, apud Gunther. The fore limbs barely reach

beyond the gape, the hind a little more than halfway to the axilla. Nothing

but Dr. Gunther’s perverse determination to depreciate or ignore the labours

of naturalists in India, could have led him into uniting such dissimilar

species as this and ZL. Indicus. The size of this species, and the transparent —

lower eyelid of Mocoa were adequate warnings against such an error. ae

Catalogue of Reptiles. 27

31. M. siimezata, Gray.

a, b, adults. Nilghiris. Dr. Jerdon, W

Theobald, Ju-

nior, Esq.

The vent is shielded by two pairs of large preanals, and not as described by

Gunther,“—a pair.” The two centre shields are peculiarly claw-shaped,

pointed and incurved at the apex, towards each other.

* M. Himalayana, Gthr. Kashmir, Simla.

* M. Schlegelii, Gthr. Sikim.

RISTELLA, Gray.

* R. Rorkt, Gray. North India.

This species is not mentioned by Gunther, but is included in Brit. Mus.

Cat., Lizards, p. 85. .

PODOPHIS, Weremany,

*P, Cuatcipzs, L. Pinang.

RIOPA, Gray,

32, KR. Ausopunctata, Gray.

a. many specimens. Lower Bengal. E. Blyth, Esq.

This bottle, though labelled “ Lower Bengal,” no doubt contains the spe-

cimens forwarded from all parts of India by various donors. .

33. KR, Harpwickt, Gray.

a. two adults in spirit. South India Dr. Jerdon |

«1 hie Seal eal er A Tae RE

7 > -

Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

b. young (?) Subathoo, Rey. J. CaveBrown.

* R, punctata, Gray, Malabar, Madras.

1. Dakhan.

HAGRIA, Gray.

* H, VOsMAERII, Gray. Bengal,

28 - Catalogue of Reptsles.

CHIAMELA, Gray.

* ©, ningaTa, Gray. India.

FAMILY ACONTIADID A.

ACONTIAS, Cuvier.

* A. Lavarpit, Kelaart. Colombo.

Light olive longitudinally, spotted with brown.

NESSIA, Gray.

* N. Burronu, Gray. Ambegammoa,

Kaduganava, Ceylon.

Tympanum hidden, limbs 4, toes 3—5.

*N. Monopactyta, Bell. India.

Opening of ear minute but distinct, limbs 4, toes none,

FAMILY SEPSID Ai.

SPENOCEPHALUS, Bryrs.

34. §. tRrpactyLus, Blyth.

a. '7 specimens in spirit. Afghanistan. Dr, A. Webb.

FAMILY GECKOTID A.

GECKO, Gray.

35, G. verus, Merr.

a. 8 adults and 4 young in spirit. |

b. adult and half grown, Andamans. Lieut.-Col. Tytler —

c. two fine adults ditto. Dacca. Mr. Frith.

This is about the most westerly limit of the species, which abounds all —

along the east coast of the Bay of Bengal. It has been captured near Jal-

cutta, but, probably, the specimens were introduced from ships from the east 4

coast or were the descendants of parents so introduced, as so noisy a reptile —

could not be indigenous to Lower Bengal without being well known.

d, several specimens. Assam, India House

Tenasserim, Museum,

e. stuffed specimen, (bad state.)

Catalogue of Reptiles. “29

36. G.sTENTorR, Cantor.

G. Verreauai, Tytler,

‘ a. 2 adult specimens Andamans. Lieut.-Col. Tytler,

in spirit.

Easily distinguished from G@. verus by its double row of subcaudals, and

coloration likewise. For an interesting account of the habits of the Gecko-

tide see Col. Tytler’s observations, J. A. S., XXXIII., 535, though I can-

not adopt my friend’s views in classification or nomenclature.

*G. monarchus, Dum. et Bib. Malayan Peninsula. (Ceylon ?)

PTYCHOZOON, Kuntz.

37. P. nomaLocepnatum, D. et B,

a EARS a Pegu. ~ Major Berdmore.

The specimen was taken from the mouth of a Chryspelea ornata, which

commonly feeds on Geckos.

HEMIDACTYLUS, Couvirr.

38. H. Cocramr, D. et B.

Boltalia sublevis, Gray, apud Gunther.

a. many specimens. Calcutta.

Very large female, Body 2.75, tail 1.75 = 4,50.

2 In males five (six) femoral pores in each thigh widely Separated by the

_ pubic region. Tail more or less verticillate, f 1

eebly spined. In the largest

specimen, which was a female, the tail was lanceolate, and very bulging at

the base. Back uniformly granular, with a few scattered larger fiattened

tubercles along the sides. The thumb has a minute claw. Neither Gray

_ hor Gunther give the number of femoral pores so distinctive of the species.

‘The largest museum specimen from Calcutt

ais only 4.50 inches. In the

_ Museum no specimens are recorded from any other locality.

39. H. Kenaarri, Theobald.

H. Coctet, D. et B. on label.

a. three specimens. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart,

Adult male. Body 2.50, tail 2.25 — 4.75,

b 28 to 34 femoral pores, interrupted in the pubic region.

_. Tail more or less verticillate and spined, sometimes simple, (normally, not

from reproduction.) Back uniformly granular, with a very few small flatten-

| ed tubercles on the shoulder and loins. This species differs from H. Jrenatus

| in the femoral pores not forming a continued line; in the scarcity of large

tubercles in the back ; in the thumb being of proportionate size (not very

small); and in size which is larger than in H. frenatus, Sch., as I believe it

to be from Birmah. This is the H, Coctei of Kelaart most probably men-

Hioned by Gunther,

30 Catalogue of Reptiles.

40. H. Lescuenavttu, D. et B.

a, four specimens. Nilghiri Hills. W. Theobald, Jr.,

Ksq. -

Adult male. Body 2.25, tail 2.50 = 4.76.

Femoral pores 20 to 25 in two lines separated in the pubic

region.

Back uniformly granular, with numerous scattered flat tubercles. Tail

verticillate, six spined.

41. H. macutarus, D. ct B.

H. Pieresit, Kelaart.

a. four specimens. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

Femoral pores 32 to 36, in a nearly continued line. The 12 central pores

somewhat better defined than the rest.

42. Many small specimens (?)

43. H.susuzvis, Gray.

Boltalia sublevis, Gray.

H. Coctei, D. et B., apud Gunther.

a. many specimens. Mergui, Capt. Berdmore, Dr. —

Ceylon. Kelaart.

b. large tail-less specimen.

I am not quite sure if a claw is always present on the thumb, but a small —

almost setiform claw is sometimes noticeable. Thumb small.

Femoral pores 30 or 33, in a continuous line not interrupted. Pores

obliquely pierced in the scales. Back minutely granular, with two lines of |

somewhat larger tubercles down the sides. .

44, H.rascratus, Gray (?)

a. a bleached specimen, tail injured.

Twenty rows of small ovate tubercles down the back. Tail slender,

rounded, faintly ringed, but tubercular.

PERIPIA, Gray.

45, BP. Canrorts, D. et B.

Hemidactylus Peronti and Platydactylus lugubris, Cantor apud

Gunther.

Gecko Harriette, Tytler MSS.

a, young, in spirit. Andamans. Lieut.-Col Tytler.

Back uniformly granular. Tail rounded above, flat below, granular above.

small scales below, with no large plates. Edges sharp, minutely denticulated.

Chin shields none, but about 12 or 15 scales longer than the very minute

scales of the throat. Olive brown with some scattered velvet black spots. —

Beneath white minutely brown dotted. Body 1.50, tail 1.25 ==2iee ee

* P, Peronii, Dum. et Bib. Birma.

a >

Catalogue of Reptiles, 31

NYCTERIDIUM, Gunruzr.

* N. puatyurus, Schneid.

eerees

DORYURA, Gray.

46. D. Brrpmorer, Blyth.

Lewurus Berdmorei, Blyth.

a, several specimens. Mergui. Capt. Berdmore.

PHELSUMA, Gray.

47. P. Ceprpranum, Peron,

a. two specimens. Mauritius, | W. Earl, Esq.

48. P. Anpamavyenss, Blyth.

a, one specimen, Andamans, Capt. Hodge.

GYMNODACTYLUS, Sprx.

49. G. Jerponu, Theobald.

a. b. two specimens.

a. Male. Back uniformly granular. Tail with a single row of large

subcaudal plates or scuta, with a few large scales along their edges. A

strong double fold on the throat. Scales of the belly small rhombic.

Along the sides two rows of distant erect spines, becoming obsolete on the

tail. Sides keeled. Pubic region covered with same scales as the belly.

No large prwanals. Femoral pores eight on each thigh; large, cup-shaped,

placed along the hinder edge of limb, bordered in front by rather largish

scales, and behind by the granular scales of the back. Length, head and

body 1.50, tail 1.50 = 3.00. Colour (in spirits) above, greenish gray mottled

with brown, beneath, greenish white. Nine upper and seven lower labials.

_ Nostrils close behind the rostral. Lower rostral large, just Separates a pair

of small triangular chin plates. Allied to G@. Mysoriensis by its spines,

. but not to be identified with any species described by Jerdon.

50. G.GxcKorpes, Spix. Punjab Salt Range, W. Theobald, Esq.

Preeanal pores twenty-five to thirty, in a nearly straight series and in a

continuous line.

oi...

a. small spécies in a bad state.

* G. triedrus, Gunther. Ceylon.

* G. pulchellus, Gray. Penang, Singapore,

* G. freenatus, Gunth. Ceylon.» #

* G. Kandianus, Kelaart. Ceylon.

* G. Mysoriensis, Jerdon. Bangalore.

* G. Indicus, Gray. Nilghiris.

* G. Malabaricus, Jerdon. Malabar.

* G. littoralis, Jerdon. Malabar.

* G. Deccanensis, Sykes. . Dakhan.

32 Catalogue of Reptiles.

NAULTINUS, Buyts.

52. N. varrecatus, Blyth. J. A. S. XXVIII, p. 279.

Gymnodactylus varvegatus,

Blyth apud Gunther, ——svveee ee aene "

a. type specimen. Tenasserim (?) W. Atkinson, Esq.

Fine male. Femoral pores thirty in an uninterrupted line. The six cen-

tral or przanal pores are strongly marked and conspicuous. On either side

of them’ the femoral pores are well defined, at the extremity of the line, but

become fainter, though present, towards the group of anal pores, which con-

sequently looks isolated, though really standing in one continuous line.

53. N. rascroratus, Blyth, XXIX., p. 114.

a. b. two young specimens.

in spirit. Subathoo.

These two species are, as Mr. Blyth says, closely allied, and I am far from

confident that they are not the same species, the difference between them

being sexual. WV. variegatus is founded on a fine male. WV. fasciolatus on

probably young females. We are not yet in a position to state, from these —

three specimens, the extent to which the colour marking may vary in indivi-

duals ; and the banded ornamentation of WV. fasciolatus is the most prominent

distinction between the two species. :

Naultinus is I think a well founded genus, connecting Gymnodactylus and —

Eublepharis. The toes are long and unequal, slender and spreading, as in

Gymnodactylus, differing therein from Eublepharis which has the toes subequal —

and stouter, whilst the ornamentation of the back, being a granular sur- —

face regularly shagreened with larger tubercles, and the ornate style of colo-

ration approximates to Eublepharis.

PUBLLULA, Buyru.

54. BP. rusia, Blyth.

a. several specimens. Andamans. Capt. Hodge.

EUBLEPHARIS,. Gray.

55. EH. Harpwickit.

a. b. young specimens. Chaibassa. . Capt. Haughton. —

56. EH. macunarivs, Blyth.

Oyrtodactylus macularius, Blyth. |

a, type specimen. Salt Range. W. Theobald.

HOMONOTA, Gray?

57. H.rascrata, Blyth.

a. in spirit, (very

bad state.) Central India (?) Dr. Jerdon..

. ae

Catalogue of Reptiles, 33

Limbs very slender. Toes 5—5 subequal, slightly dilated, with cleft

plates beneath. Terminal joints clawed. Head shaped as in Hemidactylus,

and covered with small smooth polygonal scales. Body covered with elongate,

rhomboidal scales, very faintly keeled. Belly covered with similar scales,

but much smaller and smooth. Upper and lower labials 8, band-like.

Eye close to the gape. Eyelids with a series of largish scales, and marked

above the eyebrow with a double line of most minute scales. Largest

scales in the semicircular space between the eyebrow, and with a marked,

but not prominent, orbital ridge.

Scales of limbs small, on inner side of fore arm, granular. Ear an oblique

slit; tympanum hidden; chin shields 3. Scales of throat, small, equal,

granular.

Gray with transverse white bands; beneath, pale blueish ashen. Very

bad state.

FAM. AGAMIDZ.

DRACO, Linyzvs,

58. D. riuerratus, Kuhl.

a. b, male and female, Sumatra, Penang(?) Messrs. Edwards

and Foster.

f I cannot verify this species with certainty, so I give a few notes of it.

, Scales of the back moderate, smooth, irregular and certainly not “ equal’’ as

described by Gray. (Brit. Mus. Cat. Lizards, page 234.) Seales of throat

_ granular: those of belly and tail sharply keeled. Tympanum naked, smaller

than the eye. Scales of gular pouch smaller and less keeled than those on

the side lappets. Wings ornamented below with broad, rather maculate or

_ broken up, dark brown bands. Above, this band-like arrangement of colour

is not seen, but only a spotted ornamentation. Seales of head unequal,

keeled. Some tubercular scales about the nape, but no orbital spines or

tubercles. A black spot between the orbits and a second on the nape. Nape

| crested in the male.

pomiee

59. D. ranioprervs, Gunther.

D. lineatus, D. et B. apud

Blyth,

___ Dorsal scales small, subequal, faintly keeled. An irregular line of keeled

% tubercular scales along each side. Tympanum naked, much smaller than

_ the eye. Nostrils directed upwards. No orbital tubercle. Scales of belly

t moderately keeled. Gular pouch partly covered with large smoothish

scales. Upper labials 6 to 8.

a. 2 males, 3 females, Tenasserim.. Major Berdmore.

60. D. vorans, L.

a. female, Singapore. C. T. Watkins.

Ksq.

_ Gunther says, the scales of the back are “ slightly keeled,” but I can detect

it in our specimen, in which respect it approaches D. cornutus, Gunther, but

differs from it in wanting a nuchal crest,

34 Catalogue of Reptiles.

61. D. macunatus, Gray.

a. 2 males and 1 female. Malacca and Majors ‘Tickell

Tenasserim. and Berdmore.

The scales of the back are not keeled as stated by Gray, but only a few of

them. The lateral row of keeled tubercles, scaled tympanum and spotted

coloration of the wings readily distinguish this species.

62. D. Dussumrent, D. et B.

a.b. males stuffed. == evar Madras Museum.

c. female ditto, tail injured.

It is to be regretted these specimens were not preserved in alcohol.

Such speciméns as these covered with varnish and dirt, fragile, shrunken, and

with their pouches stuffed to bursting with cotton wool are toys and carica-

tures, and next to useless to the student, for purposes of comparison.

SITANA, Cuvier.

63. §. Pontrcertana, Cuv.

a. two males, three

females, and young. Ceylon. E. L. Layard,

Esq. and Dr.

Kelaart.

b. c. adults stuffed. Coromandel Coast,

* §. minor, Gunth. Madras, Ceylon (?)

LYRIOCEPHALUS, Merrem.

64, L. Scurarvs.

a. three adults. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

b. one ditto. Ditto. Ditto. |

c. stuffed ditto. Ditto. BE. L. Layard, Esq.

d. ditto young, bad state. Ditto: Ditto. |

COPHOTIS, Peters.

* (©. Ceylonica, Pal. Ceylon.

CERATOPHORA, Gray.

* (@ Stoddartii, Gray. Ceylon.

* (, Tennentii, Gunth. Ditto.

* ©. Aspera, Gunth. Ditto.

OTOCRYPTIS, Wizeemann. ’

* Q. bivittata, Wieg. Ceylon. a

Catalogue of Reptiles. 35

DILOPHYRUS, Gray.

* D. grandis, Gray. Rangoon.

BRONCHOCELA, Kavp.

* B. jubata. Pondicherry ?

TIARIS, Dumerm er Brrron.

65. TT. suscristara, Blyth.

a. many specimens. Andamans. Capt. Hodge.

6. small individual. Ditto. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

Sent as Calotes Harriette, Tytler MSS. ?

c, Many specimens. Ditto. Ditto.

ORIOTIARIS, Gunruer.

* O, Elliotti, Gunth. Sikim.

ACANTHOSAURA, Gray.

66. <A. armara, Gray. Birma, Major Berdmore.

SALEA, Gray.

67. S. Jervonm, Gray.

Calotes viridis, Gray, apud Blyth. (Mus. Label.)

a, four specimens. Nilghiris. Dr. Jerdon.

Labelled from “South India,” but, according to Jerdon, found on the

Nilghiris only.

Readily distinguished from Calotes by the nasal plate being pentagonal,

resting on the first or first and second upper labials, with a row of large plates

behind it above the labials. In Calotes the nasal plate is oval and separated

_ from the labials by two rows of very narrow scales.

CALOTES, Cuvier.

68. C. verstcotor, Daud.

a. many specimens. Ceylon. G. L. Layard,

| Esq. and Dr.

: Kelaart.

; b. many specimens. _ Martaban. Major Berdmore.

c. adult stuffed, Scind. Sir A. Burnes.

d. ditto ditto.

' This species, as remarked by Gunther, seems to attain a larger size in

Ceylon than elsewhere. I cannot help, however, suspecting that specimens

from all parts of India have been huddledinto the two bottles labelled

“ Ceylon” and “ Martaban,” else, how comes it, there are no specimens in the

Museum of our commonest lizard from other parts P '

86 Catalogue of Reptiles.

Dr. Gunther states that, both “Jerdon and Blyth agree that these bright

changeable colors are peculiar to the male, during the breeding season, which

falls in the month of May and June,” but does not express himself as though.

fully prepared to admit the opinion of such competent observers. His words

are obscure,—‘ the ground colour is generally a light brownish olive, but the

lizard can change it to bright red, to black, and to a mixture of both.” These

words imply a voluntary effort on the part of the animal which I doubt, but

from observations I am inclined to believe rather that the colors vary during

the breeding season, (that is the bright seasonal red and black) under the

involuntary stimulus of fear, anger or passion. Gunther makes no mention

of the two black occipital specks, rarely absent in this species, or of the

white band running from the ear down each side, which so commonly

marks the females. In Bengal or Pegu, I have myself never remarked the

brilliant seasonal red of the male extending even to the loins. In Pegu I

have noticed this vivid coloration in early spring. My largest Burmese male

measured 3.75 + 11.00 = 14.75. Gunther gives 16 inches as the length

of Ceylon specimens, but such dimensions are rare on the continent.

69. ©. mysraczus, D. et B.

a. two adults. Ceylon. BE. L. Layard, Esq.

b. one adult. Mergui. W. Theobald, Esq., Jnr.

J can by no means understand Dr. Gunther’s description of C. mystaceus,

unless on the supposition that he has confounded two species, as his measure-

ments far exceed anything I ever saw, and are very disproportionate, 19

inches of tail to 5 inches of body in an old male. My largest male, (and the

species is common in Pegu where it is called “the Chameleon” by

Europeans) measures body 4.25, tail 6.00 = 10.25. My largest female,

3.90 & 7.90 = 11.80. Specimens occur a little longer, but these are fully

up to the average of adults. I will add a description of the color from life,

the tints being very variable. Color dark brown, often ruddy vinous, with a —

conspicuous white band from the nostrils to behind the shoulder; and some-

times to the base of the tail. Sometimes only a few dead white spots on

body or white or yellow blotches on the shoulders. Seasonably, (spring and

rains) the male assumes a gorgeous hue, the gular sack, and even the entire —

fore part of body, becoming a bright deep blue. In spirit, the blue fades to

green in a few hours, and eventually all the colours, save the rusty shoulder

blotches and white side streak, which is generally well defined, disappear.

70. ©. Ewa, Gray.’

a. four adults and 2 7a

young. Mergul. W. Theobald, |

Ksq., Junr.

b. several fine adults and

young. _ Martaban. Major Berdmore. —

71. GC. Orniomacuus, Merr. |

a. many specimens. Ceylon. E. L. Layard,

| : Esq. and Dre

Kelaart. |

b. adult. . Nicobars. Capt. Lewis.

c. adult var. S. India or

Ceylon (?)

Catalogue of Reptiles. 37

The specimen c. is remarkable for wanting the vertical bands of this species,

but in place of these it has a strongly defined white line down each side of

the spine, from the shoulder, to a short distance along the tail. The tail is

very long, as is the case with this species.

Body 2.6, tail 10.00 = 12.60. °

72. C nemoricona, Jerdon, J. A. 8., XXII, p. 471.

a. type specimen. (?) Koonoor Ghat, |

Nilghiris. Dr. Jerdon.

Closely allied to C. Gigas, also found at the same locality. Differs in its

green color, larger smooth scales, less developed crest, and small scales about

the shoulder fold. These characters united are more than mere sexual va-

riations, but the two species are nearly allied.

73. C. Giaas, Blyth, J. A. S. XXII, p. 648.

C. ophiomachus, Merr, J. A. S., XI., 870.

a. adult, in spirit. Mirzapore. Major Wroughton.

b, ditto. Nilghiri hills. W. Theobald, Jnr.,

Esq.

The original specimen mentioned in J. A. S., XI. is no longer extant.

74, (C. rricarinatus, Blyth, J.

A.8., XXIT., p. 650. Darjeeling. Major Sherwill,

W. Theobald,

C. maria, Gray apud Gunther. Junr., Esq.

There is no just ground for uniting these species.

C. platyceps, with which Mr. Blyth contrasts it, is no longer in the

Museum, having somehow disappeared, so that I cannot suggest, if it may

be the young of this species or no.

* €. platyceps, Blyth, Khasi hills.

J.A.5., XXI., p. 354.

* C. maria, Gray. ; Ditto.

* C. Rouxii, D. et B. India (?)

75. C. nrermasris, Peters.

C. Rouari, Du, et Bub. apud Blyth, J. A. 8., XXII, p. 647.

mee P17 = 15.0.

Head trigonal, shelving ; nostrils lateral, sub-apical, in after part of a small

' rather tumed ovate scale. Rostral broad, flattened, with 5 scales above it in

arow, the two outer rather larger, and in front of the nasal. Upper

labials. Eyelids covered with rows of granular scales. From over nasal to

behind orbit, a row of seven elongate overlapping scales. Nuchal and dorsal

crest moderate from nape to tail, higheston thenape. Above andalittle behind

the tympanum a group of 3 reverted spines. A fold on either side of threat.

Scales slightly keeled, rhombic, with minutely denticulate ends in slightly

descending order, subequal: belly scales rather large and strongly keeled

38 Catalogue of Reptiles.

and spined. Scales of head small, smooth, polygonal; those of limbs moderate.

Scales in the lumbar region very small,smoothish; at the base of tail very large ;

few lines as large as lumbar scales, very strongly keeled. Colour green, a black

band along the upper jaws involving the tympanum. A pale streak from

the tympanum to shoulder. Scales of throat large, keeled : no gular pouch.

Tail bulging at base, round, long, and tapering.

BRACHYSAURA, Buyru.

B. orvata, B. J. A.S8.1856, p. 448. Type no larger in Museum.

CHARASIA.

76. CO. poRsALts. |

a. 8 specimens. Nilghiris, Koonoor. W. Theobald, Junr.,

Esq.

LAUDAKIA.

77, L. rusercunata, Gray.

L. melanura, Blyth.

Stellio Indicus, B. apud Gunth. | |

a. young female in spirit. Simla. W. Theobald, Junr.,

Esq. ;

STELLIO.

78. §. Invrcus, Blyth.

S Cyanogaster, Rupp. ?

a. adult. Mirzapore. Major Wroughton.

b. half grown (bifid tail.) Agra. F. L. Stewart, Esq. —

c. ditto. Kashmir. W. Theobald, Junr., |

Esq. j

The two species (L. tuberculata and 8. Indicus) are very closely allied. Un- 1

fortunately the specimens are not sufficiently numerous for a full comparison. —

The most obvious distinction seems to be in the scales of the back, which in

L. tuberculata, are larger, with the keels forming distinct longitudinal lines. —

The sole specimen is a female, and the character is probably more decided —

in males: in the museum specimen, it is more conspicuous than in larger

specimens of Séellio. In S. Indicus too the sides are armed with spiny

scales, and the coloring seems more varied.

AGAMA. ‘:

79. <A. aariis, Oliv. Punjab W. Theobald, Junr.,

Salt Range. Esq. F

80. A. RupERATA, Oliv.

a. young specimen, Somali land. Lieutenant Speke. a

Catalogue of Reptiles, 39

MOLOCH, Gray,

81. M.orripus, Gray.

a. 6b. adult and young

in spirits. W. Australia. Dr. J. McClelland.

This species may pertain to the next family.

FAM. UROMASTICID&.

The genera Uromastiz, Liolepis and Phrynocephalus, form a very natural

Family quite distinct from the Agamide amongst which Gunther and other sys-

tematists have classed them. They are all ground lizards, burrowing in sandy

soils, of very gentle and placid disposition and herbivorous. The larger

species ave esteemed for food, and for their presumed invigorating properties.

They are of social habits, usually associating in small communities; their

burrows being often congregated together, like those of rabbits. Phrynocepha-

lus is strictly monogamous. |

Uromastie Hardwickii, as noted by myself in the Punjab, never goes from

_ its burrow till the sun is well up, and grazing near the mouth for some hours,

retreats again during the excessive heat. In the evening they re-appear,

”

and finally retire as the dusk comes on, or earlier, if it is chilly. They seem

sensitive to climatic changes and carefully close their burrows with sand, so

that they escape notice unless searched for. Phrynocephalus and Liolepis

both do the same, and an open burrow will generally be found untenanted.

Uromastix shows no wish to bite when taken in the hand, and for all its

claws and spines is a very Quaker among lizards. Phirynocephalus is equally

gentle, and Liolepis also, I believe.

UROMASTIX, Domerm er Brsron.

82. U. Harpwickn, Gray.

a. Superb specimen Upper Provinces. Major Wroughton.

in spirit.

b. two specimens. Agra. C. L. Stewart, Esq.

c. stuffed species. Sind. Sir A. Burnes.

LIOLEPIS, Cuvinr.

83. L. Reevesn, Gray.

a. large specimen. Arakan. Col. Phayre.

6. three half grown specimen.Martaban. Major Berdmore,

c, six smaller, Ditto. Ditto,

40 Catalogue of Reptiles.

PHRYNOCEPHALUS, Kaur.

84. P. cauprvoivutus, Pall. |

P. Tickelii, Gunther not Gray.

P. Theobaldi, Blyth. ;

a. 2 males, a female and a

foetus. Shores of Lake

Chomoriri. W. Theobald, Jnr.,

Esq.

T should not describe the tail as depressed, except at its base, but there is

no doubt it is the P. caudivolvulus of Pallas. The black belly and tail tip

are characteristic of the male. The female is smaller and dull coloured, and

produces two or three young. They are of monogamous habits, and the

pair occupy a burrow, a few inches deep in the sandy soil, the opening of

which is often concealed by a stone or tuft.

FAM. CHAMAILEONID A.

CHAM ALEO.

85. C. Zeyuanicus, Laur.

a. female in spirit with eggs.

a fine specimen. Midnapore. Major Wroughton.

Without removing this specimen from the bottle, it is clear _

that it contains not less than 30 to 35 eggs, though Gun-

ther asserts that they lay only 10 or 12.

b. bad state.

86. (. verrucosus, Blyth, (not Cuv.,) J. A. S., XXIL., 640.

a. fine specimen in spirit. ——...... Old collection.

Closely allied to C. dilepis, Leach.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 4]

ORDER OPHIDIA.

First SuB-orDEr.

SERPENTES.—COLUBRINI INNOCUL.

FAMILY TYPHLOPID A.

TYPHLINA, Wacatezr.

T. tryeata, Dum. et Bib. Pinang.

TYPHLOPS, Doumerm er Brieron.

T. ni@ro-atsus. Dum. et Bib. Pinang.

Back blackish, belly yellow. Colors well defined.

T. worsrigtpu, Gray.

Argyrophis bicolor, Gray.

a. b. Typhlops nigro-albus, Dum. et Bib. |

c. Argyrophis Diardit, Dum. et Bib. apud Blyth.

These specimens appear to me to belong rather to 7. Horsfieldii

than toT'. nigro-albus, as I cannot satisfactorily distinguish, with a

lens, any suture above the nostril, and the coloration too of the back

and belly is much blended. It is, however, difficult to distinguish

the sutures of specimens long preserved in spirit. a has a conspicuous

pit below the nostril, as in T. bothriorhynchus, but no trace of the small

anterior pit described by Giinther.

T. BoTHRionuyNouvs, Giinther. Pinang.

A groove below the nostril in the suture between the nasal and

ronto-nasal, and a smaller one between the rostral and nasal.

T. strio.atus, Peters. Bengal.

T. praminus, Daud.

a. Many specimens. Bengal, Assam, Sylhet.

T. TEenuis, Gunther.

Argyrophis Braminus Daud, apud Blyth.

a. b. c. three specimens. Bengal.

These would seem to belong to J. tenwis, Giinther, but are much

more slender than his figure in the Cat. Brit. Ind. Reptiles pl. XVI.

jig. C. which was from probably a very old specimen. The largest

Specimens measure 7.5, circumference 0.30. .

42 Catalogue of Reptiles.

cea te ?

a. very slender specimen. No record.

Body, 13.00

Tail, 0.50

13.50 Circumference, 0.60.

Body uniform throughout, leaden grey, rather paler beneath, under

tail yellowish.

T. mirus, Jan. Ceylon.

Like 7’. Braminus, with yellow snout.

ONYCHOCEPHALUS, Dumerm xr Brsron.

©. acutus, Dum. et Bib. —

a. five specimens. Chaibassa. Major Haughton,

FAMILY UROPELTID&. |

RHINOPHIS, Hemprics.

. OXYRHYNCHUS, Schneid. Ceylon, (Kandy.)

R. punctatus, Muller. Ceylon.

R. eranicers, Pet (Philippinus.) Ceylon.

R. TREVELYANUS, Kelaart. Ceylon, (Kandy.)

R. saneurnevs, Beddome. Cherambady in the Wynaud.

R. siyrut, Kelaart.

a. nearly full grown. Kandy. Dr. Kelaart.

R. PULNEYENSIS, Beddome.

a. Three specimens |

(one injured). Kandy. Dr. Kelaart.

T have little doubt of the identification or locality; so these specimens ©

prove the occurrence of a Ceylonese species on the mainland, as might

have been predicated.

UROPELTIS, Cuviur.

U. aranvis, Kelaart. Ceylon. _ Adam’s Peak, Matura.

SILYBURA, Pzrzrs. :

S. macrouepis, Pet.

S. BepDomir, Ginth. Anamullay hills.

S. ocennata, Beddome, Walaghat, Nilghiris.

S. ELLIoTT1, Gray. | Madras.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 43

S. BIcATENATA, Giinth. Dakhan.

S. suorrrit, Beddome, Shevaray hills.

S. Brevis, Gimth. ~ Anamullay and Nilghiri hills.

PLECTRURUS, Doumerm ur Brsron.

P. perroterm, Dum. et Bib.

a. five specimens. Ootakamund. W. Theobald,

Very common under stones at “ Ooty.” Junior, Esq.

P. guntuert, Beddome. Walaghat.

MELANOPHIDIUM, Giyrn.

M. wynavupensz, Beddome. Wynaud. (not Wynand, as spelt

by Gunther.)

FAMILY TORTRICIDA.

CYLINDROPHIS, Waatrr.

C. macuratus, L.

a. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

C. RUFUS.

a, an adult.

FAMILY CALAMARID i.

CALAMARIA, Bom.

C. carenata, Blyth, Assam, W. Robinson, Esq.

J. A.S. XXIII. 287. |

The type specimen is no longer in the Museum.

C. quaprimacutata, Dum. et Bis. Rangoon.

; The species of this genus are mostly from the Indian Archipelago,

though I have noted one species in Pegu. The species described by

‘Mr Blyth, except perhaps C. catenata, all belong to other genera, but

will be noticed elsewhere. y

GEOPHIS, Wacter.

G. MicrocerHaLus Ginth. Nilghiris.

G. (PLarypreryx perrorrrs, Dum. et Bis. Nilghiris.)

44 Catalogue of Reptiles.

ASPIDURA, WacGtER.

A. BRAYoRRHOS, Boie.

a Kadriganam. Dr. Kelaart.

A. copir, Gunth.

A. TRACHYPROCTA, Cope.

HAPLOCERCUS, GuytTHer.

H. orvtonensis, Ginth.

FALCONERIA, gen. Nov.

Scales faintly keeled in seventeen rows. One anterior transverse

frontal rather small. ‘Two posterior frontals which enter the orbit.

Upper labials five. Pupil round.

F. BENGALENSIS, 0. S.

Head not very distinct from body, rather ovate and elongate, rather —

narrowed in front. Nostril almost dividing a small nasal (perhaps

two small nasals). Loreal one, small, squarish. Ante-ocular very

elongate. Upper labials five. The first very sinall, second and third

enter the orbit, fourth and fifth large, increasing in size regularly from

the first backwards. Anal bifid. Three undivided sub-caudals, the others

divided.

a. Type specimen. Parisnath. A. Grote, Esq.

This species approaches the Ceylonese genus Haplocercus, but differs |

too materially to be considered a second species, and I have therefore

formed a new genus for its reception, bearing the name of the late

eminent Paleontologist whose loss is still so fresh amongst us.

BLYTHIA, Gen. Nov.

Scales smooth in thirteen rows. Loreal none. Ante-ocular none,

both replaced by a very large posterior frontal. Pupil round, sub-

caudals bifid. 7

B. revicunata, Blyth.

Calamaria reticulata, Blyth, J. A. §., X XIE.

posterior very large. Vertical and superciliary moderate or

Posterior frontal forms a suture with the nasal, second and third upper

labials, the superciliary and vertical which has an obtuse angle im

front. Upper labials six. First very small; third and fourth enter the

orbit; sixth largest. g

Occipitals large; lower labials five; 1st moderate, 2nd and 3rd small,

Ath large, oth band-like, narrow. The first lower labials form a suture,

and are followed by a pair of very large chin shields which are again

followed by a pair of small ones, the suture falling in the centre ofa

the 4th lower labial. Anal bifid. Tail round, short. a

Catalogue of Reptiles. 45

a. b. type specimens. Assam. W. Robinson, Esq.

Color “shining dull black, brilliant and iridescent with white

specks on side.”

This species was originally described most imperfectly by Mr. Blyth.

(J. c.) but it differs so from Calamaria, that I am forced to refer it to a

new genus, bearing the name of my eminent friend,

GROTEA, amv. nov.

Scales smooth in seventeen rows. Loreal one, small. Frontals two,

transverse, one anterior, one posterior. Pupil round,

G. BicoLor, Blyth.

Culamaria bicolor, Blyth, J. A. S. XXTII, 289.

C. hypoleuca, Blyth.

Ablabes bicolor, Blyth, apud Giinther ?

Nostril pierced in the centre of a large nasal. Loreal small. Ros-

tral broad. Anterior frontal transverse, two-thirds as broad as ros-

tral. Posterior frontal transverse, broader than rostral. Ante-ocular

one, small. Postoculars two, small. Superciliaries small. Vertical five-

sided, broader than long, base in front, sides next to base only as long

as superciliaries. Occipitals large. Upper labials five. Third higher

than the rest, enters the orbit; fifth largest. Anal bifid. Hye small.

Colour “dusky plumbeous above, buffy white below, gradually

blending.”

It is quite impossible to retain this species asa Calamaria, and

I have accordingly separated it asa new genus, named after the

present indefatigable President of our Society. Giinther refers this

species to his Ablabes bicolor, but he describes the nostrils as between

“two small shields” which is not the case in our type. Giinther seems

_ to make “ Ablabes” the receptacle of forlorn species of Culamaride.

TRACHISCHIUM, Gunruer.

Scales smooth, in thirteen rows. Posterior frontals, united. Pupil

round.

__‘'T. vuscum, Blyth.

Calamaria fusca, Blyth, J. A. S. XXIII. 288.

Trachischium fusewm, Blyth, (Museum label.)

Calamaria (and trachischiwm) obscuro-striata, Blyth.

__ Anterior frontals minute. Posterior frontal sin gle, very large, larger

than vertical ; vertical rather small, pointed behind, truncate in front.

Superciliary large, one-third as large as vertical. Loreal small, elongate:

ante-ocular one, post-ocular one, rather larger: upper labials six. Ist

very small, 3rd and 4th enter the orbit, 6th largest. Anal bifid. ‘ Ivi-

descent brown-black, under parts particularly lustrous.” Obscurely

streaked also with pale lines, but these are now faded and obsolete.

46 | Catalogue of Reptiles.

a. Two adults and one young. Darjiling. W.T.Blanford, Esq.

b. Two specimens (one injured.) Rangoon. (?) Purchased.

I think the peculiarity of the single posterior frontal a good generic

mark of separation from both Ablabes and Calamaria, and adopt conse-

quently Ginther’s genus. (Brit. Mus. Cal. Colubrine Snakes, page, 30.)

FAMILY OLIGODONTID&.

OLIGODON, Bor.

O. suspunctatus, Dum. et Bib.

a. one adult, many young. Bengal, Assam, Malabar, Pinang.

O. susarisnus, Dum. et Bib. Anamallies.

O. sprtonotus, Ginth. Madras.

O. ELLIoTTI, Ginth. Ditto.

QO. sprnrpuNcTaATus, Jan. Calcutta.

Q. rascratus, Giinth. Dakhan.

O. sustiszatus, Dum. et Bib. Ceylon.

O. arrinis, Giinth. Anamallies.

O. rempeLetonit, Ginth. Ceylon.

QO. mopestus, Giinth. Ceylon (?)

O. porsaLis, Gray. Afghanistan. (?)

O. srevicaupa, Ginth. Anamallies.

SIMOTES, Dumert et Brpron.

S. proatenatus, Ginth.

a. five adults.

b, two ditto.

c. two ditto. Pegu. W. Theobald,

Junior, Esq.

d. one ditto. Ditto. Ditto.

These specimens have the lower ante-ocular very small, thereby dif-

fering from S. punctulatus.- As, however, the coloration is much like ~

var. y of S. punctulatus, I think they may belong to the allied species

Giinther names, without fully describing, 8. Labwanensis, Ginth., which

has a small lower ante-ocular.

e. two young, Jessore, Mergui.

One specimen has a minute lower ante-ocular, and is doubtless, &

9. bicatenatus from Mergui. The other probably belongs to a variety,

perhaps to 8. albwenier. :

Catalogue of Reptiles. 47

J. four young. (?) Ceylon. K. L. Layard, Esq.

g. two young. (?) Ditto. Ditto.

These specimens f. and g. agree in haying only one anteocular and

two postoculars all sub-equal. Unless all young, they may possibly

belong to Giinther’s 8. albiventer, though they have a loreal, which in

his type was wanting, possibly a mere individual peculiarity.

S. atBocincrus, Cantor.

Xenodon purpurascens, black-zoned var.

Ditto ditto, white-banded var,

a, two adults. Assam. Mr. Robinson.

b. two adults, one young.

These differ from the type in having the ante-oculars only two in

~ number and sub-equal.

8. Russetxi, Daud.

a, one large and one small specimen.

r b. two adults, one young. C.and 8S. India, Ceylon, Omerkantak.

-- Ido not quite understand how these snakes can come from four local-

ities as these are stated todo. This vagueness in labelling is much to

be deprecated.

g S. ?

i a. five adults. Goalpara. Dr, Thornburn.

. _ * §,. venusrus, Jerdon. West coast.

| S. Binoratus, Dum. et Bib. Nilghiris.

* §, ALBIVENTER, Giinth.

i . * §. punorunatus, Ginth. Nepal, Khasi hills.

Lam much inclined to question the soundness of Giinther’s splitting

| 8. purpurascens into so many shreds as he has done, that is, of giving

| specific rank to its different varieties. The varieties are perhaps local,

| but Iam far from sure that the number of scales and the size of the

. 4 oculars relatively and positively is sufficiently fixed to form the basis

/ Fe of specific separation. The pattern, I admit, is wonderfully inconstant,

but the head-markings and aspect of what have hitherto been ranked

as varieties of S. pwrpwrascens, have so strongly marked and uniform a

_ character, that I incline to the old arrangement rather than to the

new. A better series than we possess in this Museum is much wanted,

| and an authentic one as far as locality, to aid in solving this point.

# _ §. orventatus, Th. n. s.

_, Scales in seventeen rows. Nasals large, loreal small, anteocular one,

| ‘postoculars two, anal bifid. Upper labials seven, fourth and fifth enter

| orbit. Eye moderate, pupil large, black. Habit more slender than

8. bicatenatus. Colour above uniform umber-brown, without markings,

the colour extending over the edges of the ventral plates, beneath

yellowish white, with numerous square black blotches. Tail beneath

48 Catalogue of Reptiles.

bright deep coral red, mottled with black, tongue red. Sometimes

anal deep red, with a black band behind the vent. Common about

Rangoon and Pegu.

a. type specimen. Rangoon. W. Theobald,

Junr., Esq.

S, opscurus, Th. n. s.

Form stout, scales smooth, in nineteen rows. Anal entire. Rostral

well produced backwards. Anterior frontals narrow, oblique, their hinder

points almost reaching the vertical (in one specimen they do). Poste-

rior frontals rhomboidal. Vertical and occipitals very broad. Loreal

minute. Praocular one: postoculars two, in all equal. Upper labials

eight ; fourth and fifth enter the orbit; fifth highest, narrow. Three

pair of chin shields, the second just touching the fifth lower labial.

Ventrals broad. Tail very stout. Colour uniform yellowish dusky,

darker beneath.

a. two specimens.

A somewhat aberrant Simotes (?) without any record of donor

or locality.

S. crassus, Th. n. s.

Scales smooth, in nineteen rows. Preoculars two; the lowest is small. —

and looks like a detached piece of the 4th lower labial. Postoculars

two, small, sub-equal. Anterior frontals not much smaller than poste- —

rior ones. Vertical pentagonal, straight in front, sides converging.

Occipitals very broad in front, just touching lowest postocular. Upper

labials nine, Sth and 6th enter the orbit, 8th largest. Chin shields three

pairs, with a median groove between.

Colour uniform brown throughout, with faint markings on the head,

yellowish beneath. |

This specimen was, by a clerical error, labelled “ Cerberus bowformis, —

Lower Bengal,” and is so rammed into its bottle, that T do not like to

completely extract it for closer examination. It must be nearly three —

feet long, and is stout in proportion. No record of donor.

FAMILY CORONELLID&.

ABLABES, Dumert et Breron.

A. renviceps, Blyth.

Calamaria tenwiceps, Blyth, J. A. 8., XXIIL., p. 288.

a. type in bad state. Darjiling. Major Sherwill.

This species, by its thirteen rows of scales, is a transitional form i

towards the Calamaride, but with the plates of the head normal and

none united as in that Family. ‘This character of some of the plates of — |

the head being united, which marks the Calamaride, induces me tO —

exclude from this genus two species included by Giinther,—Ablabes

fuscus, B. and Ablabes bicolor,B. separated in this Catalogue as Grotea bie

color and Trachischiwm fuscwm,and both included among the Calamaride. —

Catalogue of Reptiles, 49

* A. Rapprt, Giinth. Sikim.

* A. Oxivaceus, Beddome. Nilghiris.

* A. Saairrarius, Cantor. Pinang, Tirhoot, Kangra.

* A. Humpertt, Jerdon. Madras, Ceylon.

* A. coLLaRis, Gray. Nepal, Khasi hills.

_ A. scriptus, Blyth.

Coronella seripta, Blyth.

Closely allied to A. baliodirus, but seems to differ too much to be

safely united.

Scales in thirteen rows. Anteocular one. Postoculars two, small.

Loreal very small, much smaller than postocular. Posterior frontals

broader than long. Upper labials, eight. The 3rd, 4th and 5th enter

the orbit. A long narrow temporal, forming a suture with both

postoculars and 6th and 7th labials; 7th labial largest, more than

twice as broad as temporal. Two pairs of chin shields, the hinder

rather larger than the other. First in contact with four labials. ‘The

second pair in contact with the 5th labial and part of 4th.

Lower labials, seven.. 5th largest.

Colour above brown. A few black dots on either side of spine on

the front part of trunk. A. black mark under the eye, followed by a

white upright border involving the postoculars. A black bordered

white patch on the last upper labial, and a white collar on nape.

Beneath white.

a. Martaban. Major Berdmore,

CYCLOPHIS, Gunruer..

€. rrznatvus, Ginth. Afghanistan.

©. catamaria, Ginth. Ceylon, S. India.

©. monticoLa, Cantor.

This specimen agrees tolerably with the description of the type,

making allowance for individual variation.

Scales smooth, in fifteen rows, no enlarged vertebrals. Nostril in a

_ large oblong shield. Loreal small, half as large as anteocular. Anteo-

eular one, large. Postoculars two, subequal. Frontals broader than

long. Anterior ones half as large as posterior. Vertical rather small.

Occipitals Jarge. Superciliaries large, two-third as large as vertical.

_ Upper labials seven, 3rd and 4th enter the orbit, anal bifid. Hye rather

large, pupil round.

| Colour dark olive brown. A broad blackish streak from eye to nape,

_ thinning off into an almost invisible line down the back. Beneath it

three filiform dark lines, formed by the dark edges of the seales along

the sides. See *

C. catenatus, Th. n.-s. ‘23 .@

Anteocular one. Postoculars two, the lower very minute. ) Loreal

small, Amal entire. Upper labials six. The 3rd and 4th entering the

orbit. Lower labials six. First deep, forming a suture with the oppo-

site one. 2nd small, 4th and 5th very large.

50 Catalogue of Reptiles.

_ Colour yellowish brown, many scales, black spotted, forming obscure

lines down the body. Belly yellowish white. Each ventral with a

terminal black dot, forming a conspicuous chain of spots down each .

side of abdomen.

a. Simla. Purchased.

C. asrivus, L.

a. two specimens. North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.

CHLOROPHIS, Tuxosanp, Gen. Nov.

Aspect much as in Cyclophis. Head rather distinct from neck.

Eye moderate, round pupil; scales smooth, in fifteen rows. Nostril

between two nasals.

©. Orpnamt, Th. n.s.

Anteocular one. Postoculars two. Loreal longish. Other head

shields normal, proportionate.

Upper labials eight, regularly increasing in size. Fourth and fifth

enter the orbit, chin shields two pair in contact with six labials. ‘The

hinder.chin shields a trifle longer than the front one. First lower

labials form a suture, 2nd very small, 6th the largest.

Body, .o..06 2H

Wail e coats 5.5 = 16.5.

Colour above uniform bronze brown, beneath cuticle in spirit, blue.

a. young. Simla. Purchased.

T have named this interesting ally of Oyclophis after Dr. Oldham,

Director of the Geological Survey of India, whose advice and encour-

agement, in the preparation of the present Catalogue, I should not pass. — +f

by unacknowledged.

ODONTOMUS, Dumzrin ut Brsron.

* O. nympHa, Daud.

* QO. gemipascratus, Ginth.

* Q. gracitis, Ginth. Anamallies.

NYMPHOPHIDIUM, Gunruzr.

* N. macunatum, Ginth. India.

ELACHISTODON, Rermwarpt.

* Ei, WESTERMANNI, Reinh.

CORONELLA, Lavrentr. (sp.)

* C. ortentauis, Ginth. Dakhan.

©. say1, Holbr. |

a. adult and young. North Caflina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.

(labelled Homalopsis buccata.) |

Catalogue of Reptiles. 51

Tam doubtful of this determination, but have no means of comparing

specimens.

“Seales smooth, in 21 rows. Anteocular one. Postoculars two.

Loreal small. Upper labial eight, 3rd and 4th enter the orbit. Nostril

between two nasals, anal bifid.

Colour deep brown (black?) Back broadly barred with yellow.

Belly brown with many scuta, partly yellow-coloured. All the head

shields symmetrically yellow spotted.

FAMILY DOSYPELTID A.

ELADISTODA, Reruarpr.

KE. Westermanni, Rein. Rungpore.

FAMILY COLUBRID &.

PHAYREA, Trrozatp, Gen. Nov.

Allied. to Coluber and Odontomus. Habit moderate or stoutish ;

scales smooth, sub-equal, hexagonal. Nasal oblong, reaching to the

top of the head, pierced somewhat posteriorly by a moderate nostril

with an oblique slit to the first labial, eye full, pupil round, anal bifid.

P. Isapetiina, n.s. Th.

Loreal one, anteocular one. Postoculars two. Upper labials eight.

Fourth and fifth enter the orbit. Sixth largest. Scales in seventeen

rows.

Color buff or yellowish Isabelline brown, with a narrow dark stripe

down each side of back, and a broader one on either side of the belly.

Belly yellowish, colors strongly contrasted.

Named in compliment to Lt.-Col. Phayre, the highly esteemed, able,

and popular Governor of British Birma.

a. Type specimen. Bassein.

COLUBER Liyyavs, (sp.)

C. porpuyraceus, Cantor. Assam and Khasi hills,

C. quadrivittatus, Holbr. (?) North America.

a. adult, (rather bleached.)

I refer this snake to this species with doubt, having no proper means

of determining it.

Scales in twenty-seven rows. Keeled on the back. Nostrils large

between two large nasals. Loreal small, squarish. Anteocular one,

large, not quite reaching the vertical. Postoculars two, small, equal.

Other shields regular, normal. Anal bifid. The hinder frontals are large

curving over to supplement the small loreal. Upper labials eight,

regular, subequal, 3rd and 4th enter the orbit. Colour buff, darker on

back, and a chain of darker oval spots along the side. Length

42 inches. Belly uniform, spotless.

C. Nuthalli, Th.

C. pictus, Carlyle, (mss.)

Scales smooth, in twenty-three rows. Upper labials nine, fifth and

sixth enter the orbit. Anteocular one, very large, touching the ver-

tical. Postoculars two, small. Loreal small; longer than broad. On

52 Catalogue of Reptiles. —

one side, a small piece is detached from the 4th upper labial and enters

the orbit. Vertical large, with sub-parallel sides. Superciliaries very

large, almost equalling the vertical rostral, a little broader than high.

Nostril rather small, between two large nasals. Lower labials twelve.

two subequal pairs of chin shields forming a suture with seven labials.

Seventh lower labial much the largest. :

Colour reddish grey, with four rows of elongate, rhomboidal, intensely

black spots each enclosing a pale ocellus. These spots fade towards

the hinder part of trunk and on the tail are replaced by four deep

brown bands, two broad dorsal ones and two narrow lateral ones,

separated by narrow white bands. An oval black spot from eye

to gape. |

a. young. Birma. Col. Nuthall.

GC. cotusrines, Blyth.

a. in a bad state for

description. Darjiling. W. T. Blanford, Esq.

C. (PuatTYcErs) SEMI-FASCIATUS, Blyth.

Scales smooth, in nineteen rows. Anteoculars two, the lower very

minute, upper large, touching the vertical. Postoculars two, subequal.

Upper labials nine, fifth and sixth enter the orbit. Occipitals very

large, nearly twice the size of the vertical, squarely truncate behind.

Vertical with very concave sides. Superciliaries large, pointed in

front. Loreal square, very small.

Colour pale olive grey, transversely dark, barred and spotted. The

bars of the neck breaking up into spots on the body and becoming

obsolete behind. A horse shoe mark with the end directed backwards

on the occipitals. A pale elongate lateral ocellus on each occipital.

Belly white.

a. young specimen. Subathoo. Rev. Cave Brown.

COMPSOSOMA, Domerm er Brsron. (sp.)

C. napIATUM,; Reinw. —__

a. adult and 2 young. Ramri. Capt. Abbott.

b. adult.

C. menanurum, Schl.

C. reTICULARE, Cantor.

©. Hopasoni, Ginth.

CYNOPHIS, Gray.

GC. mALABARICcUs, Jerdon.

a. adult. South India. P. Jerdon.

b, young.

C. Helena, Daud. Ceylon, Madras.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 53

PTYAS, Frrzincer.

P. mucosvs, L.

a. adult, Bengal.

b. ditto. Port Blair. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

¢. young. | Subathoo. Rey. Cave Brown,

d. ditto. Andamans. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

e. adult. Calcutta. Mr. Swarries.

P. Korros, Reinw.

a. half grown, Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

b. Darjiling. Capt. Sherwill.

ce. young, (white barred.) Rangoon. Dr. Fayrer.

Labelled “ pictus” by Mr. Carlyle, but has only 15 rows of scales ; the

type of “ pictus” having 23, (vide page 51.)

d, two young. Goalpara. Dr. Thornburn.

ce. adult.

P. constrictor.

a, South Carolina. Rey, T. Fitzgerald,

XENELAPHIS, Gtyruer.

X. HEXAHOoNOTUs, Cantor.

a. half grown.

ZAMENIS, Waater.

;

; Z. VENTRIMACULATUS, Gray.

i Coluber diadema, Blyth.

a, adult. § ?

* Z. DIADEMA, Schl. Sind, Bombay.

* Z. araciuis, Giinth., Sind, Dakhan.

Z. FAscIoLAtus, Shaw.

a, adult. Ramri, Purchased.

6. ditto. .

ce. young. South India. PP. Jerdon.

This specimen was labelled, “Coryphodow pictus,’ but it is cer-

tainly Z. fasciolatus. The 5th upper labial has its ascending ramus

detached to form a supernumerary postocular, three in all, but the

large frontals, very broad, vertical anteriorly, and 21 rows of smooth

scales sufficiently indicate the species. |

d. adult.

b4 Calalogue of Reptiles.

In our adult specimens a. and 0., the 3rd upper labial is undivided,

and therefore just enters the orbit with its posterior angle. In the

young, the anteocular touches the vertical as described by Ginther,

but does not quite reach it in either of the adult specimens a. b. and d.

ZAOCYS, Corz.

Z. CARINATUS, Giinth.

a. skin and tail of adult. Daryjiling. Major Sherwill.

b. several ditto. S. E. Himalaya.

HERPETOREAS, Gunruer.

H. Sresotpi, Ginth. Sikim.

Scales in nineteen rows, feebly keeled on the back. Anal and sub-

caudals bifid. Rostral broader than high, convex just reaches the

surface of head. Anterior frontals sub-pentagonal, broadest behind,

rather more than half as large as the posterior frontals, which are bent

down at the side. Vertical, superciliaries and occipitals normal, pro-

portionate. Nostril between two largish nasals. Loreal small, smaller

than nasal. Anteoculars two, the upper large, but does not touch ver-

tical. The lower small, wedged in between the third and fourth labials ;

looks like a detached piece of the third labial. Postoculars two, small,

the lowest in contact with two temporals. Upper labials eight, the

fourth and fifth enter the orbit.

Chin shields two pair, contiguous, touching six lower labials. First

lower labials form a suture, second very small, sixth largest.

Eye large, pupil round, ventrals strongly upturned at the sides, the

upturned ends being dark coloured. Colour above olive brown. A black

band down each side of spine from neck to tail, with an interspace of -

five scales between. A second narrower band two scales below the last.

Belly dusky, throat yellow.

A black streak from eye to gape.

This deseription is taken from a specimen in the possession of

Mr. Grote.

One specimen exists in the museum, as far as I can judge, without

extracting it from the bottle. It differs from the above and agrees

with the type in having only one anteocular ; but as in the above speci-

men the eye is on the 4th and 5th upper labials, whereas the type has

three upper labials entering the orbit, this is probably an individual

peculiarity.

a. adult. No record.

TROPIDONOTUS, Kvut.

T, quincuncratvs, Schl.

T. wmbratus, Schl.

a. three specimens. Bengal, Pinang, Rangoon.

b. adult & 2 young. Bengal.

C. Upper Pegu. W. T. Blanford, Esq.

Catalogue of Reptiles, 5S

a 3 Upper Pegu. W. T. Blanford, Esq.

ge. Andamans. Col. Tytler.

Ff Sunderbuns. <A. OC. L. Carlyle, Esq.

g. ? style of marking of this species, but can’t be removed

from the bottle, neither is any note attached.

T. striouarus, Blyth. Andamans. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

Scales in nineteen rows.

Anteocular one, postoculars three or four. Upper labials eight.

Third and fourth enter orbit, when four postoculars are present only

the third enters the orbit; anal divided. Colour pale olive brown. A dark

patch below the eye, a conspicuous dark leaden stripe from behind,

the eye over the angle of the mouth all down the side, with a second

narrower one below it. The lower stripe passes through the upper

edges of the second row of scales. Beneath white. No ventral dots.

The ventral row of scales white with brown tips.

Body 22.5, tail 12 — 34.5.

T. susmrntAtus, Reinw.

a. several specimens. Rungpore. Mr. Bonneau.

Ramzi. Capt. Abbot.

Pegu. Capt. Berdmore.

b. several specimens. Assam. T. Robinson, Esq.

e. (?) large specimen,

no markings. No record.

T. srotarus, L.

a. three specimens. Calcutta (?) (?)

b. two ditto. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

C. Calcutta. T. Moseley, Esq.

d. Near Calcutta. A. C. L. Carlyle, Esq.

T. nrgRoctnorvs, Blyth.

a. many specimens. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

T. erarycrps, Blyth. J, A. S. XXIII. p. 297.

a. two specimens. Darjiling. Capt. W. T. Sherwill.

The Assam and Khasia specimens (1. ¢.) are no longer in the ~

museum. This is a very aberrant species, with rounded frontals and

almost smooth scales. It might advantageously in my opinion be

Separated, but I follow Dr. Gunther in retaining it in the genus, as L

ave no good specimens to diagnose.

T. ancustrcers, Blyth. J. A. 8. XXIII. p. 295.

a, adult and young. Ramri. Capt. Abbot,

T. macrors, Blyth. J. A. S. XXIII p. 296.

| a. two specimens. Darjilng. Capt. Sherwill.

56 Catalogue of Reptiles.

T. prumBrcotor, Cantor.

Xenodon viridis, Dum. et. Bab.

a. young. Bundelkand. Dr. Spilsbury.

T. rascratus, L. N. Carolina. Rev. J. Fitzgerald.

T. onpinatus, L. Ditto. Ditto.

T, warrix, L.

a. England. R. Hancock, Esq.

b. Ditto. E. Blyth, Esq.

T. ontvacevs, Blyth.

a. two specimens. ? 2

T. prpsas, Blyth.

a. specimen in very

poor state. Darjiling. W. T. Blanford, Esq.

The type specimen of Blyth’s description is no longer in the

museum.

cl Es

a. specimen in too poor a state for description.

Darjiling. W. T. Blanford, Esq.

T. wacropntmanmus, Ginth. Khasi hills.

T. Himanayanvs, Gimth. Nipal, Sikim.

T. monticona, Jerdon, W ynaud.

T. Crytonensis, Giinth. Ceylon.

T. Beppomu, Ginth. Nilghiri hills.

T, zesrinus, Blyth. Mergui.

J. A. S. XXIII. p. 295.

Type specimen presented by Major Berdmore, no longer im

the museum.

T, nypRus, Pall.

a. £ 4

T have no doubt of this identification.

Scales 19 rows. Hight upper labials, only the fourth entering the

orbit. Superciliary very large. Anteoculars three, postoculars five. q

Tt is particularly annoying that the label of this specimen is torn off.

Tt is recorded with doubtas from India by Gunther in his Brit. Mus. ~

Catalogue, page 63, but excluded from his Catalogue of Indian reptiles.. —

The fragment of a label remaining, seems to show it was presented by —

a clergyman, “ Rev.” remaining ; probably the Rev. Cave Brown or the

Rev. Lindstedt, in which case it is probably an Asiatic specimen. As —

it is not an American species, 1b is unlikely to be our American contri-

butor Rev. EF. Fitzgerald. Bs

Catalogue of Reptiles. 57

T. Morton1, Theobald.

Scales strongly keeled, in nineteen rows.

Anteoculars two, the lowest most minute, looks like a fragment

detached from the second labial. Postoculars three small, equal; on

one side all united into a narrow band, half as broad but almost equal

in length to the superciliary. Anterior frontals squarish, truncate in

front, posterior frontals broader than long. Loreal small, Anal bifid.

Upper labials seven, third and fourth enter the orbit. Two pair

large chin shields. The hinder ones rather larger and longer. Colour

(bleached) pale brown with a darker vertebral stripe. On the side

of body, obsolete rows of white (yellow) splash-like or linguiform

spots, those bordering the vertebral stripe being conspicuous and

cateniform, and occupying the upper basal portion of the scale. A few

dark spots subordinately intermingled, but which form a sort of

ea line each side of the spine. Belly yellowish. No marks on

the hea

a. type.

Labelled “ Homolopsis” by Myr. Carlyle, but no note of

donor or locality.

This Species seems to approach nearest to T. tigrinus, but the

coloration is entirely different.

I have much pleasure in naming it after Dr. Morton, Civil Surgeon

of Port Blair, who has most obligingly forwarded me, on more than

one occasion, interesting collections from Port Blair and the neigh-

bourhood.

ATRETIUM, Cops.

i A. Scutstosum, Daud.

4 a. many specimens. Lower Bengal.

% b. Ditto. A.C. L. Carlyle, Esq.

XENOCHROPHIS, Guyrner.

X. CERASOGASTER, Cantor.

a, . Lower Bengal. ?

FOWLEA, Tueosaxp.

A. Tropidonotus, with smooth scales and the aspect of Hypsirhina.

FE. Pzevensts, Theobald.

Head as in Tropidonotus. Upper labials nine. The fourth and fifth

enter the orbit. Anteocular one, Postoculars three, Loreal one

| Squarish, Nasals two, Frontals two pair, anterior ones small and pointed.

Vertical moderate, Superciliaries and Occipitals large. Anal bifid,

58 Catalogue of Reptiles.

Scales smooth, lozenge-shaped, on neck in seventeen, on body in fifteen

rows.

Colour of male dark umber brown, beneath white; colours distinctly

separated, upper labials white.

Females, yellowish brown, mottled largely with yellow, which colour

sometimes predominates.

a. adult male, (type.) Rangoon. W. Theobald,

Junr., Esq.

Captured by E. Fowle, Esq., who is one of the very few

who have liberally aided me in the study of our Indian

reptiles.

CADMUS, THeEoBatp.

Head thick, cuneiform. Form stout, but otherwise much like Tro- —

sdonotus. Scales smooth, in 27 rows. Anal bifid, eye moderate,

pupil round.

(. cunetrormtis, Theobald.

Rostral large, running well back on the top of the head and encroach- |

ing between the anterior frontals. Nostril between two nasals.

Anterior frontals very small. Posterior frontals large. Loreal small,”

triangular, with apex between anteocular and posterior frontal. An-

teocular one large, postocular three, upper labial seven, only the fourth

entering the orbit.

Head high shelving in front, pointed, stout and cuneiform. A large

pair of chin-shields in contact with 5 labials and followed by a small

air.

Colour yellowish olive brown. An obsolete band of spots, down the

back on each side of spine, and lower on the side a strongly defined

band of black spots, many of them like a hollow horseshoe four scales

apart. Below dusky white, with an elongate streaky spot at the side

between each 4th and 5th ventral. ,

a. type. Simla. Purchased.

This very curious snake partakes of the characters of Tropidonotus

and Hypsirhina even more than Pegua does. 4

TOMODON, Dumerm Er Brsron.

T, srrigatus, Dum. et Bib,

a. specimen injured. Calcutta. Mr. C. Swaries.

This specimen is so crushed that I cannot make out its head shields, —

but it appears to be identical with a single specimen obtained bye |

“myself in Birma. It is not included in Giinther’s Indian Reptiles, h |

is recorded from India in the Brit. Mus. Cat. Colubrine Snakes, p. 52a

Perhaps Hypsirhina plumbea, >

GE Re

—=

Catalogue of Reptiles. 59

FAMILY PSAMMOPHIDZ.

PSAMMOPHIS, Bor.

P. stpruans, L.

a. Somali country. Lt. Speke.

P. condanarus, Merrem.

PSAMMODYNASTES, Gontuer.

P. pULVERULENTUS, Boie.

Dipsas ferruginea, Cantor.

a. five adults.

b. two adults. Assam. Robinson, Esq.

¢. many specimens. Birma.

FAMILY DENDROPHID 4%.

GONYOSOMA, Waater.

G. oxycePHatum, Boie.

Herpetodryas prasinus, Blyth.

a. five adults. Andamans. Capt. Hodge.

b. ditto. Mergui. - W. Theobald, Jr., Esq.

c. ditto. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

d. smaller. Assam. Robinson, Esq.

e. young. Andamans. Lt.-Col, Tytler.

G. gramineum,Ginth., Khasi hills.

G. frenatum, Gray. Ditto.

. DENDROPHIS, Bore.

D. pictus, Gmel. »

a, adult. Ramri. Capt. Abbot.

b. two ditto. Andamans. Capt. Hodge.

c. two ditto. Mergui. Major Berdmore.

d. two ditto. Assam. Major Jenkins.

e. three ditto. Malacca. — Rev. EH. Lindstedt.

f. two ditto. Andamans. Col. Tytler.

g. large adult. Calcutta. E. Blyth, Hsq.

60 Catalogue of Reptiles.

CHRYSOPELEA, Bor.

C. ornata, Shaw.

a. four specimens.

b. two ditto. Malacca Rev. E. Lindstedt.

c. three ditto.

d. Fine adult. Shuegheen. Major Berdmore.

This specimen was captured devouring a Ptychozoon.

e. young, black banded.

FAMILY DRYIOPHIDA.

TROPIDOCOCCYX, GuntHer.

T. Perrotet1, Dum. et Bib.

Leptophis Canariensis, Jerdon. J. As. Soc. Bengal, XXII.

p. 550.

a, adult. Ootakamund. W. Theobald, Jr., Esq.

TRAGOPS, Waater.

T. pRAsINus, Reinw.

a. adult. Pinang. Brigr. Frith.

b. ditto. Mergui. Capt. Berdmore.

c. ditto. Sylhet. F. Skipwith, Esq.

T. dispar, Ginth. Anamallies.

T. fronticinctus, Giinth. Pegu. (Captured there by me.)

PASSERITA, Gray.

P. myoterizans, L.

a. adult. Lower Bengal.

b. ditto, bad state; Calcutta.

has swallowed |

a Calotes versicolor.

c. ditto.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 61

FAMILY DIPSADID ®.

DIPSAS, (Auvcr.)

D. cynopon, Cuv.

a. adult, Malacca. E. Lindstedt, Esq.

b, ditto. Mergui. W. Theobald, Jr., Esq.

ce. ditto. ~ Thaiel tmio. W. T. Blanford, Esq.

D. rrigonata, Schn.

b. Subathoo. Rev. Cave Brown.

¢. Jessore. Frith, Esq.

D. Forstent, Dum. et Bib.

a, Huge adult. Bengal.

Labelled, “ D. trigonata, Lower Bengal’ but no other re-

cord of this scarce species. Beddom has got it on the

Anamallies.

6. adult (bleached), no record.

D. nreRomararnara, Blyth.

D. bubalina, Klein ?

I am not convinced of the identity of these two species, which Giin-

ther unites. I can see no “ apical grooves” to the scales in our

Specimen, and the loreal is not higher than long ag on D. bubalina,

he coloration of the under parts too is different.

D. mouttimacuata, Schl.

a. adult. Hongkong. G. Bowring, Esq.

b. two ditto,

Many specimens of this snake from Birma, where it is common,

Seem to have disappeared from the museum.

D. mutirascrata, Blyth.

a. young. Subathoo. Rey. Cave Brown.

Perhaps a young, D. trigonata.

D. nexaconorus, Blyth.

a, many young. Andamans. Capt. Hodge and Col.

Tytler,

The type specimen is no longer in the museum, and these young

Specimens are unsatisfactory data for specific identification,

Catalogue of Reptiles.

D. Boors, Giinth. Bengal, Borneo.

D. dendrophila, Reinw. Pinang.

D. bubalina, Klein.

D. Gokool, Gray. Bengal, Pinang.

D. Ceylonensis, Giinth. Ceylon.

The island representative of D. trigonata.

FAMILY LYCODONTID&.

LYCODON, Bortz.

L. avzicus, L. !

a. four specimens. Calcutta. E. Blyth, Esq.

b. three ditto young. Andamans. Capt. Hodge and Col.

Tytler.

c. five ditto. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

d, adult. Moulmein. Rev. F. Mason,

e. two.

f. young. South India. Dr. Jerdon.

g. ditto. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

h. adult, fromthe Andamans. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

4. white barred var.

L. striatus, Shaw. Anamallies.

L. Anamallensis,Giimth. Anamallies.

TETRAGONOSOMA, GunTHER.

{. errRENe, Cantor. Pinang.

LEPTORHYTAON, Gunruer.

L. gana, Shaw.

qa, many specimens. “ India generally.’

OPHITES, Wacter.

No anteocular.

0. albofuscus, Dum. et Bib, Malabar? Sumatra,

One anteocular,

Sp ag iti PaaS ah

Catalogue of Reptiles. 63

CERCASPIS, Wacter.

C. carmata, Kuhl. Ceylon.

“FAMILY AMBLYCEPHALID &.

AMBLYCEPHALUS, Kuut. (sp.)

A. Boa, Kuhl ? Pinang.

PAREAS, Waater.

P. Berdmorei, Theobald. .

Aplopeltura boa. Schl. apud Blyth. The adult.

Pareas macularius, Blyth. The young.

This is a very singular snake. The young is totally unlike the

adult, and has been described by Blyth, and referred to another genus,

and the adult erroneously referred to Aplopeltwra (Amblycephalus.)

The snake, however, is not Amblycephalus, as it has divided sub-caudals,

but one loreal, and 15 rows of scales, and as it clearly tends to unite

the two genera; is a distinct species, which, to prevent confusion of

synonyms, I have given a fresh name to. It approaches Amblyce-

phalus in the eye being separated from the upper labials, and in the form

of the head which, however, is only characteristic of the adult.

Adult. Body strongly compressed, scales smooth, in fifteen rows or

faintly keeled on the back, Head high quadrate, blunt, pug-nosed,

Hye large, Pupil vertical. Rostral high, not reaching the surface of

head, deeply excavated below. Nasal large single, high, with nostril.

pierced behind, upper labials 6 or 7, anterior ones high narrow. Hye

surrounded beneath with 5, 6, or 7 small shields, excluding the labials

from orbit. Loreal one, rather small. Frontals subequal, anterior

smallest. Superciliaries large, as large as posterior frontal fully. Vertical

and Occipitals normal, nearly equal in size. Lower Labials 8, very

narrow, 3 pair large transverse gular shields. The lst forms a suture

with the 4 front labials. Anal entire, Sub-caudals divided.

In the young. (Pareas macularius, Blyth.) The shields of the head

are rather irregular. The anterior frontals are very small. In one

the vertical is an equilateral rhomboid from the straightening of the

sides. The posterior Frontal enters the orbit in some. The Super-

ciliary is large and enters a notch between the Vertical and Occipitals.

Occipitals extremely large. Seventh upper labial very long. The

labials and additional oculars and peculiar gular shields as in the adult.

_ Anal entire ; sub-caudals divided.

a. two adults. Tenasserim. Major Berdmore.

Color uniform ochraceous, with obsolete traces of vertical bands

down the body. Two converging dark lines on the nape, and traces of

a white collar in one specimen. Belly white.

Body 195, tail 4.5 == 24.0 inches,

64 Catalogue of Reptiles.

b. three young. Martaban. Major Berdmore.

Body rich reddish brown, with somewhat reticulate bars formed by

some of the scales being parti-colored, white in front, and deep claret

color behind, giving a half banded, half spotted appearance to the

snake. A conspicuous white collar on the nape, mottled with claret red.

Belly brown, spotted and mottled.

P. mopxstus, Theobald.

Head rather thick. Anterior frontals small, broader than long.

Posterior frontals large, bent over the side and entering the orbit.

Superciliaries small. Loreal moderate. Anteoculars two, very small.

Postocular one, very small, with a band like sub-ocular, which excludes

the labials from the orbit. Scales smooth, in fifteen rows. The verte-

bral series not enlarged, but the four vertebral rows faintly keeled.

Anal entire ; sub-caudals bifid. Upper Labials seven, 4th and 5th high,

under the orbit, but separated by a sub-ocular, 6th low, 7th very long

with two elongate temporals above it. Three pair of large transverse

gular shields. Above, uniform brown, below pale yellowish.

a. type specimen. Rangoon. Col. Nuthall.

FAMILY XENOPELTID Ai.

XENOPELTIS, Rernwarpt.

X. unrcotor, Rein.

a. three specimens. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

b. two ditto. India House.

c. one ditto, Trichinopoli. H. F. Blanford, Esq.

d. two ditto. Andamans. Col. Tytler.

A powerful and ferocious snake ; when alive, its color above is a deep

blue, with metallic iridescence.

FAMILY PYTHONID&.

PYTHON, Davpin.

P. revicuLatus, Schn.

a. young. Nicobars. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

b. ditto.

c. ditto. Mergui. Major Berdmore.

d. ditto. *

e. ditto. Malacca. Rev. W. E. Lindstedt. —

f. stuffed specimen.

g.h. 1. three do, poor state.

P. moturus, L.

a. young.

Cutalogue of Reptiles, 65 |

b. ditto smaller,

c. (?) stuffed.

BOA, Gray.

B. constrictor, L.

a. K. Blyth, Esq.

b. K. Blyth, Esq.

GONGYLOPHIS, Waater.

G. contcus, Schneid.

a. four specimens. Upper India.

ERYX, Davoin.

K. Jonnu, Russell.

a. three specimens. Pind Didun Khin, W. Theobald, Jr.

b. young, pale co- Ksq.

lored with dark

bands over the

back.

FAMILY ACROCHORDID 2.

ACROCHORDUS, Hornsrepr.

A. Javantcus, Hornst. Pinang, &e.

CHERSYDRUS, Cuvier.

¢. GRANULATUS, Schneid.

a. adult. Hidgilli. Hi. L. Haughton, Esq.

SAMILY HOMALOPSIDZ®.

CERBERUS, Cuvier.

C. ruyncnops, Schneid.

a. adult. Andamans. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

b, two smaller. Ditto. Capt. Hodge and

Col. Tytler,

ce. two ditto. Lower Bengal,

d. three ditto. Ditto.

e. large adult, Ditto.

f. smaller, Ditto.

g. ditto, Moulmein. Dr. F. Mason.

66 Cataloque of Reptiles.

HOMALOPSIS, Sp. Kuut.

H. suceata, L.

Pythonella semizonata, Blyth.

a. type of Pythonella. Martaban. Major Berdmore.

Labelled in Mr. Blyth’s writing Pythonella, not Pythonia as printed,

and quoted by Gunther. |

HERPETON, Lacerepe.

H. rentacutatum, Lacép.

TYTLERIA, Tueopa.p.

Aspect of Hypsirhina scales, smooth, in seventeen rows. Nostral —

lateral, almost dividing a smallish oblong nasal : frontals two pair : three

upper labials enter the orbit. Loreal elongate: anal and sub-caudals

bifid: eye small; pupil vertical.

T, nypstruinomEs, Theobald.

Habit moderate, aspect of the Enhydrine. Head shield normal. An-

terior frontals slightly pentagonal, half as large as posterior. Nasal

a trifle less than loreal. Ante-ocular one, reaching to the vertical. —

Postoculars two, small. Vertical straight in front, sides rapidly con-

verging behind. Superciliaries moderate, broad behind. Occipitals—

moderate. Upper labials nine, 3rd, 4th and 5th enter the orbit. Two-

pairs of chin shields touching one another. Sixth lower labial largest,

touches the middle of second chin shield.

Color uniform reddish brown above. Belly yellowish white, length

21.00, tail injured 1.00 = 22.00 inches.

a. type specimen. Andamans. Lt.-Col. Tytler. —

HYPSIRHINA, Wacuer.

H. exuyprts, Schneid.

a. Adult and young.

b. Young. Calcutta. Mr. C. Swaries.

A variable species as to form and coloration, and consequently much

burdened with synonyms, being indebted to Dr. Gray for three of them,

bilineata, trilineata and furcata, according to Gunther. Tt is a common H

species, with scales in twenty rows. |

H. rrumpea, Boie.

@. many specimens.

Nearly related to the last, but with a stouter head, and scales in only 4

nineteen rows. of a

H. curensis, Gray.

qa. small specimen.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 67

FARANCIA, Gray.

F. rasctata, Shaw.

a. fine adult. North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald,

ABASTOR, Gray.

A. ERYTHROGRAMMUs, Wagler.

Homalopsis parsicips, Blyth.

a. fine adult. North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.

FORDONITA, Gray.

F, unicotor, Gray. Pinang.

CANTORIA, Grrarp.

— C. Etoneara, Girard.

FPERANTA, Gray.

F. Srzsotpu, Schl.

a, adult. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

HIPISTES, Gray.

TI. nyprinvs, Cantor.

a. Rangoon. Dr. Fayrer,

GERARDA, Gray.

et ee ee

moommegonon, Gray, 6. acess Bassein river.

SECOND SUB-ORDER, SERPENTES

COLUBRINI VENENATI.

i FAMILY HYDROPHID A.

ENHYDRINA, Gray,

Hi. BENGALENSIs, Gray.

i Valakadyen, Gray.

ee Pe a ee

Hydrus schistosus, Cantor.

a. adult, foetal young. Sandheads.

6, adult, black spotted. Hidgelli, H. L. Haughton, Esq.

c. 4 adult, 1 young, 2 feeti.

68 Catalogue of Reptiles.

HYDROPHIS, Davos, (sp.)

H. Gractuis, Shaw.

a. adult. Sandheads. W. Earl, Esq.

b. younger. Sandheads,

c. very young.

This specimen (0.) has 73 dark bands. On the neck these bands are

confluent and constitute the general color; the pale yellow lines being

broken up into oval spots on the sides. On the back the bands are

rhombic, on a yellow ground. On the tail they are broad, with narrow

upright bars of the yellow ground color between them.

H. Jerporu, Gray. — :

Hydrus Cantorti, Jerdon, Mus. label.

Hydrus nigrocinctus, Cantor.

a. fine specimen. Mergui. W. Theobald, Esq., Jr.

H. nigrocinera, Daud.

a, young.

The black bands are more symmetrical than on the type, isolating

the pale ground color into ellipsoid bands, which are wider than in the

type, covering eight scales in the middle or broadest part. On one

side of our specimen, there are two, on the other only one postocular.

H. curva, Shaw.

a. small specimen.

This does not quite agree with the description, as there are four

cross bands, but the decided yellow temporal streak is a sufficient —

character to recognize the species by.

H. cyanocrnera, Daud.

-Hydrus striatus, Cantor.

a. adult. China. C. J. Bowring, Esq.

b. young. Hidgilli. H. L. Haughton, Esq.

c. very young.

a. has the tail very round and thick, as Giinther says is the case with ;

old males. ;

The small specimen c. is remarkable for the narrowness of the bands —

which are narrower than the pale interspaces. Tt exhibits also the trans-_

verse frontal streak which becomes obsolete with age. |

H. rosusta, Fischer.

a. fine adult, Hidgilli. H. L. Haughton, Esq.

I think this must be a variety of H. robusta, though the scales —

are small, and I can find no central tubercle. Scales on neck in 27 rows.

Catalogue of Reptiles, 69

Eye very small, over 3rd and 4th labials. Superciliaries very large.

Six upper labials, 1st small, the rest large, subequal, regular,

Color greenish-olive above; yellow, below with narrow distant black

cross bars, formed on the belly of only single black scales ; chin shields

two pairs, approximate : 4th and 5th lower labials large.

H. coronara, Giinther.

H. obscura, Dumeril, Mus. label.

a. adult, Hidgilli. H. L. Haughton, Esq.

This specimen was labelled H. obscura, but accords minutely with

Giinther’s description of H. coronata.

H. srricriconuts, Giinther.

fH, obscura, Daud. Mus. label.

a,adult. Hidgilli. H. L. Haughton, Esq.

A variety prebably of this species, though not quite corresponding

with Giinther’s description.

Scales on neck in 35 rows; on body in 45, with an indistinct central

tubercular keel : one anteocular, one postocular : 3rd upper labial does not

touch nasal; 8rd and 4th enter the orbit; one large anterior temporal,

two small posterior ones, alongside of the occipital. Ventrals entire,

broader than adjoining scales, very obscurely three-kecled. No enlarged

preanals. Above blackish olive, below yellowish, faintly dark banded ;

markings blended and obscure.

H. cutoris, Daud.

A. gracilis, Shaw apud Blyth,

HI. Lindsayi, Gray (2)

a. ‘ Akyab, — Dunn, Esq.

b, Sandheads.

These specimens accord very well with ZH. chloris as described by

Giinther, save that the rostral is quite as high as broad. In this

single character, they resemble H. Lindsay, Gray, which must, therefore

be held to be very doubtfully distinct from the present species, the

only other differences seeming to be insufficient for specific separation,

such as coloration and the number of ventral shields, which per se, when

weighed against the strict agreement of all the other characters, are

comparatively unimportant.

H. Guntuzrt, Theobald.

Scales on neck in 43 rows, on middle of body in 51, strongly keeled,

subequal. Ventrals undivided, bi-tubercular: one ante-ocular, one

postocular. Upper labials six; 2nd very large, 3rd and 4th enter the orbit;

6th low, wedged between two temporals. A large upper temporal in

10 Catalogue of Reptiles.

contact with the postocular, the occipital, two lower temporals and

three small temporal scales behind. Shields of head asa Hydrophis,

pustular. Hach labial smooth in front, pustular behind. A small pair of

rounded chin shields separated by a groove.

Color yellow, with dark lozenge bars on the back, becoming obsolete

on the sides. Belly uniformly yellow. Tail dark, with yellow stripes.

The specimen was jumbled among a lot of Enhydrine, probably

from the Sandheads.

Its nearest ally is H. Stokesii, but it seems a new species, and I have,

therefore, separated it under the name of the distinguished Herpetolo-

gist to whom Indian Naturalists are so deeply indebted for his labors,

more especially in this confused Family.

H. tracuycers, Theobald.

Head conical, pointed or subtriangular, hardly longer than broad.

Body moderate, throat not slender. One ante-ocular, one postocular :

occipitals not broken up, entire. Six upper labials, the two last having

two small plates below them; lst upper labial very small; 2nd very large;

3rd enters the orbit with its posterior angle; Ath under the orbit with a

lower supernumerary plate wedged in behind it, and above it and the

5th; 5th touches postocular; 6th just touches postocular, and joins the

temporal. Two pairs of chin-plates approximate, irregularly rhomboidal.

Five lower labials, with a row above of marginal scales. Ventrals small

but distinct, smooth. Scales smooth on neck, in 32 rows. Color greenish

yellow. Back barred with 63 dark lozenges combined in faint bars

across the belly, on the anterior two-thirds of the body. Length

30 inches.

a. Female and foetus. Mergui. W. Theobald, Jr.

This specimen was labelled H. nigrocineta, Daud. with which it has

no affinity. lis thick neck, remarkably conic head and ventral plates

distinguish it from any snake described by Giinther.

“ Bay of Bengal” is the only note attached to it, but I think I recog-

nize it as one of many (and almost the only one remaining) presented

by me from Mergui, where great numbers are daily captured in the

fishing stakes.

H. virerina, Schmict.

a. young. . Rangoon. : Col. Nuthall.

This specimen is in a bad shrivelled state, and is but doubtfully

referred to this species. The broad nasals posteriorly, broad anterior

ventral and coloration seem to agree with the type.

PELAMIS, Davorn (sp.)

P. siconor, Schneid.

a. fine adult. Nicobars. M. Busch. |

(var y senuula.)

Catalogue of Reptiles. 71

PLATURUS, Larrztie.

P. scuratus, Laur.

a, adult. Ramri. Capt. Abbott.

b. young. Pinang. Capt. Lewis.

P. Fiscuert, Jan. Bay of Bengal.

FAMILY ELAPIDZ.

; HAMADRYAS, Canzor.

H. exaps, Schl.

Hi, vittatus, Elliott.

Hf, ophiophagus, Cantor,

a. fine adult, J. ASS. XXVIII. 411. Port Blair Lt.-Col.

Tytler.

b. young. Andamans, Capt. Eales.

c. head of adult

(same bottle as b),

NAJA, Lavrenrt.

N, rrreuprans, Merr,

N. lutescens, Laur.

N. atra, Cantor.

N. kaouthia, Less.

N. sputatrix, Rein.

N. larvata, Cantor.

a. adult no spec- Probably from Pegu.

tacles.

b. adult. Probably from Pegu.

Head pale. Body above brown and black mottled. Belly black.

Throat yellow (?) then a scale of 5 black scuta, followed by a band of

5 yellow ones. Two black gular spots just in front of head. No spec-

tacles, but an oval black spot in the centre of a pale oval area. Fore

part of body dark and pale banded. This fine specimen has suffered by

being mercilessly rammed into too small a bottle.

c. adult (bleached.)

Neck finely displayed with large spectacles.

d. half grown from Pegu, I believe, from its oval mark,

72 Catalogue of Reptiles.

e. half. Bengal probably. Spectacles distinct.

f. ditto two specimens, ditto.

g. ditto.

h. ditto 3 specimens, from Pegu probably.

A large central and two small lateral dark spots in a pale

oval area.

i. ditto two specimens (bleached), from Pegu probably.

No spectacles, oval mark only with dark centre.

j. ditto swallowing a Bufo melanostictus.

k. ditto, 8 specimens from Pegu probably.

1, ditto Mergui. Major Berdmore.

m. ditto ditto. W. Theobald, Esq., Jr

m. young. Bengal (?)

Spectacles displayed.

o. ditto ditto.

p. ditto, 4 specimens, all from Pegu probably.

g. ditto two-headed monster. = eee Nawab of Dacca,

r. head of cobra distended ; no spectacles or other mark.

Most of the specimens in the collection belong to the variety which

occurs on the east side of the Bay, without spectacles, but with merely

a pale black central oval mark on the neck. ‘The ordinary spectacled

variety I have never ousted in Pegu or Tenasserim.

The commonest color of the cobra is a uniform brown, rather dark,

but I have seen many living ones in Bengal, almost pale yellow or

yellowish stone color. From this pale tint, the color passes through the

four varieties to uniform black. ‘I'he pale varieties are called in Bengal

“ Gorhmon,”, and the black is known by the name of “ Kaouthia,” with

the epithet black often affixed. It is the largest and most dreaded

variety, but I don’t think its color is the result of age, as I have seen

fully adult cobras of a pale yellowish color, though rarely. The Pegu

variety is dark, with the oval mark very constant, and never exhibits

any approach to the spectacles.

Dr. Giinther remarks “ Singularly, it has never been observed by -

Mr. Hodgson in the valley of Nepal.” This is very easily accounted

for, since few could venture to kill a cobra, even for scientific ends, in

the rigorously Hindu Kote of Nepal. In British India, decent Hindoos

will not kill a cobra; and if one has taken up his abode in a house, he

is either permitted to remain, or else carefully inveigled into an earthen

pot, which is then closed and carried off for miles, before it is opened.

and the sacred reptile within respectfully allowed to regain his liberty.

I have myself witnessed this deferential deportation of the cobra in

Bengal; but of course none but the orthodox Hindoo is so careful to

abstain from injuring the animal, and their reverential feeling is now

perhaps rather the exception than the rule, though probably as strong

as ever in Nepal.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 73

BUNGARUS, Daun.

B. cxrutevs, Schneid.

a. adult. Calcutta. Prince Jellalooddeen.

b, ditto. | Pegu.

c. ditto. ' Darjeeling. Capt. Sherwill.

Beamiaiier,., = - 8 We. Lt. R. C. Beavan,

e. ditto (finely marked). Rangoon. Col. Nuthall,

f. two young (discolored).

g. three specimens. ;

h, young. Cape of Good Col. Tytler.

Hope! !

This habitat must, I think, be erroneously given.

B. rascratus, Schneid.

a, adult.

b. ditto smaller,

ce. ditto ditto.

d, ditto.

e. small specimen swallowing another snake. (Tropidonotus).

Not a single donor or locality is assigned to any of these specimens

of B. fasciatus, whilst, oddly enough, nearly every specimen of B. ceru-

leus is carefully labelled.

B. Ceylonicus, Gimth. Ceylon.

XENURELAPS, Gtyruzr.

X. BUNGAROIDES, Cantor. Cherrapunji.

MEGAROPHIS, Gray.

M. Fuavicers, Reinh,

a. adult injured. Mergui. W. Theobald, Esq., Jr.

ELAPS, Scunerper.

E, MacLetuanpu, Rein.

Li. personatus, Blyth.

a, adult, Assam ? W. Robinson, Esq.

b. 3 younger. Pegu (?) Major Berdmore.

IT cannot distinguish the Pegu and Assam specimens, as all are

rammed into one bottle. ,

74 Catalogue of Reptiles.

E. mevanurvs, Cantor.

E. maculiceps, Ginth.

a. 3 specimens. Rangoon. Dr. Fayrer.

Moulmein. E. Blyth, Esq.

b. young (bleached.) Amherst. E. O. Reiey, Esq.

BE. wrestinauis, Laur.

a. adult with young

(bleached). Singapore. * Brigadr. Frith.

KE. uyeia, Schl.

a. South Africa. Dr. Withecombe.

THIRD SUB-ORDER, SERPENTES VIPERINLI.

FAMILY CROTALIDA.

TRIMERESURUS, Lacipepe (sp.).

T. caRInatus, Gray.

T. porphyraceus, Blyth.

T. bicolor, Gray.

di purpureus, Gray.

T. purpureo-maculatus, Gray.

T’. puniceus, Gray.

T. Cantori, Blyth.

a. adult. Lower Bengal.

Ordinary type one azygos shield between the supranasals. Green

with pale side stripe ; 23 rows of scale. d

b. adult. Andamans.

Fine and large. Scales of head not very strongly keeled. One azygos —

shield between the supranasals ; scales in 23 rows; color brownish green,

no side stripe or mottling. q

c. smaller. Andamans. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

‘Like the last, but the brown color predominating, belly greenish

white brown, blotched. (In bad state.)

d. adult like b. in bad state. Fang, 0.70 long.

e. two specimens. Lower Bengal.

The larger has 25 rows of scales.

2 LRN AIRES ae.

» > gee

Catalogue of Reptiles, 75

Ff. 2 specimens like. c.

only smaller. Andamans.. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

g. small, adult. Nicobars.

This is the type of 7. Cantori, Blyth.

It is in a very bad state but would seem to be like b. in coloration:

throat is scarcely mottled greenish brown; belly unmottled. Scales

in 27 rows.

_ it is no doubt also the 7. puniceus, purpureus and. purpureo-macu-

latus (!) of Dr. Gray. é

All the above species and varieties seem connected by certain per-

sistent characters. Supranasals separated by an azygos shield. Second

upper labial margining the preorbital pit in front. Scales well keeled

in 23 to 27 rows. Coloration in the genus is not of much value, as it is

a variable character, especially after long immersion in spirits, yet it

seems to have been much relied on, to judge by the epithets fastened

on to the species by very eminent Naturalists,

T. @ramrneus, Shaw.

a. many specimens. Sylhet, Birma, Malacca.

On the authority of these assigned localities, I retain this as a dis-

tinct species, otherwise, were it confined to Bengal, I should hardly

venture to do so. ‘The second labial touches the preorbital pit in front,

one azygos shield (sometimes divided) separates the supranasals. Scales

of the body not strongly keeled, in from 19 to 21 rows. Form slender

and tail longish,compared with 7. carinatus, and scales much less keeled,

Were the species more local, the feeble carination of the scales and

slender form would only, I think, weigh sufficiently to constitute a

race, but as the distribution seems almost co-extensive with the stouter

T’. carinatus, the above characters have greater weight and constitute a

specific distinction. I myself have-never remarked it in Pegu, where

2’. carinatus would seem to replace it to a great extent.

T. rrragonocernatus, Merr.

a. fine adult. Colombo. Dr. Kelaart.

T. eryrururvs, Cantor. (?)

Supranasals contiguous. Second upper labial forms front margin

of prorbital pit. Scales keeled, in twenty-three rows. Supranasals

contiguous.

a. small adult. No record.

_,This seems to be uniform brownish green without markings. It

differs from the type in having 23 and not 21 rows of scales. It ig

very possibly a variety of 7’. carinatus with the azygos shield on the

snout suppressed. Perhaps 7’. anamallensis, Giinth.

T. Anpersont, Theobald.

Second upper labial forms: the anterior margin of preeorbital pit:

supranasals separated by an azygos shield. Scales keeled, in 25 rows.

Color above and below uniform rich brown. Belly and sides con-

spicuously white spotted.

76 ~ Catalogue of Reptiles.

a. Type. No record.

I have designated this beautiful species after Dr. Anderson, our pre-

sent hard working and zealous officiating Curator.

T, montrcota, Ginth.

Parias maculata, Gray.

Parias neligrensis, Jerdon apud Blyth.

a. adult and young. Darjeeling, W. T. Blanford, Esq.

Second upper labial forms part of preorbital pit. A very minute

azygos scale between the supranasals. Scales faintly keeled in 23 rows.

Superciliaries very large. Pale brown with a vertebral row of large,

square, dark brown blotches. Along the sides a row of small, dark

spots. Belly dark, mottled. A pale temple streak.

a. young. (var?) Back barred, alternate dark and light brown:

scales in 25 rows. No record.

T, srRIGoLus, Gray.

T’. Neelgherriensis, Jerdon J. A. 8S. XXII. 524.

Parias maculata, Gray apud Blyth, Mus. label.

a. young. Nilghirris. W. Theobald, Esq., Jr.

The shield before the przorbital pit is divided from the second upper

labial. ‘Two scale-like supranasals in contact. On each side a smaller

scale, and behind two large scales, separated by an azygos scale, the

same size as a supernasal. Scales well keeled in 21 rows.

Color brown with a line of darker vertebral spots, with smaller ones

below. Many scuta dark tipped.

This is a common species about Ootakamund.

T. Waeuert, Schl.

Tr. maculatus, Gray.

Tr. formosus, Gray, not Mill. and Schl.

Trig Sumatranus, Cantor.

Tr. subannulatus, Gray.

Tropidolemus, Schlegelr, Bleeker.

a, fine adult. Singapore. Brigadr. Frith.

Scale before preorbital pit separated from second upper labial. Scales

strongly keeled in 23 to 20 rows. Scales of head very strongly keeled,

very imbricate. Supranasals contiguous, ridged, over-impending.

Coloration and pattern handsome, vivid, variable, black, yellow and

green banded and spotted.

T. opscurus, Theobald.

a. young. No record.

Shield in front of the preorbital pit separated from the second upper _

labial. An azygos shield separates the supernasals. Scales keeled im

Catalogue of Reptiles. 77

25 rows. Back uniform brown, sides green, Spotted and mottled.

Belly greenish white, brown barred and spotted ; superciliaries well

defined.

T. Anamattensts, Giinth. Anamallies,

T. mucrosquamatus, Cantor. Assam.

PELTOPELOR, Gunrner.

P. macroteris, Beddome. = _Anamallies.

CALLOSELASMA, Copz.

C. ruopostoma, Reinw, Siam.

HALYS, Gray.

H. Hratayanvs, Giinth. Garhwal.

H. Elliotti, Jerdon. Nighirris.

HYPNALE, Frratiaer.

H. neva, Laur. Ceylon. Anamallies,

CENCHRIS, Daun,

C. Conrorrrrx, L.

a. fine specimen, North Carolina, Rev. F. F. Fitzgerald.

This specimen is labelled “ contortriz,”’ but the scales of the head are

keeled. It is pale brown with large squarish, dark brown blotches

down each side, but not united along the vertebral line. Perhaps

C. piscivorus.

b. fine adult. Lo (7) Do. (?)

This specimen, which is a large one, has the scales of the head keeled

but not strongly, and those behind the eye large and smooth.

c. young.

b, and ¢, are both probably the variety named C, atrofuscus, Troost.

FAMILY VIPERID®.

DABOIA, Gray.

D. Russerut, Shaw.

a, adult.

6:;) ido.

c. do. (bleached),

d. do. (fine). Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart,

78 Catalogue of Reptiles.

half grown.

do.

young.

adult and young.

ECHIS, Merrem. (sp.)

KE. cantata, Schneid.

a. large adult and two young. Salt Range. W. Theobald

Junior, Esq,

oe SS

b. young. Upper India. India House.

VIPERA.

V. ammopytss, Latr.

a, adult and young. Europe. Hungarian Museum.

Nose armed with a horn covered with scales.

PELIAS.

P, vERUS.

a. fine adult.

b. smaller. Chesshire. E. Blyth, Esq.

c. several specimens. England. Messrs. Hancock and

Strickland.

d, adult. Norway.

SECOND SUB-CLASS: BATRACHTA.

ORDER BATRACHIA SALIENTIA,

A. AGLOSSA, I. Haplosiphona.

II. Diplosiphona.

(No Indian members. )

B. OpistHuoGLossa. I, OxypDAcTYLA.

FAMILY RANID At.

OXYGLOSSUS, Tscnupr.

-O. Lima, Tsch. | Bengal. Siam.

aaa

tubercle.

Catalogue of Reptiles, 79

RANA, Avcrorum.,

- TIGRINA, Daud.

. brama, Less.

viltigera, Weigm.

rugulosa, Weigm.

a. adult male. South India. Dr. Jerdon.

6. adult female and young. Calcutta.

¢e. adult stuffed.

Py Sy by BY

d. young (?). Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart,

R. crassa, Jerdon.

a, adult and young, Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

b. ditto, Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

South India. Dr. Jerdon.

This species is closely affined to R. tigrina. It differs, however, in

having a more obtuse snout and a conspicuously broader occiput. The

Supratympanitic ridge curves down much more sharply over the

tympanum behind, than the same ridge in R. tigrina. The museum

specimens are in a poor state, and those of the last Species especially

have been rammed go ruthlessly into their bottles that no force can

dislodge them for close comparison,

R, rusca, Blyth.

a. fine adult. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

b. adult. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

c. several specimens. Tenasserim W. Theobald, Esq., Jnr.

d, tadpoles. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

This species attains to nearly the size of R. tigrina, but the colour

is very uniform; where there are markings they are blurred and in-

distinct, quite different from the distinct maculation of R. tigrina. Rusty

brown is the prevailing hue, with or without a pale median stripe.

R. BENGALENsIs, Gray (Blyth.)

a many specimens, India generally,

b. ditto. Ceylon, Dr. Kelaart.

c. one ditto, Pegu. Major Berdmore.

Body covered with numerous small scattered warts, given to

anastomose with one another. Toes webbed. Fingers free, long, subequal.

Above greyish brown, mottled darker. Beneath white, throat reticu-

lately marked. No canthus rostralis ; nostril with a posterior papillary

R. escutenta, L, France, J. Malherbe, Esq.

6, large adult, Hurope, Hungarian Museum,

80 Catalogue of Reptiles.

R. remporarta, L. England. Hancock, Esq.

R. curreora, Dum. et Bib (Blyth.) .

R. hexadactyla, Less.

a, adult. South India. Dr. Jerdon.

b. ditto and young. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

R. virriazra, Weigm..

R. assimilis, Blyth. Kelaart Prod. Faun. Zeyl.

R. agricola, Jerdon. J. A. S. XXII. 532

R. altilabris, Blyth. Ditto. XXIV. 220

a. many specimens. India. Birma.

b. ditto. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

c. young. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

d, tadpoles.

R. kunt, Schl. Ceylon.

R. cyanophlyctis, Schneid. Ceylon.

R. Liebigt, Ginth. Sikim.

R. gracilis, Weigm. Himalayas, Madras.

R. Malabarica, Jerdon, J. A. Malabar. S. XXII.

R. flavescens, Jerdon, Forests of the Peninsula.

R. curtipes, Jerdon, J. A. 8. XXII. Forests of the Peninsula.

R. Nilagirica, Jerdon.J. A. 8S. XXIL. Wynaad and Nilghiries.

There are no reptiles in India in such a confused state as the Ss

Ranide, and I can add but little towards disentangling the shadowy

species, real enough perhaps, but not as yet characterised. ‘The series

in the Museum is a very poor one, and the Rawide from all parts. of

India must be assiduously collected, before sound results can be

obtained. Let us hope that an urgent appeal for frogs from all

quarters of India will be liberally responded to by local naturalists

and collectors, without which aid the subject must long remain in its

present unsatisfactory state. Hach contributor should not send 4 a

merely the most conspicuous frogs from his neighbourhood, but all

the species and varieties he can procure.

R. prerens, Harl.

a. tadpoles (?) North Carolina. Rey. F. Fitzgerald.

HOPLOBACTRACHUS, Purzrs.

H. ceyianicus, Peters. Ceylon.

PYXICEPHALUS, Tscuupr, (sp).

P. previcers, Schneid.

Spheerotheca strigata, Giinth, Bat, Sal. 20.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 81

LTomopterna strigata, Giinth. Bat. Sal. 20. Pl. 2, fig. A.

Tomnopterna Delalandii, Tsch. Giinth. Bat. Sal. 129,

P. fodiens, Jerdon, teste Giinther sed ?

P. pluvialis, Jerdon, Cat. Tud. Rep. 411.

This species has undergone many vicissitudes at the hands of Dr.

Giinther, being at one time located in India then referred to the Cape, and

finally recalled to its proper quarters in the East. On what grounds

Dr. Giinther so hastily ignored the testimony of Dr. Jerdon as to the

Indian origin of the species, it is hard to say ; the more so, as Dr. Jerdon

had furnished many specimens from the Madras Presidency, where he

was not only resident, but engaged in scientific pursuits, and his

testimony therefore might, it would be supposed, have been allowed

great weight in such a question. Dr. Giinther tells us, (it is true) “that

he found this species in the collection of Sir A. Smith,” and adds, “ it

was evident that the specimens presented by Mr. Jerdon to the British

Museum were not procured in the East Indies as indicated by that

gentleman !” In other words, Dr. Jerdon, as an Indian naturalist, had

no claims to be believed on a matter-of-fact coming within his personal,

cognisance. When, however, preparing his Catalogue of Indian Reptiles,

Dr. Giinther seems to have discovered from the Brothers Schlagin-

tweit that the Indian naturalist who collected the specimens was oddly

enough right as to where they came from, and that the English savant,

who merely received them and decided ex-cathedra, was wrong. The

specimens are therefore re-transferred not only to the habitat, but

also to the genus in which the Indian naturalist has placed them !!

I may after this perhaps be allowed to be a little sceptical as to Dr.

Giinther’s identification of P. fodiens and P. plwwialis of Dr. Jerdon.

The Museum collection, unfortunately, is of little use. There is no

specimen of P. fodiens, Jerdon, which agrees as far as can be judged

with that gentleman’s descriptions, “ greenish marked with brown,”

but it no more resembles Dr. Giinther’s figure (loc. cit.) of Spherotheca

strigata, than it resembles any other figure in the book. I have, how-

ever, from Pegu, specimens closely resembling the figure, and I doubt

not the true P. plwialis of Dr. Jerdon. P. fodiens occurs too, I think,

in Pegu, but never associated with the other, and much more rarely.

It is, I believe with Dr. Jerdon, a totally distinct species, having a

merely generic resemblance to the other, and both species I have

procured alive.

a. adult (bad state). Ceylon, Dr. Kelaart.

P. ropigens, Jerdon.

Above mottled brown, with a pale median stripe from occiput to

- vent. Below white.

P. Rurescens, Jerdon. Malabar Coast.

P. Frithi, Theobald.

a. adult. J essore. —Frith, Esq.

Form much as in P. fodiens, tumid ; skin quite smooth. _ Metatarsal

spur distinct. Uniform vinous, red and brown above; white beneath.

_ This specimen has been long preserved in spirit, but seems an undee

seribed species.

82 Catalogue of Reptiles.

P. BREVICEPS.

P. lividus, Blyth.

a. no record. Old collection.

FAMILY DISCOGLOSSID.

MEGALOPHRYS, Kust.

M. montana, Kuhl. Ceylon.

M. ereas, Blyth. Sikim. Captain W. S. Sherwill, J. A. 8.

XXIII. p. 299.

T cannot find the type of Mr. Blyth’s description in the Museum.

M. gurrvnara, Blyth. Pegu. Major Berdmore. J. A.S. XXIV.

p. TET.

The type specimens are no longer discoverable in the Museum.

The types of the two Batrachians affined to Megalophrys from Sikim,

teste Blyth, J. A. S: XXIII. p. 300, are also undiscoverable in the

Museum collections. It is tolerably clear that none of them belong to

the genus, but what they are cannot now be ascertained.

XENOPHRYS, Guntur.

X. monticota, Ginth Sikim.

Khasi Hills.

CACOPUS, GunrHeR.

CG. systoma, Schneid. Carnatic.

CG. globulosus, Ginth. Russelconda.

SECTION BUFONINA.

FAMILY RHINODERMATID &.

DIPLOPELMA, Gunrumnr.

D. ornatum, Dum. et Bib. |

a. four specimens Goalpara. Dr. Thornburn.

These specimens were labelled Hngystoma Malabaricum, but thoug

bleached seem to agree with Ginther’s description of D. ornatum.

b, five adult Engystoma rubrum, Ceylon. Dr, Kelaart.

(

FF y

< "

Catalogue of Reptiles. 83

D. putcurum, Ginth.

Engystoma.

a. four bleached specimens. Arakan. Col. Phayre.

Engystoma.

a. SiX specimens. Beerbhoom. W. Theobald,

[Junior, Esq.

Engystoma Berdmorei, Blyth.

The type specimens are no longer in the Museum,

a, adult. Pegu. W. Theobald,

[Junior, Esq.

FAMILY BUFONID J.

BUFO, Avororum.

B. metanostictrus, Schneid.

a. adult stuffed.

b. ditto in spirit.

c. ditto. Ceylon. Dr, Kelaart.

d, two adults and three young. Mergui. Major Berdmore.

B. Kewaarri, Ginth. Ceylon.

B. asper, Schl, Mergui.

SCUTIGER, Tuzozatp.

Aspect of Bufo. Maxillary and palatine teeth none; tympanum hid-

den; parotoids prominent. Fingers and toes free. In the male four

callous plates across the sternum, and callous upper surfaces to the two

inner fingers, and a trace of the same on the inner front edge of the

_ third. Tongue parted behind, Hustachian tubes obsolete.

S. Srxxmvensts, Blyth.

Bombinator Sikkimmensis, Blyth, J. A. 8. XXIII, 300.

Back of male warty, with rows of large glandular tubercles with an

_ apical pore interspersed. Limbs above covered with smaller glandular

_ tubercles ; parotoids ridge-like, running from the upper margin of

orbit, and shelving down a little ; Snout blunt. Nostril lateral below

-&@ most indistinct canthus rostralis. Skin beneath Smooth with four

embedded callous plates like the plates of Hmyda when dried. Plates

roughened by numerous dark brown miliary tubercles with a per-

ceptible linear and anastomising arrangement. °

The female is smoother, less warty, and wants the sternal callosities

80 marked in the male.

a. maale and female. Sikkim. Capt. Sherwill,

84 Catalogue of Repteles.

SECTION HYLINA.

FAMILY POLYPEDATID®.

-HYLORANA, Tscnvnr.

H. macropactyna, Giinth.

a. two specimens.

No record, but probably from Pegu.

These specimens have no median stripe, but I doubt not they are

merely a variety of this species, as the coloration of Hylorana is very

variable. .

H. eryvturma, Schl.

Limnodytes nigrovittatus, Blyth.

Limnodytes macularvus, Blyth.

a. large female. Mergui. Major Berdmore.

b. three specimens. Mergui. W. Theobald, Esq., Jnr.

These specimens are all named nigrovittatus. The type of macularius —

is no longer 10 the Museum, but my own collection convinces me that

both the size and colour of this species is very variable.

HH. Tyrteri, Theobald.

In size equal to H. erythrea, but with much more pointed snout,

though not so narrow a muzzle as H. macrodactyla. Upper lip and

beneath white. Back reddish brown. No pale lateral stripes.

a. type. Dacca. Lt.-Col. Tytler.

Tt is possible this may be a large adult H. macrodactyla, but the head j

is proportionably much broader across the occiput. More specimens —

are required to decide the point.

HI. wanapartca, Dum. et Bib. Malabar.

Hi. vemporauis, Giinth. Ceylon.

POLYPEDATES, Dumuri xt Brsron.

P. uevoomystax, Gravenh.

Ee quadrilineatus, Wiegm.

gq. many specimens. Calcutta.

b. adult. J essore. — Frith, Esq.

- ¢, three adults. Silhet. Skipwith, Esq.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 85

d. two ditto. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart,

e. many specimens. Mergui. Captain Berdmore and

W. Theobald, Esq., Jr.

f. adult. Chaibassa, Captain Haughton.

P. cruciaER, Blyth.

P. leucomystax, Gravenh. in part apud Giinther.

a. four adults. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

This is I think avery distinct species from the last, which also ac-

companies it in Ceylon, though Giinther unites them. Putting aside

the peculiar pattern of the back, the head is conspicuously broader and

blunter in this species than in P. lewcomystaw.

P. urvives, Blyth.

a. many specimens. Tenasserim. W. Theobald, Esq., Jr.

P. MARMORATUS.

a, adults young and

tadpoles. Pegu. Major Berdmore.

A well marked species with completely webbed toes ; very rugous

pustular back; sternum smooth, belly pustular—Disks large. ,

P. mrcrorympanum, Giinth. Ceylon.

P. pLrEvRostictus, Giinth. Madras Presidency.

P. vartABILis, Jerdon., Nilgherries.

The two are probably the same species.

P. rEtiouLatus, Giinth. Ceylon.

P. nquns, Giinth. Ceylon.

P. arawana, Giinth. Afghanistan.

The habitat is remarkably doubtful.

P. smaraapinus, Kelaart. Ceylon.

“Hye bones armed with spines. Limbs studded with tubercular

sharp pointed spines.”

A very peculiar species and probably a distinct generic form.

IXALUS, Dumerm ur Brzroy,

VARIABILIS, Giinth. Ceylon.

TEMPORALIS, Giinth. Ceylon.

FEMORALIS, Giinth. Ceylon.

LEUCORHINUS, Martens. Ceylon,

. GLANDULOsA, Jerdon. South India.

No specimens of this Indian genus are in the museum.

86 Catalogue of Reptiles.

RHACOPHORUS, Koat.

R. maximus, Ginth.

R. Reinwardti, Dum. et Bib.

a. adult and young. Naga hills. — Owen, Esq.

The locality “ Afghanistan” recorded by Giinther is very doubtful. The

young differs much from the adult. In spirit the adult is grey, the

young deep blue, and the arms and sides of hind limbs are fringed with

a fold of skin which disappears in the adult. In the young too the

tympanum is very indistinct.

FAMILY HYLID A.

HYLA, Dumerim er Bison.

H. caRro.rnensis, Penn.

a. North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.

H. —? North Carolina. Rev. F. Fitzgerald.

FAMILY HYLADACTYLID &.

HYLADACTYLUS, Tscuunr.

H. srvirratus, Cantor, J. A. 8. XVI. 1064.

Callula pulchra, Gray (sp.)

a. adult. Pegu. W. Theobald, Esq., Jr.

ORDER BATRACHIA GRADIENTIA.

FAMILY SALAMANDRIDAN.

SALAMANDRA, Lavrentt.

S. macutosa, Laur.

a. adult. France. — Malherbe, Esq.

TRITON, Tscuvnt.

_ 'T, verrucosvs, (!) sec.

a many specimens. England. H. Strickland, Esq.

NOTOPHTHALMUS, Gray.

N. vreiescens, Baird.

Triton nullepunctata, Dekay.

a, North Carolina. Rev, F. Fitzgerald.

Catalogue of Reptiles. 87

LOPHINUS, Rarivesque.

L. puncrarus, Merr.

Lissotriton, Bell. (sp.)

a. many specimens. England. A. Hancock, Esq.

b. two ditto. Europe. Hungarian Museum.

FAMILY PLETHODONTID A.

DESMOGNATHUS, Barren.

D. niger, Green.

a, North Carolina. Rey. F. Fitzgerald.

SPELERPES, Rarinzsour.

S. satmonua, Storer (?)

a. North Carolina, Rey. F. Fitzgerald.

FAMILY PROTEID A, |

PROTEUS, Scurerszr.

P. anqurnus, Laur.

a. adult. Carniola, Sir Humphry Davy.

Presented through Sir Edward Ryan, President, Asiatic Society of

Bengal.

CCHCILIA, Waater,

C. oxyura, Dum. et Bib. Malabar.

EPICRIUM, Wacuzr.

HE. eturinosum, L.

a. two adults. Ceylon. Dr. Kelaart.

pale lateral band well marked.

in the Nilghiris and in Pegu, but it ig

Fine specimens with the

I have noted this species

} very scarce.

EK. monocuroum, Bleeker.

a. Pegu. Major Berdmore,

A rare Species without the lateral stripe.

bad »

88 Catalogue of Reptiles.

Catalogue of mounted skeleton of Reptiles in the Asiatic Society’s

Museum. |

CATAPHRACTA.

Txustupo. Two skeletons, in poor state, probably T. radiata.

Mavsuria, Emys.

The debris of the specimen formerly exhibited as a stuffed animal,

but now only in fragments. Head, legs, &c. &c. missing.

Baracur Tuurat, 24 inches.

PaNGoHURA TECTURA, adult and young.

TRIONYX GANGETICUS.

Grana, cuutonra, carmtra. Many heads imperfect.

Many heads of Orana and Chelonia.

EMYDOSAURIA.

Crocoprnus paLustris. Fine skeleton of catalogue (ante).

Young 8.60x20.90, 28.20=5770 Dr. Pearson (?)

CG. porosus, Skeleton of young, from Barrackpore.

7.10 15.60 26.50=49.20. Presented by T. H. Pritchard, Esq.

SQUAMATA (Saurta).

Hyprosaurus sanvator 54.5 inches 86 candal vertebra.

Do. do. 39.5 do. 86 do.

TILIQUA RUFESCENS.

Srrana PoNTICERIANA.

GECKO VERUS.

LyRIOCEPHALUS SCUTATUS.

Srcotopis REEVESI.

Uromastix HarpWIcKII.

CHAM@LEO VULGARIS.

OPHIDIA.

Naga.

Naga, head and neck.

PytHon.

BaTRACHIA.

RANA TIGRINA.

BuFO MELANOSTICTUS. ~

APPENDIX.

a ee

A few words will not here be out of place on the important ques-

tion of collecting and preserving Reptiles. Two things should be

borne in mind. Frstly, to collect every species procurable in the

neighbourhood, how common soever some may seem ; and, secondly,

to collect systematically and not in a desultory fashion as is too fre-

quently the case.

Many persons may think that common species are of little value,

but this is a great mistake, as well preserved specimens of our com-

monest reptiles would be acceptable even in our Calcutta Museum,

and equally so in the numerous Museums in Kurope and America,

whose name is legion. It is hardly possible, therefore, to collect too

many specimens of anything, if only they are -well preserved. In-

attention to a few points, I shall now advert to, is the cause of go

many of our Museum specimens, being in poor condition, dissolved,

pulpy, value-less, and a fault of an opposite character is observable in

others, which are shrunken and look much like dried sprats, This arises

from the specimens having been dried from the evaporation of the

spirits, owing to faulty stoppers.

Not 10 per cent. of the bottles in the Museum are air-tight, and

a constant evaporation of spirit consequently goes on. The spirits

are replenished from time to time to the great injury of the speci-

men. If this process of refilling is delayed, and the specimen dries

completely and enters into the dried-sprat phase of its existence, no

subsequent cunning will avail to restore the shrunken outlines, and

the specimen is permanently spoiled. The simple expedient of ceiling

the stoppers with wax never seems to have suggested itself to

the minds of either Council, Curators, or Taxidermists, hence all this

ruin ; hence these tears.

Any one commencing to collect systematically should provide

himself with a number of glass or stone-ware bottles of two

sizes. The large size should be of not less than four inches in

diameter; currant bottles, for instance, well stoppered. In such

jars snakes up to five feet in length may be stowed. Larger snakes,

young crocodiles, turtles, &c., may be accommodated in large stone

Jars, specially provided for them. The second size bottles may be

about the size of common lozenge bottles, but the great thing is

always to proportion the bottle to the specimen and vice vers’. Some

persons seem to think that the specimens are never to come out again.

Another thing to bear in mind is, that when once the muscles are set,

no re-arrangement of the coil is possible. The specimen must be ar-

ii Appendix.

ranged in a bottle such as it is destined permanently to occupy, and

with some attention to its comfort as it were, or, as Isaac Walton

expresses it of the worm, ‘‘as though you loved rt.” The spirits

used should be from 20 to 40 over proof (weaker spirits are not to be

depended on in this climate,) and for scientific purposes, such

spirits can always be procured from the distiller free of duty (say

about Rs. 2-4 a gallon).

First catch your snake. This is easily done by pinning him down

with a walking stick, and then seizing the nape of the neck. The

snake being then secured, either divide the vertebra of the neck with

a pair of nail scissors, or make a slit in the cardiac region, and pluck

out the heart with the finger and thumb. I prefer the latter plan.

In about 20 minutes the snake will be nearly or quite dead, and

should then be slit up, and the viscera extracted. If all muscular

contractility has subsided, coil it, head down and belly up, in a proper

bottle, and fill up with spirits, hoisting the bottle, so as to eliminate

all air bubbles. If the stimulus of the spirits causes the snake to coil

irregularly, take it out again and recoil it, as it is of importance that

it should set in a proper shape. After 24 hours either pour

off the spirits and add fresh, or else transfer to a fresh bottle.

It is imperative with large or moderate specimens, if they are to keep

well, that both the abdomen be opened and the spirits changed once.

The first used spirits will do several times, as they merely seem to

absorb and remove the aqueous and other impurities of the freshly

killed specimen. Small snakes, frogs, and lizards may be simply

opened without removing the viscera. The bottles should be packed

in a box with compartments filled with paddy husk, and the corks or

elass stoppers well ceiled down with several coatings of wax

and oil in the proportion of three to one. )

Before bottling up, a note should be made of the length, size,

and coloration of the specimen, with such other detail as the specimen

may suggest. The viscera should be examined for ENTOZOA.

Young turtles should be preserved in spitit, previously making a

slit in front and behind to ensure the free penetration of the spirits.

As a matter of humanity, they should be killed before placing in

spirits by dividing the nape with nail scissors. They will, of

course, retract their heads at the sight of the scissors ; but if the —

scissors partly open are firmly forced down along the top of the head,

they will enclose the neck near its junction with the upper

shell, and severance is then easily effected. Large turtle may be

treated in the same manner, only the strongest tin plate cutters are is

requisite. It requires care too, approaching in front a large T’rionyx,

as it has a most powerful and remorseless bite. The plan that Lb

adopted with a large T’rionyx which I once got at Bhagulpoor, was to

make a slit behind the thigh and, thrusting in one arm, seize and tear ies

out the heart. It is a ticklish job, however, to hold the animal securely,

as he evinces great displeasure and wrath at having his privacy thus,

trespassed on! Anything, however, is better than the plan which L

once heard of being resorted to, of boiling the animals alive. The best. —

Appendix, | ill

plan, however, is patiently to watch with a noose and catch the

animal’s head when protruded. If cleverly done, the head can be now

pulled out, and the creature decapitated with a chopper.

The shell should be well cleaned of flesh, anointed with arsenical

soap and dried in a shady place. The head, feet, and viscera of a

fair specimen should be preserved in spirit. The coloration should be

noted during life, and an endeavour made to ascertain the limits of

growth to which each species attains.

Young crocodiles should be preserved in spirit after opening the ab-

domen. The heads of larger ones may be simply dried, and the skeletons

of large ones also. All that is requisite is to roughly clean the larger

bones of flesh, and then hang them up in the sun to dry, first of all

brushing them over with arsenical soap, to preserve the ligamental

attachments. The head and legs may be separated, and the spinal

column divided in several places for convenience of packing. Note

the dimension and sex of specimen, and also the arrangement of the

scutes on the neck, which is a specific character. The skin may easily

be preserved flat, if brushed over with arsenical soap inside. For

stufling, specimens 8 or 10 feet in length will be found most convenient.

Search the viscera for Enrozoa. If, as is often the case, these parasites

are attached, they should not be pulled off, but the piece of skin cut

out, to which the animal is affixed.

The best work for the student is unquestionally Giinther’s Catalogue

of the Reptiles of British India,—after this, the British Museum

Catalogues—especially that of ‘ Lizards” and Giinther’s ‘“ Colubrine

Snakes.” The Journal of the Asiatic Society may be ransacked

with advantage, and much interesting information gained from the

papers of Cantor, Blyth, and Jerdon. Enough has, I trust, now been

said to induce some naturalists to enter the tempting field of Herpe-

tology, and to convince the most sceptical or listless of the great aid

to science that almost any one in this country might afford, by a little

well directed energy, perseverance and zeal.

NN NNN NN NNN Se

a : . a - ™

‘ °

AEN ree gi

, Stcderé

— 2

“,

Crt bO.

vadehes Chanrre

Drawn & LAP akthe Gove Schick cf Art Cal.

, EE ee

Naas P12.

‘

BATAGUR BERDMOREW BLYTH

> rs - 7 a

ques 29049 emg poyppounig Ag

TO IVS 190RS sh0g 2 FO yYnTR (UMDosgy

“Eh d BEEN

| ‘A7798 . wove ‘920 VLV71990 HNoV LE

“wt EL d 92 oN

quays S04 uum Dyyouny bo

V2 4p y0 POVYIS. GAOD AYR LP ol2I 7 UMD f | Aveo “vy wor NIL VUNHSON YY

3 poems asoys emg oyypouroy hy

youp ne IPD PAYJ0 200428 4 OD PY FO ZY TB UMD

»* TPUDBL f ‘o° hi

SD Laat EG | a ]

prumnopge -97e rb

= - S7OU? Oy fe

GIO 4 OF IP : ‘Qouembrrs f zw SABE) Ou?

saan 3807 bd : :

won 2805 i huevo ve aDagepeas A

ada a

. . c ae $3

thd 'L% oN -JHLIWS WANHSONVA

LET DQ

eae Y

Meteorological Observations. i

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

| taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

inthe month of January 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

| Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the H ygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

be % Range of the Barometer = - Leite of the Tempera-

aos during the day. Pie ture during the day.

20 A eg b> &

vo a

Date. | 5 & A A :

so | Max. | Min. | Dif. | £3 | Max. | Min. | Dif.

Si SB a H |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) ) ) )

1 30.097 | 30.161 | 30.040 0.121 65.5 73.5 58.0 | 15.5

2 .120 185 O71 114 64.2 71.8 58.2 , 13.6

3 .088 176 .008 .168 63.0 72.2 55.4 | 16.8

4 .OA8 125 | 29.987 138 65.4 74.5 eF.4| 17.1

5 29.996 094 .928 .166 67.8 77.5 59.0 | 18.5

6 .988 064 935 129 70.3 79.5 64.7 | 14.8

7 | 30.001 072 958 117 |. 71.8 78.5 | 66.5 | 12.0

8 .030 120 .988 132 69.9 76.3 65.4 | 10.9

9 .003 077 .948 129 67.0 75.0 59.5 | 15.5

10 027 111 972 139 66.2 74.7 58.5 | 16.2

11 072 .166 | 30.019 147 | 65.4 74.5 | 58.0] 16.5

12 101 M7 .037 140 66.3 76.0 58.2 | 178

13 LOL 184 053 131 68.2 76.5 61.0 | 15.5

14 .103 vga 052 219 | 60:7 78.2 | 62:7 | kie5

15 122 207 O47 160 67.9 76.4 60.5 | 15.9

16 071 164 | 29.996 .168 66.9 75.4 09.5 | 15.9

17 014 109 951 158 66.6 76.0 60.4 | 15.6

18 013 .083 964 119 67.0 76.5 08.8 | 17:7

19 .035 126 975 151 68.2 76.7 60.5 | 16.2

20 075 151 | 30.017 134 68.8 77.2 61.6 | 15.6

21 .078 166 012 154, 67.4 76.2 59.2 | 17.0

22 .039 122 | 29.969 153 68.1 78.3 58.8 | 19.5

23 29.962 045 877 .168 69.8 79.9 59.6 | 20.3

24 984 071 .916 155 70.9 79.0 63.0 | 16.0

25 30.022 O85 .968 “117 70.2 79.9 62.0 | 17.9

26 037 128 .983 145 70.2 78.0 62.5 | 15.5

27 29.992 O86 907 17 71.2 79.2 64.4 | 14.8

28 943 O17 .879 .138 73.1 80.0 67.5 | 12.5

. 29 30.015 .LO6 -966 140 72.0 80.0 65.5 | 14.5

30 O11 91 .938 153 70.3 80.0 62.5 | 17.5

31 OO .088 .950 138 65.9 69.7 62.0 al

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

seeesmonctor Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

@ day. | .

W Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continwed.)

1 4 Se Sey gy a. oF

43 =| E 5 aH | OSs |e.

a eet eee | g aa | 2s a3e

> 2 m2 | Ss B | ae

2 Bi) Geo tee “ $e |ees | Soe

Dafa eos | ae 3 ae as oe | 388

FS 14/3 | 4: | a2 | 82 |2281see

= ~~ ra

ee fa | Be | ee | SR | SS | eee eee

Fe S es ee | oSso | ans

o A > 5 Pp o > Og Pro | OUR

= A é) A = a7 |< =

es a a I a Ds Pe

0 Cy) 0 o Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

1 59.9 5.6 | 55.4) 10.1 | 0.449 4.98 2.00 | 0.71

2 58.0 6.2| 524] 11.8 A05 51 18 67

3 57.2 5.8 | 52.0| ie 400 AG 1.99 69

4 59.0 6.4| 53.9] 11.5 426 473 2.22 68

5 64.2 3.6 | 61.3 6.5 5A6 6.03 1.45 81

6 67.1 3.2 | 64.5 5.8 .607 68 40 83

7 67.5 4.3 | 64.1 77 599 56 .89 78

8 63.0 6.9 | 57.5 | 12.4 A481 5.30 2.68 66

9 59.1 7.9 | 52.8) 142 All 4.55 75 62

10 58.6 £6) .50% | 137 407 51 61 63

11 58.2 72| 52.41 13.0 405 50 AB 65

12 59.8 6.5 | 54.64) 11.7 437 84 31 68

13 62.3 5.9 | 57.6 | 10.6 A83 5.32 26 70

14 63.2 6.5 | 58.0] 11.7 489 38 5D 68

15 60.0 79 | 537 | “Tee A23 4.69 182 63

16 59.7 72 | 53.9| 13.0 A26 72 56 65

Wy 60.3 6.3 | 55.3] 11.3 AAT .96 25 .69

18 59.5 7.5 | 53.5) 13.5 421 66 64 64

19 61.0 7.2| 55.2| 13.0 445 92 66 65

20 61.8 7.0 | 56.2) 12.6 AG1 | 5.07 64 66

21 59.4, 8.0] 53.0] 144 Al4 4.58 81 62

22 60.3 eS | 544"). 140 A429 74 81 63

23 61.7 8.1| 55.2) 146 AB 99 3.05 62

24, 62.6 8.3 | 56.0] 14.9 458 5.02 21 61

25 62.9 me | Be “FS A75 .22 2.83” 65

26 62.5 7.7 | 56.3) 13.9 A62 08 97 63

Diy 63.3 7.9 | 57.0 49 A73 19 3.11 63

28 66.8 63) 6s |; 11s |- | 586 6.07 2.72 69

29 64.9 7.1| 59.2] 12.8 509 5.58 .92 66

30 61.9 9.4 | 65.2 |». 15.1 AAS 4.90 3.18 61

31 62.5 3.4 | 59.8 6.1 520 5.76 1.30 82

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

; Meteorological Observations, 11

» Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of January 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

3 Range of the Barometer | Range of the Tempera-

as: for each hour during Rae ture for each hour

oe = the month. 8 during the month.

taal

gQe3 | Max. | Min. | Dit. | 38 | Max. | Min. | Diff

ak a"

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO fy) i) ve)

Mid-

night. 30.038 | 30.136 | 29.954 | 0.182 65.1 70.5 59.8 | 10.7

1 .033 139 .940 199 64.3 70.0 58.7 | 11.3

2 925 138 -933 -205 63.6 70.0 59.0 | 11.0

3 .017 124 921 | .203 | 62.8 69.0 | 57.5 | 11.5

4 .012 119 .913 .206 62.3 68.5 06.8 | 11.7

5 .023 136 922 .214 61.8 67.5 56.2 | 11.3

6 .038 154 -934 .220 61.3 67.6 55.7 | 11.9

7 059 .170 946 224 61.2 67.6 50.4 | 12.2

8 .085 192 .969 223 63.2 70.0 57.6 | 12.4

9 110 .207 | 30.000 207 66.5 12.7 61.0 | 11.7

10 «LEO 198 017 18] 69.5 74.5 63.2 | 11.3

11 102 177 013 164 | 72.2 76.5 65.0 | 11.5

Noon. 074 156 | 29.985 7h 74.1 78:0 68.5 9.5

1 .037 121 .936 185 75.2 78.7 66.5 | 12.2

2 .007 .109 .909 .200 76.1 80.0 68.0 | 12.0

3 29.989 074 891 .183 76.6 80.0 68.7 | 11.3

4 .982 .073 879 194 75.6 79.0 69.4 9.6

5 -986 .078 877 201 74.5 78.5 69.7 8.8

6 .996 094 .890 .204 72.3 76.5 67.6 9.9

7 | 30.015 112 910 | .202 70.2 74.7 | 65.0! 9.7

8 034 132 945 .187 68.9 13.5 €4,.0 9.5

9 045 142 959 183 67.9 72.8 62.5 | 10.3

10 049 .153 .967 .186 66.8 72.5 61.7 | 10.8

ll 044, 7,15 .960 191 65.9 71.6 60.6 | 11.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

_ hours during the month. |

iv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,

im the month of January 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

a a3 4 om : = 65 .|-38

Btls | 2a 2 vo duigend ieee eae

e Pe | ee & S PS | Es aS

faa ) o fo) Ge + > oY 4 ee

= b = = hed 20 D .w = is) Oem

A = = = o et] = Se |o8d

D 5 ae | a 2 | ao. Ch Beet oe ks =a

Fe 3 | 8) 3. | BS | EB | see bees

= 2 ec 4 fs ae oO B.S ale +) ae

SO by So a 3 = q s ao = fo a

ae ‘a 5 Ry oe og a = 5-8

= A e) A = Se er es

Ce) ty) ) o Fnches.. |. T’. 215-15 E- aaee

Mid- .

night.| 61.0 Aol | Se 7.4, 0.485 | 5.38 . 15% ./ 0.78

if 60.4 3.9 | 56.9 74, A7T2 25 | AT 78

2°) 599 | 3711566) 7.0] 467 21;.| Bee oe

3 59.2 3-6 | 56.0 6.8 458 | an .30 .80

A, 58.6 3.7 |) 55.3 7a AAT 00 . ol . 79

5 58.3 3.0 | 5.1 6.7 AAA. 4.97 . 24 . .80

6 57.9 3.4 | 54.8 6.5 440 91 . 21 .80

7 58.0 Sue | eke 6.1 444 6 12 .82

8 59.0 A.2 | 55.2 8.0 445 97 52 7

9 60.6 5.9 | 55.9 10.6 456 | 5.05 . 2.14 . .70

10 61.8 al | (09.0 13.9 452 4.98 .90 .63

11 62.9 9.3 | 55.5 bow 450 .93 3.62 58

Noon.| 63.5 10.6 | 56.1 18.0 459 5.01 4.06 50

1 63.7 11.5 | 55.6 19.6 452 4.92 45 53

2 64.1 12.0 | 55.7 20.4 453 .92 By 51

3 64.3 12.3 | 55.7 20.9 453 91 .86 50

4 63.7 11.9 | 58.4 20.2 449 88 .60 52

5 63.9 10.6 | 56.5 18.0 465 5.07 14 55

6 64.1 8.2 | 57.5 14.8 481 27 d.oL 61

yf 63.5 Oe) DOA 12.1 491 40 2.65 67

8 63.2 5.7 | 58.6 10.3 499 ol 23 71

] 62.6 5.0 | 58.4 9.5 496 AZ 04, ia

10 62.1 4.7 | 58.3 8.5 494, 46 1.80 75

it 61.5 4.4 | 58.0 7.9 489 42 64 ie

—— tet te IE sen lea eg RR a TOOL OE TO

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. *

Meteorological Observations. v-

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

wm the month of January 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

nl a = , SS

Sg loo. = @ A

m2 |S'aa Prevailing ce

>| .@ | ¢ 5] direction of the -% | General aspect of the Sky.

a| 23 land Wind. oP

Als igs = 8

o (Inches 5

ae ., Ay pa : +4 Clear. Slightly foggy at mid-

night.

112.0 Clear

> Clear

110.7 Clear

Clear to 7 4. m., \ni to 3p. M.,

clear afterwards.

Chiefly clear. Foggy from 2

to 9 a. M.

Stratoni to 7 4. m., clear af.

terwards. Foggy at midnight &

from 7 to 10 p. M.

\ni to 8 a. M., clear to 2 Pp. M.,

\1 to 5 Pp. M., i afterwards.

Foggy at 1 a. m., & from 9 to 11

JT DD oOkheED =

P. M.

Chiefly clear. Slightly fogey

9 | 112.0

at midnight.

10 | 112.0 Clear to 114. M., \ito4p.m.,

clear afterwards. Foggy from 7

to 10 p. mM.

11 | 114.0 Clear to 6 4. m., \\i to 6 P. M.,

clear afterwards. Slightly foggy

at8 & 9p. mM.

12 | 111.5 Clear to 5 a.m., \wi & ito 10

A. M., \i & Wi to 5 p. M., clear

afterwards.

13 | 108.5 \ni to 44. M.,\i to10 4. w.,

stratoni afterwards.

14 | 111.0 Ni & \Wito 7 a. M., clear af.-

terwards.

15 | 113.0 Clear.

16 | 108.6 Clear

17 | 112.8 Clear. Slightly fogey at 2 &

3A. M.

18 | 112.0 Chiefly clear.

19 | 116.0 Clear to 11 4. m., \ni to 6 Pp.

M., clear afterwards.

20 | 112.4, Clear to 5 a. u., \\ito 9 a.M.,

. : clear afterwards.

21 | 112.8 ear.

22 | 114.7 Clear.

23 | 114.4 Clear to 3 p. m., \Wito 6 P.m.,

stratoni afterwards.

i to 5 vp. m., clear after-

wards.

vi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract. of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ga [25 = ee

38 |88q Prevailing g =

Cel hi at is

3 8 & 4 =| direction of the Fie | General aspect of the Sky.

a2 78 "Bees ae wo |.

Sf) Sk gue Wind. S 9

A = z = =

ft.

o (Inches

95) 114.4)... Clear to noon, seatd. >i to 5

p. M., clear afterwards.

96 | 113.4 Clear.

27 | 11 Clear to 3 A. M-, Wito7 P. M.,

stratoni aftérwards.

28 | 120.0 Stratoni to 6 A. M., scatd. i

to 5 Pp. M., clear afterwards.

29 | 114.3 Clouds of different kinds to 5

p. M., clear afterwards.

30 | 117.0 Clear to 5 a. M:, scatd. \i &

\.ito9 a. M., “i afterwards.

Strong wind at 65 P. M.

Silt he 0.05 |.N. . Stratoni to 10‘A. M., overcast

to5 p. M., clear afterwards.

Slightly foggy at 8 & 9 P. M.

Drizzled at 64 & 11 a. M. & at

1 P.M. eis

ts Bachata cn enamel Boy ik SDS 51) 5 2 Ee Ne rae eS ry

Zi Cirri, — i Strati,~i Cumuli,—i Cirro-strati, ~i Cumulo strati,~i Nimbi _

i Cirro cumuli. os

_ Meteorological Observations. ¥ii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January 1868,

Monrtuety Resvttrs.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer.for the month.., li, ... 30.038

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 4. M. on the 15th »», 30.207

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 p. wt. on the 23rd. »». 29.877

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month is ».. 0.330

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... os =f »», 30.120

Ditto ditto Min. ditto +4 rH i ».. 29.978.

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month... ». 0,142

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month _... at 1s §=668.3

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 &3 p. m. on the 28th, 29th, & 30th 80.0

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 4. m. on the 3rd. ie su GOA

Lxtreme range of the Temperature during the month ya 55 | BAG

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature .., o8 nen > noo

Etta Gitto Min. ditto, .. ie Cle

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... “ee 25,6

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... mA ny GG

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 6.7

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month ~ uy fe eee

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point ... 12.1

Inches

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month .,, fee ». 0.461

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month Sms we i. >o.08

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 2.52

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.67

eee se

dniehees

Rained 1 day,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours ee a+ 20:05

Total amount of rain during the month 0.05

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month A) 6 agli as som ok 0.02

Prevailing direction of the Wind... ae oe N.

vill Meteorological Observations.

i EEE

"dO UBT a

“UO Ue

* WANT NI ANHAHDADAMAMAAUMNMNMMATAAANATS

“UO Ue]

corr ac. NAAANAANAAANNH MHS

AND

‘UO ULBY

"MONT M

‘uo ule yYy

"Nr Aq" AA

"UO ULB]

with the number of days on

‘UO ULB YT

‘uO ULBY

MSM

‘uo ULV Ye ; ,

"MA res ro [en |

“UO ULbY 4

2. Sones

‘uo UIE)

“M xq 3

‘do ULeYy,

aes < imo 4

wind blew, together

articular wind was blowing, it raine

“UO ULB I

‘a Aq ss

"UO ULE

‘HSS

“HO UBT

“HS

"moO Ue yy

riod

“UO ULE

3 Kq nT

MO TLR AT

‘H

UO ULByT ;

‘NT Aq “of

"UO UIe{T

Ju N Vel

WO TLE YT

“FONT HAMMAM IANN i

Montaty RESULTS.

given hour any particular

te)

LObservations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, m the month of Jan.-1868.

hour, when any p

h ata

which at the same

“UO WIRY

. . “ur Senn Re MA AANTANMNTAANN

HON ON

“UO UIVY]

C = ONS sae mMnanc ee ae) cs

mW Aq *N

"mo ULE] wp

: SFAINNMDeKRS

NI pa By

Tables shewing the number of days on whic

“Ino Fy]

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorologica

Meteorological Observations. 1X

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

au the month of Lebruary 1868,

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Ne: 9s _ | Range of the Barometer En Resige of the Tempera-

a28 during the day. Pas ture during the day.

Soe a

Date. | So e :

| 32°) Max. | Min. | Dim | $3 | Max. | Min. | Diff

Sse SA

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo ) Oo 0

1 29.987 | 30.079 | 29.928 0.151 66.9 73.5 61.0 | 12.5

2 .988 .070 .918 .152 66.3 76.5 57.4 , 19.1

3 .969 034 .906 128 65.0 70.0 62.0 |. 8.0

4, .997 .070 .939 OL 66.3 12.5 6100s) 1455

5 30.017 .097 948 .149 66.0 74.0 58.5 | 15.5

6 |. 29.994 .O8O 921 159 66.9 76.4 58.5 | 17.9

be .999 064 948 ALG 68.4 77.8 59.0 | 18.3

8 | 30.045/ .135| .975| 160] 699 | 775 | 635! 140

9 .067 155 | 30.010 145 70.5 78.5 64.0 | 14.5

10 .055 124, .OOL 123 69.9 76.8 62.0 | 14.8

11 .035 106 | 29.969 PL 71.2 79.2 Ga.b°} - Wae7.

12 29.995 .069 949 .120 72.8 81.7 670): ) 14.7

13 942 .OOL .882 119 75.4 84.3 69.3 | 15.0

14, 30.006 .083 954 129 76.2 83.6 71.2) 12,

15 .064, 146 | 30.021 125 74.9 82.5 67.5 | 15.0

16 .059 142 | 29.997 145 fee 81.4, 65.5 | 15.9

aa 29.993 .067 .922 145 72.8 83.0 64.0 | 19.0

18 .963 .028 894 134 74.1 83.0 65.2 | 17.8

19 .922 .025 844 181 73.0 80.5 67.5 | 13.0

20 .838 | 29.893 143 .150 75.9 84.6 70.2 | 14.4

21 .873 .962 .810 152 78.0 88.5 70.5 | 18.0

22 .933 | 30.009 .869 140 79.6 87.0 Fars) 14.0

23 .859 | 29.935 .756 179 76.7 86.7 (Lo) 152

24, 145 811 .694, LaF 76.8 82.5 71.6 | 10.9

25 .855 .930 794 "136 75.4 82.6 69.0 | 13.6

26 .922 | 30.013 .870 143 foul 80.0 68.0 | 12.0

27 .920 .005 .855 .150 alee 80.7 62.6 | 18.1

28 .872 | 29.944 Bae: Ade 12.3 83.7 61.5 | 22.2

29 .807 .892 723 -169 72.6 82.8 64.5 | 18.3

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

_ Thermometer Means are derived, from the

the day.

hourly observations, made during

x Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

1 3 SH a> eed Cy ys mo

4 os 33 = rs) 5H sc} 6: =i

| aed = tapes a - aa | oS | on

4 = iS) OS SH a= ws

ai _ oa > ° eoce |X

> & oS ae) o's 5 G+

FQ 2 a) = BS eg ow oa,

= = a i ge =e SS)

ao =| £ ee fe 2 = a|8°q

q =I = Oo 'S) So Ora) ao) "Oo

as A a | FAB qm a | ee ee

$4 Ps = Ppl $ > S S>S}| Soa

4 Oo ‘= a ro

= A > = = = < =

fy) ) ) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

1 60.1 6.8 | 54.7 12.2 0.438 4.85 2.43 0.67

2 58.8 7.5 | 52.8 13.5 AML 5d 60 64

3 60.1 4.9 | 56.2 8.8 461 5.12 1.75 75

A 60.3 6.0 | 55.5 10.8 450 4.99 2.16 70

5 58.7 7.3 | 52.9 13.1 412 08 50 65

6 60.1 6.8 | 54.7 12.2 438 85 43 67

7 61.5 6.9 | 56.0 12.4 458 5.06 56 66

8 64.2 5.7 | 59.6 10.3 516 .68 30 71

9 64.3 6.2 | 59.3 11.2 511 61 52 69

10 63.0 6.9 | 57.5 12.4 481 10) .68 66

11 65.6 5.6 |" ‘Gla 10.1 543 .96 B34 72

12 68.0 4.8 | 64.2 8.6 601 6.57 14 75

13 70.5 4.9 | 67.1 8.3 661 7.20 23 76

14, Gln. 4.5 | 68.5 rey 692 Od 13 78

15 66.4 8.5 | 60.4 14.5 530 5.77 3.51 62

16 62.6 10.6 | 54.1 19.1 429 4.69 4.13 53

17 63.3 9.5 | 55.7 Led 453 .96 3.75 57

18 64.9 9.2 | 58.5 15.6 498 5.42 .65 60

19 67.5 5.5 | 63.1 9.9 580 6.34 2.42 72

20 Tad 4,2 | 68.8 Sok 699 7.60 1.97 79

21 71.3 6.7 | 66.6 11.4 651 05 3.14 69

22 71.2 8.4 | 65.3 14.3. 623 6.74 95 63

23 71.9 4.8 | 68.5 8.2 692 7.53 2.27 id

24 yes) 3.9 | 70.2 6.6 732 94 1.89 81

25 67.4 8.0 | 61.8 13.6 5590 6.04 3.09 64

26 62.4 10.7 | 53.8 19.3 425 4.65 4.14 53

27 60.5 10.7 | 51.9 19.3 398 38 3.92 53

28 61.8 10.5 | 53.4 18.9 419 59 09 54

29 63.3 9:3), go.8 | . 16.7 456 .98 68 58

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. x1

Alstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

‘Os Range of the Barometer = Range of the Tempera-

8 for each hour during as ture for each hour

ce 3 the month. 2 during the month.

Hour.) 5 a = z

e@8 | Max. | Min. | Dim. | 32-| Max. | Min. | Dip

aa =i

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO re) rey re)

Mid-

night.| 29.966 | 30.078 | 29.774 | 0.304 68.5 76.5 62.0 | 14.5

1 957 .O66 » 801 .265 68.0 76.5 61.5 | 15.0

2 945 .057 -761 .296 67.4 76.3 60.7 | 15.6

3 .935 -050 746 304, 67.1 76.0 60.0 | 16.0

4 929 .052 122 -330 66.5 76.0 59.0 | 17.0

ts) .938 .O60 709 ool 66.1 75.5 58.0 | 17.5

6 953 073 117 .306 65.7 74.5 57.5 | 17.0

7 974 O95 dod -358 65.6 73.5 57.4) 16.1

8 30.003 aay Al 378 67.8 75.0 60.0 | 15.0

9 920 135 758 377 70.9 78.8 63.7 | 15.1

10 .030 155 172 383 73.7 80.6 64.5 | 16.1

11 .O16 136 474 302 75.9 83.5 66.7 | 16.8

Noon.| 29.984 ll 751 .3860 77.6 85°3 O8.2.4)' 17-1

| .956 .078 730 348 78.7 86.5 69.5 | 17.0

2 .924 042 708 04 79.7 86.5 70.0 | 16.5

3 .905 .031 .695 .336 80.2 88.5 69.7 | 18.8

4 .896 .022 694, 328 79.7 87.3 68.5 | 18.8

5 .901 O26 .697 329 78.8 86.5 67.4 | 19.1

6 914, .036 708 .328 76.1 84.4, 65.5 | 18.9

7 Bp AS) 053 730 323 73.9 81.4 64.0 | 17.4

8 .952 .068 761 307 12.4 80.0 63.5 | 16.5

9 .967 .O80 781 .299 71.1 78.0 62.5 | 15.8

10 O43 .090 198 .292 70.1 77.0 62.0 | 15.0

11 perl .083 -800 .283 69.3 76.5 62.5 | 14.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

Xil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

a aS 43 Ce Bi gy 3 Sige al a s

S/F | a | a |e ) es teeeeer

ao) rob) o fo) w+ Oo. & Hot

e ae aie : 2s |- oe ose

Hour. fe: ie c iS 3 ae es a 2B op

aS ale ade A eee = Ss . | 88 |e, 8) a4

ES} Ss | 2° Ss. | BS.) Be | eee ee

-Q aie S) C leee a

ad ay q SA fe |aag| sha

oe > 5 Ps, 0,8 3 4 se S| 8-4-2

oR sia | Oe ea = SP) el: eae

) ) oO ) Inches. | T. gr: | Tage:

Mid-

night.) 64.5 4.0 | 61.3 7.2 0.546 6.03 1.62 0.79

1. 64.6 3.4 | 61.9 6.1 557 16 my | 82

2 64.2 3.2 | 61:6 5.8 052 a: 29 83

3 63.9 3.2 | 61.3 5.8 546 05 27 83

A, 63.6 2.9 | 61.3 5.2 546 06 13 84

5 63.2 2.9 | 60.9 5.2 539 5.98 12 84,

6 62.7 3.0 | 60.3 5.4 528 aa 15 84

7 62.6 3.0 | 60.2 5.4 527 85 15 84

8 63.6 4.2 | 60.2 7.6 527 ao .69 a

9 64.7 6.2 | 59.7 LEZ 518 .69 2.54 69

10 65.3 8.4 | 59.4 14.3 513 60 3.36 63

11 65.8 HO -Os.7, 17.2 501 45 4.12 57

Noon.| 66.0 TEG | O729 19.7 A88 27 .80 52

il 66.2 12.5 | 57.4 21.3 480 18 5.23 50

2 66.5 ES.2 | OF.8 22.4 478 15 O7 48

3 66.6 13.6 | 57.1 23.1 475 ye | hd 47

4 66.5 13.2 | 57.3 22.4, 478 15 57 48

5 66.3 12.5 | 57.5 2.3 431 .20 24 50

6 66.4) O27 | O96 16.5 516 .60 4.03 58

7 66.3 “6 |. 61:0 iS 54AL .90 = 66

8 65.9 6.5 | 60.7 LEF 536 .86 2.74 68

9 65.4 5.7 | 60.8 10.3 537 .90 38 TL

10 65.0 be sh 60:9 9.2 539 93 10 74

11 64.9 4.4 | 61.4 1a 548 6.04 1.79 77

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. X1ll

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

Date.

S> Or

Max. Solar

radiation.

in the month of February 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Lae bs Ww \

a .. IND.

a8 : eae

& iS! Prevailine ue =| General aspect of the Sky.

SE eC Sale 5

AS direction. ssi Aa

4 Pals

Inches tb | Miles

ves eh e D2 WE i Chiefly clear. Foggy from 8

to ll Pp. m.

N: N. E Chiefly clear.

N. E. Overcast to noon, -_ito 5 P.

M., “iafterwards. Light rain

at 7 & 8a. m., & at noon.

\nito 10 a. M., “i to 5 P.M.,

clear afterwards. Light rain at

3A. M.

Clear. Foggy from 8tollp.m.

Clear. Foggy at midnight &

1 a. m., & from 8 to 11 Pp. mw.

Clear to 10 a. m., \Wito3P.

M., clear to7 P. M., scatd. clouds

afterwards. Slightly fogey from

midnight to5 a. m.,at7& 8a.

M., & from 7 to 10 p. wu.

Chiefly scatd. \ni

\ni to 8 a. M., clear to 11 a.

M.,~ito5 p.m., clear after-

wards.

Clear to 3 a. m., scatd. \i to

7 e.M., clear afterwards.

Clear to 9 a. M., seatd. >i to

4 p.m., clear afterwards. Slight-

ly fogey at 8 a. mM.

Clear to 4 4. M., overcast to

10 a. M., scatd. >i to 6 P. M.,

clear afterwards. Foggy from 3

to64a.m., &atS8p. m.

Clear to 2.4.M., seatd. “i to

) P. M., clear afterwards.

Scatd. \Wi & stratoni to 10

A.M., “ito 6p. M., clear after-

wards. Slightly foggy at 8 p.m.

teins

Clear.

Chiefly clear. Slightly foggy

at 8 a. M.

Clear to 4 4.m., stratoni to 10

A. M., overcast to 1 P. M., scatd.

\nito 8p. m., clear afterwards.

Clear to 2 a.m., stratoni to 6

A. M., Wi to 11 a. m., “i to6e.

M., Clear afterwards. Lightning

N. and variable.

N.& NN. W. tbe

N.W.&N.N.W,| ..

N. E.&N.

N.E. &N.

N.W. &S. W.

S.S.W.&W.byN,) ...

S. W.

Variable.

at 7; ko) Qoord pew

a A I BM i

XIV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, Ke.

4 gel =

gj orous WIND.

ag |5's 5 = | Gederal aspestatiahe Sk

ait a oe 2 Pipvting 4e bak ereral aspect o e Sky.

& = S |-aoue direction. si S As

TP Wee ee

o (Inches tb | Miles

214195 gene 1S: & W. 131.1 | Chiefly clear.

22) Iasi. N. 79.7| Clouds of different kinds to

74. m., clear to 11 a.M.,\i to 6

p. m., clear afterwards.

23) 120.0 S 98.4| Stratoni to 8 A. M., seatd.

clouds to 4 Pp. M., overcast with

Thunder and Lightning after-

wards. High wind at 6 P.M.

Slight rain at 5, 6, 9 & 11 P.M.

24| 122.5 | 0.18 |Variable. _.. 1186.2 | Overcast to ‘l a. M., scatd.

clouds afterwards. Thunder at

midnight. Lightning to E, Rain

with hail at 1 a. M.

25] 121.6 N 91.5 Clear.

Gir Wi Ould 4). . | 72.5 | Chiefly clear.

29 11.8.50)) ae. «| eso IN. AW. .. | 55.0 | Clear.

28| 121.8 INC Ve Re. . 1. | a2 Clear.

29 N 54.1 | Clear.

CY od CW etie.6 ANA IRR Dose 0S tt

ArOre, 1 Strati,™i Cumuli,—i Cirro-strati, ~i Cumulo strati,~i Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli. =

Meteorological Observations. XV

‘Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February 1868.

Monrtuity ReEsvtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month... soe ... 29.956

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 4. M. on the 9th «.. 30.155

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 p. Mm. on the 24th. ». 29.694

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month ~ &>, 0.461

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures _.., a ip 3. 00.039

Ditto ditto Min. ditto - oT ah ... 29.890

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month ..,, w. 0.143

re)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month _.., he G2" RPE

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 21st. ae 1. 388.8

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 a. mM. on the 2nd. vA ics: ROS

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month a & cm waked

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... fi. > i OOS

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, vet rT + wen ORS

_ Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... ame Le

a eee

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... ae e658

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer rei

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month a fs o. 604

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point .., 12.8

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month ,,, oe os. DOLE

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month er * ‘. Sb.5T

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 2.94

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.66

Inches.

Rained 4 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours ‘s 302 MOLLE

Total amount of rain during the month » Mg el gs

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month __.., :

pe eet x6, - doa

Prevailing direction of the Wind... aie Nae de.

Xv1 | Meteorological Observations.

Sag nS TACO NIAID MD OMDMIAGIANBANG

M’N'N

“MM "NI Sa SAAR TT MANMMNAYTOWOKEeKNDS

ee eS

= saAHH owas

MN M

‘uo ULBY

: 6 sae ore N

N AQ’ AA

‘UO UIByY

eo 6

‘UO ULB YY

Ueno ae OL) te) UD ee ee aera

‘(ieee See 4 Un ee ee ee ee SE eee

gether with the number of days on

it rained.

| ao Ulex

. “Ae eae art

MS" M

“UO WIR]

“M a es er ee ee en OOS Me iro Cs oe ee

‘uO ULeY|

ni e 5 ase SsAnnA ne Nr

M ‘S'S

‘UO UBT

“M Aq 'S Zi iD Tey

‘uo UTBY

articular wind blew, to

ticular wind was blowing,

‘UO ULBY

“a Aq “sg

"UO ULB,

“HSS

"HO WIRY

‘UO ULB

ire

‘UO ULB

"g Aq “ot

‘HO UTE xT

Tenet aun a | a

ny Pp

MontuHiy RESULTS.

o.of days

hour, when any par

icalO servations taken at the SurveyorGeneral’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of Feb. 1868.

h at a given hour a

i¢

SS eer

‘UO Uleyy

‘HO Uleyy wy

"HO UB} ae

ee. eS ee

"TT ON eee ee ren ree Oe Oe NOD aN OD Ss Cea) an)

which at the same

Se SS eee

‘HO UleIT

. . . rt GANMMNA ATTN

a 'N ON

"UO ULB

WH Aq “N ee eee

"HO UBT

5 eee ONOD®OmM AAI wWARAN A

NI ee oa

}

Tables shewing the number of days on wh

SiS)

“MOY ere eS Ree HAG Gaon DeOod

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorolog

Meteorological Observations. XVI

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

ener,

Range of the Barometer

during the day.

meter

| Range of the Tempera-

ture during the day.

cht o

y Bulb

meter

Date.

Max. | Min. | Diff.

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches.

the Baro

at 32° Faht.

Mean Dr

Thermo

Mean Hei

Max. | Min. | Dif.

1 29.809 | 29.875 | 29.748 0.127 74.5 86.0 63.5 | 23.5

2 .893 .968 831 oe 76.2 85.5 67.0 | 18.5

3 931 | 30.005 879 .126 77.8 89.2 69.5 | 19.7

4, .885 | 29.978 814, 164 78.3 90.8 68.5 | 22.3

5 782 .868 719 149 79.9 92.7 bb | 2E3

6 .810 904 47 AST 78.4 89.0 69.5 | 19.5

7 .807 .868 1238 .130 74.9 83.0 68.5 | 14.5

8 .857 .923 798 125 71.6 81.0 62.7 | 18.3

9 .935 | 30.018 sl rag 74.7 86.0 65.0 | 21.0

10 .907 | 29.989 199 .190 75.6 86.1 68.0 | 18.1

11 915 995 849 146 73.0 82.0 65.7 | 16.3

12 30.010 | 30.105 954, 151 73.9 83.0 64.5 | 18.5

13 29.974 .050 .907 143 75.8 87.0 60.5 | 21.5

14, 891 | 29.962 814 148 79.3 90,0 120°| 18D

15 846 924, 780 144 80.9 90.5 74.6 | 15.9

16 .918 991 849 142 79.9 88.8 iol 4 158

17 974 | 30.052 .883 aoe | 81.3 92.0 72.2 | 19.8

18° -969 .037 .899 .138 The 88.0 68:5 | 19.5

19 .890 | 29.979 .799 .180 79.1 89.0 71.0 | 18.0

20 .887 971 831 .140 80.7 91.0 72.4 | 18.6

21 .912 .985 845 .140 82.5 93.5 Faep | 19.0

22 909 | 30.011 .828 .183 83.5 93.3 74.5 | 20.8

23 .857 | 29.920 805 pes bs" 84.2 95.5 T4A | Qe)

24, .848 924, .790 134 84.3 94.5 Zo | 19:0

25 .873 955 .808 147 84.5 94.9 (00.| 189

26 .860 938 784 154 83.2 95.0 76.0 | 19.0

27 843 .898 796 .L02 83.0 92.0 774.0 | 15.0

28 ol .937 Wiis: .162 84.0 95.7 74.8 | 20.9

29 .859 .938 78l 157 84.7 96.7 fon || Zin7

30 .847 .907 793 114 83.4, 91.5 Aree aman 8,

al .885 .962 .826 .136 84.9 94.5 76.5 | 18.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

a momoter Means are derived, from the hour! y observations, made during.

the day. .

XVHI Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March 1868...

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

St:

1 Cet =e ee pean

i 43 os E ° n= ood |'aer.

at = S) g. Seq | Sore me

aie coe s A of, 2 ne ee

oe xe) oO no SS <5 Ss eH ap O re

ans = 8 5s | 2 | ee | Seals -8

eo | Ee Ae oe ee | eae

aa = 4 me qs as mS 6 | a4 38

me| 2 5 PAY oF S94 | ees) OS

= Se whe = a | =

) ) ) 9) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr.

1 65.7 8.8 | 59.5 15.0 0.515 5.61 3.57 0.61

2 69.1 ss Mie ae oe 12.1 599 6.51 15 .67

3 flees 6.6 | 66.6. 11.2 651 7.05 .08 LO

A 70.1 8.2 | 64.4 13.9 .605 6.55 73 64

5 70.6 9.3 | 64.1 15.8 599 .46 4.32 .60

6 Go.0 8.5 | 63:9 14.5 595 A3 3.88 .62

7 68.7 6.2 | 64.4 10.5 .605 59 2.69 Wg!

8 60.1 11.5 | 50.9 20.7 .380 4,22 4.18 50

9 66.7 8.0 | 61.1 13.6 043 5.91 3°32 64

ko 68.6 7.0 | 63.7 eS) 591 6.43 05 68

11 64.3 8.7 | 57.3 15.7 478 5.22 54 .60

12 63.4 10.5 | 56.0 179 458 4.99 4.02 5D.

t3 66.2 9.6 | 59.5 16.3 515 5.60 3.94 oo

14, 73.6 Dal 1.69.6 9.7 sly. 7.74 2.85 WES

15 75.2 oy | fg or, 156. 8.15 O7 3 i

he 1 re | | ae | Fie al ree 15 63 7 a

17 74.9 6.4 | 70.4 ORS) 736 7.92 3.02 SE .

¥8 68.7 8.8 | 62.5 15.0 568 6.16 .88 61

ag 69.6 9.5 | 62.9 16.2 576 22 4.31 59

20 72.5 8.2 | 66.8 13.9 .655 7.06 3.98 64

21 73.5 9.0 | 67.2 15.3 664 13 4.51 61

22 74.4 9.1 | 68:0 15.5 681 29 yh | 61 .

23 72.9 11.3 | 65.0 1 a2 617 6.61 5.63 54 :

24, 73.9 HOS | 65:9 18.4 .636 81 4.47 .60

25 74.9 9.6 | 68.2 16.3 .686 7.34 5.01 .60

26 76.7 69.) fae L Al he 4 3.00 70

27 73.0 10:0: 66.0 17.0 .638 6.84 4.98 58

28 70:8 tao i OLe 22.4 552 5.90 6.27 AQ

29 76.2 8.5 | 70.2 14.5 732 7.81 4.61 .63

30 77.5 5.9 | 73.4 10.0 811 8.69 3.27 43

ol 72.3 12.6 | 63.5 21.4 088 6.27 6.22 50

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. x1x

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of March 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. |

Oa Range of the Barometer es Range of the Tempera-

ee *. for each hour during os ture for each hour

~~ : :

of 2 a the month. a = during the month.

Hour.) & ot A :

aan : 7 ‘ q

geo | Max. | Min. | Diff. ae Max. | Min. | Diff.

Acs =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oy) ) ) te)

Mid-

night.| 29.889 | 30.023 | 29:782 | 0.241 74.5 81.5 Oy.) ) 43.8

1 879 005 172 233 73.8 80.5 67.0 | 13.5

2 .867 | 29.989 159 .230 13.2 80.0 66.5 | 13.5

3 .858 .980 447 233 72.8 79.5 66.0 | 13.5

4 856 .990 762 .228 72.2 78.5 65.0 | 13.5

9) 870 | 30.004, 776 .228 71.8 17.5 64.0 | 13.5

6 889 025 794, 231 71.4 77.3 63.0 | 14.3

% .910 042 814, .228 71.9 78.2 62.7 | 15.5

8 937 076 846 230 74.9 80.0 66.7 | 13.3

9 955 101 857 244, 78.5 84.0 69.8 | 14.2

10 .960 -105 863 242 81.7 88.6 73.4 | 15.2

11 948 093 848 245 84.6 91.5 75.5 | 16.0

Noon. 923 .065 .828 237 86.6 92°9 77.0 | 15.9

1 895 .033 795 238 88.1 94.0 78.4 | 15.6

2 864 | 29.993 769 224, 89.2 95.2 80:0 | 15.2

3 .840 973 132 241 89.6 96.0 80.5 | 15.5

4, 828 .958 (22 236 89.3 96.7 81.0 | 15.7

5 827 954, 419 235 88.1 95.5 2:0 | 16:5

6 834) .963 122 241 85.1 91.5 76.5 | 15.0

7 849 967 730 237 81.9 88.0 74.4 | 13.6

8 872 979 150 229 79.7 86.2 71.5 | 14.7

9 891 .995 762 .230 77.8 84.5 70.5 | 14.0

10 -900 | 30.011 (89 242 76.5 82.6 69.6 | 13.0

11 897 O31 763 268 75.5 81.0 68.2 | 12.8

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

xX | Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

4 + 45 ini a Seo -es

A See) |S ; BS.) 2" § | 58

e288 |e °° ae

2 6 | ee tS Ss cS |—aee eee

Hor.| 2 | 2 | a | 8 ze ‘bo |B! | 2 ehee

on 2 f= 2 Ss ‘SS | 8,2) PEs

eS jie | Bop. | Bet ee | See ee

se te Ee | ee | Ge | Bega

2 | pb | EF lees | Be eo eis

he ee

Mid-

night.| 70.6 ao | Gree 6.6 | 0.679 7.40 1.78 0.81

t 70.4 3-4 | 68.0 5.8 681 44, 54 83

2 70.1 al | 626 5.6 672 38 AT 83

3 69.8 3.0 | 67.4 5.4 668 as oo 84

A 69.5 2.7 | 67.3 A.9 666 20 20 85

5) 69.2 2.6 | 67.1 4.7 661 .20 20 86

6 68.9 2.5 | 66.9 4.5 657 21 14 86

7 69.3 2.6 | 67.2 4.7 664 28 20 86

8 70.8 4.1 | 67.9 7.0 679 40 88 80

9 71.8 G7 | Gf 11.4 661 16 3.19 69

10 72.0 9.7 | 65.2 16.5 621 6.68 4.69 59

Al 72.0 12.6 | 63.2 21.4 582 22 6.17 50

Noon.| 72.2 | 144] 638.6] 23.0 590 27 87 48

dt 72.4) 15.7 | 63.0 25.1 578 13 7.59 45

2 72.2 17.0 | 62.0 27.2 559 §.92 8.24 42

3 72.1 17.5 | 61.6 28.0 552 83 50 Al

A, 72.0 17.3 | 61.6 27.7 582 83 38 Ad

5 71.0 lel | 60.% 27.4, 536 .68 04 Al

6 71.6 13.5 | 62.1 23.0 561 98 6.59 48

7 71.5 10.4 | 64.2 177 601 6.45 4,99 56

8 70.9 8.8 | 64.7 15.0 611 .60 12 62

9 70.9 6.9 | 66.1 11 ¥ 640 93 3.20 68

10 71.0 §.5 | 67.1 9.4 661 SEY) 2.56 74

11 70.9 4.6 | 67.7 7.8 674 4 12 78

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXi

Abstract of the Resuits of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Cateutta,

im the month of March 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

e .-|s 5 Winp.

Ss \f2s yaar

oe « H

$ f 5 Ss 6 Prevailing we Be General aspect of the Sky.

C4 = = nd direction. Ss o/ Oa

pS a eee

0 |Inches Ib iles

1} 124.6} ... |Variable. ... | 80.6] Clear to 11 4. m., scatd. i to

4 p.m., clear afterwards. Slight-

ly foggy at 8 Pp. M.

2; 128.8) ... |S 35.2 | Clear to 10a. m., scatd. “i to

4p. M., clear afterwards.

Si age.0| :. 85.8 | Clear.

4'127.5| ... |S. 125.4} Clear to noon, scatd. \i to 6

; P. M., clear afterwards.

5} 130.0; ... IS. & W. 159.3 | Clear.

6} 127.2| ... |S. & variable. 130.4] Clear.

7; 122.0) ... |W.byS.& variable. 96.1| Scuds from S to7 a4. uw, “i

afterwards.

8122.0; ... IN. W.S.W.&S .. 126.4} Clear

9,125.0) ... |S. &S. by E. --- | 84.2! Clear nearly the whole day.

10) 125.0; ... |IS.&8S.S. Ww. ... |127.2| Clouds of different kinds.

11/ 123.4; ... |S.W.& variable .. |204.6} Clear.

12/122.0| ... |W.by S. » | 93.5 | Clear.

13/127.0; ... [W.S.W.&S.byW.! ... | 81.4] Clear.

14) 129.5} ... |S.S.W.&S.byW. | 1.81151.3 Chiefly clear.

15; 130.0; ..../S.S.W.&S. 2.0 |267.9 | Chiefly \ni.

ao izo.0| ... IE.S.E Ol |120.4| Clear to 5 a. m., scatd. \wi

to 104. m., scatd. Ai to6p. m.,

clear afterwards.

17| 130.0] 0.16 |Variable. 12°0| 85.7 Clouds of different kinds to 8

A. M., scatd. ~i to 6 P. M., over-

cast afterwards. High wind,

thunder & rain at 8 pv. m.Light-

ning from 7 to 9 P. M.

ae .. IN .W. &N.N. E.} 2.0/174.0 Chiefly clear.

| ... |Variable. 0.6| 96.6) Scatd. Ai to 3 a.m., cleartoll

A. M., scatd “i to 3 Pp. M., clear

afterwards

20) 136.0; ... S.S.W.&S.by W,| 0.8/140.9| Clear to 8 4. M., scatd. \_i &

“i to 6 P. M., clear afterwards.

21/ 135.7/ ... |S. W.& S.by W.| 0.3/166.0] Clear to 5 4. M., scatd. \i to

6 Pp. M., clear afterwards.

22) 136.0; ... |S. by W.& W. | 0.4/117.2 Clear to 4 a. m., scatd. \i to

8 a. M., clear afterwards.

23) 139.0; ... |W.byN.&variable! 0.2] 97.0 Clear to 10 a.m., scatd. \i

to 7 p. m., clear afterwards.

24) 133.5 | ... S.byW.&variable.| 0.1/100.8 Clear to noon, \i to 6 P. M.,

clear afterwards.

25) 135.0) ... |S. by W. 75.0 | Clear to 5 a. m., scatd. \i to

I] a. M., stratoni to 3 P.M., \i

afterwards.

26) 134.0} ... |S. S.W.& S.by EH.) ... |126.7] Clear to 5 a. u., scatd. \i to

7 Pp. M., clear afterwards.

et P. , Char aiterwards. |.

xxii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

= oF WIND

: |o IND. .

38 229 —

$] a 5 g 3 Penis 11 5 be General aspect of the Sky.

ss Bue direction. Ss S1 Aa

Als ee | ee é oe

o (Inches a Miles)

97\ 130.0| ... |S. byW.&N.N.W.| 2. 3 al face F Ba ie nearly the whole

90| 135.8) 22 16.8. WW. 0.2 |140.0 ae \i to 6 Pp. M., clear

afterwards.

99) 139203" °y., SSW,W &SbyW) 1.0 |149.4| Clear to 114. M., scatd. \i

afterwards.

309, 118.0]... 8.S.W.&S .by W.| 0.4 170.0| Clear to5 A. M., stratoni af-

terwards.

=| 132.4 . SoS. Wade N: Wye 0:7-162.5 Scatd. \ito 11 a. M., seatd,

\.1t05 P.M. Wi afterwards.

Na Cie Strati,A1 Cumuli,—i Cirro-strati, ~ i Cumulo strati,~- i N imbi- ;

“i Cirro cumuli. =>

Meteorological Observations, XX111

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

im the month of March 1868,

Montruty Resvtts,

Inches,

Mean height of the Barometer for the month.., on 1. 29.885

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10.4. m.onthe 12th ... 30.105

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 p. m. on the dth. ». 29.719

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month Hee ia, 0-386

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures ,., — be .. 29.962

Ditto ditto Min. ditto sits 2% a ... 29.818

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month ,.,, . 0,144

fo)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month rr ahs a es

Max. Temperature occurred at 4. m. on the 29th, > Ae. poet

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 4. mu. on the 8th. ae on cx eed

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month as wa0

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ,., oe en o> Be)

Ditto — ditto Min. sre ne tes vince el Ev

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... ieee

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month... of en ee

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 8.5

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month on ee ee MORO

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point ... 14.5

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month .,,, ee oh a LOL?

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month Ave ce a 7e-6G

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 4.00

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.63

Inches.

Rained 1 day,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours nae we 0.16

Total amount of rain during the month : 0.16

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month _.., is he it cape 0,

Prevailing direction of the Wind... oe S. yy. a0.

Meteorological Observations.

e ‘oi

‘a

pte

‘HO UII]

; B re ose re aoa ;

*M Aq" NT

HO ULB

fi i= ANNAN seo AN a

‘MN UN

peat ote.) 8 SS

"MON 4! rol NO re AO ec oN

(ee ne

ion cea =o AANA

MN M

‘uO ULBY

. A ered es NANANA RATA Ae

nN Aq A

HO ULB

Ks 2o wae oR MAAAADAAMANOWAAS

‘UO ULBY

to eG ee ene

* 6 ese en ONN AMN On AAA Ae

g Aq “AA

PE ee ee

‘UO Ulery

Ten eon AMAA ADHMAMWIAMIMD AN

MSM

ee eS

co)

when any particular wind was blowing, it ramed.

w, together with the number of days on

‘HO UBT

f “MR N AANA RAR aA RTONDANAN SNAANN

“HO ULbY

‘HO UBT

ie cae, 1D 10 G10 Hr ICO aN re rH meoig O10 k

M Aq‘ = =

"UO UIBY

za 1D DANA DADSAIMANAMMAAGTAKRA TWO OW

“uo UL’ YY

“w Aq ‘Ss

"tO Urey

"HO UTR

Bite ae = AnAN ae en] ee

el lish ah i! i AMAA MATINTAON OS

on OOD) | N lad NX tae t ro

Monruty Resv.ts.

given hour any particular wind ble

‘MO UIey

af aa “Wy (Seen een | mir et re re aan

re \

1 Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of March 1868

hour

m0 0) ULB YT

“g kq “oF 4 a4 nq

“HO UTC

“A —N re re | Ne

lve

‘UO ULB >

‘UO Uley ‘f

m0 6) UleyT . |

TT iNT re ro onl AN al

er of days on which at a

which at the same

‘MO UB a |

en a aA aA ON 4S aoe r }

HN UN

‘HO ULB

aq Aq ‘N ~Y

"UO UBT

Tables shewing the numb

‘MOF Ben er hee

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorologica

Meteorological Observations. XXV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

28 _ | Range of the Barometer = # |Range of the Tempera-

oe Be during the day. ee. ture during the day.

= 8 >

Date. | Bo . :

: oi. | Max. | Min. | Diff 3 Max. | Min. | Diff.

| SS a a

8 EE SS

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo 0 ) Ce)

1 | 29.928 | 30.016 | 29.861 0.155 84.7 94.8 76.5 | 18.3

2 .898 | 29.983 .823 .160 85.2 95.2 76.8 , 18.4

3 846 917 173 144, 85.3 95.4 76.0 | 19.4

4 . .869 .949 .802 147 85.2 97.5 76.5 | 21.0

a .920 .980 841 139 73.1 78.5 67.5 | 11.0

6 .897 .976 .803 173 77.6 89.8 67.5 | 22.3

Ae 842 907 741 .166 81.4 90.5 740 | 165

8 796 .856 712 144 82.1 90.0 75.5 | 14.5

9 776 845 .686 159 83.0 93.0 77.0 | 16.0

10 765 814 .674 .140 83.2 91.0 41.0 | 14.0

11 746 824 652 172 82.9 91.0 74.0 | 17.0

12 oe} -.803 644 159 81.4 92.0 75.0 | 17.0

13 742 197 684, 113 82.3 90.4 40.0 | 154

14 — 740 .808 .671 137 83.6 90.0 79.0 | 11.0

15 781 .849 721 -128 84.2 90.6 78.6 | 12.0

16 784 .937 664 273 82.4, 90.4 70.4 | 20.0

17 801 .870 733 137 81.0 90.5 71.4) 19.1

18 762 .833 .696 137 83.5 93.4, 75.6 | 17.8

19 714 784, 632 152, 85.4 94.0 79.0 | 15.0

20 .684 750 615 135 86.3 94.5 80.5 | 14.0

21 .683 783 .608 175 87.3 98.0 80.5 | 17.5

22 | .650 107 .569 138 83.0 97.8 80.0 | 17.8

23 .736 818 .681 lay 87.3 96.0 S09} 15.1

24 798 854 .693 161 82.6 93.5 73.0 | 20.5

25 .810 O47 | > .749 “098 fase 86.7 68.7 | 18.0

26 783 .862 .700 162 76.6 84.5 68.4 | 16.1

27 733 812 .656 .156 82.6 JLo | 73:0 | (16:0

28 .663 724 oth |. 158 85.3 91.5 80.0 | Lie

29 .639 .689 578 Pay 8 88.3 97.4 82.5 | 14.9.

30 706 790 646 144 88.7 98.5 81.5 | 17.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

| Be etmometer Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

e day.

XHVI Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

én the month of April 1868. |

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—/( Continued.)

4H 43 4 E a) 5H 68 dleeas.

EB |/B)2/A | 3 | BS laperese

AY = oO sof | &

2 ) S 2 a 42 om. =| =, = 5

a i E fo} o°2 os+ Oo DO pn

Oe be 2 S ze) ae cee a8 | 34

= ra A ep | o o

pi | 2/2). | a2 | 68 |eee|ses

FI PQ 2 3 qa e Beg | abs

So oc + Be ee | eee

Ss A Soe S| SA | =

2 LE EE

0) ) a) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gre

t 155 of9 1 69'°R! | 15.6 21 0.708 453 4.89 0.61

2 “59 | 10.0| 68.2 | 17.0 686 By 5.29 58

3 7138 | 13.5 | 62.3 | 23.0 565 6.02 6.62 4S

A rao | kee.) 662.|:. 19D 642 85 5.76 54

5 69.3 38 | 66.3 6.8 644, 7.05 1.74 80

6 73.1 4.5 | 69.9 7.7 725 85 2.22 78

7 76.4 5.0 | 72.9 8.5 797 8.57 70 76

8 76.9 5.2 | 73.3 8.8 .809 68 83 "5

9 "7 2, 5.8 | 73.1 9.9 803 61 3:21 3

10 78.0 5.2 | 74.4 8.8 838 99 2.90 76

Gi 77 A 5.5 | 73.5 9.4, 814, 74 3.05 74,

12 75.4 60 | 712) 102 756 we 14 Mp)

13 77.9 4.4| 74.8 75 840 9.11 2.47 19

14 78.8 4.8 | 75.4 8.2 865 28 75 be.

15 78.4 5.8 | 74.3 9.9 835 8.94 3.30 73

16 76.9 5.5 | 73.0 9.4 801 .60 01 74

17 74.0 70| 69.1| 119 406 | 7.59 55 68

18 77.6 a9 | 73.51 10.0 814 8.72 .28 73

19 80.5 ao | 77a 8.3 913 9.76 2.92 77

9 81.5 4.8 | 78.1 8.2 943 | 10.06 .96 SF

21 78.2 Oh ~ 7287 Nt - TAsG 792 8.42 4.99 63

22 78.4, 9.6 | 72.61 15.4 .790 40 5.28 | .61

23 76.9 | 10.4| 70:7 | 16.6 744 7.90 tl 59

24 77.1 55 | 73.2 9.4 806 8.66 3.02 74

25 70.6 9.7 | 68.4 4.9 690 "5d 1.30 85

26 79.1 4.5 | 68.9 ye | * FOL 62 9.15 78

o7 77.0 56 | 7301 9.5 803 8.61 3.07 7h

28 81.3 4.0 | 78.5 6.8 955 | 10.21 2.43 81

29 83.2 5 Voe0uk 8.2 | 1.005 67 3.13 77

30 | 81.4 7.3 77.0 1.7. | 0.910 9.65 4.31 69

—

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants:

Meteorological Observations, XXV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological. Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

_m™ the month of April 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

: dependent thereon.

roe Range of the Barometer =; | Range of the Tempera-

ae y for each hour during Rae ture for each hour

28 a the month. RS during the month.

br i

Hour.| & eS ra 5

ea | Max. | Min. | pie | - <4 | Max. | Min. | Diff

As aS

a A A ee

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ry) 0 0 o

Mid-

night.} 29.786 | 29.926 | 29.643 | 0.283 78.7 84.0 67.5 | 16.5

1 175 915 .636 279 78.2 83.5 67.6 | 15.9

2 764, 904, .619 .285 77.8 83.0 68,0 | 15.0

3 756 .902 615 .287 77.6 82.7 68.2 | 14.5

4 753 .922 .606 316 774A 82.5 68.5 | 14.0

d .768 .929 643 .316 tiie 83.0 67.8 | 15,2

6 781 .940 .627 313 77.4 83.0 67.6 | 15.4

7 804, .968 645 028 78.4 83.5 | 68.5 | 15.0

8 .826 .992 .668 324, 81.1 86.0 70.5 | 15.5

9 .837 | 30.014 .685 329 84.0 88.5 74.0 | 14.5

10 .838 016 .689 27 86.5 96.8 | 76.7 | 14.1

d1 j 827} .002/ 682} 1320 | 885 | 93.2 | 785) 147

Noon.| .809 | 29.967} .667) .300 | 90.0 | 95.5 | 785! 170

1 784 951} 640} .311 | 90.4 | 97.5 | 68.9] 286

2 752 919} .620/ .299 | 91.0 | 98.5 | 68.7] 29.8

3 724 925 | .584/ 341 | 912 | 98.4 | 70.81 97%9

4 .708 908 | .569| .339 | 90.4 | 98.0 | 63.0! 30.0

5 705 932} .571|) .361 | 883 | -97.5 | 68.0! 29.5

6 722 913 | 576) .337 | 85.9 | 95.2 | 68.5 | 26.7

7 742 S21} 608; .313 | 83.7 | 91.5 | 67.9| 23.6

8 762 942 683; .309 | 81.8 | 88.8 | 68.0! 20.8

9 782 948 6389 | .309 | 80: | 86.0 | 682] 17.8

10 .789 950 665 | .285 | 79.6 | 85.0 | 68.0] 17.0

11 .790 939 671 | .268-| 7943 | 845 | 67.5| 17.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

‘Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

KXVIl Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta;

in the mouth of April 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

fen

3 y q a GH ova ie

Pees | oe yee | eee

ea cee shi aces) oie 8 | es | eee | Res

aS 2 = S ‘asp | °S Boks | ag aa

E i a ees E oS |\eee| esa

-} Hoge ere a ie a. | 38 |S SP Sas

BS |3.). 8) S..| Be pes ee sso

aq a | Ae <8, E BAei ag

go bs | bd Sa as |-iS'8 | ses

Sei] & | 8 |. Gehodt Sbvodl Seelind S eee

| 2 Boe SA = a | =

) Ce) ce) ts) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

Mid-

night.| 75.3 | 34| 72.9] 5.8 | 0.797 | 863 | 178. | 0.83

1; |! See? |e Bae | aise ee 797 64 61 84,

oh eo es | eaOn | Aue 801 67 46 86

Be |) PeD- ol a Que TSO | Alek 806 75 32 87

A |) 76.0" |= 2d | 7e8e° | aa 809 77 24 88

5. | evel) oy, oe | ao). | Bq 817 86 12 89

Gn Gow) oe eae Po 819 89 12 89

|. FG | o Sh | Fao). UA 835 | 9.05 26 88

<6. |) ed Ol AO ase Ges 835 | 8.99 | 2.18 81

ae “PO” 6 AG me 817 75 | 3,42 72

to yeah) “SON Fre Wee | Tiere 73 | 4.37 67

TP BB OG |S Fey: tees ESOt AS | 5.40 61

Woon 98-8) 2) Fae) P79.) | eS 22 | 6.28 57 4

Rn Fee | re | Fee) | 1885p) 768 06 61 55

O21. Fe }\ 125 | 71.01. 20.00) 75.) Fee. ve 53

a yal a7 | 70.9) 20'3-<| {74g 90 12 53

Bo) Few 24 | 70:6 19.8-n| 74k 82 | 6.85 53

5 (ae e707 | 17.6 744 .89 5.91 Bs |

6 |) Wee Mee | 7O8-| lsdael . 1746 95 | 4.92 .62

mo ees eee 7210.) 11.9 0:| 7 26aul Sag aie 69.

g. | 76s | eo 728 (9.0 795 55. | 2.85 75

9 | 760 1 Aeelagee | 7.7 795 By | ag 78

10“? 959) )| Serer 16.3 809 73 | 1.96 82

LE | 76381) BISON. 15:6

si4| 79 | 74)

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants

‘

Meteorological Observations, XX1X

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of April 1868,

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

WIND.

General aspect of the Sky.

ain Guage 1

.2 in. above

as!

= a

£| Prevailing

S direction.

Max. Solar

radiation.

~ | Pressure

Daily

Velocity.

| Max.

Clear to 8 a. m., scatd. i to

5 p. M., clear afterwards.

175.8| Chiefly clear. Slightly foggy

at 8 P. M.

W.N. W. 0.7/174.8 | Scatd. \i to 8 a. m., clear

afterwards.

W.&S. 18.0,106.4| Clear to 6 a. m., seatd. \i to

10 a.m., clear to 3.p.m., clouds of

different kinds afterwards. Hi gh

wind at 8; p. m. Lightning &

Thunder from 7 to 9 vp. mM. Rain

at 8 P. M.

S. E.& EH. N. E.| 3.0/162.1| Scatd. -i & \Ai to 11a. M.,

overeast to 6 P..M., scatd. \wi

afterwards. Strong wind at 7 &

8a. M., & from 1 to 4 p.m. Light-

ning at 7 a. m. Thunder at 7 a.

M., 1p. m., & from 3 to § vp. um.

Rain at7 & 10h a.m, & atB&

4p. M.

S. by W. & S. 1.1178.4| Clear to4a.m., Wito7 a. w.,

seatd. “i afterwards.

E.S8. E. & S. 1.7|134.5 | Clouds of different kinds to 7

A. M., scatd..1 to 3 P. M., stra-

toni afterwards.

S. ; 2.5/198.1| Clearto 44.M., “ito2p.mM.,

overcast to 5 p. m., clouds of

different kinds afterwards. Brisk

wind from 8} a..m. to 63 P. mM.

Lightning to N at 8 & 10 vp. au.

Bcatd. oi to 4p.M.,Wi&

stratoni afterwards. Brisk wind

from 4¢ to 5¢ p.m. Lightning

toSat7 &8Pp. mM.

eat He SOW, 4.9|167.2 |. Clear to 8 a. u., scuds from §

to noon, clear to 4 p. M., scatd.

\_i to afterwards. Brisk wind

from 7 a. M. tolliv.m. Light-

ahi ning to N at 7 & 9.P. M.

8.&58. 8. W. 14.0/319.0| Clear to 4 4. m., scatd. “i to

. 5 P. M., \w1 to 9 Pp. M., clear

afterwards. High wind from

midnight to 3 4. M., & from 94

a.m. to 82 p.m. Thunder at 7

p. M. Lightning at 7 and 8 p. Mm.

T™R

eo oF

oR GO

or ®

(=7)

8} 132.0

9} 137.0 Variable. 2.0:171.2

10) 134.5

11) 132.7

B:D.9.6

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of ‘the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutia,

in the month of April 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

General aspect of the Sky.

1) EE eee

=e Oe WIND.

68 |Ped ——

Mis | SSE je >

g] 25 [aoe] Bremilne gia

ea irection. =a) = |.

Ala” lee gl As

o |Inches tb | Mile

12| 134.0} 0.70 |S.S.W..& 8. 8. E.| 21.0)335.4

13| 129.8 S. S.& W. 3.0,248.7

14) 131.2) ... |8.&S.S.W. 4..5|315.4

15| 132.0) ... |S. by EB. &S. 4.0|295.5

16| 131.8| 0.95 |S. & S. by W. 6.6/292.7

17| 129.6| ,,. . |S.S.W.& variable.| 3.8/344.2

18| 133.5 8.8. W. &S. 1.5/213.9

19) 132.3| ... |S.&8. 8. W. 1.3/292.4,

920) 137.0| ... |S. &S.S. W. 0.3/255.2

~ 91/138.0| ... |S. & variable. . (154.3

22) 135.0| ,.. |Variable. .. (141.3

23) 134.0 S. by E.& S.byW.| 0.9126.4

_- Seatd. \i to 5 4. M., seuds

from S to 10 A. M., scatd. “i to

4,p.m., Clouds of different kinds

afterwards. High wind from 93

A. M.. to 62: p. M. Thunder at 5

& 6 p.m. Lightning from 6 to

8 p. M.-Rain at 6 & 7 P. M.

Chiefly scatd. i. Brisk wind

from 8 a. M. to 8 P. M.

Scuds from S to 6 P. M., clear

afterwards. Brisk wind from 7

a.m. to 113 p. m. Lightning to

N. at.9.&.10P. M.

Clear to 6 a. m., scuds from

S to 10 a. m., scatd. “i & scuds

from S afterwards. High wind

from 8 A. M. to 63 P. M. Light-

ning at midnight & 9 P. M.

Scuds from Sto 10 a. M.,

scatd. “i to 6 P.M., overcast af-

terwards. High wind from 7 4.

m.to9ip.m. Thunder & light-

ning from 8 to 11 v. M. Rain at

8&9P. M.

Clouds of different kinds to

8 p. m., clear afterwards. Brisk

wind from 2 a. M. to 75 P.M.

Lightning from lto 4 4. M.

Clear. Brisk wind from 5 to 9

P. M.

Chiefly clear. Brisk wind from

6 to 7 P. M.

Clear to 3 a. M., clouds of

different kinds afterwards.

Seatd. \_ito 4a. M., stratoni

to 10 a. m., scatd. \.i to 1 P. M.,

scatd.\i to 7 P. M., clear after-

wards. Slight rain at 6 a. M.

Clear to 4 4. M., Scatd. \i to

Noon, “i to 8 p. M., clear after-

wards. Slight rain at 1} P. M.

Chiefly clear. Brisk wind at

8: p. M. Slight rain at 10 a. M.

Meteorological Observations. XXRE

Abstract of the Result of the Hourly Meterological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of Aprit 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.,

a A - WInD.

ae [wae

aa lea: 5| >| General t of the Sk

_ 1 100. @ a

24) 137.0 | 0.18 |S. S. W. 24.8 |148.4| Clear to 6 4. M., scatd. Ai to

2 P.M., overcast to 8 P.M., scatd.

\_i afterwards. High wind from

1; to 5; p. M. Thunder & light-

ning at5 & 6p. m. Slight rain

from 5 to 8 p. m.

25) 128.3 | 2.47 |S. S. E.&E. S. E.31.0 221.2} Clear to 6 4. m., scatd. “i to

noon,overcastafterwards.Storm

from 125 to 2 p. m. Thunder at

1 p. mu. Rain from 1 to 6 p. .

26, 138.0; ... |W.byS.&E.S.E.) ... |136.3| Clear to 6 4. m., scatd. “i to

4p. m., clear afterwards.

27| 1387.8; ... |S. by E. & 8. .» | 49.7] Clear to 5 a.m., scatd.i to 7

Pp. M., clear afterwards.

28; 133.0; ... iS.&S.S. W. 3.1/172.9| Scatd. “i to 3 p. m., clear af-

terwards. Brisk wind from 8}

A.M. to 4p. M., & from 83 to 94

p. M. Lightning to N W at 8

& 9 P. M.

29) 137.0; ... |S.byW, SSW&S.| 1.0 179.8} Stratoni to 5 a.m., setfds from

S to 9 a.M., clear to7 Pp. M.,

scuds from S afterwards. Brisk

wind at 73 4. m., & from 53 to

7 P.M.

30} 139.0; ... |S. & 8S. by E. 1.4'311.5 | Chiefly clear. Brisk wind from

8; tollip m.

\a Cirri, —i Strati,7i Cumuli, i Cirro-strati, o 1 Cumulo strati,~i Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli.

XXX Meteorological Observatons.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April 18638.

Montuty RESULTS.

Inches.

- Mean height of the Barometer for the month... . ‘ae vee 29.774 =

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 4. M. on the Ist. .... 30.016

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M.on the 22nd. _—.... 29.569

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month we. 0.447

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures ».. 29.846

Ditto ditto Mun. ditto ei: ws i +. 29.696

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month ... ver 0,150. %

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month ... 83.1

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 Pp. m. on the 30th. a Rg:

Min. Temperature occurred at Midnight & 11 Pp. M. on the 5th & 6th. 67.5

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month 31.0

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... 92.2

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, me a tt me “FSG

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... i b6.8

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... rai ee FOF

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 6.4

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month be = ss ty eee

“Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point... 10.9

| Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month ... a wwe O.78E

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month is ~ 8.36

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 3.50

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.71

Inches.

Rained 9 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours “Be oe

Total amount of rain during the month 5.47

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month __... ae 3 if ie

Prevailing direction of the Wind... bot aR a SN

eyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April. 1868.

Monruty Resvtts.

given hour any particular wind blew, to

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surv

s on

th the number of day

gether wi

it rained.

as blowing,

which at the same hour, when any particular wind w

Tables shewing the number of days on which at a

Meteorological Observations. XXX

uo UIeI]

a ee ee eee Se

*M Aq‘ Ny eta re re

oe Rel ee. ee ee ee ee ee Oe ee ee

‘uO ULBIT = ty

“MA NTNT SS aS Se

"UO HIB

‘M ‘N a a. re ee

2 Bp 2) Oe ES ee Oe a

"UO UBT i

RANA AA om aN NANA AS

re es Fe

"UO ULB

“Aq "AA foe een Maen aS

= rw beat A Ge teal a. on ES a

‘UO ULB

“MA tn oe oe oe Be Be Be ee | ean N re

“UO UlByy so

‘9 Aq "MA ei N is Me Ee oe ee ee ee |

UO UI

“AUS“AL shite call

I ae ae De ie

"uo UR =

"M ‘CS ri 6 ANTMNIMONINN RGA Se A AS

ase a

‘uO ULB

wa “O'S DANDSSONDRHAHHSODHOORRODHA _

we Ssaqaq

“uO ULB] =

“mM Aq “9 DO DAIDMMDODNDANDNSDARAANNGO SSID

‘uo ULeyy is hg

‘Q]) CHODAVWONDAAODAWIARBHONAGCHRE

Wy Nel — SSS ee

“UO UR].

q Aq:g) 2 Ona 4 aN NQ AMAA A 19

is i)

I erases tee wt ee Ne

‘uo UIey)| ia

A'd'g| OF ANA N AMAN AN FAANANAS 15

"UO WIR YT| 4 4 4

“iE “9 NS 1) = HANAN S04

‘uO ULRAT came

a SAN N Nan ee aa re le |

ma. kh

‘UO ULey|

‘uo Ulesq| 3 “4 i

nT S 44 a4 aS :

‘UO ULV

. = —

N Aq “of

“UO UR] :

“ON aT a4 = aS

‘S

“uO ULeT

ae st =. = La:

ee ary

"UO ULBT

e . . re

L “NN

"UO Ue

. Cy a4 Saas

‘uO Ue]

IT St Sana

= 3 WOMRORAOR

= ¢ ~

‘INOFT Gees eae Sl See roy

a Ay

ee & o ,

t 1

Meteorological Observations:

XEXIV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of May 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

ght of

meter

3 oe

Date. FH So

a'.o

bE 2 Max.

Inches. | Inches.

1 29.739 | 29.814 |

2 185 .855

3 818 891

4, .836 .923

5 185 .859

6 .686 767

7 .639 697

8 .720 879

9 827 .892

10 751 | .840

11 730 790:

12 764 .820.

id 186 846

14 808 .866

15 842 898

16 904 959

Le -900 .989

18 847 .896

19 803 Wie

20 .809 906

21 770 .832

22 Ra 2858

23 179 .869

24 729 | — .789

:25 aa? .780

26 oe 195

27 aeoy 178

28 695 164

29 650 14

30 649 | 702

31 689 | 2777

~The Mean Height of

Thermometer Means are deri ved, from th

the day.

]

Min:

Inches. |

29.685

752

765

«690

566

557

585

643

.670

664

£25

152

184

.839

899

758

715

743

703

.689

.699

.636

.619

642

.632

.606

O64

084

641

the Barometer,

Range of the Barometer’ |

during the day.

Diff.

| Mean Dr

Inches. |

0.129

136

139

158

.169

201

140

294,

140

2197

120

156

121

114

120

.180

138

158 |

163

129

.169

170

153

"161

153

146

158:

150

118

136

‘y Bulb

meter.

Thermo

87.3

86.0

86.9

86.6

83.6

83.1

82.1

82.7

82.1

81.9

83.7

84.9

84.5

84.2

86.1

86.5.

86.6

87.9

86.7

87.2

84.1

Range of the Tempera«

ture during the day.

| |

| Max. ih, | Diff.

6) 0) 8)

96.0 | 81.0 | 15.0

93.3 | 79.8 ' 13.5

95.4 | 81.0 | 14.4

95.2 | 80.0] 15.2

95.3 | 80.31 15.0

98.0 | 80.0! 18.0

96.3 | 81.0! 15.3

| 94.2 -| 73:5-| 90.7

| 87.5. | 92.5-| 16.0

90.2 | 71.5 | 18.7

90.0 | 71.4 | 18.6

| 88.5" | 73:0 | 165%

| 91.5 | 78:0 | 13.5

89.0 | 75.0] 14.0

91.2 | 78.0! 133

92.4 | 79.01 13.4

90.2 | 76.21 14.0

| 91.5 | 75.0 | 16.5

91.5 | 75.0} 165

| 89.0 | 75.0 | 14.0

91.5 | 977.5| 140:

3.0 | 77.0) 160

92.6- | %6.7 | 15.9

79.0

73.0

79.4

79.3

81.5

80.5

81.0

27.7

as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

e hourly observations, made during

xXxV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations |

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

ie 6 ca ee eH | Soe rae.

A Seales 2 So | aan La ee

2 || 6) 8 -|4 | 239) oe

mo) nS S 3 = roo oo

Pela|2| ae |@2| 2S |geeices

& 3 bp | & Pe ae es |3Ps| ses

= ATO] A = =a =

asta fe a ee

) ) fo) 9) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gt.

t 81.5 5.8 | 78.0 9.3 0.940 10.01 3.40 0.75

2 80:6 5.4 | 76.8 9.2 .905 9.65: 26 75

3 81.1 B.8 |) Fao 9.3 .928 Ret’ 3 30. fo.

4, 79.8 6.8 | 75.7 10.9 873 30) 84 Fe

5 79.6 Zl 1) Tore 11.4 .862 9 15 .70-

6 80.3 TA | Foe 11.8 879 A 4.22. .69:

a 81.1 6.0 | 77.5 9.6. .925 84 3.49 7A,

8 79.6 D4: | 75.8: 9.2 .876 -u. 16. 75.

4) 72.6 al i FOO 6.3 127 7.90: Pe 82

10 76.6 4.0 | 73.8 6.8" 822 8.88. 2.16 .80.

11 75.4 3.6: || Zoe me Bri 63: ley 82:

12 75.5: Ad | Woe 8.0 “781 AL 2.47 77

13 80.0 Mis eh Gees (pe: 913 Shc AG. .80:

14, 76.9 4,4, | 73.8 (es 822 8.84 40 19:

15 78.6. RO | Fok 8.5 857 9.17 86 76

16 78.1 5i0:| 74.6 8.5 843 03. 83 .76:

17 77.8 4.3 | 74.8: ie .849 13 385 Bio)

Ls, Lik m6. | Tou 9.5 .806 8.64 3.08 74

19 77.0 5.1 | 73.4 8.7 811 all 2.80 76:

20 17.9 4,6 | 74.1 7.8 .830 .92 52 78.

21 78.1 5.6.) 74.2 9.5 £832 91 3.16 4

‘22 79.0 5.9 | 74.9 10.0 851 9.09 40 73:

23 78.4: 6. | 7A. 10.4 .830 8.89 46 12.

2A 79.3 4.9 | 75.9 8.3 Reyes) 9.42 2.82 Bi

25. 80.4 a7 | 70.4 Sei 893" | 52. 3.42 7A.

26 80.1 6.4 | 76.3 10.2 .890 50 .60 7d

27 79.4 oie | LTS 857 12 4.02 .69. a

28 81.0 6.9 | 76.9 1 be 0) 908. 64 .0O0 TT) =

29 80.0: 6.7 | FEO 10.7 .882 .o9 3.79 1

30 81.0 6:2 | 77.3) 9.9 .919 18 59 i

3l 79.2 4.9 | 75.8 8.3 876. 09 2.82 77 ae

wh ee ile le eee

All the Hy grometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

“~

Meteorological Observations, XXXVI

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of May 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

68 Range of the Barometer = ,. |Range of the Tempera-

ee for each hour during moe ture for each hour

ros is Os .

ob S = the month. 3 during the month.

Hour.| 5 a A 5 |

aan .

gfico | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 39 -| Max. | Min. | Dit

ag a |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO Co) Co) Co)

Mid-

night.| 29.771 | 29.925 | 29.646 | 0.279 80.1 84.3 | 72.3 | -12.0

1 158 902 .639 .263 79.7 84.0 72.0 | 12.0

2 748 898 .626 272 79.4 83.8 72.0 | 11.8

3 740 896 .612 284, 79.1 83.5 4458.) 119

4 743 .910 .618 292 78.8 83.0 41.5 | 11.5

5 758 .918 .638 .280 78.6 82.5 71.5 | 11.0

6 175 .938 .650 .288 78.9 83.0 72.0 | 11.0

7 799 .969 .678 204 80.4 84.9 74.0 | 10.9

8 .816 .960 .692 .268 82.6 87.2 15.5 | 11.7

9 826 977 694 .283 85.1 89.8 76.0 | 13.8

10 .825 .989 97 .292 87.5 91.4 79.0 | 12.4

ask S14 | 08 | “043 299 0v.0 93.4 80.0 | 13.4

Noon. 797 932 661 271 90.9 95.5 83.5 | 12.0

1 ane .908 643 .265 92.1 97.4 86.6 | 10.8

2 743 .863 .615 .248 92.4, 98.0 84.4 | 13.6

3 422 .860 .588 242 91.6 97.5 71.5 | 26.0

4, 705 862 570 292 90.8 97.6 74.0 | 23.6

5 700 949 561 388 88.8 96.0 dao | 22.5

6 712 885 5d 328 86.7 94.0 73.4 | 20.6

7 733 886 580 306 83.8 99.9 73.5 | 16.5

8 748 884 607 274 82.7 88.5 71.4) 17.1

9 769 -908 639 269 OL.7 86.8 73.5 | 13.3

10 781 931 654 277 81.2 85.5 73.2 | 12.3

il 784 944 661 283 80.4 89.0 72.5 | 12.5

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

XXXVH Meteorological Observations,

Adstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Centinued.)

4 ae 45 tin 5 Se aL as

£ Bl iy ee S ga | ee ees

E pi B18 | S| S38 ae

o 2 3s 2 cz S58 | a. 9g | SEs

ee |e |) 8) Be), Bee he

siege a | Ae Ss, | ¢ ot | Sees

So ie | 8 | es | 82 | Be) See

= a et bell 2 = aa cel eae

re) 0 fe) ) Tncheg."|- T: oe. So Dae

Mid-

night. | \ Wise 28 | 75.3 4.8 0.862 9.31 1.53 0.86

1 77.2 2.5 | 75.4 4.3 865 30 37 87

2 77.0 2.4| 75.3 4.1 862 32 510) 88

3 76.9 2.2 | 75.4 Bw | 865 100 Lo 89

A (Kane) HO} 78-6 3.2 871 42 02 90

5 76.8 1.8 | 75.5 3.1 868 40 0.98 91

6 76.9 2.0 | 75.5 3.4 868 40 1.07 90

i fo 2.3 | 76.5 3.9 896 67 27 88

8 79.0 3.6 | 76.5 6.1 896 63 2.05 83

<) 79.6 Deo |e hon 9.4 873 ol 3.23 741°

10 80.6 6.9" | lo 11.0 896 54 3.95 71

dd 81.1 8.4 | 76.1 13.4 885 38 4.91 66

Noon. 81.4 9.5 | 75.7 15.2 873 22 5.67 62

it 81.7 10.4 | 75.5 16.6 .868 14 6.27 59

2 81.6 10.8 | 75.1 17.3 857 02 43 58

3 80.8 10.8 | 74.3 17.3 .835 8.81 38 58

4, 80.3 10.5 | 74.0 16.8 827 73 11 59

5 79.9 8.9 | 74.6, 14.2 843 94 5.06 64

6 79.3 7A | 749 11.8 851 9.06 | 4.12 69

i 17.9 5.9 | 73.8 10.0. 822 8.80 | 3.30 73

8 77.9 4.8 | 74.5 8.2 840 9.038 °°) 2.69 77

2 77.8 3.91 (75.1 6.6 857 21 16 81°

10 17.8 3.4} 75.4 5.8 865 02 1.89 83

di. 17.3 Sel: | Ford 5.3 857 20 69 85

~All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. x¥k vu

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

on the month of May 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

— =

_ 2 VIND.

3 § g=% © a

¢ a + Bale Prevailing : F Be General aspect of the Sky. .

S S a0 irection. ws o/ Qs

Ala | sas Af A

o |Inches Ib | Miles

1) 133.0; ... |S,S.byW.&S.SW. are Chiefly clear. Brisk from 82

to ll a. M.

ree r+ |8,S.byW.&S.byE.) 1.0273.0| Clear to 7 a. u., scuds from

S to 1 p.M., scatd. \i after-

wards. Brisk wind at 81 4. m., &

from 11} 4. m., to 22 p. mu.

3} 133.8; ... |S.S.W.&S. .«. 1217.0} Scatd. \i to 7 a.M., scatd. 7d

ito 11 a. u., clear alterwards.

4) 135.0 S. by W. & S. 1.0199.3 | Chiefly clear. Brisk wind at

72 ALM.

5} 133.0) ... |S. & 8. by E. Ce “Chiefly seatd. \i.

6} 137.5 8. 3.6.233.5 | Clear to 4 a. M., seatd. \i to

noon, clear to 7 P.M., seuds from

S afterwards. Brisk wind fron

. 5 to 103 Pp. m.,

7| 134.5; ... iS.& 8. SW. 4.0'306.5 | Clouds of different kinds to

10 a. M., clear afterwards. Brisk

wind from 95 4. M. to8} p. m.

8} 134.0 1.568. S. E. & S. 40.0345.7 | Scatd. i to 5 a. M., scatd.

“i to 5 P. M., overcast after=

wards. Brisk wind from 54

&. M., to 5 Pp. M. Storm at 62 p.

mM. Thunder & lightning at 7 &

. 8p. Mm. Rain at 7,8 & 11 p. wr.

an 0.88, Variable. .» [260.6 | Scatd. \Wi to 5 a. m., stra-

- toni to 8 a. m., scatd. “ito 1 Pp.

M., overcast to 5 Pp. m., clouds.

of different kinds afterwards:

Brisk wind at 3, 6} & 71 p. m.

Drizzled at 644. Mm. Thunder &.

rain from 2 to 4 Pp. m.

mo ie.8-| -... S. by E.&S.byW.| ... |146.5! Seatd. Tt te Fa wr. NAL to KE

Pp. M., clouds of different kinds.

afterwards. Lightning to N from

8 to 10 p.m. Slight rain at 11.

P. M.

1]| 134.8 > 9-H.S.& S355 Ve... 1999.9! Clouds of kinds to 9 a. M.,

scatd. “i to 3 P. M., overcast

x afterwards. Brisk wind nearly*

1.30 the whole day. Thunder &light-

ning from 6 to 11 p. m. Rain:

from 5 to: 11 Pp) we:

12) 131.9 a. = ae a v» (297.4 | Overcast. Thunder & light-

a ning to 44. M., scatd: _i to 6

p. M., clear afterwards. High:

wind at 2 a. m. Rain from mid~

night to 3 4. M.

* Fell since 5 Pp. m. of the 11th, to 3.4. u. of the 12th.

RXXIX

Meteorological Observations.

Abstiact of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

BH i EB WIND.

one) 2's

QB we

s| wg (C-#2| Prevailing

cal) CVT direction.

Al 4a es

cee en

Oo ry

13). 1860 8.S.E.&8.S. W

18) 134.4

19| 132.8

20| 138.5

op ee” Se” eee a ee ee ee ee Se

= |

1 Rain Guage 1

. é 3 iw)

: : ss

: n

0.02|S.S.W.& variable.

ls. S. E. &S.

0.068. byE. & 8. 8.E.

General aspect of the Sky.

ay Max

~~ | Pressure

=P)

2.6/117.4

2.1|267.6

0.07/95. 8. E. & 8. W. | 10.01115.5

1.06/S. 8. E.&8.S. W-

0.04)S. & 8. 8. EH.

0.5,119.7

3.1/157.4

4.6 232.1

Seatd. \ito5 a. M., scatd. 71

to 4p. m., stratoni afterwards.

(Brisk wind from 3 to 6% P. M.

Lightning at 11 P. M.

Clouds of different kinds.

Brisk wind at 3 & 10 A. M.

Lightning to E at midnight &

4 a.m. Thander at 4 a.m. Slight

rain from 2 to 4. & at 8 A. M.

Clear to 7 a. M., scatd. “1 to

9 p. m., clear afterwards. Brisk

wind between 43 & 55 P.M.

Lightning at 7 P. M.

Clear to 7 a. M., scatd. ™1 to

3 Pp. M., Wi to 8 P. M., stratoni

afterwards. Brisk wind from 33

to 44 p. m. Thunder at 4 & 6 Pp.

m.Lightning at 5 & 8 P. M.

Light rain at 5 P. M.

Bixatian to 8 a. M., scatd. \i

to ll a. m., seatd. ~i to 4B.

M., overcast afterwards. Strong

wind from 63 to 62 pv. M. Brisk

wind from 8 to 83 p. mM. Thun-

der at 7 & 8 ep. M. Lightning at

7,8&10p. mu. Light rain at 1g

& 8 Pp. M.

Stratoni to 3 a. M., seatd. \1

& i to6 Pp. m., stratoni after-

wards. Lightning to N from 8

to 11 P. M.

Stratoni to 3 a. M., seatd. i

to 4 Pp. M., overcast afterwards.

|Brisk wind from 1 to 7% P. M.

Thunder at 1 a. m. 35, 6 & 7 P.

m. Lightning at 1 a. Mm. & from

7 to ll p.m. Rain at 1, 10¢ 4.

mM., 6,74 & 11 P.M.

Overcast to 5 a. M., seatd. \i

to 9 4a. M., seatd. “i to 7 P. M.,

clear afterwards. Strong wind

between midnight to 1 a. m.

Lightning to SWfrom midnight

to 2 4. mM. &at ll p. mu. Light

rain at midnight.

Meteorological Observations. ; xl

Abstract of the Result of the Hourly Meterological Observations.

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of May 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c..,.

tH wi “Ww

E F — WInpD.

Me js * & Rel coal 9s weg ,

sk £ 5s Z Prevailing 48 fae General aspect of the Sky.

Sy Bee pS aw | SO

& = = ge direction... |3 Z as

Ae hl OF FOB

tb |Miles

Zeaoen) .. 1S.8.E.&S., ... |124.5 | Sceatd.\i to 3 «.m.,scatd.\nito

8 A. M.,.seatd, 71 to 6 p.m., clear

afterwards. Thunder at 4 Pp. M.,

| Slight rain between 4 & 5 p. M.

22) 134.8; ... |S.by W.&S.S.W.) 4.8 |142.9| Clear to 7 a. m., scatd. Ai to

5 Pp. M., stratoni afterwards..

High wind between 8} & 9 vp. M.

Lightning at 8 & 9 p.m. Slight

rain at 94 P. M.

23) 135.5 | ... |Variable ... {104.9 | Stratoni to 44. m., thin \i to

. i8 a. M. clear to noon, scatd. “i

to 6 Pp. m., clear afterwards.

Lightning to S W at midnight.

24,135.8). ... |S. 8S. W. 4.7 |1382.2| Clear to 4 a. m., scatd. 71. to

. | dp. M.\W1 afterwards. High

wind at 3 & 43 p.m. Thunder &

slight rain at 3p. M.

95) 139.0]. ... |S.6.W.&S.byW.| ... [150.4] Scatd. “ito 5 p. x., stratoni

afterwards.

26,138.5, ... |S. 8S. W. &S. 5.8 137.6 | Clear nearly the whole day.

High wind between 63 & 6? P.

M. Lightning at 7 & 8 Pp. M.

ar ta7.a)| «(ww «(1S & 8S. S. OW. 1166.0) * Seatd. “\_1 ‘to 6 a.) seatd.

“ito 4 Pp. M. \Wi afterwards.

Lightning to N at 8 P. M.

26,139.00; ... (8. by W.& 8. . | 96.0")- Clear to -44. m., .scatd. “4 to

6 Pp. M., clear afterwards.

29,138.48) 0.235.8.W, & 8. W.) 2.4/101.5| Clear to 6 a. m., scatd. \i to

; i@ay wi, semtd. “n 16. 7 opi an.,

clear afterwards. Brisk wind

from 54 to 62 ve. m. Thunder &

rain at 6 P. M.

137.3 | Clearto7 a. m., scatd. “i to 6

P.M. scatd. ‘i afterwards. Brisk

wind from noon to 5 P. M.

31) 133.0} 0.58)S. by E. & S. 8.E.'12.0 200.2 | Scuds from S to5 a. m., scatd-

et. “i to 2 vp. m., stratoni after-

wards. Strong wind from 2? to

35 P. M. Thunder at 4 P. Mm.

Lightning to W. at 8 P. m., Rain

at 4&5 P. M.

30,1355) ... |S. 8. W. 0.

“TI

\i Cirri, —i Strati,7i Cumuli, —i Cirro-strati, ~i Cumulo strati,~i Nimbi

“i Cirro eumuli.

xli Meteorotogicat Observatons.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May 1868.

Montuity REsUttTs.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month... sae .» 29.764 —

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 4.m.onthe 17th. .,, 29.989

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 6 P.M.onthe 7th. ... 29.557

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month oe ».. 0.432

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... ae “ig ... 29.836

Ditto ditto Min. ditto ah sa aS ... 29.683

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month .., aa 7 0.158

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month... vee wre 843

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 p. mM. on the 6th. ee S.. 980

Min. Temperature occurred at 8 P. M. on the lth. : as sai ae

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature .., oe Pal 5. O52

Ditto .wditte 14 cian, Gibbs 4b) shes hi cs mS MeO

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... dh SS

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... “ie emmy fo

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 5.5

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month ee a ca F408

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point ... 9.4

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month ..,, use So 20.8E

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month fon ie ae ee

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 3.17

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.74

Inches.

Rained 15 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours fe > eee

Total amount of rain during the month oe Oe

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month

Se mg hs a .

Prevailing direction of the Wind... on S, 8. by E.& 8. 8. W.

zi’

Meteorological Observations. xhi

“UO UIBy|

‘M4Q°N

"uO ULB Et

PMA“ KYAT fol x)

‘uO Uley t% =

‘dO ULBIT

"NAq° MA

‘UO ULB

me. i A

UO Uley

‘9 Aq "MA

"uO Uley

e ne ra re |

"MS" MA

‘uo ULe yy co ro ro

; .- Son Mice Meee Mee Bee | OOO Fea <a AN AAS S —_ N

th the number of days on

g, it rained.

together w

‘uo uLe yy —

aioe amy co WAIT RRA ODRROORMRDOOMRWSASD

M'S’S =

eyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May. 1868.

"UO UBT a

“M 4g °9 ANIMAS IIMNAMMNNAH1I9M MD OI9DOWMADA

a Sa —_

“UO Urey i ri 4 et

F WOODPANKRNRDODROSHARTORNRDONOS

8 etn EO) ne es Saeed et —_ os

"UO ULeyyT

‘a Aq ‘gs

‘UO Uley

‘HS '‘S

UO Tey]

"UO UII

a ‘g “nT asi N ec ea cH taal

‘HO UIeyT) = —

‘9 &q a i to ie | se aac re

DOM AEeUIMUDMNAAHADANAMMAAAMOMDL

taken at the Surv

Montuty Resvtrs.

given hour any particular wind blew,

when any particular wind was blowin

WD OONMAROWDWOSOWMA a4 AMANTSS

= a os 4

NANAMARPANMANAAN FAAHASD Ss

10ns

No.of days

l Observat

h at a

1¢

“uo UTeyy = Hs wn =

iT = = | — AANA AK

ys on wh

at the same hour,

"UO ULeyy 7

Rec sor

"UO ULE

aC I "NI “71 et 1 r=

‘UO Urey

“HON

‘m0 Urey

“HE ON ON

‘a Aq‘

"UO ULeyy

which

. = = a rH

Tables shewing the number of da

“OY

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorologica

a di © OaoOon

Atdinerangrveidnee

al tat tiene Mal as = <2 Na 8 tt i ORL IRA RAT et

‘ .

‘

Meteorological Observations. xl

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

om the month of June 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 3.4” Bast.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

a 8 _ | Range of the Barometer = - asiee of the Tempera

a28 during the day. | a a ture during the day.

2p ra ba |

Se. | Max, | Min | pir } 28 7 wee | win. | pir

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 re) 0 a)

] 29.742 | 29.804 | 29.664 0.140 84.7 92.8 77.2 | 15.6

2 avs 788 .636 152 87.3 95.0 80.0. 14.0

3 708 1717 627 .150 87.2 95.2 80.5 | 14.7

A .710 781 .608 173 87.8 96.2 Se iy Lay

5 697 | .760/ 633 127] 849 | 9298 | 787 1/ 147

6 - 643 705 576 129 80.3 84.5 | 78.5 6.0

7 G04, .639 551 088 78.5 79.4) 8 EZ

8 583 .640 Bie 129 79.3 81.4 (a 4.1

9 085 647 045 102 81.1 83.5 49.3 4.2

10 545 O91 507 084 80.4, 83.4 78.4 5.0

11 512 571 437 134. 81.8 87.0 18.5 8.5

12 A419 .500 307 143 81.9 84.5 17.5 7.0

13 .305 ALT .J09 108 79.8 83.0 77.0 6.0

14, 401 A60 301 .109 79.2 80.0 78.4 1.6

15 A10 458 361 .097 80.7 83. 79.0 4.5

16 396 464 41 123 19.7 82.6 149.6 5.0

17 450 502 400 .102 81.3 85.0 78.0 7.0

18 491 048 446 .102 82.2 87.0 78.0 9.0

19 OL .550 464 .086 82.2 85.5 78.4) ale

20 049 .086 504, .082 86.8 92.5 82.0 | 10.5

21 004 590 A484, .106 87.7 93.3 82.0 | 11.3

22 535 085 484, Ok 87.6 93.5 Ban" |) Las

23 557 .990 527 .063 87.7 91.9 83.6 8.3

24 589 .635 637 .098 89.4 94:.4) 84.8 9.6

25 .588 .628 518 "110 88.8 94.4, 79.5 | 14.9

26 567 .608 537 071 84.5 88.5 82.1 6.4

27 035 572 A481 G91 85.1 87.2 82.5 4.7

28 007 563 AG5 .098 85.8 89.0 84.0 5.0

29 043 089 486 103 83.5 84.6 81.7 2.9

30 806 634 .506 128 82.2 84.6 f2°9°40) 5a

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

aad Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

the day.

xliv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of dune 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrieal elements

: dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

eee cree

a tel iste E 6 eo] Co wee eS .

A soll eee 2 ee leauge | pee

~ = = “aS one lest

2 5 eta R 2 Ee BR | 03 te

Date.) ®, | 2 1A | = | 8 | me [oes] Bes

es je | 2) Be ie Be | 8oa| 3.8

a FQ ea: ee a “PF | Bae | ees

(o) fo) =| 3 oe 14> ~

$ 4 bs = bay B Soy | Ses] Soa

= Sd) a ey ia ae a |< =

Oo Co) fo) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

L 199 4.8 | 76.5 8.2 0.896 9.59 2.83 0.77

2 80.7 G6 |) 76:7 10.6 9902 58 3.53 71

3 80.7 6.5 | 76.8 10.4 905 63 74 72

4, 80.6 fer FN ASS) 11.5 .890 A6 4.14 70

5 80.4 4.5 1 702 (ee -916 wip 2.70 78

6 78.6 ye |. ene 2.9 922 95 0.96 91

7 77.8 OF | 77.3 12 919 97 o 96

8 78.5 6B) 748 1.4 937 10.15 AA, 96

9 19.9 1) 79 2.0 973 49 “68 94

10 790) 1.4 | 78.0 2.4 940 15 b/s 93

il 79.9 1.9 | 78.6 3.2 958 32 1.08 91

12 von 28 | 772 4.8 -913 9.82 62 86

13 78.4 1.1 | 77.6 19 928 10.03 0.63 94,

14 78.4 0.8 | 77.8 1.4 934 12 44 96

15 78.0 27 | 761 A.6 885 9.53 1.51 86

16 Coa 1.6 | 77.0 27 910 83 0.89 92

17 79.2 oe ne Whe 3.6 931 10.02 1.22 89

18 79.0 Be | FO. 5.4: 905 9.73 81 84

19 79.4 2.8 | 77.4 4.8 922 {OL 63 86

20 81.7 5.1 | 78.6 8.2 958 10.21 3.00 ri

OF |. 2:0 5.7 | 78.6 9.1 958 19 37 75

22 82.2 5.4 | 79.0 8.6 970 ol 21 76

23 82.5 5.2 | 79.4 8.3 983 Ad 11 77

24 83.6 5.8 | 80.1 9.3 1.005 64 61 73

25 83.4 5.4) 80.2 8.6 008 .68 32 76

26 82.4 2.1 | 80.9 3.6 030 11.01 1.34 89

27 81.9 32 |) 79:7 5.4 0.992 10.61 96 84

28 82.4 3.4, | 80.0 5.8 1.001 .68 2.15 83

29 81.3 22. 10798 3.7 0.995 .66 1.34 89

30 79.4 2.8 | 77.4 4.8 922 9.91 63 86

| |

vel te ee ra

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants:

Meteorological Observations. xly

Abstract of the Results of the Tlourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

"én the month of June 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

63 Range of the Barometer | et | Range of the Tempera-

£8: for each hour during as) 8 ture for each hour

ea the month. 2 during the month.

i?) bs ie |

Hour, = 2 Aa | |

e933 | Max. | Min. | Dist =. | Max. | Min. | Dif.

ad ao | |

eA |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | 0 ) YS o

Mia- |

night./ 29.572 | 29.770 | 29.392 | 0.378 82.0 86.6 | 78.5 8.1

1 ‘557 | 764; 862 | 402 | 818 | 864 | 77:5/ 8.9

2 544 50 348 407 Sige) 186.2) 1o2%8 8.4,

3 O34 748 841 407 81.4 86.0 15 8.5

4 029 an .338 401 81.3 86.0 ‘ha 8.7

5) .03d 100 Jaa 432 81.0 85.8 77.0 8.8

6 547 .768 325 | .443 80.9 85.7 7715 8.2

z .065 Hel 41 .430 $1.8 87.0 77.6 9.4,

8 579 799 348 451 82.9 88.7 ie}, 1.9

9 .588 804, 1365 449 83.9 90.5 Giza |, 12.2

10 591 795 061 A34, 84.7 92.5 77.6 | 14.9

11 585 183 .356 427 85.8 93.4, 78.0 | 15.4

Noon.| 576 eel | Bee |. ALS 85.8 94.0 | 78.2) 15.8

1 559 «bak 344, 393 86.3 94.2 78.2 | 16.0

2 540| .713| 340] 373: | 863 | 950 | 777 | 17.3

3 O21 69] nen .368 86.6 Gi.2- la 72se8 | 18.4,

4 .606 677 312 360 86.4, 6,0) \.73.2 | 16:8

5 .503 672 .309 .063 85.9 94.8 78.2 | 16.6

6 509 664 335 | .329 85.4 93.8 | 78.3] 15.5

7 029 692 309 eee 84.2 91.5 f50)) 135

8 049 dad .386 .o28 83.6 | 91.0 fou& | 12.6

9 .D68 739 | ,399 .340 82.8 89.5 78.4 | 11.1

10 082 154 410 Ad 82.5 89.4. 78.011) lah 4

‘ll 581} .758/ 399; 359 | 821 | 88.0 | 7751 IOS

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several.

hours during the month.

xlvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June 1868. :

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

| dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

eee se 9 EC EO

H : 43 a 2 x tee Salas

8 S aS E : aid | aoe B83

S |F |e |e | 2 | ee | eee ees

2 ro) 3) i) Sy 4> = oS we

ra cS E - Re) | oat Oe e

oH 2 £2 2 3. "o'5 a ° @ lead a

ES 3s | 2% 8. | Bb BS eee

@ = 43 | ee 2

ee i a | Ag de. | ga | Se | see

§ 3 bs 5 ae 3.8 ee es e438

| = A; oO] A A abo)

| y

r o) ey o Oo Inches. | T. gr. | T.gr-

Mid-

nmight.| 79.9 241 | 7384 3.6 0.952 10.23 1.24 0.89

1 79.8 2.0 | 78.4. 3.4 952 25 15 90

2 79.7 2.0 | 78.3 3.4 .949 22 15 90

3 79.5 1.9 | 78.2 3.2 946 19° 08 90

A 79.5 1.8 | 78.2 3.1 946 19 05 91

5 79.3 17 | 78.1 2.9 943 16 | 0.98 91

6 | 79.3 1.6 | 78.2 29 946 19 91 92

7 79.7 9.1 | 78.2 3.6 946 bg 1.2 89

8 80.0 2.9 | 78.0 4.9 .940 09 70 86

9 80.2 Sr | FG 6.3 .928 9.95 2.18 82

10 80.6 ALA 7.0 931 96 46 80

Li |) 80.9, |) i 976 1 88-0) ° oes 88 95 77

Noon.| 80.7 Sak | yew 8.7 913 74 |. 3.09 76.

Sd, 81.0 me |) 773 9.0 919 .80 2 75

2 81.0 53 | 773 9.0 919 .80 22, 75

Si |. Seba m5 | 778 8.3 934, 95 19 76

A 81.1 5.3 | 77-4 9.0 922 83 23 75

5 81.1 a8 | 77.7 8.2 .931 94 2.93 Bre

6 81.2 42 | 78.3 yea 949 | 10.14 5A .80

7 80.7 3.5 | 78.2 6.0 946 ao 11 83

8 80.3 3.3 | 78.0 5.6 940 07 1.96 84,

9 80.1 247 | 78.2 4.6 946 15 60 86

10 80.0 2.5 | 78.2 4.3 946 ty 47 87

11 79.8 2.20 Be 3.9 946 iy 34 88

Meteorological Observations.

xlvir

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of June 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

woe Ww

3 8 2 z= bas bis ® ae

ee Le. BS HH] pS

£| 45 Sas Prevailing bes

P. S FE aa0| direction. ae As

‘ ae ¢ : pie 5 all

- 0 {Inches lb | Miles|

2) 139.4; ... |S.S.E:&S. W.| 1.5 186.2 |

2| 137.0 S. by W.&8.8.W. oe

3! 137.1 S.W.&S. 0.8 114.2

4 137.0 S.& 8. S. W. i. t1409

5) 137.0 0.16\S. & S. E. 6.4,131.2

ian 0.40,E. S. B. 2.0 157.0 |

py ee 5.35\E.S.E, E.&8.8.E.| 4.49455

8 ‘ 2.42'8.S.E,&8.S. W.| ... [189.1

9} ... | 0.2219. 8. W. 4&5. by W. 63.9

re 1.248. W.& 8. 8S. W.} 3.1/180.3

11 1.34/8, S.S.E.&S.byE.) 4.7/954.5

12 0.7715. 8S. W. & S. 515349.4

a. 5.85\S. W.& W.N.W.| 6.51437.0

a a 4ea. ww, 3.7/299.4

General aspect of the Sky.

Scatd. ito 5 a.m., seatd. ai

to 5 p.m., scatd. \i afterwards.

Fresh breeze from midnight to

10 a. M., & from 4 to 51 p. um.

Clear to 2 4. m., scatd. “i to

7p. M., clear afterwards.

Clear to 8 a. m., scatd. i to

6p. m., clear afterwards.

Clear to 7 a. m., seatd. %j

afterwards.

Scatd. ‘ito 6 a.m.\i to 11 a.

im. Overcast to 2 p.m. Scatd.\i

afterwards. High wind from 114

to noon. Rain from noon to 2

P.M.

Scatd. \\ to 8 a. u., Overcast

afterwards. Brisk wind at 91 4.

M., & from 2} to 11 p.m. Thun-

der at 9 & 104. m. Slight rain

from 94 a.M., to7 P. M., & at

ll Pp. u.

Overcast. Brisk wind at 104

A. M. Rain whole day & night.

Overcast.Rain from midnight

to l yp. uw., & drizzled at 5 &

6 P. M.

Overcast. Lightning to § at

] a.m. Light rain after intervals.

Overcast. Brisk wind from 1

to 3; p. m. Rain nearly the

whole day & night.

Overcast nearly the whole day

& night. Brisk wind from 104

A. M., to 7 p.m. Rain from 2 to

8a. mM., & from 3 to 51 P. Mm.

Overcast. High wind from 9

A. M.,to1l P. m. Rain nearly

the whole day & night.

Overcast, High wind from

midnight tod a. M., & from 9 to

ll e. m. Rain nearly the whole

day & night.

Overcast. Brisk wind from

1034. uM. to 3+ e.m., & at 8 &

10 p. mM. Rain nearly the whole

day & night.

xviii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Petia Bee Ww

; |2 IND.

& ; 2 Se 2 Porting 4 5 Be General aspect of the Sky

3 S -aach direction. So As

mw |a

AL a” lea = te

Inches fb |Miles

15 0.27\S. S. W 4.6431.9| Overcast. High wind from 63

a.m. toll p. mM. Rain at 4,7&

Sia. mM. & at 10 P. M.:

16\.3 0.53,SW,SSW&WSW!] 4.0/400.8| Overcast. Brisk wind from

~ \midnight to 43 a. m. Light rain

from midnight to 8 a. M. & at 3,

10 & ll Pp. M.

M7 eee 1.46/S, S.W.&S. S.W.) 1.8/342.4| Overcast nearly the whole

day & night. Brisk wind at 10

a. M., & from 2to3 P.M. Rain

from midnight to 95 a. M., & at

Qi P. M.

Lois xt 1.09/S. W. & W.S.W.| 1.5,263.2 | Overcast. Brisk wind from 103

a. M., to 8 p. M. Light rain at 2,

43 & 91 4. M., & from 43 to 11

P. M. 4

19) 94.4 0.11/S. W.& 8. 2.3317.1| Overcast. Brisk wind from 25

to 8 a. m. Light rain from mid-

[W. night to 2 a. M.

90/130.4| ... [SSW,SW&S by] ... 175.6 | Stratoni to 6 a.m., clear to 11

A. M., thin \i to 7 Pp. M., clear

afterwards.

21/131.4} 0.11/S.W.&S.S. W. 2.5/132.2| Clear to 2 Pp. M., thin \i to 6

p.m., stratoni afterwards. Light-

ning to W. at 8 p.m. Light rain

at 9 BP. We

29| 132.0! 0.35/S. S. E. &S.S.W.| 1.8135.0| Stratoni to 3 a. m., scatd. \i

to 7 a. M., scatd. Wi to 11 a. M.

Seatd. \i to 3 p. m., clouds of

kinds afterwards. Brisk wind &

rain at8ip.m. Thunder at 9

p. M. Lightning from 8 to 10 p. M.

23|133.0| .,. |S. by E.&WS.W,) ... | 80.7| Stratonito5a.m.\ito7 P.M,

clear afterwards.

24 131.0| ... |SbyW,SW&SSW) ... | 64.5| Clearto 3 a. m., stratoni to 8

A.M. Thin \i’afterwards. Light-

ning to N. at 8 Pp. M.

251129.0| 0.70/S. S. W. &S.W.) 5.2) 97.7| Clear to 4 4. m., seatd. \ni to

8 a. M., scatd. “1 to noon, stra-

toni to 7 P. M., overcast after-

Thunder & Lightning at 8 & —

9p. M. Rain from 83 & 103 P. M.

26) Wis 0.24/S. S. E. 0.3)143.2 | \~_ito3a.M., overcast to 7 P.

M. \ni afterwards. Thunder at —

1 vp. mM. Rain from 23 to5 a. M., —

&atlrpeu. | <3

Meteorological Observations. xlix

Abstract of the Result of the Hourly Meterological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of June 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.,

a 3 ° E : WInp.

oo |Yasd

a 5 5 5 : _ p>! General aspect of the Sk

s| ag [CAE Prevailing Mel os Pp | y:

Fay = s Eng direction. as As

4 2)

tb |Miles

27). . |S. SW. & 8. 138.7 | Stratoni to 8 A. M. overcast,

afterwards.

150.7 | Overcast to 44. m., stratoni

to 1l a. M., overcast to 7 Pp. M.,

stratoni afterwards. Drizzled

betweén noon & 1 Pp. M.

235.7 | Stratoni to 2 a. m., overcast

to 4p. M., stratoni afterwards.

Light rain from noon to 1 p. um.

145.0; Stratoni to 4 pep. Mm. Vito 8

A.M. “1 to 6 P. m., stratoni

afterwards. Slight rain at 9 a.m.

& between 1 & 2 p.m. Rain from

10 to ll P. m.

28)... .. |S. S.W, & S. W.!/ 0.2

29| ... | .. |S. 8. W,S8.&8.W, 0.3

80} ..., 0.55|8.W. & 8. S. W. | 0.2

“i Cirro cumuli.

i Meteorological Observatons.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June 1868.

MontHity REsvLts.

Inches.

| Mean height of the Barometer for the month... me ».. 29.552

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9a. m. onthe Ist.. ... 29.804

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 Pp. m. on the 13th. ... 29.309

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month Me ». 0.495

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... oe Sie ... 29.606

Ditto ditto Min. _ ditto a 5 a »., 29.495

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month .., ixvy 0118

)

- Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month ase ke, (Goe

Max. Temperature occurred at 3p. M. on the 4th. on Oe

Min. Temperature occurred at 5 a. m. on the 13th. ... Seur f da

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month mifvamee 4 t-

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... see) lu Oe

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, fs ai aA a ae

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... ts ham. sb

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... oe wo 803

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 3.3

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month ee ca a SOA

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point ... 5.6

Inches.

Mean Elastic foree of Vapour for the month .., ee sv. 0.940

Troy grain. ©

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month uit wat Cowen aaa

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation .... 1.96

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.84

Inches.

Rained 22 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours 00 8.85

Total amount of rain during the month ies on 26.61

Total ammount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo- &

meter during the month __... Me ig ee: oe

Prevailing direction of the Wind... vi S.S.W,S. W. &S.

* The amount of rain could not be determined by the Anemometer on | —

13th & 14th owing to the paper tearing.

th the number of days on

g, it rained.

eyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June. 1868.

together w

hour any particular wind blew,

any particular wind was blowin

Monruuy Resvtrs.

given

when

which at the same hour,

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surv

Tables shewing the number of days on which at a

*M 4q° NT

"uo ULB

*M'N'N

‘uo Uley

"TG Urey

PN AQAA

‘uo Urey

"UO UIRy

"dO ULB

"MSM

“uO Uleyy

"MS

"UO Wey

UM'S 'S

"UO U1ByT

"M Aq ‘g

m0 £0) Urey

ma. &

"UO ULB

“iT kq ‘g

“UO ULRYT

ic cies

“UO WIR}

te G

“do Urey]

“uO WLeyy

‘uo Urey

AH:

ey saree

"Nt Aq

“moO UTeY

‘TN W

“moO Urey]

‘AN

‘UO TIBI]

NNT

“WO UlIey

“a Aq * NT

‘uo WlLey

—_—_—_——____

“MOTT |

nr aS Sunn SESE?

"UO UIBIT Es

NN =

Meteorological Observations,

if. eee at 68 8 ee

eqs

a ae ANMNMANANMDMAS

ANANMHAHMNANAND ARAN

aaa

alanine

<a MONMONNNDOFTARROROANG AAT

ONAA ARS

OrMNRONROMODAROAKRL

ANAANAANAR N aN

SwWwWONMNADO

eo ae eS

a AHMN ———

OANA A 4 10 TRS

BRAN AH

as |

NARA MNANASAHANwD0

S44 ee

AMNMMAAMAOMNAARPOAHMADOOSOMONS

See AA ae. ae

N17 MAN

Dae AA AHNNAANR HA NRAN

. Sea wees

Sa AanNaaAe

Se ete

N i ™N

So mM MNS

ret ei

re Ln OS Be

CHAN WIA Ore OR Oe

(2) Leal fara

Meteorological. Observations. li

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorolozical Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Caicutta,

on the month of July 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern cf the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

, OT LS SS SS a esses ssnsnssnsssasnanasseseancacreess

Cha }

Ps 9 | Range of the Barometer = o Range of ‘the Lempera-

mas | during the day. | pe: | ture during the day.

3 S x e /

Date. Heo | | | ie E | |

S92 | Max. | Min. | Diff. | cr | Max. | Min. | Diff.

iy | / {

}

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | o Oo Oo Oo

1 | 29.581 | 29.625 | 29.587 | 0.088 | 93. 90.0 | 79.0! 11.0

2 593 638 653! .085| 85.0 Q9.1 | 89.4' oF

3 595 | .687| .557{ .080| 9883 | 934 | B40] 94

A 564 602 515 087 | 88.8 93.0 | 86.51 7.6

5 586.4 .630 540 090 | 88] 93.0 | 84.0] 9.0

6 629 687 567 120! 862 91.6 | 80.5 | 11.1

7 668 723 | 624 099} 85.9 ' 91.0 | 818] 993

8 651 Ji2| 680 132 | 85.9 91.4 |-820!] 94

9 574 627 | 498 129 | 85.8 90.8 | 82.01 88

10 589 | 616 532 083 | 78.8 | 84.5 | 76.0! 85

a 590} 633 529 113} 825 | 87.0 | 80.0} 7.0

12 616 662 BGG 096} S43 | 906 | 815] 91

13 590 629 | 534 095 | 84.0 88.5 | 81.0| 76

d4 | .665/ 609! .508{ .101| 833 | 886 | 79.6] 84

1b 545} .586/ 479) .107/ 838 | 87.0 | sag] 62

16 567 628 522 106 | 83.4 86.0 | gle! 5.0

17 602 663 544 119; 82:3 | 85.9 | 797/| 69

is .| 59 654, 528 26) 633 |. 87.2 |. 810! 62

19 530 590 457 423, 88:0 89.5 | 810] 85

20 468 507 .390 117 | 86.3 925 | 832| 93

21 495 536 452 084; 85.4 | 91.4 | 83.90] 84

22 513 576 450 126 | 83.6 87.0 | 81.0! 6.0

23 582 .639 525 114] 8h9 | 840 | s00| 40

24 632 671 593 078 | 83.8 87. 795 | 82

25 613 660 537 123 | 83.9 87.7 | 80.61 7.1

26 562 613 501 112 | 83.4 S70 |. S152) eee

27 562 .608 497 ll | 82.6 85.5 | 80.01 5.5

28 BTA 637 513 124 | 82.9 87.7 79.7 | 220

29 618 67 B75 095 | 81.8 86.6 | 78.9| 7.7

30 644, .696 601 095 | 82.7 87.3 | 78.0! 93

B1 .636 698 557 141] 83.6 88.5 | 802] 383

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Bee ometer Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

‘the day.

ivan Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

am the month of July 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

5 : e md Eye Se pvr

3 12 = E ° See Roa = ee cae

= = | 3 | A 2 ge | Sus | 5S

’ o = oy Chey +2 sieve bs} es

| > Ee 5 ome) oa 5 So

<j eh) gee ie 2 so | pease

Date.| 2 x rc ES i‘ 2 2 | 4 @ = 8S

= 2 eS Su "So aut | &9

2 || Ze | 82) 23 [Leelee

‘ [oy oe ne or

g3 io | #8 |-pe | 2 | 22 |see| gee

= Bo ike = a | a

0) fo) fe) re) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

1 80.1 3.7.| 77.5 6.3 0.925 9.92 2.18 0.82

2 81.8 3.2 | ¥oKe 5.4, .989 10.58 1.95 84,

3 82.8 5.5 | 79.0 8.8 .986 47 3.33 16

4 83.2 5.4 | 80.0 8.6 1.001 62 30 76

5 82.7 5.4} 79.5 8.6 0.986 AT 25 16

6 81.4, 4.8 | 78.0 8.2 .940 O38 2.96 Wt

7 81.0 4.9 | 77.6 8.3 .928 991: 96 ws

8 81.1 4.8) B77 8.2 O31 94) 93 U7

9 81.9 3.9 | 792 6.6 .976 10.41 42 81.

40 77.2 16 | 76.1 2.7 885 9.57 0.87 .92

11 80.3 2:2°| 78.8 = ay A 964 10.36 1.28 89

42 81.3 3.5 | 78.8 6.0 .964 al 2.15 | .838

13 81.0 3.0 |}. Fa 5.1 967 O07 1.80 .85

14, 80.7 2.6 | 78.9 4.4, .967 39 54 87

15 81.0 Bo | ore 4.3 .976 48 52 87

16 81.3 ol Oss 3.6 995 .66 .30 .89

17 80.2 2 |) Sak 3.6 961 33 25 .89

18 81.0 2.3 | 404 3.9 .983 54 .39 .88

19 82.2 2.8 | 80.2 4.8 1.008 td. 76 .86

20 82.5 3.8 | 79.8 6.5 0.995 .60 2.42 81

21 82.2 3.2 | 80.0 5.4 1.001 wo 1.98 84

22 80.9 2./ | 7o.0 4.6 0.979 40 .63 87

23 80.2 ef | 790 2.9 .970 44, .0O 91

24 81.3 2.5 | 79.6 4.3 .986 Of 53 87

25 81.3 2.6 | 79.5 4.4 .986 OT .56 87

26 81.3 Zo 4 149.8 3.6 995. 66 BO .89

2 80.3 2.2 | 78.8 3.7 964 36 28 .89

28 79.5 Sl SO 5.3 928" 9.97 82 .85

29 78.7 Sal.) Gr 5.3 .896 65 75 85

30 79.6 3.1 | 77.4 5.3 922 91 81 85

aL 89.6 3.0 | 78.5 5.1 .955 10.25 78 85

i ie Bea eeer eee _

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. hiv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutia,

in the month of July 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

63 Range of the Barometer ci we | Range of the Tempera-

5 Be for each hour during a 8 | ture for each hour

+ , ws i

= a the month. Pg: | during the month.

- ~

Hour.) = hae Ag |

RAN ; o, q & 5 be

3, | Max. Min. | Diff. a | Max. | Min. | Diff

as ae

Mid-

night.| 29.598 | 29.673 | 29.497 | 0.176 82.5 86.5 78.8 ay

1 5386 655 486 .169 82.2 86.5 78.5 8.3

2 O76 .652 G2 .180- 81.9 | 86.5 FO.4 | 83

3 .569 647 ATS 174 SG SG ie FeO 9.0

4 570 649 A71 ALF 81.4 85.9 76.5 9.4,

i) 570 .656 476 | .180 81.2 85.5 76.5 9.0

6 .583 .666 A79 187 81.3 85.5 76.5 | 9.0

7 899 .689 .498 ASL §2.0 85.7 | 97.65 8.2

8 611 “200 .500 .200 83.1 88.0 16-1 PLS

9 .619 707 .496 wal 84.4 89.5 7eO | 135

10 62.4 712 493 219: 85.3 90.5" | 76:9 | 13:6

31 620: £23 491 232, 86.1 90.9: | 76.5 | 14.4

Noon. .605 .709 473 .236 86.7 92.2 |. 71.0 | 16,2

1 092 .698 443 .258 87.1 93.0 4i2 } 15.8

2 572 .673 428 245° 87.4 93.4, FOO P54

3 ‘553 | 650; 411} 239° | 873 | 934 | 7881 49

4 539 .627 O93 234; 87.3 92.5 49-6.| 12.9

5 532 624 .390 234 86.9 92.5 80.0 | 12.5

6 .539 .631 429 .202. 86.1 92.0 80.0 | 12.0

7 559 | 658 | 442 | «236 | 848 | 905 | 79.6! 109

8 579 .660 .460 .200° 84.2 &9.6° 79.0 | 10.6

9 599} 683) 484) 199 | 837 | eg7 | 799] 95

10 Or! | 26870) BOY aage i gas | - ee'o | 78.91 91

id .609 .683 002 18] 82.9 87.0 #9.2 7.8

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

Ww Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generat’s Office, Calcutia,

im the month of July 1868.

Hourly Means, &c..of the Observations and cf the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

' is = = ae Sey 5

£0.28 |e |e.) Shee | Saee ee

Gi Br begt |e g ss | Sus lta,

= ® o 5 Ct 4 a et Oe

eee ee le | Se

Hour. e - ra = 3 a a ~ g8 ee

= = = = 2 43 FS a= S a2 3 ag

ot = 2 Fg Sey ga |S8e' | 5a

Cet | ee | ek Be | eS 8 ee

re a ie cos es S Sr led | a

) a) fo) fa) Inches..| T. gr. | T. gr

Mid-

night.| 80.4 2:1 | 78.9 3.6 0.967 10.39 1.25 0.89

80.4 18 os FOS: 3.1 973 AT 07 91

2 80.2 7 at FSO 2.9 $70 44 .0O 9k

3 80.1 S|. 79.0 2.6 970 44, 0.90 92

4, 79.9 1.5 | 78.8 2.6 964 20° .89 92

5 79.8 1.4 | 78.8 2.4 964 40 - 81 9%

6 79.8 ¥.5 | 78.7 2.6 961 30 89 92

7 80.3. i 78a 2.9 973 AT 1.00 91

8 80.6 2.5 | 78.8 4.3 964; BO: .50 87

9 80.9 3.0 | 78.4 6.0 952 JES: 2.12 83

10 81.2 4.1 | 78.3 7.0 949 14 5O 80-

11 81.6 4& | 78.4 (ee 952 TS: .80 78

Noon| 81.8 4.9 | 78.9: 78 967 310) 88 78

1 82.0 oel |} 78:9 8.2 967 .30' 3.03 77

2 82.3 5.1 | 79.2 8.2 976 39 .06 79

3 82.1 &.2 | %9.0 8.3 970 30 .08 TE

4, 82.2 bel |) 71 8.2 973 ou 05: 77

5 82.0 49 1-790 7.8 973 30: 2.89 78

6 81.9 4.2 | 79.0 Fhe 970 oo 60 80

7 81.3 3.5 | 78.8 6.0 964, sl AS 83

8 81.2 Oh FOL 5.1 973 AZ 1.82 85

9 80.8 2.9 | 78.8 4.9 964 34 73 86

10 80.6 Dl WSL 4.6 961 ol 62 86

11 80.6 2.3 | 79.0 3.9 970 AZ 37 88

"All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. lvi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of July 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

gw. [28

is § S's f ® ne

ac) i Hy Bi

$ : : os E Prevailing re re General aspect of the Sky.

a 1rection. S1 Os

AL AF ies cir

o |Inches tb | Miles

dic, -. (8. W. & 8.8. W./ 0.2 1227.1) Wid ito 74. uw. Stratoni

afterwards.

2 S.8.W.&S. | ... (248.0! Stratoni to 6 pv. . Scatd. \i

afterwards. Light rain at 5 a. u.

3} 130.0; ... |S.W.&8S.S.W.! ... | 59.8 Chiefly stratoni.

4,135.0; ... iS.S.W.&S8.W)! ... {133.7 Chiefly stratoni.

5) 136.0; ... |S. 0.2| 53.7| Chiefly stratoni.

So ia2,-,. |S.S. W.& 8. 0.5 171.8} Clouds of different kinds.

Lightning toN.at8&9p. m.

atone) .,,..\8. 8. W. 0.5 |186.1| Chiefly scatd. i. Drizzled at

6 P. M.

8) 133.0; ... |8.S.W.&S.byW.| ... 1210.3! Clear to 2a. wu. seatd. “i to

4 p. M., scatd.\i to 8 p.m., clear

afterwards.

9) 132.2 S.S. W. 2.2 |282.9| Scatd. “ito3 a. m., scatd. \l

to 6 Pp. M., stratoni afterwards.

Lightning from 8 to 10 p. m.

BOL ty: 3.47 |S. & S. by E. 0.3 250.4 | Overcast. Lightning from mid-

night to 3 a. u., & at ll Pp. mM.

Thunder from 2 to64.m. Rain

from 13 a. M., to 3 Pp. u.

Min... 2.10 |8, & S. S. W. 5.6/174.1| Overcast to 2 p. uw. \i &

stratoni afterwards. High wind

at midnight. Thunder & light-

ning at midnight &l a.m. Rain

from midnight to 3 4. m.

12)}135.5; ... |S,S.W.&S.S.W. ... 1128.91 ‘Wi to 3 A.M. “ito 4p. m.,

stratoni afterwards.

aa)... cae pas DY. BH. --. |105.9| Chiefly “i. Slight rain, at] &

6 P. M.

os. | 0.35 |S.E.&8.8.B. | ... 1193.5. /7i & stratoni. Light rain from

8a.M., to 4ip.m., &at9r. mu.

15| 180.0} 0.34 |S. S. BE. & S. .. 1148.3; Clear to 2 a. m., clouds of

different kinds to 7 p. m., clear

afterwards. Rain at 4, 7, & 114

A.M. & at3&5p. mM.

7 0.40 |S. by E. & S. . {141.5} Clear to 2a. m., scatd. 7i &

\n-i afterwards. Rain at 5, 8},

10&lla.m., & at2i&7v. m.

mace... £23 |S. Sik. & S. 0.9 |135.3 | Overcast to 3 P.M. “ito6

P. M. \i afterwards. Thunder at

34. M. Lightning at 2 & 3 a. u.

Rain from 2 to 6,10 & lla. u.,

& at 3 & 53 P.M.

lvii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

swage : Wiyp.

38 |2s a he

Selle Ve ; ] ;

§ . s S 5 E Prevailing E : Be General aspeet of the Sky

Span irection. o| as

Ale lee &| FAS

o |Inches Miles

18 0.02 |S. by E. & S. 0.3 130.8 | Clear to3 a.m. cito9a.M.,

overcast to 2 Pp. M.\1ito7 P. M.,

clear afterwards. Slight rain at

9, 10 & noon.

19] 133.5 | 0.14 |S,8.W.&S.byW.| ... | 82.5| Scatd. “i to 7. m., clear &

lightning to N W afterwards.

Rain at 33 a. M.

20) 138.0) 0.35 |S.byW.& variable] ... | 74.1 | Scuds from S by W to 44. ™.

\i to 10 a. m. “i afterwards.

Thunder at 43 p.m. Lightning

at midnight, 4a.m. &at8 & il

(S. EK. p. m. Rain at 6 P: M.

21| 139.4 | 0.20 |S.S.E,E.byS.&E.| 2.7| 73.2] Clouds of different kinds.

Brisk wind at 14} p.m. Light-

ning from 2 to 4a. M. Rain at

15 & 115 P. M.

22) ... | 0.18 |S.S.E.&S8.E. | 3.2/184.8| Chiefly stratoni. Brisk wind

from 9 a. M., to 95 P. M. Light

rain at 84 & llja.m.. & atl,

33 & 5 P. M.

Balsa 0.78 |S. & 8. S. W. 2.0|173.1| Overcast. Brisk wind at 8%

a.M. Rain at 1 & from 4 to 1I

A. M., & atl, 24. & 75 P. M.

2A ISAS | Ses by WE 1.6 |291.4| Chiefly stratoni. Brisk wind

at 34 p. m. Drizzled at 10 a. M.

20| > «a: O29 (Ss. SW. 0.5 |212.9 | Clouds of various kinds. Rain —

from 1 to 3 Pp. M.

26| 129.0; 0.78 |S.by W.&S.byE.| 1.0]106.1| Stratoni to 6 a. m. “i to 11

A. M., stratoni to 3 Pp. M. Wi

afterwards. Rain at 113 a. M.

A meteor of unusual brilhancy

passed at 85 P. M.

27| 130.4} 0.10 |/S.S.E,S8.&S.byE.| 0.4 /148.6 | Cloudsofdifferent kinds. Light

rainat 7 &8a.mM. Mat3Z&6rP.mM.

28/104.4| 0.09 |S.E.&8.8. E. | 1.8]169.8| Overcast to 5 a. um. “i after-

wards. Brisk wind at 1 & from

3to5 p.m. Light rain at mid-

night & at 1,2&6 p.m.

291 119.5| 0.19 |E.S.E.&S. E. | 3.1/255.4| Scatd. \i & “i. Brisk wind

from 94 to 103 a. mM. & from 4¢

to6p.mM. Rainat lla.m.&at

1,2,5 &6 Pp. M. »

30]... | 0.08 |S.E,S.S.E.&SbyE) 2.6 245.1) Chiefly “i. Brisk wind from

124 to2 p.m. Light rain from

lla. mM. to3 P.M. =

31] 120.0] 0.15 |S.byE.&S.by W.| 0.6|188.7 | Scatd.\i& 7i. Rainatl,2,4

& from 73 to 10 a. M. :

Ea A eto Nee Oe ene

Ni Cirri, —i Strati,7i Cumuli,—i Cirro-strati, ~ i Cumulo strati,~-i Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli.

— ¥

‘

Meteorological Observatons. lvili

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July 1868.

Montuty ReEsvtrs.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month... aie 1. 29.584

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 1la.m.onthe 7th. ... 29.793

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5. M.onthe 20th. ... 29.390

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month ae .«. 0.338

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... es Me . 29.634

Ditto ditto Min. ditto +4) ae dds .. 29.527

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month .,, sod MOF

fC)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month __... nS int S42

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 & 3 p. m. on the 3rd. od i. | 98.4

Min. Temperature occurred at 9 a. uw. on the 10th. ... oe ie HO

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month ae ae) eA

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... ie whi day eS?

Ditto ditto Min. GittO, : <.. ae Soe ees 809

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... 7.8

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month... a ae. 2 SLO

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 3.2

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month a: He ce by Ae

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point ... 5.4

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month .., Be oe 50.064;

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month oe O34

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 1.90.

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.85

Inches.

Rained 23 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours... we 3.47

Total amount of rain during the month ee SLAF

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo- sine

meter during the month a bs os i, e:

Prevailing direction of the Wind... Ase 8. &8. 8. W,

* The amount of rain on the 26th could not be determined by the Ane-

mometer as the string connected with the gauge got loose after one discharge..

—

eto

Monruiuy REsvULts.

ical Obserations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July. 1868.

iven hour any particular wind blew,

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorolog

together with the number of days on

ed.

bp E

as} nr

ore (ab)

é 9

(=|

tol 9)

(=|

™M

Ge]

hen any particular wind was blowing, it rain

‘UO ULB]

WO ULB

"MI NUN

‘uO UTBY

‘HO UIBIT

“MN IM

‘moO UIBy,

“it faq° M

mg (6) ULey

"AM

“UO ULB

‘§ Aq MA

"UO UIBY

MSA

"UO TIBI

"do UleYy

"MA S'S

‘HO Urey

"M Aq'§

“tO Gree

"UO UTE"

‘a Aq 'g

"GO Ue

“LS

‘uO Ulery

‘HS “A

"UO Uleyy

HO ULB

act

‘HO UIBIT

"N 4q -7

m0 6) Uley,

“g Aq “nF

Meteorological Observations.

are

AN cacie

aHANNAN TMA OOM HR OAH SG =)

Sacre WN | — Loma)

SRD SHRSOMAAOPAOCHDERRAFODOANG

ae ANDNMA AN AN

ee ee ee ee

i) i! NS —! Aa toatic|

fe A ee

DO APOWAADADNANANAAAYIATAHONEY

gS)

ae i

RO RWANDA HH OM AMOMOMOOOGAAN Fe 3

ae aa SS Oe ere oe a ee eee

Z a xa AN F

Ayo ee a

SAR AN MAW MAW AA ae Pear) CO

a ed ee

= | — — — :

aN Mea DMANANR Fe NAN AAAS 5

lo | SANA ANA A TNAN

Meteorological Observations. Ix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August 1868,

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

28 | Range of the Barometer = + |Range of the Tempera-

a8 during the day. ite: ture during the day.

“ao os) ie

Date. Heo | | s 3 | |

ao° | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 22 7 Max. | Min. | Diff

Css SiH

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) ty) ty) | i)

1 | 29.590 | 29.635 | 29.520) 0.115| 863 | 91.0 | 820/ 90

2 604 .661 043 .118 82.3 85.0 ‘pol ee ey

3 .580 631 A494, 137 85.5 91.0 80.5 | 10.5

4 544, 595 478 eke 85.9 90.2 82.6 7.6

5 511 557 | 462 095 85.8 92.4 SO.7 | 41.7

6 462 511 | 395 116 83.6 87.0 81.5 5.5

7 487 046 430 «L16 82.9 86.8 80.4 6.4

9 527 576 | 470 -106 83.3 91.3 79.8: | 1L6

10 515 565 | 44,7 118 86.4 91.5 81.9 9.6

11 488 O41 | 401 .140 82.2 88.4, 75.5 | 12.9

12 467 527 | 426 101 78.6 81.2 77.0 4.2

13 435 .502 392 «LO 79.2 80.5 77.5 3.0

14 496 549 453 .096 79.2 82.4 76.5 5.9

15 521 575 475 .100 80.2 82.0 79.2 2.8

16 512 559 441 118 82.6 86.0 79.2 6.8

17 518 565 454 wT 80.1 82.0 78.8 3.2

13 .600 .676 534 142 81.8 84.6 79.5 5.1

19 .646 701 590 ek] 84.7 89.4 79.8 on6

20 599 .637 540 .097 85.0 89.5 80.5 9.0

21 .576 .615 537 078 84.3 89.5 79.8 9.7

22 080 .631 543 .088 86.6 91.8 82.9 8.9

23 .627 .691 574 LF 85.8 91.6 82.2 9.4,

24, .649 .710 596 114 85.8 90.1 82.5 7.6

25 .669 .750 624 126 83.5 85.5 78.8 6.7

26 .678 .738 611 127 83.1 88.4, 79.0 9.4,

27 .676 .728 .616 ob? 84.1 88.0 79.5 8.5

28 714 .766 653 113 84.1 89.5 Sil 8.4

29 758 815 Bey .108 82.7 87.5 80.0 7.5

30 785 .829 ple 112 83.7 90.5 19:04 V1.5

31 .818 879 thE .102 83.5 88.0 80.0 8.0

‘The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Be promoter Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

the day,

Ixi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

E Ps | ORG l|-as

H 43 4 5 Oo. °

A |e |s | A 2 e° |aoe | Bee

= a = bo | eo 8

2 |e |e | 8 |= > Ss eee.

iS) ® 2 Ss 5g Eos oS =

Dates oc fe A = Ss ats ee a3

oS ce ue Ss as | dae | Se

eet) Ben) eee 2 | gee] 2s

Pee | Sa 65 | Be | ee | ae

. 2 | ®E | ch | ge | 258 | abe

8 4 Ps 5 PsAy SF D gy Seo | oon

= Bini S je = Aedes =

NE WE a abl a

) ) ) ) Inches: | T. gr. | Toe

1 82.1 4.2 | 79.2 (el 0.976: 10.41 2.61 0.80

2 80.9 Ay) 7S 2.4 998° 74 0.84 93

3 82.5 3.0 | 80.4 mh 1.014 83 1.89: .85

4, 82.6 Beas) “SOK 5.6 OLE 78 2.09: 84

5 82.2 3:6 | 79.7 6.1 0.992 59 24 83

6 80.7 29 } AS 4.9 .961- ol Ive .86

"6 80.4: 2.5 | 78.6 4.3 .958: .30 Ad 87

8 79.6 IO.) FEO 1 967 43 0.58 95

2 81.2 Ql | FOF 3.6 .992 .63 1°30 .89

10 82.7 oe | SOE 6.3 1.005, 71 2.35 .82

11 79.3 29 | 77.3 4.9: 0.919: 9.88 1.66 .86

12 77.6 10) Fo9 7 .908 .82 0.56 .95

13 78.0 1 ad ey oe 2.0 .916 91 .65 94

14, 78.0 L2) hie 2.0 .916 91 .65 94

15 19:4 LX | 78.8 1s, 949 10.24 64 94

16 80.6 2:0 | 79.2 3.4 .976 .50 1.18 .90

17 79.2 0.9 | 78.6 1.5 .958 4 0.50 .95

18 79.9 19 |. <£826 Sar .958 .o2 1.08 O«

19 81.7 3.0 | 79:6 5.1 .989 58 84, 85

20 81.4) 3.6 | 78.9 6.1 .967 4 2.19 83

21 81.3 eO)| fou 5.1 .976 45 1.83 85 —

22 81.9 Mee | 7a 7.5 .973 .36 2.78 19

23 82.3 are | 79:3 6.0 .995 .62 21 .83

24, 82.6 3.2 | 80.4 5.4 1.014 .83 .00 84

25 81.5 2.0 | 80.1 3.4 .005 i 1.23 .90

26 89.0 Feb i ees 28 5.3 0.934 03 83 85

27 80.8 Bat “78.0 5.6 .955 23 .98 84

28 80.5 3.6 | 78.0 6.1 .940 07 2.14 83

29 80.1 26° F783 4.4, .949 .20 1.52 87

30 80.2 3. Dill oh foi 6.0 931 9:06 2.09 83 9

31 80.0 3.08) 110 6.0 .925 .92 .08 So

pene SS ee

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

a ee

68 Range of the Barometer = F Range of the Tempera-

te for each hour during 8 | ture for each hour

ae q the month. 3 during the month.

a Zhe ;

82 | Max. | Min. | Dif. | § A | Max. | Min. | Diff

a4 = |

SE SE ER OC

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) fo) fo) Co)

Mid-

night.| 29.599 | 29.815 | 29.404 | 0.411 82.1 85.5 78.0 7.5

1 587 807 403 ADA 81.9 85.0 77.7 7.3

2 O75 790 397 393 81.5 85.0 714 7.3

3 .566 781 392 389 81.1 84.9 77.5 7.4

4 64 782 400 382 80.7 84.8 75.5 9.3

5 571 .789 408 381 80.6 84.5 76.5 8.0

6 .586 197 419 378 80.5 84.5 76.5 8.0

7 .602 824 424 | . .400 81.0 84.5 76.5 8.0

8 .616 845 438 A407 82.0 85.7 76.9 8.8

9 625 .869 442 A27 83.2 87.0 77.2 9.8

10 .628 879 47 A432 84.1 89.2 77.4 {| 11.8

dt 621 .876 445 | 431 84.9 89.5 | 78.0 | 11.5

Noon. .609 852 448 A404 85.5 90.0 78.0 | 12.0

1 590 .832 442 390 86.1 91.0 G25 hats

2 .069 .810 433 17 86.4 91.6 73s |} 134

3 5-48 194 413 O81 86.3 92.4 78.9 | 14.4

A 037 bd 409 .368 86.2 92.0 7955 | 12:5

5 O99 481 401 .980 85.6 91.0 75.0) 130

6 548 183 -399 084 84.9 91.0 475 | 136

7 063 Jue 419 380 83.7 88.0 78.2 9.8

8 587 831 443 988 83.4 87.0 78.5 8.5

9 .608 845 AA9 396 83.1 86.8 78.3 8.5

10 .617 852 447 405 82.7 86.0 78.5 7.5

11 615 .8d8 430 428 82.4 85.6 78.0 7.6

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

Ixut Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continuwed.)

= ® 4 2 . a's as 8 3 A

S roi tee ie g Ss | Bed |e.

2 ) i) 5 SH 4> = Ba fe ere

is B E 5 Be ss |E28 | o35

Hour. ie ; =) S re re ase 38 ae z

D 4 cee O'S 3s @ op

pele |S }2, | ee lee |ssee ee

qi | @ | & | PE | eB] ga |See| gee

fea | & | 8 | BA | d | Sa | see | sae

= Alo, 1 a a a7 | <4 =

) ) fo) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. ge

Mid-

night.| 80.5 1.6 | 79.4 2.7 0.983 10.56 0.95 0.92

1 80.3 EG). 79:2 2.7 976 .50 94 92

2 80.1 ba | FO 2.4 973 AQ 82 93

3 797 1.4 | 78.7 2.4 961 of .80 93

A Sh Ri | 78:8 9 964 40 64 94

5 79.4 1.2 | 78.6 2.0 958 34 .67 94,

6 79.5 1.0 | 78.8 17 964 40 58 95

7 79.8 12 | 790 2.0 970 46 .68 94,

8 80.1 19 | 78.8 3.2 .964 38 1.09 OL

10 80.8 3.3 | 78.5 5.6 .955 23 .98 84

11 80.9 4.0 | 78.9 7.2 .967 2 2.63 .80

Noon. 81.2 4.3 | 78.2 133 .946 rl 61 80

1 81.6 4.5 | 78.4 tae 952 15 .80 78

2 81.5 4.9 | 78.1 8.3 943 .06 3.003) = ae

3 81.6 4.7 | 78.3 8.0 949 12 2.90 78

A, 81.7 4.5 | 78.5 fers 955 18 81 78

z) 81.6 4.0 | 78.8 6.8 964, 29 A7 81

6 81.5 oA | 79.1 5.8 973 40 .09 83

a Slee 2.6 | 79.3 4.4, .979 OL 1.56 87

8 80.9 Zo | 79.1 4.3 973 45 ol 87

9 80.9 2.2.| 79.4 3.7 .983 4 3 92] 89

10 80.6 Ql) Foe 3.6 973 45 | 89

11 80.5 £9) 7952 3.2 .976 .00 lt .90

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. _

Meteorological Observations. Ixiv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

am the month of August 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

oe Tr Ww

“ o IND.

aa |hss

me je @ g o|

S| 45 Ogs Prevailing HW B| cS

S = 3 Bad direction. Ss 3 As

pa >

ra) nches Mile

1| 136.0} 0.07 |S. W. & S. S. W.! 0.4 |239.6

2 2.19 |S,8.S.E.&SbyW.| 3.8 {191.2

3} 132.0] 0.31 |S. & S. by W. 73.5

4} 132.0 SbyE,SW&SSW. 75.9

5} 135.0| 0.15 |S. W,E.&E.S.E.| 3.5| 72.1

6 0.34 (/E.&E.S.E. | 22/2490

7| 127.8| 0.16 |S.E. & E. 1.7 (177.4

8 0.72 |S.S. E. 2 1247.3

9} 135.6 | 0.24 | Variable. 1480.2

10} 133.5 rw. S. W. 83.2

11) 123.5 | 3.06 (W.S.W&variable.| ... |124.9

General aspect of the Sky.

rear

Stratoni to 7 a. m. Scattered

1 to 5 p. m. Scatd. \i after-

wards. Thunder at 11 a. m.

Lightning at midnight, 14 & 4

a. M. Light rain at 23 & 33.4. Mm.

\i & 71 to 3 4. M. Overcast

to 2 p. m. Stratoni afterwards.

High wind at 43 & 92 a. m.

Thunder 5,7 & 84. m. Light-

ning at5 a.m. & ll p.m. Rain

from 5 to 11 a. M.

Stratoni to 7 a.m. “i & \i

afterwards. Lightning to N. at

8 & ll p.m. Rain from 5} to 7

A.M.

Chiefly “i. Thunder & Light-

ning at 114 p. m. Drizzled at 7.

A.M. & 63 P. M.

‘Ak OO 6 ds “OL, fo Bp. ar.

Overcast to 8 Pp. m. Stratoni

afterwards. Strong wind at 42 &

63P. M. Rain from 42 to 7 p. M.

Stratoni & Overcast. Brisk

wind from 8 a. mM. to 13 Pp. .

Rain at 2, 6,8. & noon & at8 &9

P. M.

Stratoni & “i. Brisk wind at

25 & 7 p.m. Drizzled at 1a. m.

& at 1 & 25 p.m. Rain at 54 &

63 P. M.

Chiefly Overcast. Rain from

midnight to 5 a.m. & from 7

A.M. to2 P.M.

Clear to5 aM. “ito 7 Pp. M.,

clear afterwards. Thunder at 2

& 3 p.m. Lightning at 7 & 10

p. M. Rain between 23 & 4P. M.

\ni to 2 a. Mm. \ito7 a.m. Wi

afterwards. Lightning from 8 to

PEP ma.

\i to 2 4. M. Overcast to 10

a.m. ‘Wi & i to 6. Pp. uw. Over-

cast afterwards. Thunder from

39to54.M.,&at6& 11 pv. m.

Lightning from midnight to 5

A.M. & at 11 p. m. Rain from 3

to8a.m.&at7&8Pp.m.

lxv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

S ® : WIND.

8 g aa E ee i

3 ‘ 5 2 z Prevailing r : be General aspect of the Sky.

4 Ss BS haae direction. S31 Ac

A Ai}

o |Inches Ib | Miles

12 8.19 |W. & W. N. W. |11.0 210.5 | Overcast. High wind from 1

tollv.m. Thunder & lightning

at midnight. Rain whole day &

night.

Lao es 9.01 |W. S. W. & W. | 3.9|304.0] Overcast. Strong wind from

42 4. m.,to 11 p. m. Rain nearly

whole day & night.

Dae. 0.99 |[W.S. W.&S. W.) 3.0/515.4.| Overcast to 4.4. m. Stratoni

afterwards. Strong wind from

midnight to 6 a. mM. Lighning

at 11 p.m. Rain from 1 to 113

AM.

Loe 2c 2.05 |W. & W.S. W, | 2.0] 83.6] Overcast. Brisk wind from 2

to 54 p. m. Thunder & light-

ning from 9 to 11 Pp. M. Rain

after intervals.

16} 120.0: |: : 1003. AW. 3, VV. 1.2 /301.0| Overcast to 6 4. Mm. “Wi to 6

p. M. Overcastafterwards. Brisk

wind at 24 a. mM. Thunder &

lightning at midnight & 1 a. M.

Rain from midnight to 5 a. M:

& from 9 to 11 P. M.

a tes. 1.50 |W. 8. W. 2.2 |223.0| Overcast. Brisk wind at 10 a.

M. Rain from midnight'to7 p.m.

18) 11378 |) oot PS. AW. _.. 1136.5 | Overcast to 1 Pp. m. Stratoni

to 7 p. M., clear afterwards.

19| 131.5 SUIS. Wack Witby NA 5.1-89.9 \.1 £09 xz. M. “TD 40 (4B,

Stratoni afterwards.

901 132.0! ... INNE,WSW&SW]| ... | 74.1| Stratoni to6 a.m. “ito 2 P.

M. Stratoni afterwards. Light-

rain at2a.m. & ll Pp. mM.

21) 135.5 | 0.89 |S. S. W. ... 1104.4 | Overcast to 7 a. mM. Stratoni

afterwards. Thunder & light-

ning at 2&3 a. m Rain from

| fomitess. WY midnight to 7 a. M.

29)138.0| ... |S. by W, W.byS.| ... [178.1] Stratonito6a.m. “i & Ni

to 5 p.m. Stratoni afterwards.

Lightning to NW at 10 & 11 P.

mM. Drizzled at 9 Pp. M.

23| 134.0) 22,0 |S - daasavce yy ... [123.2 | Stratoni to 7 p. Mm. \_i after-

wards.

- 24) 129.4] ... |SbyE,SW&SSW.| ... 124.2) Chiefly Stratoni.

2Diere « 0.47 |S.8S.W.&S. by E.| ... [152.8 | Thin \G to 4. All overcast to

3 p. m., clouds of different kinds

afterwards. Lightning to N at

2a.m. Drizzled at 8 a.m. & I

p. M. Rain from 93 to 11 P.M.

Meteorological Observations. Ixvi

Abstract of the Result of the Hourly Meterological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of August 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.,

ae - WIND.

iam 1°,

a2 \|sa 2) ss

| 48 (0.4 5 Provailing = Ei eB General aspect of the Sky.

z = eile direction. = 21 A+

E-E- Al =

tb |Mhes

26| 135.2 8,8. E. & 8S. 128.0| Overcast to 7 a. M. \i to 10

A. M. \Wi to 3 Pp. Mm. Stratoni

afterwards. Lightning at 9 P. m.

[&S8.8.K. Drizzled at 1 a. M.

27; 121.8) * |[W.by N,S. by E.| ... | 75.3} Chiefly Stratoni.

28/ 136.0; ... |S. by E. 78.6| Stratoni to44a.m.7i & \Wi

to 1 p. m. Stratoni to6 P.M. Ni

afterwards. Thunder at 4 Pp. m.

Light rain at 2 p. m.

0.2| 81.3 | Stratoni to9 4a. mM. “ito 7 p.

M. \i afterwards. Thunder at 3

p. M. Rain at 6 a. M. & at 1. 22

& 65 P.M.

2.6 124.4 Clouds of different kinds to

lla.m. “ito7 Pp. m. \i after-

wards. Brisk wind at 2} p. m.

Slight rain at 1l a.m. & at 14

& 335 P. M.

. |172,4| \ito2a.m., clear to 6 a. mM.

“1 to 8 p. mM. \_i afterwards.

Slight rain at 14, 23 & 5 pv. m.

29| 132.0| 0.33 |S.byE,S.S.E&SE.

30)... | 0.08 |S.S. E.&8. by E.

[& 8.

31) 128.0] 0.05 |S. by E, 8. 8.

Xa Cirri, —1i Strati,~i Cumuli,\—i Cirro-strati, ~i Cumulo strati,~i Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli.

Ixvil Meteorological Observatons.

~ Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August 1868.

MontuHiy REsvUtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month... st 1. 29.586

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a.m. onthe 31st. ... 29.879

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3 a. M. on the 18th. ... 29.392

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month a ... 0.487

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... a abe ... 29.640

Ditto ditto Min. ditto at ies ise ws. 29.529

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month .., aoe Oda t

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month... nae Sk Oued

Max. Temperature occurred at 3p. m. on the 5th. »» 92.4

Min. Temperature occurred at 4 a. m. on the 11th. ... 75.5

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month 16.9

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... 87.6

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Ay a3 ay oe yy ee

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... wen tae

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... ane Face <COSN

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer —_2.6

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month et ae eee. oes

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point ... 4.4,

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month .,, ine ion O.9GT

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour forthe month > aOee

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 1.54

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.87

Inches.

Rained 25 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours vee ee

Total amount of rain during the month Hi “a . 24.83

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month __.. Be 21.27

Prevailing direction of the Wind... si “Ww. 8. W. & 8. W,

eer rn a

Ixvili

th the number of days on

together w

eyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of Augt. 1868.

g, it rained.

cular wind blew,

wind was blowin

Monruty Resutrs.

ys on which at a given hour any part

t the same hour, when any particular

which a

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surv

Tables shewing the number of da

Meteorological Observations.

SSS

"UO UIe 4]

“MAq'N

‘UO UBT =

“M‘N'N |

‘uo Uleyy es— re

McA _ aaa —

|) Oe eee

Mirth Se ae oe aa A Aa ee

‘Uo Uley pica q St” eee

“UO ule yy — AN FAH ANAN FAN aN

OS i a. aa ee eae a aaa

“uO Ureyy| MS ANH MmOAMONMMAN aN Lon OC Ee ee Boe ac)

"MSM! MRNA IDM OSIOWAH AO AHO

"dO ULE yy fn le oe oe Aas re ass

“mie OPM MWOMNNAKRAHMNMAMAMARDOMOMOm

"mO uleyy| (an len ae ta tl — Ll tn te

“MSS FD OD Nt OD 0 OD SH SH DOD OD OD NNN Ho So SO

“Uo ULeyy | San he SS

"MAqgsgh NANANMHHANANAAMARAAT IO OD

“UO ULBY ase ta] ten A |

‘9 ANANTINAMNMWOANANAAAAAMNRMOAHDAASHH

"uO ULeYy aS a4 — — +

"a Aq ‘9 BO FiO PTOI ANAAAON HANS O Mo Ho

‘uo wey) Sa SS oS

‘TG gl CON ANMSCAMRHMAMMAHMANOTHHS SAGA

‘uo Wey) | _ aiialotele

‘UO Urey! _ N ~

on a hia aaa

Dene ren ee eee ae

‘g Aq “HT NN AN | aan

‘m0 ureyy| ad). Serer Cie eat an =. SS

A: AAqANHMAANM ANA A AS rt ord

‘UO Ue ie

mr. Seen Te mat. eS

“WO Ue

‘uO UrIeIy

ileal J ci ae oe

120 ules)

“7 NT N| | a

“Uo Uleyy iy

oie AG “Ny ce —

‘UO Wey

"NT

aoe

eaten

" ext

ony Apete te =

ie, aru

vey he

" *

eee Niet Diaely

y rw

orn 4q ,

i an, | oe

Ll 5-4.

’

Penth

- 2 - -

= few cagnes lial aan Ie at. tle

> a 7 - ~ °

“— } * ;

~ a * = “

‘

is ’

rab ty en *

i} = Z {

Tey ahs

ne pe est ,

8, Mt ¥

£ Ch ' <r

eth | y

pets "

’

_ i -

Se ~

om, i 4

o >

a“

<, “.

}

fies

fen)

“ ” os ae

‘ eee

“ite bea Oe ere

+ i

Ww may ale, = Neola at

Samp.

Ks, ty one

meio cian 2 teed

Oe eee

Meteorviogical Observations. Ixix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Culculla,

wn the month of September 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude $8° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

ty 2

ie 3 _ | Range of the Barometer = & (Range of the Tempera-

ges during the day. As | ture during the day.

es Pa

Date. Heo | a | | | r

go% | Mex. | Min. | Dif. | $$ | Max. | Min. | DIE

— fas @ ae |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. we: re) ) re)

i 29.828 | 29.894 | 29.753 0.141 852 | 90.0 81.0 9.0

2 764, .828 .700 128 85.8 91.4, $1.6 9.8

3B .695 747 .618 .129 85.3 91.8 | 81.0} 10.8

4 656 .703 571 132] 83.7 | 914 | 78.4! 13.0

ib .660 .703 611 O92 82.9 87.4 79.5 7.9

6 .679 27 | .619 .108 84.4 / 88.4 | 81.8 6.6

es 724; 792; .638 lod | S44 | 91.0 | 79.0 | 12.0

8 743 807 | .671 136 82.5 | 89.2 (eo) | 14-3

oS 739 .796 .673 123 85.1 | 91.0 | 80.5 | 10.5

10 695 A9 | O09 ee | Back? |. <OL.0. | 81-7 9.3

tt .608 .679 21 .158 82.7 88.0 80.0 8.0

12 O39 .08d A839 LOO SO.7° |. aBBO 79.0 4.0

13 625 .608 ATA, 134 81.0 | 84.7 79.5 5.2

14 .O79 648 .616 132 83.6 | 89.2 79.4 9.8

15 O91 G32 829 L104, oo.07 } ROIS | Bid) |. 10.3

16 .590 .635 541 094, 84.3 | 90.5 81.8 8.7

17 640 601 AAT 154 83.3 | , 87.5 | 80.0 7.5

18 O74 .665 79 .186 81.4, 85.0 78.8 6.2

19 651 THES * 583 135 82.9 87.9 80.0 7.9

20 645 wis 579 134 | +83.7 88.6 78.0 | 10.6

21 652 OL 601 .100 Sad> | .86.9. |..80.7 6.2

22 .690 147 649 O98 Sa.6 | 87:5 79.5 8.0

ms | .685 a0 .§21 4S 82.5 | -86.8 80.2 6.6

24, 671 718 .622 .096 B25 | 85.8 80.0 5.8

25 719 279 .661 118 Si | 87.6 | »78.9 9.0

26 oTeD .837 128 109 WA | 84.0 TLS 6.5

27 .803 .862 AA 118 81.5 $6.0 fii as 8.5

28 .822 881 fol. |> 90 81.6 85.2 77.6 7.6

29 .823 891 153 138 81.2 85.4 174s 8.0

30 792 854 124 .130 83.0 87.7 78.9 8.8

| |

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived, from tle hourly observations, made during

the-day.

Tex Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

ree of Humi-

eal 2 | oa 8 | ee

EH = So RA S Sy a3

Ay >) =~ =o ane 4

Ze! o > 2 ty 42 4 3

2 1.5 1b 2 | 2 + se ee

Pa eal a Sei et Pee

oO ile S34) Ss) ee os | gee

ra la|e@ |e: | 28 eo jee

3 A bp | & Pm sr | S2 | See

= A oD) A = a eal <4

I ee eee

o O wy) 9 Inches.) 'P.'gr. | Tee

ily 80.7 45 | 77.5 77. \ 0.925 9.88 2.73

) 81.3 4.5 | 78.1 "7 943 | 10.06 Ri:

3 81.3 4.0 | 78.5 6.8 955 peal) 43

A 80.6 a |) 7eA 5.3 952 oF 1.86

5 80.6 9:2 | 79.0 3.9 970 42 37

6 81.8 2.6 | 80.0 4.4. | 1.001 72 59

7 79.7 4.7 | 76.4 8.0 1 0.893 9.55 2.76

8 79.8 aa ER: 4.6 .937. | 10.06 1.58

9 81.1 40 | 78.3 6.8 949 14 2°43

10 81.3 3.8 | 78.6 6.5 .958 23 34

11 80.1 2.6 | 78.3 4.4 | .949 .20 1.52

12 79.4, 3) 78.5 22 955 31 0.73

13 79.7 1.3 | 78.8 2.2 964 40 74

14 80.9 2 %| 79.0 4.6 .970 40 1.63

15 82.2 3.4| 79.8 5.8. 995 - 62. 2.14

16 81.9 2.4| 80.2 4.1 | 1.008 79 1.49

17 80.9 9.4| 79.2 4.1. | 0.976 48 A5

18 79.5 9 | 782 32.1 946 19 08

19 80.8 | 793 3.6 .979 51 .28

20 80.6 3.1 | 78.4 BS. | O52: 21 86

21 80.6 2.5 | 78.8 A.3 964. 36 50

22 81.1 2.5 | 79.3 4.3 979 51 52

23 80.1 9.4| 78.4 4.1 952 23 Al

24, 89.6 moun 708.| BSB. i979 53 Bi

25 79.6 eNyee|. 27. oae .29 0.92

26 78.0 Pal Zee? 1.9 .916..| 9.91 62

27 79.4 | 779 3.6 .937. | 10.08 1.23

28 79.3 AB | 777 3.9 931. 02. 132.

99 1) eo! oO. apas 39) a9 9.90 31

30 79.8 SO 7766 5.4 | .928 97 .85

| |

All the Hygrometrical elements are com

puted by the Greenwich Constants. -

lete satu-

being unity.

dity, comp

Mean deg

ration

Meteorological Observations, Ixxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calentta

Y a 3 >]

in the month of Senlemver 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Ss Range of the Barometer | =| Range of the Tempera-

ae for each hour during ms ture for each hour

"ene the month. re during the month.

oa ES

Hour.| 5 Eo Az |

6 | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 32 | Max. |.Min. | Dir

as eg |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo Oo Oo 0

Mid- |

night.| 29.695 | 29.856 | 29.514 | 0.342 81.5 84.4 Parade. ENF

H .683 848 499 | .349 I: 84,2 78.5 5.7

2 675 840 482 398 oh} 83.7 18.5 5.2

3 .665 .828 AGA 304 80.8 83.5 77.6 5.9

A .661 817 476 341 80.6 $3.0 78.0 5.0

5) .652 829 AS 345 80.5 83.0 78.0 5.0

6 .685 848 498 B00 80.3 83.0 77.6 5.4

Y 704 873 O18 399 80.9 85.8 17.5 6.3

8 721 .890 O44 046 82.1 85.5 17.4 8.1

9 132 894 062 a2 83.7 87.5 78.0 9.5

pe 722 884, yt 343 85.5 89.8 | 79.5 | 10:3

Noon. 703 .868 .5d0 318 86.5 SOIR" (9 792. | | 14,

1 077 841 O18 .323 86.9 91.5 fico: |) 14.0

2 649 .809 AVS 14 86.6 31:8 LES: | TA

3 .630 he 466 313 56.6 91.4, rich / Mam bey

4, .622 761 456 305 86.2 91.0 79.2 | 118

5 .633 174 A447 327 84.6 SS) 78.5 | 12.8

6 645 | 9a 407 320 33.2 89.0 78.5 | 10.5

* 666° .8U3 488 old 82.6 86.6 78.5 8.1

8 .685 .828 A98 5510) 82.4 86.5 17.5 9.0

9 702 850 a8 313 82.0 86.0 | 78.2 7.8

10 708 860 528 07 $1.8 85.0 78.5 6.9

ii 700 853 510 343 81.6 84.9 | 78.5 6.4

The Mean Height of the Barometer

Phermometer Means

sours during the month.

, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

are derived from the observations made at the several

lexii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations.

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the mouth of September 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Coxtinued.)

\ tase “hier

; Sho By Sous fe |e balaé

= Bar ee gl ey ie Ss | dos | ie.

2 i) r ic) | 5 Sey > H Ss be S Cy = =

Me le ele | Se) ae ee

Hour, Sy = A = 3 Eewht o 3 8 op

Sghise- | Fo es | 8. ee ee es

Fe ge) 2 | ge | 2e.) bo

= = ered a, S Beye aaa

Sue a =| bs 5 S 3 aS |e ei | $25

lt A iS 2 x AY i fa | ses os

= a 8 lh tel a | =

9) 0) ) ) Inches. | T. gr. | TF. gr.

Mid-

night.| 80.0 1.5 | 789+ 2.6 | 0.967 | 10.41 0.90 | 0.92

al 79.9 14.) 789} 24 967 43 81 .93

2 79.8 13) 789% Bo .967 A3 74 .93

3 79.5 3°) 786 2.2 .958 34 as .93

4 79.3 1.3 |-784|} °2.2 .952 a 74 .93

5 79.2 3 | 783 2.2 949 24 7A .93

6 79.0 1954) (7 6c1 22 943 18 A 93

7 79.2 17 1 7804 2.0 .940 ie 97 Ot

8 79.9 2.2 | 78.4 a7 952 23 1.28 .89

9 80.7 3.0 | 78.6 5 .958 28 79 85

10 81.2 a7 Pe7e.6 |) 368 .958 26 2.28 .82

Lt 81.4 4.1.) 78.5 7.0 955 2 -} ee 80

| | | |

Noon.| 81.8 4.7 | 79.0 io .970 a GT 79

i 81.9 5A) | 73.9 8.0 967 30 95 78

2 81.5 5.1 | 78.4 8.2 952 ales .99 5t

3 81.6 5.0 | 78.6 8.0 .958 2 93 78

4 81.5 A? | 78.2 8.0 .946 409 .90 78

5 81.1 3.5 | 78.6 6.0 .958 .26 13 83

6 80.3 2.9 | 78.3 4.9 .949 18 1.71 .86

7 80.2 pat 478.5 4.1 955 Bi Al 88

8 80.2 2 78.7 3.7 961 a eee 89

9 80.0 DO | S16 3.4 .958 22 Bl .90

10 80.1 Le re 2.9 .967 Al 0.99 91

11 79.9 aye gal 2.0 961 35 | 99 91

Pam PRN (pte pe pera Ie, Po cea

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. ~

Meteorological Observations. Ixxiit

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of September 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

Date.

van

4) 131.4

7| 135.0

8; 136.0

9} 135.0

10} 137.5

11; 131.8

Max. Solar

radiation.

co Oo

lor)

ft. above

Ground.

Rain Guage

-—

—_—

v2)

9.12

3.10

0.05

0.30

0.44

0.74

WIND.

Max.

Prevailing

direction.

General aspect of the Sky.

| Pressure

fe Se

“I ©

le 2)

pp D

SSW,SbyW&SW) :

S.W.&8.S. W.

5.8. WW, & 8. W.

jor)

iS)

S. W. ... |205.9

S. by W.&S. | ... [221.2

8... & 8.8. BE. | ... (144.2

S. E. Ret iaet

N.N.E.& variable.| ... /139.6

S. EH, E-S.H.&S8.)... | 97.7 \\,

S. & variable. Lebel Sic8

S. & EK. 3.5 | 89.5

E. 1.9 |239.0

1 & \ito 6 p. mM. \i after-

wards. Brisk wind at 2} p.m.

Mi to 8a.M. %1to5-p.m. \i

afterwards. Lightning to W

at 7 p. mM. Thunder at 8 p. mu.

Lito4a.m. \Wito8a. mM. \i

to 3 P.M. W_ito 8 p.m. Stra-

toni afterwards. Brisk wind

& rain at 42 pv. m. Thunder

at 6 & 7 vp. m. Lightning to

SW at-7 & 8 Pi uM.

‘ito2a.m. “ito 4p. Mm. Over-

cast afterwards. High wind

from 4+ to 62 p. m. Thunder

at5 & 6 p.m. Lightning from

6 to 10 p. m. Rain from 42 to

11 Pp. m.

Chiefly \Wi. Lightning at mid-

night & 1 a.m. &at7& 8 p,

M. Drizzled at 54 a. m.

\Stratoni to 5 4. M. “ito3Pp. xy.

Stratoni afterwards. Thunder

at 4&5 p.m. Lightning to

W at8&9~.M. Light rain

at lla.m. & at 4&5 p.m.

“1to4p. M. \W_i. afterwards.

Thunder at 3 & 4a. mu. & at

6&9 p.m. Lightning at 3 &

44.M.& from 6to 1l Pp. m.

Rain at 3 & 4a. m.

“1 & Wi. Lightning & rain at

midnight. Thunder at 1 a. m.

ito4a.M. \ito8a.m. “i to

6 Pp. m., clear afterwards.

iClear to5 a.m. “ito 4 P. m.,

clear afterwards. Brisk wind

at 25 p.m. Thunder at 2 p. m.

Lightning from 7 toll. m.

Naito 4) A. Me NAL to 8 ao ar,

| Stratoni & ~ito 4p. m. Over-

cast afterwards. Brisk wind

at 45 Pp. mM. Rain from 7 to 9

A.M. & from 43 to 9 P. M.

Chiefly overcast. Brisk wind

from 83 to 9} & at 123 a. mw.

Thunder & Lightning at 92

Pp. M. Rain after intervals.

Ixxiv

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September 1868. “

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e. ,

Date.

Max. Solar

radiation.

WIND.

Prevailing

direction.

ax.

Velocity.

General aspect of the Sky.

14,

fo)

134.5

127.0

130.8

122.0

Tnches

1.09 |E. 8S. E. & E.

9.10

0.13

0.94,

0.26

0:99

S.E.& 8. by E.

S.S.E.,S.E&S.W.

S. W. &E.

H. & EH. N. E.

SiS. arse.

§.S.E,S.E.&S.

5. & 8. by W,

S.& S. by E.

lS.byE, $.&8.8.E.

S! Pressure

3.1

2.1

0.6

0.2

—

Cia ae

Overcastto1P.m.Stratoni after-

wards. Brisk wind from 3 to

114 a. m. Thunder from 2 to

5 a. M. Lightning at 3 a. M.

Rain from midnight to 7 a. M.

& from 9 to noon & at 13, 34

& 6 Pp. M.

bo:

or ®

999.3 |Ai to 6 A. M. Seuds from SE to

10.4. m: “ito 7 B. m., clear

afterwards. Rain at 43 & 103

A. M. & at 55 P. M.

148.9 |Clear to 3 a. M. 71 to 7 P. M.

clear afterwards.

52.7 \\Nito5 a. mM. “ito 1 p.m. Stra-

toni afterwards. Thunder &

light rain at 13 Pp. M. Light-

ning at 3 A. M.

82.6 |Stratoni to 5 a. M. >1to 4P. M.

Overcast afterwards. Brisk

wind from noon to 2 Pp. M. &

from 65 to 11 p.m. Lightning

at 9p. Mm. Light rain at 8 &

103 a. M. & trom 53 toll Pp. Mm.

324.7 |Overcast to 5 A. M. w_ito 104.

M. 71 &\ito6p. m., clear

afterwards. Brisk wind at 25

64 & 104. mM. Lightning from

3to5a.M. & at9 & 1UP. M.

Rain at midnight, 2, 3,7,9&

104. Mm. & at 55 P. M.

145.3 |Clear to 4 a. M., clouds of diff-

erent kinds afterwards. Rain

atd& 8 a.m. & at 2 & 45 P.M.

80.1 |Clear to 2 a. M.™1 to 5 P. M. \1

afterwards. Rain from 65 to

is ke Me :

168.4 |Clear to 4 a. M. “itol P. M.

Overcast to6p. M., clear atter-

wards. Thunder at 2 P. M.

Rain at 94 & 125 a. M. & at 35

el Bie 1D

156.0 |Stratoni to 5 a. m., clouds of

different kinds afterwards. -

Thunder at4 & 55 4. m. Light-

ning at 3&4.a.m. Rain at 45,

51 & 105 a. M. & at 53 P. M.

ae cc ce ttt ea eM ee

4. ==.

Meteorological Observations.

xxv

Abstract of the Result of the Hourly Meterological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the mouth of September 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.,

4 J a a WInp.

ms |ba&

2 wid a Ss Prevailing

a S = Sie® direction.

23|.129.0 | 0.90 |S, & S. by W.

24| 131.5 | 0.05 |S. by E. & 8.8. E.

25) 131.0 | 1.93 |S. by E, & S. E.

ae 1.15 |E, & E.S. E.

27| 122.0 S.S.W.&S. by E:

28)... | 0.83 |S. by E.&S.

|: | 0.66 |S. &S. by E.

30; 130.0 S.&8. by E.

4 = bse General aspect of the Sky.

S| ao

32/as

— =

tbh |Mlies

0.3 |138.9 |Clear to 5 a. mM. “ito6P. M.\i

0.2

0.4 |102.3

0.5

0.4

1.2

1.8 |

afterwards. Rain at 10 & 124

A. M. & from 3 to 5 Pp. m.

Clouds of different kinds to

noon, “ito 7 P. M. \i after-

wards. Thunder at 5 a. m.

Lightning at7 & 8p. u. Light

rain at 45 and Noon.

Stratoni to g A.M. \i to Noon.

Overcast afterwards,Thunder

at 1235 a. Mm. Rain at 23 a. u.

and pene 123 to 9 p. a

Overcast to 6 Pp. m. Stratoni

afterwards. Lightning to N.

at4a.m. Drizzled at midnight,

Rain from 103 4. mM. to2 P.M.

& at 5, 8, 9 % 10 Pp. M.

105.9 Stratoni to 2 a. M., overcast to

8 a. M. ~i afterwards. Driz-

zled at 23, 45 & 64 a. M.

159.1 |Overcast.to 11 a. m. Stratoni to

3 P.M. \i & “1 afterwards.

Lightning to S, at 3 a. .

Paenter “at 54 a. M. Rain

from 14 to7 & at ll a.m.

164.6 \i to 2 a. m., overcast tol a. M.

Na to 8p. M. Stratoni after-

wards. Thunder at 6 & 124 4.

M. Lightning at 6 a.m. & at

11 ep. m. Rain from5to7 a.m.

and at 1 Pp. M.

164.8 \\ito S$ « Mw, ito bp. wu. Ni

afterwards. Drizzled at 2 P.M.

167.8

Xi Cirri, —i Strati,%1 ei Cirro-strati, «i Cumulo strati,~ 1 Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli.

XxV1 Meteorological Observatons.

Abstract of the Resulls of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September 1868.

Monrsaty Resutts.

Inches.

“Mean height of the Barometer forthe month... eae = 20-008

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 4. M. on the Ist. ... 29,894

‘Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5p. M.onthe 17th. ... 29.447

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month ae 2 10/447

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures _... asia ie .. 29.741

Ditto ditto Mun. ditto 2 Be fe ... 29.616

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month ,,, J SO AZS

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month ... i Te OO

Max. Temperature occurred at 2p. m. on the 3rd. ik Be ae

‘Min. Temperature occurred at 8 a. mM. on the 29th. ... Sug aw i ee

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month se wie? Aa

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... ah ae aay. ONO

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, oye ah, he ed oe

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month... ne 8.4

‘Mean Wet-Buib Thermometer for the month ... fa .. 80

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 2.7

“Computed Mean Dew-point for the month nee eet pes

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean. Dew-point ... 4.6

Inches.

“Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month ... wits xo Ome

Troy grain.-

“Mean Weight of Vapour for the month is. 10:25

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 1.61

‘Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.86

Inches.

‘Rained 25 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours ae wo eee

Total amount of rain during the month sa a 15.69

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month __... oy sey ak wre 3)

Prevailing direction of the Wind... shea S.& S. H.

Note.—The clock attached to the Anemometer being out of order from 4th. to

“Sth, the Max. Pressure and Rain could not be registered.

ee ee ee ee ay a ae a

a. #

‘shal tae

Ixxvul

eyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of Sept. 1868.

Monrtaty Resvtts.

given hour any particular wind blew, to

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surv

Meteorological Observations.

‘UO ULB IT

“UO ULB yy

"9 Aq “MM

“UO UBT

"M'S°M

“UO ULB IT

‘uo ured

"M'S'S

UO ULB)

"M 4q “9

‘uo ULB yy

“g

‘uo ULBY,

"A Aq “g

“UO ULB YT

ao "¢

"UO WLBT

‘A'S

‘uO Uley

‘T'S H

‘UO ULB

'§ Aq“

‘uo Uleyy

‘UO UB

'N Aq“

‘uo Uley

TN OW

"uO Ue

‘dO UIey]

‘aN ON

‘Wo Urey

"a Aq "NT

"UO UIe

“NT

th the number of days on

it rained.

gether w

as blowing,

which at the same hour, when any particular wind w

Tables shewing the number of days on which at a

“INOP

NI NO OD OD SH IN OD HNO HID SHIN

SAAMI NN

et — 9

ANNAN MONMIOMAAMON HOM AMAMA

= =

a+ 4

re 1 ir =

TFT NNANMNMMANMAMMNMNANTRMIUMNAATAAS

maANN ANNAN AA

i ars ate ND RIES eet A aN SNR GI Roe Pew A EE ES)

=s ra

re ei

man ro

OW TWIAFAMNANMNANAAAMNARANRHAMMOSO

Le — os | OO rs ana

NANAUNANTGAAANAATIMAMNHM MO Aas

re re SS [7 | Ss ret rei

A MMAANAUMMWMADAMNRAMAANNAANAA

Le OS Te |

= =. rio rei aN

SMIINMON AMIN NAIANAA

—

Lo ee OS. Os Be |

NON OAAN a

aN ANNANANANMAMNAMA MH

le |

AoA

ANA eo

N = GD GD Lon Sle OS OC)

re pal i |

NN MWMNMONOON

N es

i! a)

tm) ton! beet Leal Leon |

night

ie. w ie 3 +

4 os — ;

eee suede ea meme lang po pees

SL lotion amp

eras wap SE aw arenem emr

7 aoa) «ee

Lo <a

ings bed tee pene se 4 ae

am Ae .

RAPE! «gute

LN (Oe other tig sat Be

: Pi Wh

ft peek APS,

= Se ee

pil) ‘a be = et Ake 2p ‘

, SPI tt ln phe seemed wth ae ee pecans, cose 1

era 2 pry /

eh ee Epa Ps

4 ; ; ’ .

«6 eects ands

mt ef ee iat q A ae pelt lll narangc rn elie A } oat

d ry, hee - ae 5 ’

fe eat tess lath new

6 NS CE

eee

: : toa

: » et

ba ;

i ie . ae

‘? {1 A fs F i

¢: i had Ai cist shat Nh iis Nah ty Wi dt amok — ry a

Pe Pee” ' Bers =

‘ ey, rit ea we ‘

- A t ft hy» apap ieee ries iy \ ee - a! gay ea eee

K i je ee wn ao

+ phoma r a Cd Fmt e e aps e .

2 : ‘

a / 7 a |

+ - enemas. Ses) ere pom Tyee - . Stee

: i f orm

it re t a ti.

—s SLA gee la Sata a ld wh ina 6B lan la ld a de — .. F ¥

. *' ‘ J 7

- : ;

K >, ‘ es v a

~ } — . Oxi Hikes inl ebeet siting a6ry 9 la ‘oth. ae to

al . ) at | ri

: Le “ i

te = yen ere eee i ee ee es fo ited =. a

F A h | 4 e

I - é a4 orn 4

4 aie J - it " aah a ee Waly rcilige fran “ Lacey a he

I y &

P > ree Pe oS poe ys an ete eae ie ny ene a a =

Tt ie a

‘ "i ue ee

ae ih Ae ee Cee hed wary’ tale retin Ra

oid ,, ger Tae G gis, be:

: ‘pitas ; Wie

: os ’ ay “

— f TAS er N } 2 ’ ; =)

P - P al « 4, ? A

Rpm NE gan TCL A i ie SR AOS 8 ae or am RT aenpaae Mace dire a + ip Aaah nar riage ye

‘

' , ¥ i i

bad Aare) Pee) A hae:

Meteorological Observations. Ixxvili

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Caleutta,

wn the month of October 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 84” Last.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

e: gs _ | Range of the Barometer E # |Range of the Temperas

c 25 during the day. 8 ture during the day.

o aS

Date. eo | | BS 2 : |

¢2° | Max. | Min. | Dif. | $3 | Max. | Min. | Diff

wes SiH |

se eet a Se |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) ) Oo) Ce)

1 29.787 | 29.854 | 29.719 0.135 83.2 87.5 80.0 7.5

2 775; 838 712 126 84.2 88.5 | 80.5, 8.0

3 773 821 714 107 84.2 90.2 82.0 | 82

4. 760 825 707 118 83.9 87.7 81.0 6.7

5 755 801 705 -096 83.4 88.3 81.2 eek

6 137 791 -680 Alt $4.9 90.0 81.5 8.5

7 745 Sil .692 L119 84.8 90.6 80.0 | 10.6

8 750 .810 701 -109 84.4 | 90.0 80.4 9.6

9 767 823 721 -102 $4.0 89.4 78.5 | 10.9

10 820 .880 784 -O96 83.0 88.4 77.8 |- 10.6

11 838 -902 192 110 82.9 87.5 79.5 8.0

12 .863 923 812 oie 83.6 oy 6 79.6 8.1

13 870 943 S24 aks 85.4 91.0 80.6 | 10.4

14 872 .980 .826 124 85.1 92.1 SOO: | 1230

15 .869 .929 821 .108 83.2 87.5 78.5 9.0

16 -907 .962 867 O95 82.5 88.7 780 | 1027

17 941 | 30.004 -890 114 83.1 89.0 79.0 | 10.0

18 -946 O15 .888 127 82.5 87.6 77.0 | 10.6

19 986 .O30 -904 126 81.7 87.5 fam | 190

20 -942 012 -899 113 81.7 87.3 76.4 | 10.9

21 -910 | 29.982 -855 127 82.0 88.5 (6:6 | 1159

22° | 872 .935 -810 125 81.0 88.0 75.0 | 13.0

23 .876 953 -826 127 | 79.8 87.3 | 72.2 | 15.1

24, -886 -963 -840 123 80.4) 87.0 ROEe | 133

25 876 -940 -823 LZ 80.8 87.6 74.8 | 12.8

26 -903 965 -860 105 80.9 87.2 OE WN Vb se

27 -945 | 30.025 901 124, 199 87.5 73.5 | 14.0

28 961 035 909 126 79.5 86.5 Wad: | 13.55

29 -942 -O17 -880 i) 78.0 85.5 40-8: Ww TAL

30 .935 OTF 874 143 77.5 85.4 71.5 | 13.9

dl -962 042 905 137 77.6 84.6 71.0 | 13.6

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Balb

mole: Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during —

the day.

xxix Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Resulls of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October 1868.

’ Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

SORE UA) ht eC acre Ween rss «PARR EME

ji U | e ° = oH = . a paul,

ee eye eee ee

mH ~ pe? an 2 ae

& S 6 3 ee = Se poe be

Date. | 2 .. es RA = zs oe Ba % as

Roe = ao) 2 cae 33 | dae | bor

ee faa 2. Zor) Be" bay Bese

g 6 3 aa S EO |S ae He,

AS a 'S = = =a Soe ate

S 3 bs = bay 5 Sq | wes | Soe

= ot | ae = hae = :

5 :

aes re) | re) Tuches.,)''T. gr. (2. Be

i 80.5 24 | F780 4.6 0.958 10.28 162 0.87

2 80.8 3.4] 78.4 5.8 952 | 19 2.05 83

3 81.1 Bak FORO 5.3 967 | Re // 1.87 .85

4, 81.4 Be | 7906 4.3 .989 .60 53 87

5 81.2 2.2 | 79.7 Out .992 .63 33 .89

“*6 80.3 Ae |. 7721 7.8 913 9.76 2.73 18

7 78.8 6.0 | 74.6 10.2 843 .O2 3.44 72

8 78.2 62°) 739 10.5 824 8.81 00 72

Oo)! Gas 6.7 | 72.6 11.4 .790 AT ‘70 70

10 78.1 4.9 | 74.7 | 8.3 .846 9.08 2.74 dt

11 79.8 Bae TRO 5.3 .928 97 1.82 .85

12 80.2 aA | 778 5.8 934 10.01 2.02 .83

13 80.5 4.9 | 77.1 8.3 913 9.76 .92 werd

14, 79.2 BD | Foal 10.0 857 15 3.42 3

15 79.0 4.2 | 76.1 (get .885 .50 2.39 .80

16 76.5 6.0 | 72.3 10.2 783 8.41 3.23 a2

Ly. 76.1 eon se lee SHES) 756 LO a, .68

18 75.0 Tos | OOM. 12.8 .720 7.72 .92 .66

19 74.8 6.9 | 70.0 Tyke” oe 81 .56 .69

20 75.6 pals | Fle 10.4 758 8.16 21 12

21 75.3 oe) 706 11.4 TAL TOF; .50 70

22 Fou 7.9 | 67.6 13.4 .672 20 .89 .65

23 73.0 6.8 | 68.2 Lt 6be .686 40 .00 .69

24 74.2 6.2.| 69.9 10.5 125 .80 14 wk

25 75.2 Bao! 413 9.5 158 8.16 2.91 TA

26 74.8 6.1 | 70.5 10.4 139 7.97 3.13 of aie

a7. | vag | Wiel 67841) 121s) 677 30 48 68 |

28 71.6 7.9e| Galt 13.4 .640 6.92 TA .65 4

29 79.0 8.0 | 64.4 13.6 .605 50 64 64 3

30 GOA 7.4 | 64.9 12.6 .615 67 Ot .66 “

31 Til 6.5 | 66.5 Ts 648 | 7.03 04 | 70 :

\ | f

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. — 5

Meteorological Observations.

if Ixxx

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of October 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elementa

dependent thereon.

ght of

eter at

Range of the Barometer

for each hour during

"en > the month.

og =

Hour.| 4 E %

8 Po 23 Max. Min.

Inches. | Inches. | Inches.

Mid-

night.| 29.861 | 29.963 | 29.745

H .852 945 wae

2 843 946 427

3 .837 .932 719

4, .842 947 416

5 854 .963 27

6 .872 .983 746

‘ij .890 | 30.000 758

8 .913 .022 sate

9 .926 042 789

10 .926 .039 91

it .907 O17 778

Noon. .886 | 29.984, 761

i 856 .957 a0

2 .831 .932 703

3 .816 919 .686

4, 814 .910 .686

5 .818 .912 .680

6 .828 924, .689

7 842 .947 OL

8 .862 .962 25

9 874, 982 47

10 .880 .992 756

it 875 .980 185

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as lik

Thermometer Means are derived from the ob

hours during the month.

Diff.

y Bulb

ermometer.

Mean Dr

TAT ST

i et ct op OES

WPCODONRROWNHDSD

cooocononrnsTs

Ov CO k= CO NT

86.5

87.0

87.4

87.6

87.1

86.5

84.2

82.9

81.9

81.0

80.3

79.8

Range of the Tempera-

ture for each hour |

during the month.

Max. | Min. | Diff.

83.2 | 7401 92

83.0 | 73.6] 9.4

82.8 | 73.0] 9.8

82.5 | 72.0] 10.5

82.5 | 71.9] 10.6

82.2 | 71.0} 112

82.0 | 70.8] 11.2

83.0 | 71.5 | 116

85.2 | 75.0! 10.2

86.7. | 777 | 90

87.5 | 80.0! 7.5

89.0 | 81.4] 7.6

90.0 | 82.7] 7.3

90.2 | 83.4] 6.8

90.5 | 845] 6.0

90.6 | 845] 6.1

91.0 | 83.0] 8.0

92.1 | 81.51 10.6

87.4 | 80.01 7.4

86.2 | 78.51 7.7

85.0 | 772 | | He

84.6 | 76.3} 83

84.0 | 75.5] 8.5

83.5 | 74.9] 86

ewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

servations made at the several]

Ixxxi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

im the month of October 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continwed.)

e ag +5 . cH Be 6B ‘E fS

Boh. ae 2 4 oo | eee

a Bel ele : eS | wee | Has

eB EYE) eS ee lee

AL ours|t oe "8 aq a = pe ntl oem 2 ee

oe he stay 2 a, | 86 | o_o a

Fe | 3/8) 3. | Bo | ES | gee | ess

a FA a | Fg a 8 q Sous

$2 (0b | 8 | pe) Ss) SS |e ee =

| S| A a 35 qe Se S-5 ao Sao

) te) ) 0) Inches..\. P..er, je “Po geee

Mid-

night.) 76.7 29 | 744 A.9 0.846 9.14 1.55 0.86

iL 76.5 2.6 | 74.7 4A .846 16 o7 87

2 76.2 2.5 | 74.4 4.3 838 .|- .08 oo 87

3 75.9 2.4) 74,2 4.1 832 02 26 .88

4 75.7 2.2 | 74.2 3. 832 .02 14 .89

5 (ow 1.9 | 74.4 3.2 .838 10 0.97 .90

6 (aul ei "| s74c5 2.9 .840 12 89 aoe

7 76.6 129") Fars 3.2 .862 4 1.01 90

8 Tel: 3.9} 74.4 6.6 .838 02 2.12 81

9 77.0 6.0 | 72.8 10.2 795 8.54 3.28 72

10 77.2 Ome RES) 12.9 he .26 4.20 .66

11 Wes Oy Uaaleo 14.8 Jol 00 83 .62

Noon.| 76.9 DaG | Fed 15.4 153 03 5.07 61

1 76.7 10.3 | 70.5 16.5 139 7.85 44 .o9

2 [O97 LOZ. | “703 7A 134, 81 64 58

3 76.6 TO | +700 17:6 ar fal 81 57

4, 76.5 10%. | Os) 17.0 129 76 57 08

5 76.8 Oe || 7180 15.5 ol oO LT 61

6 76.9 fep)| WARS 12.4 ork 8.25 3.99 .67

if 77.3 5.6 | 73.4 9.5 811 269 .10 4

8 17.2 A.7 | 73.9 8.0 824 8.87 2.57 78

L) LED 4.0 | 74.2 6.8 .832 .96 § iis) .80

10 76:9 3.4 | 74.5 5.8 .840 9.07 1.84 83

d1 76.7 3.1 | 74,5 5.3 840 .09 .66 8d

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. ——

Meteorological Observations, Ixxxil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

im the month of October 1868,

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Ae WIND.

22 \s 3's :

Ns ae 5 eae a by

ae eA Pp a 3 B| =| General aspect of the Sky.

8/83 lg 0 direction. IS o| Oa

Ripe eh jac | ee eS

Inches ib | Miles

1} 129.0 0.22 |S by E. & 8.S.W. 138.1|“i to 8 a. M. “i to4P.m.,

stratoni to 8 Pp. mM. \_i after-

wards. Thunder at 24 & 34

Pp. M. Rain at 1 Pp. m.

2} 129.0] ... |S.S.W.&S. by W.| ... | 93.6 |Scuds from S S W to 3 a. m.

tO @ Pi M.,.. clomda: * of

different kinds afterwards.

Lightning to S at - A. M.

aoe.) oa (s.9,.W. & S.by H)... | 76.4|\i to7 a. Mw. Cito2 yp. Mw. Wi

afterwards. Pinadse at 2 &

3p. M. Lightning to N W at

3 A. M. Drizaled at 4&5p.M.

4/131.2; ,.. |S.by E.&S. 1.0) 84.0 |\\i to 74. M. “i to 3 P. M., stra-

toni afterwards. Lightning

to: Wo atLi-p: m.

1 ae 1.31 |S. & S. by E. 0.5|118.0 \i & “itoll a. m., overcast

to 4p. m., clouds of different

kinds afterwards. Thunder

at 1; &2p.Mm. Lightning at

7 p. M. Rain from 11 a. m. to

2P. M.

A\\i to 7 A. M. Clear afterwards.

oa SAO OMA NES Sy to) 4A By owe

Clear afterwards. Foggy from

9 to ll P. mM.

52.8 |\Clear to 3 a.m. \itoQ9a. m.

\1 & “1 to 5 Pp. M., clear af-

terwards. Slightly, foggy at

fee Me

«We awe, 46.8 |Chiefly ‘i.

. & EH. S6:0 | Sito. 0 a, ME tor. 6 Pp. x:

Clear afterwards. Drizzled

fb oO PER:

11; 120.0 E,E.byN.&E.byS. 127.4 |\\i to 6 a.m. “ito 7 p.m. clear

i afterwards.

12) 125.0 EK. by 8. & N. W. 76:2 Ni to 7 a.u. “i to 6 P.m., stra~

toni afterwards.

13| 128.6 E.S.E. & E.N. E. 101.3 |\Clear to 9 a. mM. “ito 6 P. m.

Clear afterwards. Slightly,

foggy from 8 to 10 Pp. m.

14) 128.8 E.N.E.&W.by N. 65.7 |\Clear to 10 a. u. “i to 6 P. M.

clear afterwards.

15|.128.5 S.W. &S. 50.2 |Clear to 5 a. M. %1 afterwards.

Thunder & Lightning to S

at 8 P. M.

16} 128.5 8.8. W. &S. 89.4 |Clouds of different kinds.

6| 125.0 S. 8. W.& N.

7| 130.0 W.S.W.&.S

8} 127.0 S.W & WN.

9} 128.0 W.

10} 126.5 N

Ixxxill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,

au the month of October 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

& S & S y WInD.

as |Ga x 21. | General tof the Sk

3 : : pa 5 Prevailing is Be eneral aspect 0 e J>

s Sia irection. o =

A) SF |g-9 a E\AS

re) Inches Ib \Miles

17,/ 129.0; ... IN.N.W.&S.W.| ... | 68.5 [Clear to 10 a.m. “1to6 P. M.,

clear afierwards.

18|*426:5 |... TWIN. W.&8.8.E.| ... | 7415 |\41 to 2.4. o.; cleaniteitaa.

oi to 4Pp.M., clear afterwards.

19| 127-77) ... |W.ON. W, & W. | ... | 68.9 |Clear to 10 a. "Of 01G Pe:

clear afterwards.

20) 126.0; ... |[W,S.W.&8S.S.W.| ... | 59.6 |Clear to 6 a. mM. \1 & “1 to 6 P

m., clear afterwards. Slight-

ly fog ggy from 8 to 11 Pp. m.

21; 138.0 re Vi. ide .. WV al Ly. Uae Chiefly” clear. Foggy from 7 to

11 eS MM.

22) 125.4) ... |N.N.W.&S. by E.| 0.4] 65.1 |Clear

93 -196:0 | .) UIN.NW... & NN EL 67-0 \Olear

24, 127.0} ... |K.S.E. & variable] ... | 76.3 |Clear. Foggy Sasein 7 to 10 PM.

25| 129.0 S. by W. & S. W.| ... | 54.0 |Clear to 9 a. M. \1 & 71 to 6 P

m., clear to 9 P. M. \i after-

wards.

96) 125.6) ... |[WSW,WNW&S) ... | 60.0 |Cleartod a. M. \i to Noon. Wi

to 3 p.M., clear afterwards.

amen foggy from 9 to 11

271256 | ee Shy Bed BN 2 ABI Clear a 4a. M.\i to Bes mm

“i to 5 P.M. clear afterwords.

Foggy from 8 to 11 Pp. m.

98) 126.0} ... |INby E&W.N.W.] ... | 75.4 |Clear.

291 1960) OU ING Biv® INN Wal) 187.6 Clear.

30) 122.0; .... |S.S.E. & W.S.W.] ... | 85.9 |Clear, foggy from 7 to 11 P. M.

31| 121.0 S. W. ... | 47.5 |Clear toll «a. m. -~itol p.m.

Clear afterwards. Foggy at

midnight & 1 a. Mm.

\i Cirri, — i Strati,~i Cumuli,_i Cirro-strati, ~i Cumulo strati,~-i Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli.

Meteorological Observatons. JXXX1V

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of October 1868.

Montuity REsvtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month.., ... 29.862

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 a. m.onthe 31st. ... 30.042

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 p. M.onthe 6th. ... 29.680

Lextreme range of the Barometer during the month es 5 AGS

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures _ ... 5 sth ... 29.929

Ditto ditto Min. ditto ct is poeeLl

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month ... ax “OLIS

to)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month si 82.2

Max. Temperature occurred at 5p. M. on the 14th. bay 92.1

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 a. M. on the 29th. 70.8

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month 21.3

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature .. 88.1

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, oo 77.3

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month.. 10.8

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... 76.6

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 5.6

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month z Fo 7

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew- -point 9.5

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month ... ae: seal VOLTOS

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month od. Ge ook

Additional Weight of Vapour reqnired for complete saturation ... 3.03

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.74

Inches.

Rained 4 days,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours ve <r ae i

Total amount of rain during the month wo, Lod

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached to the anemo-

meter during the month __.. ae oi oh tae

Prevailing direction of the Wind... he S$. W.&8.S. W.

lexxV:

‘vations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of Oct. 1868.

Montxuiy Resvtts.

s on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Obser

Tables shewing the number of day

hour, when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

which at the same

Meteorological Observations.

uo UIByY

*M Aq * NT SN es Sseae

"UO Ulery

“MA NI'N CoA aaaAas 4 ANA AAHAMM MOOS

"UO ULB

“AA NT HoH DANMANMANANAA

"UO TIBI

ate NANAMNMMMAAANHHAHAAOIONAMMAMMAAN

‘UO UTBT

“Aq AA ee: | anced AAS se

‘UO ULB

“MA CON rs (oon fil oes El oon Oe ON Sams MINN

“TO ULB

‘Re “AA Ten | a4 NA

"UO UTR

PAA etm AN ANDI ANND DADAMS

“dO ley ee

“he TWMONANNAN DH NMD TAWA WHAN B16 H HHO

"UO WIRY i

“Me OMAHA MAOCOMMNMAMH ANANTH HOwaSD

“UO ULeIy

Fay dq °9 ARAN NNTRSOMAMDN ANON mae

"UO UIBYy =

; “a NAN TIOVAMANNNTR ASR FARM RA NMMOD

“uo ULeYy i

oq Sq *9 ACAD M AA AAAAANDAD AHH TANNA

las}

“Wo Urey] aa a

i-qT'g'g onan NAARANANMD SHANA Aaa

| “mo wey sy

: Titer | N SAAANS

| Wo WIR}

“Wg cy ANNANANAANA AAS = =

j-uo Urey

45 ig 27a HNA AAA AAA lo!

ido ule

UO ULB

‘HO Urey =

fT Nw MAHAN HHHNTMMNAMON AMDAAAAA

f-uo uleyT

Tey Sm RAM TANNA TN MAAN RS rc

; UO Uley

la CNN r SAAR SMR RAH

| “Wo Urey

ra Aq oN rsa ore |e os ON oe | ce ro re Ses ae ee

| uo UIeyy

“NT anaes eo AMAR AAR OA

: | Oe eee eA on os yc eee DHROd

THOTT | BP =| & > oy bei

TABULAR STATEMENT shewing the monthly Rain fall from January, 1837, to November, 1868, and themonthly quinquennial average for each month during that period,

as taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta ; by GoPEENAUTH SEN, in charge of the Observatory.

January. February. March. April. May. June. July. August. September. October. November. December. Total

Years. fen Remarks.

Inches |Average| Inches |Average| Inches Average] Inches Average} Inches |Average] Inches |Average Inches |Average| Inches |Average| Inches /Average! Inches |Average| Inches |Average| Inches |Average Jeet

Inches

1837 0:96 0:22 0:98 3:07 5-73 7-93 10:12 9°82 4:68 0:03 0:07 43°61

1838 0:12 0°36 1-43 213 11-76 10:43 11:08 816 752 200 wee 52:99

1839 1-34 0:23 0:31 131 784 9:12 14-77 9-45 18:95 0°59 1:06 606 6407

1840 coc 200 0-44 0-80 8:05 13:05 9:01 21°31 4-94 131 Bee 620 59:41

1841 0:85 0-24 0-76 3°26 531 7-03 14:09 13-96 11°59 316 60D 386 60-25 |56:25 average for 5 years.

Sum. 2:19 | 0-44] 1-55 | 0:31 | 2:09} 0:42) 7-78 | 1:56 |26-40 | 528 |46:69 | 9:34 | 56:93 |11-25 |65-92 |18-18 | 53-46 |10:69'|17-76 | 3:55 | 1-09 | 0-22} 0-07 | 0-01

1842 60 3-76 3°73 1:82 961 21-97 408 3:96 0.19 0-76 76-12 |Cyclone June 3rd.

1843 0:64 1:20 2742 5°33 10:18 20:05 11:19 2:16 000 0:86 64:34

1844 0:08 022 313 744 13°72 26°91 502 4-99 60 cos 73°86

1845 0-64 O17 7:30 1-42 12°80, 15:36 480 5°86 020 0-81 60:92 |_

1846 1:80 2°30 0°57 2-49 20:07 13:26 9:97 10°76 0-74 1-52 76:44 \70°34 average for 5 years.

Sum. 381 | 076) 3:16) 0-63 | 7:65 | 153 |17-15 | 3-43 |18-50 13:96 | 66:38 | 13:28 |97-55 | 19-51 35-06 701 }27-73 | 5°55 | 0:93 | 0-19 | 3:95 | 0-79 j

1847 £5 2:33 4:79 15:09 10:95 5°86, 5:59 0:05 72:36

1848 ae 0-41 1:31 6:22. 9322) 474 541 0-20 0:16 58°69

1849 244 1-67 216 0:32 744 10:11 14-71 4-03 280 0:99 70°51

1850 sen 2°00 1:52 1:28 3°30 14:88 20°59 3°61 177 coo 76:28

1851 0-07 2-41 1.05 3°75 0:08 10°78 849 16°25 ono 200 64:16 |68°40 average for 5 years.

Som. 2-51 | 0:50 | 6:08 | 1:22 | 5:14] 1:03 | 8-99 | 1-80 4:37 14°73 | 80-08 |12:02 | 59-48 |11-90 35:16 | 7:03 | 7-56 | 1:51 | 1:20) 024

1852 | 1:58 a 6:08 9:95 t 2:59 61-00

1853 0-10 2 13:44 9:15 4-94 eno 52:08

UE | con 101 1-28 11:59 9:26 401 0:90 oT |e

1855 | 0-46 111 0-14 11-07 19:39 3:38 oer, 70:36 | { 62:83 average for 5 years.

1856, 1:06 vi 2°08 10°30 9:02 921 0 Eee 64:23 | | Gale May 14th & Sept. 3rd.

Sum. 3-20 | 0.64 | 2:12] 0:42) 9:73 | 1-95 |14:54 | 9-91 132-21 | 644 |52:19 |10-44 | 71-46 |14-29 | 56:35 | 11-27 |46:82 |*11-71/24-13 | 4:83 | 0:90 | 0:18 | 0:50) 0-10

=e 9°33 10:3 12:98 13:30 160 oo oo ‘7 |Gale May 7th.

1858 | 0-07 0-54 0-22 0:97 3-28 $22 17:96 4-74 8:03 650 1-08 76

1859 0:66 4-93 1:29 3:18 1248 9:09 11-55 4-96 ae Gale July 27th.

1860) | ... 0:09 % 247 2-21 6-46 17:92 7-13 1:68 me ne (

1861 | 0:56 ie 0:88 0-31 9:07 26-44 10:98 12:48 115 4:39 0:26 67:84 average for 5 years.

0:63 | 0:18 / 1:29 | 0:26) 6.29 | 1:26 | 684 | 1:37 |27-07 | 5-41 12:78 |68:88 |18°78 |85°34 |17-07 |49:20 | 9-84 |24-02 | 4°80 | 4:39 | 0-88 | 134 | 0-27

1-03 = 1-69 2.53 3-80 12:03 10:86 14-40 = 0-20 73-48

00 1:20 600 2-43, 420 14:10 10°33 3-48 1-26 200 61:15

pa 0-47 1-84 111 10:36 16°64 12759) 6:50 2°89 ae 84:22 |Cyclone October 5th.

0-48 1-86 1:96 4:98 15:94 5:99, 10:25 e aes a 6158 |

1-91 B74 deo 181 2°56 11-48 15-97 733 og ma 65°74 |69°23 average for 5 years.

342 | 068 | 7-27} 1:45) 549 | 1-10 |1216 | 2-43 186:86 | 7-37 12:19 12:65 |60:24 |12:05 |60:00 |12:00 |3221 | 6-44 | 4:15 | 0:83 | 0:20} 0-04

{ Gale November Ist.

1867 | 0:55 0:82 1-7 0-27 2:46 6-12 18:50 13°70 8-45 485 72:73 | 1 Oyclone November 2nd

1868 | 0-05 0-18 0-16 BAT 5:80 26°61 2483 15:69 1:53 a 91-49 {up to 80th November, 1868.

Sum. 0:60) 0:30 | 1:00) 0:50} 173) 087 | 5:74) 287 | 826] 4-13 132-73 |1637 13:31 |43:33 |21-67 | 29-39 |14-70 | 9:98 | 4:99 | 4:85 || 2:43

Average +

ea 0-49 0:68 117 2:34 52d 1245 | 13:38 15:25 1112 531 0:89 0-24

* Average of 4 years only. { Not forthcoming.

{ Average of 30 years.

OIOL PLU SY LIOY LB PEO ELS VU? LAYOUT svusUa ev sENy TYP FU wo] wt S WUT MOIS [MuINU Lune ge py AU fevseu Fy SUE fle g f CRRA gs (mls [rity = Oe SMe Sa 2

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxvr.

Abstract of the Resulls of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

wn the month of November 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the sea level, 18.11 feet.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometriecal elements

dependent thereon.

“ 3 _ | Range of the Barometer = # Range of the Tempere-

"tb 8 during the day. AS ture during the day.

yo Or =

Date. | Be | | A z | /

ao* | Mex. | Min. | Dif. | 33° 1 max. | Min. | Dir

a a / |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. fe) fa) re) | oO

| /

i 29.989 | 30.062 | 29.940 *| 0.122 78.0 85.4, res | 13.9

2 975 059 9241 .135 | 78.5 S5A 47 73.0 ' 19.44

3 985 061 | 934 kay i FOS 4 87 | 738.0) 14.0

4, .980 057 .935 .122 78.8.| 852 fa | 123

/; amy 908 | 29.979 832 | 147 | 78.8 85.0 | 73.5 11.5

6 845 901 182 119 79.1. | 86:0 72.2 3.8

7 .856 907 819 O88 17.0 $3.7 fais | 11.2

8 818 895. | 753 142). 770-| 930 | 72.5 | 105

) 789 848 £730 118 76.9 | 84.7 71.4 | 13.3

10 801 874 740 106). 78.30 85.8 | 71.5 | 14,3

P 841 912 796 LG FO.a 4 F871 fae | 13.9

12 881 .939 833 106 78.0 | 84.0 fae | 11.0)

ig .865 G25 .800 125 76.1 82.3 7A. 1 J1.2

14, 883 950 825 125 7o.0. 4 84.0: | 67.4-| 166

16 .949 | 30.015 IO] 114 75.6 85.0 | 68.8 | 16.2

16 30.024 OB» | .940 L638 13.0 82.4 66.5 | 15.9

THs 034 JO. 970 140 foLke wt Bio 64.8 | 16.2

18 O09 083 | 940 143 (2h oi ) BiG 64.5 17.5

19 29.991 O61 927 134 13.4 81.9 66.0 | 15.9

20 974 049 924 ae hy = FS ob 80.6 64.8 | 15.8

21 987 047 942 105 Ce Gi 279.6 4 645.| 15]

22 990 046 .936 nO AAO 80.5 4 64.5.) 16.6

p95" 30.026 .106 972 134 “aan Sk.3 64.0); 17.3

24, 048 126 996 WoO | 802 | 64.5.| 15.7

a O80 162 | 30.025 Biiewd Tee: 79.5 64.5 15.0

26 O82 154 25 A3t 71.8 79.6 65.2 | 14.4

27 062 ASB: BO995 146 72.8 81.0 66.0 | 15.0

28 O72 | 13ah | 30023 114, Gai 81.7 GF 4a. 4,8

29 093 «L8s O21 164, FACS 19.5 66.0 | 13.5

30 042 128 | 29.968 162 | Ti 80.0 69.0); 15.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Bee oeter Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

the day. ;

Ixxxvi Bleteorclogical Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

fuken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calentta,

in the month of November 1868.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continwed.)

Se Pe Le CE eee | ee

3 F B S i SS | 28 Beet

Date. | os 2 oe a 5 a E 5.8 ae

aoe sins Ne, 3 gt = ie ke

be 5 = = "Ss See Mea ph= apf | vo,

Pa r rs ; ad *

ae aa) BS oi Fag me | BO | 2 eee

as bs S bay aS a 3 oSo | aus

28 is 5 Ai = fhh 33" See

| a A oO Q = | = < =

1 y r pir } } alee BA

Oe eg ds 9” MIindhes: |) ge aoe

| |

Ce Oey 66 | 66.8 | 11.2 | 0.6554 --7.10 3.09 0.70

Bo ieee 59|685| 100 | .692 | _.60 2.35 73

S04 FOi8 64°) 683°) 10.9 7 2688) ae 3.13 70

4) Pome 1 A pg acl To.beth GBR ts - Ms OL 71

co) poe | etl esad) Poe | eee] 188 Ol 71

60") 7am vO | 679 4) gel) eee ly 36 68

7 view 5.5 | 68.2 Gayl .G86°"| _ tae | 2.63 7A

8 "2.5 ae eos Ft. ie 19 78

9 72.0 BOO B85 VO Rea BOE ie 31 ae

10 72.0 pel by eee 107) bre 28 3.00 71

Li) peat) ee) pela hy eee: cee) 0g BT 67

12 72.7 5a GOR) O.0e FOS | eR Soi 75

19h geo) | peal: 638) = Tee gee Biss 3.95 66

i, | 675 75 | 69.2 |~ 12.8 Oa o hete 18 66

15 68.8 8.8 | 60.6 | 15.0 | .534 5.80 68 61

16 63.4 9.9! 56.51+ 17.8) /+ 450 4.92 92 56

178) 68.12 | 9:08) S54 162) deer foe 54) = Be

igo} (eb: | BO oa Odea Tacs ase 5.33 cee

Ton eels! b We) Goa se Ree Ee BOSC a7 22°). aps

20 | 64.9 Bee SON eZ OU 508 ob OteR 65

a 65.2 BAe G01 | 1pSie) i626 | ees aes 69

29, | Baw eee 80.8 F198 baer. lee 81 67

23 Gh) Coes tee 14.95". AOR OSS 3.20 63

24 65.1 Coma 19.1 Bet. gs Pek ae

254) Gad!) CSW eames 11.254 530m URS 58 | 69

26 | 65.9 6.97| Giga) 10.6) baa) 10g AB) aa

am 650) | 6O:| COMnedg a. [s808\.. VASIeee, Ori” iam

23. | 668 | G4) Glee 116.) 554°) se oF ZO + 69

99° | 65.9" | 6:6 7) GIA 1) ods 2] 0.0 | 72

39 6.6 | 711-580) ime.) 504 | 52 | 2 | ee

| | | | :

. |

Seteorological Observations. IXxXxViil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Geueral’s Office, Caleutta,

in the mouth of November 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

» >>: SR meee eee

6B Range of the Barometer | 2 . | Range of the Tempera-

Be. for each hour during | Ras 8 ture for each hour

oS the month. | , g | during the month.

As a eile y> ok Aen ae eo ee

Hour.| 4 | As | |

25 33 | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 83 | Max. | Min. | Dir.

ley. @ | wikEW | /

| | ty

{aches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | ° ae | ie: | °

Mid- | | |

night.| 29.967 | 30.101 | 29.796 | 0.305 | 719 | 768 | 68.0] 88

1 .957 .092 790 | 302 73") F641] 67.0) 94

2 947 080} .779] 301 | 708 | 75.8 66.4 | 9.4,

3 940 | 082 773 | .809 | 70.1 | 75.0 | 6601 90

4 939} 083| .772! 311 | 60.5 | 74.5 | 65.0/ 9.5

5 951 090 | .764| .326 | 69.1 73.8 | 64.5] 93

6 968} 110) 777 | 333 | 686 | 745 | 640] 105

7 .988 134; .784/] .350 | 68.9 74.3 | e45 | 9.8

8 | 30.013/ .161 814] .347 | 71.3 76.7 | 66.5 | 102

9 .032 185 848 | .337 | 74.2 | 80.0 | 68.8} 11.2

10 O31 | 170} = 843 | 327 | 77.0 | 825 | 71.8! 07

11 Oll | 144} 826) 318 | 794 | 845 | 7551 90

| .

| | | | |

Noon.| 29.982 122} .788| .334 80.8 85.6 | 77.0) 8.6

1 S48 1) 071 751] 320 | 82.0 | 865 | 7881 77

2 924 | 045 436 | .309 | 825 | 87.0 | 78.0] .90

3 911 .031 130 | .301 1 82.6 S13 776 | 9.6

4 O07 | ~.026 | .735 | .291 | 814 | 855 | 7741 8]

5 916 | .087 443) 294 | 80.0 | 846 | 75.7| 8.9

6 S28 |» {0pm won| 297)1| 77 | 926 | 7401 86

7 946 | 066 489) 277 | 762 | 826 | 722| IoO4

8 964 | .092; 804| 288 | 750 | 808 | 712] oe

9 ‘O77 | 109} +813 | 296 | 740 | 795 | 700] 95

10 982 110; .818| 292 | 732 | 78.0 | 69.0/ 90

11 977 106; 805; 301 | 72.4 77.2 | 68.0! 9.9

| | | |

| 4 | | | | |

| | | | 4 i

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the sevcra]

hours during the month.

dxxxix Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Resulls of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

daken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November 1868.

‘Hourly Means, &e. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

: : 5 | Set fy =

| 8 Oe ae eee on | 8S ae

a = 4g) S ee aS | 2. eee

| H = fa A S) SS | oar as

ro ® R 2) 5 Sais. = | =e = a 2. =

ie 5 5 5 = 2° | _aa =

How. Ra 3 BR = ‘6 = | ss 2 eee

Pi l2|2|2. | 88 | ee |seejeee

by 8 FA ay Fig A A, = = Bee eee. 2

8S | mel RP pet pe eS Se ee

) ) oy) fe) Inches. | Toge:: | Wee

Mid-

night. 67.8 Al | 64.5 7A 0.607 6.67 1.81 0.79

i 67.4, 3.9 al. Oates T° 603 .63 10 mW

2 67.0 3.8 | 64.0 6.8 597 516) O41 .89

3 66.5 a6: Be.0 6.5 090 A8 3 %9) aed.

A, 66.3 ow Goo 5.8 591 ol aouh 83

5 65.9 eo! sous 5.8 584 43 .30 83

6 65.6 oO. 6a.2 5.4 582 43 2A B84

i 65.7 Bee Oot 5.8 580 woo 30 83

8 67.1 42 \ 63.7 7.6 591 48 8d 78

9 68.0 6.2. Ga.7 10.5 591 45 2.64 71

10 68.9 8. Lt- 68:2 13.8 582 at 3.58 64

eh 69.6 9.8 | 62.7 16.7 572 17 4.45 58

Noon.| 69.5 | 11.3| 61.6/| 19.2 5B2 | 04 | BB 5A

1 69.8 2.2 | bles 20.7 546 .86 61 51

2 69.7 12.8 | 60.7 DAge 536 4 990 49

3 69.6 13.0 | 60.5 ype | 532 elk 97 49

44, 69.4, 12.07, 61:0 20.4) 541 .82 4d 52

5 69.8 HOM 2) 62.7 ies: 572 6.17 4.64 57

6 69.9 7.8 | 64.4 IES 605 56 3.54 65

7 69.7 Gol bac Neale 619 74 2.92 70

8 69.2 5.8 | Goll 9.9 619 5 .O5 vps)

4] 68.6 5.4 | 64.8 9.2 613 tk on 74

10 68.3 4.9 | 64.4 8.8 605 62 20 75

7. 67.9 Ai | fies 8.1 G03 61 1.99 0

La ae

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by tlie Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations.

Ixxxx

_ Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

lation.

| Date.

Max. Solar

radia

ie) (o2) “wT (=P) Or

126.5

128.4)

116.7

116.0

125.0

5| 121.0

128.4

118.7

120.8

117.0

20) 115.0

21) 121.5

ae | WIND.

3.35 |- Tar ae

rv I = | BB

~: S| Prevailing 4 al me

5 be: direction. Iss o 44

chan ss bores > Be

Inches lb | Miles

S. W.&S8. by W. 57.7

S.W. & S.by W. 78.

S.S.W,N.&E.S.E. 58.

E.S. E.& N. W. 64.9

H.,S.byE.&8.S.W 55.7

N.W. & variable 79.5

EK. by 8. & 8. E. 83.2

S. E. yee

SHs& N.-E, 1.0| 91.6

se) ca BD 1.8 |224.6

NNE,NE&NbyE. 228.6

N byE, NNE,&N. 183.8

N. W. &N.N.W. 194.9

N. W. & variable 84.7

W SW.& variable 179.2

W.N. W.&N. 106.5

N.N.W.&N.W. 123.7

Nw,Nby w & NNw. 136.6

NNW,NW& W by N. 120.8

5S. W.& 8.8. W. 60.4

S.W.&S8.8. W. 38.1

General aspect of the Sky.

Clear to 11 a. m., seatd. “i to

2 p. m., clear afterwards.

Clear to 11 a.. m., seatd. i

to 6 p. M., clear afterwards.

Clear to 10 a.m., seatd. ~i to

4p. M., clear afterwards. Fog-

igy from 8 to 11 Pp. Mm.

| Clear to 5 a. M., seatd. \i &

i afterwards. Foggy from mid-

night to 5 a. Mw.

Seatd. “ito 3 Pp. m., clear

afterwards.

Scatd. \i & i to 6 P. m.,

clear afterwards.

Chiefly \i. Foggy from 7 to

‘9 A. M.

\1 to 9 a. M., seatd. “i to 7

P. M., clear afterwards.

Clear to noon, clouds of dif-

ferent kinds to 6 pv. m., clear

afterwards. Brisk wind from

noon to 2 p. mM.

Clear to 2 a. m., scatd. \i &

i to6p. m., stratoni after-

wards. Brisk wind from 9} to

125 a. Mu.

Mi to 2-4; W.3N\.1& \ni to 7 Bs

M., “1 afterwards.

Stratoni to lla.m., “ito 7 p.

M.,stratoni afterwards. Drizzled

at 63 P. M.

Stratoni to 4 4. m.,\i to 5 p.

M., clear afterwards.

Clear. Slightly fogey at 8 p.

Clear.

Chiefly clear. Slightly foggy

at 8 Pp. M.

Clear to 6 A. M., seatd. \i to

6 p. M., clear afterwards.

Clear.

Clear. Foggy from7 to 11 p.m.

Clear. Slightly foggy at mid-

night, 1 & 11 a.m. & from 7 to

llp. mM.

Ixxxx1

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

tuken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

General aspect of the Sky.

& 3 oe WInp.

ete hahaa o ;

Ae lb es eh et us

SP peseS Prevailing i El os

ge \-ae S Aireeti Sa| ao

a 8 eS irection. = 2/O3

a oak Ay)

) Inches ib \Miles

T2204 gah 1.8. Ws, 41.9

122.0 N. & variable. 38.6

119.4 N,N by W & W.| ... | 68.2

116.0 S.W,W by N&W. 37.3

[by S.

115.0 S. W. & variable. 54.0

121.0 SSW,WSW&SW 55.1

& 8

123.0 N.N.E.&W. byN. 58.3 |

120.0 NE,NNE&EbyN. 735

123.6 N.E.& N. 50.3

\a Cirri, —i Strati,~i Cumuli,Wi

“i Cirro cumuli.

Clear. Foggy frommidnightto

S a.m. & from 7 toll Pp. m.

Clear. Slightly foggy at 5 &

6 a.m. & at 7, 9,10 & 11 p.m.

Chiefly clear. Foggy at mid-

night & la. um. & at 7, 8,10 &

LT eo

Clear to 6 a.M., seatd. Li &

\i to 4p. M., clear afterwards.

Foggy from midnight to 4 a.m.

& from 8tollp. m.

Clear to 11 4. M., scatd. *j

to 8 Pp. M., scatd. \i afterwards.

Clear to 6 a. M., seatd. \i to

5 P. M., scatd. \_i afterwards.

Slightly foggy at 6 4. M. & at 7

P.M

Chiefly scatd. \i. Slightly

foggy from 7 to. 10 Pp. M.

Stratoni to 8 a. u., \i to 2 p.

M., stratonito 4 p. m., clouds

of different kinds afterwards.

Slightly foggy from 9 to 11 p.m.

\ni to 9a.M., \i& Wi after-

wards.

irro-strati, ~i Cumulo strati,~i Nimbi

Meteorological Observatons. “XXXXil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Culcutta,

im the month of November 1868,

Montnauzy Resvtrs.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month,. ... 29.963

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 4. 0. on the 29th. ... 30.185

Min. height of the Barometer oceurred at 3 P. M.onthe 9th. .,. 29.730

xtreme range of the Barometer during the month we wan O.455

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... es = ... 30.034

Ditto ditto Min. ditto a < ... 29.905

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month “ i) O.889

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month ete mm) £60)

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. mM. on the 1th. 6 seu | *ORaR

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 4. Mm. on the 23rd . ey oe ORO

Extreme range of the Temperature during the mouth ans vive tee

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature .. ba a inn) Sa

Ditto — ditto Min. ditto, ey r ts) “OO.B

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month.., i) aS

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month ... 68.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 6.8

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month i soot

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed n mean Dew- -point . 11.6

“Thekes.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month .., sg wa 0.586

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for thie month Ree Ba 3574

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 2.94

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity 0.68

: Inches.

Drizzled 1 day,—Max. fall of rain during 24 lours = et

Total amount of rain during the month me

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gauge attached fo aehe anemo-

meter during the month

Prevailing direction of the 3W hee eS Bs S. W., N. EK. & N. W.

wons

Ixxxxill Meteorological Observations.

Uo UV

" * MAG NT ae ANN =! to] fo ion fio ee)

S) "HO ULL

n . . e NI GIUG « s - - s - .

BS AAONERL NAMNAANMMNA HANAN NOAA AND

rS ;°UO ULRAT

cy : “AT SAHA NN NN ON WO OO SH 4 10 10 10 10 SIN

2 "UO ULB

ro Sn nr SAAR RR HR RNG NM SS | —

a | A'N'M

e "UO ULB YT

; ; ose SAA MNION AR FARRAR ANS

2 | NAq A

ee "MO ULB

3 ae SADA ANNTAONS OANA

om 7

= <>

ES (UO UR yy

a = a eee

Dy =r te. oft) ma aod m NAN ANNA A ANN

as YS AU 'M

~~ H 5 ay

or a

ee ease E HHNMMANAN NAN 4

6 of PALS AN

Be ie

ES uo ULE

OE “AA (QS 19 10 09 00 GD 00 99 GB OD OD OD A oO SS SE SH oO SH OD

HS (ma is OP

ro 2 |-uo ules

RS ie A ag TMM TIO AAIAAR OHH Hoo a od oD oD

eee

Bard “UO ULB)

i os Ay Aq 9 ASAT N AN SS ee ies ieee cee ita lites!

P UO Ulex

Ta as AS a fen ies Mien een eee! col “Sse

“uO ULBYT

“uo ULB YT

“HLS [S|

j uo wey

“tHLO UleYY

sae a >

See qa ro Ss

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of Nov. 1868.

Monruiy Resvutts.

ich at a given hour any parti

at fn Ee | eo rei

No.of days

3 i

OAMNAHNANAMOAAN SHANNA M

al Observat

hour, when any particular

"dO ULB

‘a fq “5r a a eg ee ee ee ee ee

| “mo ULeT|

“hT imal ie) | | i rt i! OS | i | iol NN

ys on wh

} UO ULB YT

ar Aq “OF | aA N SS

which at the same

; WO UBT

Par NT CG maaan |

UO UWB yy

“oT “NI ANAAINANM DO GDTWIOM MIM ATAMMAAANAA

} UO Ue a4

= ee NAANTANNAMA, MMAHAMMAS S =

Sop oe ar NANMA Aaa

JO UTe}T

ery Aq) * NT =a HN a4 fC A SRR NN SS

| uo Wey

AT ANS aA SHAN N MON SSS ~~ |

Tables shewing the number or da

HAM FIs DROROHS

=e oO

“IMoyy] eee re tS aa

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorologic

Mid

night

Meteorological Observations.

xelv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

wn the month of December 1868.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hy

dependent thereon.

sea level, 18.11 feet.

grometrical elements

Se ;

= 3 _ | Range of the Barometer a & Range of the Tempera-

Ses during the day. AS ture during the day.

"S Os : _| £6 oh? Tis oles

Date. | Hs Q | & a |

ag | Mex. | Min | pie | 23 | wox. | Min. Dift

alll ae | / }

=| ~~ SS = | |

| | |

1 30.013 | 30.086 | 29.962 0.124) 68.6 76.0 | 63.5 | 12.5

2 089 | 163 | 30.039; .124/ 68.0 | 77.6 | 60.0! 176

emails 168) .000.| ips} e79.| 778 | con | 128

4 .119 184) — .060 124] 68.6 77.0 | 62.0 | 15.0

6 112 186 | O51 -135 | 69.9 79.0 | 62.5 | 16.5

6 092 161 | 027 134 70.9 49.5 | 62.5 | 17.0

7 .076 157 | 29.992 165 | 70.3 47.6 | 64.0.| 13.6

8 .029 lll | 961 150} 69.6 (2.4 | 62.5 | 15.2

9 002 055 934 -121 | 69.0 76.6 | 62.4 | 14.2

10 29.997 O74 .935 139 | 69.1 77.2 | 62.4] 14.8

11 -961 O34, 895 139 | 69.7 472.5 | 62.56 | 150

12 944, O15 891 124 | 70.9 79.5 63.5 | 16.0

13 .992 O70 .927 143 72.2 81.0 66.0 | 15.0

14, 30.052 137 | 30.001 -1a6,| 71.7 80.0 64.4 | 15.6

15 .093 156 028 128 71.5 80.0 | 65.5 | 14.5

16 143 .206 .O88 118 70.2 79.0 64.3 | 14.7

i | .142 .200 O81 119 70.1 78.3 62.5 | 15.8

18 106 177 .033 144, 69.9 78.5 62.2 | 16.3

19 071 136 O19 117 70.2 78.2 65.0 | 13.2

20 103 194 061 133 | 69.0 16.4 | 63.2 | 13.2

21 .048 -123 | 29.992 131 66.9 74.6 | 60.0 | 14.6

22 .024 -103 .967 .136 66.5 74.0 69.5 | 14.5

23 .043 134, .986 148 | 64.7 Fa2 | S60 | 16:7

24 021 -103 973 130 64.7 73.7 56.0 | 17.7

25 026 O91 973 118 67.6 76.4 59°38 | 16.6

26 063 146 .995 161 66.2 75.7 53.8 | 17:2

27 .O17 .098 949 149 66.0 75.5 57.0 | 18.5

28 010 084. .963 aah} 69.1 (21) 6 GLa 177

29 -005 -090 946 144, 68.9 78.0 6Le | 170

30 .027 as 983 133 67.0 74.4, | 61.5 | 12.9

31 -066 166 | 30.018 -148 64.4 72.4, | 58.0 | 14.4

ee oe

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

f pormcpien Means are derived, from the hourly observations, made during

the day.

xev Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Resnlts of the Hourly Meteorological Obserralions

laken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Culeulta,

in the south of December 1868-

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Contin wed.)

5 2 ob sen Os S eu | oS aee

S 7 = S 2,3 mol Beep

e |e |a/¢ | & | 2S See taee

= 4, pes | Ss S) qu 42 A Ae = Os

E p+ ELS |S | 28 eo

a & A SY fee at ae) Bag | ahs

ge = by =i BA a & a. & ate ss

Gael as 2 rod o > Sa moro | eva

= A ee A Ae aie =

Oo o eas Ee, Inches. | T. gr. | T. pr,

a 62.1 6.5 | 56.9: Ly 0.472 5.1 2.48 9.68

2 60:4 7.6 | 54.3 13-7 AZZ 4.77 .76 .63

3 59.5. 8.4 | 62.8 Lact Akt oF 97 61

A, 60.8 7.8 | 54.6 14.0 A37 82 88d .63

5 63.5 6.4 | 58.4 11.5 A96 5.45 3 .68

6 64.6 6.3 | 596 ITS O16 67 56 .69

7 64.2 G.1 | 59.3 11.0 11 6k 47 .69

8 63.6 6.0 | 58.8 10.8 DOS ° OS OL 70

9 63.1 5.9 |-58.4 | 10.6 AIG: AG -30 70

¥O 63.4 Ot | S886 10.3 508 54 24 h '

11 64.0 5:7 | 50:4 10.3 513 64 29 vt

2 66.2 4.7 | 62.4 8.5 567 6.22 OL 716

13 67.7 4.5 | 64.1 Sb). soe 6 1.99 |

34, 66.8 4.9 | 62.9 8.8 516 wok 2.12 to

td 65.9 5.6 | 61.4 10.1 54S: 02 -o6 2

16: 63.6 6.6 | 58.3 11.9 | A494 5.435 62 68

17 63.3 6.8 | 57.9 12.2 | A483 36 OF 67

18 63.1 6.8 | 57.7 12.2 A8d 3d 65 — 67

£9 63.5 G7 | oo! 12.1 A491 40 65 a6

20 61.9 Web| (bee 12.8 AGL Hi igi Pea) 65

21 59.2 Fi | 53.0 aso ALS 4.58 70 63

22 58.5 8.0 | 52.1 14.4 A01 A5 714 .62

23 56.7 8.0 | 50.3 14.4 Baa .20 -60 .62

S40] 5s || Sees $8") 8 36 Aid 64

25 62.2 5.4 | 57.9 9.7 ASS 5.38 -06 42

26 58.3 7:9 | 52.0 14.2 A00 4. AS -69 62

27 58.5 72d |, o2ee 13.5 A407 OL 57 64

29 61.5 7.4 | 55.6 13.3 452 4.99 15 65

30 59.8 L | “OALd 13.0 A28 ae 7 65

31 57.1 7.3 | 50.5 13.0 -389 23 “51 63:

AML the Hygrometrical elements are eomputed by the Greenwich Constants. -

Meteorological Observations. XCV1

Abstract of the Results of the llourty Meteorotoyicat Observations

taken at the Sureeyor Geueral’s Office, Calentta,

tz the mouth of December 86S.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hyvrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

63 Range of the Barometer | Sy Range of the Tempera-

8 for each hour during | 8 | ture for each hour

20S the month. Dee 2 during the month.

8 ne sy z : nl

Hour.) 5 -e Ag |

ge) Max. | Min. | pie, | 38 | anox | atin. | pet

8 | mH |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO | rn) 0 0

Mid- |

night. | 30.055 | 30.163 | 29.941 | 0.229 | 68.6 69.5 | 60.5 9.0

1 O47 152 .936 216 | 64.8 69.0 59.8 92

2 .038 .140 925 215 | 642 | 68.5 59.0 9.5

3 .030 134 920 214 63.5 | 68.0 58.6 9.4)

4 .028 131 914} .217 62.9 | 67.5 | 57.5| 10.0

i) O40 135 | 924 211 62.3 67.0 57.0 | 10.0

6 O54 151 -939 212 61.8 66.5 56.4 | 10.1]

7 075 163 961 -202 61.8 66.2 86.0 | 10.2

8 .102 .188 .986 .202 63.6 67.5 56.8 | 10.7

9 123 .202 | 30.006 .196 67.2 71.0 61.8 9.2

10 126 .206 O15 191 79.8 75.0 65.5 9.5

ll 107 .190 | 29.998 .192 73.5 77.0 67.6 9.4,

Noon. 075 .162 .959 203 75.1 78.5 69.0 9.5

t O40 .128 .925 203 76.2 79.8 70.5 9.3

2 .016 101 905 196 76.9 $1.0 71.5 9.5

3 O01 095 891 | .204 76.8 79.6 | 72.4 | 7.2

aT 29.997 .Q88 .893 -195 Wf 78.6 71.2 7.4

a) 30.005 099 -900 ~199 74.3 1463 70.0 io

6 O17 116 914 ~202 71.8 75.2 67.6 7.6

7 O32 144 929 -215 | 70.2 73.8 65.5 8.3

8 O48 148 947 Ube 68.9 | - 726 64.0 8.6

9 .060 165 955 210 67.8 71.5 63.3 8.2

10 069 12 -970 | .202 66.7 1.7 | 61.8 | 8.9

1l O64 leg) 054, 215 6a.9 10.5 61.0 9.5

Bia

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometer Means are derived from the observations made at the several

hours during the month.

xevil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutia,

in the month of December 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

a se 43 4 Bed ‘C.o a 8

E > lan P Be |." 8 | Bs

5 Po eae 2 PS ess | Hee

= 2 E : 2 ‘38 | of oeeae-s

ie aap heros ea oem oo | = 2a a

eur: |) aes | ‘2 A aS ete "eb | a ee ee

fe | 8) S| & |) Se | S38 | Soe

Be | 2 ole) ga | Be | ESS) Bee

aa sh = a a fe | aa | ba

a 4 Fe = FO o.3 Sg | a oe eS

S| = A = Ar Ss 5.5 ae S| sos

Co) ) ) Co) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

Mid-

night.| 61.6 4.0 | 58.4 7.2 | 0.496 5.50 1.50 | 0.79

1 61.1 a7 | 58a 6.7 491 AB .38 80

2 60.6 3.6 | 57.4 6.8 480 33 .36 79

3 60.1 3.4 | 57.0 6.5 4.73 ae 28 81

A 59.7 3.2 | 56.8 6.1 470 95 18 82

5 59.2 3.1] 56.4 5.9 464. 18 13 82

6 58.7 3.1 |} 55.9 5.9 456 10 ate 82

7 58.7 3.1] 55.9 5.9 456 .10 ib 82

8 59.9 3.7 | 56.6 7.0 467 21 36 79

9 61.3 5.9 | 56.6 | 10.6 | .467 16 2.19 70

10 |' 63.0" |/'98: 5681140 | > l470 16 | 3.04 63

11 63.7 9.8 | 56.8 | 16.7 470 13 iy 58

Noon 64.0 TEE 1° 56:2 18.9 461 .O1 4.33 54

1 GAO Fee 55.51 207 450 4.89 ARE 51

2 G42 PIT 553 ele | 447 185 5.01 49

3 63.9 | 12.9| 5491] 21.9 4AL 78 05 49

A 63.5 | 12.2 | 55.0] 20.7 442 81> 4.70 51

5 63.9 | 104] 56.6] 17.7 4.67 5.09 03 56

6 64.3 Fee | | 13.7 494, 40 3.05 64

7 63.9 61a seo! | 11.3 504 55 2.50 69

8 63.3 5.6 | 58.8} 10.1 5038 5A 20 72

9 62.6 5.2 | 58.4 9.4 496 48 00 73

10 62.3 4.4} 58.8 7.9 503 56 1.67 es

11 61.8 4.1 | 585 7.4, 498 52 5A 78

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

a i el i i ce al i i ets Be? |

ee fe oe eee ee eee ee ee eee

Meteorological Observations.

xeVill

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office; Calcutta,

in the month of December 1868.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

radiation.

Rain Guage

ft. above

2 Ground.

Max. Solar

“

er Oo

j=)

ce ks

118.5

116.4

119.0

120.5

126.0

119.4

118.7

118.0

117.0

112.5

119.8

120.6

14) 122.0

15} 120.0

131.0

117.0

119.8

19} 117.4

WInp.

} rob) -%

Prevailing w 5 | YS

| Ay >

| lb |Miles

W.S.W.,W&SW.! ... | 52.7

S.W.& W. by N! . 73.2

N.byW.&N.byE.| ... |102.7

N.N. W. 147.4

N.N.W,NNE&N.| ... 1126.4

N. & 8. E. 115.0

K. by 8. & N. 78.2

N..N. W.& 8S. W. 91.0

Soe. Wed BW)... | 62.0

S.&58.S. W. 46.7

K., 8S. E. & S. W. 38.5

S.& S. W. 47.5

S.&58S. 8. W. 60.7

S.S. E. &SS W. 98.5

SE,WNW6& vari-! . 43.2

Lable.

S. S. E. & N. 77.8

N. & W.by N. 114.1

S W.& W by S. 49.7

E byN &variable.

General aspect of the Sky.

Chiefly “i. Slightly foggy at

midnight & at 1 a. M.

Scatd. \i to 5p.mM., clear

afterwards. Foggy at 9& 10 P.M.

Scatd. “i to 1 pv. m., clear to

5 Pp. M., scatd. \i afterwards.

Scatd. \i to 6 p. m. clear af-

terwards.

Clear to 2 p. m., scatd. \i to

6 p. M., clear afterwards.

Clear to 5 a. m., \Wito 9a. mM

1&Witod p.m., “iafterwards.

Scatd. \ito5 a. M., Wi to 8

A. M., “ito 3 Pp. M., clear after-

wards. Slightly foggy from 7 to

ll P. m.

Clear.

ll Pp. w

Clear. Foggy from midnight

to4a.m., at8a.m.,&at9p.m.

Clear. Slightly foggy from 6

to8a.m.&at6&9Pp. mM.

Clear to 11 a. M., scatd. “i to

4p. M., clear afterwards. Foggy

at6&7a.mM., & at 8p. M.

Clear to 9 a. M., scatd. “i to

3P.M., clear afterwards. Foggy

from 3 to 8 A. M.

Clear to 9 a. M., scatd. “i to

5 Pp. M., clouds of different kinds

afterwards. Foggy from 3 to 9

A. M.

Clear to 6 A. M., scatd. \i to

10 a. m., scatd. “ito6P.M.,

clear afterwards. ;

Clear to noon, scatd. “i to 5

Pp. M., clear afterwards. Slightly

fogey ati & 6 a.m. Kat 7&8

P. M.

Chiefly clear.

Clear. Slightly foggy at 10 &

ll P. M.

Clear tol p. m., \Wito 8 Pp. m.,

clear afterwards. Slightly fog-

at 6 & 7 A. M.

Chiefly clear. Foggy at 7 p.m.

Slightly foggy at 8, 9

XxcIx

Jeleoroluyical Observations.

aléstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calculta,

an the month of December 1868,

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

aa |e Winp. |

= Pa} (2) ro

BD 1S) S a) r= oO =

oa ag E| | General aspect of the Sky.

= B/S ya direction. sel/as

nits | ae

o _|Inches lb )Miles

122.0 N.N.E.&W.N.W.) ....| 98.0) Clear to 3 a. m., \Wito 8a. M.,

clear to noon, ~i to 5 Pp. M., clear

afterwards.Slightly foggy at 10

& ll p. mM.

116.0 N. H.& 8S. W. .. | 86.9| Clear. Slightly foggy from 7

to 11 Pp. M.

110.6 |S.8.W.& variable ... | 65.3| Clear. Slightly foggy at mid-

night & 1 a.m. &from7 toll p.m.

116.0 N. by E.& N. E.| ... | 55.0] Clear. Slightly foggy from 8

to 1l p.m.

117.0 NbyE &W. S.W Clear. Slightly foggy at mid-

night & 14. mu. & from 7 to 10

P.M.

115.0 S, by W.,S.&5.W Clear to 7 a. ., scatd. 71 to

5. P. M., clear afterwards.

111.8 E.N.E& N.NE Clear. Slightly foggy from 7

toll P.M.

116.0 N. EE & S.by WwW Clear. Foggy at midnight &

| la. M.

118.5 S.byW.E.S.EXNNW. Clear to 6 4. M., stratoni to

10 aM., clear afterwards.Slight-

ly foggy from 9 to 11 pv. M.

112.0 N.N.W. Clear. Foggy to midnight &

la.m. & from 7 to'1l P. M.

199.5 |WSW &variable. Clear to 5 a, m., scatd. \i to

noon, clear afterwards. Slight-

ly foggy from midnight to 4 4.

mM. & from 8 to 10 Pp. a.

115.0 N.byE.&W.N.W. Clear. Foggy at midnight &

from 8 to 11 Pp. wu.

\1 Cirri, — i Strati,>i Cumuli,\i Cirro-strati, ~ i Cumulo strati,~ i Nimbi

“i Cirro cumuli.

- =e

onl a WO i ni i i i i i i

D te er Mile a

Meteorological Observatons. ¢

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

faken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Caleutta,

om the mouth of December 1868,

Monruty Resvutrs.

Inches,

Mean height of the Barometer for the month.. ... BO.052

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 104. uw. onthe 16th. ... 30.206

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3 Pp. M.onthe 12th. ... 29.891

Ketreme vange of the Barometer during the month Sh .. 0.315

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures... =~ a ov, GO12F

Ditto ditto Min. ditto “ ba «+. 29.993

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month ... -. 0.134

oy)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month — ... ai <a oon

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 Pp. mM. on the 13th. aoe sot ge SEES

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 a. M. on the 24th ... Bes x) 2 ape?

Extreme range of the Femperature during the month te vs 2 2D.

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature ... a3 eee ee von

Ditto — ditto Min. ditto, = ey eG

Mean Wet Bulb Tliermometer for the month... 62.1

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer 6.6

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month 56.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed n mean Dew-point .. 11.9

‘ey

Mean Elastic foree of Vapour for the month ... oe .. OA70

Troy grain.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month = Ap, = O18

Additional Wei ght of Vapour required for complete saturation ... 2.41

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being umity 0.67

Mean [Max. Solar radiationTemperature for the month. ... aa LEe.0

Inches.

Rained no day,—Max. fall of rain during 24 hours 3 ae IN il

Total amount of rain during the month ou: <gN TE

Total amount of rain indicated by the Gange attached to the anemo- we

meter during the month

Prevailing direction of the Wind... ae WL. W., SW. & NN.

eyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of Decr. 1868.

taken at the Surv

40nSs

Monruuy ReEsvutts.

l Observat

Tables shewing the number of days on which at a given hour an

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorologica

th the number of days on

together w

g, it rained.

y particular wind blew,

ticular wind was blowin

which at the same hour, when any par

fo)

Meteorological Observations.

a ee

uo ULB YY

A . Se os oe ae AaAN aMONNA SS

M4q° NT

“UO ULB

; oe TFWM MIOAMMMAANIOAMIANMDMOHODosS

“MA NUN

‘uO ULBY

; . me fame ANNA MMAN mS

Be ee

‘HO ULB YT

A eis eS ie | ese SAIN OANOANNSMOMOMAAN

MN M

“uO ULB

= . aq re _ iS Sack

NEON

“moO UlBY

a en ee ee

: ANAM ANWWMIWUANTAN ce

“uO UleY

. . lo i le | ‘ rete ima

S 4q "MM

‘UO UIBYT

. “A: SAI NN MMA (oo io ANMNA ARS

M'S'M

ee ee ee ee

‘UO UV

"MS WANA ARN ro OD) 1) QI GYD <I SH DO 1D SHO 16

"UO ULB YT

i ae = = aN ON C

“MS's _ 1D 1d FL 1d TI NN

‘UO ULB

‘UO ULBY

"9 AN OAD 1 AMM MAAMAN AS ann AN

‘uO ULB

3 a 7) Se a ood

q Aq ‘g S Ee

ES a Ne le es A ee

‘UO UlBY|

Sane Se OT

mS s] 8 SOON AN aN OM ~

ae te) 8) a ee eee

“UO UIRY| 7,

"a '9 NAA HS ANA NA Fea AeA” AS

“UO UlVY

5s pee a: NMANNAA

“UO UleyYy

“g Aq “aT SSA eS RR NRHN BHD anes

‘UO UIBY]

aT oe ee ee | lan) a re a

, ie FeO REIN

“UO Uley]

E : re es =

xr Aq a N fee Moe ee ee |

| —— ee se eee

“UO UIBAT

c ° . NANA N MD 010 Ha A

a ee

‘Uo Urey A

=e I SS

a ase NX AMMO MON AO AON GS nee

HON

SE ee een

‘UO UIe{T

> ; ine anna AAN TMM AAA AMARA NAN

NN -

aS | ee es eee

“UO Uley

“ap AQ “NT re aA NAN SOD SOD OD AN R SAN AAR RA AS

“moO URI

“AT CO FAI OANRANM HHA N NH HH ooo OOo

oH |

“INOF| Ga TIN SIH OM DARDOH CHAMYMWORARORG

F ae mar

SSS SSS SS SS SSS SSIS

Pole Sir per rte aye

Goh 4B osee borhan “eu

w- Gn 8-44 Smee G ao he bas LL he bid sal he eee ts et el

29) @- Woo re er ener ap ome Hem Obs Be Rosie age

o> Ges Sh Di SL Be dec beh deoh- Bek Falk, dem Soot

26" @-O~ "=e" 1< ws 6 a e~

ure sa

=«

a hee =e n= =

ett pert ee ee rer Pere Pee

ee ea a Pee PT ae bee

ere tt errr rey tlt) Paty Pe

= 9 @ = Se sys sw Shak bt eederies $= e

em b a ee hee a <

7 ~h=enge

rere re Pb bets bi ons 27.

-§ -¢~2~ 43-9

‘j28+0-—ae

teh be igh

Se and ee

—*

40a ROE mes

- ae ped

) 87 @* &e~ 6+ wen” De ee a

624-6 met= ewe en wen eek

ane %

peal

poorer

AS ae yu speed

“tee @ howe

u-mee

Slee)

ene nee

=k sage

err sr at ar

eiere

ere heed

tine wm gn

eos? a 07'S «

Pie Saree

a |

fy &

Are: x eet 4= 2 < bd + 4 :

o-9-876~ } ~ eta = rns ~ 8 hk PEE tel Bled ichd btebes dened bok a

0 Fb HL png hier 4 Pe ae ep tr ey, ph er Oo +8244 — 6 Woe Oe er rt es SA ome Be A8* O eRe e:

ee ee “Wied ed Qe en ey a 67h =e =~ = Hw @—-4~@- RSG sm Yeh ae Ss

1 doe be h-ere oee ~seure =e ane “ =< bbw eee) Sar nee

PTT Serer Peer +B» @~6- _s-8 O86 vem ame

Pyere to tee ee ,

te ke td td te ee ee

St te @eere

ona b= --en ~*

= y= k= ete = = =

‘er age : Sere tage om = 4 aye = bende

4 nigee oo 6= & 99 We Ae ews ew hohe OES

er Ser ae mt oe | = @-a—* Oe Toe eles te et tet ke pee be ~ 1 ene ee

=e eae =a Wee oo arene Mae Perr | ee RAG ~ O48 ON Oo ee B76" Os t-o~ 8" 8-8:

=pogn-e= “2 <> = a* o~ 1 - eee" ort ={" We. 8= Pi

; nee ch ye iadets = a9 Gr e- eer s

ed ooo s-3= ererty Pree er ter eres)

ne Eh Pl} ery ee Peer Eee te

yr eoe_g hs 5 n ace % “72s PAE rere ty

adi d= fee Oe iy Pn = " ba tay or * “

ree rer See $793 9585 "5 aware hen ae a ee eas

$~-a- 4-2-0 626@- ag

- , } Pageant Ga “ ‘

o-46— ‘ : z - - 4 4 . - 3 p rw eons ge

‘ . c 4 ate

ods Qreweawe’ gonna

et ee re ee BRET oe

ames stn ees

et er et ee eh tr

Sade oe tates bo b- Ore es GO BHO Ap OS EO! BRAT POE So Los Rees bas” k

rer ee re Seer Pree bs eee ee ter heey Tere hr Ebr be i oe

AGPb HOS bra dnesdheA nesmelehused Shak reo m thee een ease wage Vane es

pr pdt Pye EE a eek ey ee te ses Pee Chr anes eget,

, — anes he = w= ge 25 FOO Gabewnas “226 108U-4= 6 <8=% ~6 4 re

oun &

« L ee bpp Oe te ee ee ee ee)

eer ey ere ere frees Orr mere! ee et Ld be Oe bene eee

See ere ee are ere Py) rt i te to te ee

eNom 6 BREET WS Wee ka wees Soe 5 oe heen err aer erred os eer Pe rere rere ott t e. Sel be) bt bl et od Se 5 B-en esha

eae a tatetatplitecctecstetdtmreenteetean Peewee Woe ot ree Sree EEN oh pe tet ae pane eT

te bop eete ee aes ae) vitech meee ih b= ~ ae a gene Mele Wogan ee Bem b-O~*- 60> 2-88-90): 9=ees< ss PPh fr}

tT a eee eee ee ee ee eae ee ee et Or eee

eer ee Tae tr ere tort eee ore irs er eer Sere eee

fe. & wen bad- 6 5m. se siastntatete tee int emit

Ep 2ed paasseoesogone a78

PRP Rey ET OE ry oe nee as en em e

s eel ea ae

eiadecesozezes

en wn ee

3 Tesi ra a te ee

4 6 ae IS

2. 88 8 ROR Been OR Rene eee th®

RARE a he ie hee B= BE Boe SONS VOQT Be Hh

“a= Ra Om oe es Snr inee acted cota aed

. o> en Ne eae at On ee

: Pang Pnncgr erate ma aie «a -2~

mare. pie »-

, 2 eee ®

= Me me eo boa Ese

alee

Sores

eacese

=~ aie

ea ee fe er ie ot ee ee ee

rhea eee ees terete sw nb- kbs *.

& Bebe be Harun

eM wy hy a

1 i dete

Pe Ppt

Le 7% Peer Da te tt ee ee Th st) ee ee Oe be ee

Bn eee to nh eek knoe Gt d= 6- Sab a=

= “S74 OS tebe +s ~o~ ee d< OS BO SENS Ht he a 8>

Pr eer re erate tat *

Ade ; - Se ot aw treme e ee et rere mmacerh

+=» 8 o- ; case 8-60 eanng- 828-8 a8 pete

dig h- 8 wey

oy ee ts ctr

=a <s e—ae 9 Am Wms BPS

ED OR ee BR 8S e OR He Fe re ot ge Ne Oe ae = B 9 Rano

b-B2@Ge @« Bee @ dd] 2+ oma, oO

ers ry

*~o°e- eo

a9;

gees:

a unr

A, ee